HomeMy WebLinkAboutWWP273536 (8)�
'
,
'
1
'
,
�
�
1
��
'
1
i
�
!
�
'
�
Award Date:
Awarded to:
Award Amount:
�
cA�-iasa2
Bidding Requirements, City of Renton
Forms, Contract Forms, Conditions of the
Contract, Plans and Specifications
Construction of:
�/estview-lift Station Upgrades
PROJECT NO.
1NW P-27-3536
October 2010
City of Renton
1055 South Grady Way
Renton, WA 98057
Projed Manager_ John Hobson, (425) 430-7279
�
,;���
.:c��y:of - ��l a-.:
� � � " �;8` � `
. �� � :+ + .
S � 5, � ���� 1�
�� C' iT O
. , � • it i' .
r
'
,
1
'
,
,
�
�
�
'
'
,
'
CITY OF RENTON
RENTON, WASHlNGTON
COIVTRACT DOCUMENTS
for the
Westview Lift Station Upgrades
PR0IECT NO.
WWP-27-3536
October 2010
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
CONTRACT FORMS
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
SPECIFICATIONS
PLAIVS
�
�L. �
M1 r�.s�t�...� � ,�. �.,.t't ���,.; T � � :,,.s=s � ,:,�:r. � � �f ;.
�F... �� � '�� � �5=
�'� ". ``�,_r�.,;�.� �� ;«
J
�
J
�
{
�
,
� ADVANCED CONSTRUCTION, INC.
State UBI # 602 273 113
�Fed. ID# 30 0167722
Contractor's # ADVANC1973KE
Washington State Corporation since February 19, 2003
�
Project: Westview Lift Station Upgrades
CONTACT LIST:
Responsible Officer:
�A.J. Smith 4640 Campus Place, Suite 150 Mukilteo WA 98275
425-493-1826 Emerqencv phone number: 425-754-5493
Job Foreman:
�Zane Gardner 4640 Campus Place, Suite 150 Mukilteo WA 98275
425-493-1826 Emerqencv phone number: 425-508-6261
� Bonding Company:
HUB Intemational, Andv Prill (425) 489-4500
�
Sincerely
�
�
' AJ Smit�i,
�
'
r _i.
COPIST�UCTIflN INC.
4640 Campus Place
Suite 150
Mukiiteo, WA 98275
Office: 425-493-1826
Fax: 425-493-1827
WA# ADVANC1973KE
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
,
DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES
REGISTERED AS PROVIDED BY LAW AS
CONST CONT GENERAL
ItEGIST. # EXP. DATE
CCO1 ADVANCI973K.E 5/5/2011
EFPECT] VE DATE S/5/2003
ADVANCED CONSTRUCTION IIvC
4640 CA,'�iPUS PL STE I50
MUKILTEO WA 98275
{ F6>j-05?-�i00 B1971
'.� - ---._�.:.._.,�_���.�,-.�rz
- Detaeh And Ui�pla} Certificate -
�
Business License
An n ual D City of �,,� ��, Expiration Date
, O � 07/31/2011
a � �
� � +��
� o �F�.,��,
' 1055 South Grady Way Renton, WA 98057 (425) 430-6851
Business Location
Issued Date: License #
� 4640 CAMPUS PL #150
MUKILTEO, WA 98275-5310 08/01/2010 BL.031878
Licensee has applied for a City of Renton business
1 license in accordance with Renton Municipal Code
ADVANCED CONSTRUCTION INC (the Code), Title V Business, Chapter 5 Business
4640 CAMPUS PL #150 Licenses. The Licensee agrees to comply with all
� MUKILTEO, WA 98275-5310 requirements of the Code, as �vell as State la�vs and
regulations applicable to the business activity licensed.
Post this License at the place of business.
� -- ---
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
,
�
'
��
�
1
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
,
,
L�
�
CITY OF RENTON
WW P-27-3536
Westview Lift Station Upgrades
CONTRACT DOCUMENT TABLE OF CONTENTS
Summary of Fair Practices Policy
Summary of Americans with Disability Act Policy
Scope of Work
Vicinity Map
Instructions to Bidders
Call for Bids
*Proposal & Combined Affidavit & Certificate Form:
Non-Collusion
Anti-Trust Claims
Minimum Wage Form
*Dept. of Labor and Industies Certificate of Registration
*Bid Bond Form
*Schedule of Prices
❖Bond to the City of Renton
❖Fair Practices Policy Affidavit of Compliance
❖Contract Agreement (Contracts other than Federal - Aid FHWA)
❖City of Renton Insurance Information Form
❖City of Renton Standard Endorsement Form
Prevailing Minimum Hourly Wage Rates
Statement of fntent to Pay Prevailing Wages
Affidavit of Prevailing Wages Paid
Specia) Provisions
Standard Plans
Documents marked as follows must be submitted at the time noted and must be executed by the
Contractor, President and Vice President or Secretary if corporation by-laws permit. All pages must be
signed. In the event another person has been duly authorized to execute contracts, a copy of the
corporation minutes establishing this authority must be attached to the bid document.
* Submit with Bid
❖ Submit at Notice of Award
CITY OF RENTON
Planning/Building/Public Works Department
1055 South Grady Way
Renton, Washington 98057
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
CITY OF RENTON
SUMMARY OF FAIR PRACTICES POLICY
ADOPTED BY RESOLUTION NO. 3229
It is the policy of the City of Renton to promote and provide equal treatment and service to all
citizens and to ensure equal employment opportunity to all persons without regard to race, color,
national. origin, ethnic background, gender, marital status, religion, age or disability, when the City
of Renton can reasonably accommodate the disability, of employees and applicants for
employment and fair,,non-discriminatory treatment to all citizens. All departments of the City of
Renton shall adhere to the foilowing guidelines: �.
(1) EMPLOYMENT PRACTICES - The City of Renton will ensure al) employment related
activities included recruitment, selection, promotion, demotion, training,
retention and separation are conducted in a manner which is based on job-related
criteria which does not discriminate against women, minorities and other
protected classes. Human resources decisions wil) be in accordance with
individual performance, staf#ing requirements, governing civif service rules, and .
labor contract agreements.
� (2) COOPERATION WITH HUMAN RIGHTS ORGANIZATIONS' - The City of Renton will
cooperate fully with a(I organizations and commissions organized to promote fair
practices and equal opportunity in employment.
�
�
�
�
�
L�
,
i
�
�l
I�
(3} AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PLAN - The City of Renton Affirmative Action P(an and Equal
Employment Program will be maintained and administered to facifitate equitable
representation with the City work force and to assure equal employment
opportunity to all. It shall be the responsibility of elected officials, the Mayor, the
Affirmative Action Officer, department administrators, managers, supervisors,
Contract Compliance Offcers and all employees to carry out the policies,
guidelines and corrective measures set forth in the Affirmative Action Plan and
Equal Employment Program.
(4) CONTRACTORS' OBLIGATIONS - Contractors, sub-contractors, consultants and
suppliers conducting business with the City of Renton shall affirm and subscribe to
the Fair Practices and Non-discrimination policies set forth by the law and in the
City's Affirmative Action Plan and Equal Employment Program.
Copies of this policy shall be distributed to all City employees, shall appear in all operatianal
documentation
of the City, incfuding bid calls, and shall be prominently displayed in appropriate city facilities.
CONCUR.RED IN by the City Council of the City of RENTON, Washington, tius 7 ttYiay of October, 1996.
CI'fY OF RENTOIV:
.a,.4.�-�l
iV(ayor
RENTON CTTY COUNCIZ.:
.•�� '
Council Presid�t
Attest:
� \
City Clerl
�
L�
�
�
�
CITY OF RENTOi�t
SUh�A1ARY OF��RIG4NS Ff'ITH DIS�IBLLITIES ACT POLICY
.4DOPTED BYRESOLUTIONNO. :3007 �
e policy of the City of Renton is to promote and afford equal treatrnent and service to all.citizens and to assurc
cmployment opportunity to persons with disabilities, when the City of Renton can reasonabty accommodate thc
�isability. This policy shall be based on the principles of equal employrnent opportwuty, the Americans With
isabilities Act and other applicable guidelu�es as set forth in fedecal, state and local laws. All departments of the City
of Renton shall adhere to the following guidelines:
�
�
�
�
L__..
�
�
�
�
(]) EMPLOYMEi�IT PRACTICES - All activities retating to employment such as
recruitment, selection, promatioq terminatipn and tra.ining shall be conducted in a non-
discriminatory manner. Personnel decisions will be ba�sed on individual performa.nce,
staffing requircments, and in accordance with tho Americans� With Disabilities Act and
other applicab161aws and regulations. � . �
(2) COOPERATTON�. WI`I�-I �iUMAN RIGHTS ORGANIZATI02�IS - The City of
Renton will coopera.te £u1Iy with all or, , nl�ations and commissions organized to
promote f�ir practices and equal opportunity for �persotls with � disabilities in
employment and receipt.of City secvices, activities and programs.
(3) . A.MERICANS WI"I�-i DISA.B1ZiI'IES ACT�POLICY - Tfie.City�of Renton Americans
With Disabilities Act PoIicy will.bc maintained to facilitate equitable representation
within the City work force and to a.ss�re equal employment opportunity and equal
access to City secvices, activities and orograms to all neople with disabilities. It shall
be the responsibiliry and the duty of ail City offcials and employees to cany out the �
policies and guidelines as set forth in this policy
(4) COi1TRACTORS' OBLTGATION = Contractors, subcontractors, consuitan[s and
• suppliers cond'acting {�usiness with�the City of Renton sfiall abide by''the requirements
of the Americans Wi�i.DisabiIities Act and promote a.ccess to servicrs, activities� and
programs� for people with disabilities. . � .
pies of this pplicy sha11 be distri6uted to aIl City employees, shall appear in aIl operational documentation of fhe City,
luding bid calls, and sh�11 be prominently displayed in appropriate City faciiifies.
�1�CUP�RED IN by the Ciry Council of �he City ofRenlon,
�his 4th dayof October
��TY OF RENTON
�� r�,.
�\,^' � ,. � ,. ;�.
`f. \
r Yo� �
, _
� est: � '
=� Clerk
Washrnglon,
199�.
RENTON CITY COUNCIL:
� �'7 ,
-••. /1` /://• , ?/ �
Council President
��
�
LJ
�
�
CITY OF RENTON
WWP-27-3536
1iR/estview Lift Station Upgrades
SCOPE OF WORK
The work involved under the terms of this contract document shall be full and compiete installation of
the facilities, as shown on the plans and as described in the construction specifications, to include but
not be limited to:
The construction of the Westview Lift Station Upgrades project includes demolition of inechanical
� equipment (pumps, valves, piping, and appurtenances} in the existing below-grade wet well, and
demolition of yard piping, sidewalk, and pavement. The Work also consists of a new below-grade valve
vault, mechanical equipment (pumps, valves, piping and appurtenances), yard piping,
� sidewalk/driveway, cabfe trench, and wet well lining, as well as pavement rehabilitation, bypass
pumping, and electrical routing and connections to the existing control panel.
Any contractor connected with this project shall comply with all Federal, State, County, and City codes
and regulations applicable to such work and perform the work in accordance with the plans and
specifications of this contract document. A total of 80 working days wifl be allowed for the completion
of this project from anticipated date of commencement (Notice to Proceed), December 28, 2010.
!
1
t
t
1
�
�
1
1
t
t
i
t
i
1
�
C�
1
�
�;�E�T�TIE��1�T LIF� S�'A�'IQN LTP�R�DES
,
�
1
�
�
�
E�
�
INST'RUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Sealed bids for this proposal will be received by the City of Renton at the office of the Renton City
Clerk, Renton City Hall, until the time and date specified in the Call for Bids.
At this time the bids will be publicly opened and read, after which the bids will be considered and
the award made as early as practicable.
No proposal may be changed or withdrawn after the time set for receiving bids. Proposals shall be
submitted on the forms attached hereto.
2 Any omissions, discrepancies or need for interpretation should be brought, in writing, to the
attention of the Project En;�ineer. Written addenda to clarify questions that arise may then be
issued.
3 The work to be done is shown in the plans and / or specifications_ Quantities are understood to be
� only approximate. Final payment will he based on actual quantities and at the unit price hid. The
City reserves the right to add or to eliminate portions of that work as deemed necessary.
�
�
�
�
�
�
4. Plans may be examined and at the Public Works Department Office. Plans, specifications, addenda,
and the plan holders list for this project are available on-line through Builders Exchange of
Washington, Inc., at http://www_bxwa.com. Bidders shall satisfy themselves as to the local
conditions by inspection of the site_
5.
6.
7.
No oral statements by Owner, Engineer, or other representative of the owner shall, in any way,
modify the contract documents, whether made before or after Iettin� the contract.
The bid price for any item must include the performance of all work necessary for completion of
that item as described in the specifications.
The bid price shall be stated in terms of the units indicated and as to a total amount. In the event of
errors, the unit price bid will govem. Iile�ible fi�ures will invalidate the bid.
The right is reserved to reject any and/or all bids and to waive informalities if it is deemed
advantageous to the City to do sa
8. A certified check or satisfactory bid bond made payable without reservation to the Director of
Finance of the City of Renton in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid shall
accompany each bid proposal. Checks will be returned to unsuccessful bidders immediately
following the decision as to awazd of contract. The check of the successful bidder will be returned
provided he enters into a contract and furnishes a satisfactory perforinance bond coverin� the full
amount of the work within ten days after receipt of notice of intention to award contract. Should he
fail, or refuse to do so, the check shall be forfeited to the City of Renton as liquidated damage for
such failure.
� 9. All bids must be self-e�planatory. No opportunity will be offered for oral explanation except as the
City may request fnrther information on particular points.
� 10. The bidder shail, upon request, fumish information to the City as to his financial and practicai
ability to satisfactorily perform the work.
� 1 l. Payment for this work will be made in Cash Warrants.
�J
�
12. The contractor shall obtain such construction insurance (e_g. fire and extended coverage, worker's
compensarion, public liability, and groperty damage as indicated on forms enclosed under
Attachment A herein and as identified within Specification Section 1-07.18:
i
i
i
�
13. The contractor, prior to the start of construction, shall provide the City of Renton a detailed bar
chart type construction schedule for the project.
14 Before starting work under this contract, the Contractor is required to supply information to the City
of Renton on all chemical hazards Contractor is bringing into the work place and potentially
exposing City of Renton Employees.
15
16.
Payment ofretainage shall be done in accordance with Section 1-09.9(1} "Retainaae.
Basis For Approval
The. construction contract will be awarded by the Ciry of Renton to the lowest, responsible,
� responsive bidder. The bidder shall bid on all bid schedules items of a11 schedules set forth in the
bid forms to be considered responsive for award. The total price of all schedules will be used to
determine ttie successfui low responsive bidder.
�
� 17
�
�
� 18
�
�
�
� 19
�
�
�
Partial bids will not be accepted. The owner reserves the right to award any or all schedules of the
Bid to meet the needs of the City. The intent is to award to only one BIDDER.
Trench Excavation Safety Systems
As required by RCW 39.04_180, on public works projects in which trench excavation will exceed a
depth of four feet, any contract therefor sha11 require adequate safety systems for the trench
excavation that meet the requirements of the Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act, Chapter
49.17 RCW. These requirements shall be included in the Bid Schedule as a separate item. The
costs of trench safety systems shall not be considered as incidental to any other contract item and
any attempt to include the trench safety systems as an incidental cost is prohibited.
Payment of Prevailing Wages
In accordance with Revised Code of Washington Chapters 39.12 and 49.28 as amended or
supplemented herein, there shall be paid to aII laborers, worlanen or mechanics employed on this
cantract the prevailing rate of wage for an hour's work in the same trade or occupation in the area of
work regardless of any contractual relationship which may e�st, or be alleged to exist, between the
CONTRACTOR and any laborers, worlanen, mechanics or subconsultants.
The most recent issue of the prevailing wage rates are included within these specifications under
section titIed "Prevailing Minimum Hourly Wage Rates". The Contractor is Responsible for
obtaining updated issues of the prevailing wage rate forms as they become available during the
duration of the contract. The wage rates shall be included as part af any subcontracts the Contractor
may enter into for work on this project.
Pollu6on Control Requirements
Work under this contract shall meet all local, state and federal requirements for the prevention of
environmental pollution and the preservation of public natural resources. The CONTRACTOR
shall conduct the work in accordance with all appIicable pollution control laws. The
CONTRACTOR shaIl comply with and be liable for all penalties, damages, and violations under
Chapter 90.48 RCW, in performance of the work. The CONTRACTOR shall also comply with
Article 4 in the Puget Sound Air Pollution Control Agency Regularion IlI regarding removal and
encapsulation of asbestos materials.
�
� 20. Standard Spec�cations
i
�
All work under this contract sha11 be performed in accordance with the following standard
specifications except as may be exempted or modified by the City of Renton Supplemental
Specifications; Special Provisions other sections of these contract documents. These standard
specifications are hereby made a part of this contract and shall control and guide all activities within
this project whether referred to directly, parab aph by paragraph, or not.
L WSDOT/APWA "2008 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municigal
� Construction" and "Division 1 APWA Supplement" hereinafter referred to by the abbreviated
title "Standazd Specifications."
A. Any reference to "State," "State of Washington," "Department of Transportation,"
� "WSDOT," or any combination thereof in the WSDOT/APWA standards shall be
rnodified to read "City of Renton," unless specifically referring to a standard
specification or test method.
� B. All references to measurement and payment in the WSDOT/APWA standards shall be
detected and the measurement and payment provisions of Section 1-09.14, Measurement
and Payinent (added herein) sha11 govem.
�
�
1
�
�
�
�
�
�
i
I
�
21. A geotechnical engineering report has not been completed for this project. The Bidders shall
familiarize themselves adequately with the project site and e�cisting subs�face condition as needed
to submit their bid. Upon approval of the City, the Bidder may make such subsurface explorations
and investigations as they see fit. The Bidder shall be responsible for protection of all existing
facilities, urilities and other buried or surface unprovements and shall restore the site to the
satisfaction of the City.
22 Bidder's Checklist
❑ It is the responsibility of each bidder to ascertain if all the documents listed on the attached
index are included in their copy of the bid specifications_ If documents are missing, it is the
sole responsibitity of the bidder to contact the City of Renton to abtain the missing documents
prior to bid opening time.
❑ Have you submitted, as part of your bid, all documents marked in the index as "Submit With
Bid"?
❑ Has bid bond or certified check been enclosed?
❑ Is the amount of the bid guaranty at least 5 percent of the total amount of bid including sales
tax?
■
■
■
■
■
Has the proposal been signed?
Have you bid an ALL ITEMS and ALL SCHEDLTLES?
Have you submitted the Subcontractors List (If required)
Have you reviewed the Prevailing Wage Requirements?
Have you certified receipt of addenda, if any?
�
�
�
�
CAG-10-142
CITY OF RENTON
CALL FOR BIDS
Westview Lift Station Upgrades
1N1NP-27-3536
Sealed bids will be received until 2:30 p.m., Tuesday, November 16, 2010 at the City Clerk's
� office, 7t'' floor, and will be opened and publicly read in the 6th floor Conference Room #621,
Renton City Hall, 1055 South Grady Way for the Westview Lift Station Upgrades project.
The work to be performed within 80 working days from the date of commencement under this
contract shall include, but not be limited to:
�
�
�
L_J
�
�
�
i
�
The construction of the Westview Lift Station Upgrades project includes demolition of
mechanical equipment (pumps, valves, piping, and appurtenances) in the existing below-grade
wet well, and demolition of yard piping, sidewalk, and pavement. The Work also consists of a
new below-grade valve vault, mechanical equipment (pumps, valves, piping and
appurtenances), yard piping, sidewalk/driveway, cable trench, and wet well lining, as well as
pavement rehabilitation, bypass pumping, and electrical routing and connections to the existing
control panel.
The City reserves the right to reject any and/or all bids and to waive any and/or all informalities.
Bid documents will be available November 2, 2010. Plans, specifications, addenda, and the plan
holders list for this project are available on-line through Builders Exchange of Washington, Inc.,
at http://www.bxwa.com. Click on "bxwa.com"; "Posted Projects", "Pubiic Works", "City of
Renton" ,"Projects Bidding". (Note: Bidders are encouraged to "Register as a Bidder," in order
to receive automatic email notification of future addenda and to be placed on the "Bidders
Li st." )
If a bidder has any questions regarding the project, please contact the Project Manager, John
Hobson at 1055 South Grady Way, Renton, WA 98057 or (425) 430-7279.
A certified check or bid bond in the amount of five percent (5%) of the total of each bid must
accompany each bid.
The City's Fair Practices, Non-Discrimination, and Americans with Disability Act Policies shall
apply.
`����• [.VGZ�-h"�
Bonnie I. Walton, City. Clerk
Pubfished:
Daily Journal of Commerce November 2, 2010
Daily Journal of Commerce November 9, 2010
��
,
�
�
�
�
CITY OF RENTON
Westview Lift Station Upg�-acies
WWP-27-3536
Proposal & Combined Affidavit & Certificate for�
TO THE CITY OF RENTON
RENTON, WASHINGTON
Ladies and/or Gendemen:
� The undersigned hereby certify that the bidder has examined the site of the proposed work and have read
and thoroughly understand the plans, specifications and contract goveming the work embraced in this
improvement, and the method by which payment will be made for said work, and hereby propose to
� undertake and complete the work embraced in this improvement, or as much thereof as can be completed
with the money available, in accordance with the said plans, specifications and contract and the following
scheduIe of rates and prices:
�
�
�
�
The iuidersi�ned certifies and agrees to the following provisions:
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
Being duly sworn, deposes and says, that he is the identical person who submitted the foregoing proposal
or bid, and that such bid is genuine and not sham or collusive or made in the interest or on behalf of any
person not therein named, and further, that the deponent has not directly induced or solicited any other
Bidder on the foregoing work or equipment to put in a sham bid, or any other person or corporation to
refrain from bidding, and that deponent has not in any manner sought by collusion to secure to himself or
to any other person any advantage over other Bidder or Bidders.
/:\►1�7
CERTIFICATION RE: ASSIGNIv�NT OF
ANTI-TRUST CLAIMS TO PURCHASER
�
j
,
�
Vendor and purchaser recognize that in actual economic practice overcharges resulting from anti-trust
violations are in fact usually bome by the purchaser. Therefore, vendor hereby assigns to purchaser any
and all claims for such over-charges as to goods and materials purchased in connection r��ith this arder or
contract, except as to overcharges resulting from anti-trust violations commencin� after the date of the
bid, quotation, or other event establishing the price under this order or contract. In addition, vendor
warrants and represents that such of his suppliers and subcantractors shall assign any and all such claims
to purchaser, subject to the aforementioned exception_
. �
M[�JIMUM WAGE AFFIDAVIT FORM
I, the undersi�ned, having been duly swom, deposed, say and certify that in connection with the
performance of the work of this project, I will pay each classification of laborer, worlanan, or mechanic
employed in the performance of such work; not less than the prevailing rate of wage or not less than the
minimum rate of wages as specified in the grincipal contract_ that. I have read the above and foregoing
�
� statement and certificate, know the contents thereof and the substance as set forth therein is true to my
knowledge and belief.
�
FOR: PROPOSAL, NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT, ASSIGNMENT OF ANTI-TRUST CLAIMS
TO PURCHASER AND MINIMUM WAGE AFFIDAVIT
`,��titsRs��
Name of Bidder's Firm `��O G : v'�f
� ���LQ�'PQ•,� `ir��
R � O;
Printed Name !� _ � Z�. j•••; Z-
=>� ti� .�=
Signature % � ' ' Z �
�
� ��'�� �'•.SH G� �?'� . �i`:
Address: , L �� � �`c:cY ,1'� ' ', ���� \ `�
G �
�MVI�\���,� � �,'�;i�}` � ��-7 ��►t a � � � �t��
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
Names of Members of
����
OR
Name of President of Corporarion
Name of Secretary of Corporation
Corporation Organized under the laws of
With Main Office in State of Washington at
Subscribed and sworn to before me on this
��
+� � Si'VlE�W1
L,►�1d�, C. -l�l.iEk 11�?�.-}
�L Q5Y1� N C��Ol� � t ��.
J
4lD�IQ �qVVIqLI��IQc.� StAi�I�U I�.l.i[:��p�l��k�1��1.�'
,
day of �li � , 201C%
� �.'-_t✓ YR..
r:�z:��y �_ :�,
��e �� a�� :. ,.,,fp�.� ��
3 f �'�`" kn's3_�4'L -
Lfk��A :�. �� � T:'�?�'��� ' �.,
� f+��' �Ci{�:;�t��`.s::.�.: ��.;-;� �:�_.�
� Sd�ts-�!r`�,'= � � �
�
Notary Public in a�d for the State of�Washington
Notary (Print) .�./.(%�/r- (r ,�G�.L�/.%T�z-%'
My appointment expires: � G v!� �
. .
ge 13
vided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com - Always Verify Scale
�
�
�
�
�
�
Department of Labor and Industries
Certi�cate of Registration
Name an Registration: �c�� i��1C.Qr� C�.n�R��tLtlC�ki �i t� 4n1C .
Registration Number:
Expiration Date:
� i��i �1J C Z�1� 31C.��
[�S-0� ZC11
Note: A copy of the certificate will be requested as part of contract execution when project is awarded.
�
�
�
�
�ge 14 Department of Labor and Industries Certificate of Registration
vided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com - Always Verify Scale
�
�
BID BOND FORM
iHerewith find deposit in the form of a certified check, cashler's check, cash, or bid bond in the amount of
" $ whieh amount Is not less than five percent of the total bid.
�
� Know All Men 6y These Presents:
Signature
That We Advanced Construction, Inc.
,� � as � P�incipal, and
First National Insurance Company of America as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Renton, as
, Obligee, in the penal sum of Five Percent (5%) of Total Amount Bid Dollars, for the payment of
which the P�lncipal and the Surety hind themselves, thelr heirs, executors, administrators, successors
i and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents.
— The condition of this obligation is such that if the Obligee shall make any award to the Principal for
Westview Lift Station Upgrades accotding to the terms of the proposal or bid made by the Principal
�� the�efore, and the Principal shall duly make and enter into a contract wfth the Obligee In accordance
._ with the terms of said praposal or bid and awa�d and shall glve bond for the faithfu) perforrnance
thereof, with Surety or Sureties approved by the Obligee; ar if the Principal shall, in case of failure to do
� so, pay and forfelt to the Obligee the penal amou�t of tlie deposit specified in the call for bids, then this
obligation shall he null and void; otherurise it shall be and remain in full force and effect and the Surety
shall forthwith pay and forfeit to the Obligee, as penalty and (iquidated damages, the amount of th;``���1�111I����
6ond.
� ``�'O' GONS'T�,r�`'
�� G • ••.
``.` ,:' CORo� ' . �-'..'
+ Q' . �',c ,��': `-
16th November
� SIGNED, SEALED AND DATED THIS DAY OF Zp ?o '�' � �,-� S�/, '` ':�
A vance ons ruc ion, nc. ,� `Q L�� "'<� % ��.
� �Cfllkl'1 � 2C1 . r� ,.� � :9s 3 ° , ;. . .
' , " �� 'y�!'�GTO`•`.•' ��' �
� Princi�al • i c�,, ••° • � ��
Fir � N ional Insurance Company of America �fj ,�` � f f, i 1 i,``�ti\``
���������_ � � _.
,� SU�ety Theresa A. Lamb, Attorney-in-Fact
�
�
Received return of deposit in the sum of
�
Page 15 Bid Bond Form
�Provided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see wwvd.bxwa.com - Always Verify Scale
�
- � —
�
�.
�
�
��
�
�.
�
�
POWER
OFATTORNEY
KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS:
No. 7351
That FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, a Washington corporation, does hereby appoint
********************BRANDON K. BUSH; STEVEN K. BUSH; M. J. COTTON; JIM W. DOYLE; CHAD M. EPPLE; JULIE ,
M. GLOVER; DARLENE JAKIELSKI; JIM 5. KUICH; THERESA A. LAMB; BRETT N. MEIER; MICHAEL A. MURPHY;
NANCY J. OSBORNE; ANDY D. PRILL; 5. M. SCOTT; STEVE WAGNER; Bothell, Washington*******************�*****
its true and lawful attorney(s)-in-fact, with full authority to execute on behalf of the company fidelity and surery bonds or
undertakings and other documents of a similar character issued by the company in the course of its business, and to bind FIRST
NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA thereby as fully as if such instruments had been duly executed by its regularly
elected officers at its home o�ce.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA has executed and attested these presents
this 20th day of April , 2010
�x�' �r�yj i ���. � �� .
.�,�,
Dexter R. Legg, Secretary Timothy A. Mikolajewski, Vice President
CERTIFICATE
Extract from the By-Laws of FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA:
"Article V, Section 13. - FIDELITY AND SURETY BONDS ... the President, any Vice President, the Secretary, and any Assistant
Vice President appointed for that purpose by the officer in charge of surety operations, shall each have authority to appoint
individuais as attorneys-in-fact or under other appropriate titles with authority to execute on behalf of the company fidelity and surety
bonds and other documents of similar character issued by the company in the course of its business... On any instrument making or
evidencing such appointment, the signatures may be a�xed by facsimile. On any instrument conferring such authority or on any bond or
undertaking of the company, the seal, or a facsimile thereof, may be impressed or affixed or in any other manner reproduced;
provided, however, that the seal shall not be necessary to the validity of any such instrument or undertaking."
Extract from a Resolution of the Board of Directors of
FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA adopted July 28, 1970.
"On any certificate executed by the Secretary or an assistant secretary of the Company setting out,
(i) The provisions of Article V, Section 13 of the By-Laws, and
(ii) A copy of the power-of-attorney appointment, executed pursuant thereto, and
(iii) Certifying that said power-of-attorney appoiritment is in full force and effect,
the signature of the certifying officer may be by facsimile, and the seal of the Company may be a facsimile thereof."
I, Dexter R. Legg , Secretary of FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, do hereby certify that the
foregoing extracts of the By-Laws and of a Resolution of the Board of Directors of this corporation, and of a Power of Attorney
issued pursuant thereto, are true and correct, and that both the By-Laws, the Resolution and the Power of Attorney are still in full force
and effect.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the facsimile seai of said corporation
this ��' �/1 day of ���)ZR��f ��� , c�-Q � �
SEAL
�.,�192a��
S-1049/DF 3/09 \* �
1`��r �`��`1
fi
Dexter R. Legg, Secretary
WEB PDF
��
CITY OF RENTON
WWP•27-3536
Westview Lift Station Upgrades
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
(Note: The bid prfce shall be stated, fn ftgures only, (n terms of the units fndicated and as to a total amount. In the event of errors or where
confllct occurs, the unft prfce bfd wfll govern. Illegfble flgures wfil (nvalfdate the bfd.j
SEE SECTION 1-09.14 OF THE SPEGAL PROVISlONS FOR INFORMATION ON BID iTEMS.
ITEM APPROX. UNIT PRICE TOTAL AMOUNT
NO. qUANTITY ITEM Dollars Cts. Dollars Cts.
1 1 Trench and Excavation
Lump Sum Safety Systems
$ � �= G �
per Lump Sum
S 2
2 1 Westview Lift Station
Lump Sum Upgrades
Subtotal
9.5� 5ales Tax
Total Schedule
S `� bo�
per Lump Sum
$ �'�3�E�t��
S � �"�J, CG
�
S iU1 �35.�C�
�e 16 Schedule of Prices
_vided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com - Always Verify Scale
!�
_1_ _
BOND TO THE CITY OF RENTON
Bond No. 69S301497
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:.
That we, the undersigned Advanced Construction, Inc.
as principal, and First National Insurance Company °�o�tji�� organized and existin�
under the laws of the State of Washington as a surety corporation, and qualified
under the laws of the State of Washington to become surety upon bonds of contractors with municipal
corporations, as surety.are jointly and severally held and firmly bound to the City of Renton in the
penal sum of $ i n i for the payment of which sum on demand we bind ourselves and our
successors, heirs, a ministrators or person representatives, as the case may be.
*One Hundred One Thousand Eight Hundred Thirty-Five Dollars and No/100
This obli�ation is entered into in pursuance of the statutes of the State of Washington, the Ordinance
of the City of Renton.
Dated atMukilteo , Washinaton, this day of , 201
Nevertheless, the conditions of the above obli�ation are such that:
W�HEREAS, under and pursuant to Public Works Construction Contract CAG-10-142 providin� for
construction of Wesri�iew Lift Station Uparades,
(project name)
the principal is required to furnish a bond for the faithful performance of the contract; and
WT�REAS, the principal has accepted, or is about to accept, the contract, and undertake to perform
the work therein provided for in the manner and ��ithin the time set forth;
NOW, THEREFORE, if the principal shall faithfully perforn� all of the provisions of said contract in
the manner and within the time therein set forth, or within such extensions of time as may be �ranted
under said contract, and shall pay al] laborers, mechanics, subcontractors and materialmen, and all
persons who shall supply said principal or subcontractors v,�ith provisions and supplies for the
carrying on of said work, and shall hold said City of Renton harmless from any loss or damage
occasioned to any person or properly by reason of any carelessness or neQligence on the part of said
principal, or any subcontractor in the performance of said work, and shall indemnify and hold the City
of Renton harniless from any damage or expense by reason of failure of performance as specified in
the contract or from defects appearing or developing in the material or workmanship provided or
performed under the contract within a period of one year after its acceptance tl�ereof by the City of
Renton, then and in that event this obligation shall be void; but otherwise it shall be and remain in full
force and effect. ````���E��?������'
�� pN S T�� ,�
Advanced Constructio�, I� G•'"��� ''••,Cj�°�i First National Insurance Company
—�--.' ' �� .-
Principal �;, � ` U.�LpRPORqTF•;.p � Surety of America �
��. Z . • Z � " �/�—'
n ,
/^
� s ' SEAL � z �. � ,:���,^��?% ,� � � �, �
Sianature � �•'•.�t ?:'.n: Sianature
� �� 6"• '•:�SNING�� � �
����,� 'l���i�4,�0��`�����`` Theresa A. Lamb, Attorney—in—Fact
Title Title
H:�File Sys\WWP - WasteVJater\�'V,7'-27-3�36 Wesri�iew Lifr Station Up�rades�BlD INFO�BOND Westview Lift Station Up�rades.DOC
�J
�
r
�
-• �i.,I��.'�'��
�L.� �� �:� 1>
KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS:
P�WER First National Insurance Company oT America
1007 4th Avenue
OF ATTORNEY suite ��oo
Seattle, WA 98154
No. 7351
That FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, a Washington corporation, does hereby appoint
************STEVEN K. BUSH; BRANDON K. BUSH; M.J. COTTON; JIM W. DOYLE; CHAD M. EPPLE; JULIE M.
GLOVER; DARLENE JAKIELSKI; JIM S. KUICH; THERESA A. LAMB; MICHAEL A. MURPHY; NANCY J. OSBORNE;
ANDY D. PRILL; S.M. SCOTT; STEVE WAGNER; Bothell, Washington***************************************
its true and lawful attorney(s)-in-fact, with full authority to execute on behalf of the company fidelity and surety bonds or
undertakings and other documents of a similar character issued by the company in the course of its business, and to bind FIRST
NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA thereby as fully as if such instruments had been duly executed by its regularly
elected officers at its home office.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA has executed and attested these presents
�
�� ����
Extract frcm a P.esolu:ion of the Board of Directors of
FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA adopted July 28, 1970.
day of MarCh
;��,�5��-.u.�.� �
�Dexter R. Legg, Secretary Timothy A: Mikolajewski, Vice President
. CERTIFICATE
Extract from the By-Laws of FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA:
2009
' "Article V, Section 13. - FIDELITY AND SURETY BONDS ... the President, any Vice President, the Secretary, and any Assistant
Vice President appointed For that purpose by the officer in charge of surety operations, shall each have authority to appoint
' individuals as attorneys-in-fact or under other appropriate titles with authority to execute on behalf of the company fidelity and surety
bonds and other do�uments of similar character issued by the company in the course of its business... On any instrument making or
� evidencing such appointment, the signatur=s may be affxed by Facsimile. On any instrument conferring such authority or on any bond or
undeRaking of the company, the seal, or a facsimile thereof, may be impressed or affixed or in any other manner reproduced;
provided, however, that the seal shall not be necessary to the validity of any such instrument or undertaking."
�
�,
�
�
�
"On any certificate exe�uted by the Secretary or an assistant secretary of the Company setting out,
(i) The provisions of Article V, Section 13 of the By-Laws, and
(ii) A copy of the power-of-attorney appointment, executed pursuant thereto, and
(iii) Certifying that said power-of-attorney appointment is in full force and effect,
the signature of the certifying officer may be by facsimile, and the seal of the Company may be a facsimile thereof."
I, Dexter R. Legg , Secretary of FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, do hereby certify that the
foregoing extracts of the By-Laws and of a ReSolution of the Board of Directors of this corporation, and of a Power of Attorney
issued pursuant thereto, are true and �orrect, and that both the By-Laws, the Resolution and the Power of Attorney are still in fuli force
and effect.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and afrixed the facsimile seal of saio corporation
this Z1 st
tnis 2n �� day cf I/�,�F'.�VI �4'.l� �C110
SEAL
�,,� i s 2 a�,;
5-1049IDF 3/D9 \• t
�� �`�7
Dexter R. Legg, Secretary
WEB PDF
��
,�. �
� � 1�Y �
�� �
� �
�'�O
�
CITY OF RENTON
FAIR PRACTICES POLICY
AFFIDAVIT OF COMPLIANCE
�1(j��(���� L01��t l,lCtiOt�1 �AIC � hereby confirms and dedares that
, .
( Name of contractor/
It is the policy of �;��,�Q�('.�(� ��ij{IZ.L�(�'iU{�; �1�C, to offer equal
� � %}afT12 Of COfltfdCtQf�SLihmnt�yrtnr/rnncultant� .
opportunity to al! qualified employees and applicants for emp_loyment without
regard to the race, creed, color, sex, national origin, age, disability or veteran status.
�
�
�
Il. �C�1,14i11C�k'.� [.[LS�{211C �Ci1.� 11�1C complies with all applicable
( Name of contractor/
federal, state and local laws governing non-discrimination in employment.
i�
When applicabfe, _�U��!'ICPI:i �'C1'l��p Ck���ihi, )Ai(' wilf seek out and
( Name of contractor/ t)
negotiate with minority and women contractors for the award of subcontracts.
!�.) � t1ii r1'1
Print Agent/Representative's Name
��,QSif.���+
Print Agent/Repres ntative's Title
%
Agent/Rep'resentative's Signature
�
�
r� �� � �
Date Signed
Instructions: This document MUST be campleted by each cont�actor, subcontractor and consultant.
� Include or attach this document(s) with the contract.
�
�
�
�
�
�
:�
CONTRACTS OTHER TI-�AN FEDERAL-AID FHWA
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this day of , . by and
between THE CITY OF RENTON, Washington, a municipal corporation of the State of
Washington, hereinafter referred to as "CITY" and Advanced C�nstrt�ction, IC1C �
hereinafter referred to as "CONTRACTOR."
WITNES SETH:
1) The Contractor shall within the time stipulated, (to-wit: within Eighty (80) working days
from date of commencement hereof as required by the Contract, of which this ab eement is
a component part) perform all the work and services required to be performed, and provide
and furnish all of the labor, materials, appliances, machines, tools, equipment, utility and
transportation services necessary to perform the Contract, and shall complete the
construction and installation work in a workmanlike manner, in connection with the City's
Project (identified as No. CAG-10-142 for improvement by construction and installation of:
Westview Lift Station Up�rades.
Work as described in "Scope of Work" included herein.
�
�
�
�
�,
�
�
All the foregoing shall be timely performed, furnished, constructed, installed and completed
in strict conformity wifh the plans and specifications, including any and all addenda issued
by the City and all other documents hereinafter enumerated, and in full compliance with all
applicable codes, ordinances and regulations of the City of Renton and any other
governmental authority having jurisdiction thereover. It is further ab eed and stipulated that
all of said labor, materials, appliances, machines, tools, equipment and services shall be
furnished and the construction installation performed and completed to the satisfaction and
the approval of the City's Public Works Director as being in such conformity with the plans,
specifications and all requirements of or arising,under the Contract. The Contractor agrees
to use recycled materials whenever practicable.
2) The aforesaid Contract, entered into by the acceptance of the Contractor's bid and signing of
this agreement, consists of the following documents, all of which are component parts of
said Contract and as fully a part.thereof as if herein set out in full, and if not attached, as if
hereto attached.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
g
h)
i)
This Aa eement
Instruction to Bidders
Bid Proposal
Specifications
Maps and Plans
Bid
Advertisement for Bids
Special Provisions, if any
Technical Specifications, if any
1 C1-2t)�9
�
1
�
�
�
�
��
3) If the Contractor refuses or fails to prosecute the work or any part thereof, with such
diligence as will insure its completion within the time specified in this Contract, or any
extension in writing thereof, or fails to complete said work with such time, or if the
Contractor shall be adjudged a bankrupt, or if he should make a general assignment for the
benefit of his creditors, or if a receiyer shall be appointed on account of the Contractor's
insolvency, or if he or any of his subcontractors should violate any of the provisions of this
Contract, the City may then serve written notice upon him and his surety of its intention to
terminate the Contract, and unless within ten (10) days after the serving of such notice, such
violation or non-compliance of any provision of the Contract shall cease and satisfactory
arrangement for the correction thereof be made, this Contract, shall, upon the expiration of
said ten (10) day period, cease and terminate in every respect. In the event of any such
termination, the City shall immediately serve written notice thereof upon the surety and the
Contractor and the surety shall have the right to take over and perform the Contract,
provided, however, that if the surety within fifteen (15) days after the serving upon it of
such notice of termination does not perform the Contract or does not commence
performance thereof, the City itself may take over the work under the Contract and
prosecute the same to completion by Contract or by any other method it may deem
advisable, for the account and at the expense of the Contractor, and his surety shall be liable
to the City far any excess cost or other damages occasioned the City thereby. In such event,
the City, if it so elects, may, without liability for so doing, take possessiori of and utilize in
completing said Contract such materials, machinery, appliances, equipment, plants and
other properties belonging to the Contractor as may be on site of the project and useful
therein.
4) The foregoing provisions are in addition to and not in limitation of any other rights or
�, remedies available to the City.
,��
�
�
'
�
5) Contractor agrees and covenants to hold and save the City, its officers, agents,
representatives and employees harmless and to promptly indemnify same from and against
any and all claims, actions, damages, liability of every type and nature including all costs
and legal e�penses incurred by reason of any work arising under or in connection with the
Contract to be performed hereunder, including loss of life, personal injury and/or damage to
property arising from or out of any occunence, omission or activity upon, on or about the
premises worked upon or in any way relating to this Contract. This hold harmless and
indemnification provision shall likewise apply for or on account of any patented_ or
unpatented invention, process, article or appliance manufactured for use in the performance
of the Contract, including its use by the City, unless otherwise specifically provided for in
this Contract.
The Contractor a�rees to name the City as an additional insured on a noncontributory
primary basis. In the event the City shall, without fault on its part, be made a party to any
litigation commenced by or against Contractor, then Contractor shall proceed and hold the
City harmless and he shall pay all costs, expenses and reasonable attorney's fees incurred or
paid by the City in connection with such litigation. Furthermore, Contractor a�rees to pay
all costs, expenses and reasonable attorney's fees that may be incurred or paid by City in the
enforcement of any of the covenants, provisions and agreements hereunder,
Nothing herein shall require the Contractor to indemnify the City aaainst and hold harmless
the City, from claims, demands or suits based solely upon the conduct of the City, its
officers or employees and provided further that if claims or suits are caused by or result
from the concurrent negligence of (a) the Contractor's agents or employees and (b) the City,
2 Cl-?009
�
�
�'
�
�
�
i
�
�
��
�
�
'
,
its agents, o�cers and employees, and involves those actions covered by RCW 4.24.115,
this indemnity provision with respect to claims or suits based upon such concunent
negligence shall be valid and enforceable only to the extent of the Contractor's negligence
or the negligence of the Contractor's agents or employees.
Should a court of competent jurisdiction determine that this agreement is subject to RCW
4.24.115, then, in the event of liability for damages arising out of bodily injury to persons or
damages to properly caused by or resulting from the concurrent negligence of the contractor
and the city, its o�cers, officials, employees and volunteers, the contractor's liability
hereunder shall be only to the eatent of the contractor's negligence. It is further specifically
and expressly understood that the indemnification provided herein constitute the
contractor's waiver of immunity under the Industrial Insurance Act, Title 51 RCW, solely
for the purposes of this indemnification. This waiver has been mutually negotiated by the
parties. The provisions of this section shall survive the expiration or termination of this
agreement.
6) Any notice from one party to the other party under the Contract shall be in writing and shall
be dated and sib ed by the party giving such notice or by its duly authorized representative
of such party. Any such notice as heretofore specified shall be given by personal delivery
tHereof or by depositing same in the United States mail, postage prepaid, certified or
registered mail.
7) The Contractor shall commence performance of the Contract no later than 10 calendar days
after Contract final execution, and shall complete the full performance of the Contract not
later than Eighty (80) working days from the date of commencement. For each and every
working day of delay after the established day of completion, it is hereby stipulated and
agreed that the damages to the Ciiy occasioned by said delay will be the sum of per Section
1-08.9 of Standard Specifications as liquidated damages (and not as a penalty) for each such
day, which shall be paid by the Contractor to the City.
8) Neither the final certificate of payment not any provision in the Contract nor partial or
entire use of any installation provided for by this Contract shall relieve the Contractor of
liability in respect to any warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship.
The Contractor shall be under the duty to remedy any defects in the work and pay for any
damage to other work resulting therefrom which shall appear within the period of one (1)
year from the date of final acceptance of the work, unless a longer period is specified. The
City will give notice of observed defects as heretofore specified with reasonable promptness
after discovery thereof, and Contractor shall be obligated to take immediate steps to correct
and remedy any such defect, fault or breach at the sole cost and expense of Contractor.
Defective or Unauthorized Work. The City reserves its right to withhold payment from
Contractor for any defective or unauthorized work. Defective or unauthorized work
includes, without limitation: work and materials that do not conform to the requirements of
this Agreement; and extra work and materials furnished without the City's written approval.
If Contractor is unable, for any reason, to satisfactorily complete any portion of the work,
the City may complete the work by contract or otherwise, and Contractor shall be liable to
the City for any additional costs incurred by the City. "Additional costs" shall mean all
reasonable costs, including legal costs and attorney fees, incurred by the City beyond the
maximum Contract price specified above. The City further reserves its right to deduct the
cost to complete the Contract work, including any Additional Costs, from any and all
amounts due or to become due the Contractor.
C'1-?009
�
�
�
�
,�
�
�
�
�,
,
�
The Contractor agrees the above one year limitation shall not exclude or diminish the City's
rights under any law to obtain damages and recover costs resulting from defective and
unauthorized work discovered after one year but prior to the expiration of the legal time
period set forth in RCW 4.16.040 limiting actions upon a contract in writing, or liabiliTy
expressed or implied arising out of a written agreement.
Final Payment: Waiver of Claims. THE CONTRACTOR'S .ACCEPTANCE OF FINAL
PAYMENT (EXCLUDNG WITHHELD RETAINAGE) SHALL CONSTITUTE A
WAIVER OF CONTRACTOR'S CLAIMS, EXCEPT THOSE PREVIOUSLY AND
PROPERLY MADE AND IDENTIFIED BY CONTRACTOR AS UNSETTLED AT THE
TIIv1E FINAL PAYMENT IS NIADE AND ACCEPTED.
9) The Contractor and each subcontractor, if any, shall submit to the City such schedules of
quantities and costs, progress schedules, payrolls, reports, estimates, records and
miscellaneous data pertaining to the Contract as may be requested by the City from time to
time. �
10) The Contractor shall furnish a surety bond or bonds as security for the faithful performance
of the Contract, including the payment of all persons and firms performing labor on the
construction project under this Contract or furnishing materials in connection with this
Contract; said bond to be in the full amount of the Contract price as specified in Paragraph
12. The surety or sureties on such bond or bonds must be duly licensed as a surety in the
State of Washina on.
11) The Contractor shall verify, when submittin; first payment invoice and annually thereafter,
possession of a current City of Renton business license while conducting work for the City.
The Contractor shall require, and provide verification upon request, that all subcontractors
participating in a City project possess a current City of Renton business license. The
Contractor shall provide, and obtain City approval of, a traffic control plan prior to
conducting work in City right-of-way.
12) The total amount of this contract is the sum of $101,835.00
numbers
One Hundred One Thousand Eight Hundred Thirty Five and �/100
wrinrn words
including Washington State Sales Tax. Payments will be made to Contractor as specified in
the "Special Provisions" of this Contract.
li) INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR. The parties intend that an Independent. Contractor-
Employer Relationship will be created by this Agreement and that the Contractor has the
ability to control and direct the performance and details of its work, the City being
interested only in the results obtained under this Agreement.
14) LIMITATION OF ACTIONS. CONTRACTOR MUST, IN ANY EVENT, FILE ANY
LAWSUIT ARISING FROM OR CONNECTED WITH THIS AGREEMENT WITHII�T
120 CALENDAR DAYS FROM THE DATE THE CONTRACT WORK IS COMPLETE
OR CONTR.ACTOR'S ABILITY TO F1LE THAT CLAIM OR SUIT SHALL BE
FOREVER BARRED. THIS SECTION FURTHER LIMITS ANY APPLICABLE
STATUTORY LIMITATIONS PERIOD.
15) Non-Waiver of Breach. The failure of the City to insist upon strict performance of any of
the covenants and agreements contained in this Agreement, or to exercise any option
4 Cl-?009
�
,�
�
L�
�
�
�
�
u
�
�
�
�
�I
�
�
conferred by this Agreement in one or more instances shall not be construed to be a waiver
or relinquishment of those covenants, agreements or options, and the same shall be and
remain in full force and effect.
16) Written Notice. All communications regarding this Agreement shall be sent to the parties at
the addresses listed on the sib ature page of the Agreement, unless notified to the contrary.
Any written notice hereunder shall become effective three (3) business days after the date of
mailing by registered or certified mail, and shall be deemed sufficiently given if sent to the
addressee at the address stated in this Agreement or such other address as may be hereafter
specified in writing.
17) Assignment. Any assignment of this Agreement by either party without the written consent
of the non-assigning party shall be void. If the non-assib ing pariy gives its consent to any
assignment, the terms of this Ab eement shall continue in full force and effect and no
further assignment shall be made without additional written consent.
18) Modification. No waiver, alteration, or modification of any of the provisions of this
Agreement shall be binding unless in writing and signed by a duly authorized representative
of the city and Contractor.
19) Compliance with Laws. The Contractor agrees to comply with all federal, state, and
municipal laws, rules, and regulations that are now effective or in the future become
applicable to Contractor's business, . equipment, and personnel engaged in operations
covered by this Agreement or accruing out of the performance of those operations.
20) Counterparts. This Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of
which shall constitute an original, and all of which will together constitute this one
Ab eement.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the City has caused these presents to be signed by its Mayor and
attested by its City Clerk and the Con,����qe�has hereunto set his hand and seal the day and year
first above-written. ``����G� N S T d�'o!�`
•`O. •9G'.
� V�;' �ORPp,�I'•�� �
eZ;• <c'sp:
CONTRACTC�';��'�� r; z� CITY OF RENTON
� � :i;l;y/ L : �. ;
� C� ':
�.) �111i•��.� r�_ ti9S,N p�•'.���
PresidentlPartner/Owner ��i��A ;00 2.. ``e�����` Mayor ATTEST
lilii1
L � � �/ / �
�� �C_�'`Z,� '
V: .� i� « � ��
Secretary
dba
�
�
Advanced Construction, Inc.
Firm Name
City Clerk
check one
❑ Individual ❑ Partnership Ll�l Corporation Incorporated in �� �� 4� ��
S C l -? 009
,
'
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
,
�`
�
�
'
�
�I
�'
'
,.
'
Attention:
If business is a CORPORATION, name of the corporation should be listed in full and both
President and Secretary must sign the contract, OR if one sib ature is permitted by corporation
by-laws, a copy of the by-laws shall be furnished to the City and made a part of the contract
document.
If business is a PARTNERSHIP, full name of each partner should be listed followed by d/b/a
(doing business as) and firm or trade name; any one partner may sign the contract.
If business is an INDNIDUAL PROPRIETORSHIP, the name of the owner should appear
followed by d/b/a and name of the company.
G
C1-?0�9
' ,
,
�
MINUTES OF ORGANIZATION MEETING OF
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
� The organization meeting of the Board of Directors for Advanced Construction,
Inc. was held on May 5, 2003 at 10:30 am at 14532 North Creek Drive Suite 618
Mill Creek, Washington.
�
�
�
'
,
,
,
�
,
'
1
'
�
�
The following directors were present:
A.J. Smith
This being all the members of the Board of Directors
The Articles of Incorporation were filed with the Office of the Secretary of State
and the Incorporation was effective as of the date of filing. We then inserted a
duplicate original of the Articles of Incorporation together with the Certificate of
Incorporation in the corporate minute book.
The following issues were resolved:
RESOLVED: The form of bylaws submitted to this meeting be, and it hereby is,
approved, and adopted as the bylaws of this Corporation and will insert the
bylaws in the Corporate minute book immediately following the Articles of
Incorporation and the Certificate of Incorporation.
RESOLVED: The specimen form of seal submitted to this meeting be, and it
hereby is, approved and adopted as the Corporate seal of this corporation.
RESOLVED: The specimen form of certificate be, and the same hereby is,
approved and adopted as the certificate to represent the shares of this
Corporation. And further that the specimen certificate so presented to the
meeting be annexed to the minutes thereof.
RESOLVED: That the Corporation issue and deliver to A.J. Smith upon receipt of
the consideration, a certificate representing 10 shares of the Corporation, and
further that the shares so issued shall be fully paid and nonassessable, and the
value of the aforesaid and the stated capital with respect to such shares shall be
$20,000.00; and further that the officers of the corporation be, and they hereby
are, authorized, empowered, and directed to take any and all steps, and to
execute and deliver any and all instruments in connection with consummating the
transaction and in connection with carrying the foregoing resolutions into effect.
�
, . �_.
� RESOLVED: That the Corporation issue and deliver to A.J. Smith upon receipt of
the consideration, a certificate representing 10 shares of the Corporation, and
� further that the shares so issued shall be fully paid and nonassessable, and the
value of the aforesaid and the stated capital with respect to such shares shall be
Equipment per attachment 001; and further that the officers of the corporation be,
' and they hereby are, authorized, empowered, and directed to take any and all
steps, and to execute and deliver any and all instruments in connection with
consummating the transaction and in connection with carrying the foregoing
' resolutions into effect.
RESOLVED: That the Corporation issue and deliver to A.J. Smith upon receipt of
, the consideration, a certificate representing 10 shares of the Corporation, and
further that the shares so issued shall be fully paid and nonassessable, and the
value of the aforesaid and the stated capital with respect to such shares shall be
� $32,000.00 F-350 Pickup Truck less $16,000.00 still owed; and further that the
officers of the corporation be, and they hereby are, authorized, empowered, and
directed to take any and all steps, and to execute and deliver any and all
, instruments in connection with consummating the transaction and in connection
with carrying the foregoing resolutions into effect.
� There being no further business the meeting was adjourned.
,
,
�
�
,
1
'
,
C�
q.J. Srhith
President
'
�
�
'
'
'
'
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
r
'
'
,
'
'
Corporations: Registration Detail
Page 1 of 2
Enter Keywords _ ;
Corporations Division
Home Search Apostilles Domestic Partnerships Awards Program Public
Notices
� PRINT THIS PAGE
Corporations Division - Registration Data Search
Neither the State of Washington nor any agency, offcer, or employee of the State of Washington warrants the accuracy, reliability, or
timeliness of any information in the, Public Access System and shall not be liable for any losses caused by such reliance on the
accuracy, reliability, or timeliness of such information. While every effort is made to ensure the accuracy of this information, portions
may be incorrect or not current. Any person or entity who relies on information obtained from the System does so at his or her own risk.
ADVANCED CONSTRUCTION, INC.
UBI Number 602273113
Category REG
Profit/Nonprofit Profit
Active/Inactive Active
State Of Incorporation WA
WA Filing Date 02l19/2003
Expiration Date 02/28/2011
Inactive Date
Registered Agent Information
Agent Name AJ SMITH
Address 4640 CAMPUS PL STE 150
City MUKILTEO
State WA
ZIP 98275
Special Address Information
Address
City
State
Zip
Governing Persons
Title Name Address
President SMfTH , A MUKILTEO , WA
Purchase Documents for this Corporation »
« Return to Search List
Address Confidentialitv Domestic Partnershios Medals of Merit & Valor
Aoostilles Elections & Votinq Newsroom Phone Numbers � Privacy Policv � Accessibilitv
Archives Heritage Center Productivity Board
Charities International Trade State Flaa
hitp://www.sos.wa.�ov/corps/search detail.aspx?ubi=602273113 12/20/2010
�� OP ID: MA
�,acoRo� ' CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE(MM/DD/YWY)
�� 12/20/10
THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS
CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES
BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED
REPRES�NTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.
IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to
the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the
certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).
-PRODUCER 425-489-4500
Hub International Northwest 425-489-4501
p. O. Box 3018
�othell, WA 98041-3018
Andy Prill
Advanced Construction, Inc.
4640 Campus Place, Suite 150
Mukilteo, WA 98275
CIRENTO
NAIC #
0508
COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER:
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD
INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS
CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,
EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
TR TYFE OF INSURANCE IADDL SUBRI POLICY NUMBER M� DY/YYYY I MM DDY/YYYY I LIMITS
I GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ �,OOO,OO
DAMA E T RENTED
A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY 4016148819 �5/�2/i � 05/02/11 pREMISES Ea occurrence $ 300�00
� CLAIMS-MADE � OCCUR MED EXP (My one person) I 5 $,��
X XCU � PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ �,OOO,OO
�Stop Gap Liab GENERAL AGGREGATE $ Z,OOO,OO
jG�EN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: I PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG I$ Z�OOO�OO
I I POLICY � Jl � PR�� I ( �oc �Emp Ben. � s 1,000,00
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COM8INED SINGLE LIMIT $ �,OOO,OO
A X ANY AUTO 4016148805 05/02/10 05/02/11 �Ea accident)
BODILY INJURY (Per person) I $
ALL OWNED AUTOS
SCHEDULED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per accident) I$
PROPERTY DAMAGE $
HIRED AUTOS (Per accident)
NON-OWNED AUTOS $
I � $
�I UMBRELLA LIAB pCCUR � EACH OCCURRENCE $
EXCESS LIAB � CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $
I DEDUCTIBLE I $
� RETENTION $ I I $
WORKERS COMPENSATION I WC STATU- I OTH-
AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY TORY LIMITS ER
ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE Y� N MONOPOLISTIC STATE E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $
OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? � N � %�
(Mandatory in NH) SEE GL - WA STOP GAP E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $
If yes, describe under
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below I E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT I S
ESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, if more space is required)
DDITIONAL INSURED(S)AS REQUIRED BY WRITTEN CONTRACT SUBJECT TO POLICY
TERMS, CONDITIONS, LIMITATIONS & ATTACHED ENDORSEMENT: CITY OF RENTON.
OVERAGE AFFORDED IS PRIMARY AND NON-CONTRIBUTORY.
E: WESNIEW LIFT STATION UPGRADES.
CERTIFICATE HOLDER
CITY OF RENTON
1055 S. GRADY WAY
RENTON, WA 98055
�CORD 25 (2009/09)
DVAN-3
INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE
uvsuReRa:Valley Forge Insurance Co.
INSURER B :
INSURER C :
INSURER D :
INSURER E :
INSURER F :
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE
THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS.
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
[��� ���—i"
O 1988-2009 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
The ACORD name and logo are registered marks bf ACORD
,
, ���
�
�
L'
'
�
�
�
�
�
i
�
LJ
�
�
�
G-140331-B
(Ed. 01/09)
THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY.
BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED - OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS
This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following:
COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART
SCHEDULE (OPTIONAL)
Name of Additionai Insured Person(s)
Or Orqanizations
(As required by written contracUagreement per Paragraph A. below.)
Location(s) of Covered Operations
(As per the written contract/agreement, provided the location is within the "coverage territory" of this Coverage Part.)
(Coverage under this endorsement is not affected by an entry or lack of entry in the Schedule above.)
A. Section II - Who Is An Insured is amended to
include as an additional insured any person(s) or
organization(s), including any person or organization
shown in the Schedule above, whom you are
required to add as an additional insured on this
Coverage Part under a written contract or written
agreement, provided:
a. The written contract or written agreement was
executed prior to:
1. The "bodily injury" or "property damage"; or
2. The offense that caused the "personal and
advertising injury"
�vi vviili..ii iiiG c�u�iiiviic.i iii$u�i�v .�,��L� ���ior2�o
under this Coverage Part; and
b. The written contract or written agreement
pertains to your ongoing operations or "your
work" for the additional insured(s).
B. The insurance provided to the additional insured is
limited as follows:
, 1. The person or organization is an additional
insured only with respect to liability for "bodily
injury," "property damage," or "personal and
advertising injury" caused in whole or in part by:
� a. Your acts or omissions; or
b. The acts or omissions of those acting on
your behalf
' G-140331-B
(Ed. 01/09)
in the performance of your ongoing operations
for the additional insured(s) or
c. "Your work" that is included in the
"products-completed operations hazard"
and performed for the additional insured,
but only if this Coverage Part provides such
coverage, and only if the written contract or
written agreement requires you to provide
the additional insured such coverage.
2. However, we will not provide the additional
insured any broader coverage or any higher limit
of insurance than the least of those:
a. Required by the written contract or written
agreement;
b. Described in B.1. above; or
c. Afforded to you under this policy.
3. This insurance is excess of all other insurance
available to the additional insured, whether
primary, excess, contingent or on any other
basis, unless the written contract. or agreement
requires this insurance to be primary. In that
event, this insurance will be primary relative to
insurance which covers the additional insured
as a named insured. We will not require
contribution from such insurance if the written
contract or written agreement also requires that
this insurance be non-contributory. But with
respect to all other insurance under which the
Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission Page 1 of 2
I
, .
C/VA
1 .
I�
�
I�
�
�
I)
�
'
�
i
'
,
�
l�
�
�
�
�
additional insured qualifies as an insured or
additional insured, this insurance will be excess.
4. The insurance provided to the additional insured
terminates when your operations for the
additional insured are complete. But if the
written contract or written agreement specifies a
date until which this insurance must apply, then
this insurance termiriates:
a. On the date specified in the written contract
or written agreement; or
b. When this policy expires or is cancelled,
whichever occurs first.
C. With respect to the` insurance afforded to the
additional insured, the following additional
exclusions apply.
This insurance does not apply to:
1. "Bodily injury," "property damage," or "personal
and advertising injury" arising out of the
rendering of, or the failure to render, any
professional architectural, engineering, or
surveying services, including:
a. The preparing, approving, or failing to
prepare or approve maps, shop drawings,
opinions, reports, surveys, field orders,
change orders or drawings and
specifications; and
b. Supervisory, inspection, architectural or
engineering activities.
2. "Bodily injury," "property damage," or "personal
and advertising injury" arising out of any
premises or work for which the additional
insure� is specifically listed as an additional
insured on another endorsement attached to
this Coverage Part.
D. SECTION IV — COMMERCIAL GENERAL
LIABILITY CONDITIONS is amended as follows:
i. ine uuties In �n� �v��it �i vccuiiai�i:r,
Offense, Claim or Suit condition is amended to
' G-140331-B
(Ed. 01/09)
G-140331-B
(Ed. 01/09)
add the following additional conditions
applicable to the additional insured:
An additional insured under this endorsement
will as soon as practicable:
(1) Give us written notice of an "occurrence" or
an offense which may result in a claim or
"suit" undec this insurance, and of any claim
or "suiY' that does result;
(2) Tender the defense and indemnity of any
claim or "suit" to any other insurer or self
insurer whose policy or program applies to a
loss we cover under this Coverage Part;
(3) Except as provided in Paragraph B.3 of this
endorsement, agree to make available any
other insurance the additional insured has
for a loss we cover under this Coverage
Part; and
(4) Send us copies of all legal papers received,
and otherwise cooperate with us in the
investigation, defense, or settlement of the
claim or "suit."
We have no duty to defend or indemnify an
additional insured under this endorsement until
we receive from the additional insured written
notice of a claim or "suit."
2. With respect only to the insurance provided by
this endorsement, the first sentence of
Paragraph 4.a. of the Other Insurance Condition
is deleted and replaced with the following:
4. Other Insurance
a. Primary Insurance
This insurance is primary and non-
contributory except when rendered
excess by this endorsement, or when
Paragraph b. below applies.
E. The provisions of the written contract or written
agreement do not in any way broaden or amend this
Coverage Part.
Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with i.ts permission Page 2 of 2
�J
�
� G-18652-H
� ��� (Ed.01/06)
THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY.
t CONTRACTORS' GENERAL LIABILITY EXTENSION ENDORSEMENT
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
,
1
t
�
A state or political subdivision subject to
the following provisions:
(1) This insurance applies only with
respect to the following hazards for
which the state or political
subdivision has issued a permit in
connection with premises you own,
rent, or control and to which this
insurance applies:
(a) The existence, maintenance,
reoair. construction, erection, or
removai of advertising signs,
awnings, canopies, cellar
entrances, coal holes,
driveways, manholes,
marquees, hoistaway openings,
sidewalk vaults, street banners,
or decorations and similar
exposures; or
(b) The construction, erection, or
removal of elevators; or
(2) This insurance applies only with
� respect to operations performed by
you or on your behalf for which the
state or political subdivision has
issued a permit.
� G-18652-H
(Ed. 01(06)
This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following:
COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART
Coverage afforded ander this extension of coverage endorsement does not appiy to any person or organization
covered as an additional insured on any other endorsement now or hereafter attached to this Coverage Part.
1. MISCELLANEOUS ADDITIONAL INSUREDS
WHO IS AN INSURED (Section II) is amended to
include as an insured any person or organization
(called additionai insured) described in paragraphs
2.a. through 2.g. below whom you are required to
add as an additional insured on this policy under a
written contract or agreement but the written
contract or agreement must be:
1. Currently in effect or becoming effective
during the term of this policy; and
2. Executed prior to the "bodily injury,"
"property damage" or "personal injury and
advertising injury," but
Only the following persons or organizations are
additional insureds under this endorsement and
coverage provided to such additional insureds is
limited as provided herein:
a. State or Political Subdivisions
This insurance does not apply to "bodily
injury," "property damage" or "personal
and advertising injury" arising out of
operations .performed for the state or
municipality.
b. Controlling Interest
Any persons or organizations with a
controiling interest in you but only with
respect to their liability arising out of:
(1) Their financial control of you; or
(2) Premises they own, maintain or
control while you lease or occupy
these premises.
This insurance does not apply to
structural alterations, new construction
anci aermalition operations pe�formed 5y
or for such additional insured.
c. Managers or Lessors of Premises
A manager or lessor of premises but
only with respect to liabiliry arising out of
the ownership, maintenance or use of
that specific part of the premises leased
to you and subject to the following
additional exclusions:
This insurance does not apply to:
(1) Any "occurrence" which takes place
after you cease to be a tenant in
that premises; or
(2) Structural alterations, new
construction or demolition
operations performed by or on
behalf of such additional insured.
d. Mortgagee, Assignee or Receiver
A mortgagee, assignee or receiver but
only with respect to their liability as
mortgagee, assignee, or receiver and
arising out of the ownership,
maintenance, or use of a premises by
you. �
This insurance does not apply to
structural alterations, new construction
or demolition operations performed by
or for such additional insured.
Page 1 of 7
�J
i
�
�
�
i
�
���
e. OwnerslOther Interests — Land is
Leased
An owner or other interest from whom
land has been leased by you but only
with respect to liability arising out of the
ownership, maintenance or use of that
specific part of the land leased to you
antl subjecf to the following additionaf
exclusions:
This insurance does not apply to:
(1) Any "occurrence" which takes place
after you cease to lease that land;
or
(2) Structural alterations, new
.� construction or demolition
operations performed by or on
behalf of such additional insured.
I�
�
�
f. Co-owner of Insured Premises
A co-owner of a premises co-owned by
you and covered under this insurance
but only with respect to the co-owners
liability as co-owner of such premises.
g. Lessor of Equipment
Any person or organization from whom
� you lease equipment. Such person or
organization are insureds only with
respect to their liability arising out of the
maintenance, operation or use by you
� of equipment leased to you by such
person or organization. A person's or
organization's status as an insured
' under this endorsement ends when
their written contract or agreement with
you for such leased equipment ends.
,
'
L�
'
,
With respect to the insurance afforded
these additional insureds, the following
additional exclusions apply:
This ir�surarce dces n�t apply:
(1) To any "occurrence" which takes
place after the equipment lease
expires; or
(2) To "bodily injury", "property
damage", or "personal and
advertising injury" arising out of the
sole negiigence of such additional
insured.
Any insurance provided to an additional insured
designated under paragraphs a. through g.
above does not apply to "bodily injury" or
"property damage" included within the
"products-completed operations hazard".
� G-18652-H
(Ed. 01/06)
�
G-18652-H
(Ed. 01/06)
As respects the coverage provided under this
endorsement, Paragraph 4.b. SECTION IV —
COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY
CONDITIONS is deleted and replaced with the
following:
4. Other Insurance
b. Excess Insurance
This insurance is excess over:
Any other insurance naming the
additional insured as an insured
whether primary, excess, contingent or
on any other basis unless a written
contract or agreement specifically
requires that this insurance be either
primary or primary and noncontributing.
Where required by written contract or
agreement, we will consider any other
insurance maintained by the additional
insured for injury or damage covered by
this endorsement to be excess and
noncontributing with this insurance.
2. EMPLOYEES AS INSUREDS — HEALTH CARE
SERVICES
Paragraph 2.a.(1)(d) of Section II — Who Is An
Insured is deleted.
3. JOINT VENTURES / PARTNERSHIP / LIMITED
LIABILITY COMPANY COVERAGE
A. The following is added to Section II — Who Is
An Insured:
4. You are an insured when you had an
interest in a joint venture, partnership or
limited liability company which terminated or
ended prior to or during this policy period
but only to the extent of your interest in such
joint venture, partnership or limited liability
company. This coverage does not apply:
a. Prior to the termination date of any joint
vent;�re, partnership or limited liability
company; or
b. If there is other valid and collectible
insurance purchased specifically to
insure the partnership, joint venture or
limited liability company.
c. To a joint venture, partnership or limited
liability company which is or was
insured under a "consolidated (wrap-up)
insurance program".
"Consolidated (wrap-up) insurance
program" means a construction, erection or
demolition project for which the prime
contractor/project manager or owner of the
construction project has secured general
liability insurance covering some or all of the
Page 2 of 7
i
� ���
1
�
i
�
LJ
i
i
�
�
,
�
�
�
'
�
w
contractors or subcontractors involved in
the project, otherwise referred to as an
Owner Controlled Insurance Program
(O.C.I.P.) or Contractor Controlled
Insurance Program (C.C.I.P.).
B. The last paragraph of Section II — Who Is An
Insured is deleted and replaced by the
foilowing:
Except as provided in 4. above, no person or
organization is an insured with respect to the
conduct of any current or past partnership, joint
venture or limited liability company that is not
shown as a Named Insured in the Declarations.
4. EXPANDED PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING
INJURY
A. The following is added to Section V—
Definitions, the definition of "Personal and
advertising injury":
h. Discrimination or humiliation that results
in injury to the feelings or reputation of a
natural person, but only if such
discrimination or humiliation is:
(1) Not done intentionally by or at the
direCtiOn Of:
(a) The insured; or
(b) Any "executive officer", director,
stockholder, partner, member
or manager (if you are a limited
liability company) of the
insured; and
(2) Not directly or indirectly related to
the employment, prospective
employment, past employment or
termination of employment of any
person or persons by any insured.
B. Exclusions of Section I— Coverage B—
Personal and Advertising Injury Liability is
arner�ded to ir�clude the followirg:
p. Discrimination Relating To Room,
Dwelling or Premises
Caused by discrimination directly or
indirectly related to the sale, rental,
lease or sub-lease or prospective sale,
rental, lease or sub-lease of any room,
dwelling or premises by or at the
direction of any insured.
q. Fines Or Penalties
Fines or penalties levied or imposed by
a governmental entity because of
discrimination.
C. This provision 4. (EXPANDED PERSONAL
AND ADVERTISING INJURY COVERAGE)
G-18652-H
(Ed. 01/06)
G-18652-H
(Ed. 01/06)
5
does not apply to discrimination or humiliation
committed in the states of New York or Ohio.
Also, EXPANDED PERSONAL AND
ADVERTISING INJURY COVERAGE does not
appiy to policies issued in the states of New
York or Ohio.
D. This provision 4. (EXPANDED PERSONAL
AND ADVERTISING INJURY COVERAGE)
does not apply if Section I— Coverage B—
Personal And Advertising Injury Liability is
excluded either by the provisions of the
Coverage Part or by endorsement.
MEDICAL PAYMENTS
A. Paragraph 7. Medical Expense Limit, of
Section III — Limits of Insurance is deleted
and replaced by the following:
7. Subject to 5. above (the Each Occurrence
Limit), the Medical Expense Limit is the
most we will pay under Section — I—
Coverage C for all medical expenses
because of "bodily injury" sustained by any
one person. The Medical Expense Limit is
the greater of:
(1) $15,000; or
(2) The amount shown in the
Declarations for Medical Expense
Limit.
B. This provision 5. (Medical Payments) does not
apply if Section 1— Coverage C Medical
Payments is excluded either by the provisions
of the Coverage Part or by endorsement.
C. Paragraph 1.a.(3)(2) of Section I— Coverage C
— Medical Payments, is replaced by the
following:
The expenses are incurred and reported to us
within three years of the date of the accident;
and
&. LE.r.-AL LlQ3!! ITY AND EQRROVUED
EQUIPMENT
A. Under Section I— Coverage A— Bodily Injury
and Property Damage 2. Exclusions,
Exclusion j. is replaced by the following.
"Property damage" to:
(1) Property you own, rent, or occupy;
(2) Premises you sell, give away or
abandon, if the "property damage"
arises out of any part of those
premises;
(3) Property loaned to you;
(4) Personal property in the care,
custody or control of the insured;
Page 3 of 7
�
LJ
i c�►�r
(5j That particular part of reai property
' on which you or any contractors or
subcontractors working directly or
indirectly on your behalf are
performing operations, if the
� "property damage" arises out of
those operations; or
(6j That particular part of any property
� that must be restored, repaired or
repiaced because "your work" was
incorrectly performed on it.
� Paragraph (2} of this exclusion does not
apply if the premises are "your work"
and were never occupied, rented or
held for rental by you.
'
�
�
��
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
Paragraphs (1), (3) and (4) of this
exclusion do not apply to:
G-18652-H
(Ed. 01 /06)
A separate limit of insurance applies to this
coverage as described in Section III — Limits
Of Insurance.
C. Paragraph 6. Damage To Premises Rented To
You Limit of Section III — Limits Of Insurance
is replaced by the following:
6. Subject to 5. above, (the Each Occurrence
Limit), the Damage To Premises Rented To
You Limit is the most we will pay under
Section — I— Coverage A for damages
because of "property damage" to any one
premises while rented to you or temporarily
occupied by you with the permission of the
owner, including contents of such premises
rented to you for a period of 7 or fewer
consecutive days. The Damage To
Premises Rented To You Limit is the
greater of:
(i) "property damage" to tools
or equipment loaned to you
if the tools or equipment
are not being used to
perform operations at the p
time of loss; or
(ii) "property damage" (other
than damage by fire) to
premises rented to you or
temporarily occupied by
you with the permission of
the owner, or to the
contents of premises
rented to you for a period of
7 or fewer consecutive
days. A separate limit of
insurance applies to
Damage To Premises
Rented To You as
described in Section III —
Limits Of Insurance.
Paragraphs (3}, (4), (5) and (6) of this
exclusicn do not app!y r„ i�?n�i�ty
assumed under a sidetrack agreement.
Paragraph (6) of this exclusion does not
apply to "property damage" included in
the "products-completed operations
hazard".
a. �200,000; or
b. The Damage To Premises Rented To
You Limit shown in the Declarations.
Paragraph 4.b.(1)(b) of Section IV —
Commercial General Liability Conditions is
deleted and replaced by the following:
(bj That is property ins��rance for
premises rented to you or
temporarily occupied by you with
the permission of the owner; or
E. This provision 6. {LEGAL LIABILITY AND
BORROWED EQUIPMENT) does not apply if
Damage To Premises Rented To You Liability
under Section I— Coverage A is excluded
either by the provisions of the Coverage Part or
by endorsement.
7. NON-OWNED WATERCRAFT
Under Section I— Coverage A, Exclusion 2.g.,
subparagraph (2) is deleted and replaced by the
following.
(2) A watercraft you do not own that is:
(a) Less than 55 feet long; and
(b) Not being used to carry persons
or property for a charge.
B. Under Section I— Coverage A— Bodily Injury $• NON-OWNED AIRCRAFT
and Property Damage the last paragraph of 2. Exclusion 2.g. of Section I— Coverage A— Bodily
Exclusions is deleted and replaced by the Injury and Property Damage, does not apply to an
following. aircraft you do not own, provided that:
Exclusions c. through n. do not apply to 1. The pilot in command holds a currently
damage by fire to premises while rented to you effective certificate issued by the duly
or temporarily occupied by you with permission constituted authority of the United States of
of the owner or to the contents of premises America or Canada, designating that person
rented to you for a period of 7 or fewer as a commercial or airline transport pilot;
consecutive days.
G-18652-H
(Ed. 01 /06)
Page 4 of 7
�
i
�
�
�
�
�
C
j
�
�
�
,
'
i
�
�
�
�
---. . . ... . l
_ �
2. It is rented with a trained, paid crew; and
3. It does not transport persons or cargo for a
charge.
9. CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY FOR PERSONAL
AND ADVERTISING INJURY
Exclusion e. Contractual Liability of Section I—
Coverage B is deleted.
10. SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS
A. Under Section I— Supplementary Payments —
Coverages A and B, Paragraph 1.b., the limit of
$250 shown for the cost of bail bonds is
replaced by $2,500:
B. In Paragraph 1.d., the limit of $250 shown for
daily loss of earnings is replaced by $1,000.
11. LIQUOR LIABILITY
Exclusion c. of Section I— Coverage A is deleted.
12. NEWLY FORMED OR ACQUIRED
ORGANIZATIONS
Paragraph 3.a. of Section II — Who Is An Insured
is deleted and replaced by the following:
Coverage under this provision is afforded only until
the end of the policy period or the next anniversary
of this policy's effective date after you acquire or
form the organization, whichever is earlier.
13. LIBERALIZATION CLAUSE
If we adopt a change in our forms or rules which
would broaden coverage for contractors without an
additional premium charge, your policy will
automatically provide the additional coverages as of
the date the revision is effective in your state.
14. UNINTENTIONAL FAILURE TO DISCLOSE
HAZARDS
Based on our reliance on your representations as to
existing hazards, if unintentionally you should fail to
disclose all such hazar�s at the inception da#e of
your policy, we will not deny coverage under this
Coverage Part because of such failure.
15. NOTICE OF OCCURRENCE
The following is added to paragraph 2. of Section
IV — Commercial General Liability Conditions —
Duties In The Event of Occurrence, Offense,
Claim or Suit:
Your rights under this Coverage Part will not be
prejudiced if you fail to give us notice of an
"occurrence", offense, claim or "suiY' and that failure
is solely due to your reasonable belief that the
"bodily injury" or "property damage" is not covered
under this Coverage Part. However, you shall give
written notice of this "occurrence", offense, claim or
"suit" to us as soon as you are aware that this
G-18652-H
(Ed. 01 /06)
G-18652-H
(Ed. 01/06)
insurance may apply to such "occurrence", offense
claim or "suit".
16. BROAD KNOWLEDGE OF OCCURRENCE
The following is added to paragraph 2. of Section
IV — Commercial General Liability Conditions —
Duties in The Event of Occurrence, Offense,
Claim_or Suit:
You must give us or our authorized representative
notice of an "occurrence", offense, claim, or "suiY'
oniy when the "occurrence", offense, claim or "suiY'
is known to:
(1) You, if you are an individual;
(2) A partner, if you are a partnership;
(3) An executive officer or the
employee designated by you to give
such notice, if you are a
corporation; or
(4) A manager, if you are a limited
liability company.
17. AGGREGATE LIMITS PER PROJECT
A. For all sums which the insured becomes legally
obligated to pay as damages caused by
"occurrences" under COVERAGE A (SECTION
I), and for all medical expenses caused by
accidents under COVERAGE C(SECTION I),
which can be attributed only to ongoing
operations at a single construction project away
from premises owned by or rented to the
insured:
1
�
A separate Single Construction Project
General Aggregate Limit applies to each
construction project away from premises
owned by or rented to the insured, and that
limit is equal to the amount of the General
Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations.
The Single Construction Project General
Aggregate Limit is the most we will pay for
the sum of all damages under COVERAGE
A, except damages because of "bodily
injury" or "property damage" included in the
"products-compieted operations hazard",
and for medical expenses under
COVERAGE C regardless of the number of:
a. I nsureds;
b. Claims made or "suits" brought; or
c. Persons or organizations making claims
or bringing "suits".
3. Any payments made under COVERAGE A
for damages or under COVERAGE C for
medical expenses shall reduce the Single
Construction Project General Aggregate
Limit for that construction project away from
Page 5 of 7
�
��
� ���
premises owned by or rented to the insured.
� Such payments shall not reduce the
General Aggregate Limit shown in this
Declarations nor shall they reduce any other
Singie Construction Project Generai
� Aggregate Limit for any other separate
construction project away from premises
owned by or rented to the insured.-
�
�
�
`,
l
�
�
�
�
�
1
�
�
�
4. The limits shown in the Declarations for
Each Occurrence, Fire Damage and
Medical Expense continue to apply.
However, instead of being subject to the
General Aggregate Limit shown in the
Declarations, such limits will be subject to
the applicable Single Construction Project
General Aggregate Limit.
B. For all sums which the insured becomes legally
obiigated to pay as damages caused by
"occurrences" under COVERAGE A (SECTION
i), and for all medical expenses caused by
accidents under COVERAGE C(SECTION I),
which cannot be attributed only to ongoing
operations at a single construction project away
from premises owned by or rented to the
insured:
1. Any payments made under COVERAGE A
for damages or under COVERAGE C for
medical expenses shall reduce the amount
available under the General Aggregate Limit
or the Products-Completed Operations
Aggregate Limit, whichever is applicable;
and
2. Such payments shall not reduce any Single
Construction Project General Aggregate
Limit.
C. When coverage for liability arising out of the
"products-completed operations hazard" is
provided, any payments for damages because
of "bodily injury" or "property damage" included
in the "products-completed operations hazard"
will reduce the Products-Cbmpleted Operations
Aggregate Limit, and not reduce the General
Aggregate Limit nor the Single Construction
Project General Aggregate Limit. .
D. If a single construction project away from
premises owned by or rented to the insured has
been abandoned and then restarted, or if the
authorized contracting parties deviate from
plans, blueprints, designs, specifications or
timetables, the project will still be deemed to be
the same construction project.
� E. The provisions of Limits of Insurance
(SECTION III) not otherwise modified by this
endorsement shall continue to apply as
stipulafed.
� G-18652-H
(Ed. 01/06)
G-18652-H
(Ed. 01/Q6)
18. EXPANDED BODILY INJURY
Section V— Definitions, the definition of "b�dily
injury" is changed to read:
"Bodily injury" means bodily injury, sickness or
disease sustained by a person, including death,
humiliation, shock, mental anguish or mental injury
by that person at any time which results. as a
consequence of the bodily injury, sickness or
disease.
19. EXPECTED OR INTENDED INJURY
Exclusion a. of Section I— Coverage A— Bodily
Injury and Property Damage Liability is replaced
by the following:
"Bodily injury" or "property damage"
expected or intended from the
standpoint of the insured. This
exclusion does not apply to "bodily
injury" or "property damage" resulting
from the use of reasonable force to
protect persons or property.
20. OWNER CONTROLLED INSURANCE PROGRAM,
CONTRACTOR CONTROLLED INSURANCE
PROGRAM OR CONSOLIDATED (WRAP-UP)
INSURANCE PROGRAMS
The endorsement EXCLUSION — CONSTRUCTION
WRAP-UP PROGRAM which is attached to this
policy is amended as follows:
A. This exclusion does not apply to:
1. Coverage available to you under this policy
which is broader in scope than coverage
provided to you under a"consolidated
(wrap-up) insurance program" for a
construction project in which you are
involved;
2. Coverage for your interest only for ongoing
operations in excess of all coverage
available to you under a"consolidated
(wrap-up) insurance program" for a
construction project in which you are
involved; and
3. Coverage for your interest only for
operations included within the "products -
completed operations hazard" in excess of
ail coverage available to you under a
"consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program"
for a construction project in which you are
or have been involved.
Paragraphs A.1., A.2. and A.3. above do not
apply to any portion of a"consolidated (wrap-up)
insurance program" involving a "residential
structure."
B. The foilowing is added immediately after the first
paragraph of provision b. Excess Insurance of
Page 6 of 7
�
� .
i . �II►�Io1►
LJ
�
�
Section IV — Commercial General Liability
Conditions — Other insurance:
This insurance is excess, over any of the other
insurance whether primary, excess, contingent
or any other basis that is insurance available to
you as a result of your being a participant in a
"consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program",
but only as respecfs your involvement in tfiat
"consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program".
C. The following is added to Section V—
Definitions:
� "Consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program"
means a construction, erection or demolition
project for which the prime contractor/project
manager or owner of the construction project
� has secured general liability insurance covering
some or all of the contractors or subcontractors
involved in the project, otherwise referred to as
� an Owner Controiled Insurance Program
(O.C.I.P.) or Contractor Controlled insurance
Program (C.C.I.P.).
"Residential structure" means any structure
� where 30% or more of the square foot area is
used or is intended to be used for human
residency including but not limited to single or
���ultifamily housing, apartments, condcminiums,
� townhouses, co-operatives or planned unit
developments and also includes their common
areas and/or appurtenant structures (including
pools, hot tubs, detached garages, guest
� houses or any similar structures). When there is
no individual ownership of units, residential
structure does not include military housing,
college/universiry housing or dormitories, long
� term care facilities, hotels, or motels.
Residential structure also does not include
hospitals or prisons. '
,
�
LJ
,
�
21. CONTRACTUALLIABILITY—RAILROADS
With respect to operations performed within 50 feet
t 'i ,� .+ �^� fCf ::'hlCh 2 Railrnari
Cii iaiiivau NivN'�i ��
Protective Liability policy in the name of the railroad
has been provided, the definition of "insured
contracY' in the SECTION V— DEFINITIONS is
replaced by the following:
"Insured ContracY' means:
a. A contract for a lease of premises.
However, that portion of the contract for
a lease of premises that indemnifies
any person or organization for damage
G-18652-H
(Ed. 01/06)
G-18652-H
(Ed. 01/06)
by fire to premises while rented to you
or temporarily occupied by you with
permission of the owner is not an
"insured contracY';
b. A sidetrack agreement;
c. Any easement or license agreement;
d. An obligation, as required 6y ordinance,
to indemnify a municipality, except in
connection with work for a municipality;
e. An elevator maintenance agreement;
f. That part of any other contract or
agreement pertaining to your business
(including an indemnification of a
municipality in connection with work
performed for a municipality) under
which you assume the tort liability of
another party to pay for "bodily injury" or
"property damage" to a third person or
organization. Tort liability means a
liability that would be imposed by law in
the absence of any contract or
agreement.
Paragraph f. does not include that part
of any contract or agreement:
(1) That indemnifles an architect,
engineer or surveyor for injury or
damage arising out of:
(a) Preparing, approving or failing
to prepare or approve maps,
shop drawings, opinions,
reports, surveys, field orders,
change orders or drawings and
specifications; or
(b) Giving directions or instructions,
or failing to give them, if that is
the primary cause of the injury
or damage;
;2; Jnder which the ins!�red, if an
architect, engineer or surveyor,
assumes liability for an injury or
damage arising out of the insured's
rendering or failure to render
professional services, including
those listed in paragraph (1) above
and supervisory, inspection,
architectural or engineering
activities.
Page 7 of 7
�
�
�
�
1
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
l
=
�
_
cNA
COMMON POLICY DECLARATIONS
COMMERCIAL PACKAGE POLICY
POLICY NUMBER C 4016148819
NAMED INSURED ADVANCED CONSTRUCTION, INC.
MAILING ADDRESS 4640 CAMPUS PLACE
SUITE 150
MUKILTEO, WA 98275
PRODUCER NAME HUB INTERNATIONAL NORTHWr�ST, LLC
MAILING ADDRESS 12100 NE 195TH ST #200
BOTHELL, WA 9B011
POLICY PERIOD FROM 05/02/2010 TO 05/02/2011 AT 12:01 A.M.
STANDARD TIME AT YOUR MAILING ADDRESS SHOWN
ABOVE.
IN RETURN FOR THE PAYMENT OF THE PREMIUM, AND SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS OF THIS POLICY,
WE AGREE WITH YOU TO PROVIDE THE INSURANCE AS STATED IN THIS POLICY.
THIS POLICY CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING COVERAGE PARTS FOR WHICH A PREMIUM IS INDICATED.
THIS PREMIUM MAY BE SUBJECT TO ADJUSTMENT.
I
COVERAGE PART PREMIUM *
COMNERCIAL PROPERTY COVERAGE
COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE
COMMERCIAL CRIME COVERP.GE
COMMERCIAL INLAND MARINE COVERAGE
COMb9ERCIAL BOILER & MACHINERY COVERAG�
COMMERCIAL LIQUOR LIABILI`i'Y COVERAGE
TOTAL POLICY P�EMIUM
'INCLUDES APPLICABLE STATES TAXES AND SURCHARGES (IF ANY)
[REFER TO INDIVIDUAL DECLARATIONS FOR FURTHER INFORMATION]
INSURED
�
�
�
i
�
�
caa
REFER TO INDIVIDUAL DECLARATIONS
Countersignature
L__:
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
. . �. ._
FORMS APPLICABLE TO ALL COVERAGE PARTS
Chairm� f Me Board
G-138915-A (Ed. 07/00)
INSURED
V Sacreter�
�
�
�
,�
�
c�rA
American Society Of Concrete Contractors
General Liability - Occurrence
Renewal Declaration
POLICY NUMBER COVERAGE PROVIDED BY FROM - POLICY PERIOD - TO
C 4016148819 VALLEY FORGE INSURANCE COMPANY 05/02/2010 05/02/2011
333 S. WABASH
CHICAGO, IL. 60604
INSURED NAME AND ADDRESS
ADVANCED CONSTRUCTION, INC.
4640 CAMPUS PLACE
SUITE 150
bNKILTEO, WA 98275
AGENCY NUMBER AGENCY NAME AND ADDRESS
047208 HUB INTERNATIONAL NORTHWEST, LLC
12100 NE 195TH ST #200
BOTHELL, WA 98011
Phone Number: (425)489-4500
BRANCH NUMBER BRANCH NAME AND ADDRESS
O50 SEATTLE BW:NCH
999 THIRD AVENUE, STE 2500
SEATTLE, WA 98104
Phone Number: (206)587-2600
This policy becomes effective and expires at 12:01 A.M. standard time at your mailing
address on the dates shown above.
The Named Insured is a Corporation.
Your policy is composed of this Declarations, with the attached Common Policy Conditions,
Coverage Forms, and Endorsements, if any. The Policy Forms and Endorsement Schedule
shows all forms applicable to this policy at the time of policy issuance.
The Estimated Policy Premium is "-� --" ��
,�
�
�
�
— Your Premium includes the following amount for
� Certified Acts of Terrorism Coverage
— Audit Period is Annual
INSURED
Page 1 of 4
�
�
�
�,
�
�
��
1
..- : ..: _... _;.
� .. :: _. :
POLICY NUMBER � INSURED NAME AND ADDRESS
C 4016148819 ADVANCED CONSTRUCTION, INC.
4640 CAMPUS PLACE
SUITE 150
MiJKILTEO, WA 96275
In return for the payment of the premium, and su'r>ject to all the terms and conditions
contained here-in, we agree to provide the insurance as stated.
LIMITS OF INSURANCE
DESCRIPTION
Each Occurrence
Personal & Advertising Injury
Medical Expense - Any One Person
Damage To Premises Rented To You Limit
Products/Completed Operations Aqgregate
General Aggregate
Employee Benefits LiabiliCy Coverage
Each Employee
Aggregate
Stop Gap Liability
"Bodily Injury" by Accident - Each Accident
"Bodily Injury" by Disease - Aggregate Limit
"Bodily Injury" by Disease - Bach "Employee"
SCHEDULE OF COVERAGES
COVERAGE/HAZARD DESCRIPTION
POLICY LEVEL COVERAGES
Employee Benefits Liability
Deductible Each Emoloyee
Stop GAP Liapility - WA
Fire Damage Legal Liability - Increased Limits
Contractors General Liability Extension
General Contractors Blanket Additional Insured
Limited Pollution Liability Coverage
INSiJRED
LIMIT
$1,000,000
$1,000,000
$5,000
$300,000
$2,000,000
$2,000,000
$1,000,000
$2,000,000
$1,000,000
$1,000,000
$1,000,000
PREMIUM ESTIMATED
EXPOSURE BASIS RATE PREMIUM
INCL Each INCL INCL
Employee
$1,000
INCL Each INCLINCL
$100 Total Payroll
FLAT CHARGE INCL
INC� INCLZNCL INCL
INCL INCL
INCL INCL
Page 2 cf 4
POLICY NUMBER INSURED NAME AND ADDRESS
C 4016148819 ADVPNCED CONSTRUCTION, INC.
4640 CAMPUS PLACE
SUITE 150
MUKILTEO, WA 98275
SCHEDULE OF COVERAGES
COMPOSITE RATING
PSR $1,000 SALES. 15,000,000 S
Property Damage Liability Deductible ?er Occurrence $5,000
MINIMUM GENERAL
LIABILITY PREMIUM
_•
�
�
INSUR�D
Page 3 of 4
�.
�
�
��
,�
��,
L�
�
�
: ; , _ , , : :. ,:
_. ; _ _
POLIC7C NIlMBER INSURED NAME AND ADDRESS
C 4016148819 ADVANCED CONSTRUCTION, INC.
� 4640 CAMPJS PLACE
SUITE 150
_
MUKILTEO, WA 98275
FORMS AND ENDORSEMENTS SCHEDULE
Form Number
G55015B
CG0001
CG0068
CG0181
CG0197
CG0300
CG0437
CG2170
CG2279
CG2404
G114050A
G132263B
G132279C99
G133122B46
G136106D
G136107A
G138921C
G140331B
G140396A99
G144291A
G145658A
G146874A
G15104A
G18652H
G22614A
G300250A
G43316C
G43815C
G55157B
IL0003
IL0146
IL0198
11/1991
12/2��7
OS/2009
07/1998
12/2007
Ol/1996
12/2004
O1/2008
07/1998
05/2009
02/199�
11/2�04
07/2005
11/2004
02/2005
03/2�00
02/2005
O1/2009
10/2001
03/2003
11/2003
03/2005
10/1989
O1/2006
12/1994
02/2006
06/1998
08/2001
02/1988
09/2007
09/2007
09/2000
Form Title
SCHEDULc, CG2404
Commercial General Liability Coverage Form
Rec And Distr Of Mat Or Info In Viol Of Law Excl
Washington Changes
WA Changes-Employment-Related Practices Exclusion
Deductible Liability Insurance
Electronic Data Liability
Cap on Losses for Certified Acts of Terrorism
Exclusion - Contractors - Professional Liability
Waiver-Trans Rights Recovery Against Others To Us
Stop Gap Liability Coverage Supplemental Schedule
Amendatory Endorsement - Pollution Exclusion
Limited Pollution Coverage - Work Sites
WA Changes-Ltd Pollution Cov Worksite
Residential Construction Defect PCO Exclusion
Exclusion - Construction Wrap-Up Program
Exclusion-Subsidence
Contractors Blanket Additional Insured Endorsement
Fungi/Mold/Mildew/Yeast/Microbe ExclLsion
Economic And Trade Sanctions Condition
Exclusion - Silica
Important Notice
Employee Senefits Liability Supplemental Schedule
Contractors General Liability Extension Endt
Stop Gap Liability Coverage Endorsement
Exterior Finish System Prod/Ccmp Ops �xclusicn
Exclusion - Asbestos
Employee Benefits Liability Coverage
Premium Bases
Calculation of Premium
Common Policy Conditions
Nuclear Energy Liability �'xcl Endt. (Broad Form)
*** PLEASE READ THE ENCLOSED IMPORTANT NOTICES CONCERNING YOUR POLICY ***
�
�
�
�
�
Form Number Form Title
CGPO11 O5/2009 Rec And Distr In Vio Of Law Excl Advisory Notice
G144233F O1/2008 Notice - Offer of Terrorism Disclosure of Premium
G145041A 05/2003 IMP INF Economic And Trade Sanctions Condition
G44128B 11/2004 Imp Info For Insureds Wno Hire Subcontractors
Countersignature
1 "� ^'� �
Chairman of ihe Board
P-55170-A (Ed. O1/R6)
INSURED
V Secreter�
Page 4 of 4
��
i�
�
,
CNA
American Society Of Concrete Contractors
Buainese Auto
Renewal Declaration
�1
�
j
�
�
j
�
POLICY NUMBER COVERAGE PROVIDED BY FROM - POLICY PERIOD - TO
C 4016148805 VALLEY FORGE INSURANCE COMPANY 05/02/2010 05/02/2011
3 3 3 S. WABAS�-i
CHICAGO, IL. 60604
INSURED NAME F1ND ADDRESS
ADVANCED CONSTRUCTION, INC.
4640 CAMPUS PLACE
SUITE 150
MUKILTEO, WA 98275
AGENCY NUNIDER AGENCY NAME AND ADDRESS
047208 HUB INTERNATIOiVAL NORTHWEST, LLC
12100 NE 195TH ST #200
BOTHELL, PdA 98011
Phone Number: (�25)489-4500
BRANCH NUMBER BRANCH NAME AND ADDRESS
050 SEATTLE BRANCH
999 THIRD AVENUE, STE 2500
SEATTLE, WA 98104
Phone Number: (206)587-2600
This policy becomes effective and ex.pires at 12:01 A.M. standard time at your mailing
address on the dates shown above.
The Named Insured is a Corporation.
Your policy is composed of this Declarations, with the attached Common Policy Conditions,
Coverage Forms, and Endorsements, if any. The Policy Forms and Endorsement Schedule
shows all forms applicable to this policy at the time of policy issuance.
The Estimated Policy Premium is �-
0
� Audit Period is Not Auditable
= In return for the payment of the premium, and subject to ail the terms and conditions
— contained here-in, we agree to provicle the insurance as stated.
=NSURED
Page 1 of 12
�'
�
�
�
�
�
POLICY NUMBER INSURED NAME AND ADDRESS
C 4016148805 ADVANCED CONSTRUCTION, INC.
4640 CAMPUS PLACE
SUITE 150
MUKILTEO, WA 98275
ITEM TWO
Schedule Of Coverages and Covered Autos
This policy provides only those coverages where a cnarge is shown in the premium column
below. Each of chese coverages will apply only to those "autos" shown as covered
"autos". "Autos�� are shown as covered "autos" for a particular coverage by the entry of
one or more of the symbols from the Covered Auto Section of the Business Auco Coverage
Fcrm next to the name of the Coverage.
COVERED
COVERAGES AUTO SYMBOL LIMIT PREMIUM
Liability 1 $1,000,000
Personal Injury
Protection (Or
Equivalent ATo-rault
Coverage)
Added Personal Injury
Protection (Or
Equivalent Added No-Fault
Coverage)
� Pronerty Protection
Insurance
(Michigan Only)
� Auto Medical Paymer.ts
Med�cal Expense aad
Income Loss Benefits
� (Virginia Only),
Uninsured Motorists
�
�
,�.
�
Underinsured Motorists
(F7hen not included in
U:�insured Motor_st Coverage)
7
�
Separately Stated In Each
Personal Inju�y Protection
Endorsement.
Separately Stated in Each
Added Personal Injury
Protection Endorsement
Separately Stated In The
Property Protection Insurance
�nctorsement.
$5,000
Senarately Stated in Each
fdedical Expense and Income
Less Benefits Endorsement
$1,000,000
INSURED
��
Page 2 of 12
[�
POLICY NUMBER INSURED NAME AND ADDRESS
C 4016148805 ADVANCED CONSTRUCTION, INC.
4640 CAMPUS PLACE
SUITE 150
MUKILTEO, WA 98275
ITEM TWO
Schedule Of Coverages and Covered Autos (Cont'd)
COVERED
COVERAGES AUTO SYMBOL LIMIT PREMIUM
, 7, 8 Actual Cash Value or Cost of
Physical Damage
Comprehensive
Coverage
Physical Damage
Specified
Causes of Loss
Coverage
Physical Damage
Collision
Coverage
Physical Damage
Towing and Labor
7, 8
Repair, Whichever Is Less,
Minus
Deductible for Each Covered
Auto, But No Deductible
Applies �.o Loss Caused By
Fire Or Lightning. See Item
Four For Hired or Borrowed
Autos.
Actual Cash Value or Cost of
Repair, Whichever Is Less,
M_nus
Deductible for Each Covered
Auto For Loss Caused By
Mischief Or Vandalism. See
Item Four For Hired or
Borrowed Autos.
Actual Cash Value or Cost of
Repair, Whichever Is Less,
Minus
Deductible for Each Covered
Auto. See Item Four ror
Hired or Borrowed Autos.
For Each Disablement
of A Private Passenger Auto
Premium for Endorsement:
Estimated Total Premium:
INSURED
Page 3 of 12
_ __ . .. _
__.
_. _ _
,. . _ . ,._ ;
, ,..
POLICY NUMBER INSURED NAME AND ADDRESS
C 4016148805 ADVAAICED CONSTRUCTION, INC.
4640 CAMPUS PLACE
SUITE 150
MUKILTEO, WA 98275
FORMS AND ENDORSEMENTS SCHEDULE
FORM NUMSER
CA0001
CA0121
CA0135
CA2001
CA2134
CA9903
CA9910
CP.9989
G144291A
G21578B
G22454A
IL0003
IL0146
IL0198
FORM TITLE
03/2006 Business Auto Coverage Form
02/1999 Limited Mexico Coverage
03/2006 Washington Changes
03/2006 Additional Insured - Lessor
0.7/2007 TAashington Underinsured Motorists Coverage
03/2006 Auto Medical Payments Coverage
09/2002 Drive Other Car Broadened Coverage for Named Indiv
05/2001 Washington Loss Payable Form Reg - 335
03/2003 Economic And Trade.Sanctions Condition
05/2008 Broadened Pollution Liability Coverage
10/1994 Broadened Pollution Liability Schedule
09/2007 Calculation of Premium
09/2007 Common Policy Conditions
09/2000 Nuclear Energy Liability Excl Endt. (Broad Form)
*** PLEASE READ THE ENCLOSED IMPORTANT NOTICES CONCERNING YOUR POLICY ***
FORM NUMBER FORM TITLE
G138878A 08/2000 Important Information
G142630A 05/2002 Imp. Info.- For Our Commercial Auto Policyholders
G145041A OS/2003 IMP INF Economic And Trade Sanctions Condition
Countersignature
1 "ry •v�Q �
Chairman of }he Board
P-55748-B (Ed. 12/90)
INSURED
V SeCreta�
Page 12 of 12
�
� PRE\/AILiNG I�ININiIJM
�a HO�IJRLY 1/VAGE �TES
�
�� .
�� . a
,� �
t .
!
��
l
,
�� .
� � .
t � � .
!
�
1
'
State of Washington
Department of Labor & Industries
Prevailing Wage Section - Telephone 360-902-5335
PO Box 44540, Olympia, WA 98504-4540
Washington State Prevailing Wage
' The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourty wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe
benefits. On public works projects, worker's wage and benefit rates must add to not less than thi5
total. A brief description of overtime calculation requirements are provided on the Benefit Code Key.
'
�
'
'
1
1
�
1
i
1
1
1
�
-1
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
�
�
'
l�
'
,
'
t
'
,
'
r
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
'
3
,
'
'
'
'
'
,
'
,
r
�
�
�
�
�
�
��
�
lourney Levei Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
'
'
�
,
,
'
'
�
'
,
,
,
'
'
,
,
�
�
�,
I�
��
4
lourney Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
'
,
'
'
'
'
,
'
'
'
,
'
'
'
�
'
�
�
�,
L�
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
,
J
'
L _J
'
'
I�
�
1
1
i
1
1
i
1
1
1
1
1
1
�
Journey level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
7
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
�
r
��
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
t
�
�
1
1
i
1
1
�,
�_�
lourney Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the. Effective Date: 9/1/2010
�
r
t
�
�
�
�
i
�
�
�
�
�
i
1
t
1
1
C�
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
'
'
II
�
u
,
�
�
��
Il
�
�
i
�
�
u
1
1
t
1
�1�
1
�
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
'
��
'
L,
,
'
'
,
1
,
,
�
,
i
1
t
�
1
C�
C�
Journey Levei Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
I __J
'
�
u
��
1
II
�
�
,
'
��
'
�
t
�
1
�
�
i
�
�
12
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
�
13
'
L�
'
1
�
�
,
�
,
,
'
�
,
,
,
�
�
LJ
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
�
�����, - �'� �'�C
Kin �- � Power�Equ�
, ��g�� �; ���
, �.��x�.:�.�'�.'� �;�n,�`��u�'�_..,
King Power Equi
� King�� Pow�E uf
����'� � ���� �
�.�_ � �
_� �C �� �t ��,'� -���� �
�;
� � � �,, �� ;
� King Power E ui
- s�.� � t �� , ,�
� King� PowerFE ui
` ,�'"�:. � ���;�,�
King Power E ui
� � �� �� �� :_
King Power�E ui
,°� ;�� �.� � �� ; .
,��i�, r� v ,::s"� ?`��-
� King Power Equi�
King � Powe��EqutK
��y��y �� �"� * �.
� .�N� � . ��. . ,.�-x�,:__�'
King Power E ui
�
, King��� PowerE�ui
"����� � �� �
g.'R�`.'..2.�`i�s..� . �'�.s ., s,�r'�,:$�,.� `
King Power E ui
� r �.�� � �k � � -..
King�;� Power EquiK
� 'x � - �.�;:,�
��" �, �„ t�nder roun
;��__ � ;� �,
� "��z� �H- '�ar �= �;s
King Power E ui
lourney Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1J2010
� ...a^�— c s".::. -at,�.. � '�y��"s"�'_ ���'� �'c�" 4 �. .,,P. a �^- ��^ �^ '�s,� � ..
pment�Operators �� , Subgrader,Trimmer� ���, ; ���� ;� g� ���� ,�'$ ��``:SD�� �� °�1�T � �8P
49 90 ��h
x'�'� s� �. a�„. .� e� t � �.` ra"A �` � °� �'� ` x � . � x p ��i ' � ' -� �- � "3
,d'�s� r� � .�z - �r ��� �z ' '�. a c � '�'��a '� �� a ��,z��� . a' �g. " a. �i- _ { ��v'�' .
a s � ^ �r .: � . h w�`� ....;{ �i �s k'Y4 � .ax�-:�. 2 .�.':.z �..�i� <.. . , ,.t..��..�.�.�xa , '�3.�:�,' «.a�'E , c . €� �.,E.� �? � �?�^'�..4:�.a..^"�,3..:� g _ ��3.i�
pment Operators Tower Bucket Elevators $49.48 5D 1T SP
rs
ment
Tower Crane Up To 175' In Height Base To I$50.94I SD I 1T I 8P
Boom
Machines
5D 1T 8P
�
5D y ���1T �-� 8P.
��rzyF, � r � < : �' �'
'..�G���'�>-�� � �"�.
5D 1T 8P
Crane Oiler/driver Under 100 Tons
Ider
Yo Pay Dozer
$50.39 5D 1T 8P
$47 12 �'`gSD� ��1T � �8P
�
�. � r> � � � ��
�`� `' � s���':�b { �,M�..��,���?. �
$49.90 5D 1T 8P
Engineer
- Under round Sewe
� King ;>;� P wer EciuiG
����. �. �- .��� -
��� Untler roun
����� ��� �
���'x��3,. � �r �.,s
' King Power E ui
Under roun
� � t � �.p ,:;
Kirig � Power E 'ui
�s��� '� �.�A.���j
€,�: Under rourn
��;�� �"" a �`� -'
� :=� ' asc;� a��
, King Power Equip
Under roun�
j � � �� {�..� �
King"�"� Pawer E "ui '
� ��� Under rouni
k
��' �� .:. � �� .'.���i..
�'Y S�„ � E� �"�',r
� King Power E ui
Under roun�
� King� � Power E u�
:,•�i's..�3 � ' ``_' -�`,�`�',_.
""a '�y,«c'{ . '� a �i�
,
Plant Operator, Concrete
nt Operators-
�wer & Water
Sewer
$47.12I SD I 1T I 8P
$49.90� SD � 1T � 8P
- Remote Demolition Equipment �$47.12� 5D � 1T � 8P
Bump Cutter
14
$49.90I SD I 1T. I 8P
�
IS
,
�
'
,
�
�
'
,
'
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
i
lourney Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
�
�
r - ��
King�� P
������ �
�� �
���� a ��
� ������^
King P
U
� �� x�
King¢`�� R.
R � U
��i'
� i? i � a�-�
King P
U
r "<,��
King��� P+
��F � � U
�
� ���;� �;�
� King Ps
U
� King � � Pi
�� � �
��;�e � U i
�_�� �,
� �
�
, King Pc
Ui
� King'� P�
�
��� � �� U t
�,�—�,�,.� —�
s.�?
� King Pc
Ur
� King�� Pc
r '' � U r
�
t ��� �
...�.s__,.F..aBce L���
, King Po
Ur
� King �`°�` Po
���� � U�n
�-�� � �
�.
, King Po
Un
King�` Po�
� � _ � Un
�:
�s'a`� �
�.;,z" � �:,
� King Po�
Un
King ;= Po
� � Ur`n
� �:
��
'
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
!m
&
Dozers D-9 & Under
Drilling Machine
Finishing Machine, Bidwell And Gamaco &
Similar Equipment
Forklifts: Under 3000 Lbs. With Attachments I$47.12I 5D I 1T I 8P
5D I 1T � 8P
i�
uipment u
und 5ewer
ui�ment,0i
,�
i
und Sewer
uinment:�0i
Water
keman
5D � 1T � 8P
5D � 1T � 8P
$47.12I 5D I 1T I 8P
Equ pmae t S�Ya ds. & Oveating Off- Road I$50.39I 5D I 1T I 8P
irectional Drill Locator I$49.48� SD I 1T � 8P
Hydralifts/boom Trucks Over 10 Tons I$49.48I SD I iT I 8P
�
�
l�
r
�
�
�
t
i
t
�
�
�
�
�
�
t
N
�
�
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
�.
�
�
�
�
,
�
I
t
1
l
1
t
t
1
1
1
1
I
:
lourney Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
�
19
�
�
r
r
�
�
�
i
i
r
�
t
i
t
1
t
^
�,
�
�
lourney Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
I
�
�
�
�
�
i
�
,
!
t
�
1
!
1
�
2�
lourney LeVel Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
��
Journey Level Prevaiting Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
�
�
�
�
1
�
t
�
1
f
�
I
1
1
1
�a
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
�
23
u
�
�
,
�
�
L�
�
�
�
1
i
r
lourney Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the EfFective Date: 9/1/2010
�
i
1
1
1
�
1
1
j
�
1
1
1
1
1
�
24
lourney Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
Department of Labor and Industries
Prevailing Wage ,� s �'"��o
(360) 902-5335 ' " i
www.lni.wa.gov//TradesLicensin�fYrevailingWage �. ' �
0
��� �
• This form must be typed or printed in ink.
• Large, bold numbers match inshuctions on back of form.
• Please allow a minimum of 10 working days for processing.
• Once approved your form will be posted onlinc at the above web
PPIiQ`1�D'�'b]tM�'VII,L��BE�,MAITED TO TFIISADDRESS ,�;:
Contractor, eompany or agettcy name, address, city, state & ZIP+4
Prime contractor (has contract wilh
Craft/trndel occupation (Do NOT list apprcn6ces)
Indicate rmmber of owners exoected to nerCorm wor
Company name
Address
City Smte ZIP+4
ConUactor Registration No. UBI
Industrial Insurance Account Numbcr
Email address Phone number
-."' ^sp a e' s f� t ` � � �✓-���€r r�r"`,'�� '� �,�-���`.,�
w �. .� �, �, ; „,at t � �or`L&LUse bn1Y��,�� t��' �-���' ,, � � �' ,,,t'
APPROVED: Depamnent ofl,abor and industries
By
Industrial Statistician
F700-029-000 statcment of intent to pay prevailing wages 12-04
STATE1ViEN�' OF INTENZ' TO
PAY PREVAILING W�AGES
Public Works Contract
$25.00 Filin� Fee Required
lame ConUact#
Awarding Agency (public ageucy - not federal or private)
Address
City State Z(Y+4
Awazding Agency Project Contact Pcrson Phone #
County where work was performed City where work was performed
13id due date (mm/dcUyy) Date contract awarded (mm/dd/yy)
Will all work be subcontractedT Do you intend to use subcontractors7
❑ Yes ❑ No ❑ Yes ❑ No
Ezpected job stari date (mmldcUyy) Do you intend to use apprentices7
❑ Yes ❑ No
Estimated no. Rate of Rate,of hourly fringc
Contractor
Indicate total dollar amount of your contract I
or timc and materials if applicable. �
1 hereby certify that the above information is correct and that all
workers I employ on this Public Works Project will be paid no less
than the Prevailing Wage Rate(s) as detertnined by the Industrial
Statistician of thc Department of Labor and Industries
Title Signnfirc
Check Number:
Issucd By:
❑ $25 or $
After APPROVAL, send ��•hite copy to Awarding Agency.
Canary copy —L&I
Department of Labor and Industries ���:o AFFIDAv��r n� wA rT�:S PAID
Prevailing Wage
(36U) 902-5335 �= s Public Works Confract
http://ww�v.ini.�va.gov/'I'radesLicensing/PrevailingWage � ,'a� $25.00 Filing Fee Required
,,..
• This form must be ryped or printed in ink. P�oi�a Name Conhad #
• Fill in all blanks or form will be retumc:d for corrcction see back .
• Please atlow a minimum of 10 working days for processing. cs�cmn n.Yar�c�g nge��y (p�e��� ag���y - ooc tedcrai or prtvn�e)
• Once a roved, our form will 6e ed online ai the website above.
�AI'PR�"O�D�F'',.�� .`_' .,g ��'�iI;�E�iQ§??$5���? � Aaaras
� Contractor, aompany or agency name, address, ciry, state & Z1P+4�
state �lr+a
Prime contractor (has contrac! with the public ngency) Conhactor
CratUtrade/occupation and apprentices (For apprentices, give name, registration #,
trade, dates of work on project, stage of progression, wage and fringe)
]ndicate number oTowners that performed �vork.
Company name
Address
City
Co��tnctor Registrdtion No.
]ndusmial Insurance Account Number
Email address
State ZIP+4
UBI
Phone number
APPROVED: Departroent of Labor and Industries
BY —
__ Industrial Statistician _
F700-007-060 affidavit oCwages 12-04
Awarding Agency YroJed ContaU Yerson rnone A
Count� where work'w�as performed City where rvork was performed
llid due dah �m�amyy> Uate contract awarded (mmldd/yy)
Dntework rnmpletcd (mmlddlyy) Date Inlcnt fled (mm/dd/yy)
Wns a11 �vork snbconrrocted7 Ald ypu intend tn ose suM1cnntractor
❑ Yes ❑ No ❑ Yes ❑ No
Job shrt dete (mm/dd/yy)
Number Tntal.# of hours Rate of Rate of }lourly
o( Workers norked — ea. trade Hourly Yay Fringe llenefits
Indicate total dollar amount of your contract ($
or timc and matcrials if applicable.
I hereby ceRify that the above infonnaUon is correct and that all
workers I employ on this Public Works Project witl be paid no less
than the Prevailing Wage Rate(s) as detem�ined by the Industrial
Stafistician of the Department of Labor and Industries
TiNe SignaNre
Check Num6er:
Issued By: _
❑ .$25 or $
After APPROVAL, send white couv to Awardine Aeenc�•.
Canary copy - L& 1
a
00
SPECIAL� PROVISIONS
PART I
� )
.-
1
�1
'
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
'
SPECIALPROVISIONS .........................................•-•................................................................ 10
1-Ol DEFINITIONS AND TERMS ........................................................................................... 10
1-Ol.l General .............................................................................................................................10
1-01.3 Definitions ....................................................................................................................... 10
1-02 BID PROCEDURES AND CONDITIONS ..................................................................... 12
1-021 Prequalification of bidders ............................................................................................ 12
1-02.2 Plans and Specifications ................................................................................................ 12
1-02.5 Proposal Forms ............................................................................................................... 13
1-02.6 Preparation of Proposal ................................................................................................. 13
1-02.6(1) Proprietary Information ...........................................................................................13
1-02.7 Bid Deposit ......................................................................................................................14
1-02.9 Delivery of Proposal .......................................................................................................14
1-02.12 Public Opening of Proposals .......................................................................................14
1-02.13 Irregular Proposals ........-• ............................................................................................ 14
1-02.14 Disqualification of Bidders .......................................................................................... 14
1-02.15 Pre Award Information ................................................................................................ 15
1-03 AWARD AND EXECiJT'ION OF CONTRACT ............................................................. 15
1-03.1 Consideration of bids ..................................................................................................... 15
1=03.2 Award of Contract ..........................................................................................................15
1-03.3 Execution of Contract .................................................................................................... 16
1-03.4 Contract Bond ................................................................................................................ 16
1-03.7 Judicial Review ............................................................................................................... 17
1-04 SCOPE OF WORK ..................................................................................................
1-04.2 Coordination of Contract Documents ... .............................................................
17
... 17
— 1-04.3 Contractor-Discovered Discrepancies ................... 17
1-04.4 Changes ...........................................................................................................................17
;�
1-04.8 Progress Estimates and Payments ................................................................................ 17
' 1-04.11 Final Cleanup ................................................................................................................ 18
1-OS CONTROL OF WORK .................................................................................................... 18
1-05.3 Plans and Working Drawings ........................................................................................ 18
� 1-05.4 Conformity With and Deviation from Plans and Stakes ............................................ 18
1-05.4(3) Contractor Supplied Surveying ................................................................................ 19
� 1-05.4(4) Contractor Provided As-Built Information ............................................................. 20
1-05.7 Removal of Defective and Unauthorized Work ........................................................... 20
�
1
��
1-05.10 Guarantees ....................................................................................................................21
1-05.11 Final Inspection ............................................................................................................ 21
1-05.11(1) Substantial Completion Date .................................................................................. 21
1-05.11(2) Final Inspectian and Physical Completion Date ................................................... 22
1-05.11(3) Operational Testing ......................................•----...............:...................................... 22
1-05.12 Final Acceptance ........................................................................................................... 23
1-05.13 Superintendents, Labor and Equipment of Contractor ........................................... 23
1-05.14 Cooperation with Other Contractors ......................................................................... 23
1-05.16 Water and Power .......................................................................................................... 24
1-05.17 Oral Agreements ........................................................................................................... 24
1-05.18 Contractor's Daily Diary ............................................................................................. 24
1-06 CONTROL OF MATERIAL .....:...................................................................................... 25
1-06.1 Approval of Materials Prior to Use ............................................................................... 25
1-06.2(1) Samples and Tests for Acceptance ................:.:......................................................... 25
1-06.2(2) Statistical Evaluation of Materials for Acceptance ................................................. 25
1-07 LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES TO THE PUBLIC ....................... 25
1-07.1 Laws to be Observed ...................................................................................................... 25
1-07.2 State Sales Tax ................................................................................................................ 26
1-07.2(1) General .......................................................................................................................26
1-07.2(2) State Sales Tax - Rule 171 ......................................................................................... 27
1-07.2(3) State Sales Taz - Rule 170 ......................................................................................... 27
1-Q7.2(4) Services--•-•-•• ...............................................................................................................27
1-07.6 Permits and Licenses ...................................................................................................... 27
1-07.9 Wages ...............................................................................................................................28
1-07.9(5) Required Documents ................................................................................................. 28
1-07.11 Requirements for Non-Discrimination ....................................................................... 28
1-07.11(11) City of Renton Affidavit of Compliance ............................................................... 28
1-07.12 Federal Agency Inspection .......................................................................................... 28
1-07.13 Contractor's Responsibility for Work ........................................................................ 28
1-07.13(1) General ....................................:................................................................................28
1-07.15 Temporary Water Pollution/Erosion Control ............................................................ 28
1-07.16 Protection and Restoration of Property ..................................................................... 29
1-07.16(1) Private/Public Property ....................:..................................................................... 29
1-07.17 Utilities and Similar Facilities ..................................................................................... 30
1-07.17(1) Interruption of Services ...........................................•--............................................ 31
2
�
'
'
�
�
�
,
�
�
,
�
�
'
,
�
�
,
�
1-07.18 Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance ..................................................... 31
1-07.18(1) General .....................................................................................................................31
1-07.18(2) Coverages ................................................................................................................. 32
1-07.18(3) Limits ........................................................................................................:...............33
1-07.18(4) Evidence of Insurance :............................................................................................ 34
1-07.22 Ose of Explosives .......................................................................................................... 34
1-07.23 Public Convenience and Safety ................................................................................... 34
1-07.23(1) Construction Under Traffic ....................:............................................................... 34
1-07.23(2) Construction and Maintenance of Detours ........................................................... 36
1-07Z4 Rights of Way ................................................................................................................ 36
1-08 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS ............................................................................... 37
1-08.0 Preliminary Matters ....................................................................................................... 37
1-08.0(1) Preconstraction Conference ..................................................................................... 37
1-08.0(2) Hours of Work ........................................................................................................... 38
1-08.0(3) Reimbursement for Qvertime Work of Contracting Agency Employees ............. 38
1-08.1 Subcontracting ............................................................................................................... 38
1-08.2 Assignment ......................................................................................................................39
1-083 Progress Schedule ........................................................................................................... 39
1-08.4 Notice to Proceed and Prosecution of the Work .......................................................... 40
1-08.5 Time For Completion ..................................................................................................... 40
1-08.6 Suspension of Work ........................................................................................................ 42
1-08.7 Maintenance During Suspension .................................................................................. 42
1-08.9 Liquidated Damages ...................................................................................................... 42
1-08.11 Contractor's Plant and Equipment ............................................................................. 42
1-08.12 Attention to Work ......................................................................................................... 43
1-09 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ............................................................................... 43
1-09.1 Measurement of Quantities ............................:.............................................................. 43
1-09.3 Scope of Payment ........................................................................................................... 44
1-09.6 Force Account......-• ......................................................................................................... 44
1-09.7 Mobilization ....................................................................................................................44
1-09.9 Payments .........................................................................................................................45
1-09.9(1) Retainage ....................................................................................................................46
1-09.9(2) Contracting Agency's Right to Withhold and Disburse Certain Amounts........... 46
1-09.9(3) Final Payment ............................................................................................................ 47
1-09.11 Disputes and Claims ...................................................................................................... 48
3
1-09.11(2) Claims ................................................................................»..................................... 48
1-09.11(3) Time Limitations and Jurisdiction ......................................................................... 48
1-09.13 Claims and Resolutions ................................................................................................. 48
1-09.13(3) Claims $250,000 or Less .......................................................................................... 48
1-09.13(3)A Administration of Arbitration .............................................................................. 48
1-09.13(3)B Procedures to Pursue Ar6itration ....................................................................... 48
1-09.14 Payment Sc6edule .........................................�.....................................................,....... 49
1-09.14(1) Scope .........................................................................................................................49
1-09.14(2) Bid Items - ................................................................................................................ 49
1-09.14(2) Bid Items .................................................................................................................. 50
1-10 TEIVIPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL ........................................................................... 50
1-10.1 General .....................................................................:......................................................50
1-10.2(1)B Traffic Control Supervisor ..................................................................................... 51
1-10.2(2) Traffic Control Plans ................................................................................................. 51
1-10.3 Flagging, Signs, and All Other Traffic Control Devices .............................................. 51
1-10.3(3) Construction Signs ..................................................................................................... 52
1-10.4 Measurement ..................................................................................................................52
1-10.5 Payment ...........................................................................................................................52
1-11 RENTON SURVEYING STANDARDS .......................................................................... 52
1-11.1{1) Responsibility for surveys ......................................................................................... 52
1-11.1(2) Survey Datum and Precision .................................................................................... 52
1-11.1(3) Subdivision Information ........................................................................................... 53
1-11.1(4) Field Notes .................................................................................................................. 53
1-11.1(5) Corners and Monuments .......................................................................................... 53
1-11.1(� Control or Base Line Survey ....................:...................................................
1-11.1(7) Precision Levels ...................................•-------..................................................
1-11.1(S) Radiat and Station - Offset Topography ....................................................
......... 53
54
..... 54
1-11.1(9) RacLal Topography .................................................................................................... 54
1-11.1(10) Station-Offset Topography ..................................................................................... 54
1-11.1(11) As-Built Survey ......................................................................................................... 54
1-ll.i{12) Monument Setting and Referencing ....................................................................... 55
1-11.12 Materials ....................................................................................................................... 55
1-11.12(1) Property/Lot Corners ......................................................•---.................................... 55
1-11.12(2) Monuments ..........................................:....................................................................55
1-11.12{3) Monument Case and Cover .................................................................................... 55
n
2-Ol CLEARING, GRUBBINGS AND ROADSIDE CLEANUP ............................................ 56
2-Ol.l Description ......................................................................................................................56
2-Ol.� Disposai of Usable Material and Debris ....................................................................... 56
2-01.5 Payment ...........................................................................................................................56
2-02 REMOVAL OF STRUCTIJRE AND OBSTRUCTIONS .............................................. 56
2-Q2.3(3) Removal of Pavement, Sidewalks, and Curbs ......................................................... 56
2-02.4 Measurement ..................................................................................................................56
2-Q2.5 Payment ...........................................................................................................................57
2-03 ROADWAY EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT ..................................................... 57
2-03.3 Construction Requirements .....................................................:.................................... 57
2-03.4 Measurement .......................................................................:..........................................58
2-03.5 Payment ...........................................................................................................................58
2-04 HAUL ................................................................................................................................. 58
2-04.5 Payment ...........................................................................................................................58
2-06 SUBGRADE PREPARATION :........................................................................................ 59
2-06.5 Measurement and Payment .......................................................................................... 59
2-09 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION ......................................................................................... 59
2-09.1 Description ......................................................................................................................59
2-09.3(1)D Disposal of Excavated Material ............................................................................. 59
2-09.4 Measurement ..................................................................................................................59
2-09.5 Payment ...........................................................................................................................59
5-04 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT ............................................................................ 60
5-04.2 Materials ......................................................................................................................... 60
5-04.3 Construction Requirements .......................................................................................... 60
5-04.3(5) Conditioning the Ezisting Surface ........................................................................... 61
5-04.3(5)A Preparation of Existing Surface ............................................................................ 61
5-04.3(7)A Mix Design ............................................................................................................... 62
5-04.3(8)A Acceptance Sampling and Testing—AMA Mixture ............................................. 62
5-04.3(1Q)B Control ...................................................................................................................62
5-04.5 Payment .................................................................................................:.........................62
5-04.5(1)A Price Adjustments for Quality of �MA Mixture ..............................:.................. 62
5-04.5(1)B Price Adjustments for Quality of HMA Compaction ........................................... 63
5-Q6 TEMPORARY RESTORATION IN PAVEMENT AREAS .......................................... 64
5-06.i Description ...................................................................................................................... 64
� 5-06.2 Materials
�
........................................................................................................... 64
G
5-06.3 Construction Requirements .......................................................................................... 64
7-Ol DRAINS ......_ ..................................................................................................................... 64
7-01.2 Materials .................................................................................:.:..................................... 64
7=01.3 Construction Requirements .......................................................................................... 64
7-01.4 Measurement ........................................................•---....---...............................................65
7-02 CULVERTS ....................................................:.................................................................. 65
7-02.2 Materials ........................................
....................................... 65
7-04 STORM SEWERS ...........................................................................
65
7-04.2 Materials .............................................................................................:........................... 65
7-04.4 Measurement ..................................................................................................................65
7-04.5 Payment ...........................................................................................................................65
7-05 MANHOLES, INLETS, AND CATCH BASINS ............................................................ 66
7-Q5.3 Construction Requirements .......................................................................................... 66
7-05.3(1) Adjusting 1Vlanholes and Catch Basins to Grade .................................................... 6b
7-05.3(2) Abandon Existing Manholes ..................................................................................... 67
7-05.3{2)A Abandon Existing Sanitary Se�ver Pipes ............................................................... 67
7-05.3(3) Connections to Existing Manholes ........................................................................... 67
7-05.3(5) Manhole Coatings ...................................................................................................... 68
7-05.4 Measurement .................................................................................................................. 68
7-05.5 Payment ...........................................................................................................................68
7-08 GENERAL PIPE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS .............................................. 69
7-08.3 Construction Requirements .......................................................................................... 69
7-08.3(1)C Bedding the Pipe .........................................................................:........................... 69
7-08.3(1)D Pipe Foundation ..................................................................................................... 69
7-08.3(2)A Survey Line and Grade .......................................................................................... 69
7-08.3(2)B Pipe Laying — General ............................................................................................ 69
7-Q8.3(2)E Rubber Gasketed 3oints ......................................................................................... 70
7-08.3(2)H Sewer Line Connections ......................................................................................... 70
7-08.3(2}J Placing PVC Pipe ..................................................................................................... 70
7-08.3(3)A Backfilling Sanitary Sewer Trenches ..................................................................... 70
7-08.4 Measarement .....................................:........._.................................................................71
7-08.5 Payment ...........................................................................................................................71
7-09 PIPE AND FI'I'TINGS FOR WATER MAINS ................................................•--............ 72
7-09.3(1�A Ductile Iron Pipe ................................................................................................... 72
7-09.3(15)B Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC} Pipe (4 inches and Over) .......................................... 72
Csf
,
�
,
�
,
,
7-09.3(1'n Laying Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings with Polyet6ylene .................................... 72
7-09.3(19)A Connections to Existing Mains ........................................................................:... 72
7-09.3(21) Concrete Thrust Blocking and Dead-Man Block .................................................. 73
7-49.3(23) Hydrostatic Pressure Test ....................................................................................... ?3
7-09.3(24)A Flushing and `Poly-pigging' ............................ ......---...... 74
..............••-----.................
7-09.3(24)D Dry Calcium Hypochlorite .................................:................................................. 74
7-09.3(24}K Retention Period ................................................................................................... 74
7-09.3(24)N Final Flushing and Testing ................................................................................... 74
7-09.3(2� Joint Restraint Systems ........................................................................................... 74
7-09.4 Measurement ..................................................................................................................76
7-09.5 Payment ...........................................................................................................................76
' 7-12 VALVES FOR WATER MAINS ...................................................................................... 77
7-12.3(1) Installation of Valve Marker Post ............................................................................ 77
� 7-12.3(2) Adjust Existing Vaive Box to Grade ......................................................................... 77
7-12.4 Measurement ..................................................................................................................77
7-12.5 Payment ...................••---..............................................................:..............---.....:.............78
7-14 HYDRANTS .....--• .............................................................................................................. 78
7-14.3(1) Setting Hydrants ........................................................................................................ 78
7-14.3(3) Resetting Existing Hydrants ..................................................................................... 79
7-14.3(4) Moving E�sting Hydrants ........................................................................................ 79
7-14.5 Payment ........................................................................................................................... ?9
7-15 SERVICE CONECTIONS ............................................................................................... 79
7-15.3 Construction Details ....................................................................................................... 79
7-15.5 Payment ...........................................................................................................................80
7-17 SAi�TITARY SEWERS ....................................................................................................... 80
7-17.2 Materials ......................................................................................................................... 80
7-17.3 Construction Requirements .....................................................................:.................... 80
7-17.3(1) Protection of Existing Sewerage Facilities ............................................................... 80
7-17.3(2)H Television Inspection ....................................... ................ 80
.......................................
7-17.4 iVleasurement ..................................................................................................................81
7-17.5 Payment ......................................................................................_...................................81
8-09 RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS ................................................................................. 81
8-09.5 Payment ..................................................................................•--•-•--.........................----....81
5-13 MONUMENT CASES ...................................................................................................... 82
' 8-13.1 Description
�
................................................................................... 8 2
fl
5-13.3 Construction Requirements .......................................................................................... 82
8-13.4 Measurement ..................................................................................................................82
8-13.5 Payment ...........................................................................................................................82
5-14 CEMENT CONCRETE SIDEWALKS ........................................................................... 82
8-14.3(4) Curing .........................................................................................................................82
8-14.4 Measurement ..:...............................................................................................................82
8-14.5 Payment ...........................................................................................................................83
8-17 IlVIPACT ATTENUATOR SYSTEMS ............................................................................. 83
5-17.5 Payment ...........................................................................................................................83
8-20 ILLUNIINATION, TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEMS, AND ELECTRICAL ................. 83
8-20.2(1) Equipment List and Drawings ................................................................................. 83
8-22 PAVEMENT MARKING .................................................................................................. 83
5-22.1 Description ............................................:.........................................................................83
8-22.3(� Installation Instructions ............................................................................................ 84
8-22.5 Payment .............................................:............................................................•---.............84
8-23 TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKINGS ................................................................:.... 85
8-23.5 Payment ...............................................................................•----••---.......---........................85
9-03.8('n HMA Tolerances and Adjustments ........................................................................... 85
9-OS DRAINAGE STRUCTURES, CULVERTS, AND CONDiJITS ................................... 85
9-05.4 Steel Culvert Pipe and Pipe Arch (RC) .....................................................
................... 85
9-05.7(2) Reinforced Concrete Storm Se�ver Pipe (RC) ......................................................... 85
9-05.7(2)A Basis for Acceptance (RC) ...................................................................................... 86
9-05.7(3) Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe Joints (RC) .................. ................ 86
................................
9-05.7(4) Testing Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe Joints (RC) ..................................................... 86
9-05.9 Steel Spiral Rib Storm Sewer PiPe (RC) • ...........................................:......................... 86
9-05.12 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe ................................................................................... 87
9-05.12(3) CPEP Sewer Pipe ...............................................•--................................................... 87
9-05.14 ABS Composite Sewer Pipe ......................................................................................... 87
9-05.17 Aluminum Spiral Rib Storm Sewer Pipe ................................................................:... 87
9-05.22 High Density Polyethylene Piping ............................................................................... 87
9-08 PAINTS .............................................................................................................................. 89
9-08.8 Manhole Coating System Products ............................................................................... 89
9-08.8(1) Coating Systems Specification ....................................................................... .....--- 89
9-23 C0�ICRETE CURI�iG MATERIALS AND ADMIXTURES ....................................... 89
9-23.9 Fly Ash (RC) .....................................................................................•------....:.................. 89
�'.�
l _J
'9-30 WATER DISTRIBIJT'ION MATERIALS ....................................................................... 89
9-30.1(1) Ductile Iron Pipe (RC) .............................................................................................. 89
, 9-30.3(1) Gate Valves (3inches to 12 inches) ............................................................................ 89
9-30.3(3) Butterfly Valves .......................................................................................................... 90
' 9-30.3(� Valve Marker Posts .................................................................................................... 90
9-30.3('n Combination Air Release/Air Vacuum Valves ......................................................... 90
, 9-30.3(8) Tapping Sleeve and Valve Assembly .......................................................... ..... 91
9-30.3(9) Blow-Off Assembly .................................................................................................... 91
9-30.5 Hydrants ......................................................................................................................... 91
'
9-30.5{1) End Connections (RC) .............................................................................................. 91
, 9-30.5(2) Fiydrant Dimensions .................................................................................................. 91
9-30.6(3)B Polyethylene Pipe .................................................................................................... 92
'9-30.6(4) Service Fittings ........................................................................................................... 92
9-30.6(5) Meter Seiters .............................................................................................................. 92
,
'
,
'
�
,
�
'
'
�
,
E
' 10l26/ZO 10
�
�
I
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1-Ol DEFINITIONS AND TERMS
' 1-01.1 General
Section 1-01.1 is supplemented with:
�*�*�*��
Whenever reference is made to the State, State of Washington, Commission, Department of
, Transportation, Secretary of Transportation, Owner, Contracting Agency or Engineer, such reference
shall be deemed to mean the City of Renton acting through its City Council, employees, and duly
authorized representatives for all contracts administered by the City of Renton.
,
,
'
,
�
�
�
'
,
'
,
'
l _]
�
All references to "State Materials Laboratory" shall be revised to read "Contracting Agency
designated location".
1-01.3 Definitions
Section 1-01.3 is revised and supplemented by the following:
�*:�****�
Act of God
"Act of God" means an earthquake, flood, cyclone, or other cataclysmic phenomenon of nature. A
rain, windstorm, high water or other natural phenomenon of unusual intensity for the specific locality
of the Work, which might reasonably have been anticipated from historical' records of the general
locality of the Work, shall not be construed as an act of god.
Consulfing Enb neer
The Contracting Agency's design consultant, who may or may not administer the construction
program for the Contractmg Agency.
Contract Documents
See definition for "Contract".
Contract Price
Either the unit price, the unit prices, or lump sum price or prices named in the proposal, or in properly
executed change orders.
Contract Time
The period of time established by the terms and conditions of the Contract within which the Work
must be physically completed.
Dates
Bid Opening Date: The date on which the Contracting Agency publicly opens and reads the
bids.
Award Date: The date of the formal decision of the Contracting Agency to accept the lowest
responsible and responsive Bidder for the Work.
Contract Execution Date: The date the Contracting Agency officially binds the agency to
the Contract.
Notice to Proceed Date: The date stated in the Notice to Proceed on which the Contract Time
begins, also referred to as the date of commencement.
Substantial Completion Date: T'he day the Engineer determines the Contracting Agency has
full and unrestricted use and benefit of the facilities, both from the operational and safety
standpoint, and only minor incidental Work, replacement of temporary substitute facilities, or
correction or repair remains for the physical completion of the total contract.
10
iaz6rzoio
Contract Completion Date: The date by which the Work is contractually required to be
physically completed. The Contract Completion Date will be stated in the Notice to Proceed.
Revisions of this date will be authorized in writing by the Engineer whenever there is an
extension to the Contract time.
Completion Date: The day all tl�e Work specified in the Contract is completed and all the
obligations of the Contractor under the Contract are fulfilled by the Contractor.
Final Acceptance Date: The date the Contracring Agency accepts the Work as complete per
the Contract requirements.
Day
Unless otherwise designated, day(s) as used in the Contract Documents, shall be understood to mean
working days.
Enb neer
The City Engineer or duly authorized representative, or an authorized member of a licensed
consulting firm retained by the Owner for the construction engineering of a specific public works
project.
Inspector
The Owner's authorized representative assigned to make necessary observations of the Work
performed or being performed, or of materials furnished or being furnished by the Contractor.
No6ce of Award: The written notice from the Contracting Agency to the successful bidder signifying
the Contracting Agency's acceptance of the bid.
Notice to Proceed: The written norice from tl�e Contracting Agency or the Engineer to the Contractor
authorizing and directing the Contractor to proceed with Work and establishing the date on which the
Contract time begins.
Or Equal
Where the term "or equal" is used herein, the Contracting Agency, or the Contracting Agency on
recommendation of the Engineer, shall be the sole judge of the quality and suitability of the proposed
substitution. The responsibility and cost of fumishing necessary evidence, demonstrations, or other
information required to obtain the approval of altemative materials or processes by the Owner shall
be entuely bome by the Contractor.
O�vner
The City of Renton or its autharized representative also referred to as Contracting Agency.
Performance and Payment Bond
Same as "Contract Bond" deimed in fhe Standard Specifications.
Plans
The Contract Plans and/or Standard Plans which show location, character, and dimensions of
prescribed Work including layouts, profiles, cross-sections, and other details. Drawings may either be
bound in the same book as the balance of the Contract Documents or bound in separate sets, and are a
part of the Contract Documents, regardless of the method of binding. The terms "Standard Drawings"
or "Standard Details" generally used in Specifications refers to drawings bound either with the
specification documents or included with the Plans or the City of Renton Standard Plans.
Points
Wherever reference is made to the Ena neer's points, this shall mean all marks, bench marks,
reference points, stakes, hubs, tack, etc., established by the Enb neer for maintaining horizontal and
vertical control of the Work.
11
'
�
'
,
,
'
'
,
�
J
�
'
--,
J
,
,
,
,
Ji
,
,
'
10/26.'2010
Provide
Means "furnish and install" as specified and shown in the Plans.
' Secretary, Secretary of Transportation
The cluef executive officer of the Department and other authorized representatives. The chief
executive officer to the Department shall also refer to the Department of Public Works Administrator.
'
�
�
u
Shop Drawings
Same as "Working Drawings" defined in the Standard Specifications.
Special Provisions
Modifications to the Standard Specifications and their amendments .that apply to an individual
project. The special provisions may describe Work the Specificarions do not cover. Such Work shall
comply first with the Special Provisions and then with any Specifications that apply. The Contractor
shall include all costs of doing this Work within the bid prices.
State
The state of Washington acting through its representatives. The State shall also refer to The City of
Renton and its authorized representarives where applicable_
Supplementai Drawings and Instructions
� Additional instructions by the Engineer at request of the Contractor by means of drawings or
documents necessary, in the opinion of the Engineer, for the proper execution of the Work. Such
drawings and instructions are consistent with the Contract Documents.
,
�
�
'
�
�
r
�
�
�
Traffic
Both vehicular and non-vehicular traffic, such as pedestrians, bicyclists, wheelchairs, and equestrian
traffic.
Utility
Public or private fixed improvement for the transportation of fluids, gases, power, signals, or
communications and shall be understood to include tracks, overhead and underground wires, cables,
pipelines, conduits, ducts, sewers, or storm drains.
1-02 SID PROCEDURES AND CONDITIONS
1-02.1 Prequalification of Bidders
Delete this Section and replace it with the following:
�******�
Bidders . shall be qualified by experience, financing, equipment, and organizarion to do the .Work
called for in the Contract Documents. The Contracting Agency reserves the right to take whatever
action it deems necessary to ascertain the ability of the bidder to perform the Work satisfactorily.
1-02.2 Plans and Specifications
Delete this Section and replace it with the following:
{�::x****�
Information as to where Bid Documents can be obtained or reviewed will be foUnd in the Ca11 for
Bids (Advertisement for Bids) for the Work.
� 12
10/26/2010
After award of the Contract, Plans and Specifications will be issued to the Contractor at no cost as
detailed below:
Additional Plans and Contract Provisions may be purchased by the Contractor by payment of the cost
stated in the Call for Bids.
1-02.5 Proposal Forms
Delete this Section and replace it with the following:
�***�**,
At the request of the bidder, the Contracring Agency will provide a proposal form for any project on
which the bidder is eligible to bid
The proposal form will identify the project and its location and describe the Work. It will also list
estimated quantities, units of ineasurement, the items of Work, and the materials to be furnished at the
unit bid prices. The bidder shall complete spaces on the proposal form that call for, but are not
limited to, unit bid prices; extensions; summaUons; the total bid amount; signatures; date; and, where
applicable, retail sales taxes and acknowledgement of addenda; the bidder's name, address, telephone
number, and signature; and a State of Washington Contractor's Registration Number. Bids shall be
completed by typing .or shall be printed in ink by hand, preferably in black ink. The required
certifications are included as part of the proposal form.
The Contracting Agency reserves the right to arrange the proposal forms with alternates and additives,
if such be to the advantage of the Contracting Agency. The bidder shall bid on all alternates and
additives set forth in the proposal forms unless otherwise specified.
Any correction to a bid made by interlineations, alteration, or erasure, shall be initialed by the signer
of the bid. The bidder shall make no stipulation on the Bid Form, nor qualify the bid in any manner.
A bid by a corporation shall be executed in the corporate name, by the president or a vice president
(Or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to si�).
A bid by a partnership shall be executed in the partnership name, and signed by a parmer. A copy of
the parinership agreement shall be submitted with the Bid Form if any D/M/WBE requirements are to
be satisfied through such an agreement.
A bid by a joint venture shall be executed in the joint venture name and signed by a member of the
joint venture. A copy of the joint venture agreement shall be submitted with the Bid Form if any
D/W/MBE requirements are to be satisfied through such an agreement.
1-02.6 Preparation of Proposal
The second paragraph is revised as follows:
�***�:**�
All prices shall be in legible figures and words written in ink or typed. The proposal shall include:
1. A unit price for each item (omitting digits more than four places to the right of the decimal
point). In the event of errors or where conflict occurs, the unit price bid will govern.
1-02.6(1) Proprietary Information
1-02.6(1) is a new Section_
�***�**}
Vendors should, in the bid proposal, identify clearly any material(s), which constitute "(valuable)
formula, designs drawin�, and research data" so as to be exempt from public disclosure, RCW
42.17.310, or any materials otherwise claimed to be exempt, along with a Statement of fhe basis
13
,
,
1
,
�
i
'
i
I
'I
�
'
L_J
LJ
LJ
�
�
,
�
�
�
t
,
L�
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
1
�
�
�
� az6,�zo io
for such claim of exemption_ The Department (or State) will give notice to the vendor of any
request for disclosure of such informarion received within 5(five) years from the date of
submission. Failure to so label such materials or failure to timely respond after notice of request
for public disclosure has been given shall be deemed a waiver by the submitting vendor of any
claim that such materials are, in fact, so exempt.
1-02.7 Bid Deposit
Section 1-02.7 is supplemented with the following:
�***:x**�
Bid Bonds shall contain the following:
2
3
4
5.
�
Number assib ed to the project by the Contracting Agency;
Name of the project;
The Contracting Agency named as obligee;
The amount of the bid bond stated either as a dollar figure or as a percentage which
represents five percent of the maximum bid amount that could be awarded;
Signature of the bidder's officer empowered to sign official statements. � The signature of the
person authorized to submit the bid should a�ee with the signature on the bond, and the title
of the person must accompany said signature;
The signature of the surety's officer empowered to sign the bond form included in the
Contract Provision.
1-02.9 Deiivery of Proposal
Revise the first paragraph to read:
�**�:�**�
Each proposal shall be submitted in a sealed envelope, with
stated m the Advertisement for Bids, clearlv marked on the o�
stated in the Bid Documents, to ensure proper handling and de:
as
1-02.12 Public Opening of Proposals .
Section 1-02.12 is supplemented with the following:
�******�
The Contracting Agency reserves the right to postpone the date and time for bid opening.
Notification to bidder will be by addenda.
1-02.13 Irregular Proposals
Revise item I to read:
�***:x**�
1. A proposal will be considered irreb lar and will be rejected i£
a. The bidder is not prequalified when so required;
b. The authorized proposal form furnished by the Contracting Agency is not used or is
altered;
c. The complete proposal form contains any unauthorized additions, deletions, alternate
bids, ar condirions;
d. The bidder adds provisions reserving the right to reject or accept the award, or enter
into the Contract;
e. A price per unit cannot be determined from the bid proposal;
f. The proposal form is not properly executed;
g. The bidder fails to submit or properly compiete a subcontractor list, if applicable, as
required in Secrion 1-2.6
h. The bidder fails to submit or properly complete a Disadvantaged, Minority or
Women's Business Enterprise Cert�cation, if appiicable, as required in Section 1-
02.6; or
i. The bid proposal does not constitute a definite and unqualified offer to meet the
material terms of the bid invitation.
1-0214 Disyualification of Bidders
Revise this section to read:
14
�a26noio
!###*##1
l 1
1. A bidder will be deemed not responsible and the proposal rejected if the bidder does not meet
the responsibility criteria in RCW 39.04.
2. A bidder may be deemed not responsible and the proposal rejected if:
a. More than one proposal is submitted for the same project from a bidder under the same or
different names;
b. Evidence of collusion exists with any other bidder or potenrial bidder. Participants in
collusion will be restricted from submitting further bids;
c. The bidder, _in the opinion of the Contracting A�encX, is not qualified for the Work or to
the full extent of the bid, or to the extent that the bid exceeds the authorized
d. An unsatisfactory performance record exists based on past or current Contracting Agency
Work or for Work done for others, as judged from the standpoint of conduct of the Work;
workmansbip; progress; affirmative action; equal employment opportunity practices; or
Disadvantaged Enterprise, Minority Enterprise, or Women's Business Enterprise
utilization.
e_ There is uncompleted Work (Contracting Agency or otherwise) which might hinder or
prevent the prompt complerion of the Work bid upon;
f. The bidder failed to settle bills for labor or matenals on past or current contracts;
g_ The bidder has failed to complete a written public contract or has been convicted of a
crime arising from a previous public contract;
h. The bidder is unable, financially or otherwise, to perform the Work;
i. A bidder is not authorized to do business in the State of Washington (not registered in
accordance with RCW 18.27)
j. There are any other reasons deemed proper by the Contracting Agency.
1-02.15 Pre Award Information
Revise this section to read:
�****s*�
Before awazding any contract, the Contracting Agency may require one or more of these items or
acrions of
3_
4.
5.
6_
7.
8.
A coinplete statement of the origin, compositian, and manufacture of any or all materials to
be used;
Samples of these materials for quality and fimess tests;
A progress schedule (in a form the Contracting Agency requires) showing the order of time
required for the various phases of Work;
A breakdown of costs assigned to any bid item;
Attending at a conference with the Engineer or representatives of the Engineer;
,,, . • , ,. • , ,. , . .. . . . . _ . _ .
�-+ cupv u� ��a�e or wasnm��on �onuacior s xe�strat�on; or
Any other information or action taken that is deemed necessary to ensure that the bidder is
the lowest responsible bidder.
1-03 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF CONTRACT
1-031 Consideration of bids
Section 1-03.1 is supplemented with the following:
�**�***�
All bids will be based on total sum of all schedules of prices. No partial bids will be accepted unless
so stated in the call for bids or special provisions. The City reserves the right however to award all or
any schedule of a bid to the towest bidder at its discretio�
1-03.2 Award of Contract
Section 1-03.2 is supplemented with the following:
�******�
15
II
u
'
'
,
,
�
�
1
,
I�
�
'
�--,
L_ J
i
�
I
�
,
�
�
�
�
'
'
,
'
r—�
L�
�
'
I
10/26(2010
The Contract, bond form, and all other forms requiring execution, together with a list of all other
forms or documents required to be submitted by the successful bidder, will be forwarded to the
successful bidder within 10 days of the award. The number of copies to be executed by the
Contractor shall be determined by the Contracting Agency. �
1-03.3 Execution of Contract
Section 1-03.3 is revised and supplemented as follows:
�******�
Within 10 calendar days after receipt from the City of the forms and documents required to be
completed by the Contractor, the successful bidder sball return the signed Contracting Agency-
prepared contract, an insurance certification as required by Section 1-07.18, and a satisfactory bond as
required by law and Secrion 1-03_4_ Before execution of the Contract by the Contracting Agency, the
successful bidder shall provide any pre-award information the Contracting Agency may require under
Section 1-02.15.
Unti1 the Contracting Agency executes a contract, no proposal shall bind the ContractinD Agency nor
shall any Work begin within the project limits or w�thin Contracting Agency-furnished sites. The
Contractor shall bear all risks for any Work begun outside such areas and for any materials ordered
before the Contract is executed by the Contracting Agency.
If the bidder experiences circumstances beyond their control that prevents return of the Contract
� documents within 10 calendar days after the award date, the Contracting Agency may grant up to a
ma�cimum of 10 additional calendar days for retum of the documents, provided the Contracting
Agency deems the circumstances wamant rt.
�
�
i
�
'
�J
�
�
�
,
The Contractin� Agency is prohibited by RCW 39.06.010 from executing a contract with a
Contractor who is not registered or licensed as required by the laws of the state. In addition, the
Contracting Agency requires gersons doing business with the Contracting Agency to possess a valid
City of Renton business license prior to award.
VJhen the Bid Form provides spaces for a business license number, a Wastington State Contractors
registration number, or both the Bidder shall insert such information in the spaces provided. The
Contracting Agency requires legible copies of the Contractor's Registration and business license be
submitted to the Engineer as part of the Contracting Agency's post-award information and evaluation
activities.
1-03.4 Contract Bond
Revise the first para�aph to read:
�*:�****�
The successful bidder shall provide an executed contract bond for the full contract amount. This
contract bond shall:
1
2
4_
Be on the Contracting Agency-furnished form;
Be signed by an approved surety (or sureties) that:
a. Is registered w�th the Washington State Insurance Commissioner, and
b. Appears on the current Authorized Insurance List in the State of Washington published by
the Office of the Insurance Commissioner;
Be conditioned upon the faithful performance of the Contract by the Contractor within the
prescribed time;
Guarantee that the surety shall indemnify, defend, and protect the Contracting Agency against
any claim of direct or indirect loss resulting from the failure:
a Of the Contractor (ar any of the employees, subcontractors, or lower tier subcontractors
of the Contractor) to faithfully perform the Contract, or
b. Of the Contractor (subcontractors, or lower tier subcontractors of the Contractor) to pay
all laborers, mechanics, subcontractors, lower tie subcontractors, material person, or any
other person who provides supplies or provisions for carrying out Work; ,
Be accompanied by a power of attomey for the Surety's officer empowered to sign the bond;
and
� 16
�on6noio
6. Be signed by an officer of the Contractor empowered to sign official statements (sole
propnetor or partner). If the Contractor is a corporation, the bond must be signed by the
pres�dent or vice-president, unless accompanied by a written proof of the authority of the
mdividual signing the bond to bind the corporation (i.e., corporate resolution; power of
attorney or a letter to such effect by the president or vice-president).
1-03.7 Judicial Review
Revise the last sentence to read:
The venue of atl causes of acrion arising from the advertisement, award, execution, and performance
of the Contract shall be in the Superior Court of the County wbere the Contracting Agency's
headquarters are located
1-04 SCOPE OF WORK
1-04.2 Coordination of Contract Documents, Plans, Special Provisions Specifcations,
and Addenda
Revise the second paragraph to read:
�******�
Any inconsistency in the parts of the Contract shall be resolved by following this order of precedence
(e.g_, 1 presiding over 2, 2 over 3, 3 over 4, and so forth):
1 _ Addenda
2. Proposal Form
3. Special Provisions (Section 10)
4. Special Provisions (Sections 1— 4)
5. Contract Plans
6. Contracting Agency's Standard Plans (if any)
7. Amendments to the Standard Specifications
8. WSDOT/APWA Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction
9. WSDOT/APWA Standard Plans for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction
1-04.3 Contractor-Discovered Discrepancies
Section 1-04_3 is a new secrion:
�******�
Upon receipt of award of contract, the Contractor shall cazefully study and compare all the
components of the Contract Documents and other instrucrions, and check and verify all field
measurements. The Contractor shall, prior to ordering material or performing Work, report in writing
to the Engineer any error, inconsistency, or omission in respect to desi� or mode of construction,
which is discovered. If the Contractor, in the course of this study or in the accomplishment of the
Work, finds any discrepancy between the Plans and the physical condition of the locality as
represented in the Plans, or any such errors or omissions in respect to design or mode of construction
in the Plans or in the layout as given by points and instructions, it shall be the Contractor's duty to
inform the Engineer immediately in wnting, and the Engineer will promptly check the same. Any
Wark done after such discovery, untit correction of Plans or authorization of extra Work is given, if
the Engineer finds that extra. Work is involved, will be done at the Contractor's risk. If extra Work is
involved, the procedure shall be as provided in Section 1-04:4 of the Standard Specifications.
1-04.4 Changes
The last two paragraphs are replaced with the following:
�******�
Renton does not have a formal policy or guidelines on cost reduction alternatives, but will evaluate
such proposals by the Contractor on a case-by-case basis.
1-04.8 Progress Estimates and Payments
Secrion 1-04.8 is supplemented as follows:
�*�****�
The Contractor is encouraged to provide to the Engineer prior to progress payments an estimate of
"Lump Sum" Work accomplished to date. The Engmeer s calculations and decisions shall be final in
'
,
,
�
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
I
�
�
�
�
17
,
LJ
�
u
�
�
�
i
�
�
10/26,�2010
regard to the actual percentage of any lump sum pay item accomplished and eligible for payment
unless another specific method of calculatmg lump sum payments is provided elsewhere in the
Specifications.
1-04.11 Final Cleanup
Section 1-04.11 is supplemented as follows:
�******�
All salvage material as noted on the Plans and taken from any of the discarded facilities shall, at the
Engineer's discretion, be carefully salvaged and delivered to the City shops. Any cost incurred in
salvaging and delivering such items shall be considered incidental to the project and no compensation
will be made.
The Contract price for "Finish and Cleanup; Lump Sum," shall be full compensation for all Work,
equipment and materials required to perform final cleanup. If this pay item does not appear in the
Contract Documents then final cleanup shall be considered incidental to the Contract and to other pay
item and no further compensarion shall be made.
1-OS CONTROL OF WORK
1-05.3 Plans and Working Drawings
Section 1-05.3 is supplemented with the following:
�:�**�**�
Five (5) hardcopies of eaeh submittal shall be provided.
Submittals: Submittals are samples, product data, working drawings, and others that demonstrate how
CONTRACTOR intends to conform with the Contract Documents.
Produet data shall include the following:
Catalog cuts.
Bulletins.
Brochures.
Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance: signed by product manufacturer along
with supporting reference data, affidavits, and tests, as appropriate.
Manufacturer's printed recommendations for installation of equipment.
Quality photocopies of applicable pages from manufacturer's documents.
, 1-05.4 Conformity With and Deviation from Plans and Stakes
Section 1-05.4 is supplemented with the following:
�******�
� If the project calls for the Contractor supplied surveying, the Contractor shall provide all required
survey Work, including such Work as mentioned in Sections 1-05, 1-11 and elsewhere in these
Specifications as being provided by the Engineer. All costs for this survey Work shall be included in
the lump sum bid price for "Westview Lift Station Upgrades."
� _J
'
The Engineer or the Contractor supplied surveyor will provide construction stakes and marks
establishing lines, slopes, and grades as stipulated in Sections 1-05.4 and will perform such Work per
Section 1-1 l. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for detaited dimensions, elevations, and
excavation slopes measured from the Engineer or the Contractor supplied surveyor fumished stakes
and marks.
The Contractor shall provide a work site, which has been prepared to permit construction staking to
, proceed in a safe and orderly manner. The Contractor shall keep the Engineer or the Contractor
suppiied surveyor informed of sta.king requirements and provide at least 48 hours notice to allow the
Engmeer or the Gontractor supplied surveyor adequate time for setting stakes.
�
�
The Contractor shall carefully preserve stakes, marks, and other reference points, includin� existing
monumentation, set by Contracting Agency forces. The Contractor will be chazged for the costs of
replacing stakes, markers and monumentation that were not to be disturbed but were destroyed or
18
10/26/2010
damaged by the Contractor's operations. This charge will be deducted from monies due or to become
due to the Contractor_
Any claim by the Contractor for extra eomgensation by reason of alterations or reconstruction Work
allegedly due to error in the Engineer's line and grade, will not be allowed unless the original control
points set by the Engineer still exist, or unless other satisfactory substantiating evidence to prove the
error was furnished by the Engineer. Three consecutive points set. on line or grade shall. be the
minimum points used to determine any variation from a straight line or grade. Any such variation
shall, upon discovery, be reported to the Engineer. In the absence of such report the Contractor shall
be liable for any error in alignment or grade.
The Contractor shall provide all surveys required other than those to be performed by the Engineer.
All survey Work shall be done in accordance with Section 1-11 SURVEYING STANDA.RDS of
these Specifications.
The Contractor shall keep updated survey field notes in a standard field book and in a format set by
the Engineer, per Section 1-11.1(4). These field notes shall include all survey Work performed by the
Contractor`s surveyor in establishing line, grade and slopes for the construction Work. Copies of these
field notes shall be provided the Engineer upon request and upon completion of the Contract Work
the field book or books shall be submitted to the Engineer and become the property of the Contracting
Agency.
If the survey Work provided by the Contractor does not meet the standards of the Engineer, then the
Contractor shall, upon the Engineer's written request, remove the individual or individuals doing the
survey Work and the survey Work will be completed by the Engineer at the Contractor's expense.
Costs for completing the survey Work required by the Engineer will be deducted from monies due or
to become due the Contractor.
All costs for survey Work required to be performed by the Contractor shall be included in the prices
bid for the various items which comprise the improvement or be included in the bid item for
"Contractor Supplied Surveying" per lump sum if that item is included in the contracts.
1-05.4(3) Contractor Supplied Surveying
Section 1-05.4(3) is a new section:
�*�:�***�
When the Contract provides for Contractor Supplied Surveying, the Contractor shall supply the
survey Work required for the project. The Contractor shall retain as a part of the Contractor
Organization an ezperienced team of surveyors under the direct supervision of a professional land
surveyor licensed by the State of Washington. All survey Work shall be done in accordance with
Sections 1-OS_4 and 1-11..
The Contractor and/or the Surveyor shall inform the Engineer in writing of any errors, discrepancies,
and omissions to the Plans that prevent the Contractor and/or the Surveyor from constructing the
project in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. All errors, discrepancies, and omissions must be
corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer before the survey Work may be continued.
The Contractor shall coordinate his Work with the Surveyor and perform his operations in a manner
to protect ali survey stakes from harm. The Contractor shall inform the Surveyor of the Contractor's
intent to remove any survey stakes and/or points before physically removing them.
The Surveyor shall be responsible for maintaining As-Built records for the project. The Contractor
shall coordinate his operations and assist the Surveyor in maintaining accurate As-Built records for
the project_
If the Contractor and the Surveyor fail to provide, as directed by the Engineer and/or these Plans and
Specifications, accurate As-Built records and other Work the Engineer deems necessary, the Engineer
may elect to provide at Contractor expense, a surveyor to provide all As-Built records and ofher Work
as directed by the Enb neer. The Engineer shall deduct expenses incurred by tbe. Engineer-supplied
f��
,
�
L�
�
] 0/26Y1010
surveying from monies owed to the Contractor.
Payment per Section 1-04.1 for all Work and materials required for the full and complete survey
Work required to complete the project and As-Built drawings shall be included in the lump sum price
for "Westview Lift Station Upgrades_"
' 1-05.4(4) Contractor Provided As-Built Information
Section I-05.4(4) is a new section:
�*��***�
It shall be the Contractors responsibility to record the location prior to the backfilling of the trenches,
� by centerline station, offset, and depth below pavement, of all existing urilities uncovered or crossed
during his Work as covered under this project.
�
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
'
�
,
�
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to have his Surveyor locate by centerline station, offset and
elevarion each major item of Work done under this contract per the survey standard of Section 1-11.
Major items of Work shall include but not be limited to: Manholes, Catch basins and Inlets, Valves,
vertical and Horizontal Bends, Junction boxes, Cleanouts, Side Sewers, Street Lights & Standards,
Hydrants, Maior Changes in Design Grade, Vaults, Culverts, Signal Poles, and Electrical Cabinets.
After the completion of the Work covered by this contract, the Contractor's Surveyor shall provide to
the City the hard covered field book(s) containing the as-built notes and one set of white prints of the
project drawings upon which he has plotted the notes of the Contractor locating existing utilities, and
one set of white prmts of the project drawings upon which he has plotted the as-built location of the
new Work as he recorded in the field book(s). T'his drawing shall bear the Surveyor's seal and
signature certifying its accuracy.
All costs for as-built Work shall be included in the Contract item "Westview Lift Station Upgrades",
lump sum.
1-05.7 Removal of Defective and/or Unauthorized Work
Section 1-05.7 is supplemented as follows:
�******�
Upon written notice from the Engineer, the Contractor shall promptly replace and re-execute Work by
Contractor forces, in accordance with the intent of the Contract and without expense to the Owner,
and shall bear the expense of making good all Work of other contractors destroyed or damaged by
such removal or replacement.
If the Contractor does not remove such condemned Work and materials and commence re-execution
of the Work within 7 calendar days of written notice from the Engineer, or fails to perform any part of
the Work required by the Contract Documents, the Owner may correct and remedy such Work as may
be idenrified in the written notice, with Contracting Agency forces or by such other means as the
Contracting Agency may deem necessary. In that case, the Owner may store removed material.
Direct or indirect costs incurred by the Contracting Agency attributable to correcting and remedying
defective or unauthorized Work, or Work the Contractor failed or refused to perform, shall be paid by
the Contractor. Payment will be deducted by the Engineer from monies due, or to become due, the
Contractor. Such direct and indirect costs shall indude in parricuIar, but without limitation,
compensarion for additional professional services required, and costs for repair and replacement of
Work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of the Contractor's
unauthorized Work.
If sufficient funds do not remain in the Contract and the Con�-actor does not pay the cost of such
removal and storage within 10 calendar days from the date of the notice to the Contractor of the fact
of such removal, the Owner may, ugon an additional 10 calendar days written notice, sell such
materials at public or pnvate sale, and deduct all costs and expenses incurred from monies due to the
Contractor, including costs of sale, and accounting to Contractor for the net proceeds remaining. The
Owner may bid at any such sale. The Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for the amount of any
deficiency from any funds atherwise due the Contractor.
�
10/26l2010
If the Contractor fails to comply with a written order to remedy what the Engineer determines to be
an emergency situation, the Engineer may have the defective and unauthorized Work corrected
immediately, have the rejected Work removed and replaced, or have Work the Contractor refuses to
perform completed by using Contracting Agency or other forces. An emergency situation is any
situation when, in the opinion of the Engineer, a delay in its remedy could be potentially unsafe, or
might cause serious risk of loss or damage to the public, the Property Owner and the Property
Owner's property.
No adjustment in contract time or compensation will be allowed because of the delay in the
performance of the Work attributable to the exercise of the Contracting Agency's rights provided by
this section.
The rights exercised under the provisions of this section shall not diminish the Contracting Agency's
rig�t to pursue any other avenue for additional remedy or damages with respect to the Contractor's
failure to perform the Work as required.
1-05.10 Guarantees
Section 1-05.10 is supplemented as follows:
�*:�*:�**�
If within onc ycar af�er thc Acccptancc Datc of thc �Vork by thc Contracting Agency, defcctivc and/or
unauthorized Work is discovered, the Contractor shall promptly, upon written order by the
Contracting Agency, return and in accordance with the Engmeer's instructions, either correct such
Work, or if such Work has been rejected by the Engineer, remove it from the project site and replace it
with non-defective and authorized Work, all without cost to the Contracring Agency. If the Contractor
does not promptly comply with the written order to correct defective and/or unauthorized Work, or if
an emergency exists, the Contracting Agency reserves the right to have defective and/or unauthorized
Work corrected or removed and replaced pursuant to Section 1-05.7 "Removal of Defective and/or
Unauthorized Work."
The Contractor agrees the above one year limitation shall not exclude or diminish the Contracting
Agency's rights under any law to obtain damages and recover costs resulting from defective and/or
unauthorized Work discovered after one year but prior to the expiration of the legal time period set
forth in RCW 4.16.040 limiting actions upon a contract in writing, or liability expressed of implied
arising out of a written ab eement.
The Contractor shall warrant good title to all materials, supplies, and equipment purchased for, or
incorporated in the Work. Nothing contained in this paragraph, however, shall defeat or impair the
right of persons furnishing materials or labor, to recover under any bond given by the Contractor for
their protection, or any rights under any law permitting such persons to look to funds due the
Contractor in the hands of the Contracting Agency.
The provisions of this para�aph shall be inserted in all subcontracts and material contracts, and
notice of its provisions sball be given to all persons furnishing materials for the Work when no formal
contract is entered into for such materials.
1-05.11 FinalInspection
1-OS.11(1) Substantial Completion Date
Section 1-05.1 I(1) is a new section:
�*�****�
When the Contractor considers the Work to be substantialiy complete, the Contractor shall so notify
the Engineer and request the Engineer establish the Substantial Completion Date. The Engineer �uill
schedule an inspection of the Work with the Contractor to determine the status of completion.
21
�
�
�
,
'
�
�
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
,
f
�_ .
'
�
,
�
i orz6no io
To be considered substantially complete tlie following conditions must be met:
� 1. The Contracting Agency must have full and unrestricted use and benefit of the facilities
both from the operational and safety standpoint.
2. Only minor incidental Work; replacement of temporazy subsritute facilities, or
conection of repair Work remains to reach physical completion of the Work.
u
i
�
,
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
The Contractor's request shall list the specific items of Work in subparagraph two above that remains
to be completed in order to reach physical completion_ The Engineer may also establish the
Substantial Completion Date unilaterally.
If after this inspecrion, the Engineer concurs with the Contractor that the Work is substantially
complete and ready for its intended use, the Engineer, by written notice to the Contractor, will set the
Substantial Completion Date. If, after this inspection the Engineer does not consider the Work
substantially complete and ready for its intended use, the Engineer will, by written notice, so notify
the Contractor givmg the reasons therefore.
Upon receipt of written norice concurring in or denying substantial completion, whichever is
applicable, the Contractor shall pursue vigorously, diligently and without unauthorized interruption,
the Work necessary to reach Substantial and Physical Completion. The Contractor shall provide the
Engineer with a revised schedule indicating when the Contractor expects to reach substantial and
physical complerion of the Work.
The above process shall be repeated until the Engineer establishes the Substantial Completion Date
and the Contractor considers the Work physically complete and ready for Final Inspection.
1-05.11(2) Final Inspection and Physical Completion Date
Section 1-05.11(2) is a new Section:
{***�**�
When the Contractor considers the Work physically complete and ready for Final Inspection, the
Contractor, by Written Norice, shall request the Engineer to schedule a final inspection. The Engineer
will set a date for Final Inspection. The Engineer and the Contractor will then make a�nal inspection
and the Engineer will notify the Contractor in writing of all particulars in which the Final Inspection
reveals the Work incomplete or unacceptable. The Contractor shall immediately take such corrective
measures as are necessary to remedy the listed deficiencies. Corrective Work shall be pursued
vigorously, diligently, and without interruption until physical completion of the listed deficiencies.
This process will continue until the En� neer is satisfied the listed deficiencies have been corrected.
If action to correct the listed deficiencies is not initiated within 7 days after receipt of the Written
Notice listing the deficiencies, the Engineer may, upon Written Notice to the Contractor, take
whatever steps are necessary to correct those deficiencies pursuant to Section 1-05.8. The Contractor
will not be allowed an extension of contract time because of a delay in the performance of the Work
attributable to the exercise of the Engineer's right hereunder.
Upon correction of all deficiencies, the Engineer will notify the Contractor and the Contracting
Agency, in writing, of the date upon which the Work was considered physically complete, that date
shall constitute the Physical Completion Date of the Contract, but shatl not imply all the obligations
of the Contractor under the Contract have been fulfilled.
1-05.11(3) Operational Testing
' Section 1-OS_11(3) is a new section:
t$*�=*�*�
Unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall give the En� neer a minimum
� of 3 working days' norice of the time for each test and inspection. If the inspection is by another
authority than the Engineer, the Contractor shall give the Enb neer a minimum of 3 working days'
notice of the date fixed for such inspecrion. Required certificates of inspection by other authority than
the Engineer shall be secured by tbe Contractor.
�
�
22
ia26izoio
It is the intent of the Contracting Agency to have at the Physical Completion Date a complete and
operable system. Therefore, when the Work involves the installation of machinery or other
mechanical equipment; street lighting, electrical distribution or signal systems; irrigation systems;
buildings; or other similar Work, it may be desirable for the Engineer to have the Contractor operate
and test the Work for a period of time, after final inspection but prior to the physical completion date.
Whenever items of Work are listed in the Contract Provisions for operational testing they shall be
fully tested under operating conditions for the time period specified to ensure their acceptability prior
to the Physical Completion Date. During and following the test period, the Contractor shall correct
any items of workmanship, materials, or equipment which prove faulty, or that are not in first class
operating condition. Equipment, electrical controls, meters, or other devices and equipment to be
tested during this period shall be tested under the observation of the Engineer, so that the Engineer
may deternune their suitability for the purpose for which they were installed. The Physical
Completion Date cannot be established until testing and corrections have been completed to. the
satisfaction of the Engineer. �
The costs for power, gas, labor, material, supplies, and everything else needed to successfully
complete operational testing, shall be included in the unit contract prices related to the system being
tested, unless specifically set forth otherwise in the proposal.
;
Operational and test periods, when required by the Engineer, shall not affect a manufacturer's
guaranties or warranties furnished under the terms of tbe Contract.
1-05.12 Final Acceptance
The third and fourth sentences in paragraph 1 are deleted and replaced with:
�******�
The Final Acceptance date shall be that date in which the Renton City Council formally approves
acceptance of the Contract.
1-05.13 Superintendents, Labor and Equipment of Contractor
Revise the seventh paragraph to read:
��*****�
Whenever the Contracting Agency evaluates the Contractor's qualificarions pursuant to Section 1-
02.1, the Contracring Agency will take these performance reports into account.
1-05.14 Cooperation with Other Contractors
Section 1-05.14 is supplemented as follows:
�*****��
The Contractor shall afford the Owner and other contractors working in the area reasonable
opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and the execution of their respective
Work, and shall properly connect and coordinate the Contraetor's Work with theirs.
Other utilities, districts, agencies, and contractors who may be working within the project area are:
1.
3.
4.
6.
7.
8.
Puget Sound Energy (gas and electric)
AT&T Broadband
Qwest Communications
City of Renton (water, sewer, transportation)
Soos Creek Sewer and Water District
Cedar River Sewer and Water District
Skyway Sewer and Water District
Private contractors employed by adjacent praperty owners
The Contraetor shall coordinate with City of Renton on tying into any e�cisting electrical service
cabinet.
23
'
,
'
'
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
u
�
�
r
�
1�
�
�
�
C�
�
��
�
�
�.
�
�
L�
�
�
L
,
�
� oiz�7o io
1-05.16 Water and Power
Section 1-05.16 is a new Section:
�*��:***�
The Contractor shall make necessary anangements, and shall beaz the costs for power and water
necessary for the performance of the Work, unless the Contract includes power and water as a pay
item.
1-05.17 Oral Agreements
Section I-05.17 is a new section:
�******�
No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Contracting Agency,
either before or after execution of the Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obli�ations
contained in any of the documents comprising the Contract. � Such bral agreement or conversation
shall be considered as unofficial information and in no way binding upori the Contracting Agency,
unless subsequently put in writing and signed by the Contracting Agency.
1-05.18 Contractor's Daily Diary
Sectiori 1-05.18 is a new seetion:
�*�****�
The Contractor and subcontractors shaIl maintain and provide to the Engineer a Daily Diary Record
of this Work This diary will be created by pen entries in a hardbound diary book of the type that is
commonly available through commercial outlets. The diary must contain the Project and Number; if
the diary is in loose-leaf form, this information must appear on every page. The diary must be kept
and maintained by the Contractor's designated project superintendent(s). Entries must be made on a
daily basis and must accurately represent all of the project activities on each day.
At a minimum, the diary shall show on a daily basis: .
1. The day and date.
2. The weather conditions, including changes throughout the day.
�3. A complete description of Work accomplished during the day with adequate references to
the Plans and Contract Provisions, so that the reader can easily and accurately identify said
Work in the Plans. Identify location/description of photographs or videos taken that day.
4. An entry for each and every changed condition, dispute or potential dispute, incident,
accident, or occurrence of any nature whatsoever which might affect the Contractor, the
Owner, or any third party in any manner.
5. Listing of any materials received and stored on- or off-site by the Contractor for future
installation, to include the manner of storage and protection of the same.
6. Listing of materials installed during each day.
7. List of all subcontractors working on-site during each day.
8. Listing of the number of the Contractor's employees working during each day by category
of employment.
9. Listing of the Contractor's equipment working on the site during each day. Idle equipment
on the site shall be listed and designated as idle.
10. Notations to explain inspections, testing, stake-out, and all other services furnished by the
Owner ar other party durmg each day_
11. Entries to venfy the daily (including non-Work days) inspection and maintenance of traffic
control devices and condition of the traveled roadway surfaces. The Contractor shall not
aliow any conditions to develop that would be hazardous to fhe public.
12. Any other information that serves to give an accurate and complete record of the nature,
quanrity, and quality of Contraetor's prob ess on each day.
13. Plan markups showing locations and dimensions of constructed features to be used by the
En� neer to produce record drawings.
14_ AII pages of the diary must be numbered consecutiveiy with no omissions in page numbers.
15. Each page must be signed and dated by the Contractor's official representative on the
project.
24
10/26l2010
The Contractor may use additional sheets separate from the diary hook if necessary to provide a
complete diary record, but they must be signed, dated; and labeled with project name and number.
It is expressly agreed between the Contractor and the Owner that the Daily Diary maintained
by the Contractor shall be the "Contractor's Book of Original Entry" for the documentation of
any potential claims or disputes that might arise during this contract. Failure of the Contractor
to maintain this diary in the manner described above will constitute a waiver of any such claims
or disputes by the Contractor.
The Engineer or other Owner's representative on the job site will also complete a Daily Construction
Report.
1-06 CONTROL OF MATERIAL
1-06.1 Approval of Materials Prior to Use
Section 1-06.1 is supplemented as follows:
�**�***}
The materials and equipment lists submitted to the Engineer at the Preconstruction Conference shall
include the quantity, manufacturer, and model number, if applicable, of materials and equipment to be
installed under the Contract. This list will be checked by the Engineer as to confornvty with the
Contract Documents_ The Engineer will review the lists within 10 working days, noting required
corrections. The Contractor. shall make required corrections and file 2 corrected copies w-ith the
Engineer within one week after receipt of required correcrions. The Engineer's review and acceptance
of the lists shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for suitability for the intended purpose,
nor for deviations from the Contract Documents.
1-06.2(1) Samples and Tests forAcceptance
Section 1-062( I) is supplemented a follows:
�******�
The fmished Work shall be in accordance with approved samples. Approval of samples by the
Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for performance of the Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
1-06.2(2) Statistical Evaluation of Materials for Acceptance
Section 1-06.02(2) is supplemented by adding the following:
��:x****�
Unless stated otherwise in the special provisions, starisrical evaluation will not be used by the City of
Renton.
1-07 LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES TO THE PUBLIC
1-07.1 Laws to be Observed
Section 1-07.1 is supplemented as follows:
�****�*�
The Contractor shall erect and properly maintain, at atl times, as required by the conditions and
prob ess of the Work, all necessary safeguards for protection of workers and the public; shall post
danger signs warning against known or unusual hazazds; and shall designate as Safety Supervisor, a
responsible employee on the construction site whose duty shall be the enforcement of safety_ The
name and position of such person so designated shall be reported in writing to the Engineer by the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall, at all times, enforce strict discipline and good order among all employees and
shall not employ any person unfit or not skilled in the Work assigned to him/her.
Necessary sanitation conveniences for the use of the workers on the job, properly secluded. from
public observation, shaIl be provided and maintained by the Contractor
In cases of conflict between different safety regulations, the more stringent reb lation shall apply.
���
'
�
'
r
�
1
L�
i
�
,
�
�
I
�
�
�
�
� 10/26:'2010
�
The Washington State Department of Labor and Industries shall be the sole and paramount
� administrative agency responsible for the administratian of the provisions of the Washington
Industrial Safety and Health Act of 1973 (WISHA).
� The Contractor shall maintain at the project site office, or other well-lrnown place at the project site,
all articles necessary for providing first aid to the injured. The Contractor shall establish, publish, and
make known to all employees, procedures for ensuring immediate removal to a hospital or doctor's
care, and persons, inciuding employees, who may have been injured on the project site. Employees
� should not be permitted to Work on the project site before the Contractor has established and made
known procedures for removal of injured persons to a hospital or a doctor's care.
� The Contractor shall have sole responsibility for the safety, efficiency, and adequacy of the
Contractor's plant, appliances, and methods, and for any damage or injury resulting from their failure,
or improper maintenance, use, or operarion. The Contractor shall be solely and completely
� responsible for the conditions of the project site, including safety for all persons and property in the
perfarmance of the Work. This requirement shall apply continuously, and not be limited to normal
working hours. The required or implied duty of the Engineer to conduct construction review of the
' Contractor's performance does not, and shall not, be intended to include review and adequacy of the
Contractor's safety measures, in, on, or near the project site.
1-07.2 State Sales Tax
� Delete this section, including its sub-sections, in its entirety and replace it with the following:
��:***�*�
1-07.2(1) General
tThe Washington State Department of Revenue has issued special rules on the state sales tax. Sections
1-072(1) through 1-072(4) are meant to clarify those rules. The Contractor should contact the
� Washington State Department of Revenue for answers to questions in this area. T'he Contracting
Agency will not adjust its payment if the Contractor bases a bid on a misunderstood tax liability.
The Contractor shall include all Contractor-paid taxes in the unit bid prices or other contract amounts.
� In some cases, however, state retail sales tax will not be included. Section 1-072(3) describes this
exception.
� The Contracting Agency will pay the retained percentage only if the Contractor has obtained from the
Washington State Department of Revenue a certificate showing that all contract-related taxes have
been paid (RCW 6028.050). The Contracting Agency may deduct from its payments to the
� Contractor any amount the Contractor may owe the Washington State Department of Revenue,
whether the amount owed relates to this contract or not. Any amount so deducted will be paid into
the proper state fund_
r
�
� 26
10/26/2010
1-07.2(2) State Sales Tax — Rule 171
WAC 458-20-171, and its related rules, apply to building, repairing, or improving streets, roads, etc.,
which are owned by a municipal corporation, or political subdivision of the state, or by the United
States, and which are used primari(y for foot or vehicular traffic. This includes storm or combined
sewer systems within and included as part of the street or road drainage system; and power lines when
such are part of the roadway lighting system_ For Work performed in such cases, the Contractor shall
include Wasbington State Retail Sales Taxes in the various unit bid item prices, or other contract
amounts, including those that the Contractor pays on the purchase of the materials, equipment, or
supplies used or consumed in doing the Work.
1-07.2(3) State Sales Tax — Rule 170
WAC 458-20-170, and its related rules, applies to the constructing and repairing of new or existing
buildings, or other structures, upon real property_ This includes, but is not limited to; the construetion
of streets, roads, highways, etc., owned by the state of Washington; water mains and their
appurtenances; sanitary sewers and sewage disposal systems unless such sewers and disposal systems
are within, and a part of, a street or road drainage system; telephone, telegraph, electrical power
distribution lines, or other conduits or lines in or above streets or roads, unless such power lines
become a part of a street or road lighting system; and installing or attaching of any article of tangible
personal property in or to real property, whether or not such personal property becomes a part of the
realty by virtue of installation.
For Work performed in such cases, the Contractor shall collect from the Con�acting Agency, retail
sales tax on the full contract price. The Contracting Agency will automatically add this sales tax to
each payment to the Contractar. For this reason, the Contractor shall not include the retail sales tax in
the unit bid item prices, or in any other contract amount subject to Rule 170, with the follo��ing
exception_
Exception_ The Contracting Agency will not add in sales tax for a payment the Contractor or a
subcontractor makes on the purchase or rental of tools, machinery, equipment, or consumable
supplies not integrated into the project. Such sales taxes shall be included in the unit bid item prices
or in any other contract amount.
1-07.2(4) Services
The Contractor shall not collect retail sales tax from the Contracting Agency on any contract wholly
for professional or other services (as defined in Washington State Department of Revenue Rules 138
and 244).
1-07.6 Permits and Licenses
Section 1-07.6 is suppiemented as follows:
�******�
The permits, easements, and right of entry documents that have been acquired are available for
inspecrion and review.
The Contractor shall be required to comply with all conditions of the permits, easements, and rights
of entry, at no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor is required to indemnify the Owner from
claims on all easements and rights of entry.
All other permits, licenses, etc., shall be the responsibiiity of the Contractor. The Contractor shall
comply with the special provisions and requirements of each.
27
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
u
�
�
�
�
�
�-
�
�
�
� 10/26l2010
i
Permits, permission under franchises, licenses and bonds of a temporary nature necessary for and
' during the prosecution of the Work, and inspection fees in connection therewith shall be secured and
paid for by the Contractor. If the Owner is required to secure such permits, permission under
franchises, licenses and bonds, and pay the fees, the costs incurred by the Owner thereby shall be
charged against the Contractor and deducted from any funds otherwise due the Contractor.
1-07.9 Wages
II
�
�
1-Q7.9(5) Required Documents �
Delete the first sentence of the third pazagraph, and replace it with the following:
�*�****�
The Contractor must submit weekly-certified payrolls for the Contractor and all subcontractors and
lower tier subcontractors, regardless of project's funding source.
1-07.11 Requirements far Non-Discrimination
� 1-07.11(11) City of Renton Affidavit of Compliance
Section 1-07.11{11) is new:
- �******�
Each Contractor, Subcontractor, Consultant, and or Supplier shall complete and submit a copy of the
� "City of Renton Fair Practices Policy Affidavit of Compliance". A copy of this document will be
bound in the bid documents.
�
�
,�
j
�
'
�
�
�
1-07,12 Federal Agency Inspection
Section 1-07.12 is supplemented with the following:
�*:�****�
Required Federal Aid Provisions
The Required Contract Provisions Federal Aid Construction Contracts (FHWA 1273) and the
amendments thereto supersede any conflicting provisions of the Standard Specifications and are made
a part of this contract; provided, however, that if any of the provisions of FHWA 1273, as amended,
are less restrictive than Washington State Law, then the Washington State Law shall prevail.
The provisions of FHWA 1273, as amended, included in this contract require that the Contractor
insert the FHWA 1273 and amendments thereto in each subcontract, together with the wage rates
which aze part of the FHWA 1273, as amended. Also, a clause shall be included in each subcontract
requiring the subcontractors to insert the FHWA 1273 and amendments thereto in any lower tier
subcontracts, together with the wage rates. The Contractor shall also ensure that this Section,
REQUIRED FEDERAL AID PROVISIONS, is inserted in each subcontract for subcontractors and
lower tier subcontractors. For this purpose, upon request to the Project Engineer, the Contractor will
be provided with extra copies of the FHWA 1273, the amendments thereto, the applicable wage rates,
and this Special Provision.
1-07.13 Contractor's Responsibility for Work
1-0713(1} General
Section 1-07.13(1) is supplemented as follows:
�******�
During unfavorable weather and other conditions, the Contractor shall pursue only such portions of
the Work as shall not be damaged thereby.
No portion of the Work whose satisfactory quality or e�ciency will be affected by unfavorable
conditions shall be constructed while these conditions exist, unless the Contractor shall be able to
overcome said unfavorable conditions by special means or precautions acceptable to the Engineer,.
1-07.15 Temporary Water Pollution/Erosion Control
Delete the first parab aph, and replace it with the following:
��*�*�:*�
In an effort to prevent, control, and stop water pollution and erosion within the project, thereby
28
ioi26.noio
protecring the Work, nearby land, streams, and other bodies of water, the Contractor shall perform all
Work in strict accordance with all Federal, State, and local laws and regulations goveming waters of
the State, as well as permits acquired for the project
1-07.16 Protection and Restoration of Property
1-07.16(1) Private/Public Property
Section 1-07.16(1) is supplementcd by adding the following:
�******�
The Contracting Agency will obtain all easements and franchises required for the project. The
Contractor shall limit his operation to the areas obtained and shall not trespass on private property.
The Contracting Agency may provide certain lands, as indicated in connection with the Work under
the Contract together with the right of access to such lands. The Contractor shall not unreasonably
encumber the premises with his equipment or materials.
The Contractor shall provide, with no liability to the Contracting Agency, any additional land and
access thereto not shown or described that may be required for temporary construction facilities or
storage of materials. He shall construct all access roads, detour roads, or other teinporary Work as
required by his operations. The Confracfor shall confine his equipment, storage of material, and
operation of his workers to. those areas shown and described and such additional areas as he may
provide_ - .
A. General_ All construcrion Work under this contract on easements, right-of-way, over
private property or franchise, shall be confined to the limits of such easements, right-of-way or
franchise. All Work shall be accomplished so as to cause the least amount of disturbance and a
minimum amount of damage. The Contractor shall schedule his Work so that trenches across
easements shall not be left open during weekends or holidays and �-enches shall not be open for more
than 48 hours.
B. Structures. The Contractor shall remove such existing structures as may be necessary for
the performance of the Work and, if required, shall rebuild the structures thus removed in as good a
condition as found_ He shall also repair all existing structures that may be damaged as a result of the
Work under this contract.
C. Easements, cultivated areas and other surface improvements. All cultivated areas, eifher
agricultural or lawns, and other surface improvements which are damaged by actions of the
Contractor shall be restored as nearly as possible to their original condition.
Prior to excavation on an easement or private right-of-way, the Contractor shall strip topsoil from the
trench or construction area and stockpile it in such a manner that it may be replaced by him, upon
completion of construction_ Ornamental trees and shrubbery shall be carefully removed with the
earth surrounding their roots wrapped in burlap and replanted in their original positions within 48
hours.
All shrubbery or trees destroyed or damaged, shalt be replaced by the Contractor with material of
equal quality at no addirional cost to the Contracting Agency. In the event that it is necessary to
trench through any lawn area, the sod shall be carefully cut and rolled and replaced after the trenches
have been bae�lled. The lawn area shall be cleaned by sweeping or ot�ier means, of all earth and
debris.
The Contractor shalt use rubber wheel equipment similar to the sma11 tractor-type backhoes used by
side sewer contractors for all Work, including excavation and backfill, on easements or rights-of-way,
which have lawn areas. All fences, markers, mailboxes, or other temporary obstacles shall be
removed by the Contractor and immediately replace, after the trench is backfilled, in their original
position. The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Agency and Property Owner at least 24 hours in
advance of any Work done on easements or rights-of-way.
Damage to existing structures outside of easement areas that may result from dewatering and/or other
29
�
LJ
,
�
�
�0�2�2010
construction activity under this contract shall be restored to their original condition or better. The
origirial condition shall be established by photographs taken and/or inspection made prior to
construction. All such Work shall be done to the satisfaction of the Property Owners and the
Contracting Agency at the expense of the Contractor.
D. Streets. The Contractor will assume all responsibility of restorarion of the surface of a11
streets (traveled ways) used by him if damaged.
In the event the Contractar does not have labor or material immediately available to make necessary
repairs, the Contractor shall so inform the Contracting Agency. The Contracting Agency will make
fhe necessary repairs and the cost of such repairs sball be paid by the Contractor.
The Contractor is responsible for identifying and documenting any damage that is pre-existing or
caused by others. Restoration of excavation in Gity streets sball be done in accordance with the City
of Renton Trench Restorarion Requirements, which is available at the Public Works Department
Customer Services counter on the 6th floor, Renton City Hall, 1055 South Grady Way.
� 1-07:17 Utilities and Similar Facilities
Section 1-07.17 is supplemented by adding:
�******�
Existing utilities indicated in the Plans have been plotted from the best information available to the
Engineer. Information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to
� existing underground utilities or services at or contiguous to the project site are based on information
and data furnished to the Owner and the Engineer by owners of such underground facilities or others,
and the Owner and the Engineer do not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness
� thereof. It is to be understood that other aboveground or underground facilities not shown in the
Plans may be encountered during the course of the Work.
1 All utility valves, manholes, vaults, or pull boxes wbich are buried shall be conspicuously marked in a
fashion acceptable to the O«ner and the Engineer by the Contractor to allow their location to be
determined by the Engineer or urility personnel under adverse conditions, (inclemeut weafher or
darkness).
Where underground main distribution conduits, such as water, gas, sewer, electric power, or
telephone, are shown on the Plans, the Contractor, for the purpose of preparing his bid, shall assume
that every properiy parcel will be served by a service connection for each type of utility.
�
�
The Contractor shall check with the utility companies concerning any possible conflict prior to
commencing excavation in any area. The Contractor shall resolve all crossing and clearance
problems with the utility company concerned. No excavation shall begin until all known facilities, in.
the vicinity of the excavation area, have been located and marked.
In addition to the Contractor having all utilities field marked before starting Work, the Contractor
shall have all utilities �eld marked after they are relocated in conjunction wifh this project.
Call Before You Dig
The 48-Hour Locators
1-800-424-5555
At least 2 and not more than 10 working days prior to commencing any excavations for utility
; potholing or for any other purpose under this Contract, the Contraetor shall notify the Underground
Utilities Location Center by telephone of the planned excavation and progress schedule. The
Contractor is also warned that there may be utilities on the project that are not part of the One Call
system. They must be contacted directly by the Contractor for locarions.
�
�
L�
The Contractar shall make arrangements 48 hours in advance with respective utility owners to have a
representative present when their utility is exposed or modified, if the utility chooses to do so.
30
10/26/2010
Existing. utiliries for telephone, power, gas, water, and television cable facilities shall be adjusted or
relocated by the appropriate utility company unless otherwise noted in the Plans. These adjustments
may be completed before the Contractor begins Work, or may be performed in conjunction with the
Contract Work. The Contractor shall be enrirety responsible for coordination with the utility
companies and arranging for the movement or adjustment, either temporary or permanent, of their
facilities within the project limits. See also Section 1-05.14 of these Sgecial Provisions.
If or when utility conflicts occur, the Contractor shall continue the construction process on other
aspects of the project whenever possible. No addirional compensation will be made to the Contractor
for reason of delay caused by the actions of any utility company, and the Contractor shall consider
such costs to be incidental to the other items of the Contract.
Utility Potholing
Potholing may be included as a bid item for use in determining the location of e�sting utiliries in
advance of the Contractor's operations. If potholing is not included as a bid item then it sha11 be
considered incidental to other Work The Contractor shall submit all potholing requests to the
Engineer for approval, at least 2 working days before potholing is scheduled. Addirionally, the
Contractor shall provide potholing at the Engineer's request.
In no way shall the Work described under Utility Potholing relieve the Contractor of any of the
responsibilities described in Section 1-07_17 of the Standard Specifications and Special Provisions,
and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1-07.17(1) Interruption of Services
Section 1-07.17(1) is a new secrion:
���****�.
Whenever in the course of the construction operarion it becomes necessary to cause an outage of
utilities, it shall be the Contractor's responsibiliry to notify the affected users and the Engineer not less
than 48 hours in advance of such outage. The Contractor shall make reasonable effort to minimize
the duration of outages, and shall estimate the length of time service will be interrupted and so notify
the users. In the case of any urility outage that has exceeded or will exceed four hours, user contact
shall again be made_ Temporary service, if needed, will be arranged by the Contractor at no cost to
the Owner.
Overhead lighting outages shall not exceed 24 hours. All cost to the Contractor for providing
temporary overhead lighting to meet above requirements shall be incidental to the various unit and
Lump sum items of the Contract; no separate payment will be made.
1-07.18 Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance
Section 1-07.18 is deleted replaced by the following new seetion and subsections:
�**�**�:�
1-07.18(1) General
The Contractor shall obtain and maintain in full force and effect, from the Contract Execution
Date to tbe Completion Date, public liability and property damage insurance with an insurance
company(ies) or through sources approved by the State Insurance Commissioner pursuant to
RCW 48.
The Contractor shall not begin Work under the Contract until the required insurance has been
obtained and approved by the Contracting Agency. Insurance shall provide coverage to the
Contractor, a11 sabcontractors, Contracring Agency and the Contracting Aaency's consultant. The
coverage shall protect against claims for bodily injuries, personal injuries, including accidental
death, as well as cIaims for property damages which may arise from any act or omission of the
Contractor or the subcontractor, or by anyone directly or indirecdy employed by either of them.
If warranted Work is required the Contractor shall provide the City proof that insurance coverage
and limits established under the term of the Contract for Work are in full force and effect during
the period of warranty Work.
31
1 10/26/2010
� The Contracting Agency may request a copy of the actual declaration pages(s) for each insurance
policy effecting coverage(s) required on the Contra.ct prior to the date Work commences. Failure
of the Contractor to fully comply during the terni of the Contract with the requirements
, described lierein will be considered a material breach of contract and shall be caused for
immediate termination of the Contract at the option of the Contracting Agency.
All costs for insurance shall be incidental to and included in the unit or Lump sum prices of the
contract and no additional payment will be made.
1-07.18(2) Coverages
� As part of the response to this proposal, the Contractor shall submit a completed City of Renton
Insurance Information form, which details specific coverage and limits for this contract_
� All coverage provided by the Contractor shall be in a form and underwritten by a company
acceptable to the Contracting Agency. The City requires that all insurers:
1. Be licensed to do busmess within the State of Washington.
2. Coverage to be on an"occurrence" basis (Professional Liability and Pollution
� coverage are acceptable when written on a claims-made basis). The City may also
reqwre proof of professional liability coverage be provided �for up to two (2) years
after the completion of the project_
3. The City may request a copy of the actual declazation page(s) for each insurance
j policy affecting coverage(s) required by the Contract prior to the date Work
commences.
4. Possess a minimum A.M. Best raring of AVII (A rating of A XII or better is preferred.)
� If any insurance carrier possesses a rating of less than AVII, the City may make an
exception.
The City reserves the right to approve the security of the insurance coverage provided by the
�� insurance company(ies), terms, conditions, and the Certificate of Insurance. Failure of the
Contractor to fully comply during the term of the Contract with these requirements will be
considered a material breach of con�act and shall be cause for immediate termination of the
�
contract at the option of the City.
�, The Contractor shall obtain and maintain the minimum insurance coverage set forth below. By
requiring such minimum insurance, the City of Renton shall not be deemed or construed to have
� assessed the risks that may be applicable to the Contractor. The Contractor shall assess its own
risks and if it deems appropriate and/or prudent, maintain higher limits and/or broader coverage.
Coverage shall include:
� A_ Commercial General Liability - ISO 1993 Form or equivalent. Coverage will be
ti�vritten on an occurrence basis and include:
Premises and Operations (including CG2503; General Aggregate to apply per project,
if applicable)
Explosion, Callapse, and Underground Hazards
,. Products/Completed Operations
Contraetual Liability (including Amendatory Endorsement CG 0043 or equivalent
� which includes defense coverage assumed under contract)
Broad Form Property Damage
Independent Contractors
Personal/Advertising Injury
Stop Gap Liability
� B_ Automobile Liability including all
Owned Vehicles
Non-Owned Vehicles
� Hired Vehicles
C. Workers' Coinpensation
Statutory Benefits (Coverage A) - Show Washington Labor & Industries Number
� D. Umbrella Liability (when necessary)
� 32
10/2Gr2Q10
Excess of Commercial General Liability and Automobile Liability. Coverage should
be as broad as primary.
E. Professional Liability -(whenever the Work under_ this Contract includes Professional
Liability, (i.e. architectural, engineering, advertising, or computer programming) the
Contractor shall maintain professional liability covering wrongful acts, errors and/or
omissions of the Contractor for damage sustained by reason of or in the course of
operations under this Contract.
F. The Contracting Agency reserves the right to request and/or require additional
coverages as may be appropriate based on Work performed (i.e. pollution liability).
The Contractor shall name City of Renton, and its officers, officials, agents, employees and
volunteers as Additional Insured (ISO Form CG 2010 or equivalent). The Contractor shall
provide City of Renton Certificates of Insurance prior to commencement of Work. The City
reserves the right to request copies of insurance policies, if at their sole discretion it is deemed
appropriate. Further, all policies of insurance described above shall:
A. Be on a primary basis not contributory with any other insurance coverage and/or self-
insurance camed by City of Renton.
B. Include a Waiver of Subrogation Clause.
C. Severability of Interest Clause (Cross Liability)
D. Policy may not be non-renewed, canceled or materially changed or altered unless forty-
five (45) days prior written notice is provided to City of Renton. Notification shall be
provided to City of Renton by certified mail.
1-07.18(3) Limits
LIMITS REQUIRED
Providing coverage in these stated amounts shall not be construed to relieve the Contractor from
liability in excess of such limits. The Contractor shall carry the following limits of liability as
required below:
Commercial General Liabilitv
General Aggregate* $2,000,000 **
Products/Completed Operations $2,000,000 **
Aggregate
Each Occurrence Limit $1,000,000
PersonaUAdvertising Injury $ I ,000,000
Fire Damage (Any One Fire) $50,000
Medical Payments (Any One $5,000
Person)
Stop Gap Liability $1,000,000
* General Aggregate to apply per project
(ISO Form CG2503 or equivalent)
**Amount may vary based on pr�ject risk
Automobile Liabilitv
Bodily Injury/Property Damage $1,000,000
(Each Accident)
Workers' Compensation
Statutory Benefits - Coverage A Variable
(Show Washington Labor and Industries Number)
Umbrella Liabilitv .
Each Occurrence Limit $1,000,000
General Aggregate Limit $1,000,000
Products/Completed Operations $1,000,000
AgD egate
Professional Liability (If
re uired
Each Occurrence/ . $1;000,000
IncidentlClaim
Agb egate $2,000,000
33
� ] 0/26/2010
iPollution Liabilitv (If required)
The City may require the Contractor to keep professional liability coverage in effect for up to
two (2) years after completion of the project.
�
'
�
The Contractor shall promptly advise the City of Renton in writing in the event any general
aggregate or other aggregate limits are reduced. At their own expense, the Contractor will
reinstate the aggregate to comply with the minimum limits and requirements as stated in Section
1-07.18(3) and shall fumish the City of Renton a new Certificate of Insurance showing such
coverage is in force.
1-07.18(4) Evidence of Insurance:
Within 20 days of award of the Contract, the Contractor shall provide evidence of insurance by
submitting to the Contracting Agency the following:
1. City of Renton Insurance Information Fomi (attached herein) without modification.
2. Certificate of Insurance (Accord Form 25s or equivaleut) confornung to items as
specified in Secrions 1-07.18(1), 1-07.18(2), and 1-07_18(3) as revised above. Other
requirements are as follows:
A. Strike the following or similar wording: "This Certificate is issued as a matter of
information only and confers no rights upon the Certificate Holder".
B. Strike tbe wording regazding cancellation notification to the City: "Failure to
mail such notice shall impose no obligation or liabiliry of any kind upon the
company, its agents or representatives".
C. Amend the cancellation clause to state: "Policy may not be non-renewed,
canceled or materially changed or altered unless 45 days prior written notice is
provided to the City". Notification shall be provided to the City by certified mail.
For Professional Liability coverage only, instead of the cancellation language specified
above, the City will accept a written agreement that the consultant's broker will provide
the required notification.
1-07.22 Use of Explosives
Section 1-0722 is supplemented by the following:
i �******,
Explosives shall not be used ��vithout specific authority of the Engineer, and then only under such
restrictions as may be required by the proper authorities. Explosives shall be handled and used in
� strict compliance ��ith WAC 296-52 and such local laws, rules and regulations that may apply. The
individual in charge of the blasting shall have a current WashinDton State Blaster Users License.
� The Contractor shall obtain, comply with, and pay for such permits and costs as are necessary in
conjunction with blasting operations.
1-07.23 Public Convenience and Safety
� 1-07.23(1) Construction Under Traffic
Revise the second parab aph to read:
��::�****�
�� To disrupt public traffic as little as possible, the Contractor shall permit traffic to pass through the
Work with the least possible inconvenience or delay. . The Contractor shall maintain existing roads,
streets, sidewalks, driveways, and paths within the project limits, keeping them open, and in good,
clean, safe condition at all times. Deficiencies caused by the Contractor's operations shall be repaired
�, at the Contractor's expense. Deficiencies not caused by the Contractor's operations shall be repaired
by the Contractor when directed by the Engineer, at the Contracting Agency's expense. The
� Contractor shall also maintain roads, streets, sidewalks, driveways' and�aths adjacent to the project
limits when affected by the Contractor's operations. Snow and ice control will be performed by the
Contracting Agency on all projects. Cleanup of snow and ice controi debris will be at the Contracting
� Agency's expense. The Contractor shall perform the following:
� 34
10/26/2010
1. Remove or repair any condition resulting from the Work that might impede traffic or create a
hazard.
2. Keep exisring traffic signal and highway lighting systems in operation as the Work proceeds.
(The Contracting Agency will continue the route maintenance on such system.)
3. Maintain the striping on the roadway at the Contracting Agency's expense. The Contractor shall
be responsible for scheduling when to renew striping, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
When the scope of the project does not require Work on the roadway, the Contracting Agency
will be responsible for maintaining the striping.
4. Maintain existing permanent sib ing. Repair of signs will be at the Contracting Agency's
expense, except those damaged due to the Contractor's operations.
5. Keep drainage structures clean to allow for free flow of water. Cleaning of existing drainage
structures will be at the Contracting Agency's expense when approved by the Engineer, except
when flow is impaired due to the Contractor's operations.
Section 1-07.23(1) is supplemented by adding the following:
�**�:*�*�
The Contractor shall be responsible for controlling dust and mud within the project limits and on any
street, which is utilized by his equipment for the duration of the project. The Contractor shall be
prepared to use watering trucks, power sweepers, and other pieces of equipment as deemed necessary
by the Engineer, to avoid creating a nuisance.
Dust and mud control shall be considered as incidental to the project, and no compensation will be
made for this section.
Complaints of dust, mud, or unsafe practices and/or property damage to private ownership will be
transmitted to the Contractor and prompt action in correcting them will be required by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall maintain the roads during conshuction in a suitable condition to minimize
affects to vehicular and pedestrian traffic_ All cost to maintain the roads shall be borne by the
Contractor
At least one-way traffic shall be maintained on all cross-streets within fhe project limits during
working hours. One lane shall be provided in each direction for all streets during non-working hours.
The Contractor shall provide one drivable roadway lane and maintain convenient access for local and
commuter traffic to driveways, businesses, and buildings along the line of Work throu�hout the
course of the project. Such access shall be maintained as near as possible to that which existed prior
to the commencement of construction. This restriction shall not apply to the paving portion of the
construction process.
The Contractor shall notify and coordinate with a(1 property owners and tenants of street closures, or
other restrictions which may interfere with their access at least 24 hours in advance for single-family
residential property, and af least 48 hours in advance for apartments, offices, and commercial
property. The Contractor shall give a copy of all norices to the En�ineer.
When the abutting owners' access across the right-of-way line is to be eliminated and replaced under
the Contract by other access, the existing access shall not be closed unril fhe replacement access
facility is available.
All unattended excavations shall be properly barricaded and covered at all times. The Contractor
sball not open any trenches that cannot be completed and refilled that same day. Trenches shall be
35
� loizbnoio
ipatched or covered by a temporary steel plate, at the Contractor's expense, except in areas where the
roadway remains closed to public traffic. Steel plates must be anebored.
1-07.23(2) Construction and Maintenance of Detours
�******�
Revise the first pazagraph to read:
Unless otherwise approved, the Contractor shall maintain two-way traffic during construction. The
Contractor shall build, maintain in a safe condition, keep open to traffic, and remove when no longer
needed:
� 1. Detours and detour bridges that wili accommodate traffic diverted from the roadway, bridge,
sidewalk, drivewav, or path during construcrion,
� 2. Detour crossings of intersecting highway, and
3_ Temporary approaches.
1-07.24 Rights-of-Way
� Delete this section in its entirety, and replace it with the following:
�******�
Street right-of-way lines, limits of easements, and limits of construction permits are indicated on the
� Drawings. The Contractor's construction activities shall be confined within these limits unless
arrangements for use of private property are made.
Generally, the Contracting Agency will have obtained, prior to bid opening, all rights-of-way and
� easements, both permanent and temporary, necessary for carrying out the completion of the Work.
Exceptions to this are noted in the Contract Documents or brought to the Contractor's attention by a
duly issued addendum.
Whenever any of the Work is accomplished on or through property other than public right-of-way, the
Contractor shall meet and fulfill all covenants and stipulations of any easement agreement obtained
by the Contracting Agency from the owner of the private property. Copies of the easement
agreements are included in the Contract Provisions or made available to the Contractor as soon as
� practical after they have been obtained by the Engineer.
Whenever easements or rights-of-entry have not been acquired prior to advertising, these areas are so
� noted on the Drawings. The Contractor shall not proceed with any portion of the Work in areas where
right-of-way, easements, or riahts-of-entry have not been acquired until the Engineer certifies to the
Contractor that the right-of-way or easement is available or that the right-of-entry had been received.
If the Contractor is delayed due to acts of omission on the part of the Contracting Agency in obtaining
�� easements, rights of entry of right-of-way, the Contractor will be entitled to an extension of time. The
Contractor agrees that such delay shall not be a breach of contract.
Each property owner shall be given 48 hours notice prior to entry by the Contactor. This includes
entry onto easements and private property ��here private improvements must be adiusted.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing, without expense or liability of the Contracting
� Agency, any additional land and access thereto that the Contractor may desire for temporary
construction facilities, storage of materials, or other Contractor needs. However, before using any
private property, whether adjoining the Work or not, the Contractor shall file with the Engineer a
written permission of the private property owner, and, upon vacating the premises, a written release
� from the property owner of each property disturbed or otherwise interfered with by reasons of
construction pursued under this Contract_ The statement shall be signed by the private property
owner, or proper authority acting for the owner of the private property affected, stating that
�� permission has been granted to use the property and all necessary pemuts have been obtained or, in
the case of a release, that the restoration of the property bas been satisfactorily accomplished. The
statement shall include the parcel number, address and date of signature. Written releases must be
filed with the Engineer before the Completion Date will be established.
�
� 36
10/26,�2010
1-08 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS
1-08.0 Preliminary Matters
Section 1-08.0 is a new section with subsection:
�******�
1-OS.O(1) Preconstruction Conference
Section 1-08.0(1) is a ne�� subsection:
{******�
The Engineer will furnish the Contractor with copies of tbe Contract Documents per Section 1-022
"Plans and Specifications". Additional documents may be furnished upon request at the cost of
reproduction. Prior to undertaking each part of the Work the Contractor shall carefully study and
compare the Contract Documents, and cbeck and verify pertinent figures shown therein and all
applicable field measurements. The Contractor shall promptly report in writing to the Engineer any
conflict, error or discrepancy, which the Contractor may discover.
After the Contract has been executed, but prior to the Contractor beginning the Work, a
preconstruction conference will be held between the Contractor, the Engineer and such other
mterested parties as may be invited.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit at the preconstruction meeting:
-� Contractor's plan of operation and progress schedule (3+ copies)
� Approval of qualified subcontractors (bring list of subcontractors if different from list
submitted with bid)
-� List of materials fabricated or manufactured off the project
-� Material sources on the project
-� Names of principal suppliers
-� Detailed equipment list, including "Rental Rate Blue Book" hourly costs (both
working and standby rates)
� Weighted wage rates for all employee classifications anticipated to be used on Project
-� Cost percentage hreakdown for lump sum bid item(s}
-1 Shop Drawings (bring preliminary list)
� Traf�ic Control Plans (3+ copies)
� Temporary Water Pollution/Erosion Control Plan
In addition, the Contractor shall be prepared to address:
Bonds and insurance
Project meetings — schedule and responsibilities
Provision for inspection for materials from outside sources
Responsibility for locating utilities
Responsibility for damage
Time schedule for relocations, if by other than the Contractor
Compliance with Contract Documents
Acceptance and approval of Work
Labor compliance, payrolls, and certifications
Safety regulations for the Contractors' and the Owner's employees and representatives
Suspension of Work, time extensions
Change order procedures
Progress estimates, procedures for payment •
Special requirements of funding agencies
Construction engineering, advance notice of special Work
Any interpretarion of the Contract Documents requested by the Contractor
Any conflicts or omissions in Contract Documents
Any other problems or questions concerning the Work
Processing and administration of public complaints
Easements and rigbts-of-entry
Other contracts
37
�
i
�
�,
i
�
�
�
��
�
,�
�
�
� � oiz6noio
�
The franchise utilities may be present at the preconstruction conference, and the Contractor should be
�, prepared for their review and discussion of progress schedule and coardinarion.
'
�
1-08.0(2) Hours of Work
Section 1-08.0(2) is a new subsection:
�*****:��
Except in the case of emergency or unless otherwise approved by the Contracting Agency, the normal
straight time working hours for the Contract shall be any consecutive 8-hour period between 7:00
a.m. and 6:00 p.m. of a working day with a maJcimum 1-hour lunch break and a 5-day Work week.
The normal straight time 8-hour working period for the Contract shall be established at tl�e
preconstruction conference or prior to the Contractor comrriencing the Work_
� If a Contractor desires to perform Work on holidays, Saturdays, Sundays, or before 7:00 a.m. or after
6:00 p.m. on any day, the Contractor shall apply in writing to the Engineer for permission to Work
such times. Pernussion to Work longer than an 8-hour period between 7:00 a.m. an 6:00 p.m. is not
� required. Such requests shall be submitted to the Engineer no later than noon on the working day
pnor to the day for which the Contractor is requesting permission to Work.
Permission to Work between the hours of 10:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. during weekdays and between the
� hours of 10:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. on weekends or holiclays may also be subject to noise control
requirements. Approval to continue Work duiing these hours may be revoked at any time the
Contractor exceeds the Contracting Agency's noise control reb lations or complaints are received
from the public or adjoining property owners regarding the noise from the Contractor's operations.
The Contractor shall have no claun for damages or delays should such permission be revoked for
these reasons.
� Permission to Work Saturdays, Sundays, holidays or other than the agreed upon nornlal straight time
working hours Monday through Friday may be given subject to certam other conditions set forth by
the Contracting Agency or the Engineer. These conditions may include but are not limited to:
requiring the Engineer or such assistants as the Engineer may deem necessary to be present during the
� Work; requiring the Contractor to reimburse the Contracting Agency for the cost of engineering
salaries paid Contracting Agency employees who worked dunng such times; considering the Work
performed on Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays as working days with regards to the Contract Time;
and considering multiple Work shifts as mulriple working days with respect to Contract Tirne even
� though the muItiple sbifts occur in a sinDle 24-hour period. Assistants may include, but are not limited
to, survey crews; personnel from the material testing labs; inspectors; and other Contracting Agency
employees when in the opinion of the Engineer such Work necessitates their presence.
1-08.0(3) Reimbursement for Overtime Work of Contracting Agency Employees
Section 1-08.0(3) is a new subsection:
��*****�
Where the Contractor elects to Work on a Saturday, Sunday, holiday, or longer than an 8-hour Work
� shift on a regular working day, as defined in the Standard Specificat�ons, such Work shall be
considered as overtime Work. On all such overtime Work an inspector will be present, and a survey
crew may be required at the discretion of the Engineer. The Contractor shall reimburse fhe
� Contracting Agency for fhe fulI amount of the straight time plus overtime costs for employees and
representative(s) of the Contracting Agency required to Work overtime hours.
The Contractor by these Specifications does hereby authorize the Engineer to deduct such costs from
the amount due or to become due the Contractor.
1-08.1 Subcontracting
Revise the second paragraph to read:
� The Contractor shall not subcontract Work unless the En�ineer approves in writing. Each request to
subcontract shall be on the form the Engineer provides. If the Engineer requests, the Contractor shall
�
� 38
�az�.�zoto
�
provide proof that subcontractor has the experience, ability, and equipment the Work requires. The �
Contractor shall require each subcontractor to comply with Seciion I-07.9 and to furnish all
certificates and statements required by the Contract. The Contractor shall re4uire each subeontractor �
requirements in every subcontract of every tier.
Section 1-08.1 is supplemented as follows:
�*****��
Written requests for change in subcontractors shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer at
least 7 calendar days prior to start of a subconeractor's Work_
The Contractor agrees that he/she is fully responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of all �
subcontractors and lower-tier subcontractors, and persons either directly or indirectly employed by
the subcontractors, as well as for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall be required to give personal attention to the Work that is sublet.
NothinD contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relation between any �,
subcontractor and the Owner.
The Contractor shall be responsible for making sure all subcontractors submit all required
documentation, forms, etc.
1-08.2 Assignment
The second paragraph of Section 1-082 is modified as follows:
(��t=��x��)
The Contractor shall not assign any moneys due or to become due to the Contractor hereunder
without the prior written consent of the Owner. The assignment, if approved, shall be subject to all
setoffs, withholdings, and deductions required by law and the Contract.
1-08.3 Progress Schedule
Section 1-08.3 is supplemented as foliows: �
(**����)
The progress schedule for tl�e entire project shall be submitted 7 calendar days prior to the
Preconstruction Conference. The schedule shall be prepared using the critical path method (CP1Vn, �
preferably using Microsoft Project or equivalent software.. The schedule shall contain this
mformat�on, at a minimuin:
l. Construction activiries, in sufficient detail that all acrivities necessary to construct a complete
and functional project are considered. Any activity that has a scheduled duration exceeding 30
calendar days shall be subdivided until no sub-element has a durarion exceedina 30 calendar �
days.
The schedule shall clearly indicate the activities that comprise the critical path. For each activity
not on the critical path, the schedule shall show the float, or slack, time_ �
2. Procurement of material and equipment.
3. Submittals requiring review by the Engineer. Submittal by the Contractor and review by the
Engineer shall be shown as separate activities_ �
4. Work to be performed by a subcontractor, agent, or any third pariy.
5. Allowances for delays that could result from normai inclement weather (time extensions due to
inclement weather will not be allowed).
6. Allowances for the rime required by utilities (Owner's and others) to locate, monitor, and adjust �
their facilities as required_
The Engineer may request the Contractor to alter the progress schedule when deemed necessary in the
opinion of the Engineer, in the interest of public safety and welfare of the Owner, or for coordination
with any other activity of other contractors, the availability of all or portions of the _job site, or special
provisions of this Contract, or to reasonably meet the completion date of the project. The Contractor
shall provide such revised schedule within lU days of request. �,
If, at any time, in the opinion of the Engineer, the progress of construcrion falls significantly behind
schedule, the Contractor may be required to submit a plan for regaining progress and a revised
�
39 �
�
'
�
�
,�
�
�
�
10126YL010
schedule indicating how the remaining Work items will be completed within the authorized contract
time_
The Contractor shall promptly report to the Engineer any conditions that the Contcactor feels will
require revision of the schedule and shall promptly submit proposed revisions in the progress
schedule for acceptance by the Engineer. When such changes are accepted by the Engineer, the
reviseci schedule shall be followed by the Contractor.
Weekly Schedule. The Contractor shall submit a weekly progress schedule to the Engineer which sets
forth specific Work to be performed the following week, and a tentative schedule for the second
week.
Failure to Maintain Progress Schedule. The Engineer will check actual progress of the Work
against the progress schedule a minimum of two times per month. Failure, withaut just cause, to
maintain progress in accordance with the approved schedule shall constitute a breach of Contract. If,
through no fault of the Contractor, the proposed construction schedule cannot be met, the Engineer
will require the Contractor to submit a revised schedule to the Engineer for acceptance. The approved
revisions will thereafter, in all respects, apply in lieu of the original schedule.
Failure of the Contractor to follow the progress schedule submitted and accepted, including revisions
thereof, shall relieve the Owner of any and all responsibility for furnishing and making available all
or any portion of the job site, and will relieve the Owner of any responsibiliry for delays to the
Contractar in the performance of the Work.
The cost of preparing the progess schedule, any supplementary progress schedules, and weekly
schedules shall be considered incidental to the Contract and no other compensation shall be made.
1-48.4 Notice "to Proceed and Prosecution of the Work
� Section 1-08.4 is replaced with the following:
�*x�***��
Notice to Proceed will be given after the Contract has been executed and the Contract bond and
evidence of insurances have been approved and filed by the Owner. The Contractor shall not
� commence the Work until the Notice to Proceed has been given by the Engineer. T'he Contractor shall
commence construction activities on the project site within ten days of the Notice to Proceed date.
The Wark thereafter shall be prosecuted diligently, vigorously, and without unauthorized interruption
until physical completion of the Work. There shall be no voluntary shutdowns or slowing of
, operations by the Contractor without prior approval of the Engineer. Such approval shall not relieve
the Contractor from the contractual obligation to complete the Work within the prescribed Contract
Time.
�
�
�
�
�
'
1-08.5 Time For Completion
The first five paragraphs of Secrion 1-08.5 are deleted and replaced with the following:
�******�
The Work shall be physically completed in its entirery within the time specified in the Contract
Documents or as extended by the Engineer. The Contract Time will be stated in "working days", shall
begin on the Notice To Proceed date, or the date identified in the Notice to Proceed as "the first
working day", and shall end on the Contract Completion date.
A non-working day is defined as a Saturday, a Sunday, a day on which the Contract specifically
suspends Work, or one of these holidays: January 1, third Monday of January, Memorial Day, July 4,
Labor Day, November 11, Thanksgivmg Day, the day after Thanksgiving, and Christmas Day. The
day before Christmas shall be a hoiiday when Christrnas Day occurs on a Tuesday or Friday. The day
after Christmas shall be a holiday when Christmas Day occurs on a Monday, Wednesday, or Thursday.
When Christmas Day occurs on a Saturday, the two preceding working days shall be observed as
holidays. When Christmas day occurs on a Sunday, the two working days following shall be
observed as holidays. When holidays other than Chrishnas fall on a Saturday, the preceding Friday
will be counted as a non-working day and when they fall on a Sunday the following Monday will be
counted as a non-working day. The Contract Time has been estahlished to allow for periods of normal
Cf�7
� o�26noio
inclement weather that, from historical records, is to be expected during the Contract Time, and
during which periods, Work is anticipated to be performed. Each successive working day, beginning
with the Notice to Proceed date and ending with the Physical Completion date, shall be charged to the
Contract Time as it occurs except a day, or part of a day, which is designated a non-working day or an
Engineer determined unworkable day.
Because the City will be closed and the employees furloughed, the following dates shall also be
considered non-working days; Friday, May 22, 2009; Friday, September 4, 2009; Monday, Oetober
12, 2009; and Wednesday, November 25, 2009.
The Engineer will furnish the Contractor a weekly report showing (1) the number of working days
charged against the Contract Time for the preceding week; (2) the Contract Time in working days; (3)
the number of working days remaining in the Contract Time; (4) the number of non-working days;
and (5) any partial or whole days the Engineer declared unworkable the previous week. This weekly
report will be correlated with the Contractor's current approved progress schedule_ If the Contractor
elects to work 10 hours a day and 4 days a week (a 4-10 schedule), and the fifth day of the week in
which a 4-10 shift is worked would ordinarily be charged as a working day, then the fifth day of that
week will be charged as a working day whether or not the Contractor works on that day_
The Contractor will be allowed 10 calendar days from the date of each report in which to file a
written protest of an alleged discrepancy in the Contract Time as reported. Otherwise; the report will
be dcemcd to �ave been accepted hy thc Contractor as conect.
The requirements for scheduling the Final Inspection and establishing the Substanrial Completion,
Physical Completion, and Completion Dates are specified in Sections 1-05.11 and 1-05.12.
Revise the seventh paragraph to rcad:
�#�****�
The Engineer will give the Contractor written notice of the completion date of the Contract after all
the Contractor's obligations under the Contract have been performed by the Contractor. The
following events must occur before the Completion Date can be established:
1. Tt�e physical Work on the project must be complete; and
2. The Contractor must furnish all documentation required by the Contract and required by law, to
allow the Contracting Agency to process final acceptance of the Contract. The following
documents must be received by the Project Engineer prior to establishing a completion date:
a. Certified Payrolls (Federal-aid Projects)
b. Material Acceptance Certification Documents
c_ Annual Report of Amounts Paid as MBE/WBE Participants or Quarterly Report of
Amounts Credited as DBE Participation, as required by the Contract Pravisions.
d. FHWA 47 (Federal-aid Projects)
e. Final Contraet Voucher Certification
f. Property owner releases per Section 1-0724
Section 1-08.5 is supplemented as follows:
�**�***�
Within 10 calendar days after execurion of the Contract by the Contracting Agency, the Contractor
shall provide the Contracting Agency with copies of purchase orders for all equipment items deemed
critical by the Contracting Agency, including but not limited to signal controller materials, lighting
standards, and signal standards required for the physical complerion of the Contract. Such purchase
orders shall disclose the estimated delivery dates for the equipment.
All items of Work that can be performed without delivery of the critical items shall start and be
completed as soon as possible. At that time, the Engineer may suspend the Work upon request of the
41
�
�
�
L
�
��
�
iaz�oio
Coniractor until the critical items are delivered to the Contractor, if.the Contracting Agency received a
purchase order within 10 calendar days after execution of the Contract by the Contracting Agency.
The Contractor will be entitled to only one such suspension of time during the performance of the
Work and during such suspension shall not perform any additional Work on the project. Upon
delivery of the cntical items, contract time will resume and continue to be charged in accordance with
Section 1-08.
1-08.6 Suspension of Work
Section 1-08.6 is supplemented as follows: .
�***s**�
Owner may at any time suspend the Work, or any part thereof, by giving notice to the Contractor in
writing_ The Work shall be resumed by the Contractor within 14 calendar days after the date fixed in
the wntten notiee from the Owner to the Contractor to do so.
The Contractor shall not suspend Work under the Contract without the written order of the Owner.
� If it has been determined that the Contractor is entitled to an extension of time, the amount of such
extension shall be only to compensate for direct detays, and shall be based upon the Contractor's
diligently pursuing the Work at a rate not less than that which would have been necessary to complete
the original Contract Work on time.
,
�
�
'
�
1-08.7 Maintenance During Suspension
Revise the second parab aph to read: .
�*$****�
At no expense to the Contracting Agency, the Contractor shall provide through the construction area a
safe, smooth, and unobstructed roadway, sidewalk, driveway, and�ath for public use during
suspension (as required in Section 1-0723 or the Special Provisions). This may include a temporary
road or detour.
1-08.9 Liquidated Damages
Section 1-08.9 is supplemented as fo(lows:
�******�
In addition, the Contractor shall compensate the Owner for actual engineering inspection and
supervision costs and any other expenses and legal fees incurred by the Owner as a result of such
delay. Such labor costs will be billed to the Contractor at actual costs, including administrative
overhead costs.
In the event that the Owner is required to commence any lawsuit in order to enforce any provision of
this Contract ar ta seek redress for any breach thereof, the Owner shall be entitled to recover its costs,
including reasonable attorneys fees, from the Contractor.
1-08.11 Contractor's Plant and Equipment
� Section 1-08.11 is a new Section:
��:*****)
The Contractor alone shall at all times be responsible for the adequacy, efficiency, and sufficiency of
, his and his subcontractor's plant and equipment_ The Owner shall have the right to make use of the
Contractor's plant and equipment in the performance of any Work on the site of the Work.
.�
,
�
'
The use by the Owner of such plant and equipment shall be considered as extra Work and paid for
accordingly.
Neither the Owner nor the Engineer assumes any responsibility, at any time, for the security of the
site from the rime the Contractor's operations have commenced unril final acceptance of the Work by
the Engineer and the Owner The Contractor sball employ such measures as additionai fencing,
barricades, and watchmen service, as he deems necessary for the public safety and for the protection
of the site and his plant and equipment_ The Owner will be provided keys for all fenced, secured
areas.
42
� oia6rzoio
1-08.12 Attention to Work
Section 1-08:12 is a new section:
�******�
The Cont�actor shall give his personal attention to and shall supervise the Work to the end that it shall
be prosecuted faithfully, and when he is not personally present on the Work. site, he shall at all times
be represented by a competent superintendent who shall liave full authority to execute the same, and
to supply materials, tools, and labor without delay; and who shall be the legal representative of the
Contractor The Contractor shatl be liable for the faithful observance of any instructions delivered to
him or to his authorized representative.
1-09 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
1-09.1 Measurement of Quantities
Section 1-09.1 is supplemented by adding the following:
�******�
Lump Sum. The percentage of lump sum Work completed, and payment will be based on the cost
percentage breakdown of the lump sum bid price(s) submitted at the preconstruction conference.
The Contractor shall submit a breakdown of costs for each lump sum bid item. The breakdown shall
list the items included in the lump sum together with a unit price qf labor, materials, and equipment
for each item. The summation of the detailed unit prices for each item shall add up to the lump swn
bid. The unit grice values may be used as a guideline for deternuning progress payments or
deductions or additions in payment for ordered Work changes.
�
�
�
��
,,�
t
�
�
Cubic Yard Quantities. The Contractor shall provide truck trip tickets for progress payments only in '
the following manner: Where items are specified to be paid by the cubic yard, the following tally
system shall be used.
All trucks to be employed on this Work wili be measured to determine the volume of each truck.
Each truck shall be clearly numbered, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and there shall be no
duplication of numbers.
Duplicate tally tickets shall be prepared to accompany each truckload of material delivered on the
pro�ect. All tickets received that do not contain the following information will not be processed for
payment:
1 Truck number
2 Quantity and type of material delivered in cubic yards
3 Drivers name, date and time of delivery
4 Location of delivery, by street and stationing on each street
5 Place for the Engineer to aclrnowledge receipt
6 Pay item number
7 Contract number and/or name
It will be the Contractor s responsibility to see tt�at a ticket is given to the Engineer on the project for
each truckload of material delivered. Pay quanrities will be prepared on the basis of said tally tickets.
Loads will be checked by the Engineer to verify quantity shown on ticket.
Quantities by Ton. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to see that a certified weight ticket is
given to the Inspector on the project at the time of delivery of materials for each truckload delivered.
Pay quantities will be prepared on the basis of said tally tickets, delivered to Inspector at time of
delivery. of materials. Tickets not receipted by Inspector will not be honored for payment.
Each truck shall be clearly numbered to the satisfaction of the Engineer and there shall be no
duplication of numbers. �
Duplicate tickets shall be prepared to accompany each truckload of material delivered to the project.
43
�
�
'
�
�
'
'
�
'
�
'
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
'
ior2�noio
All tickets received that do not contain the following information will not be processed for payment:
1. Truck number
2. Truck tare weight (stamped at source)
3. Gross truckload weight in tons (stamped at source)
4. Net load weight (stamped at source)
5. Driver's name, date, and time of delivery
6. Location for delivery by street and stationing on each street
7. Place for the Engineer to aclrnow.edge receipt
8. Pay item number
9. Contract number and/or name
1-09.3 Scope of Payment
Section 1-09.3 ►s supplemented by adding the following:
�******�
The bid items listed in Section 1-0914 will be the only items for which compensation will be made
for the Work described in each section of the Standard Specifications when the Contractor performs
the specified Work. Should a bid item be listed in a"Payment" clause but not in the Proposal Form,
and Work for that item is performed by the Contractor and the Work is not stated as included in or
incidental to a pay item in the Contract and is not Work that would be required to complete the intent
of tbe Contract per Section 1-04.1, then payment for that Work will be made as for Extra Work
pursuant to a Change Order.
The words "Bid Item," "Contract Item," and "Pay Item," and similar terms used throughout the
Contract Documents are synonymous.
If the "payment" clause in the Specifications relating to any unit bid item price in the Proposal Form
requires that said unit bid item price cover and be considered compensarion for certain Work or
material essential to the item, then the Work or material will not be measured or paid for under any
other unit bid item which may appear elsewhere in the Proposal Form or Specifications.
Pluralized unit bid items appearing in these Specifcations are changed to sinb laz form.
EPayment for bid items listed or referenced in the "Payment" clause of any particular section of the
' Specifications shall be considered as including all of the Work required, specified, or described in that
particular section. Payment items will generally be listed generically in the Specifications, and
specifically in the bid form. When items are to be "furnished" under one payment item and "installed"
� under another payment item, such items shall be furnished FOB project site, or, if specified in the
Special Provisions, delivered to a designated site. Materials to be "furnished," or "furnished and
installed" under these conditions, shall be the responsibiliry of the Contractor with regard to storage
� until such items are incorporated into the Work or, if such items are not to be incorporated into the
Work, delivered to the applicable Contracting Agency storage site when provided for in the
Specifications. Payment for material "furnished," but not yet incorporated into the Work, may be
made on monthly est�mates to the extent allowed.
�
1
�
�
'
1-09.6 Force Account
Section 1-09.6 is supplemented as follows:
��:�****�
Owner has estimated and included in the proposal, dollar amounts for all items to be paid per force
account, only to provide a common proposal for Bidders. All such dollar amounts are to become a
part of the Contractor's total bid_ However, tbe Owner does not warrant expressly or by implication
that the actual amount of Work will correspond with those estimates. Payment will be made on the
basis of the amount of Work actually authorized by the Engineer.
1-09.7 Mobilization
Section 1-09.7 is supplemented as follows:
�*�x**�*�
Mobilization shall also include, but not be limited to, the following items: tbe movement of
Contractors personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidentals to the project site; the establishment of
44
ioi26noio
an office, buildings, and other facilities necessary for Work on the project; providing sanitary
facilities for the Contractor's personnel; and obtainmg pernuts or licenses required to complete the
project not furnished by the Owner.
This item shall also include providing the Engineer and the Inspectors with access to telephone,
facsimile machine, and cop.y machine during all hours the Contractor is working on the jobsite; and a
table arid chair for t}ieir use when needed.
Payment will be made for the following bid item(s):
"Mobilization & Demobilization," Lump Sum.
1-09.9 Payments
Delete the third paragraph and replace it with the following:
�******�
Progress payments for completed Work and material on hand will be based upon progress estimates
prepared by the Engineer. A progress estimate cutoff date will be established at the preconstruction
meeting.
The initial progress estimate will be made not later than 30 days after the Contractor commences the
Work, and successive progress estimates will be made every month thereafter until the Completion
Pate. i rogress estimatcs made during progress of the Work are tentative, and made only for the
purpose of determining progress payment. The progress estimates are subject to change at any time
pnor to the calculation of the final payment.
The value of the progress estimate will be the sum of the following:
1. Unit Price Items in the Bid Form — the approximate quantity of acceptable units of Work
completed multiplied by the unit price.
2. Lump Sum Items in die Bid Form — the estimated percentage complete multiplied tiy the Bid
Forms amount for each lump sum item, or per the schedule of values for that item.
3. Materials on Hand — 100 percent of invoiced cost of material delivered to job site or other storage
area approved by the Engineer.
4. Change Orders — entitlement for approved extra cost or completed extra Work as determined by
the Engineer_ '
Progress payments wili be made in accordance with the progress estimate less:
l. RetainaDe per Section 1-09.9(1); �
2. The amount of Progress Payments previously made; and
3. Funds withheld by the Contracting Agency for disbursement in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
Progress payments for Work performed shall not be evidence of acceptable performance or an
admission by the Contracting Agency that any Work has been satisfactorily completed.
Payments will be made by check or electronic transfer, issued by the Contracting Agency's fiscal
officer, against the appropriate fund source for the project. Payments received on account of Work
performed by a subcontractor are subject to the provisions of RCW 39.04250.
Section I-09.9 is supplemented as follows:
�*�****,
Applications for payment shall be itemized and supported to the extent required by the Engineer by
receipts or other vouchers showing payment for materials and labor, payments to subcontractors, and
C�.7
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
,�
�
i
,�
�
'
�
�
�
'
!
'
,
,
L1
'
'
,
,
'
�
'
'
'
'
�
t
'
,
] 0l26/2010
other such evidence of the Contractor's right to payment as the Engineer may direct.
The Contractor shall submit a progress report with each monthly request for a progress payment. The
progress report shall indicate the estimated percent complete for each activity listed on the progress
schedule (see Section 1-083).
1-09.9(1) Retainage
Section 1-09.9(1) is supplemented as follows:
�******�
The retained amount shall be released as stated in the Standard Specifications if no claims have been
filed against such funds as provided by law, and if the Owner has no unsatisfied claims against the
Contractor. In the event claims are filed, the Owner shall withhold, until such claims are satisfied, a
sum sufficient to satisfy all claims and to pay attorney's fees. In addition, the Owner shall withhold
such amount as is required to satisfy any claims by the Owner against the Contractor, until such
claims have been finally settled.
Neither the final payment nor any part of the retained percentage shall become due until the
Contractor, if requested, delivers to the Owner a complete release of all liens arising out of this
Contract, or receipts in full in lieu thereof, and, if required in either case, an affidavit that so far as the
Contractor lias knowledge or information, the release and receipts include all labor and materials for
which a lien could be filed: but the Contractor rnay, if any subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or
receipt in full, furnish a bond satisfactorily to �he Engineer to indenlnify the Owner against the iien.
If any lien remains unsatisfied after all payments are made, the Contractor shall reimburse to the
Owner all monies that the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs
and reasonable engineer's and attorney's fees.
1-09.9(2) Contracting Agency's Right to Withhold and Disburse Certain Amounts
Section 1-09.9(2) is a new section:
��:�****�
In addition to monies retained pursuant to RCW 6028 and subject to RCW 39.04.250, RCW 39_ 12
and RCW 39.76, the Contractor authorizes the Engineer to withhold prob ess payments due or deduct
an amount from any payment or payments due the Contractor wbich, in the Engineer's opinion, may
be necessary to cover the ContractingAgency's costs for or to remedy the following situations:
1_ Damage to another contractor when there is evidence thereof and a claim has been filed.
2. Where the Contractor has not paid fees or charges to public authorities of municipalities,
which the Contractor is obligated topay.
3. Utilizing material tested and inspected by the Engineer, for purposes not connected with
the Work (Section 1-OS_�.
4. Landscape damage assessments per Section 1-07.16.
5. For overtime Work performed by City personnel per Section 1-08.1(4).
6. Anticipated or actual failure of the Contractor to complete the Work on time:
a. Per Section 1-08.9 Liquidated Damages; or
b. Lack of construction progress based upon the Engineer's review of the Contractor's
approved progress schedule, which indicates the Work will not be compl.ete within
the contract time. When calculating an anticipated time overrun, the Engineer will
make allowances for weather delays, approved unavoidable delays, and suspensions
of the Work. The amount withheld under this subparab aph will be based upon the
liquidated damages amount per day set forth in Contract Documents multiplied by
the number of days the Contraetor's approved pro�ess schedule, in the opinion of the
Engineer, indicates the Contract may exceed tbe Contract Time.
7. Failure of the Contractor to perforcn any of the Contractor's other obligations under the
Contract, including but not limited to:
a. Failure of the Contractor to provide the EnDineer with a field office when required by
the Contract Provisions.
b. Failure of the Contractor to protect survey stakes, markers, etc., or to provide
adequate survey Work as required by Section 1-05.5.
c. Failure of the Contractor to correct defective or unauthorized Work (Section 1-05.8).
d. Failure of the Contractor to fumish a Manufacture's Certificate of Compliance in lieu
46
10/26/2010
of material testing and inspection as required by Section 1-063.
e_ Failure to submit weekly payrolls, Intent to Pay Prevailing Wage forms, or correct
underpayment to employees of the Contractor or subcontractor of any tier as required
by Section 1-07.9.
f. Failure of the Contractor to pay worker's benefits (Title 50 and Title 51 RCV� as
required by Section 1-07.10.
g. Failure of the Contractor to submit and obtain approval of a progress schedule per
Section 1-083.
The Contractor authorizes the Engineer to act as agent for the Contractor disbursing such funds as
have been withheld pursuant to this Section to a party or parties who are entitled to payment.
Disbursement of such funds, if the Engineer elects to do so will be made only after giving the
Contractor 15 calendar days prior written notice of the Contracting Agency's intent to do so, and
if prior to the expiration of the 15-calendar day period,
1. No legal action has commenced to resolve the validity of the claims, and
2. The Contractor has not protested such disbursement_
A proper accounting of a11 funds disbursed on behalf of the Contractor in accordance with this
Section will be made. A payment made pursuant to this section shall be considered as payment
made under the terms and conditions of the Contract. The Contracting Agency shall not be liable
to the Contractor for such payment made in good faith.
1-09.9(3) Final Payment
Section 1-099(2) is a new section:
�******�
Upon Acceptance of the Work by the Contracting Agency, the fmal amount to be paid the Contactor
will be calculated based upon a Final Prob ess Estimate made by the Engineer. Acceptance by the
Contractor of the final payment shall be and shall operate as a release:
1. To the Contracring Agency of all claims and all liabilities of the Contractor, ofher than claims
in stated amounts as may be specifically excepted in writing by the Contractor;
2. For all things done or fumished in connection with tfie Work;
3. For every act and negtect by the Contracting Agency; and
4. For all other claims and liability relating to or arising out of the Work.
A payment (monthly, final, retainage, or otherwise) shall not release the Contractor or the
Contractor's Surety from any obligation required under the terms of the Contract. Documents or the
Contract Bond; nor shall such payment constitute a waiver of. the Contracring Agency's ability to
investigate and act upon findings of non-compliance with the WIVIBE requiremenfs of the Contract;
nor''shall such payment preclude the`Contracting Agency from recovering damages; setting penalties,
or obtaining such other remedies as may be permitfed by law.
�.�:-3. ; . .
Before the Work �vill be accepted by the Contracting Agency, the Contractor shall submit an a�davit,
on the form provided by the Engineer, of amounts paid to certified disadvantaged (DB), minority
(MBE) or women business enterprises (WBE) participating in the Work. Such affidavit shall certify
the amounts paid to the DB, MBE or WBE subcontractors regardless of tier.
On federally funded projects the Contractor may also be required to execute and furnish the
Contracting Agency an affidavit certifying that the Contractor has not extended any loans, b atuity or
gift and money pursuant to Section 1-07.19 ofthese Specifications.
If the Contractor fails, refuses, or is unable to sign and return the Final Prob ess Estimate or any other
documents required for the final acceptance of the Contract, the Contracting Agency reserves the right
to establish a completion date and unilaterally accept the Contract. Unilateral acceptance will occur
only after the Contractor has been provided the opportunity, by written request from the Engineer, to
voluntarily submit such documents. If voluntary compliance is not achieved, formal noti�cation of
the impending unilateral acceptance will be provided by certified letter from the Engineer to the
Contractor that will provide 30 calendar days for the Contractor to submit the necessary documents.
The 30-calendar day deadline shall begin on the date of the postrnark of the certified letter from the
Engineer requesting the necessary documents. This reservation by the Contracting Agency to
�y�
,
'
,
'
'
�
'
'
�or26izoio
unilaterally accept the Contract will apply to contracts that are completed in accortiance with Section
1-08.5 for contracts that are terminated in accordance with Section 1-08.10. Unilateral acceptance of
the Contract by the Contracting Agency does not in any way relieve the Contractor of the provisions
under contract or of the responsibility to comply with a11 laws, ordinances, and federal, state, and
local regulations that affect the Contract. The date the Contracting Agency unilaterally signs the Final
Progress Estimate consritutes the final acceptance date (Secrion 1-05.12).
1-09.11 Disputes and Claims
1-09.11(2) Claims
Parab aph 5 is revised as follows:
��:*****�
Failure to submit with the Final Application for Payment such information and details as described in
this section for any claim shall operate as a waiver of the claims by the Contraetor as provided in
Secrion 1-09.9.
1-09.11(3) Time Limitations and Jurisdiction
Paragraph 1, Sentence 1 is revised as follows:
���x*�**�
.._such claims or causes of action shall be brought in the Superior Court of the county ��here the
Work is performed.
1-09.13 Claims and Resolutions
' 1-09.13(3) Ctaims $250,000 or Less
Delete this Secrion and replace it with the following:
��*****�
The Contractor and the Contracting Agency mutually agree that tbose claims that total $250,000 or
, less, submitted in accordance with Section 1-09.11 and not reso(ved by nonbonding ADR processes,
shall be resolved through litigation, unless the parties mutually agree in writing to resolve the claim
through binding arbitration.
'
�
'
�
,
'
,
�
,
1-09.13�3)A Administration of Arbitration
Revise e third paragraph to read:
�*:�**�*�
The Contracting Agency and the Contractor mutually agree to be bound by the decision of the
arbitrator, and judgment upon the award rendered by the azbitrator may be entered in fhe Superior
Court of the countv m which the Contractin� A;encv's headquarters are located. The decision of the
arbitrator and the specific basis for the decision shall be in writing. The arbitrator shall use the
Contract as a basis for decisions.
1-09.13(3)B Procedures to Pursue Arbitration
Section 1-09.13(3)B is supplemented by adding:
�******�
The findings and decision of the board of arbitratars shall be final and binding on the parties, unless
the aggrieved party, within 10 days, challenges the findings and decision by serving and filing a
petirion for review by the superior court of King County, Washington The grounds for the petition
for review are limited to showing that the findings and decision_
1. Are not responsive to the questions submitted;
2. Is contrary to the terms of the contract or any component thereof;
3. Is arbitrary and/or is not based upon the applicable facts and the law controlling the issues
submitted to arbitration. The board of arbitrators shall support its decision by setting forth in writing
their findings and eonelusions based on the evidence adduced at any such hearing.
The arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the statutes of the State of Washington and
court de�isions goveming such procedure.
The costs of such arbitration shall be bome equally by the City and the Contractor unless it is the
48
10/26/2010
board's majority opinion that the Contractoi s filing of the protest or action is capricious or without
reasonable foundation. In the latter case, all costs shall be borne by the Contractor.
1-09.14 Payment Schedule
Measurement and Payment Schedule for Bid Items in This Project
Proposal
Section 1-09.14 is a new section:
�******�
GENERAL
1-09.14(1) Scope
Section 1-09. i4(1) is a new section:
�**�*�*�
A. Payment for the various items of the bid sheets, as further specified herein, shall include all
compensation to be received by the Contractor for furnishing all tools, equipment, supplies,
and manufactured articles, and for all labor, operations, and incidentals appurtenant to the
items of Work being described, as necessary to complete the various items of the Work all in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including all appurtenances
thereto, and including all costs of compliance with the regulations of public agencies having
jurisdiction, including Safety and Health Administration of the U.S. Department of Labor
(OSHA). No separate payment will be made for any item that is not specifically set forth in
the Bid Schedules, and all costs therefore shall be included in the prices named in the Bid
Schedules for the various appurtenant items of Work:
B. The Owner shall not pay for material qnantities, which exceed the actual measured amount
used and approved by the Engineer.
C. It is the intention of these Specifications that the performance of all Work under the bid for
each item shaIl result in the complete construction, in an accepted operating condition, of
each item.
Work and material not specifically listed in the proposal but required in the Plans,
Specif cations, and generaI construction practice, shall be included in the bid price. No
separate payment will be made for these incidental items.
1-09.14(2) Trench and Excavation Safety Systems (Bid Item 001)
Measurement shall be lump sump for "Trench and Excavation Safety Systems" and per the cost
breakdown percentage requ�rements specified in Section 1-09.1 of the Standard Specifications as
supplemented in Part I of these Special Provisions.
The lump sum bid price for "Trench and Excavation Safety Systems" shall include all shoring
acrivities associated with the excavarion of the valve vault and yard piping. The shoring system shall
maintain a vertical excavation that is free of excessive movement and of the size needed to construct
the required facilities. Work shall consist of designing, constructing, maintaining, operating, and
removing shoring; sheeting, cribbing, backfill and compacrion; and other work required for
compliance with WISHA, Chapter 49.17 RCW. This bid item shall also include all excavation,
bac�tl, compaction and dewatering required when excavation beyond a vertical excavation is used
in lieu of shoring and cribbing for compliance with WISHA, Chapter 49_17 RCW. Contractor shall
obtain written approval from Owner if Contractor wants to leave any shoring in place as permanent
shoring. All costs associated with obtaining said approval and leaving shoring in place shall be the
Contractor's responsibility. Costs for WISHA compliance for excavation of the valve vault and yard
piping shall not be incidental to any other bid items.
This item shall include aIl shoring and trench safety measures necessary to comply with the
49
�
,
'
1
'
,
,
'
,
'
,
'
t
,
'
,
'
n
�
�
u
�
LJ
,
!__]
,
'
,
'
'
'
�
'
�
,
'
r
,
' �
'
] 0/26/2010
retirements of the permits and permitting agencies.
Contractor shall pay for all special inspections as required for the installation of tie-backs and lagging
utilized in shoring wall construction.
1-09.14(3) Westview Lift Station Upgrades (Bid Item 002)
Measurement shall be lump sump for "Westview Lift Station Upgrades" and per the cost breakdown
percentage requirements specified in Section 1-09.1 of the Standard Specifications as supplemented
in Part I of these Special Provisions.
The lump sum bid price for "Westview Lift Station Upgrades" shall include all project items not
included in the above "Trench and Excavation Safety Systems" Bid Item 001. The lump sum bid price
shall constitute full compensation for all Work, labor, materials, and equipment necessary for
construction, testing, and completion of the Westvie��v Lift Station Upgrades as indicated in the
Contract Specifications and Drawings.
1-10 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
1-10.1 General
Revise the first paragraph to read:
��:*****�
The Contractor shall provide flaggers, signs, and other traffic control devices not otherwise specified
as being furnished by the Contracting Agency. The Contractor shall erect and maintain all
construction signs, warning signs, detour sib s, and other traffic control devices necessary to warn
and protect the public at all times from injury or damage as a result of the Contractor's operations
which may occur on highways, roads, s�-eets, sidewalks, or paths. No Work shall he done on or
adjacent to any traveled way until all necessary signs and traffic control devices are in place.
Section 1-10.1 is supplemented by adding the following:
�******�
When the bid proposal includes an item for "Traffic Control," the Work required for this item shall be
all items described in Section 1-10, including, but not limited to:
1. Furnishing and maintaining barricades, flashers, construction signing, and other
channelization devices, unless a pay item is in the bid proposal for any specific device and
the Special Provisions specify furnishing, maintaining, and payment in a different manner
for that device;
2. Furnishing traffic control labor, equipment, and supervisory personnel for all traffic control
labor;
3. Furnishing any necessary vehicle(s) to set up and remove the Class B construction signs
and other tra�c control devices;
4. Furnishing labor and vehicles for patrolling and maintaining in position all of the
construction signs and the tra�c control devices, unless a pay item is in the bid proposal to
specifically pay for this Work; and
5. Furnishing labor, material, and equipment necessary for cleaning up, removing, and
replacing of the construetion signs and the traffic control devices destroyed or damaged
during the life of the project.
6. Removing existing signs as specified or as direeted by the Engineer and delivering to the
City Shops, or stonng and reinstalling as directed by the Engineer.
7. Preparing a traffic control plan for the project and designating the person responsible for
traffic control at the Work site. The. traffic control plan shall include descriptions of tre
traffic control methods and devices to be used by the prime Contractor, and subcontractors,
shall be submitted at or before the preconstruction conference, and shall be subject to
review and approval of the Engineer.
8. Contacting police, fire, 911, and ambulance services to notify them in advance of any Work
that will affect and traveled portion of a roadway.
9. Assuring that all traveled portions of roadways are open to traffic during peak traffic
periods, 6_30 a.m. to 8:30 a.m., and 3:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m_, or as specified in the special
50
10l26/2010
provisions, or as directed by the Engineer.
10. Prompdy removing or covering all non-applicable signs during periods when they are not
needed.
If no bid item "Traffic Control" appears in the proposal, then all Work required by these sections will
be considered incidental and their cost shall be included in the other items of Work.
If the Enb neer requires the Contractor to furnish additional channelizing devices, pieces of
equipment, or services, which could not be usually anticipated, by a prudent Contractor for the
maintenance and protection of traffic, then a new item or items may be established to pay for such
items. Further limitarions for consideration of payment for these items are that they are not covered
by other pay items in the bid proposal, they are not specified in the Special Provisions as incidental,
and the accumulative cost for the use of each individual channelizing device, piece of equipment, or
service must exceed $200 in total cost for the duration of their need. In the event of disputes, the
Engineer will deternune what is usually anticipated by a prudent Contractor. The cost for these items
will be by agreed price, price established by the Engineer, or by force account. Additional items
required as a result of the Contractor's modification to the traffic control plan(s) appearing in the
Contract shall not be covered by the provisions in this paragraph.
If the total cost of all the Work under the Contract increases or decreases by more than 25 percent, an
equitable adjustment will be considered for the item "Traffic Control" to address the increase or
decrease.
Traffic control and maintenance for the safety of the traveling public on this project shall be the sole
responsibility of the Contractor and all methods and equipment used will be subject to the approval of
the Owner.
Traffic control devices and their use shall conform to City of Renton standards and the Manual on
Uniform Tra�c Control Devices(MUTCD).
The Contractor shall not proceed with any construction until proper traffic control has been provided
to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Any days lost due to improper traffic control will be charged
against the Contractor's allowable contract time, and shall not be the cause for a claim for extra days
to complete the Work.
-1-10.2(1)B Traffic Controt Supervisor
Para�raphs 1 and 2 are revised as follows:
�*��*�*�
A Traffic Control Supervisor (TCS) shall be on the project whenever traffic control labor is required
or as authorized by the Engineer.
The TCS shall assure that all the duties of the TCS are performed during the duration of the Contract.
During non-Work periods, the TCS shall be able to be on the job site within a 45-minute time period
after notification by the Engineer.
1-10.2(2) Traffic Control Plans
Section 1-102(2) is supplemented as follows:
�******�
The Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that traffic control is installed and maintained in
conformance to established standards. The Contractor shall continuously evaluate the operation of
the traffic control plan and take prompt action to correct any problems that become evident during
operation_
1-10.3 Flagging, Signs, and All Other Traffic Control Devices
Section 1-10.3 is supplemented as follows:
�*����x�x)
At the end of each working day, provisions shall be made for the safe passage of traffic and
pedestrians during non-working hours_
51
�
,
'
�
,
'
�
'
,
'
'
'
'
'
'
r
'
'
�
'
'
,
�
'
�
�
'
'
'
l_�
'
�
�
�or6r2oio
Barricades shall be reflectorized as specified in Part VI of the MUTCD, and shall be 3M-diamond
grade or equivalent approved by the Engineer. Barricades shall also be equipped with flashers.
1-10.3(3) Construction Signs
Section 1-10.3(3) paragraph 4 is supplemented as follows:
�******�
No separate pay item will be provided in the bid proposal for Class A or Class B construction signs.
All costs for the Work to provide Class A or Class B construction signs shall be included in the unit
contract price for the various other items of the Work in the bid proposal.
1-10.4 Measurement
Section 1-10.4 is replaced with:
��***:�*�
No specific unit of ineasurement will apply to the lump sum item of "Traffic Control".
No adjustment in the lump sum bid amount will be made for overtime Work or for use of relief
flaggers.
1-10.5 Payment
Section 1-10.5 is replaced with:
�******�
Payment for all labor, materials, and equipment described in Section 1-10 will be made in accordance
with Section 1-04.1, for the following bid items when included in the proposal:
"Traffic Control," Lump Sum.
1-11 RENTON SURVEYING STANDARDS
The following is a�new section with new subsections:
�*�***�x�
1-11.1(1) Responsibility for Surveys
All surveys and survey reports shall be prepared under the direct supervision of a person registered to
practice land surveying under the provisions of Chapter 18.43 RCW.
All surveys and survey reports shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements established by
the Board of Registration for Professional Engineers and Land Surveyors under the provisions of
Chapter 18.43 RCW.
1-ll.l(2) Survey Datum and Precision
The horizontal component of all surveys shall have as its coordinate base: The North American
Datum af 1983191.
All horizontal control for projects must be referenced to or in conjunction with a minimum of two of
the City of Renton's Survey Control Network monuments. The source of the coordinate values used
will be shown on the survey drawing per RCW 58.09.070.
, The horizontal component of all surveys shall meet or exceed the closure requirements of WAC 332-
130-060. The control base lines for all surveys shall meet or exceed the requirements for a Class A
survey revealed in Table 2 of the Minimum Standard Detail Requirements for ALTAIACSM Land
Title Surveys jointly established and adopted by ALTA and ACSM in 1992 or comparable
, classification in future editions of said document. The angular and linear closure and precision ratio
of traverses used for survey control shall be revealed on the face of the survey drawing, as shall the
method of adjustment.
J
��
�
The horizontal component of the control system for surveys using global positioning system
methodology shall exhibit at least 1 part in 50,000 precision in line length dependent error analysis at
a 95 percent confidence level and performed pursuant to Federal Geodetic Control Subcommittee
Standards for GPS control surveys as defined in Geometric Geodetic Accuracy Standards &
52
� oi26no i o
Specificarions for Using GPS Relative Positioning Techniques dated August l, 1989, or compazable
classification in future editions of said document.
The vertical component of all surveys shall be based on NAVD 1988, the North American Vertical
Datum of 1988, and tied to at least one of the City of Renton Survey Control Network benchmarks. If
there are two such benchmarks within 3000 feet of the project site a tie to both shall be made_ The
benchmark(s) used will be shown on the drawing_ If a City of Renton benchmark does not exist
within 3000 feet of a project, one must be set on.or neaz the project in a permanent manner that will
remain intact throughout the duration of the project. Source of elevations (benchmark) will be shown
on the drawing, as well as a descriprion of any benchmarks established.
1-11.1(3) Subdivision Information
Those surveys dependent on secrion subdivision shall reveal the controlling monuments used and the
subdivision of the applicable quarter section.
Those surveys dependent on retracement of a plat or short plat shall reveal the controlling
monuments, measurements, and methodology used in that retracement.
1-11.1(4) Field Notes
Field notes shall be kept in conventional format in a standard bound field book with waterproof
pages. In cases where an electronic data collector is used field notes must also be kept with a sketch
and a rec�:d of control and hase line traverses descr.�ing stati�n occupations a.nd «�hat measurements
were made at each point.
Every point located or set shall be identified by a number and a description. Point numbers shall be
unique within a complete job. The preferred method of point numbering is field notebook, page and
point set on that page_ E�mple: The first point set or found on page 16 of field book 348 would be
identified as Point No. 348_16.01, the second point would be 348.16.02, etc.
Upon completion of a City of Renton project, either the field notebook(s) provided by the City or the
original field notebook(s) used by the Surveyor will be given to the City. For all other Work,
Surveyors will provide a copy of the notes to the City upon request. In those cases where an
electronic data collector is used, a hard copy print aut in ASCII text format will accompany the field
notes.
1-11.1(5) Corners aod Monuments
Corner: A point on a land boundary, at the juncture of two or more boundary lines. A monument is
usually set at such points to physically reference a corner's location on the ground.
Monument: Any physical object or structure of record, which marks or accurately references:
A corner or other survey point established by or under the supervision of an individual per
Section 1-11.1(1) and any comer or monument established by the General Land Office and its
successor the Bureau of Land Management including section subdivision corners down to
and including one-sixteenth comers; and
Any pennanently monumented boundary, right-of-way alignment, or horizontal and vertical
control points established by any governmental agency or private surveyor including street
intersections but excluding dependent interior lot corners.
1-11.1(6) Control or Base Line Survey
Control or Base Line Surveys shall be established for all construction projects. that will create
permanent structures such as roads, sidewalks, bridges, utility lines or appurtenances, signal or light
poles, or any non-single family building. Control or Base Line Surveys shall consist of such number
of permanent monuments as are required such that every structure may be observed for staking or "as-
builting" while occupying one such monument and sighting another such monument. A minimum of
two of these permanent monuments shall be existing monuments, recob ized and on record with the
City of Renton. The Control or Base Line Survey shall occupy each monument in turn, and shall
satisfy all applicable requirements of Section 1-1 Ll herein.
53
�
,
,
ior6noio
The drawing depicting the survey shall be neat, legible, and drawn to an appropriate scale. North
orientation should be clearly presented and the scale shown graphically as well as noted. The
drawing must be of such quality that a reduction thereof to one-half original scale remains legible.
If recording of the survey with the King County Recorder is required, it will be prepared on 18 inch
� by 24 inch mylar and will comply with all provisions of Chapter 58.09 RCW. A photographic mylar
of the drawing will be submitted to the City of Renton and, upon their review and acceptance per the
specific requirements of the project, the or�ginal will be recorded with the King County Recordcr.
' If recording is not required, the survey drawing shall be prepared on 22 inch by 34 inch mylar, and
the orib nal or a photographic mylar thereof will be submitted to the City of Renton.
' The survey drawings shall meet or exceed the requirements of WAC 332-130-050 and shall conform
to the City of Renton's Drafting Standards. American Public Works Association symbols shall be
used whenever possib(e, and a legend shall identify all symbols used if each point marked by a
symbol is not described at each use.
1
�
�
r
�
'
,
An electronic listing of all principal points shown on the drawing shall be submitted with each
drawing. The listing should include the point number designation (corresponding with that in the
field notes), a brief description of the point, and northing, easting, and elevation (if applicable) values,
all in ASCII format, on ISh� PC �ompa�ible media.
1-11.1('1} Precision Levels
Vertical Surveys for the establishment of benchmarks shall satisfy all applicable requirements of
Sections 1-OS and 1-11.1.
Vertical surveys for the establishment of benchmarks shall meet or exceed the standards,
Specifications and procedures of third order elevarion accuracy established by the Federal Geodetie
Control Committee.
Benchmazks must possess both permanence and vertical stability. Descriptions of benchmarks must
be complete to insure both recoverability and positive identification on recovery.
1-11.1(8) Radial and Station -- Offset Topography
Topob aphic surveys shall satisfy all applicable requirements of Section 1-11.1 herein.
All points occupied or back sighted in developing radial topography or establishing baselines for
station-offset topography shall meet the requirements of Section 1-1 l.l herein.
The drawing and electronic listing requirements set forth in Section 1-11.1 herein shall be observed
for all topographic surveys.
1-11.1(9) Radial Topography
, Elevations for fhe points occupied or back sighted in a radial topographic survey shall be determined
either by, I) spirit leveling with misclosure not to exceed 0.1 feet or Federal Geodetic Control
Committee third order elevation accuracy Specifications, OR 2) trigonometric leveling with elevation
, differences determined in at least two directions for each point and with misclosure of the circuit not
to exce�d 0.1 feet.
� 1-11.1(10) Station--Offset Topography
Elevarions of the baseline and topographic points shall be determined by spirit leveling and shall
sarisfy Federal Geodetic Control Committee Specificarions as to the turn points and shall not exceed
0.1 foo�s error as to side shots.
'
,
,
1-11.1(Il) As-Built Survey
All improvements required to be "as-built" (post construction survey) per City of Renton Codes,
TITLE 4 Building Rewlations and TITLE 9 Public Ways and Property, must be located both
54
�oiz6,zoio
horizontally and vertically by a Radial survey or by a Sta.tion offset survey. The "as-built" survey
must be based on the same base line or control survey used for the construction staking survey for the
improvements being "as-built". The "as-built" survey for all subsurface improvements should occur
prior to backfilling. Close cooperation between the installing Contractor and the "as-builring"
surveyor is therefore required_
All "as-built" surveys. shall satisfy the requirements of Section 1-1 l.l(1) herein, and shall be based
upon control or base line surveys made in conformance with these Specifications_
The field notes for "as-built" shall meet the requirements of Section 1-11.1(4) herein, and submitted
with stamped and signed "as-built" drawings which includes a statement certifying the accuracy of
the "as-built".
The drawing and electronic listing requirements set forth in Section 1-Il.l(6) herein shall be
observed for all "as-built" surveys_
1-11.1(12) Monument Setdng and Referencing
All property or lot comers, as defined in 1-11.1(5), established or reestablished on a plat or other
recorded survey shall be referenced by a permanent marker at the comer point per 1-11.2(1). In
situations where such markers are impractical or in danger of being destroyed, e.g., the front comers
of lots, a witness marker shall be set. In most cases, this will be tf�e extension of the lot line to a tack
in lead in the curb. The relationship between the wimess monuments and [heir respective corners
shalt be shown or described on the face of the plat or survey of record, e_g., "Tacks in lead on the
extension of the lot side lines have been set in the curbs on the extension of said line with the curb."
In ali other cases the comer shall meet the requirements of Section 1-11.2(1) herein.
All non-corner monuments, as defined in 1-11.1(5), shall meet the requirements of Section 1-112(2)
herein. If the manument falls within a paved portion of a right-of-way or other area, the monument
shall be set below the ground surface and contained within a lidded case kept separate from the
monument and flush with the pavement surface, per Section 1-11.2(3).
In the case of right-of-way centerline monuments all points of curvature (PC), points of tangency
(PT), street intersecrions, center points of cul-de-sacs shall be set. If the point of intersection (PI) for
the tangents of a curve fall within the paved portion of the right-of-way, a monument can be set at the
PI instead of the PC and PT of the curve.
For a11 non corner monuments set while under contract to the City of Renton or as part of a City of
Renton approved subdivision of property, a City of Renton Monument Card (furnished by the city)
identifying the monument; point of intersection (Pn, point of tangency (PT), point of curvature (PC),
one-sixteenth comer, Plat monument, street intersection, etc., complete with a description of the
monument, a minimum of two reference points and NAD 83/91 coordinates, and NAVD 88 elevation
shall be filled out and filed with the city.
1-11.2 Materials
1-11.2(1) Property/Lot Corners
Corners per 1-11.1(5) shall be marked in a permanent manner such as I/2 inch diameter rebar 24
inches in length, durable metal plugs or caps, tack in lead, etc., and permanently marked or. tagged
with the surveyor's identification number. The specifie nature of the marker used can be determined
by the surveyor at the time of installatian.
1-11.2(2) Monuments
Monuments per 1-11.1(5) shall meet the requirements as set forth in City of Renton Standard Plans
page H031 and permanently marked or tagged with the surveyor's identification number_
1-11.2(3) Monument Case and Cover
Materials shall meet the requirements of Section 9-22 and City of Renton Standard Plans page H031.
55
�
�
,
i
'
,
�
�
'
r
'
'
'
�
r
i
'
'
�
l
�
�
u
'
�
�
�
�oiz6noio
2-01 CLEARING, GRUBBING, AND ROADSIDE CLEANUP
2-01.1 Description
Section 2-01.1 is supplemented as follows:
��*�***�
The limits of clearing and grubbing (construction limits) shall be defined as being the construction
limit lines as shown in the Plans. Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, any trees abutting or
adjacent to the limits of clearing and grubbing are damaged and require removal, tl�e Contractar shall
remove such trees. Any trees flagged by the Engineer to remain within the clearing and grubbing
limits shall be left undamaged by the Contractor's operations. Any flagged trees, which are damaged,
shall be replaced in kind at the Contractor's expense.
Existing landscaping outside the construction limits, including but not limited to, sod, rockeries,
beauty bark, decorative gravel or rock, bushes, and shrubbery shall be protected from damage.
The property owners shall be responsible for removing and/or relocating irrigation equipment, trees,
shrubs, curbing, omamental plants, and any other decorative landscaping materials within the
construction limits that they wish to save. The Contractor shall give property owners 10 days'
written notice prior to removing landscaping materials. All landscaping materials that remain in
the construcrion limits after that time period shall be removed and disposed of, by the Contractor, in
accordance with Secrion 2-01 of the Standard Specifications, these Special Provisions, and the Plans.
The Contractor shall receive approval from the Engineer prior to removal.
� 2-01.2 Disposal of Usable Material and Debris
Section 2-01.2 is supplemented as follows:
�******�
The Contractor shall dispose of all debris by Disposal Method No. 2— Waste Site.
�
�
,
�
�
�
,
C�
,
2-01.5 Payment
Section 2-Ol_� is supplemented as follows:
�***�**�
The lump sum pnce for "Clearing and Grubbing" shall be full compensation for all Work described
hcrein and shown in the Plans, including removing trees and shrubbery where shown in the Plans and
directed by the Engineer.
2-02 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURE AND OBSTRUCTIONS
2-02.3(3) Removal of Pavement, Sidewalks, and Curbs
Section 2-02.3(3) is revised and supplemented as follows:
�******�
Item "1" is revised as follows:
In removing pavement, sidewalks, driveways, and curbs, the Contractor shall haul broken-up pieces
to some off-project site.
The section is supplemented as follows:
When an area where pavement, sidewalk, or driveway has been removed is to be opened to traffic
before pavement patching has been completed, temporary mix asphalt concrete patch shall be
required. Temporary patching shall be placed to a minimum depth of 2 inches immediately after
backfilting and compaction are complete, and before the road is opened to traffic. MC cold mix or
MC hot mix shall be used at the discretion of the Engineer.
2-02.4 Measurement
Section 2-02.4 replaces the existing vacant section:
�******�
Sawcutting existing cement and asphalt concrete pavements shail be measured by the linear foot
along the sawcut, full depth_ Wheel cutting of pavement will not be measured for separate payment,
but shall be included in other items of Work.
�
10l26/2010
2-02.5 Payment
Section 2-02.5 is supplemented by adding:
�****:x*�
"Saw Cutting", per lineal foot.
"Remove Sidewalk", per square yard.
"Remove Curb and Gutter", per lineal foot.
"Cold Mix", per ton
Remove Asphalt Concrete Pavement," per squaze yard.
"Remove Cement Concrete pavement," per square yazd_
"Remove existing ," per
All costs related to the removal and disposal of structures and obstructions including saw cutring,
excavarion, backfilling, and temporary asphalt shall be considered incidental to and included in other
items unIess designated as specific bid items in the proposal. If pavements, sidewalks, or curbs lie
within an excavation area and are not mentioned as separate pay items, their removal will be paid for
as part of the quantity removed in excavation. If they are mentioned as a separate item in the
proposal, they will be measured and paid for as provided under Section 2-02.5, and will not be
mcluded in the quanrity calculated for excavation.
2-03 ROADWAY EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT
2-03.3 Construction Requirements
Section 2-03.3 is supplemented by adding the following:
�*****#�
Roadway excavarion shall include the removal of all materials excavated from within the limits
shown on the Plans. Suitable excavated material shall be used for embankments, while surplus
excavated material or unsuitable material shall be disposed of by the Contractor.
Earthwork quanrities and changes will be computed, either manually or by means of electronic data
processing equipment, by use of the average end area method. Any changes to the proposed Work as
directed by the Engineer that would alter these quantiries shall be calculated by the Engineer and
submitted to the Contractor for his review and venfication.
Any excavation or embankment beyond the limits indicated in the Plans, unless ordered by the
Engmeer, shall not be paid for. All Work and material required to return these areas to their oriainal
conditions, as directed by the Engineer, shall be provided by the Contractor at his sole expense.
All areas shall be excavated, filled, and/or backfilled as necessary to comply with the grades shown
on the Plans. In filled and backfilled areas, fine grading shall begin during the placement and the
compaction of the final layer. In cut sections, fine �ading shall begin within the imal six (6) inches
of cut. Final grading shall produce a surface, which is smooth and even, without abrupt changes in
grade.
Excavation for curbs and gutters shall be accomplished by cutting accurately to the cross sections,
grades and elevations shown. Care shall be taken not to excavate below fhe specified grades. The
Contractor shall maintain all excavations free from detrimental quantities of leaves, brush, sticks,
trash, and other debris until final acceptance of the Work.
Following removal of topsoil or excavation to grade, and before placement of fills or base course, the
subgrade under the roadway shall be proof-rolled to identify any soft or loose areas which may
warrant additional compaction or excavation and replacement.
The Contractor shall provide temporary drainage or protection to keep the subgrade free from
standing water.
Acceptable excavated native soils shall be used for fill in the area requiring fills. Care shall be taken
to place excavated maEerial at the optimum moisture content to achieve the specified compaction.
��►i
L]
LJ
�
,
'
�
�
��
�
�
�
�
�
,
,
i
'
!�
�
I
�
] 0/26/2010
Any native material used for fill shall be free of organics and debris, and l�ave a maximum particle
size of 6 inches.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to prevent the native materials from becoming saturated
with water. The measures may include sloping to drain, compacting the native materials, and
diverting runoff away from the materiaLs. If the Contractor fails to take such preventative measures,
any costs or delay related to dryirig the materials shall be at his own expense.
If the native materials become saturated, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to dry the
materials, to the optimum moisture content. If sufficient acceptable native soils are not available_to
complete construction of the roadway embankment, Gravel Borrow shall be used.
If subgrade trimmer is not required on the project, all portions of Section 2-03 shall apply as thouDh a
subgrade trimmer were specified. -
If suf�icient acceptable native soils, as determined by the Engineer, are not available to complete
construction of the roadway embankinent, Gravel Borrow meeting the requirements of Section 9-
03.14 of the Standard Specifications, shall be used.
2-03.4 Measurement
Section 2-03.4 is supplemented by adding the following:
�x:**:x**}
At the discretion of the Engineer, roadway excavatioq borrow excavation, and unsuitable foundation
excavarion - by the cubic yard (adjusted for swell) may be measured by truck in the hauling vehicle at
the point of loading. The Contractor shall provide truck tickets for each load removed. Each ticket
shall have the truck number, time and date, and be approved by the Engineer.
2-03.5 Payment
Section 2-03.5 is revised as follo��s:
��*�:***}
Payment for embankment compaction will not be made as a separate item. All costs for embankment
compaction shall be included in other bid items involved. Payment will be made for the following bid
items when they are included in the proposal:
"Roadway Excavation Including Haul," per cubic yard
"Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Foundation Material," per ton
"Gravel Borrow Including Haul," per ton
"Roadway Excavation Including Haul" shall be considered incidental and part of the bid item(s)
provided for the installation of the utility mains and appurtenances. When the Engineer orders
excavation below subgrade, then payment will be in accordance with the item "Removal and
Replacement of Unsuitable Foundation Material". In this case, all items of Work other than roadway
excavarion shall be paid at unit contract prices.
The unit contract price per cubic yard for "Roadway Excavation Including Haul" shall be full pay for
excavatin�, loading, placing, or otherwise disposing of the material.
The unit contract price per ton for "Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Foundation Material"
sb.all be full pay for excavating, loading, and disposing of the material.
Payment for embankment compaction will not be made as a separate item. All costs for embankment
compaction shall be included in other bid items involved. �
2-04 HAUL
2-04.5 Payment
Section 2-04.5 is revised and supptemented as follows:
�***:x**�
All costs for the hauling of material to, from, or on the job site shall be eonsidered incidental to and
58
� oia6�zoto
included in the unit price of other units of Work_
2-06 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
2-06.5 Measurement and Payment
Section 2-06.5 is supplemented by adding the following:
�******�
Subgrade prepazation and maintenance.including watering shall be considered as incidental to the
construction and all costs thereof shall be included in the appropriate unit or lump sum contract bid
prices.
2-09 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION
2-09.1 Description
Section 2-09_ 1 is supplemented by adding the following:
�******�
This Work also includes the excavation, haul, and disposal of all unsuitable materials such as peat,
muck, swampy or unsuitable materials, including buried logs and stumps.
2-09.3(1)D Disposal of Excavated Material
Section 2-09.3(1)D is revised as follows:
�T*TT�*�
The second paragraph is replaced with:
All costs for disposing of excavated material within or external to the project limits shall be included
in the unit contract price for structure excavation, Class A or B.
The third paragraph is replaced with: -
If the Contract includes structure excavation, Class A or B, including haul, the unit contract price shall
include all costs for loading and hauling the material the full required distance, otherwise all such
disposal costs shall be considered incidental to the Wark.
2-09.4 Measurement
Section 2-09.4 is revised and supplemented as follows:
�**�**��---
Gravel backfill. Gravel backfill, except when used as bedding for culvert, storm sewer, sanitary
sewer, manholes, and catch basins, will be measured by the cubic yard in place determined by the
neat lines required by the Plans or by the ton as measured in conformance with Section 1-09.2.
2-09.5 Payment
Section 2-09.5 is revised and supplemented as follows:
�****�*�
Payment will be made for the following bid items when fhey are included in the proposal:
"Structure Excavation Class A", per cubic yard.
"Structure Excavation Class B", per cubic yard.
"Structure Excavation Class A Incl. Haul", per cubic yard.
"Structure Excavation Class B Incl. Haul", per cubic yazd.
Payment for reconstruction of surfacing and paving, within the limits of structure excavation, will be
at the applicable unit prices for the items involved.
If the Engineer orders the Contractor to excavate below the elevations shown in the Plans, the unit
contract price per cubic yard for "Str�ucture Excavation Class A or B" will apply. But if the
Contractor excavates deeper than the Plans or the Engineer requires, the Contracting Agency will not
pay for material removed from below the required elevations. In this case, the Contractor, at no
expense to the Contracting Agency, shall repiace such material with concrete or other material the
Engineer approves. The unit contract price per cubic yard for the bid items listed as 1 through 4 above
shall be full pay for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, azid pumping, or shall be included in the
59
�
i
�
�]
�
�
�
�
�
'
I 0/26'2010
unit bid price of other items of Work if "Structure Excavation" or "Structure Excavation Incl Haul"
are not listed as pay items in the Contract.
"Shoring or Extra Excavation Class B", per square foot.
The unit contract price per squaze foot shall be full pay for all excavation, backfill, compaction, and
other Work required when extra. excavation is used in lieu of constructing shoring. If select backfill
material is required for backfilling within the limits of the structure excavarion, it shall also be
required as backfill material for the extra excavation at the Contractor's expense. Any excavation or
backfill material being paid by unit price shall be calculated by the Engmeer only for the neat line
measurement of the excavation and shall not include the extra excavation beyond the neat line.
If there is no bid item for shoring or extra excavation Class B on a square foot basis and the nature of
the excavation is such that shoring or extra excavation is required as determined by the Engineer, then
shoring or extra excavation shall be considered incidental to the Work involved and no further
compensation shall be made.
"Gravel Backfill (Kind) for (Type of Excavation)", per cubic yard or per ton.
"Controlled Density Fill", per cubic yard.
When gravel backfill is paid by the ton, the Contractor shall take care to assure to the satisfaction of
the Engineer that such per ton backfill is only being used for the specified purpose and not for
purposes where ba�kfitl is incidental or being paid �y cubic yard. Evidence that per ton gravel
backfill is not being used for its designated purpose shall be grounds for the Engineer to deny
payment for such load tickets.
5-04 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
5-04.2 Materials
� Section 5-04.2 is revised and supplemented as follows:
�******�
Delete the second and fourth paragraphs of this section.
� The base course shall be untreated crushed surfacing.
Asphalt concrete shall meet the b ading requirements for the specified mix.
Temporary patch shall be cold or hot mix.
�
,
'
�
�
�
�
'
5-04.3 Construction Requirements
Section 5-04.3 is supplemented as follows:
�******�
Shoulder Restoration
The e�sting surfacing of disturbed asphalt shoulders shall be removed to a minimum depfh of 6
inches below original street grade to provide for placement of the new subgrade and paving. The
subgrade shall be constructed of I'/4 inch minus crushed surfacing base course placed to a compacted
thickness of 2%2 inches, followed by 5/8-inch minus crushed surfacing top course placed to a
compacted thickness of 1'h inches. HMA Class'h" shall then be placed and compacted in 2-inch lifts
up to a m�cimum 4-inch thiclrness to match existing pavement thickness. Minimum thickness shall
he 2 inches. The shoulder shall be replaced to the existing fog line in areas where the e�sting asphalt
shoulder is seriously disturbed, or at the Engineer's discretion.
Asp6att Concrete Patching and Overlay
The Contractor shall maintain temporary hot mix asphalt patches daily during construction to the
satisfaction of the governing road agency and the Engineer until said patch is replaced with a
permanent hot patch. The permanent hot mix asphalt patch shall be placed and sealed with paving
grade asphalt within 30 calendar days.
fi0
10J26/2010
Private Driveways
Where a private driveway is damaged by either construction of the project or by the Contractar's use
and activity on the road, it shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the property owner, the City, and fo
its original condirion or better. Damaged asphalt-concrete driveways shall be replaced by saw cutting
to a straight line and replacing a full width section. Damaged cement-concrete driveways shall be
removed to the nearest joint (real or dummy) and replaced with a full width section. Damaged gravel
driveways shall have crushed surfacing placed and compacted to a minimum depth of 4 inches.
Carbs, Gutters and Sidewalks
Existing curbs, gutters, and sidewalks damaged by construction of the project or the Contractor's use
and activity, shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the property owner, the Ciry, and to its original
condition or better.
5-04.3(� Conditioning the Existing Surface
Section 5-04.3(5) is supplemented as follows:
�*�***�
The Contractor shall maintain existing surface contour during patching, unless otherwise instructed
by the City Engineer or Inspector. "'
5-04.3(5)A Preparation of Existing Surface
Section 5-04.3(5)A is supplemented as follows:
t*****�
The Contractor shall provide his own mechanical sweeping equipment. The sweeper will be on the
project prior to the start of paving, to insure tbe streets to be paved are clean before the tack coat is
applied. The sweeper will keep the streets clean ahead of the paving machine and clean the streets
behind the empty trucks that have dumped their loads into the paving machine. The sweeper must
sweep all streets made dirty by the Contractor's equipment. If the paving machine is "walked" from
one site to another, the sweeper must sweep up behind paving machine. The sweeper shall not leave
the overlay site until given permission by the City's inspector.
All utilities shall be painted with a biodegradable "soap" to prevent the tack and ACP from sticking to
the lids. Diesel wilt not be used. After the application of soap, catch basins must be covered to
prevent tack and ACP from getting into catch basins.
Preparation of existing surface shall be done as outlined in this Secrion and a tack coat shall be
applied at the rate of 0.02 to 0.08 gallons per square yard. Payment for preparation of the surface and
applicatian of the tack coat shall be considered incidental to the paving and no separate payment shall
be made.
The ConEractor shall locate all utilities for access immediately after any paving and mark the location
by means of painting a circle around the location and scooping a portion of asphalt 4" - 6" in diameter
and the depth of the overlay from the center of the utility location.
The Contractor shall locate and completely expose gas and water valves for access immediately after
final rolling.
The day following the start of application ofACP, utility adjustments must begin. The Contractor
shall have an adjustment crew adjusting utilities every workable working day until adjustments are
complete.
During the adjustment of any utility, existing concrete bricks or grouring material that has been
61
,
r-�
l�
L�
�
'
,
�
�
��
LJ
1
�
�
'
'
I
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
I�
�
�
�
r
�
�
(�
�
�
�
�
] 0/26/2010
broken or cracked shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
Utility adjustments must be completed within 15 working days after overlay is complete, and within
the specified working days.
Payment for utility adjustments includes all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary to
complete the adjustments and is incidental to pay items for Asphalt Patch and Asphalt Overlay_
5-04.3(7)A Mig Design
Item 2 is deleted and replaced with:
�**��*�
2. Nonstatistical HMA Evaluation. The Contractor shall submit a certification that the mix
design submitted meets the requirements of Secrions 9-03.8(Z) and 9-03_8(6). The
Contractor must submit the mix design using DOT Form 350-042 EF. Verification. of the
mix design by the Contracting Agency is not needed. The Project Engineer will determine
anti-strip requirements for the HMA.
The mix design will be the initial job mix formula (JMF) for the class of mix. Any additional
adjustments to the JMF will require the approval of +he Preject Engine�r and muy be r:ade
per Section 9-03.8(7).
5-04.3(8)A Acceptance Sampling and Testing—HMA Mixture
Item 1 is deleted and replaced with:
�*****�
General. Acceptance of HMA shall be as provided under nonstatistical or commercial
evaluarion.
Nonstatistical evaluation will be used for the acceptance ofHMA.
�
�
�
�
�
L
J
�
��
Commercial evaluation will be used for Commercial HMA, and for other classes of HMA in
the following applications: sidewalks, road approaches, ditches, slopes, paths, trails, gores,
prelevel, and pavement repair. Other nonstructural applications as approved by the Project
Engineer. Sampling and tesring of HMA accepted by commercial evaluation will be at the
option of the Enb neer. The proposal quantity of HMA that is accepted by commercial
evaluation will be excluded from the quantities used in the determination of nonstatistical
evaluation.
Item 7 is deleted.
5-04.3(10)B Control
Replace Section 5-04.3(10)B with the following:
�* * *:x *�
Sub-base shall be compacted to 95% of the maximum density by the Modified Proctor Test Method,
ASTM D 1557. Compact asphalt concrete patch and paving to 95% of maximum compaction.
5-04.5 Payment
5-04.5(1)A Price Adjustments for Quality of HMA Mixture
Section is deleted and replaced with_
��:�***�
Statistical analysis of quality of gradation and asphalt content will be performed based on
(2
] 0/26/2010
Section 1-06.2 using the following price adjustment factors:
Constituent
Table of Price Adjustment Factors
aggregate passing: 1'/2", 1", 3/4", '/z", 3/8„
aggregate passing No. 8, No 16, No.
aggregate passing No. 200 sieve
Asphalt binder
Factor
sieves 2
100 3
20
A pay factor will be calculated for sieves listed in Section 9-03.8(7) for the class of HMA and for the
asphalt binder.
Nonstatistical Evaluatiori. Each lot of HMA produced under Nonstaristical Evaluation and
having all constituents falling within the tolerance limits of the job mix formula shall be
accepted at the unit contract price with no further evaluation. When one or more constituents
fali outside the nonstatistical acceptance tolerance limits in Section 9-03.8(7), the lot shall be
evaluated in accordance with Section 1-06.2 to determine the appropriate CPF. The
nonstatistical toierance Iimits wiil be used in the calculation of ihe CPF and the maxunum
h
CPF shall be 1.00. When less than three sublots exist, backup samples of the existing sublots
or samples from the street shall be tested to provide a minimum of three sets of results for
evaluation.
Commercial Evaluation. If sampled and tested, HMA produced under Commercial
Evaluation and having all constituents falling within the tolerance limits of the job mix
formula shall be accepted at the unit contract price with no further evaluation. When one or
more constituents fall outside the commercial acceptance tolerance limits in Section 9-
03.8('n, the lot shall be evaluated to determine the appropriate CPF. The commercial
tolerance limits will be used in the calculation of the CPF and the maximum CPF shall be
1_00. When less than three sublots exist, backup samples of the existing sublots or samples
from the street shall be tested to provide a minimum of three sets of results for evaluation.
For each lot of HMA produced under Nonstatistical or Commercial Evaluation when the
calculated CPF is less than 1.00, a Nonconforming Mix factor (NCFiVn will be determined.
TI� NCFM equats the algebraic difference of CPF minus 1_00 multiplied by 60 percent.
The Job Mix Compliance Price Adjustment will be calculated as the product of the NCMF,
the quantity of HMA in the lot in tons, and the unit contract price per ton of the mix.
If a constituent is not measured in accordance with these Specifications, its individual pay factor will
be considered 1.00 in calculating the composite pay factor_
5-04.�(1)B Price Adjustments for Quality of FIMA Compaction
Section is deleted and replaced with:
�***�z*�
The m�imum CPF of a compaction lot is 1_00
For each compaction lot of HMA when tl�e CPF is less than 1.00, a Nonconforming Compaction
Factor (NCCF) will be determined. THE NCCF equals the algebraic difference of CPF minus 1.00
multiplied by 40 percent� The Compaction Pnce Adjustrnent will be calculated as the product of the
NCFF, the quanrity of HMA in the lot in tons and the unit contract price per ton of the mix.
'
�
�
,
L:
,
�
�
1
�
�
�
�
�
�
r
�
63
�
'
�
'
�
�
10l26t2010
5-06 TEMPORARY RESTORATION IN PAVEMENT AREA
Section 5-06 is new Section with subsections:
��*****�
5-06.1 Description
Pavement areas that have been removed by construction activities must be restored by the Contractor
prior to the end of each working period, prior to use by vehicular traffic. Within paved streets, the
Contractor may use temporary pavement to allow vehicular traffic to travel over the construction
areas. Temporary pavement shall be placed around trench plates or others devices used to cover
construction activities in a manner that provides a smooth and safe transition between surfaces.
5-06.2 Materials
� The asphalt pavement for temporary patches shall be 2" of a hot mix asphalt composition determined
by the Contractor to provide a product suitable for the intended application. The Contractor shall not
use materials that are a safety or health hazard.
�
LJ
'
�
�
Temporary pavement material that does not form a consolidated surface a$er compaction shall be
considered unsuitable and shall be removed from the site. Unsuitable temporary pavement shall be
disposed of offsite.
5-06.3 Construction Requirements
The Contractor shall maintain temporary hot mix asphalt patches daily during to the satisfaction of
the governing road agency and the Engineer until said patch is replaced with permanent hot patch.
The completed pavement shall be free from ridges, ruts, bumps, depressions, objectionable marks, or
other irregularities. The permanent hot mix asphalt patch shall be placed and sealed with a paving
asphalt within 30 calendar days.
The Contractor shall immediately repair, patch, or remove any temporary pavement that does not
provide a flat transition between existing pavement areas.
All temporary asphalt pavement shall be removed from the site by the end of the project and shall not
be used as permanent asphalt pavement or subgrade material.
7-01 DRAINS
� 7-01.2 Materials
The second paragraph of Section 7-01.2 is revised as follows:
- �*�x*�x**�
Drain pipes may be concrete, zinc coated (galvanized) corrugated iron with Asphalt Treatment I,
' aluminum coated (aluminized) corrugated iran with Asphalt Treatment I, zinc coated (galvanized)
steel with Asphalt Treatment I, corrugated aluminum alloy, polyvinyl chloride (PVC), or corrugated
polyethylene (PE) at the option of the Contractor unless the Plans specify the type to be used.
�
�
C�
�
�
7-01.3 Construction Requirements
Section 7-013 is revised as follows:
�***=�**�
The second paragraph is revised as follows:
PVC drainpipe shall be jointed with a bell and spigot joint using a flexible elastomeric seal as
described in Section 4-04.8_ The bell shall be laid upstream. PE or ABS drainpipe shall be jointed
with snap-on, screw-on, or wraparound coupling bands as recommended by the manufacturer of the
tubing.
The sixth parab aph is revised as follows:
PVC under drain pipe shall be jointed using either the flexible elastomeric seal as described in
fi4
] 0126/2010
Section 9-04.8 or solvent cement as described in Section 9-04.9, at the oprion of the Contractor unless
otherwise spec�ed in the Plans. The bell shall be laid upstream. PE or ABS drainage tubing under
drain pipe shall be jointed with snap-on, screw-on, or wraparound coupling bands, as recommended
by the manufacturer of the tabing.
7-01.4 Measurement
Section 7-01.4 is supplemented adding the following:
�**�***�
When the Contraet does not include "Structure Excavation Class B" or "Structure Excavation Class B
Including Haul" as a pay item all costs associated with these items shall be included in other contract
pay items.
7-02 CULVERTS
7-02.2 Materials
The second parab aph of Section 7-022 is revised and supplemented as follows:
�*�x****�
Where steel or aluminum are refened to in this section in regard tv a kind of culvert pipe, pipe arch,
or end sections, it shall be understood that steel is zinc coated (gal�anized) with Asphalt Treatment I
or aluminum coated (aluminized) corrugated iron or steel, and aluminum is corrugated aluminum
alloy as specified in Sections 9-05.4 and 9-05.5. Where plain or reinforced concrete, steel, or
aluminum are referred to in Sectiou 7-02 it sliall be understoud dlat reference is also made to PVC.
7-04 STORM SEWERS
7-04.2 Materials
The second paragraph of Section 7-042 is revised as follows:
�*�x****�
Where steel or aluminum are referred to in this section in regard to a kind of storm sewer pipe, it shall
be understood that steel is zinc coated (galvanized), Asphalt Treatment I Coated, corrugated iron or
steel and aluminum is corrugated aluminum alloy as specified in Sections 9-05.4 and 9-05.5_
The Contractor shall require pipe suppliers to furnish certificates signed by their authorized
representative, stating the Specifications to which the materials or products were manufactured. The
Contractor shall provide 2 copies of these certifications to the Engineer for approval. Certificates
showing nonconformance widi the Contract shall be sufficient evidence for rejection.
Approval of certificates shall be considered only as tentative acceptance of the materials and
products, and such action by the Engineer will not relieve the Contractor of his/her responsibility to
perform field tests and to replace or repair faulty materials, equipment, and/or workmanship and the
Contractor's own expense.
7-04.4 Measurement
The first pazagraph of Section 7-04.4 is revised as follows:
�:�*�***�
The length of storm sewer pipe will be the number of linear feet of completed installation measured
along the invert and will include the length through elbows, tees, and fittings. The number of linear
feet will be measured from the center of manhole or from the center of catch basin to center of catch
basins and similar type structures.
7-04.5 Payment
The second and third paragraphs of Secrion 7-04.5 are revised as follows:
�*:x****}
The unit contract price per lineaz foot for storm sewer pipe of the kind and size specified shall be full
pay for all Work to complete the installation, including adjustment of inverts to manholes. When no
bid item "Gravel Backfill for Pipe Bedding" is included in the Schedule of Prices, pipe bedding, as
shown in the Standard Plans, shall be considered incidental to the pipe and no additional payment
shall be made.
fi5
C�
�
�
��
�
��
�
'
�
LJ
�
'
�
CJ
�
�
�
�
,
�
EJ
� aa�noio
Testing of storm sewer pipe, if required by the Engineer, shall be considered incidental to and
included in the unit contract prices for other items.
Cost of connecting pipe to structures shall be included in the various unit contract prices for storm
sewer pipe, and no additional compensation will be .allowed.
Abandonment and plugging of pipe shall be included in the lump sum contract price for "Removal of
Structure and Obstruction". No separate payment will be made.
7-OS MANHOLES, INLETS, AND CATCH BASINS
7-05.3 Construction Requirements
� Section 7-05.3 is supplemented by adding the following:
�****�*�
All manholes shall have eccentric cones and shall have ladders.
,
,
�
'
i
,
'
Sanitary sewer pipe to manhole connecrions shall be "Kor-n-Seal" boot or approved equal.
7-05.3(1) Adjusting Manholes and Catch Basins to Grade
Section 7-053(1) is replaced with:
�**�rTT�
Where shown in the Plans or where directed by the Engineer, the exisring manholes, catch basins, or
inlets shall be adjusted to the grade as staked or othenvise designated by tbe Engineer.
The existing cast iron ring and cover on manholes and the catch basin frame and grate shall first be
removed and thoroughly cleaned for reinstalling at the new elevation. From that point, the existing
structure shall be raised or lowered to the required elevation.
The Contractor shall construct manholes so as to provide adjustment space for setting cover and
casting to a fmished grade as shown on the Construction Plans. Manhole ring and covers shall be
adjusted to the finished elevations per standard detail 400.1, prior to final acceptance of the Work.
Manholes in unimproved areas shall be adjusted to 6" above b ade.
In unpaved streets: manholes, catch basins, and similar structures in areas to be surfaced with cnished
rock or gravel shall be constructed to a point approximately eight inches below the subgrade and
covered with a temporary wood cover. Exisring manholes shall be cut off and �covered in a similaz
manner_ The Contractor shall carefully reference each manhole so that they may be easily found upon
completion of the street Work. After placing the gravel or crushed stone surfacing, the manholes and
manhole castings shall be constructed to the finished grade of the roadway surface. Excavation
necessary for bringing manholes to grade shall center about the manhole and be held to the minimum
area necessary. At the completion of the manhole adjustment, the void around the manhole shall be
backfilled with materials which result in the section required on the typical roadway section, and be
thoroughly compacted.
In cement concrete pavement: manholes, catch basins, and similar structures shall be constructed and
, adjusted in the same manner as outlined above except that the final adjustment shall be made and cast
iron frame be set after forms have been placed and checked. In placing the concrete pavement,
extreme care shall be taken not to alter the position of the casting in any way.
,
�
�
In asphalt concrete pavement: manholes shall not be adjusted until the pavement is completed, at
which time the center of each manhole shall be carefully relocated from references previously
established by the Contractor. The pavement shall be cut in a restricted area and base material be
removed to permit removal of the cover. The manhole shall then be brought to proper grade utilizing
the same methods of construction as for the manhole itsel£ The cast iron frame shall be placed on the
concrete blocks and wedged up to the desired grade. The asphalt concrete pavement shall be cut and
removed to a neat circle, the diameter of which shall be equal to the outside diameter of tt�e cast iron
frame plus two feet. The base materials and crushed rock shall be removed and Class 3000 or
66
] 0/26/2010
Commercial Portland Cement Concrete sl�all be placed so that the entire volume of tbe excavation is
replaced up to but not to exceed 2 inches of the finished pavement surface. On the day following
placement of the concrete, the edge of the asphalt concrete pavement, and the outer edge of the
casting shall be painted with hot asphalt cement. Asphalt Class G concrete shall then be placed and
compacted with hand tampers and a patching roller. The complete patch shall match the existing
paved surface for texture, density, and unifornuty of grade. The joint between the patch and the
existing pavement shall then be carefully painted with hot asphalt cement or asphalt emulsion and
shall be immediately covered with dry paving sand before the asphalt cerrient solidifies. The inside
throat of the manhole shall be thoroughly mortared and plastered.
Adjustment of inlets: T'he final aligmment and grade of cast iron frames for new and old inlets to be
adjusted to grade will be established from the forms or adjacent pavement surfaces. The final
adjustment of the top of the inlet will be performed in similar manner to the above for manholes. On
asphalt concrete paving projects using curb and gutter section, that portion of the cast iron frame not
embedded in the gutter section shall be solidly embedded in concrete also. The concrete shall extend
a minimum of six inches beyond the edge of the casting and shall be left 2 inches below the top of the
frame so that the wearing course � of asphalt concrete pavement will butt the cast iron frame. The
existing concrete pavement, and edge of the casting shall be painted with hot asphalt cement.
Adjustments in the inlet structure shall be constructed in the same manne.r and of the same material as
that required for new inlets. The inside of the inlets shall be mortared and plastered.
Monwiicnts and cast iran frame and cover: r,;onum�ts and �onument castings shalt be adjuste� to
grade in the same manner as for manholes.
�alve box castings: . adjustments of valve box castings shall be made in the same manner as for
manholes.
7-05.3(2) Abandon Existing Manholes
Section 7-05.3(2) is revised as follows:
��:*****}
Where it is required that an existing manhole be abandoned, the structure shall be broken down to a
depth of at least 4 feet below the revised surfacc elevation, all connections plugged, the manhole base
shall be fractured to prevent standing water, and the manhole filled with sand and compacted to
90 percent density as specified in Section 2-03.3(14)C. Debris resulting from breaking the upper part
of the manhole may be mixed with the sand subject to the approval of the Engineer. The ring and
cover shall be salvaged and all other surplus material disposed of.
7-05.3(2)A Abandon Existing Sanitary Sewer Pipes
Section 7-053(2)A is a new secrion:
�******�
Where it is required that an existing sanitary sewer pipe be abandoned (or portions of pipe installed as
part of this project which are to be abandoned as shown on the Plans), both ends of the abandoned
pipe and atl lateral connections to the pipe shall be plugged with 3,000 psi cement concrete and the
pipe shall be filied with cement-based grout.
A cement-based grout shall be used to fill the void of the abandoned sewer pipe. The grouting
material must have a strength of at least 100 psi and shall have flow characteristics appropriate for
filling a sanitary sewer. The graut mix designed and method of installation shall be approved by the
Engineer prior to beginning the operation (See Section 9-0322).
7-05.3(3) Connections to Existing Manholes
Section 7-05.3(3) is supplemented by adding the following:
��*****�
Where shown on the Plans, new drain pipes shall be connected to existing line, catch basin, curb
inlets and/or manholes. The Contractor shall be required to core dnil into the structure, shape the new
pipe to fit and re-b out the opening in a workmanlike manner. Where directed by the Engineer or
where shown on the Plans,.additional structure channeling will be required.
67
,
'
!I
�?
] 0/26/2010
Connections to existing sanitary sewer manholes shall be core drilled. Couplings shall be equal to
"Kor-n-Seal" boots_ Existing sanitaxy sewer manholes shall be cleaned, repaired, and re-channeled as
necessary to match the new pipe configuration and as sho�vn on the Construction Plans.
A"connection to e�sting" item will be atlowed at any connection of a new line to an ea�isting
� structure, or the connection of a new structure to a exisring line_ No °connection to existing" will be
accepted at the locarion of ncw installarion, relocation and adjustment of line manholes, catch basins,
or curb inlets_
�
�
�
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
,
�
�
r
Any damage to e�sting pipe or structure that is to remain in place resulting from the Contractor's
operations shall be repaired or replaced at her/his own expense.
The unit bid price per each shall be full compensation for all labor, materials and equipment required.
7-05.3(5) Manhole Coatings
Section 7-05.5 is an added new section:
��:***�:��
All new sanitary sewer manholes shall be coated as specified below. The following coating system
Specifications shall be used for coating (sealing) all interior concrete surfaces 'of sanitary sewer
manholes.
Coating Material: High Solids Urethane
Surfaces: Concrete
Surface Preparation: In accordance with SSPC SP-7
(Sweep of brush off blast)
Application_ Shop/Field
The drying time between coats shall not exceed 24 hours in any case
System Thiclaiess: 6A mils dry film
Coatings: Primer: One coat of Wasser MC-Aroshield (2.0 mils DFT)
Finisb: Two or more coats of Wasser MC-Aroshield (min. 4.0 mils DFT)
Color: White
7-05.4 Measurement
Section 7-OS_4 is revised and supplemented as follows:
�******�
Manholes will be measured per each. Measurement of manhole beights for payment purposes will be
the distance from finished rim elevation to the invert of the lowest outlet pipe.
Adjustments of new structures and miscellaneous items such as valve boxes shall be considered
incidental to the unit contract price of the new item and no further compensation shall be made.
Connection to existing pipes and structures shall be measured per each.
7-05.5 Payment
Section 7-05.5 is supplemented as follows:
�*:x*�x**�
"Adjust Existing ," per each.
The unit contract price per each for "Adjust Existing shall be full pay for all costs necessary to
make the adjustment including restoration of adjacent areas in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
If no bid item for Structure Excavation Class A or Structure Excavation Class B is included in the
schedule of prices then the Work will be considered incidental and its cost should be included in the
cost of the pipe.
"Connect to Existing Catch Basin," per eaciL
"Connect Structure to e�sting pipe," per each.
fi 8
] 0/26/2010
7-08 GENERAL PIPE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
7-08.3 Construction Requirements
7-08.3(1)C Bedding the Pipe
Section 7-083(1)C is supplemented by adding the following:
�******�
Pipe bedding for PVC sewer pipe shall consist of clean, granular pea gravel consistent with Section 9-
03.12(3). It shall be placed to a depth of 6" over and 6" under the exterior walls of the pipe.
Hand compaction of the bedding materials under the pipe haunches will be required. Hand
compaction shall be accomplished by using a suitable tamping tool to firmly tamp bedding material
under the haunches of the pipe. Care shall be taken to avoid displacement of the pipe during the
compaction effort.
Pipe bedding shall be considered incidental to the pipe and no further compensation shall be made.
7-08.3(1)D Pipe Foundation
Section 7-08.3(1)D is a new secrion:
�******�
Pipe foundation in poor soil: When soft or unstable material is encountered at the subgrade which, in
the opinion of the Engineer, will not uniformly support the pipe, such material shall be excavated to
an additional depth as required by the Enb neer and backfilled with foundation gravel material placed
in maximum 12-inch lifts. Foundation gravel shall be ballast and conform to the requirements of
Section 9-03.9(1) of the Standard Specifications.
Corrections faulty grade: Excess excavation below grade shall be backfilled with foundation gravel
as specified above and thoroughIy compacted to the required grade line.
7-08.3(2)A Survey Line and Grade
Section 7-08.3(2)A is replaced with:
�***:�*��
Survey line and grade control shall be provided in accordance with Sections 1-05.4, 1-05.5 and 1-11
in a manner consistent with accepted practices.
The Contractor shall transfer line and grade into the trench where they shall be carried by means of a
laser beam. Any other procedure shall have the.written approval of the Engineer.
7-08.3(2)B Pipe Laying — General
Section 7-08.3(2)B is supplemented by adding the following:
�******� .
Checking of the invert elevation of the pipe may be made by calculations from measurements on the
top of the pipe, or by looking for ponding of 1/2" or less, wh�ch indicates a satisfactory condition. At
manholes, when the downstream pipe(s) is of a larger size, pipe(s) shall be laid by matching the
(eight-tenths) flow elevatioq unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
All pipe, fittings, etc. sha11 be carefully handled and protected against damage, impact shocks, and
free fall. All pipe handling equipment shall be acceptable to the Engineer. Pipe shall not be placed
directly on rough ground but shall be supported in a manner, which will protect the pipe against injury
whenever stored at the trench site or elsewhere_ No pipe shall be installed where the lining or coating
show defects that may be harmful as determined by the Engineer. Such damaged lining or coating
shall be repaired, or a new undamaged pipe shall be furnished and installed.
The Contractor shall inspect each pipe and fitting prior to installation to insure that there are not
damaged portions of the pipe. Any defective, damabed, or unsound pipe shall be repaired or replaced.
All foreign matter ar dirt shall be removed from the interior of the pipe before lowering into position
(>9
'
'
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
,,
�
�
�
i
�
i
�
,
'
�
�
1.
�
�,
�
'
'
10/26/2010
in the trench. Pipe shall be kept clean during and after laying. All openings in the pipeline shall be
closed with watertight expandable type sewer plugs at the end of each day's operation, or whenever
the pipe openings are left unattended. The use of burlap, wood, or other similar temporary plugs will
not be permitted.
Where necessary to raise or lower the pipe due to unforeseen obstructions or other causes, the
Engineer may change the alignment and/or the grades. Except for short runs, which may be permitted
by the Engineer, pipes shall be laid uphill on grades that exceed 10 percent. Pipe, which is laid on a
downhill grade, shall be blocked and held m place until su�cient support is furnished by the
following pipe to prevent movement.
Unless otherwise required, all pipe shall be laid straight between the changes in alignment, and at
uniform grade between changes in grade: For concrete pipes with elliptical reinforcement, the pipe
sha11 be placed with the minor axis of the reinforcement in a vertical position.
Immediately after the pipe joints have been made, proper gasket placement shall be checked with a
feeler gage as approved by the pipe manufacturer to verify proper gasket placement_
7-08.3(2)E Rubber Gasketed Joints
Section 7-08.3(2)E is supplemented as follows:
{***�**�
Care shail be iaken by t(ie Contractor to avoid �ver pushing the pipe and damaging the pipe or joint
system. Any damaged pipe shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
7-08.3(2)H Sewer Line Connections
Section 7-08.3(2)H is supplemented by adding the following:
�*�**�:*� .
All connections not occurring at a manhole or catch basin shall be done utilizing pre-manufactured
tee connectors or pipe sections approved by the Engineer. Any other method or materials proposed
for use in making connections shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, all connections of lateral sewers to e�sting mains shall
be made through a cast iron saddle secured to the sewer main with stainless steel bands. When the
existing main is constructed of PVC, plain or reinforced concrete, cast or ductile iron pipe, the
existing main shall be core drilled. When the existing main is constructed of vitrified clay, the main
shall be re-sectioned with flexible couplings, Fernco or approved equal.
Connections (unless booted connections have been provided for) to existing concrete manholes shall
be per Section 7-05.3(3).
7-08.3(2)J Placing PVC Pipe
Secrion 7-083(2)J is an added new section:
�******�
In the trench, prepared as specified in Section 7-02.3(1) PVC pipe shall be laid beginning at the lower
end, with the bell end upgrade. Pea b avel wili be used as the hedding material and extend from 6"
below the bottom of the pipe to 6" above the top of the pipe. When it is necessary to connect to a
structure with a mudded joint a rubber gasketed concrete adapter-collar will be used at the point of
connection.
7-08.3(3)A Backfilling Sanitary Sewer Trenches
Section 7-083(3)A is a new section supplementing 7-08.3(3)
�*****:��
To the maximum extent available, suitable material obtained from trench excavarion shall be used for
trench backfill. All material placed as trench backfill shall be free from rocks or stones larger than 6
inches in their greatest dimension, brush; stumps, logs, roots, debris, and organic or other deleterious
materials. .No stones or rock shall be placed in the upper three feet of trench backfill. Rock or stones
within the allowable size limit incorporated in the remainder of fills shall be distributed so that they
70
10/26,�2010
do not congregate or interfere with proper compaction.
If the native material is considered by the Engineer as unsuitable for backfill, or where unsuitable
material is requested by the Engineer to be removed or over-excavated from trench excavations, then
Bank Run Gravel for Trench Backfill Sewer material conforming to the requirements of Section 9-
03.19 shall be used. All native or imported backfill material shall be compacted to 95% of maximum
dry density per ASTM D 1557 unless otherwise specified herein or on the Plans.
Backfilt within paved areas shall be compacted to at least 95 percent of maximum dry density as
determined by the modified proctor compaction test, ASTM D1557. This includes the foundation,
backfill, and base course materials. Maximum lift thiclmess of backfill shall not exceed 24 inches
between the top of the bedding and 4 feet below grade and 12 inches from 4 feet below grade to the
base of the subgrade. The Engineer may be on-site to collect soil samples and to test compaction.
T'he Contractor shall provide site access at all times for compaction testing and sample collection.
Areas of the trench which fail to meet the compacrion reguirements shall be removed and replace and
re-compacted at the Contractor's expense.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any settlement of backfill, sub-base, and pavement that may
occur during the period stipu:ated in t�� Contract conditians. Ail repairs ne��ssary uuc to settlement
shall be made by the Contractor at his expense.
Backfill in unimproved areas shall be compacted to at least 90 percent of maximum dry density as
determined by the modified proctor compaction test, ASTM D 1557.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the disposal of any excess excavated material.
7-08.4 Measurement � .
The first paraa�raph of Section 7-08.4 is revised as follows:
�*�*=�**�
Gravel backfill for foundations, or gravel backfill for pipe zone bedding when used for foundations,
shall be measured by the cubic yard, including haul, as specified in 2-09, or by the ton.
7-08.5 Payment
Section 7-08.5 is replaced with:
��*��*��
Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-Q4:1 for each of the following bid items that are
included in the proposal:
"Gravel Backfill for Foundations Class ", per cubic yard ar ton.
"Gravel Backfill for Pipe Zone Bedding", per cubic yard or ton.
All costs associated with fumishina and installing bedding and backfill material within the pipe zone
in the installation of culvert, storm sewer, and sanitary sewer pipes shall be included in the unit
contract price for the type and size of pipe installed.
"Plugging Fxisting Pipe", per each.
"Commercial Concrete", per cubic yard.
"Structure Excavation Class B", per cubic yard.
"Structure Excavation Class B Incl. Haul", per cubic yard.
Unless specifically identified and provided as separate items, structure excavation, dewatering and
backfilling shall be incidental to pipe installation and no further compensation shall be made.
All costs in jointing dissimilar pipe with a coupling or concrete collar shall be included in the unit
contract price per foot for the size and type of pipe being jointed.
"Shoring or Extra Excavation Class B", per square foot.
If this pay item is not in the Contract, then it shall be incidentaL
71
��
i
�
�
,�
�
'
�
�
�
�
i
�
�
�
,
'
1
�
�
,
�
10/26Y1010
7-09 PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR WATER MAINS
7-09.3(15)A Ductile Iron Pipe
The first paragraph of Section 7-09.3(15)A is revised as follows:
�******�
Long radius (500 feet or morel curves, either horizontat or vertical, may be laid with standard pipe by
deflecting the joints. If the pipe is shown curved in the Plans and no special fittings are shown, the
Contractor can assume that the curves can be made by deflecting the joints with standard lengths of
pipe. If shorter lengths are required, the Plans will indicate maximum lcngths that can be used. The
amount of deflection at each pipe joint when pipe is laid on a horizontal or vertical curve shall not
exceed one half of the manufacturer's printed recommended deflections.
7-09.3(15)B Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe (4 inches and Over)
� Section 7-09.3(15)B is supplemented as follows:
��**�**�
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe shall not be used for water mains and appurtenances.
� 7-Q9.3(17) Laying Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings with Polyethylene Encasement
The title and text of section 7-09.3(17) has been revised as follows:
�******�
The Contractor shall lay ductile iron pipe with a polyethylene encasement. Pipe and polyethylene
� encasement shall be installed in accorciance with AWWA C10�. The polyethylene encasement shaIl
also be installed on all appurtenances, such as pipe laterals, couplings, fittings, and valves, with 8-mil
polyethylene plastic in accordance with Section 4-5 ofANSI 21.5 orAWWA C105.
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
The polyethylene wrap shall be tube type and black color. Any damage that occurs to the wrap shall
be repaired in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C 105/A21.5-93.
Installation of the polyethylene encasement shall be considered incidental to the installation of the
pipe and no addirional payment shall be atlowed.
7-09.3(19)A Connections to Existing Mains
Secrion 7-09.3(19)A is revised and supplemented as follows:
�******�
The Contractor may be required to perform the connection during times other than normal working
hours_ The Contractor sball not operate any valves on the existing system. Water system personnel
will ogerate all valves on the exishng system for the Contractor when required.
No Work shall be performed on the connections uriless a representative of the �vater department is
present to inspect the Work.
When not stated otherwise in the special provisions or on the plans, all connections to existing water
mains will be done by City forces as provided below:
Citv Installed Connections:
Connections to existing piping and tie-ins are indicated on the drawings. The Contractor must verify
all existing piping, dimensions, and elevations to assure proper fit.
Connections to the existing water cnain shall not be made without first making the necessary
arrangements witb the Engineer in advance.
A two-week advance notice shall be required for each connection which requires a cutting of the
existing water mains or a shut-do��n of the existing water mains. The City reserves the right to re-
schedule the connection if the Work area is not ready at the schedu(ed time for the connection.
Work shall not be started until all the materials, equipment and labor necessary to properly complete
the Work are assembled on site.
72
10/26?2010
The Contractor shall provide all saw-cutting, removal and disposal of existing surface improvements,
excavaxion, haul and disposal of unsuitable materials, shoring, de-watering, foundation material, at
the connection areas before the scheduled time for the connection by the City. The Contractor shall
provide all materials necessary. to install all connections as indicated on the construction plans,
including but not limited to the required fittings, couplings, pipe spools, shackle materials to complete
the connections. . The Contractor shall provide and install concrete blocking, polywrap the piping at
the connections, backfill and surface restoration at the locations shown on the plans for the
connections to the existing water mains.
The City will cut the exisring main and assemble all materials.
7-09.3(21) Concrete Thrust Blocking and Dead-Man Block
Section 7-09.3(21) has been supplemented by adding the following:
��*****� .
Provide concrete blocking at all hydrants, fittings and horizontal or verrical angle points. Conform to
the City of Renton Standard Details for general blocking, and vertical blocks herein. All fittings to be
blocked shall be wrapped with 8-mil polyethylene plastic. Concrete blocking shall be properly
formed with plywood or other acceptable forming materials and shall not be poured around joints.
The forms shall be stripped prior to backfilling. Joint restraint (shackle rods), where required, shall
be installed in accordance with Section 7-11.3(15).
F��vide conc�ete dead-man bl�cks at I�cations sho�-n on t1-,e plans_ The dead-man bicck shall i�c(ude
reinforcing steels, shackle rods, installation and removal of formwork.
Blocking shall be commercial concrete (hand-mixed concrete is not allowed) and poured in place.
7-09.3(23) Hydrostatic Pressure Test
Section 7-093(23) is supplemented and revised as follows:
�******�
A hydrant meter and a backflow prevention device will be used when drawing water from the City
system. These may be obtained from the City by completing the required forms and making the
required security deposits. There will be a charge for the water used. Before applying the specified
test pressure, air shall be expelled completely from the pipe, valves and hydrants. If permanent air
vents aze not located at all high points, the contractor shall install corporation cocks at such points so
that the air can be expelled as the line is filled with water. After all the air has been expelled, the
corporation cocks shall be closed and the test pressure applied. At the conclusion of the pressure test,
the corporation cocks shall be removed and plugged.
The quantity of water required to restore tl�e pressure shall be accurately determined by either 1)
pumping from an open container of suitable size such that accurate volume measurements can be.
made by the Owner or, 2) by pumping through a positive displacement water meter with a s��eep unit
hand registering 1 gallon per revo(ution. The meter shall be approved by the Engineer.
Acceptability of the test will be determined by two factors, as follows:
l. The quantity of water lost from the main shall not exceed the number of gallons per hour as
listed in the following table.
2. The loss in pressure shall not exceed 5 psi during the 2 hour test period_
All water used to perform hydrostaric pressure shall be charged a usage fee.
Allowable leakage per 1000 ft. of pipeline* in GPH
PSI G" 8"
450 0.95 127
400 0.90 120
350 0.84 1.12
275 0.75 1.00
250 0.71 0.95
�e liiameter m u
10" 12" 16"
1.59 191 2.55
1 _50 1 _80 2.40
1.40 1.69 225
124 1.49 1.99
1.19 1.42 1.90
20" 24"
3.18 3.82
3_00 3_60
2.81 337
2.49 2.99
2.37 2.85
73
�
�
�
10/26YL010
225 0.68 0.90 1.13 1.35 1.80 225 2.70I
200 0.64 0.85 1.06 1.28 1.70 2.12 2.55
*If the pipeline under test contains sections of various diameters, the allowable leakage will be
the sum of the computed leakage for each size. For those diameters or vressures not listed, the
formula below shall be used:
The quantity of water lost from the main shall not exceed the number of gallons per hour as
detemuned by the formula
L= P
in which: 7400
� L = Allowable leakage, gallons/hour
N= No. of joints in the length of pipeline tested
� D= Nominal diameter of the pipe in inches
P= Average test pressure during the leakage test, psi
�
�
�
�
�
il
��
,
'
The paragraph stating that "There shall not be an appreciable or abrupt loss in pressure during
the 15 minute test ep riod." Is deleted.
7-09.3(24)A Flushing and "Poly-pigging"
Section 7-093(24)A shall be revised and supplemented as follows:
�******�
Sections of pipe to be disinfected shall first be poly-pigged to remove any solids or contaminated
material that may have become lodged in the pipe. If the main cannot be "poly-pigged", then a tap
shall be provided large enough to develop a veloc�ty of at least 2.5 fps in the main.
The "Poly-pig" shall be equal to Girard Industries Aqua-Swab-AS, 21b/cu-ft density foam with 90A
durometer urethane rubber coating on the rear of the "Poly-pig" only. The "Poly-pig" shall be
cylinder shaped with bullet nose or squared end.
The paragraph stating: "Where dry calcium hypochlorite is used for disinfection of the pipe, flushing
shall be done after disinfection." is deleted.
Dechlorination of all water used for disinfection shall be accomplished in accordance with the City of
Renton Standard Details. Water containing chlorine residual in excess of that earried in the existing
water system, shall not be disposed into the storm drainage system or any water way.
7-09.3(24)D Dry Calcium Hypochlorite
Section 7-09.3(24)D has been replaced with:
�*****:��
Dry calcium hypochlorite shall not be placed in the pipe as laid.
7-09.3(24)K Retention Period
Section 7-09.3(24)K has been revised as follows:
��:****�:�
Treated water shall be retained in the pipe at least 24 hours but no longer than 48 hours. After this
period, the chlorine residual at pipe extremities and at other representative points shall be at least
25 mg/1.
7-09.3(24)N Final Flushing and Testing
Section 7-093(24)N has been revised as follows:
�*�****�
Before placing the lines into service; a satisfactory report shall be received from the local or State
health departrnent or an approved testing lab on samples collected from representative points in the
new system. Samples will be collected and bacteriological tests obtained by the Engineer.
7-09.3(25) Jaint Restraint Systems
Section 7-09.3(25) is a new additional section:
74
� oi26no t o
�*�****�
General:
Where shown on the plans or in the specifications or required by the Engineer, joint restraint system
(shackle rods) shall be used. All joint restraint materials used shall be those manufactured by Star
National Products, 1323 Holly Avenue, PO Box 258, Columbus Ohio 43216, unless an equal alternate
is approved in writing by the Engineer.
Materials:
Steel types used shall be:
High strength low-alloy steel (cor-ten), ASTM A242, heat-treated, superstar "SST" series.
High strengkh low-alloy steel (cor-ten), ASTM A242, superstar "SS" series.
Items to be gaivanized are to meet the following requirements:
ASTMA153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.
ASTMA123 for galvanizing rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes.
Jair�t restr-a;ner sys�em companents:
Tiebolt: ASTM A242, type 2, zinc plated or hot-dip galvanized. SST 7:5/8" for 2" and 3"
mechanical joints, 3/4" for 4" to 12" mechanical joints, ASTM A325, type 3D, except tensile
strength of full-body threaded section shall be increased to 40,Q00 Ibs. minimum for 5/8" and
60,000 lbs. minimum for 3/4" by heat treating (quenching and tempering) to manufacturer's
reheat and hardness specifications. SST 753: 3/4" for 14" to 24" mechanical joints. same ASTM
specification as SST 7_ SST 77: 3/4" same as SST 7, except 1" eye for 7/8" rod. same ASTM
specificarion as SST 7.
Tienut: heavy hex nut for each tie6olt: SS8: 5/8" and 3/4", ASTM�A563, grade C3, ar zinc
plated. S8: 5/8" and 3/4", ASTM A563, grade A, zinc plated or hot-dip galvanized.
Tiecoupling: used to extend continuous threaded rods and are provided with a center stop to aid
installarion, zinc plated or hot-dip galvanized. SS 10: for 5/8" and 3/4" tierods, ASTM A563,
grade C3. S 10: for 5/8" and 3/4" tierods, ASTM A563, b ade A.
Tierod: continuous threaded rod for cutting to desired lengths, zinc plated or hot-dip galvanized.
SS 12: SJ8" and 3/4" diameter, ASTM A24Z, type 2; ANSI B 1.1. S 12: 5/8" and 3/4" diameter,
ASTM A36, A307.
Tiewasher: round flat washers, zinc plated or hot-dip galvanized_ SS17: ASTM A242, F436.
517: ANSI B18.22.1.
Installation_
Install fihe joint restraint system in accordance with the manufacturer's instrucrions so all joints
are mechanically locked togetber to prevent joint separation. Tiebolts shall be installed to pull
against the mechanical joint body and not the MJ follower. Torque nuts at 75-90 foot pounds for
3/4" nuts. Install tiecouplings with both rods threaded equal distance into tiecouplings. Arrange
tierods symmetrically around the pipe.
75
�,
�
�
'
�
�
�
��
��;
�
��
�
'
,�
'
,
� � oia6no io
LJ
� Pipe Diameter
u
I
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
'
�
'
'
'
4"
................•--..
6°
..............�----..
g��
......--••------.....
10" ....................
12" -�--��-�----••---�--
14" --��-�----�-�•------
16" ..._..-�----...-----
18" ....................
20" .......--�--........
24 ��
.....-----••-----�--�
30"
��
.....------�•----��-
36 ..-•----------------
Number of 3/4"
Tie Rods Required
....................... 2
....................... 2
..................••--- 3
...............�--••--- 4
....................... 6
....................... g
....................... 8
....................... 8
....................... 10
...................... 14
....................... (16-7/8"rods)
--.....-� .............. (24-7/8"rods)
Where a manufacturer's mechanical joint valve or fitting is supplied with slots for "T" bolts instead of
holes, a flanged valve with a flange by mechanical joint adapter shall be used instead, so as to provide
adequate space for locating the tiebolts.
Where a continuous run of pipe is required to be restrained, no run of restrained pipe shall be greater
than 60 feet in length between fittings. Insert long body solid sleeves as required on longer runs to
keep tierod lengths to the 60 foot maximum. Pipe used in continuously restrained runs shall be
mechanical joint pipe and tiebolts shall be installed as rod w ides at each joint.
Where poly wrapping is required all tiebolts, tienuts, tiecouplings, tierods, and tiewashers, shall be
galvanized. All disturbed sections will be painted, to the Inspector's satisfaction, with koppers
bitomastic no. 300-m, or approved equal.
Where poly wrapping is not required all tiebolts, tienuts, tiecouplings, tierods and tiewashers may be
gaivanized as specified in the preceding paragraph or plain and painted in the entirety with koppers
bitumastic no. 800-m, or approved equal.
Tiebolts, tienuts, tiecouplings, tierods, and tiewashers shall be considered incidental to installation of
the pipe and no additional payment shall be made.
7-09.4 Measurement
Measurement and Payment Schedule for installation of water mains and
appurtenances is shown in Section 1-09.14
Section 7-09.4 is revised as follows:
�***�**�
Measurement of bank run gravel for trench backfill will be by the cubic yard measured by the
calcutation of neat lines based on maximum trench width per Section 2-09.4 or by the ton, in
accordance with Secrion 1-09.
Measurement for payment of concrete thrust blocking and dead-man blocks will be per cubic-yard
when these items are included as separate pay items. If not included as separate pay items in the
contract, then thrust blocking and dead-man blocks shall be considered incidental to the installation of
the.water main and no further compensation shall be made.
Measurement for payment for connections to e�sting water mains will be per each for each
connection to existing water main(s) as shown on the Plans.
7-09.5 Payment
Measurement and Payment Schedule for installation of water mains and
appurtenances is shown in Section 1-09.14
76
I 0126/2010
Section 7-09.5 is revised and supplemented as follows:
�****�*�
"Furnish and Install Ductile Iron Water Main & Fittings", per lineal foot.
The unit contract price per linear foot for each size and kind of "Furnish and Install Ducrile Iron
Water Main & Fittings" shall be full pay for the bid item as described in Section 1-09.14.
"Concrete Thrust Blocking and Dead-Man Anchor Blocks", per cubic yard.
The unit contract price per cubic yard for "Concrete Concrete Thrust Blocking and Dead-Man Anchor
Blocks " shall be full pay for the bid item as described in Section 1-09.14.
"Connection to E�cisting Water Mains", per each.
The unit contract price per each for "Connection to Existing Water Mains" shall be. full pay for the bid
item as described in Section 1-09.14.
"Select Imported Trench Backfill", per cubic yard or ton.
The unit contract price per cubic yard or ton for ."Select Imported Trench Backfill" shall be full pay
for the bid item as descnbed in Section 1-09.14.
"Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Foundation Material", per ton or cubic yard.
The unit contract price per cubic yard or ton for "Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable
Foundation Material" shall be full pay for tbe bid item as described in Section 1-09.14.
7-12 VALVES FOR WATER MAINS
7-12.3(1) Installation of Valve Marker Post
Secrion 7-123(1) has been revised as follows:
�******�
Where required, a valve marker post shall be furnished and installed with each valve. Valve marker
posts shall be placed at the edge of the right-of-way opposite the valve and be set with 18 inches of
the post exposed above grade.
The rest of this section is deleted.
7-12.3(2) Adjust E�eisting Valve Box to Grade
Section 7-123(2) is a new section.
�*=��***�
Valve boxes shall be adjusted to grade in the same manner as for manholes, as detailed in Section 7-
05.3(1) of the City of Renton Standard Details. Valve box adjustments shall include, but not be
limited to, the locarions shown on the Plans_
Existing roadway valve boxes shall be adjusted to conform to final finished grades. The final
installahon shalt be made in accordance with the applicable portions of Section 7-12.
In the event that the existing valve box is plugaed or blocked with debris, the Contractor shall use
whatever means necessary to remove such debris, leaving the valve installation in a fully operable
candition.
The valve box shall be set to an elevation tolerance of one-fourth inch (1/4"} to one-half inch (1/2")
below finished �ade.
7-12.4 Measurement
Measurement and Payment Schedule for installation of water mains and
appurtenances is shown in Section 1-09.14
��
� ia�26nalo
'
Section 7-12.4 is supplemented by adding the following:
�***=��*�
' Adjustment of e�sting valve boxes to grade shall be measured per each, if included as a separate pay
item in the Contract; if not a separate pay item but required to complete the Work, then value box
adjushnent shall be considered incidental.
�
�
�
'
'
�
�
L
'
�
�
�
�
�
'
,
Hydrant auxiliary gate valve will be included in the measurement for hydrant assembly and will not
be included in this measurement item. -
7-12.5 Payment
Measurement and Payment Schedule for installation of water mains and
appurtenances is shown in Section 1-09.14
Section 7-12.5 is replaced with the following:
�*****��
"Furnish and Install -Inch Gate Valve Assembly", per each.
The unit contract grice per each for "Furnish and Install
pay for the bid item as described in Secrion 1-09.14.
-Inch Gate Valve Assembly" shall be full
"Au-R�IeaseiAir-Vacuwn Vatve Assembly," per each.
The unit contract price per for air-release/air-vacuum valve assembly shall be for all, labor, equipment
and material to complete the installation of the assembly including but not limited to, excavating,
tapping the main, laying and .jointing the pipe and fittings and appurtenances, backfilling, testing,
flushing, and disinfection, meter box and cover, at location sho�vn on the plans, and per the City of
Renton Standard Details, latest revision.
"Adjust Existing Valve Box to Grade (RC)," per each_
The contract bid price for "Adjust Existing Valve Box to Grade" above shall be full compensation for
all labor, matenal, tools and equipment necessary to satisfactorily complete the Work as defined in the
Contract Documents, including all incidental Work. If not included as a separate pay itein in the
Contract, but required to complete other Work in the Contract, then adjustment of valve boxes shall
be considered incidental to other items of Work and no further compensation shall be made.
7-14 HYDRANTS
7-14.3(1) Setting Hydrants
Parab aph four and five of Section 7-14.3(1) is revised and the section is supplemented as follows:
�*�:�:�**�
After all installarion and testing is complete, the e�cposed portion of the hydrant shall be painted with
two field coats. The type and color of pa�nt will be designated by the Engineer.
Any hydrant not in service shall be identified by covering with a burlap or plastic bag approved by
the Engineer.
Hydrants shall be installed in accordance with AWWA specifications C600-93, Sections 3.7 and 3.8.1
and the City of Renton Standard Details. Hydrant and guard posts shall be painted in accordance with
the standard details. Upon completion of the project, all fire hydrants shall be painted to the City of
Renton specifications and guard posts painted with two coats of preservative paint NO. 43-655 Safety
Yellow or approved equal. Fire hydrants shall be of such length as to be suitable for installation with
connections to 6", 8" AND 10" piping in trenches 3- 1i2 feet deep unless otherwise specified. The
hydrant shall be designed for a 4-V2 foot burial where 12" and larger pipe is shown unless otherwise
noted on the plan.
Fire hydrant assembly shall include: cast-iron or ductile iron tee (MJ x FL), 6" gate valve (FL x M�,
78
10l26l2010
6" DI spool (PE x PE), 5-1/4" MVO fire hydrant (MJ connection), 4" x 5" Stortz adapter, cast iron
valve box and cover, 3/4" shackle rods and accessories, concrete blocks and two concrete guard posts
(only if hydrants aze outside of right-of-way).
Joint restraint (Shackle Rods) shall be installed in accordance with Secrion 7-11.3(15).
7-14.3(3) .Resetting Eacisting Hydrants
Section 7-14.3(3) is supplemented by adding the following:
{*�*:x**� .
All hydrants shall be rebuilt to the approval of the Ciry (or replaced with a new hydrant). All rubber
gaskets shall be replaced with new gaskets of the type required for a new installation of the same
h'Pe-
7-14.3(4) Moving E�sting Hydrants
Section 7-14.3(4) is supplemented by adding the following:
�*:���:���
All hydrants shall be rebuilt to the approval of the City (or replaced with a new hydrant). All rubber
gaskets shall be repIaced with new gaskets of the type required for a new installation of the same
type.
7-14.5 Payment
i�i�ieaiSiTii �:ue�t i��d �ci j�'�i�iiC'Ti1ii ��hi,'di'a�i�ie �iQi IpTi��u�ii2i��iTi `aTf �i�i'i�tii i:c"aifiis i���
appurtenances is shown in Section 1-09.14
Section 7-14.5 is revised as follo��s: �
���***�x�
Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1, for each of the following bid items that are
included in the proposal:
"Furnish and Install Hydrant Assembly", per each.
The unit contract price per each for ° Furnish and Install Hydrant Assembly", shall be full pay for the
bid item as described in Section 1-09.14.
"Resetting Existing Hydrants", per each.
T'he unit contract price per each for "Resetting Existing Hydrant" shall be full pay for all Work to
reset the existing hydrant, including rebuilding (or replacement with a new hydrant), shaekling,
blocking, painting, and guard posts and reconnecting to the main. The new pipe connecting the
hydrant to the main shall be considered incidental and no additional payment shall be made. Guard
posts, shown on the Plans shall be incidental to the contract.
"Moving E�sting Hydrants", per each.
The unit contract price per each for "Moving Existing Hydrant" shall be full pay for all Work to move
the existing hydrant, including new tee, rebuilding (or replacement with a new hydrant), shackling,
blocking, painting, and guard posts and reconnecting to the main. The new pipe connecting the
hydrant to the main shall be considered incidental and no additional payment shall be made. Guard
posts, sho��vn on the Plans shall be incidental to the conh-act.
7-15 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
7-15.3 Construction Details
Section 7-15.3 is supplemented as follows:
�****�*� �
Pipe materials used to extend or replace existing water service lines shall be copper.
Where installation is in existing paved streets, the senice Iines sha11 be installed by a trenchless
`L�
'
�
�
�
1
�I
10/26/2010
percussion and impact method (hoe-hogging). If the trenchless percussion and impact method fails,
regular apen trench methods may be used.
7-15.5 Payment
Measurement and Payment Schedule for installation of water mains and
appurtenances is shown in Section 1-09.14
Section 7-15.5 is revised as follows:
�***:�**� .
Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1, for the following bid item when it is
included in the proposal:
"Furnish and Install In. Water Service Connection", per each.
' The unit contract price per each for " Fumish and Install In. Water Service Connection", shall be
full pay for the bid item as described in Section 1-09.14_
C�I
�
�
1
,
,
'
'
,
7-17 SANITARY SEWERS
7-17.2 Materials
Section 7-172 is replaced with die foitowiug:
�******�
Pipe
Gravity sewer pipe shall be as specified herein and as shown on the Plans. The Contractor shall
provide two copies of the pipe manufacturer's technical literature and tables of dimensional
tolerances to tbe Engineer. Any pipe found to have dimensional tolerances in excess of those
prescribed or having defects, which prevent adequate joint seal or any other damage, shall be rejected.
If requested by the Engineer, not less than three nor more than five lengths of pipe for each size,
selected from stock by the Engineer, shall be tested as specified for maacimum dimensional tolerance
of the respective pipe.
Material for PVC sewer pipe shall meet the requirements of Section 9-05.12.
All pipe shall be cIearly marked with type, class, and thickness. Lettering shall be legible and
permanent under normal conditions of handling and storage.
7-17.3 Construction Requirements
7-17.3(1) Protection of Existing Sewerage Facilities
Section 7-17.3( I) is supplemented by adding the following:
�***�**�
When extending an existing sewer, the downstream system shall be protected from construction
debris by placing a screen or trap in the first e�sting manhole downstream of the connection. It shall
be the Contractor s responsibility to maintain this screen or trap until the new system is placed in
service and then to remove it. Any construction debris, which enters the existing downstream system,
shall be removed by the Contractor at his expense, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. When the
first manhole is set, its outlet shall be plugged unril acceptance by the Engineer.
' 7=17.3(2)H Television Inspection
Section 7-17.3(2)H is supplemented by adding the following:
��**�=**�
' Once the television inspection has been completed the Contractor shal( submit to the Engineer the
written reports of the inspection plus the videotapes. Said videotapes are to be in color and compatible
wifh the City's viewing and recording systems. �
,
�
80
] 0l26/2010
The Ciry system accepts 1/2" wide high density VHS Tapes. The tapes will be run at standard speed
SP (1 5/16 I.P.S.). The Ciry will also accept video submitt;als on DVD viewable on a standard player
or a CD or DVD compatible with Cues DataCAP 4.0.
7-17.4 Measurement
Section 7-17.4 is supplemented as follows:
�******�
Measurement of `Bank Run Gravel for Trench Backfill Sewer" will be determined by the cubic yard
in place, measured by the neat line dimensions shown in the Plans, or by the ton an truck tickets.
7-17.5 Payment
Measurement and Payment Schedule for installation of sanitary sewer
mains and appurtenances is shown in Section 1-09.14
Seetion 7-17.5 is revised and supplemented as follows:
���x�***�
Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1, for each of the following bid items that are
included in the proposal:
"Furnish and Install In. sewer pipe", per linear foot.
�c un�t contract p�ice p�r each fc: " Furnish and Ins:a!1 In.
for the bid item as described in Section 1-09.14_
"Furnish and Install In. side sewer pipe", per (inear foot.
'
�
'
1
'
�
�
sewer FiY�", shall be full pay '
The unit contract price per each for " Furnish and Install In. side sewer pipe", shall be full
pay for the bid item as described in Section 1-09.14.
"Testing Sewer Pipe", per linear foot.
The unit contract pnce per linear foot for "Testing Sewer Pipe" shall be full pay for all labor, material
and equipment required to conduct the leakage tests required in Section 7-17.3(2). If no unit price for
"Testing Sewer Pipe" is included it shall be considered incidental to the pipe items.
"Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Material", per cubic yard or ton.
The unit contract price per cubic yard or ton for "Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Material"
shall be full pay for all Work to remove unsuitable material and replace and compact suitable material
as specified in Section 7-08.3(1)A.
"Bank Run Gravel for Trench Backfill Sewer", per cubic yard or ton.
The unit contract price per cubic yard or ton for "Bank Run Gravel for Trench Backfill Sewer" shall
be full pay for all Work to furnish, place, and compact material in the trench.
"Television Inspection", per linear foot.
8-09 RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS
8-09.5 Payment
Section 8-09.5 has been revised as follows:
�x�**�:**�
Payment will be made for each of the following bid items that are included in the proposal:
"Raised Pavement Marker Type 1", per each.
"Raised Pavement Marker Type 2", per each.
"Raised Pavement Marker Type 3- In.", per each.
"Recessed Pavement Marker", per each.
The unit contract price per each for "Raised Pavement Marker Type 1", "Raised Pavement Marker
Type 2", and "Raised Pavement Marker Type 3- In_" and "Recessed Pavement Marker" shall
be full pay for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for furnishing and installing the markers
81
�
1
'
1
'
�
�
r
'
,
�
,
�
'
'
,
toi�6noio
in accordance with these Specifications, including all cost involved with traffic control unless traffic
control is listed in the Contract as a separate pay item.
8-13 MONUMENT CASES
8-13.1 Description
Section 8-13.1 is revised and supplemented as follows:
�******�
This Work shall consist of furnishing and placing monument cases and covers, in accordance with the
Standard Plans and these Specifications, in conformity with the lines and locarions shown in the Plans
or as staked by the Engineer or by the Contractor supplied Surveyor.
8-13.3 Construction Requirements
' Paragraphs 2 and 3 of Section 8-13.3 is revised and supplemented as follows:
�*��***�
The monument will be furnished and set by the Engineer or by the Contractor supplied Surveyor.
, When exisring monuments will be impacted by a project, the Contractor sha11 be .responsible for
assuring that a registered surveyor references the existmg monuments prior to construction. After
construction is complete, the monuments shall be re-established by the Surveyor in accordance with
RCW58.09.130.
'
'
'
,
�
�
�
�
8-13.4 Measurement
Section 8-13.4 is supplemented by adding the following:
�*:x****}
All costs for surveying and resetting existing monuments impacted by construction shall be
considered incidental to the Contract unless specifically called out to be paid as a bid item.
8-13.5 Payment
Section 8-13.5 is supplemented by adding the following:
�*��*�*�
"Reset Existing Monument" per each.
Resetting an e�sting monument impacted by construction shall be incidental unless included as a pay
item in the Schedule of Prices.
8-14 CEMENT CONCRETE SIDEWALKS
8-14.3(4) Curing
Section 8-14.3(4) is replaced with:
�*�x****�
The cunng materials and procedures outlined in Section 5-05.3(13) of the Standard Specifications
shall prevaii, exce�t that white pigmented curing compound sha11 not be used on sidewalks. The
curing agent shall be applied immediately after brushing and be maintained for a period of 5 days.
The Contractor shall have readily available sufficient protective covering, such as waterproof paper or
' plastic membrane, to cover the pour of an entire day in the event of rain or other unsuitable weather.
During the curing period, all traffic, both pedestrian and vehicular, shall be excluded. Vehicular
traffic sball be excluded for such additional time as the Engineer may specify.
�
J
�
'
�
The Contractor shall be responsible for barricading, patrolling, or otherwise protecting the newly
placed concrete to prevent damage_ Damaged, vandalized, discolored, stained, or unsightly concrete
shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor.
8-14.4 Measurement
Section 8-14.4 is suppleinented by adding the following:
�*:�****�
When the Contract contains a pay item for "Curb Ramp, Cement Concrete," the per each
82
10/26YZ010
measurement shall include all costs for the complete installation per the Plans and standard details
including e�ansion joint material, curb and gutter and ramped sidewalk section. Sawcutting,
removal and disposal of excavated materials including existing pavement and sidewalk, crushed
surfacing base materials and all other Work, materials and equipment required per Section 5-14, shall
be included in the per each price for "Curb Ramp, Cement Concrete" unless any of these other items
are tisted and specified to be paid as separate pay items.
If the Contract does not provide a pay item for "Gurb Ramp, Cement Concrete," but the Plans call for
such installation, then quantities shall be measured with and paid for under the bid items for Curb and
Gutter and for Cement Concrete Sidewalk. When curb ramps are to be constructed of asphalt
concrete, the payment shall be included in the pay item for "Miscellaneous arid/or Driveway Asphalt
Concrete."
5-14.5 Payment
Section 8-14_5 is supplemented by adding the following:
�******�
"Curb Ramp, Cement Concrete," per each.
Payment for excavation of material not related to the construction of the sidewalk but necessary
before the sidewalk can be placed, when and if shown in the Plans, will be made in accordance with
the provisions of Section 2-03. Otherwise, the Contractor shall make all excavations including haul
and uisposal, regardl�ss �f t'�e depth requir�� for constructing t�:e sidewa(k to uhy IITI�.s and �ades
shown, and shall include all costs thereof in the unit contract price per square yard for "Cement
Concrete Sidewalk" and the per each contract price for "Curb Ramp, Cement Concrete."
8-17 IMPACT ATTENUATOR SYSTEMS
8-17.5 Payment
Section 8-17.5 is supplemented by the following:
��*�***�
If no pay item is included for temporary impact attenuators then all costs to provide and install shall
be considered a part of the pay item far "Traffic Control."
8-20 ILLUMINATION, TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEMS, AND ELECTRICAL
8-20.2(1) Equipment List and Drawings
�*****��
Para�aph four of Section 8-20.2(1) is revised and supplemented with the following:
The Contractor shall submit for approval six sets of shop drawings for each of the following types of
standards called for on this project:
l. Light standards with or without pre-approved Plans.
2. Signal standards with or without pre-approved Plans.
3. Combination Signal and lighting standards.
4. Meta1 Strain Poles.
Parab aph five of Section 8-202(1} is deleted.
Paraa aph six of Section 8-202(1) is deleted.
Section 8-202(1) is supplemented as follows:
The Contractor also shall submit either on the signal standard shop drawings or attached to the signal
standard shop drawings all dimensioris to clearly show the specific mast arm mounring height and
signal tenon locarions for each signal pole to be installed.
8-22 PAVEMENT MARKING
8-22.I Descripdon
The following item in Section 8-22_ 1 is revised as follows:
83
�
�
�
,
'
�
L�
'
'
�
�
�
,
,
�
10/26/2010
���*##*�.
Crosswalk Stripe
A SOLID WHITE line, 8 inches wide and 10-feet long, installed para11e1 to another crosswalk stripe
and parallel to the direction of traffic flow and centered in pairs on iane lines and the center of lanes.
See detail sheet.
Skip Center Line (Replacement)
A BROKEN YELLOW line 4 inches wide_ The broken or "skip" pattem shall be based on a 24-foot
unit consisting of a 9-foot line and a I S-foot gap. Skip center strip is used as centerline delineation on
two-lane or three-lane, two-way highways.
Dounle Yellow Center Line (Replacement)
Two SOLID YELLOW lines, each 4 inches wide, separated by a 4-inch space. Double yellow center
stripe is used as centerline delineation on multilane, two-way highways and for channelization.
Approach Line (New)
A SOLID WHITE line, 8 inches wide, used to separate left and right tuming movements from
through movements, to separate high occupancy vehicle lanes from general-purpose lanes, for islands,
hash marks, and other applications. Hash mark stripes shall be placed on 45-degree angle and 10 feet
apart.
Lane Line (Replacemet�i)
A BROKEN WHITE line, 4 inches wide, used to delineate adjacent lanes traveling in the same
direcrion. The broken or "skip" pattem shall be based on a 24-foot unit consisting of a 9-foot line and
a 15-foot gap.
Two Way Left Turn Line (Replacement)
A SOLID YELLOW line, 4 inches wide, with a BROKEN YELLOW line, 4 inches wide, separated
by a 4-inch space. The broken or "skip" pattern shall be based on a 24-foot unit consisting of a 9-foot
line and a 15-foot space. The solid line shall be installed to the right of the broken line in the direction
of travel.
Crosswalk Line (Replacement)
A SOLID WHITE line, 8 inches wide and 10 feet long, installed parallel to another crosswalk stripe
and parallel to the direction of traffic flow and centered in pairs on lane lines and the center of lanes.
See detail sheet.
Stop Line (Replacement)
A SOLID WHITE line 12, 18, or 24 inches wide as noted on the Contract Plans.
8-22.3(5) Installation Instructions
Section 8-223(5) is revised as follows:
�******�
A manufacturer's technical representative need not be present at the initial material installation to
approve the installation procedure.
8-22.5 Payment
' Section 8-22.5 is supplemented as follows:
�*:��**:��
"Approach Stripe," per linear foot.
, "Remove Paint Line ....." wide," per lineaz foot.*
'
'
,--,
L�'
"Remove Plastic Line ......" Wide," per linear foot.*
"Remove existing traffic markings, "per Lump Sum.*
*The linear foot contract price for "Remove Paint Line" and "Remove Plastic Line" and the lump sum
R4
�a2�zoio
contract price for "Remove e�cisting traffic markings" shall be full compensation for furnishing all
labor, tools, material, and equipment necessary for removal of existing traffic markings as per the
Plans, Specifications and detail sheets. If these pay items do not appear in the contract schedule of
prices, then the removal of old or conflicting traffic markings required to complete the channelization
of the project as shown on the Plans or detail sheets shall be considered incidental to other items in
the Contract and no further compensation shall be made.
8-23 TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKINGS
8-23.5 Payment
Secrion 8-23.5 is supplemented with the following:
�******�
If no pay item is included in the Contract for installation, or for removal of temporary pavement
markings, then a(1 costs associated with these items are considered incidental to other items in the
Contract or included under "Traffic Control," if that item is included as a bid item.
9-03.8(7) HMA Tolerances and Adjustments
Item 1 is deleted and replaced with:
�******�
1. Job Mix Formula Tolerances. After the JMF is determined as required in 5-04.3(7)A, the
constituents of the mixture at the time of acceptance shall conform to the following tolerances:
Nonstatistical Commercial
Evaluation Evaluation
Aggregate, percent passing
1", 3�4��� %2", and 3/8" sieves
U.S. No. 4 sieve
±6%
±(,% -
±6%
±4%
±4%
±4%
±3%
±2.0%
±0.5%
±8%
±8%
±8%
±6%
±6%
±6%
±5%
±3.0%
±0.7%
U.S. No_ 8 sieve
U.S. No. 16 sieve
U.S. No. 30 sieve
U.S. No. 50 sieve
U.S. No_ 100 sieve
U.S. No. 200 sieve
Asphalt Binder
VMA
VFA
Va
1.5% below minimum value in 9-03.8(2)
minimum and maximum as listed in 9-03.8(2)
2.5% minimum and 5.5% maximum
These tolerance limits constitute the allowable limits as described in Section 1-06.2. The tolerance
limit for aggregate shall not exceed the limits of the control point's section, except the tolerance limits
for sieves designated as 100% passing will be 99-100.
9-OS DRAINAGE STRUCTURES, CULVERTS, AND CONDUITS
9-05.4 5teel Culvert Pipe and Pipe Arch (RC)
Section 9-05.4 is revised as follows:
�******�
Steel culvert pipe and pipe arch shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 36, Type I and Type II.
Welded seam aluminum coated (aluminized) corrugated steel pipe and pipe arch with metallized
coating applied inside and out following welding is acceptable and shall be asphalt treatment coated.
9-05.7(2) Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe (RC)
Section 9-OS_7(2) is replaced by the following:
�******�
85
�
i
�
�
'
'
,
Ci
�
'
�
�
'
'
�
'
,
'
�
�
10l26/2010
Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM G76 and shall be
Class N Cement used in the manufacture of reinforced concrete pipe shall be Type II in conformance
withASTM C150. No admixture shall be used unless otherwise specified.
9-05.7(2)A Basis for Acceptance (RC)
Section 9-05.7(2)A is supplemented by the following:
�*�****�
All pipe shall be subject to (I) a three-edge-bearing strength (D-load) test in accordance with ASTM
C76; and (2) a hydrostatic test of rubber gasket joints in accordance with ASTM C361 or AWWA
C302 except test pressure shall be 5 psi.
9-05.7(3) Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe Joints (RC)
Section 9-05.7(3) is replaced by the following:
�*��*�*�
Joint assembly design shall be reinforced concrete bell and spigot type incorporating a fully retained
single rubber gasket in accordance with ASTM C361 or AWWA C302. Rubber gasket material shall
be neoprene.
9-05.7(4} Testing Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe Joints (RC)
Section 9-05.7(4) is supplemented by the following:
�******�
Hy�irostatic iestitlg of rubber gasxet joints snail 'oe performed in accordance wiih ASTM C361 or
AWWA C302 except test pressure shall be 5 psi.
9-05.9 Steel Spiral Rib Storm Sewer Pipe (RC)
Section 9-05.9 is replaced with:
���*�x**�
The manufacturer of spiral rib storm sewer pipe shall furnish the Engineer a Manufacturer's
Certificate of Compliance stating that the materials furnished comply in all respects with these
Specifications. The Engineer may require additional information or tests to be performed by the
Contractor at no expense to the City.
Unless otherwise specified, spiral rib storm sewer pipe shall be fumished with pipe ends cut
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the pipe. Pipe ends shall be cut evenly. Spiral rib pipe shall
be fabricated either by using a continuous helical lock seam or a continuous helical welded seam
paralleling the rib.
Steel spiral rib storm sewer pipe shall be manufactured of inetallic coated (aluminized or galvanized)
corrugated steel and inspected in conformance with Section 9-05.4. The size, coatin�, and metal shall
be as shown in the Plans or in the Specifications.
For spiral rib storm sewer pipe, helical ribs shall project outwardly from the smooth pipe wall and
shall be fabricatcd from a smgle thickness of materiaL The ribs shall be essentiaity rectangular and
shall be 3/4 inch plus two times the wall thickness (2t) plus or minus 1/8 inch (measured outside to
outside) and a minimum of 0.95 inch high (measured as the minimum vertical distance from the
outside of pipe wall immediately adjacent to the lockseam or stiffener to the top surface of rib). The
maximum spacing of the ribs shall be 11.75 inches center to center (measured normal to the direction
of the ribs). The radius of bend of the metal at the comers of the ribs shall be a minimum of 0.10 inch
and a maximum of 0.17 inch. If the sheet between adjacent ribs does not contain a lockseam, a
stiffener shall be included midway between ribs, having a nominal radius of 025 inch and a minimum
height of 020 inch toward the outside of the pipe. Pipe shall be fabricated with ends that can be
effectively jointed with coupling bands.
When required, spiral rib or narrow pitch spiral rib pipe shall be bituminous treated or paved. The
bituminous treatment for spiral nb p�pe shall conform to the requirements of Sections 9-05.4(3} and
9-05.4(4).
For narrow pitch spiral rib sewer pipe, the helical ribs shall project outwardly from the smooth pipe
E:��
� oiz6�zoio
wall and shall be fabricated from a single thickness of material. The ribs shall be .375 inch + 1/8 inch
wide (measured outside to outside) and a minimum of .4375 inch high (measured as the minimum
vertical distance of ribs sball be 4.80 inches center to center (measured normal to the direction of the
ribs). The radius of bend of the metal at the comers of the ribs sha11 be 0.0625 inch with an allowable
tolerance of+ 10 percent.
9-05.12 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe
Section 9-05.12(3) is a new additional section:
�******�
9-05.12(3} CPEP Sewer Pipe
Section 9-05.12(3) is a new additional section:
�**�*�*�
CPEP - Smooth interior pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from high density polyethylene resin
which sha.11 meet or exceed the requirements of Type 1I l, Category 4 or 5, Grade P33 or P34, Class C
per ASTM D1248. In addition, the pipe sha11 comply with all material and stiffness requirements of
AASHTO M294. �
9-05.14 ABS Composite Sewer Pipe
Section 9-05.14 is deleted
t******�
9-45.17 Aluminum Spiral Rib Storm Sewer Pipe
Section 9-05.17 is replaced with:
�*�:**��x}
Unless othenvise specified, spiral rib storm sewer pipe shall be fumished with pipe ends cut
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the pipe. Pipe ends shall be cut evenly. Spiral nb pipe shall
be fabricated by using a continuous helical lock seam with a seam gasket.
For spiral rib storm sewer pipe, helical ribs shall groject outwardly from the smooth pipe wall and
shall be fabricated from a single thickness of material. The ribs shall be 3/4 inch wide by 3/4 inch
deep with a nominal spacing of 7-1/2 inches center to center. Pipe shall be fabricated with ends that
can be effectively jointed with coupling bands.
For narrow pitch spiral rib storm sewer pipe, helical ribs shall project outwardly from the smooth pipe
wall and shall be fabricated from a single thickness of material. The ribs shall be 0_375 inch + 1/8
inch wide (measured outside to outside) and a minimum spacing of ribs shall be 4.80 inches center to
center (measured normal to the direction of the ribs). The radius of bend of the metal at the comers of
the ribs shall be 0.0625 inch with an allowable tolerance of + 10 percent.
For wide pitch spiral rib storm se�ver pipe, helical nbs shall project outwardly from the smooth pipe
wall and shall be fabricated from a single thickness of material. The ribs sball be 3/4 inch + 1/8 inch
wide (measured outside to outside) and a minimum of 0.95 inch high (measured as the minimum
vertical distance from the outside of pipe wall to top surface of the rib). The maximum spacing of
ribs shall be 11.75 inches center to center (measured normal to the direction of the ribs). The radius
of bend of the metai at the corners of the ribs shall be 0.0625 inch with an allowable tolerance of + 10
percent.
9-05.22 High Density Polyethylene Piping
Section 9-0522 is a new section:
�******}
DRISCOPLEXT"' 4100 Aigh-density Polyethyiene Piping
1 General Terms and Conditions
11 Scope - This Specification covers requirements for DriscoPlexT"" 4100 PE 3408 high-density
87
,
�
�
'
�
,
�
�
�
J
�
1
�
�
�
�
�
,
1
'
'�1
�
�
��
�
�
L�
�
�1
�
L�
i
'
� oi�6�2oio
polyethytene piping. All Work shall be performed in accordance with these Specifications.
1.2 Engineered and Approved Plans - Construction shall be performed in accordance with Engineered
Construction Plans for the Work prepared under the direction of a Professional Engineer_
1.3 Referenced Standards - Where all or part of a federal, ASTM, ANSI, AWWA, etc., Standard
Specification is incorporated by reference in these Specifications, the reference standard shall be the
latest edition and revision.
1.4 Licenses and Permits — The Contractor shall be licensed and bonded.
1.5 Inspections - Al( Work shall be inspected by an Authorized Representative of the City who shall
have the authority to halt const►-uction if, in his opinion, these Specifications or standard construction
practices are not being followed. Whenever any portion of these Specifications is violated, the
Engineer shall, by written notice, order further construction to cease until all deficiencies are
corrected.
2 Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings
2.1 Qualifications of Manufacturers - The manufacturer shall have manufacturing and quality
assurance facilities capable of producing and assuring the quality of the pipe and fittings required by
these Specifications. The manufacturer's production facilities shall be open for inspection by the City
or his Authorized Representative. The Project Engineer shall approve qualified manufacturers.
2.2 Materials - Black PE materials used for the manufacture of polyethylene pipe and fittings shall be
� PE 3408 high density polyethylene, meeting ASTM D 3350 cell classification 345464C and shall be
listed in the name of the pipe and fitting manufacturer in PPI (Plastics Pipe Institute) TR-4, with a
standard grade HDB rating of 1600 psi at 73°F. Color material, when used, shall be the same except
� for meeting ASTM D 3350 cell classification 345464E. The material shall be listed and approved for
potable water in accordance with NSF Standard 61. When requested on the order, the manufacturer
shall certify that the materials used to manufacture pipe and fittings meet these requirements.
'
,
1
�
2.3 Interchangeability of Pipe and Fittings - The same qualified and approved manufacturer shall
produce polyethylene pipe and fittings. Products such as fittings or flange adapters made by sub-
contractors or distributors are prohibited.
2.4 Polyethylene Fittings & Custom Fabrications - Polyethylene fittings and custom fabrications shall
be molded or fabricated by the approved pipe manufacturer. All fittings and custom fabrications shall
be pressure rated for the same internal pressure rating as the mating pipe.
2.5 Molded Fitrings - Molded fittings shall be manufachzred and tested in accordance wifh ASTM D
3261 and shall be so marked. Molded fittings shail be tested in accordance with AWWA C906.
2.6 Fabricated Fittings - Fabricated fittings shall be made by heat fusion joining specially machined
� shapes cut from pipe, polyethylene sheet stock or molded fittings. Fabricated fittings shall be rated
for internal pressure service at least equal to the full service pressure raring of the mating pipe.
Fabricated fittings shail be tested in accordance with AWWA C906.
�
�
�
2J Polyethylene Flange Adapters - Flange adapters shall be made with sufficient through-bore (en�th
to be clamped in a butt fusion-joining machine without the use of a stub-end holder. The sealing
surface of the flange adapter shall be machined with a series of small v-shaped grooves (senations) to
88
�oi26noio
promote gasketless sealing, or restrain the gasket against blowout.
2.8 Back-up Rings & Flange Bolts - Flange adapters sball be fitted with back-up rings that are
pressure rated equal to or greater than the maring pipe. The back-up ring bore shall be chamfered or
radiused to provide clearance to the flange adapter radius. Flange bolts and nuts shall be Grade 3 or
higher
9-08 PAINTS
9-08.8 Manhole Coating System Products
Section 9-08.8 is a new section and subsections:
��*****�
9-08.8(1) Coating Systems Specification
A. High Solids Urethane
Coating System:
Coating Material:
Surfaces:
Surface
Prc�� ation:
Application:
System Thickness:
Coatings:
Color:
C1
High Solids Urethane
Concrete
In accordance with SSPC
SP-7 (Swecp ar brs;� aff
blast)
Shop/Field: T'he drying
time between coats shall
not exceed 24 hours in
any case
6.0 mils dry film
Primer: One coat of
Wasser MGAroshield
high solids urethane (2.0
DFT) Finish: Two or
more coats of Wasser
MC-Aroshield (min. 4.0
DFT)
White
9-23 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS AND ADMIXTUR.ES
9-23.9 Fly Ash (i2C)
Section 9-23.9 is revised as follows:
�******�
Fly ash shall not be used around water lines.
9-30 WATER DISTRIBUTION MATERIALS
9-30.1(1) Ductile Iron Pipe (RC)
Section 9-30.1(1) is revised as follows:
�*****��
Ductile iron pipe shall be centrifugally cast and meet the requirements ofAWWA C151. Ductile iron
pipe shall have a cement-mortar lining meeting the requirements ofAWWA C104. All other ductile
iron pipe shall be Standard Thickness Class 52 or the thickness class as shown in the Plans.
9-30.3(1) Gate Valves (3 inc6es to 12 inches)
Secrion 9-30.3(1) is replaced with:
�$*�***�
89
�
1
,
,
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
1
'
,
�
�
�
'
�
�oiz6noio
Valves shall be designed for a minimum water operating pressure of 200 PSI. Gate valves shall be
Iowa List 14, Mueller Company No. A2380, Kennedy, or M&H.
Approval of valves other than models specified shall be obtained prior to bid opening.
All gate valves less than 12" in diameter shall include an 8" x 24" cast iron gate valve box and
extensions, as required_ All 12" diameter and larger gate valves shall be installed in a vault. See the
City of Renton Standard Details for 12" gate valve assembly vault and 1" bypass installation.
Gate valves shall conform to AWWA C500 and shall be iron body, bronze-mounted, double disc with
bronze wedging device and O-ring stuf�mg box.
Resilient Seated Gate Valves:
Resilient seated gate valves shall be manufactured to meet or exceed the requirements of AWWA
Standard C5091atest revisions.
All external and internal ferrous metal surfaces of the gate valve shall be coated for corrosion
protection with fusion bonded epoxy. The epoxy coating shall be factory applied to all valve parts
pnor to valve assembly and shall meet or exceed the requirements of AWWA Standard C-550 latest
revision. Valves shall be provided with two (2) internal O-ring stems seals. The valves shall be
equipped with one (1) anti-friction washer. The resilient gate valve shall have rubber sealing surfaces
to perm;t bi-directional flow. T�e stem skall be independent of the stem nut or integrally cast.
Manufacturers of Resilient Seated Gate Valves shall provide the City on request that the valve
materials meet the City specifications.
Valves shall be designed for a minimum water operating pressure of 200 psi.
End connections shall be mechanical joints, flanged joints or mechanical by flanged joints as shown
on the project plans. ,
Resilient Seated Gate Valves shall be U.S. Metroseal 250, Clow, M&H Style 3067, Mueller Series
2370, Kennedy.
Approval of valves other than madel specified shall be obtained prior to bid opening. All gate valves
less than 12 inches in diameter shall include an 8"x24" cast iron gate valve box and extensions, as
required_
All 12 inch diameter and larger resilient seated gate valves shall have a 1 inch by-pass assembly and
shall be installed in a concrete vault per City of Renton Standard Details, latest revision.
9-30.3(3) Butterfly Valves
Section 9-30.3(3) is supplemented by adding the following:
�******�
Butterfly valves shall be Dresser 450 or Pratt Groundhog.
9-30.3(5) Valve Marker Posts
Section 9-30.3(5) has been deleted and replaced with the following:
��***:*�
The valve markers shall be fabricated and installed in conformance with the Standard Drawings.
Valve markers shall be carsonite composite utility marker .375"x 6'-0" or approved equal with blue
label "water."
9-30.3(7) Combination Air Release/Air Vacuum Valves
Section 9-303(7) has been supplemented as follows:
�***$**�
90
i aa6no i o
Air and vacuum release valves sha11 be APCO- Valve and Primer Corp, "Heavy-Duty," combination
air release valve, or equal.
Installation shall be per the City of Renton Standard Details, latest revision.
Piping and fitting shall be copper or brass. Location of the air release valve as show on the plans is
approximate_ The installation shall be set at the high point of the line.
9-30.3(8) Tapping Sleeve and Valve Assembly
Section 9-30.3(8) is revised as follows:
�*�****�
Tapping sleeves shall be cast iron, ductile iron epoxy-coated steel, or other approved material.
9-30.3(9) Blow-OffAssembly
5ection 9-30.3(9) is a new section:
�*��*�*�
Permanent blow-off assembly shall be #78 Kupferle Foundry Co. or approved equal. Installation of
blow-off permanent blow-off assembly shall be per City of Renton Standard Details, latest revision.
Pipe and fittings shall be galvanized. Blow-off. assembly shall be installed at location(s) shown on the
plans. Temporary blow-off assembly on new dead-end water main shall be installed at location
shown on the plans.
Temporary blow-off assemblies for testing and flushing of the new water mains will not be included
under this item and shall be considered incidental to the contract and no additional payment shall be
made.
9-30.5 Hydrants
Section 9-30.5 is supplemented by adding the following:
�***�**�
Fire hydrants shall be Iowa, Corey Type (opening with the pressure) or approved equal conforming to
AWWA C-502-85. Approval must be obtained prior to bid opening.
Compression type fire hydrants (opening against pressure) shall be Clow IVledallion, M&H 929,
Mueller Super Centurion 200, conforming to AWWA G502-85.
9-30.5(1) End Connections (RC)
Section 9-30.5(1) is supplemented by adding the following:
�*�*�**�
Hydrants shall be constructed with mechanical joint connection unless otherwise specified in bid
proposal descriprion.
9-30.5(2) Hydrant Dimensions
Section 9-30_5(2) is replaced with the following:
�*�x�***�
Fire hydrants shall be Corey type (opening with the pressure) or compression type (opening against
pressure) conforming to AWWA C-502-85 with a 6 inch mechanical joint inlet and a main valve
opening (M.V.O.) of 5 1/4 inches, two 2 1/2 inch hose nozzles with National Standard Threads 7 1/2
threads per inch and one 4 inch pumper nozzles with the new Seattle Pattern 6 threads per inch, 60
degrees V_ Threads, outside diameter of male tread 4.875 and root diameter 4.6263. Hydrants shall
have a 1-1/4" pentagon operating nut opened by tuming counter clockwise (left).
The two 2=1/2" hose nozzles shall be fitted with cast iron threaded caps with operating nut of the
same design and proportions as the hydrant stem nut. Caps shall be fitted with suitable neoprene
91
�
LJ
�
'
�
,
�
�
'
�
�
�
,
LJ
,
�
'
'
'
LJ
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
1
t
t
1
!
i
1
1
] 0/26/2010
gaskets for positive water tightness under test pressures.
The 4" pumper nozzle shall be fitted with a Stortz adapter, 4" Seattle Thread x 5" Stortz. Stortz
adapter shall be forged and/or extruded 6061-T6 aluminum alloy, hardcoat anodized. Threaded end
portion shall have no lugs and 2 set screws 180 degrees apart. Stortz face to be metal, no gasket to
weather. Stortz cap to have synthetic molded rubber gasket, and shall be attached to hydrant adapter
with 1/8" coated stainless steel aircraft cable.
Fire hydrants shall be installed per City of Renton Standard Details for fire hydrants, latest revisions.
9-30.6(3)B Polyethylene Pipe
Section 9-30.6(3)B has been modified as follows:
�*:�****�
Polyethylene pipe shall not be used.
9-30.6(4) Service Fittings
Section 9-30.6(4) has been revised as follows:
�*�:****�
Fittings used for copper tubing shall be compression _type with gripper ring.
9-30.6(5) Meter Setters
Section 9-30_6(5) has been supplemented as follows:
t*�:��=**�
Meter sctters shall be installed per the City of Renton Standard Details for water meters, latest
revision.
�2
, . . .
i �
i �
!� � �
i
i
�PECIAL PROVI�IONS
(PART I I )
1
0
� � .
1 �
!
t � �
�
t
i
I
i �
�
��
i
�
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
SUB-SECTION 10.00Q00
INTRODUCTION
Sub-Section 10.00000 describes the numbering format used with Division 10 of the Special Provisions
(Part II). Division 10 is in CSI format and some modifications have been made to the typical numbering
system used in CSI. A"10." has been added to all of the CSI numbering in Division 10 in order to
separate items in this Section from the rest of the WSDOT Division numbering in the Special Provisions
(Part I). Furthermore, a DIVISION in CSI is equivalent to a SECTION in the Special Provisions (Part II) and
the 5-digit CSI Section number now becomes a Sub-Section. The following table illustrates the typical CSI
numbering on the left and the new numbering on the right: �
CSI Standard Numberin� Format
(No CSI Standard)
DIVISION 1 SECTION 10.1
01410 Regulatory Requirements
DIVISION 2 SECTION 10.2
02Z22 Selective Demolition
Special Provisions (Part II) Numberin� Format
DIVISION 10
10.01410 Regulatory Requirements
10.02222 Selective Demolition
END OF SUB-SECTION
� pw:Uoco-pw-app:CarollolDocumentslClientlWAll2enron18235A101SpecificationsN�.00000.docx
�
l
�
�
�
i
�
i
��
�
�
�
�
,
CITY OF RENTON
WESNIEW LIFT STATION UPGRADES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 10 - SPECIAL PROVISIONS (PART II)
SECTION 10.01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SUB-SECTION T1TLE
NO.
10.01140 WORK RESTRICTIONS
10.01410 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
10.01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
10.09610 PROJECT DESIGN CRITERIA
10.01612 SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA
10.01732 CUTTING AND PATCHING
10.01756 TESTING, TRAINING, AND FACILITY START-UP
10.01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
10.01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
SECTION 10.02 - SITEWORK
10.02222 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
10.02240 DEWATERING
10.02260 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
10.02490 PRECAST CONCRETE VAULTS
10.03455
10.03071
10.03072
10.03102
10.03300
10.03600
10.03925
SECTION 10.03 - CONCRETE
EPDXY BONDING ALL THREAD RODS IN CONCRETE
EPDXIES
EPDXY RESIN/PORTLAND CEMENT BONDING AGENT
CONCRETE FORMWORK
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
GROUTS
CONCRETE REPAIR AND COATING
SECTION 1Q.04 - MASONRY
NOT USED
October 26, 2010 - FINAL TOC-1 8235A10
� pw:ibco-pwapp:CarollolDocumentslClientlWAlRenton18235A101Speafica5onslWestview Spec TOC.doc
10.05120
SECTION 10.05 - METALS
STRUCTURALSTEEL
SECTION 10.06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
NOT USED
10.08320
SECTION 10.07 - THERM�►L AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
NOT USED
SECTION 10.08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
ACCESS HATCHES
SECTION 10.09 - FINISHES
10.Q9960A COAT!(�GS
SECTION 10.10 - SPECIALTIES
NOT USED
SECTION 10.11 - EQUIPMENT
10.11312J SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS
10.11313 GRINDER PUMPS AND ACCESSORIES
SECTION 10.12 - FURNISHINGS
NOT USED
SECTION 10.13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTIONS
NOT USED
SECTI�N 10.14 — CONVEYING SYSTEMS
NOT USED
October 26, 2010 - FINAL TOC-2 8235A10
pw:lbco-pw-app:CarollolDocuments\ClienHWAlRenton18235A101Specifications\Westview Spec TOC.doc
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
1
'
�
u
�
SECTION 10.15 - MECHANICAL
10.15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
10.15052 BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
10.15061 PIPE SUPPORTS
'10.15062 PREFORMED CHANNEL PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEM
10.15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
10.15110 VALVES
10.15114 CHECK VALVES
10.15116 PLUG VALVES
10.15255 STAINLESS STEEL PIPING
10.15265 PLASTIC PIPING AND TUBING
10.15956 PIPING SYSTEMS TESTING
10.15958 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING
SECTION 10.16 - ELECTRICAL
10.16050 GENERAL REQU(REMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
10.16052 HAZARDOUS CLASSIFIED AREA CONSTRUCTION
10.16070 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
10.16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
10_16123 600 VOLT OR LESS WIRES AND CABLES
10.16130 CONDUITS
10.16134 BOXES
10.16140 WIRING DEVICES
10.16950 FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
SECTION 10.17 - INSTRUMENTATION
10.17050 PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
10.17201 LEVEL MEASUREMENT - SWITCHES
10.17404 PRESSURENACUUM MEASUREMENT - GAUGES
10.17407 PRESSURE MEASUREMENT - SUBMERSIBLE
_ October 26, 2010 - FINAL TOG3 8235A1 Q
� pw:ibco-pwapp:CarollotDocumentsiClienflWAlRenron+8235A10lSpecificationslWestview Spec TOC.doc
��
�
�
�
PART1 GENERAL
� 1.01 SUMMARY
SUB-SECTION 10.01140
WORK RESTRICTIONS
� A. Section Includes: Requirements for sequencing and scheduling the Work affected
by existing site and facility, work restrictions, and coordination between construction
operations and lift station operations_
�
�
LJ
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. 1t is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided far convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.
� 1.02 GENERAL CONSTRAINTS ON SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK
�
�
�
a
�
II
�
A. Work sequence and constraints:
1. Utilize description of critical events in work sequence in this Sub-Section as a
guideline for scheduling and undertaking the Work.
2_ Work sequence and constraints presented do not include all items affecting
completion of the Work, but are intended to describe critical events necessary
to minimize disruption of the existing facilities.
1.03 INTERRUPTION OF TREATMENT PROCESSES
A_ Indica#e required shutdowns of existing facilities or interruptions of existing
operations on Progress Schedule_
:
�
'!7
Submit notification of required shutdowns of existing facilities at least 7 days prior to
the planned date of shutdown.
Do not begin alterations until ENGINEER's written permission has been received.
Minimize shutdown times by thorough advanced planning. Have required
equipment, materials, and labor on hand at time of shutdown.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01140-1 8235A10
� pw:llCaro11o1Documents�ClienUWARtenton/8235At0/SpecificaUonsl10.01140
[l
E. Where required_to minimize lift station interruptions while complying with specified
sequencing constraints, provide temporary pumping, power, lighting, controls,
instrumentation, and safety devices.
1.04 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE ACCESS
A. Provide safe, continuous access to lift station control equipment for lift station
operations personnel. .
1.05 UTILITIES
A. Maintain electrical, telephone, water, gas, sanitary facilities, and other utilities within
existing facilities in service. Provide temporary utilities when necessary.
1.06 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. Maintain overall coordination of the Work.
B. Obtain construction schedules from subcontractors and suppliers, and assume
responsibility for correctness.
C. Incorporate schedules from subcontractors and suppliers into Progress Schedule to
plan for and comply with sequencing constraints.
1.07 WORK BY OTHERS
A. Where proper execution of the Work depends upon work by others, inspect and
promptly report discrepancies and defects_
1.08 WORK SEQUENCE
A. This possible sequence is included for informational purposes only:
1_ Design and install bypass pumping system. Maintain bypass pumping system
through completion of upgraded lift station.
2. Decommission and demo piping and appurtenances in existing Westview Lift
Station.
3. Perform existing wet well bottom slope modifications.
4. Coat interior of existing wet well_ �
5. Install equipment, piping, valve vault, conduit, and other appurtenances to
poinfiof connection.
6. Pressure test new piping.
7. Connect equipment to existing contro! panel.
8. Test lift station.
9. Substantial completion of upgraded lift station.
10_ Remove bypass pumping system.
11. Construct site improvements.
12. Commence lift station operation of upgraded system.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.0114Q-2 8235A10
pw://CarollolDocuments/ClienUWA/f2eneon16235A t 0/Specficationsl10.01140
j
�
�
�
�
�
��
�
�
�
1
�J
�
�
i
�
�
�
�
�
1
� 1.09 TEMPORARY SERVICES, MATERIALS, AND EQUIPMENT
� A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.01500.
PART 2
Not Used.
PART 3
Not Used.
PRODUCTS
EXECUTION
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01140-3 8235A10
pw:11 Ca mllolDocumentslClien WVAIRenton18235A 10/S pecificalionsl10.01140
1
�
�
�
1
r
�
��
i
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
SUB-SECTION 10.01410
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Regulatory requirements:
1. Building code.
2_ Electricai code.
3. Energy code.
4. Fire code.
5. Mechanical code.
6. Plumbing code.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Intemational Code Council (ICC):
1_ 2006 International Building Code (IBC).
2_ 2006 International Energy Conservation Code (IECC)_
3_ 2006 International Fire Code (IFC).
4_ 2006 International Mechanical Code (IMC).
5. 2006 International Plumbing Code (IPC).
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. 2008 NFPA 70 National Electric Code.
2_ 2009 NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.
C. State Building Codes Council:
1. Washington State Building Code (SBC).
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design requirements:
1 _ Building code:
a. Washington State Building Code.
2. Electrical code:
a. 2008 National Electric Code.
b_ 2009 Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.
3_ Energy conservation code:
a. 2006 Internationa( Energy Conservation Code.
4. Fire code:
a. 2006 International Fire Code.
5. Mechanical code: .
a_ 2006 International Mechanical Code.
6. Plumbing code:
a. 2006 International Plumbing Code.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01410-1
pwJ/Carollo/DoamentslGienWVAlRenton/8235A 10/5pecificationsl10.01410
8235A10
PART 2
Not used.
PART 3
Not used.
PRODUCTS
EXECUTION
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01410-2 8235A10
pw:/1Ca rollo/Documents(Clie nt(WA/Renton/8235A t OtSpecificaUons/10.01410
'
�
�
SUB-SECTION 10.01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
�
��
�
�
�
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes:
1. Fumishing, maintaining, and removing construction facilities and temporary
controls, including temporary utilities, construction aids, barriers and
enclosures, security, access roads, temporary controls, project sign, field
offices and sheds, and removal after construction.
B_ Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work. �
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
4. Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
5. Sub-Section 10.15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
1.02 REFERENCE
A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
1.03 SUBfViITTALS
A_ In accordance with Section 1-05.
B. Product data.
�
�
.1
�
C_ For temporary piping systems:
1. Submit layout drawings showing propased routing of piping, including
proposed pipe support and pipe restraint locations.
2. Submit product data for piping, fittings, appurtenances, restraints, supports,
and all other components of the temporary piping system.
3_ Submit all information at Isast 28 days prior to when each temporary piping
system is scheduled to be installed and allow 14 days for review and comment
by ENGINEER and OWNER. �
October 26, 201 Q- FINAL 10.01500-1 8235A10
� pwllCarollo/DocumentslCtiertdWA/Rentonl8235A10/SpecificaUonsf1�.01500 .
D_ For temporary pumping systems:
1. Submit pump data, performance curves, and other operating information as
specified in Sub-Section 10.15050.
2. Submit sketches showing layout of temporary pumping system, including
pump quantity, configuration in wet well, and proposed piping layout specified
'in this Sub-Section.
3. Submit piping headloss calculations based on proposed temporary piping
system layout.
E. Submit all information at least 28 days prior to when the temporary pumping system
is scheduled to be installed and allow 14 days for review and comment by
ENGINEER and OWNER.
1.04 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A_ Temporary electrical power:
1. Arrange with local utility to provide adequate temporary electrical service.
2. Provide and maintain adequate jobsite power distribution facilities conforming
to applicable Laws and Regulations.
3. Provide, maintain, and pay for electric power for perFormance of the Work
except for power required for the final 7-day operational test=
a. When using permanent facilities, provide separate meter and reimburse
OWNER for power used in connection with performance of the Work.
B. Temporary electrical lighting:
1. In work areas, provide temporary lighting su�cient to maintain lighting levels
during working hours not less than lighting levels required by Occupational
Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) and state agency which administers
OSHA regulations where Project is located.
2_ When available, permanent lighting facilities may be used in lieu of temporary
facilities:
a. Prior to final acceptance of the Work, replace bulbs, lamps, or tubes used
by CONTRACTOR for lighting.
C_ Temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating:
1. Heat and ventilate work areas to protect the Work from damage by freezing,
high temperatures, weather, and to provide safe environment for workers.
2. Permanent heating system may be utilized when sufficiently completed to
allow safe operation.
D. Temporary water:
1. Development of potable water supply:
a. Potable water is not available at construction site.
b_ Provide potable water for human consumption during construction period.
c_ Furnish potable water that meets requirements of Laws and Reg�lations.
E. Temporary sanitary facilities_
1. Provide suitable and adequate sanitary facilities that are in compliance with
applicable Laws and Regulations_
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01500-2 8235A10
pw:l1 Carollo/DocumentslClienUWAlf2entoN8235A10/Specifications/t 0.01500
�.
,�
�-
2. At completion of the Work, remove sanitary facilities and leave site in neat and
sanitary condition.
F_ Temporary fire protection: Provide sufficient number of fire extinguishers of type and
capacity required to protect the Work and ancillary facilities.
�
G
First aid: Post first aid facilities and information posters conforming to requirements
of OSHA and other applicable Laws and Regulations in readily accessible locations.
�
Maintain utilities in existing facilities in service. Provide temporary utilities when
necessary.
1.05 CONSTRUCTION AtDS
A. Provide railings, kick plates, enclosures, sa#ety devices, and controls required by
Laws and Regulations and as required for adequate protection of life and property.
B. Use construction hoists, elevators, scaffolds, stages, shoring, and similar temporary
facilities of ample size and capacity to adequately support and move loads.
C. Design temporary supports with adequate safety factor to assure adequate load
bearing capability:
1. When requested, submit design calculations by professional registered
engineer prior to application of loads.
2. Submitted design calculations are for information and record purposes only.
�
�
�
L�
,�.
:�
D. Accident prevention:
1. Exercise precautions throughout construction for protection of persons and
property.
2. Observe safety provisions of applicable Laws and Regulations.
3. Guard machinery and equipment, and eliminate other hazards.
4. Make reports required by authorities having jurisdiction, and permit safety
inspections of the Work.
5. Before commencing construction work, take necessary action to comply with
provisions for safety and accident preventian.
E. Barricades:
1. Place barriers at ends of excavations and along excavations to warn
pedestrian and vehicular traffic of excavatians.
2. Provide barriers with flashing lights after dark.
3. Keep barriers in place until excavations are entirefy backfilled and compacted.
4. Barricade excavations to prevent persons from entering excavated areas in
streets, roadways, parking lots, lift stations, or other public or private areas.
F. Warning devices and barricades: Adequately identify and guard hazardous areas
and conditions by visual warning devices and, where necessary, physical barriers:
1. Devices shall conform to minimum requirements of OSHA and State agency
which administers OSHA regulations where Project is located_
G. Hazards in public right-of-way:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01500-3 8235A10
pwJlCarollo/Documents�Clien UWAlf2entoN8235A 10/Specifications! 10.01500
E
Mark at reasonable intervals, trenches and other continuous excavations in
public right-of-way, running parallel to general flow of traffic, `rvith traffic cones,
barricades, or other suitable visual markers during daylight hours:
a. During hours of darkness, provide markers with torches, flashers, or other
adequate lights.
At intersections or for pits and similar excavations, where traffic may
reasonably be expected to approach head on, protect excavations by
continuous barricades:
a. During hours of darkness, prov,ide warning lights at close intervals.
H. Hazards in protected areas: Mark or guard excavations in areas from which public is
excluded, in manner appropriate for hazard_
Above grade protection: On multi-level structures, provide safety protection that
meets requirements of OSHA and State agency which administers OSHA
regulations where Project is {ocated.
Protect existing structures, trees, shrubs, and other items to be preserved on
Project site from injury, damage or destruction by vehicles, equipment, worker or
other agents with substantial barricades or other devices commensurate with
hazards.
K. Fences:
1. Enclose site of the Work with fence adequate to protect the Work against acts
of theft, violence and vandalism.
2. When entire or part of site is to be permanently fenced, permanent fence may
be built to serve for both permanent and temporary protection of the work site,
provided that damaged or defaced fencing is replaced prior to final
acceptance.
3_ Protect temporary and permanent openings and close openings in existing
fences to prevent intrusion by unauthorized persons. Bear responsibility for
protection of plant and material on site of the Work when openings in existing
fences are not closed.
4. During night hours, weekends, holidays, and other times when no work is
performed at site, provide temporary closures or enlist services of security
guards to protect temporary openings.
5. Fence temporary openings when openings are no longer necessary.
1.06 SECURITY
A. Make adequate provision for protection of the work area against fire, theft, and
vandalism, and for protection of public against exposure to injury.
1.07 TEMPORARY CONTROLS
A. Dust control:
1. Prevent dust nuisance caused by operations, unpaved roads, excavation,
backfilling, demolition, or other activities.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01500-4 8235A10
pw:!lCarollo/Documents(ClienUWAlRentonl8235A101Specificafionsl10.01500
1
�
�
�
�
C. Mud control:
� 1_ Prevent mud nuisance caused by construction operations, unpaved roads,
excavation, backfilling, demolition, or other activities.
B. Noise control:
1. In inhabited areas, particularly residential, perform operations in manner to
minimize noise_
2. In residential areas, take special measures to suppress noise during night
hours_
2. Control dust by sprinkling with water, use of dust palliatives, modification of
operations, or other means acceptable to agencies having jurisdiction.
1.Q8 REMOVAL
�
A.
B.
C.
D.
Remove temporary buildings and furnishings before inspection final acceptance or
when directed.
i
�
�
�
�
�
�
Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities.
Remove underground installations to minimum depth of 24 inches and grade to
match surrounding conditions.
Restore existing facilities used during construction to specified or original condition.
1.09 TEMPORARY PROCESS PIPING
A. CONTRACTOR shall provide all piping, appurtenances, and other materials as
required to provide temporary piping systems as specified in this Sub-Section, as
indicated on the Drawings, and as needed to perForm the Work.
B. CONTRACTOR shall field route piping as needed and as field conditions dictate,
unless othen�vise indicated on the Drawings, and determine appropriate lengths of
piping and quantity/type of pipe fittings needed to construct temporary piping
system. Do not block access points such as stairs, doors, and walkways to existing
facilities unless approved in writing by the OWNER.
C_ Restrain piping at valves and at fittings where piping changes direction, changes
sizes, and at ends:
1_ When piping is buried, use mechanical restraints.
2. When piping is exposed or under water, use mechanical or structural
restraints.
3. Determine thrust forces by multiplying the nominal cross sectional area of the
piping by the operating pressure of the piping and account for test pressure.
D. Temporary piping systems shall be installed in a manner that will not damage
existing or new facilities.
E. Unless indicated otherwise, piping material, including gaskets, shall be suitable for
the process fiuid requiring temporary piping.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01500-5 8235A10
p�rllCarollolDocumentslCiienNWAlRenton/8235At O/Speafica6ons110.01500
��
F. After temporary piping system is no longer required:
1. Remove temporary piping system.
2. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary piping
system_
3. Restore existing facilities to original condition.
1.10
TEMPORARY PROCESS PUMPING
A. CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary pumping system to pump flow from the
existing manhole directly upstream of the existing wet well to the existing lift station
discharge location:
1. Anticipated lift station flow rates:
a. Maximum: 10 gallons per minute (gpm).
2. A tie in to the existing force main at a location near the existing manhole will
be acceptable.
3. Anticipated pressure will vary based on headlosses developed and the final
length of installed temporary piping_ CONTRACTOR shall calculate
headlosses and provide pump with sufficient pressure to meet flow
requirements. Calculations shall be sealed and signed by a professional
engineer registered in the state in which the Project is located.
4. Pump shall be capable of grinding the sewage to a fine slurry similar to the
existing lift station pumps.
5_ Provide and pay for all power required to operate temporary pumps.
6_ All electrical and instrumentation components will comply with applicabte code
requirements for the area where the temporary pump is located.
7. Temporary pumping will be required 24 hours per day during the time period
when pumping is required and is critical to the proper operation of the
OWNER'S facility. Provide 24-hour on-site supervision of pumps to ensure that
pumps are always operational and performing as required. Notify the OWNER
immediately if temporary pumping cannot be provided.
8. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for repairing any damage or reimbursing
the OWNER for any regulatory fines or additional lifi station staff time resulting
from the CONTRACTOR'S failure to maintain temporary pumping.
9. Provide 10Q percent backup (a.k.a., standby, redundant, etc.) pumping
capacity equal to the required process flow rate. Backup system shall be
capable of providing required pumping capacity immediately upon failure of
primary pumping system.
10. All necessary spare equipment and appurtenances shall be available on-site to
allow immediate repair and/or replacement of any pumping system component
that is not functioning properly.
B. Providing temporary piping systems as specified in this Sub-Section.
C. After temporary process pumping system is no longer required:
1. Remove temporary process pumping system.
2. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary process
pumping system.
3. Restore existing facilities to original condition.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01500-6 8235A10
pw:ll Carollo/DocumentslClienUWAlf2entnnl8235A10fSpecificationsl10.01500
PART2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used_
END OF SUB-SECTION
1
�
�
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_Q1500-7 8235A10
� pwJ/Carollo,�DocumentslClienUWNRenton18235A10ISpecifica6ons110.01500
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01500-8 8235A10
pw:llCarollolDocumenislCfientlWAlRentonl8235At OlSpecficaGonsI10.01500
�
��
�
�
�
,��
:�
�
�,
�.
L_ J
I
SUB-SECTION 10.01610
PROJECT DESIGN CRITERIA
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Project design criteria such as temperature and site
elevation.
1.02 PROJECT DESIGN CRITERIA
A. All equipment and materials for the project are to be suitable for performance in a
submersible wastewater lift station environment and under following conditions,
unless otherwise specified:
1 _ Design temperatures are:
a. Outdoor temperatures: 0 to 110 degrees Fahrenheit.
a. indoor temperatures for the foilowing structures:
1} Wet well and valve vault_ 40 to 100 degrees Fahrenheit.
2. Moisture conditions: Defined in individual equipment sections.
3_ Site elevation: Approximatety 240 feet above mean sea level.
PART2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01610-1 8235A10
pw:llCarollolDocumentslClien WVAIRentonl8235810lS pecificationsl10.01610.docx
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01610-2 8235A10
pw://CarollolDocumentslClientNVNRentonl8235610/Specificationsl10.0161 O. docx
LJ
i�.
�
;�
l.
��.
�.
�,
�
�,
�
�.
�
SUB-SECTION 10.01612
SEISMIC DEStGN CRITERIA
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Seismic design criteria for the following:
,� 1_ Anchorage of inechanical and electrical equipment.
2. Seismic design and design of anchorage for small tanks fabricated off site and
shipped to the Project site.
� 3. Other structures or items as specified or indicated on the Drawings.
�
r
�
�
�
'�.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by aIL
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work_
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a_ Sub-Section 10.01410 - Regulatory Requirements.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):
1. 7-05 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTtON
A. Design requirements:
1. Design in accordance with the requirements of the building code as specified
in Sub-Section 10.01410:
a. Design spectral acceleratian at short period, Sps: 0.96.
b. Component amplificafion factor, aP: In accordance with ASCE 7-05,
Tables 13.5-1 and 13.6-1.
c. Component response modification factor, RP: In accordance with ASCE
7-05, Tables 13.5-1 and 13.6-1.
d_ Component importance factor, IP: Per ASCE 7.
2. Do not use friction to resist sliding due to seismic forces.
3. Use anchor bolts, bolts, or welded studs for anchors for resisting seismic
forces. Anchor bolts used to resist seismic forces shall have a standard hex
bolt head_ Do not use anchor bolts fabricated from rod stock with an L or
J-shape.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01612-1 8235A10
� pwllCarolla�DocumentyCSenWVAlRenton/8235A10/Spedfica6ons(10.01612
4. Do not use chemical anchors, concrete anchors, flush shelis, powder actuated
fasteners, sleeve anchors, or other types of anchors unless indicated on the
Drawings or accepted in writing by the ENGINEER.
5. Seismic forces must be resisted by direct bearing on the fasteners used to
resist seismic forces. Do not use connections that use friction to resist seismic
forces.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings and calculations: Complete shop drawings and seismic calculations.
B. Calculations shall be signed and stamped by a civil or structural engineer licensed
in the state where the Project is located.
PART2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 201 Q- F1NAL 10.01612-2 8235A10
pw:/lCarollolDocumentslClienUWAlRenton16235A10lSpecificationsl10.01612
�,
�
�
SUB-SECTION 10.01732
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Cutting and patching existing and new construction.
�
.�
�
;�
�-
�
.�
B_ Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents_
a. Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 1-05.
B. Cutting and patching plan:
1. Submit details of proposed construction before cutting and patching
construction commences affecting:
a. Work of OWNER or of others.
b. Structural integrity of element of Project.
2. Cutting and patching plan shall include the following:
a. Identification of Work_
b. Description of affected construction_
c. Necessity for cutting, patching, alteration, or excavatian.
d. Description of proposed construction. �
e. Scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Comply with specifications and standards for products involved.
October.26, 2010 - FINAL 1Q.01732-1 8235A10
� pwllCarolblDocumentslClienUWAlFtentonl8235AtO15pecifications110_01732.docx
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to ensure structural integrity of
affected portion of Work.
B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage and
persons from injury.
C. Provide protection from elements for that portion of Project which may be exposed
by cutting and patching, and maintain excavations free from water.
3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING
�
0
Cut, fit, and patch when required to:
1. Make its several parts fit together properly.
2. Remove and replace construction not conforming to Contract Documents.
3. Remove samples of installed construction as specified for testing.
4. Provide routine penetrations of nonstructural surfaces for installation of piping
and electncal conduit.
Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage and will
provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs.
C. Openings in existing concrete:
1. Create openings by:
a. Saw cutting completely through concrete_
b. Scoring edges of opening with saw to at least 1-inch depth on both
surfaces (when accessible) and removing concrete by chipping.
2. Do not allow saw cuts to extend beyond limits of opening.
3. Make comers square and true by combination of core drilling and grinding or
chipping.
4. Prevent debris from falling into adjacent tanks or channels in service or from
damaging existing equipment and other facilities_
D. Sizing of openings in existing concrete:
1. Make openings sufficiently large to permit final alignment of pipe and fittings
without deflections.
2. Allow adequate space for packing around pipes and conduit to ensure water
tightness.
E. Grouting pipes in place:
1. Sandblast concrete surfaces and thoroughly clean sand and other foreign
material from surfaces prior to placing grout.
2. Grout pipes, sleeves, castings, and conduits in place by pouring grout under a
head of at least 4 inches. Vibrate grout into place. Completely fill the spaces
occupied by pipes, sleeves, castings, and conduits.
3. Water cure the grout.
F. Connections to existing pipes:
1. Cut existing pipe square.
2. Properly prepare the ends for the connection indicated on the Drawings.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01732-2 8235A10
pw://CarolblDocumentslClienUWAlF2entonB235A10lSpeafica6onsl10.01732.docx
�
�
�
3. Repair any damage to existing lining and coating.
G. Rehabilitate all areas affected by removal of existing equipment, equipment pads
and bases, piping, supports, electrical panels, electric devices, and conduits such
that little or no evidence of the previous installation remains:
1_ Fill areas in existing floors, walls, and ceilings from removed piping, conduit
and fasteners with non-shrink grout and finish smooth.
2. Remove concrete bases for equipment and supports by:
a. Saw cutting clean, straight lines with a depth equal to the concrete cover
over reinforcement minus 1l2 inch below finished surface. Do not cut
existing reinforcement on floors.
b. Chip concrete within scored lines and cut exposed reinforcing steel and
anchor bolts.
c_ Patch with non-shrink grout to match adjacent grade and finish.
3. Terminate abandoned piping and conduits with blind flanges, caps, or plugs.
H. Treat existing concrete reinforcement as follows:
�� 1. Where existing reinforcement is to remain, protect, clean, and extend into new
concrete.
2. Where existing reinforcement is not to be retained, cut off as follows_
a_ Where new concrete joins existing concrete at the removal line, cut
reinforcement flush with concrete surface at the removal line.
b. Where concrete surface at the removal line is the finished surface, cut
� reinforcement 2 inches below the surface, paint ends with epoxy, and
patch holes with dry pack mortar.
END OF SUB-SECTION
,�,
�
:�
�
��
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01732-3 8235A10
� pwl(CarollolDocumentslClienUWAlRentonB235A101Spedfications(10.01732.docz
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01732-4 8235A10
pw:/lCarollo/Documents/ClienUWAlRentonB235A101SpecificaUons/10.01732.doac
�
,�,
�
�
,�.
,��
1�,
�,
��
�
�
�
SUB-S�CTION 10.01756
TESTING, TRAINING, AND FACILITY START-UP
�
�
�
�
��
�
.�
,�
�
`�.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Requirements for equipment and system testing and facility
start-up, including the following:
1. Start-up plan.
2. Performance testing.
3. General start-up and testing procedures.
4. Functional testing.
5_ Operational testing.
6_ Certificate of proper installation.
7. Services of manufacturer's rzpresentatives.
8. Training of OWNER's personnel.
B_ Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all_
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or fumishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurateiy with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.15050 - Basic Mechanical Material and Methods.
b. Sub-Section 10.15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing_
c_ Sub-Section 10.16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.
d. Sub-Section 10.17950 - Testing, Calibration, and Commissioning_
1.02 GENERAL TESTING, TRAINING, AND START-UP REQUIREMENTS
�
L
C_
Contract requirements: Testing, training, and start-up are requisite to the
satisfactory completion of the Contract.
Complete testing, training, and start-up within the Contract Times.
Allow realistic durations in the Progress Schedule for testing, training, and start-up
activities.
D. Furnish labor, power, chemicals, tools, equipment, instruments, and services
required for and incidental to completing functional testing, performance testing, and
operational testing.
October 26, 2Q10 - FINAL 10.01756-1
pxrl/CarollolDoamentslClienUWAlf2entonB235A1015peaficabon s/10.01756
8235A10
E. Provide competent, experienced technical representatives of equipment
manufacturers for assembly, installation and testing guidance, and operator training.
1.03 START-UP PLAN
A. Submit start-up plan for each piece of equipment and each system not less than
3 weeks prior to planned initial start-up of equipment or system_
B. Provide detailed sub-network of Progress Schedule with the following activities
identified:
1. Manufacturer's services.
2_ Installation certifications.
3_ Operator training.
4. Submission of Operation and Maintenance Manual.
5. Functional testing,
6. PerFormance testing.
7. Operational testing_
C. Provide testing plan with test logs for each item of equipment and each system
when specified_ Include testing of alarms, control circuits, capacities, speeds, flows,
pressures, vibrations, sound levels, and other parameters.
D_ Provide summary of shutdown requirements for existing systems which are
necessary to complete start-up of new equipment and systems.
E. Revise and update start-up plan based upon review comments, actual pragress, or
to accommodate changes in the sequence of activities.
F. ENGINEER to make sole determination as to whether CONTRACTOR is not ready
for start-up. Should the initial start-up have to be rescheduled, CONTRACTOR to
provide minimum 7 days notification for rescheduled start-up and pay OWNER
$1,000 to cover ENGINEER travel expenses_
1.04 PERFORMANCE TESTING
A. Test equipment for proper performance at point of manufacture or assembly when
specified. �
B. When source quality control testing is specified:
1. Demonstrate equipment.meets specified performance requirements.
2. Provide certified copies of test results.
3_ Do not ship equipment until certified copies have received written acceptance
� from ENGINEER_ Written acceptance does not constitute final acceptance.
4. Perform testing as specified in the equipment Sub-Sections.
1.05 GENERAL START-UP AND TESTING PROCEDURES
A_ Mechanical systems: As specified in the individual equipment Sub-Sections and
Sub-Sections 10.15050 and 10.15958:
1. Remove rust preventatives and oils applied to protect equipment during
construction.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01756-2 8235A10
pw:llCarollolDocumentslGienUWA/Rentonl8235At 0lSpecificationsl10.01756
�
�
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Flush lubrication systems and dispose of flushing oils. Recharge lubrication
system with lubricant recommended by manufacturer.
Flush fuel system and provide fuel for testing and start-up.
Install and adjust packing, mechanical seals, O-rings, and other seals.
Replace defective seals.
Remove temporary supports, bracing, or other foreign objects installed to
prevent damage during shipment, storage, and erection_
Check rotating machinery for correct direction of rotation and for freedom of
moving parts before connecting driver.
Perform cold afignment and hot alignment to manufacturer's tolerances.
Adjust V-belt tension and variable pitch sheaves.
Inspect hand and motorized valves for proper adjustment. Tighten packing
glands to insure no leakage, but permit valve stems to rotate without galling.
Verify valve seats are positioned for proper flow direction.
Tighten leaking flanges or replace flange gasket. Inspect screwed joints for
leakage. �
Install gratings, safety chains, handrails, shaft guards, and sidewalks prior to
operational testing_
�
�
�
�.
�
,�
�
B. Electrical systems: As specified in Sub-Section 10.16950 and the individual
equipment Sub-Sections:
1. Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring except 120 volt lighting, wiring,
and control wiring inside electrical panels.
2. Perform continuity tests on grounding systems_
3. Test and set switchgear and circuit breaker relays for proper operation.
4. Perform direct current high potential tests on all cables that will operate at
more than 2,000 volts. Obtain services of independent testing lab to perform
tests.
5. Check motors for actual full load amperage draw. Compare to nameplate
value.
C. Instrumentation systems: As specified in Sub-Section 10.17950 and the individual
equipment Sub-Sections:
1. Bench or field calibrate instruments and make required adjustments and
control point settings.
2. Leak test pneumatic controls and instrument air piping.
3. Energize transmitting and control signal systems, verify proper operation,
ranges, and settings.
1.06 FUNCTIONAL TESTING
A. Perform checkout and performance testing as specified in the individual equipment
Sub-Sections.
� B. Functionally test mechanical and electrical equipment, and instrumentation and
controls systems for proper operation after general start-up and testing tasks have
been completed_
�
��
C. Demonstrate proper rotation, alignment, speed, flow, pressure, vibration, sound
level, adjustments, and calibration. Perform initial checks in the presence of and
with the assistance of the manufacturer's representative.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01756-3 8235A10
pw:l/CarollolDowmentslClienUWAlf2�ron78235At OlSpedficationsl10.01756
D. Demonstrate proper operation of each instrument loop function including alarms,
local and remote controls, instrumentation, and other equipment functions.
Generate signals with test equipment to simulate operating conditions in each
control mode_
E. Conduct continuous 4-hour test under full load conditions. Replace parts which
operate improperly.
1.07 OPERATIONAL TESTING
A. After completion of operator training, conduct operational test of the entire facility.
Demonstrate satisfactory operation of equipment and systems in actual operation.
�
C:
Conduct operational test for continuous 2-day period.
OWNER will provide operations personnel, power, fuel, and other consumables for
duration of test.
D. Immediately correct defects in material, workmanship, or equipment which became
evident during operational test.
E. Repeat operational test when malfunctions or deficiencies cause shutdown or
partial operation of the facility or results in perFormance that is less than specified
1.08 CERTIFICATE OF PROPER INSTALLATION
A. At completion of Functional Testing, furnish written report prepared and signed by
manufacturer's authorized representative, certifying equipment:
1_ Has been properly installed, adjusted, aligned, and lubricated.
2. Is free of any stresses imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts.
3. Is suitable for satisfactory full-time operation under full load conditions.
4. Operates within the allowable limits for vibration_
5_ Controls, protective devices, instrumentation, and control panels furnished as
part of the eguipment package are properly installed, calibrated, and
functioning.
6. Control logic for start-up, shutdown, sequencing, interlocks, and emergency
shutdown have been tested and are properly functioning.
B. Furnish written report prepared and signed by the electrical and/or instrumentation
subcontractor certifying:
1. Motor control logic that resides in motor control centers, control panels, and
circuit boards furnished by the electrical and/or instrumentation subcontractor
has been calibrated and tested and is properly operating.
2. Control logic far equipment start-up, shutdown, sequencing, interlocks, and
emergency shutdown has been tested and is properly operating.
3. Co-sign the reports along with the manufacturer's representative and
subcontractors.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01756-4 8235A10
pw:IfCarollolDowments/C1ien1NVAlRenton/8235At 0l5pecificationsll0_01756
��.
� 1.09 TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Provide operations and maintenance training for items of inechanical, electrical, and
� instrumentation equipment. Utilize manufacturer's representatives to conduct
training sessions.
�
�
�
�
B_ Coordinate training sessions to prevent overlapping sessions. Arrange sessions so
that individual operators and maintenance technicians do not attend more than
2 sessions per week.
C. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manual for specific pieces of equipment or
systems 1 month prior to training session for that piece of equipment or system.
D. Satisfactorily complete functional testing before beginning operator training.
E. Training sessions: Provide training sessions for equipment as specified in the
individual equipment Sub-Sections_
F_ The CONTRACTOR shall videotape all training sessions and provide a copy for the
OWNER.
G. The CONTRACTOR shall designate and provide 1 or more persons to be
� responsible for coordinating and expediting his/her training duties. The person or
persons so designated shatl be present at all training coordination meetings with the
OWNER.
�
�
�
,�
�1
�
H. The CONTRACTOR's coordinator shall coordinate the training periods with
OWNER personnel and manufacturer's representatives, and shall submit a training
schedule for each piece of equipment or system for which training is to be provided.
Such training schedule shall be submitted not less than 21 calendar days prior to
the time that the associated training is to be provided and shall be based on the
current plan of operation.
1.10 RECORD KEEPING
A. Maintain and submit following records generated during start-up and testing phase
of Project:
1. Daily logs of equipment testing identifying all tests conducted and outcome.
2. Logs of time spent by manufacturer's representatives performing services on
the job site.
3. Equipment lubrication records.
4. Electrical phase, voltage, and amperage measurements_
5. Insulation resistance measurements.
6. Data sheets of control loop testing including testing and calibration of
instrumentation devices and setpoints.
PART2 PRODUCTS
`� Not Used.
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01756-5 8235A10
pw:!lCarollolDocumentslGienUWAlRentonl8235A t OlSpecifica6ons/10_Q1756
�
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used_
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01756-6 8235A10
pw:dCarollo/DocumentslGienUWAlRenton/8235A t OlSpecificabons/10.01756
�.
�
SUB-SECTION 10.01770
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
�
�
,�
�
�
�,
�`
;�
�
�'
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Contract closeout requirements including:
1 _ Final cleaning.
2. Waste disposal_
3. Touch-up and repair.
4. Disinfection of systems.
5. Preparation and submittal of closeout documents.
6. Final completion certification.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if cafied for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following SectionslSub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 — Control of Work.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Water Works Association (AWWA).
1.03 FINAL CLEANING
A. Perform final cleaning prior to inspections for Substantial Completion.
B. Employ skilled workers who are experienced in cleaning operations:
C. Use cleaning materials which are recommended by manufacturers of surfaces to be
cleaned.
D. Prevent scratching, discoloring, and otherwise damaging surfaces being cleaned.
C
F
N
�
Clean roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
Broom clean exterior paved surtaces and rake clean other surfaces of site work:
1. Police yards and grounds to keep clean.
Remove dust, cobwebs, and traces of insects and dirt.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.Q1770-1 8235A10
pwJ/CarollolDocumentslClien WVAlRentonl8235A t 01Specifintions110.01770.docx
�
H_ Clean grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, paint, blemishes,
sealants, plaster, concrete, and other foreign materials from sight-exposed
surfaces, and fixtures and equipment.
I. Remove non-permanent protection and labels.
J. Polish waxed woodwork and finish hardware.
K. Polish glossy surfaces to clear shine.
L. Clean light fixtures and replace burned-out or dim lamps.
1.04 WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Arrange for and dispose of surplus materials, waste products, and debris off-site:
1. Prior to making disposal on private property, obtain written permission from
OWNER of such property.
B. Do not create unsightly or unsanitary nuisances during disposal operations.
C. �L"ai�tain ��s�,asal s�te ir safz co�dit�ol and gao� a�,pearance.
D. Complete leveling and cleanup prior to final acceptance of the Work.
1.05 TOUCH-UP AND REPAIR
A. Touch-up or repair finished surFaces on structures, equipment, fixtures,.and
installations that have been damaged prior to inspection for Substantial Completion.
B. Refinish or replace entire surfaces which cannot be touched-up or repaired
satisfactorily.
1.06 CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS
A. Submit following Closeout Submittals upon Substantial Completion and at least
7 days prior to submitting Application for Final Payment:
1. Evidence of Compliance with Requirements of Governing Authorities.
2. Project Record Documents.
3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
4. Warranties-and Bonds.
5. Keys and Keying Schedule.
6. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens as outlined in Conditions of the
Con#ract.
7_ Release of claims as outlined in Conditions of the Contract.
8. As-Built Information as specified in Section 1-05.4(4).
9. Certficate of Final Completion.
1.07 EVIDENCE OF COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS OF GOVERNING
AUTHORITIES
A_ Submit the following:
1 _ Certificate of Occupancy.
2. Certificates of Inspection:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01770-2 8235A10
pwJ/Carollo/DocumenLs(ClienUWAlRentonB235A101Specficationsl10.01770. docx
LJ
�
u
�
�
�
�
�
a. Mechanical:
1) As specified in individual equipment Sub-Sections.
b. Electrical:
1) As specified in individual equipment Sub-Sections.
1.08 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A_ Maintain at Project site, available to OWNER and ENGINEER, 1 copy of the
Contract Documents, shop drawings, and other submittals in good order:
1. Mark and record field changes and detailed information contained in submittals
and change orders.
2. Record actual depths, horizontal and vertical location of underground pipes,
duct banks, and other buried utilities. Reference dimensions to permanent
surface features_
3. Identify specific details of pipe connections, location of existing buried features
located during excavation, and the final locations of piping, equipment,
electrical conduits, manholes, and pull boxes.
4. Identify location of spare conduits including beginning, ending, and routing -
through pull boxes and manholes_ Record spare conductors, including number
and size, within spare conduits and filled conduits.
5. Provide schedules, lists, layout drawings, and wiring diagrams.
6. Make annotations with erasable colored pencil conforming to the following
color code:
Additions: Red
Deletions: Green
Comments Blue
Dimensions: Graphite
B. Maintain documents separate from those used for construction:
1 _ Label documents "RECORD DOCUMENTS."
C. Keep documents current:
1_ Record required information at the time the material and equipment is installed
and before permanently concealing.
D. Deliver record documents with transmittal letter containing date, Project title,
CONTRACTOR's name and address, list of documents, and signature of
CONTRACTOR.
�
'�,
�
,�
'
E_ During progress meetings, record documents will be reviewed to ascertain that
changes have been recorded.
1.09 WARRANTIES AND BOPIDS
A. Provide executed Warranty or Guaranty Form if required by Contract Documents.
B. Provide specified addifional warranties, guarantees, and bonds from manufacturers
and suppliers.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_01770-3 8235A10
pw://CarollolDocumentstClienNNAlRenton16235A 10lSpedficationsl10.01770.docx
1.10 CERTIFICATE OF FINAL COMPLETION
A. When operationai test has been successfully completed, ENGINEER will certify that
new facilities are operationally complete. ENGINEER wiil submit a list of known
items (punch list) still to be completed or corrected prior to contract completion.
B. List of items to be completed or corrected will be amended as items are resolved by
CONTRACTOR.
C. When all items have been completed or corrected, submit written certification that
the entire work is complete in accordance with the Contract Documents and request
Final Inspection per Section 1-05.11(2).
D. Upon completion of final inspection, ENGINEER will either prepare a written
acceptance of the entire work or advise CONTRACTOR of work not complete. If
necessary, inspection procedures will be repeated.
PART 2
Not Used.
PART 3
Not Used.
PRODUCTS
EXECUTION
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01770-4 8235A10
pw:llCarollolDocumentslGient! WA1f2enton/8235A 10/Spec�icationsl10.01770.dax
�
�
�
�
�
L�
'
�
�
�
�
�
,�
��
�
SUB-SECTION 10.01782
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Preparation and submittal of Operation and Maintenance
Manuals.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals before field quality control testing and
before training of each piece of equipment or system.
B. Submit 3 hardcopy manuals for each piece of equipment or system.
C_ Submit 2 electronic copy manuals for each piece of equipment or system.
D. Make manuals available at project site for use by construction personnel and
ENGINEER.
E_ Make additions and revisions to the manuals in accordance with ENGINEER's
review comments_
1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Preparation:
1. Provide hardcopy Operations and Maintenance Manuals in 3-ring binders with
rigid covers_ Utilize tab sheets to organize informafion.
2. Provide electronic copy Operations and Maintenance Manuals in PDF Format.
B. Contents of Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. Cover page: Equipment name, equipment tag number, project name,
OWNER's name, appropriate date.
2. Table of Contents: General description of information provided within each tab
section.
3. Lubrication information: Required lubricants and lubrication schedules_
4. Control diagrams:
a. Internal and connection wiring, including logic diagrams, wiring diagrams
� for control panels, ladder logic for computer based systems, and
connections between existing systems and new additions, and
adjustments such as calibrations and set points for relays, and control or
alarm contact settings.
5. Start-up procedures: Recommendations for installation, adjustment,
calibration, and troubleshooting.
6. Operating procedures:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01782-1 8235A10
, pw:!/Carollo/Documents/ClientlWA/Rentont8235A101Specificationsl10.01782
�
�
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
a_ Step-by-step procedures for starting, operating, and stopping equipment
under specified modes of operation.
b. Include safety precautions and emergency operating shutdown
instructions_
Preventative maintenance procedures: Recommended steps and schedules
for maintaining equipment.
Overhaul instructions: Directions for disassembly, inspection, repair and
reassembly of the equipment; safety precautions; and recommended
tolerances, cntical bolt torques, and special tools that are required.
Parts list: Generic title and identification number of each component part of
equipment; include bearing manufacturer, model and ball or roller pass
frequencies for every bearing_
Spare parts list: Recommended number of parts to be stored at the site and
special storage precautions.
Drawings: Exploded view or plan and section views with detailed callouts.
Provide electrical and instrumentation schematic record drawings.
Source (factory) quality control test results: Provide copies of factory test
reports as specified in Sub-Sections 10.15958 or the equipment Sub-Section_
Field quality control test results: After field-testing is completed, insert field test
reports as specified in Sub-Sections 10.15958 or the equipment Sub-Section.
Equipment Summary Form: Completed form in the format attached at the end
of this Sub-Section. Insert Equipment Summary Form after the tab sheet of
each equipment Sub-Section. The manufacturer's standard form will not be
acceptable_
PART2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SUB-SECTION
�
�
�
i
'
�
L�
�
�
u
L�'
�
�
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01782-2 8235A10
pwJlCarollo/DocumentslClient/WA1Renton/8235A1 OlSpeafirationslt 0.01782
'
�
'
'
i
'
�
,
'
1
'
'
�
'
'
'
�
'
,
r
EQUIPMENT SUMMARY FORM
1. EQUIPMENT ITEM
2_ MANUFACTURER
3. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(S)
(maps equipment number)
4_ LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT
5. WEIGHT OF INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS (OVER 100 POUNDS)
7
�
NAMEPLATE DATA -
Horsepower
Amperage
Voitage
Service Factor (S.F.)
Speed
ENC Type
Capacity
Other
MANUFACTURER'S LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE
Name
Address
Telephone Number •
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
9. LUBRICANT LIST
10. SPARE PARTS (recommendations
11. COMMENTS
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01782-3
pw:1/CarollolDocuments/ClientlWA/Ftenton18235At �/Specificauonslt 0.01782
8235A10
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.01782-4 8235A10
pw!/Caroilo/Documents/ClienuWNRentonl6235A101S pedficationsl10.01782
'
�
�
t
�
�
'
�
'
�
�
t
�
'
�
'
�
,
'
�
'
'
�
,
'
'
'
�
,
'
'
'
'
�
'
�
,
SUB-SECTION 10.02222
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Selective demolition.
B: See attached photos (Exhibit A) at the end of this Sub-Section for items to be
demolished (items to be demolished are hatched in red). Photos do not show all
items to be demolished. Items to be demolished shall be described within this Sub-
Section, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Demolition plan and schedule.
B. Disposal means and locations.
1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Conform to existing environmental requirements and regulations regarding
noise, dust, and vibration.
B. Existing Conditions:
1. Verify that utility services are disconnected.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions pertaining to demolition work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Utilities:
1. Disconnect any remaining utility services.
2. Plug or cap cut pipes and conduits with removable plugs or caps acceptable to
ENGINEER.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 1 Q.02222-1
pwllCarollolDocumentslClienUWAlRenton18235At O/Speaficationslt OA2222
8235A10
B. Protection:
1. Use saw cutting and other methods acceptabie to ENGINEER to protect
adjacent facilities.
2. Provide berms and other means acceptable to ENGINEER to keep drainage
from demolition areas.
3.03 DEMOLITION
A. Completely remove from project site items specified within this Sub-Section.
Demolition includes removal of piping, conduits, and appurtenances and backfilling
of resulting voids with suitable excavated or imported material, compacted to
95 percent relative density_
B. Specific items to be demolished include:
1. Guide rails and supports.
2. Grinder pumps (two [2] horsepower each, two [2] total), junction box, and
cable.
3. Discharge piping (1-1/4-inch diameter, stainless steel) and valves.
4. Approximately 22 linear feet of force main (3-inch diameter, PVC or ductile
iron). Connection to existing force main as indicated on the Drawings.
5. One (1} cleanout_
6. Float levels, junction box, and cable.
7. Supports and appurtenances associated with the above listed items.
C. Specific items to remain within existing structure include:
1_ Access hatch, ladders, and platform.
D. Additional unforeseen items as directed by the ENGINEER.
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.02222-2 8235A10
pw'//CarollolDocumenis/ClienUVJAlf2enton/8235A t O/Specificationslt 0.02222
,
I�
II
�
EXHIBIT A
'
'
,
��
,.__�
�
'
'
'
�
'
'
�
,
'
'
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.02222-3 8235A10
' pw:/(CamllolDocumentslClienUWA/Rentonl8235At0ISpecificationslt0A2222
'
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.02222-4 8235A10
pw:l/CarollolDocumentslClienUWAlf2entoN8235At OlSpecificationsl10.02222
,
,
�
�
'
�
'
'
'
,
�
'
,
�
'
,
II
�_ �
1
r
�� �
J
.`
Myy• �
�d
i
�a�
•}
i
�1
�.:�,.
f:AA �
�
♦ '
f.
��
�
\` �
� �
�
��
,i ..
��, �...
�
' �� r� ` •
! iiYw- .���W�•,� ' • ,P_ii�. � Ir�:!� s- w! * .
,r < < . . . . . i . �-,�.
f
y �'� � r:'• . . ..A�.� �I � � - . . . , . . . .; ' ._ . . �,�y � � x �.r
»
. . .i .
..' . '� a�� . , . .,,r�+ . : � ....� . '
. �'l%. �. ... . . .. ..: ..., '• ' ' . � ' � T •i
t�W�R'' ' J� � '
� , 1 ��_� � . . . - ' �.. i.� .
� �'M + . tii�1_�, b - S �_^ Y ' _ . . - . . . . .. ' t �' s�S. �'} � .
si� t. :;-{�' � '� ��. � � J .. , : � ; .. :. ' ,.; � s ' �. �k'1KiPS'�r.�s i�, �"�"��''
y� • �s ,�g„� �t-,. , ^ ��� . a� n . I ' • ��� :>�'P2 ''{
.,�,"iy� � � ..aIF .W . ":. 'r�a4' ., . . - , . - ;' ' '�.'r�. � wY-i�.a .. / :� +'"iii � .
F �' # �� � y •�.� �����7���.�'���.•� i�t� �' �+' . �
, _
; sY . °��",:;.o... � �; �i � �1 �! a! ! i s �! : �'►� s i � * 4 2 "1 �[ �' �. '1+,,�,ti; ' �� �' .�
a + � ' � �' �r
,.�,+r � .� . �. - _ _. .. . _ ; , s.� Y,, � � �
a�,�,�-
� . ��Y .� � ��
=v; ` � , _ � f -_ ,�
� � �; ►
�� Z . . . � �� . � � � ` . J��. A � . � �,
'���
" �' f - ,f / ' r . • � • � � `' t-
,'� y ��5� _ . . r � ��.��� / � � � � � "��� � .< �'� � �� {
#5. . . � �. . � . � . � ;e' . . . . . I - .�', , ��I,� ' � � �, �' p� .
I�-� .. . . _. \� �- 6 _ 's.,+,,. " �����'•� . _„ - , . � � .
�` ; � . � . � ' � �� r .
. ,�,� �y`�I,', . ,
•.^ i R
. . �� � � �� Fi � . .. . . ' . �� ` � 1' �i'`, �y:
'Y A' 'r ' a+„�j► �''�M � � .� � �'r'1�: �i ..
jy�,.asl� 4� I � . . . •...��. � �i; � ,.q .• . .
<'� L ••�R°� . ��. �C ', • � ` _ � � . .`(' f�..S"' � � • . .
• ' _ _ • AC�::.
-. Y . �- �!y �' !.`f ,�J{-SL � ; " -. -` - ' � .'r • . . _ . _e ,,;4 . +�M"; �yl."`'r..�� �ii
•
.i::..«� ;-= <.A.ri-T ,1bV. e ��'
} i- � la�. �s„ �� ..� �� � t� � .. . . � .,;��� . � . . .� .. .. "y�. o . � .. ...'
��.•v. �r-% -sr�,��t'`�� f � . ,� ��'►!w'. . : _..� . .._ . '�,.� „'�c�
r � . � . . , ... . � �
r;\ . '/ . . - _. , .. �_� � �— •. . . I� � . " Y�� . .. �� • � y�� S t � �..
. . t. . . . . .. � ` � . � ' � . %+•,�'T �' d t. � a t . �.�' •'a.�l :i :.^ .....\'�. "F�e'"�':"�; � s , .` y. �� � .
��Cir � �'�,s� �'`����'' � �" N* L y,�' .Y� `�� . _ � K� .+ � 'x r `� Y � . ' � ` � j� � �� w+r."j i..'�.'. '+ o�...��'�7i��."".,,� ^ '
' ° ' f "o� � 'rrV',��}, 'r.,,w.����3w .._:.�.���. . . ..3 �j' .d�f��wA. , v, w �F q{,-,� . ) ! "�"-..
����� t.��-w;M 'i.�, � Y -. .-t.:. �i: t,c: _ .i � � . � rK . , J��.�� � �,'fi
�a�� �:�",1v xf. ' � � , . W �,� > � .��� !. �j �. -�s � .'Fi.��..
,y� j7• ^
'�`' ,+r ��'t .fiM� '�. < , .�.� i;a .�,j � ' r ... - �^ . . � � - . i . , . .-bw�wN"+����lk �t". ,'Sx.ra�BY'��'�ay,
�, rw , °� '4 .41.. 7 � . - , � � ' � . � �:.- -
�" � ' . � �r ' � . . . .� � f . .. ,, i .._ - . �....s � '��y .
-�`� i�'''' .� w~�.'�f`i � � �,.� � � � i , ,..�?r�'p �.
a"'�iy,� t E- a ,,. . � t
G,�r a �. ���.
� '� .. 'rt i'• ' . � � � . . i � . . . � - ' � . , , . .`.t, %
. .. ..y.,.., �. .. �� �. _ _ . � ' _.� �' C fa'1t' . � �1- � S V ..tf + .
� y�. Y �
Ll'��` y� yTvVt^�P."� '�'l
. . s � �� � • � ��"�f�����y�'�� W Y • .I�vrivy���i�.^�a3, Z Z . �.+1 . L+...�. yF �.
• a f s�...v- � 1'¢ 8= i�. .
. _ • . . � . . * � .�i7 � .
�� „�' . a.:'.l�' �. ��: ,� nh"� � . .. _ . . . . � . . , :.. ��-��` ' . �{.�_�•
�r: — ,,.,,�.,, , . - , �
- •-� � •
, : '
•t � , � _ � v
• -� �
r .
. x �� t
��� '. , r .. - • -� �..Y ��_
� f t�.''� �y �. . "a3^.
.�n�. - �� - � .
; 5 r �
� .yr��T; 2�_. . .ti � � ", ���• �
k .:s� f z ,_ i. y �.,
_ • ' : _ I �i�� / .
��� . � .. i � .
,.s.
% � r `��a��y, ,i` wT } < . :�.I -. .. . . � � �" . .
� .,:i �r , � �`:
���h� �e��rv7' � � ' . . . ' ! -
� � t '� � } �, I. ' ,
�.,;; 4' ' ' .. ,M ' I� . . - . .
�!���; j` 1 •'' � 4 - I � � . . .
a
_.,'" �� .'� � ,,
} � /
.- ,. � � J� � . �
i � 1 �. I
x'i`. m' , . K�•� 3 -
��.1' .p? p�"� 1' .�S � L �� ,/� ~9 ., �h ,
�
' 1 �' ,� •
- �, ..• �� �,�c
_.� .r.k �'y .•.�-
_. �.t,��.�. _. ., . .
I - �� �� � �+'�� �.'� �5.�4 4 � i
.���4� � � . �•..� . �.: �..,.
P
.�-� �,• [S; x 'r�� -
� , ..�� . u �,y.
«, u � � * � "r"
ti. ►
� : � ,. �.
I. �- �''4'�. ,.,� � T � _ :^:�i+� P
'A i'."� .j��. �t � ���
.. 7����" � ;r� 'r, } *,�t �� ••���.,1 � ��4�`� .
. ! � �"4 ��r� '�.. � -
�t r
_ ,� �, � �
� a► , ,� `z^� `=` ,
'�;' �+ � r �" �' ; �'��` ; ' `r-ey�'
' ;. • 1 yr
t ,'Y . . . � � , � r�i� ��' �,
� � � ��
�
� '.� . y . �� _. . Y y s�.'�^"�'+'
. 'it. �M � . ♦.,,y. "" �.. t ,.. �� i.
d'� � . It�� ;' �. ti �+�t �.
� � + f� -%r,�WL� s�
. . = z• y�_ � � • �
� '' � .._r )' �' ,�.•' p . .
< `' �* r
-:� �,, ,;q: .�.� r �.a, �i
�{ r' .���ti..`,� � . i w � 31�.Y��t: . r�',�
'n'. i
- ` • j �
.�; 1r.� .•.
r -��i;�' :sr + `+ j' 'F- � ,_��� ,�"
}•�.�'l�,�•� ~ '. �I,rf� -i./:5� ' .� . ?' .• y���fi
,� fG— . 't, . T ' ;" 4 ♦ . - .. `� fY'','
. AJ- 4 Vf . . 4 +�'��
!'� ' �Ir�;-. � �' ;, - t
w'
�, ro� __�`' `�a,.��.i. ,
� .�i�� '16..:�:^c'.F",..._...._ . _.. _ ,.. � . `l.x..
� �
�
:V*� �.+�,iR1 � ��,. .li�e -%`.��'��r,i�'�c'x�F'.-r,jr. :�.K�..o'w7�'..� .,�.. .:., s . _.�: ;.� -. � . _.. ... . .._ " ,�.F�,,.Vs �_..". ';
k '. °y. � .,
' �f'� ',`^. Y , . . , -��.-M� � .� . � i i,',
„ I
; . , .. . . . �- �
,..
.�, J�.� _. � - ` C4 _
. �EvF i.- � -
� ':; � _ �
v
r%�� 5,�,.i "�Y`f �'i��. .i�_. _. �y�".• ��f.
h 1 Jb"� �:� �e P
. � * .._ . . .._ . . !^.�� . r��� �v, l. .
��rt. � F: • � � ��e ' ' .
���'�' t�� ' - ' � n + �' . '
� f'a�: , :��Q� ' fe {
4 �'S' .J. ' .. _ , . , _� .di�j' L's �� Y.�j . r�_ ' w . � . }.
, � ,� s� t� . . , . . . }'.T F
� � ' � � "� ': '.� . . . �_ _
, � '
� . �� � t� T • � � . , .. . � T, s� J
'� . � � �� L
� " � y ' � • - NM � ' - 1 . �� 'i� �y �
♦ � . ..� = p -.�Si.
. • '�;i � •.: �.
v { '� . � .. . �- �' _�. - . . ., - . �r. -.t - ,
S ,�;'_ , � . � YC � � s {. . ... ' .: f
A♦ �'-�. . . � r ''�t . !� �� . . . :
* ' '� . . . i r ?r'�+w `
_ ' , . �, .�" � � f�; . =.
., � •"�v' "� !
�� ::l sGGk �' 4 � � i�. A ' . . . � w' � t'j ' � •�r
, �.i/, � '�`,' ` '°.1.�1 �.'�.. =,=�::, ' _ _ W.
4� ) ♦• ��is�i �� �� � �A�'. � _ {i
. ,� �-
. � � 4.
• . . •'
'�'� �'�°` ' . S -. . ' �. �•:,-
;
� s. . . � . . . ;�_ . .. . .. � . . , �„6{j�•'r.
, � � . , V f �'�'�
.. i . . . . . .. , .. . '� 4
' , ., . . . .. ' • -'t �}1 i -'
� ' ., '�t�. 4 - � it,
� . t". � � � � V :G.
. `� .� , �` . � r
�. �. �;�� 1 , i- �''., � �s..,
_. � '" � , � r . � " � . .�. .. . ,
' J ' �� �i.. ?-6.
.. �_.,. � � . t �+ �•. '� p.^ _ . . ,i �'�"K� .. � ; ...- .
�i� . . � r� � •
�
,'ti s } ..,. �
`k i < ""�}G � v, , �s
• < w � � � €ti ^� �+d �!'�+ - . „�, � -� t-,., {
.. ,r� � y .. " r - .! '
S 1, , � �ia � �1 �''?'����^�i a ` ` . � �f � ' � � k ��'..
jp _ . �; t� ^�i ' - a . � �t . . : t .� , yy.
�A y�.:' R� � '.. � . � •�y- °'�'y • ., . .. � p �
..�`. � . � �. '' ' '� .� p �� s' �R : .. . _. . o ��y i
t .Yr t �.. �.`a 4 '� � � �j� �ti '�� �
, �- �,
w: �'`Z: 'wr ,� ��� � ':'� -`t . _ 1F-,'_ �. ... � .
��� `�, � ` �i.: � . } ' � �'S1; `:,rV ,7t� .
, f r �. �` t * . , ' `,*�.
� f� t �� �, , , ;
� �s' +i�s � , ':� �lr f
A�r � r. � " ' y, 'a:
� � ' �� � �
Lk� "�'I � 'T ,, 1 � � '� � t � `t:
"�`� � ���';,' .i g � . V ��^�`
� � _� � r� ,� �;
_,. � ,, ,� . , .� � .: , `_� ;;.
��;�,�' �;� : x ���� ,� s��. � ► `¢ ` • �
�a; ,� - � 3,1 � „ r -
�, � � �j�y �• " "' . .r .. .: A . . .
� r ~ �� [ . , {' �'
' 6.•^'�. � X� �,�i '�'�' i,. �-��. e .. .
� ''�4 � ., � ` . . ` _ . , L � . ' d��� , . . .
� �1C �� . _ ' ' _ 1 ' � � , ' . �. �� . .... , , .
� •"
.�r , , Tkw. . . ' ',F ry' . . . :��y ` _ r'r:as , :
_ , 1
,
�
L�
PART1 GENERAL
� 1.01 SUMMARY
SUB�ECTION 10.02240
DEWATERING
, A. Sub-Section includes:
1. Installation and maintenance of dewatering systems.
2. Disposal of water entering excavation or other parts of the work.
1
'
L!
i
,
��
�
'
1
��
�
�
��
�
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all_
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities perForming
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work. "
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
b. Sub-Section 10.03600 - Grouting.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design requirements:
1. Keep excavations reasonably free from water. Draw down the static water
level to a minimum of 3 feet below the bottom of excavations.
2. Analysis includes the following: Evaluation of the anticipated subsurface
conditions, required well spacing, diameter of wells, depth screen interval,
backfill and filter pack, pump size, drawdown duration, drawdown and steady
state flow rates, desilting tank, and settlements.
3_ Include water drawdown curves in dewatering calculations.
4. Coordinate dewatering design with excavation and shoring design. Recognize
the changes in groundwater conditions and earth pressures in the shoring and
excavation design.
5. Do not place concrete or masonry foundations or floors in water, nor allow
water to rise over them until concrete or mortar has set at least 24 hours.
6. Maintain operation of the dewatering system untit the complete structure
including walls, slabs, beams, struts, and all other structural elements have
been constructed and the concrete has attained specified strength, and backfill
has been completed to finish grade.
7. Provide standby power to ensure continuous dewatering in case of power
failure.
B. Recharge groundwater behind shoring to minimize settlement due to dewatering.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.02240-1 8235A10
pw:llCarollolDocumentslGien8WAlRenton18235A701SpecificationsN 0.02240.dooc
,
C. Secure written permission from the ENGINEER before locating welis, well points, or
drain lines for purposes of dewatering within limits of structure foundation.
D. Locate dewatering facilities where they will not interfere with utilities and
construction work to be performed by others.
E. Dewatering Discharge Location: Existing sanitary sewer manhole upstream of the
existing wet well. This manhole will also include the bypass pumping equipment.
Pumps shall be upsized accordingly to accommodate anticipated dewatering flow
rates should dewatering be required. Shall conform to the following:
1_ The discharge location shall be secured by a fence or cover with lock to
prevent outsider entry and sealed watertight.
2. Acceptable means of sedimentation extraction and disposal approved by
ENGINEER shall be used prior to discharge.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Dewatering plan:
1. Arrangement, location, depths of system components.
2. Type and sizes of filters.
3. Required permits.
B. Well construction logs which include:
1. Descriptions of actual materials encountered in accordance with Unified Soil
Classification System.
2. Construction details_
3. Well development procedures and results.
4. Deviations from original design.
C. Laboratory test results.
D. Qualifications:
1. Dewatering contractor.
2. Dewatering design engineer.
3. Testing laboratory.
E. Control points and schedule of ineasurements:
1. Location and details of control points and method and schedule of
measurements.
2. Within 24 hours of constructing control points and making measurements at
such control points, submit copy of fleld notes with such measurements.
3. Deliver submittal with control point measurements within 24 hours of
collection.
a. Show the current measurement and the change in measurement from the
first measurement taken.
b_ Show a graphical plot with movements.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of a dewatering design engineer:
1. Dewatering plan and dewatering system analysis:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.02240-2 8235A10
pw:llCarollolDocuments\ClientlWAlRenton�8235A101Specificauons110.02240.docx
1
1
�
'
�
'
'
�
'
��
�
'
�
LI
,
�
C�
�
�
�
�
�
,
a. Prepared by a registered Civil Engineer, registered in the state where the
Project is located. The Civil Engineer must have at least 8 years of
experience in designing similar systems.
b. Submit qualifications of the dewatering contractor, the Dewatering Design
Engineer, sampling service, and testing laboratory.
PART2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
� 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Provide and maintain during construction: Ample means and devices with which to
� promptly remove and properly dispose of water entering excavation or other parts of
the work, whether water is surface water or underground water.
,
�
i
,
�
�
B. Install at least 1 groundwater level monitoring well. If more than 4 dewatering weils
or well points are installed, install 1 additianal monitoring well for every 4 dewatering
wells or well points.
1. Locate monitoring wells within 6 feet of the excavation and located mid way
between dewatering wells or well points.
2. Monitoring wells: Temporary cap and be not less than 2 inches in diameter.
3. Protect the dewatering wells in place during the excavation_
C. Intercept and divert precipitation and surface water away from excavations through
the use of dikes, curb walls, ditches, pipes, sumps, or other means.
D. Disposing of water:
1. Dispose of water from the work in suitable manner without damage to adjacent
property.
2. Do not drain water into work built or under construction.
3. Dispose of water in such manner as not to be menace to public health.
4. Dispose of water in accordance with the design requirements specified in this
Sub-Section.
, E. Wells, well points, and drain lines for dewatering:
1. Locate after receiving ENGINEER's written permission.
2. Fill dewatering wells, pipes, and french drains to be left in place within
structure foundation limits with Class �C" concrete as specified in Sub-
� Section 10.03300 or grout as specified in Sub-Section 10.03600.
�
�
1
3.02 CONSTRUCTION
A. Interface with other work:
1. Prior to release of groundwater to its static level:
a. All groundwater pressure relief devices for the structure are fully
operational.
b_ Construction of structure is complete and the concrete has reached
specified strength.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 1U.Q2240-3 8235A10
pw:UCaroIblDocumentslClientlWAlf2enton\8235A101Specifications110.02240.docx
c. Backfili of structure is complete.
d. Control release of groundwater to its static level to prevent disturbance of
the natural foundation soils or compacted backfills and fills and to prevent
flotation or movement of structures or pipelines.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. ° Monitoring wells:
1. Record water levels at least once a week. Submit readings to ENGINEER
within 1 week.
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.02240-4 8235A10
pw:\ICaroIlolDocumentslClienflWAlRenton18235A t OlSpecrfica6ons110.02240.docx
!
�
�
PART 1 GENERAL
� 1.01 SUMMARY
i
�
��
,
�
�
I
J
t
�
C�
�
SUB-SECTION 10.02260
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
A. Sub-Section includes: Requirements for designing, furnishing and installing,
maintaining, and removing excavation support and protection.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding.as if called for by all. �
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents_
a. Sub-Section 10.01410 - Regulatory Requirements.
1.02 REFERENCES
I�
:
American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (AISC):
1. Steel Construction Manual.
American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):
1. Guidelines of Engineering Practice for Braced and Tied-Back Excavations.
C. Department of the Navy Naval Facilities Engineering Command (NAVFAC):
1. Design Manual 7.2 - Foundations and Earth Structures.
2. Design Manual 7.3 - Soil Dynamics and Special Design Aspects
D. State of Califomia Department of Transportation (Caltrans): �
1. Caltrans California Trenching and Shoring Manual.
E. United States Steel Corporation (USS):
1. Steel Sheet Piling Design Manual.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
� A. General Engineering Design Practice: General engineering design practice in area
of the Project, performed in accordance with recent engineering literature on subject
of shoring and stability of excavations.
C�
�
B. Shoring: A temporary structural system designed to support vertical faces, or nearly
vertical faces, of soil or rock for purposes of excavation. Shoring includes
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.02260-1 8235A10
1 pw \1CaroIlolDocumentslClientlWAlRenton18235A101SpeaficationsNO 02260 docx
cantilevered sheet piling, intemally braced sheet piling, slurry walls, soldier piles
and lagging, and other similar shoring systems_ Sloping of the soil is not shoring.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Where General Engineering Design Practice is specified, provide drawings and
signed calculations and have design performed by civil or structural engineer
registered in State where tF�e Project is located:
1. Provide design calculations that clearly disclose assumptions made, criteria
followed, and stress values used for the materials being used.
2_ Furnish references acceptable to ENGINEER substantiating appropriateness
of design assumptions, criteria, and stress values_
B. Design requirements:
1. General:
a_ Design means for safe and stable excavations in accordance with general
engineering design practice:
b. Design steel members in accordance with the building code as specified
in Sub-Section 10_01410 and the AISC Manual of Steel Design.
c. Design shoring involving materials other than steel in accordance with
building code as specified in Sub-Section 10.01410.
d. PerForm design in accordance with soil characteristics and design
recommendations contained in a written.geotechnical report issued and
signed by a geotechnical engineer hired by the CONTRACTOR.
Geotechnical engineer shall be registered in the state where the Project is
located:
1) Make copy of geotechnical report available at project site for
ENGINEER's review.
2) Retain and pay for geotechnical engineer's services.
3) Obtain report based on soil samples, field and laboratory tests, and
borings performed for the geotechnical report for the design of
stability of excavations by the geotechnical engineer hired by
CONTRACTOR.
e. When electing to design with material stresses for temporary construction
higher than allowable stresses prescribed in the AISC Steel Construction
Manual and the building code as specified in Sub-Section 10.01410,
increase in such stresses shall not exceed 10 percent of value of
prescribed stresses.
f.� Minimum safety factor used for design shall not be less than 1.5.
g. The calculated minimum depth of penetration of shoring below the bottom
of the excavation shall be increased not less than 30 percent if the full
value of passive pressure is used in the design.
h. The maximum height of cantilever shoring above the bottom of excavation
shall not exceed 15 feet_
1) Use braced shoring when the height of shoring above the bottom of
excavation exceeds 15 feet.
i. The location of the point of fixity for shoring shall not be less than half the
calculated minimum embedment depth below the bottom of the
excavation.
j. Generally acceptable references for the design of shoring and
excavations are as follows:
1) Caltrans Califomia Trenching and Shoring Manual_
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.02260-2 8235A10
pw:\1CarollolDocumentslClientlWAlRenton18235A101Specifica6ons110.02260.docx
�
'`I
�
L�
,
��
�
�
L�
,
�
��
�
2) NAVFAC Design Manuai 7.2.
3) NAVFAC Design Manual 7.3.
4) USS Steel Sheet Piling Design Manual_
5) ASCE Guidelines of Engineering Practice for Braced and Tied-Back
Excavations.
k. The maximum total deflection at any point on the shoring shall not be
more than 3/4 inch.
I. The shoring design firm shall obtain errors and omissions insurance for
the Project for an amount of not less than 100 000 dollars.
Soldier piles and lagging:
a. Provide lagging over the full face of the excavation. Joints between pieces
of lagging shall be tight to prevent loss of soil.
b. Provide full face lagging all around penetrations through the lagging.
c_ If the soldier piles are installed in predrilled holes, the predrilled holes
shall be filled with control density backfill after the soldiers piles are
installed.
d_ The effective width of driven soldier piles for passive soil resistance shall
not exceed 2 times the width of the pile.
1) The effective width of concrete encased soldier piles for passive soil
resistance shall not exceed 2 times the width of the concrete
encasement.
e. Fill voids behind lagging with gravel or other material acceptable to the
ENGINEER.
f_ Apply loads from tie back soil, rock, or deadman anchors concentrically to
soldier piles or wales spanning between soldier piles_
1) Wales shall be back-to-back double channels or other members
acceptable to the ENGINEER.
2) Eccentrically loaded with section soldier piles or wales are not
acceptable.
g. Design soldier piles for downward loads including vertical loads from tie
back anchors.
Soil anchors, rock anchors, and deadmen anchors:
a. Design tie back anchors for a safety factor of not less than 2 times the
calculated load from the shoring.
b. Proof load all production anchors to not less than 150 percent of the
calculated load from the shoring.
1) Lock off anchors at the calculated anchor load.
c. The length of soil anchors used to calculate resistance to load from the
shoring shall not include any length within the potential active pressure
soil failure zone behind the face of shoring_ .
d_ Design tie rods for anchors for 130 percent of the calculated load from the
shoring_
e. Design tie rods for anchors for 150 percent of the calculated load from the
shoring when tie rod couplers are used and for other conditions where
stress concentrations can develop_
�
�
�
�
�
,
j
�
C. Performance requirements:
1. General:
a_ Support faces of excavations and protect structures and improvements in
vicinity of excavations from damage and loss of function due to settlement
or movement of soils, alterations in ground water level caused by such
- excavations, and related operations_
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.02260-3 8235A10
1 pw 11CarollolDocumentslClientlWAlRenton18235A101Spedfications110 02260 doc�c
!
2
�
4.
5
b. Specified provisions:
1) Complement, but do not substitute or diminish, obligations of
CONTRACTOR for the furnishing of a safe place of work pursuant to
provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 and its
subsequent amendments and regulations and for protection of the
Work, structures, and other improvements.
2) Represent minimum requirement for:
a) Number and types of ineans needed to maintain soil stability.
b) Strength of such required means_
c) Methods and frequency of maintenance and observation of
means used for maintaining soil stability.
Provide safe and stable excavations by means of sheeting, shoring, bracing,
sloping, and other means and procedures, such as draining and recharging
graundwater and routing and disposing of surface runoff, required to maintain
the stability of soils and rock_
Provide support for trench excavations for protection of workers from hazard of
caving ground.
Provide shoring:
a. Where, as result of excavation work and analysis performed pursuant to
gerieral engineering design practice, as defined in this Sub-Section:
1) Excavated face or surrounding soil mass may be subject to slides,
caving, or other types of failures.
2) Stability and integrity of structures and other improvements may be
compromised by settlement or movement of soils, or changes in soil
load on structures and other improvements.
b. For trenches 4 feet and deeper.
c. For trenches less than 4 feet in depth, when there is a potential for cave-in.
d. Where indicated on the Drawings.
For safe and stable excavations, use appropriate design and procedures for
construction and maintenance to minimize settlement of supported ground and
to prevent damage to structures and other improvements, including:
a_ Using stiff support systems_
b. Following appropriate construction sequence.
c. Preventing soil loss through or under support system:
1) Provide support system that is tight enough to prevent loss of soil
and extend deep enough to prevent heave or flow of soils from
supported soil mass into the excavation.
d. Providing surtace runoff routing and discharge away from excavations_
e. Where dewatering is.necessary, recharge groundwater as necessary to
prevent settlement in area surrounding excavation_
f. Where sheet piling is used, use interlocking type sheets.
1) The sheet piles shall be continuous and driven in interlock.
2) If the bottom of the excavation is located below the water table, use
"thumb and finger" type interlock.
g. Not applying shoring loads to existing structures and other improvements.
h_ Not changing existing soil loading on existing structures and other
improvements.
i. Provide welded steel packing between soil retaining members such as
sheet piles and wales and similar members when the gap exceeds
1/4 inch before the wales are loaded.
i
�
�
�
t
i
��
�
�
��
L'
�
LJ
L!
�
�
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.02260-4 8235A10
pw:llCarollolDocuments\ClienflWAlRenton16235A 101Speaficabons110.02260.docx
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
fi
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings and calculations:
1. For trench excavations 4 feet or more in depth and for trenches less than
4 feet in depth when there is potential for cave-in. Submit in advance of
excavation work, detailed drawings showing means for safe and stable
excavations:
2. PerForm design pursuant to general engineering design practice.
3. For excavations other than trenches, submit, in advance of excavation work,
design calculations as perFormed pursuant to general engineering design
practice, as specified in this Sub-Section, and detail drawing showing means
for safe and stable excavations. In design calculations and detail drawing,
cover, as a minimum:
a. Excavations adjacent to structures and other improvements, and
b. Excavations 4 feet or more in depth, or less than 4 feet in depth when
there is potential for cave-in, at other locations_
4. Submit following=
a_ Provide calculations for the different load, support, and other conditions
that occur during the sequence of installation of shoring, construction af
facilities protected by the shoring, and sequence of removal of shoring.
b. Provide sketches showing the condition at various stages of installation
and removal of shoring. .
c. . Show structures, pipelines, and other improvements located near the
shoring, and the shoring on a plan_
d. When utilities penetrate the shoring, submit an elevation of all sides of the
shoring showing the locations of the penetrations.
1) Submit details on ground support and sealing around utility
penetrations.
B_ Written geotechnical report on soil characteristics and design recommendations, as
specified in this Sub-Section.
C. Control points and schedule of ineasurements:
1. Submit location and details of cantrol points and method and schedule of
measurements in accordance with requirements of this Sub-Section.
2. Promptly upon constructing control points and making measurements at such
control points, as specified in this Sub-Section, submit copy of field notes with
such measurements.
a_ The field notes shall show the current measurement and the change in
measurement from the first measurement taken.
D. Detailed sequence of installation and removal of shoring:
1. Consider effects of ground settlement in the sequence of installation and
removal of shoring.
2. Provide sketches showing the conditions at various stages in the sequence of
installaiion and removal of shoring.
E. Submit submittals for stability of excavations as a complete package and include all
items required in this Sub-Section.
1. Incomplete submittals will not be reviewed and will be returned for resubmittal
as a complete package.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.02260-5 8235A10
� pw:\ICarollolDocumentslClienftWAlF2enton�8235A10\Specifirations110.02260.dxx
�
1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Do not begin work on excavations, trenches, and means for providing stability of
excavation and trenches until submittals have been accepted by ENGINEER and
until materials necessary for installation are on site.
B. Submit submittals a minimum of 20 days prior to the scheduled date to begin
excavation work.
C. Do not begin construction of any shoring or excavation aperations until:
1. Control points as specified in thi5 Sub-Section and as indicated on the
Drawings on existing structures and other improvements have been
established and surveyed to document initial elevations and locations.
PART2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
P,RRT 3 EXEClJTION
3.01 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
A. Install means for providing safe and stable excavations as indicated in the
submittals.
B. Except for concrete encased soldier piles, slurry walls, and similar shoring systems,
remove shoring by completion of the Work.
1_ Select shonng system and method of removal, which will minimize soil that
sticks to shoring from creating large voids and causing settlement.
2. To prevent settlement caused by pulling shoring, fill voids with sand, pea
gravel, or pressure injected grout.
3_ The methods used shall prevent settlement.
4. Pressure preservative treated wood lagging may be left in place when
acceptable to the ENGINEER.
3.02 MAtNTENANCE
A. Where loss of soil occurs, plug gap in shoring and replace lost soil with fill material
acceptable to ENGINEER.
B. Where measurements and obseroations indicate possibility of failure or excessive
movement of excavation support, determined in accardance with general
engineering design practice, take appropriate action immediately.
3.03 CONTROL POINTS
A. Establish control points on shoring and on structures and other improvements in
vicinity of excavation for measurement of horizontal and vertical movement:
1. Set control points on shoring support system:
a. Set points at distances not exceeding 25 feet at each support level.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_02260-6 8235A10
pw:l\Caro11o1DocumentslClientlWAlRenton18235A101Specificafions110.07160.dooc
�
�
�
�
�
�
i
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
1
i
i
��
1
1
i
b. Support levels shall be levels of tie-backs, wales, bottom of excavation,
and other types of supports.
2. Set control points in corners of existing structures and on curbs, manholes,
and other improvements indicated on the Drawings.
B_ Provide plumb bobs with horizontal targets indicating original position of plumb bobs
in relation to shoring at control points located on shoring.
C. Perform horizontal and vertical survey and measurement of control points at least
once every week.
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.02260-7 8235A10
� pw:l\CarollolDocumentslCfientlWAlf2entont8235A101Specifica6onsN0.02260.doc�c
�
�
�
�
�
��
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.02260-8 8235A10
pw:llCarollolDocumentslClienflWAlRenton18Z35A101Specifiptionsll OA7L60.daac
�
�
i
�
�
i
�
SUB-SECTION 10.02490
PRECAST CONCRETE VAULTS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A_ Sub-Section includes: Precast concrete vaults.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Secfions are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.08320 — Access Hatches.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International {ASTM):
1. A 48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
2. C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
3. D4263 - Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the
Plastic Sheet Method.
�
�
B_ Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):
1. SP-13 — Surface Preparation of Concrete.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
� 1. Show dimensions, locations, lifting inserts, reinforcement, and joints.
2. Structural design calcufations for vaults, signed by a registered engineer.
B. Manufacturer's Certification for Vaults: Written certification that the vault complies
with the requirements of this Sub-Section.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A_ Inspection:
1. After installation, the CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate that vaults have been
properly installed, level, with tight joints, at the correct elevations and
orientations, and that the backfilling has been carried out in accordance with
the Contract Documents.
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.02490-1 8235A10
1 pw llCaro�olDoannentslClienUWAlRenton18235AtOlSpeaficaUwLsI10 Q2490
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 VAULTS
A. The CONTRACTOR shatl provide precast vaults for the size shown on the
Drawings.
B. The minimum structural member thickness for vaults shall be 5-inches. Cement
shall be Type V portland cement as specified in ASTM C 150. The minimum 28-day
concrete compressive strength shall be 4,000 psi. All reinforcing steel shall be
embedded in the concrete with a minimum clear cover as recommended by
American Concrete Institute (ACI).318.
C. Design Loading: Vaults shall be designed for H-20 traffic loading.
D: Where joints are designed in pre-cast concrete vaults, such joints shall be
interlocking to secure proper alignment between members and prevent migration of
soil through the joint. Structural sections at joints shall be sized sufficiently to
reinforce the section against localized distress during transportation and handling
and against excess contact bearing pressures through the joint.
E_ Where openings for access to the vault are required, the full clear space opening
indicated shall be provided, without obstructions from brackets or supports. For
large openings where brackets or supports are designed to protrude into the
opening for support of required covers, such brackets or supports shall be designed
to be easily removed and replaced with a minimum of effort and without cutting or
welding_
F. Floor access hatches shall be integrally cast into the vault concrete section and as
specified in Sub-Section 10.08320_
G. Where penetration of the pre-cast concrete vault are required for piping, conduit, or
ducts, such penetrations shall be accommodated through pre-cast openings or thin-
wall knock-out sections. All openings for penetrations shall be smooth and free of
surface irregularities and without exposed steel reinforcing. Vaults need not be
designed to resist thrust from piping passing through the vault. Coordinate pipe
penetration locations with piping arrangement as stiown on the Drawings.
H. Slope bottom of vault to Recessed Sump as indicated on the drawings.
Recessed Sump: Inside dimensions as indicated on the Drawings.
1. Provide FRP grating with rebate as indicated on the Drawings. Grating shall be
designed for 300 pounds per square foot load with U200 maximum deflection.
J. Ladders_
1. General:
a_ Type: Safety type conforming to local, State; and OSHA standards as
minimum. Furnish guards for ladder wells.
b_ Size: 18 inches wide between side rails of length, size, shape, detail, and
location indicated on the Drawings.
2. Aluminum ladders:
a_ Materials: 6063-T5 aluminum alloy.
b_ Rungs:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_02490-2 8235A10
pwJlCarollolDocuments�ClienNWAlRentod8235A t O/Specificabonslt 0.02490
�
�
i
�
�
�
�
�
�
1
I.
1) 1-inch minimum solid square bar with 1/8-inch grooves in top and
deeply serrated on all sides.
2) Capable of withstanding 1,000 pound load without failure_
c. Side rails: Minimum 4-inch by 1/2-inch flat bars.
d. Fabrication_
1) Welded construction, of size, shape, location, and details indicated
on the Drawings.
K. Vault Manufacturers, or Equal:
1. Utility Vault Company.
2.02 COATINGS
A_ Interior coating of vault:
1. Apply to interior structure concrete surfaces: walls, ceilings, floor slabs, and
recessed sump.
2. Surtace Preparation: Allow new concrete to cure for 28 days or until passing
the ASTM D4263 Plastic Mat test. Surface shall be clean, dry, and free of
contaminants.
3. Primer: Tnemec Series N69F Hi-Buitd Epoxiline applied at 4.0 to 6.0 mils dry
film thickness.
4. Finish: Tnemec Series N69F Hi-Build Epoxiline applied at 4.0 to 6.0 mils dry
film thickness. Color shall be white.
B. Exterior coating of vault:
1. Surface Preparation: Allow new concrete to cure for 28 days or until passing
the ASTM D4263 Plastic Mat test. SSPC SP 13 to meet ICRI CSPS surface
profile all surfaces to be coated. Surface shall be clean, dry, and free of
contaminants.
2. Tnemec Series 141 PotaPox applied at 16.0 mils dry film thickness.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Pre-cast concrete sections shall be transported and handled with care in
accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations. Where lifting devices
are provided in pre-cast sections, such lifting devices shall be used as intended.
Where no lifting devices are provided, the CONTRACTOR shall follow the
manufacturer's recommendations for lifting procedures to provide proper support
during lifting.
B. Buried pre-cast concrete vaults shall be assembled and placed in excavations on
properly compacted soil foundations as indicated. Pre-cast concrete vaults shall be
set to grade and oriented to provide the required dimensions and clearances from
pipes and other structures.
C. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Ladders:
1. Secure to supporting surface with bent plate clips providing minimum 8 inches
between supporting surface and center of rungs.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.02490-3 8235A10
� pwJ/CarollolDocuments/ClienUWAlRenton18235A1015pecifications110.02490
2. Anchorage by manufacturer.
3. Where exit from ladder is forward over top rung, extend side rails 3 feet
3 inches minimum above landing, and return the rails with a radius bend to the
landing.
4_ Where exit from ladder is to side, extend ladder 5 feet 6 inches minimum
above landing and rigidly secure at top.
5_ Erect rail straight, level, plumb, and true to position indicated on the Drawings.
Correct deviafions from tnae line or grade which are visible to the eye.
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.02490-4
pwJlCarollolDocumenNs�Clien W VAIRenton/8235A t OlSpedficationsl10.02490
�
8235A10
�
SUB-SECTION 10.03055
EPDXY BONDING ALL THREAD RODS IN CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Bonding all thread rods in concrete using epoxy adhesive.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work af subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or fumishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.01410 - Regulatory Requirements.
b. Sub-Section 10.05120 - Structural Steel.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
i1. Standard B212.15 - Carbide Tipped Masonry Drills and Blanks for Carbide
Tipped Masonry Drills_
�
�
��
B. ASTM intemational (ASTM):
1. C 881 - Standard Specificafion for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for
Concrete.
C. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICGES):
1. AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Instalted Adhesive Anchors in Concrete
Elements.
D. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):
1. Surface Preparation Standards (SP):
a. SP-1 - Solvent Cleaning.
,�
�
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data_ Furnish technical data for epoxy adhesives, including:
1. Installation instructions.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03055-1 8235A10
� pw:l/CarollolDocumentsJClienUWAlRenton18235A10/Specifications110.03055
2. Independent laboratory test resuits.
3. Handling and storage instructions.
B. Quality control submittals:
1. Epoxy manufacturer's past project experience data on at least 3 similar
projects supplied with proposed products within the last 3 years.
2. Special inspection: Provide detailed step-by-step instructions for the special
inspection procedure in accordance with the building code as specified in Sub-
Section 10.01410. .
3. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc., Evaluation Services Report in compliance with
the AC308-Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in
Concrete Elements_
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HAPIDLING
A. Storage and Protection:
1. Store epoxy components on pallets or shelving in a covered-storage area.
2. Control temperature above 60 degrees Fahrenheit and dispose of product if
shelf life has expired.
3. If stored at temperatures below 60 degrees Fahrenheit, test components prior
to use to determine if they still meet specified requirements.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Seismic design category: D.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Like items of materials: Use end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve
structural compatibility and singular responsibility.
2.02 EPDXY ADHESIVE FOR SELF-CONTAINED CARTRIDGE SYSTEM
A. Epoxy adhesive shall have a current ICC Evaluation Service report documenting
acceptance under AC308 for use with cracked concrete and for the seismic design
categories specified.
B. Materials
1. In accordance with ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, Class B or C depending
on site conditions.
2. 2-component, 100 percent solids, insensitive to moisture, and gray in color.
3. Cure temperature, pot life, and workability: Compatible with intended use and
environmental conditions.
C. Packaging.
1. Fumished in side-by-side cartridges with resin and hardener components
isolated until mixing through manufactu�er's static mixing nozzle. Nozzle
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03055-2 8235A10
pw:/lCarollo/Documents/ClienUWA/Rentonl8235A 10/Specifipbonsl10.03055
�
�
designed to thoroughly biend the components for injection from the nozzle
� directly into prepared hole.
2. Container markings: Include manufacturer's name, product name, batch
number, mix ratio by volume, product expiration date, ANSI hazard
iclassification, and appropriate ANSI handling precautions.
D. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
� 1. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK: RE 500-SD .
2. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc., Pleasanton, CA: SET-XP.
� 2.03 ALL THREAD RODS
A. Materials: As specified in Sub-Section 10.05120.
�
�
i
�
�
�
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Provide Epoxy Adhesive Packaged as Follows:
1. Disposable, self-contained cartridge system capable of dispensing both epoxy
components in the proper mixing ratio, and it into a manually or pneumatically
operated caulking gun.
2. Dispense components through a mixing nozzle that thoroughly mixes
components.
3.02 HOLE SIZING AND INSTALLATION
A. Drilling holes:
1_ Determine location of reinforcing bars or other obstructions with a non-
destructive indicator device, and mark locations with construction crayon on
the surface of the concrete_
2. Do not damage or cut existing reinforcing bars, electrical conduits, or other
items embedded in the existing concrete without acceptance by ENGINEER.
B. Hole drilling equipment:
1. Electric or pneumatic rotary impact type with medium or light impact.
2. Drill bits: Carbide-tipped in accordance with ANSI B212-15 unless otherwise
recommended by the manufacturer or required as a°condition of use" in the
ICC Evaluation Report submitted.
3. Hollow drill bits with flushing air systems are preferred. Air supplied to hollow
drill bits shall be free of oil, water, or other contaminants that will reduce bond.
4. Where edge distances are less than 2 inches, use lighter impact equipment to
prevent microcracking and concrete spalling during drilling process.
C_ Hole diameter: Reinforcing bar diameter or all thread rad diameter plus 1/8 inch.
D. Obstructions in drill path:
1. If an existing reinforcing bar or other obstruction is hit while drilling hole, stop
drilling hole and fill the hole with drypack mortar. Relocate the hole to miss the
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03055-3 8235A10
� pwl/CarollolDocumentslGienWVA/RentoN8235A1015pedfications/10.03055
2
3.
4
obstruction and drill another hole. Repeat the above untii the hole has been
drilled to the required depth.
Avoid drilling an excessive number of holes in an area of a structural member,
which would excessively weaken the structural member and endanger the
stability of the structure. Drypack holes which hit obstructions and allow
drypack to reach strength equal to the existing concrete before drilling
adjacent holes. Epoxy grout may be substituted for drypack when acceptable
to ENGINEER.
When existing reinforcing steel is encountered during drilling and when
acceptable to ENGINEER, enlarge the hole by 1/8 inch, core through the
existing reinforcing steel at the larger diameter, and resume drilling at original
hole diameter_
Bent bar reinforcing bars: Where edge distances are critical, and striking
reinforcing steel is likely, and if acceptable to ENGINEER, drill hole at
10 degree angle or less from axis of reinforcing bar or all thread rod being
installed.
E. Install all thread rods to depth, spacings, and locations as indicated on the
Drawings.
1_ Do not install epoxy bonded all-thread rods in overhead applications.
F. Cleaning holes:
1. Insert long air nozzle into hole and blow out loose dust_ Use compressed air
that is free of oil, water, or other contaminants that will reduce bond.
2. Use a stiff bristle brush to vigorously brush hote to dislodge compacted drilling
dust.
3. Repeat step 1.
4_ Repeat above steps as required to remove drilling dust or other material that
will reduce bond. The hole shall be clean and dry.
G. Cleaning reinforcing bars and all thread rods:
1. Solvent clean reinforcing bar and all thread rods over the embedment length in
accordance with SSPC SP-1 Solvent Cleaning. Provide an oil and grease free
surface to promote bonding of adhesive to steel.
2. Clean reinforcing bars and all thread rods over embedment length to bare
metal. The reinforcing bars and all thread rods shall be free of oil, grease,
paint, dirt, mi11 scale, rust, or other coatings that will reduce bond.
H. Filling hole with epoxy
1. Fill hole with epoxy before inserting the reinforcing bar or all thread rod. Fill
hole with epoxy starting from bottom of hole. Fill hole without creating air
voids.
2. Fill hole with sufficient epoxy so that excess epoxy is extruded out of the hole
when the reinforcing bar or all thread rod is inserted into the hole.
3_ Do not install epoxy prior to receiving epoxy manufacturer's onsite training_
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03055-4 8235A10
pw://Ca rollo/DocumenLslGienUWAlRenton/8235At O/Specificationsl10.03055
3.03 MAPIUFACTURERS' SERVICES
A. Furnish manufacturer's representative to conduct jobsite training for proper
installation, handling, and storage of epoxy, for personnel who will perform actual
installation_ ENGINEER may attend training sessions.
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03055-5 8235A10
� pw:l/CarollolQ�ntslClient/WAlRenton18235A10/Specifications110.03055
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03055-6 8235A10
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienUWAlRentonl8235A 10/Specifica6ons110.03055
�
1
SUB-SECTION 10.03071
EPDXIES
�
�
�
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A_ Sub-Section Includes:
1. Epoxy.
2. Epoxy gei.
3. Epoxy bonding agent.
B_ Related Sub-Sections:
1. Sub-Section 10_03072 - Epoxy Resin - Portland Cement Bonding Agent.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
� 1. D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
2. D 695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics.
3. D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and
;� Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
��
'
�
��
�
�
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements:
1. Provide epoxy materials that are new and use them within shelf life limitations
set forth by manufacturer.
2. Perform and conduct work of this Sub-Section in neat orderly manner.
1.04 SUBMfTTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data completely describing epoxy materials.
B. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Manufacturer's installation instrE.ictions_
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.Q1 MATERIALS
A. Epoxy: Water-insensitive 2-part type low viscosity epoxy adhesive material
containing 100 percent solids and meeting or exceeding following characteristics
when tested in accordance with standards specified: Manufacturers: One of the
following or equal:
1. BASF, MBT, Concresive0 Standard LVI.
October 26, 2010 — FINAL 10.03071-1 8235A10
� pw:!/Carollo/DoamentslClienUWA/Renton/8235A1 �lSpecificationsl10.03071
l
2_ Sika Chemical Corp., Sikadur 35 Hi-Mod LV.
Physical Test Required Resuits
Characteristic Method
Tensile Strength ASTM D 638 8,000 pounds per square inch minimum
at 14 days and 77 degrees Fahrenheit
cure.
Flexure Strength ASTM D 790 11,000 pounds per square inch minimum
at 14 days and 77 degrees Fahrenheit
cure.
Compressive ASTM D 695 16,000 pounds per square inch minimum
Strength at 24 hours and 77 degrees Fahrenheit
cure_
Bond Strength -- Concrete shall fail before failure of epoxy.
Gel Time for 5 Mil -- Four hours maximum at 77 degrees
Film Fahrenheit.
Elongation ASTM D 638 1 percent minimum at 14 days and
77 degrees Fahrenheit.
B. Epoxy Gel: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Sika Chemical Corp., Sikadur 31, Hi-Mod Gel.
C. Epoxy Bonding Agent: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. BASF, MBT, Concresive0 Liquid LPL.
2. Sika Chemical Corp., Sikadur 32, Hi-Mod LPL_
3. If increased tack time is required for concrete placement, epoxy resin -
portland cement bonding agent as specified in Sub-Section 10.03072 may be
used instead of epoxy bonding agent.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATIOPI
A. Install and cure epoxy materials in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions. .
B. Epoxy:
1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
C. Epoxy Gel:
1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions_
2. Use for vertical or overhead work, or where high viscosity epoxy is required.
3. Epoxy gel used for vertical or overhead work may be used for horizontal work.
D. Epoxy Bonding Agent:
1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
�
�
�
�
October 26, 2010 — FINAL 10.03071-2 8235A10
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientlWAlRentonl8235A 10ISpecifications110.03071
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
�-
�
r
�
�:
�
�
2. Bonding agent will not be required for filling form tie holes or for normal
finishing and patching of similar sized small defects.
END OF SUB-SECTION
�
October 26, 2010 — FINAL 10.03071-3
pw:!lCarollolDocumentsJClientlWfVRentoN8235A t O/5pecifica6onsl t 0.03071
8235A10
October 26, 2010 — FiNAL 10.03071-4 8235A10
pwJ/Carollo/Documents/ClienUWAlRenton18235A 10lSpecificaUonsl10.03071
�
�
'
�
,�
�
�
�
�
SUB-SECTION 10.03072
EPDXY RESIN/PORTLAND CEMENT BONDING AGENT
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Sub-Section includes: Epoxy resin/portland cement bonding agent.
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. C 109 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars (Using 2-in. or [50-mm] Cube Specimens).
2_ C 348 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic-Cement
Mortars.
3. C 496 - Standard Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens.
4. C 882 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems
Used With Concrete By Slant Shear.
B. Federal Highway Administration (FHWA):
1. FHWA-RD-86-193 - Highway Concrete Pavement Technology Development
and Testing Volume V: Field Evaluation of SHRP C9206 Test Sites (Bridge
Deck Overlays).
� PART 2 PRODUCTS
�
�
�
�
,
�
2.01 MAPIUFACTURERS
A_ Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, New Jersey, Sika Armatec 110.
B. Substitutions: The use of other than the specified product will be considered,
providing the CONTRACTOR requests its use in writing to the ENGINEER. This
request shall be accompanied by:
1_ A certificate of compliance from an approved independent testing laboratory
that the proposed substitute product meets or exceeds specified performance
criteria, tested in accordance with the specified test standards.
2. Dacumented proof that the proposed substitute product has a 1-year proved
record of performance of bonding portland cement mortar/concrete to
hardened partland cement mortarJconcrete, confirmed by actual field tests and
5 successful installations that the ENGINEER can investigate.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03072-1 8235A10
1 pwl/Carollo/DowmentslClienWVAlRenton/8235A10/Specificationsll0 Q3072
�
1. Component "A" shall be an epoxy resin/water emulsion containing suitable
viscosity control agents. It shall not contain butyl glyadyl ether.
2. Component "B" shall be primarily a water solution of a polyamine.
3_ Component "C" shall be a blend of selected portland cements and sands.
4. The material shall not contain asbestos.
2.03 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Prope�ties of the mixed epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive_
1. Pot life: 75 to 105 minutes.
2. Contact time: 24 hours_
3. . Color Dark gray.
B. Properties of the cured epoxy resiNportland cement adhesive:
1. Compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C 109:
a. 1 day. 810 pounds per square-inch minimum.
b. 7 days: 6,000 pounds per square-inch minimum_ •
c_ 28 days: 8,000 pounds per square-inch minimum.
2. Splitting tensile strength in accordance with ASTM C 496:
a. 28 days: 540 pounds per square-inch minimum.
3. Flexural strength:
a. 1,100 pounds per square-inch minimum in accordance with ASTM C 348_
4_ Bond strength in accordance with ASTM C 882 modified at 14 days:
a. 0 hours open time: 1,900 pounds per square-inch minimum.
b. 24 hours open time: 1,500 pounds per square-inch minimum.
5. The epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive shall not produce a vapor barrier.
6. Material must be proven to prevent corrosion of reinforcing steel when tested
under the procedures as set forth by the FHWA Program Report Number
FHWA/RD86/193. Proof shall be in the form of an independent testing
laboratory corrosion report showing prevention of coRosion of the reinforcing
steel_
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Mixing the epoxy resin: Shake contents of Component "A" and Component "B."
Empty afl of both components into a clean, dry, mixing pail_ Mix thoroughly for
30 seconds with a jiffy paddle on a low-speed with 400 to 600 revolutions per
minute drill_ Slowly add the entire contents of Component "C" while continuing to
mix for a minimum of 3 minutes and until uniform with no lumps. Mix only that
quantity that can be applied within its pot life.
B. Placement procedure:
1. Apply to prepared surface with stiff-bristle brush, broom, or "hopper type"
spray equipment:
a. For hand applications: Place fresh, plastic concrete/mortar while the
bonding bridge adhesive is wet or dry, up to 24 hours.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_03072-2 8235A10
pw:l/Carollo/DocumentslClienU4VAlRentoN8235A10fSpeafications/10 03072
�
'
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
,�
�
�
�
�
l__!
b. For machine applications: Allow the bonding bridge adhesive to dry for
12 hours minimum.
C. Adhere to all limitations and cautions for the epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive
in the manufacturer's current printed literature.
3.02 CLEANING
A. Leave finished work and work area in a neat, clean condition without evidence of
spillovers onto adjacent areas_
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.Q3072-3 8235A10
pwllCarollo/DocumentslClien WJAlRenton/8235A 10/Specificalionsl10.03072
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03072-4 8235A10
pw:llCarollolDocumentsJClienUYJAlRenton18235A t 0lSpecifications110.03072
�
'
�
�
.�
�
�
�
Li
,
,
�
�
�
�
;'
'
�
,
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
1
�
�
�J
SUB-SECTION 10.03102
CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Concrete formwork_
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is calied for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or fumishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3_ The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
� Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
b. Sub-Section 10.0360Q - Grouts.
1.02 REFERENCES
A_ American Concrete institute (ACI):
1. 117 - Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials
and Commentary.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A 82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement.
2. A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
3. A 167 - Standard Specification far Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium-
Nickel Steel Plant, Sheet, and Strip.
4. A 580 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire.
C. NSF International (NSF): .
1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
' A. Design requirements:
1. Design of concrete forms,'falsework, and shoring in accordance with local,
state, and federal regulations.
'
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03102-1 8235A10
' pw:!/CarollolDocumentslC�ienVWAlF2enton18235A10/Specificauons/10.03102
�
2. Design forms and ties to withstand concrete. pressures without bulging,
spreading, or lifting of forms.
B. Performance requirements:
1. Construct forms so that finished concrete conforms to shapes, lines, grades,
and dimensions indicated on the Drawings.
2. It is intended that surface of concrete after stripping presents smooth, hard,
and dense finish that requires minimum amount of finishing.
3. Provide sufficient number of forms so that the work may be performed rapidly
and present uniform appearance in form patterns and finish.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Information on the CONTRACTOR's proposed forming system: Submit in such
detail as the ENGINEER may require to assure himseff that intent of the
Specifications can be complied with by use of proposed system_
B. Altemate combinations of plywood thickness and stud spacing: May be submitted.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of formwork manufacturers: Use only forming systems manufactured
by manufacturers having minimum 5 years experience, except as otherwise
specified, or accepted in writing by the ENGINEER.
B. Regulatory requirements: Install woric of this Sub-Section in accordance with local,
state, and federal regulations.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Requirements due to weather condition:
1. Removal of formwork: Do not remove forms from concrete which has been
placed when outside ambient air temperature is below 50 degrees Fahrenheit
until concrete has attained specified strength as determined by test cylinders
stored in field under equivalent conditions as concrete structure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 IVIANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Form 6es:
1. General:
a. Provide form ties for forming system selected that are manufactured by
recagnized manufacturer of concrete forming equipment.
b. Do not use wire ties or wood spreaders of any form.
c. Provide ties of type that accurately tie, lock, and spread forms.
d. Provide form ties of such design that when forms are removed, they
locate no metal or other material within 1-112 inches of the surface of the
concrete.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03102-2 8235A10
pw:!lCarollolDocumentslClienVWAlf2enton18235A101S pecfica 6ons�10.63102
'
lJ
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
.�
�
LJ
'
�
'
1
,
l__J
�
�
t
1
'
�
'
'
'
'
'
�
.'
�
'
�
'
��
e. Do not allow holes in forms for ties to allow leakage during piacement of
concrete.
2. Cone-snap ties:
a. Cone-snap ties shall form a cone shaped depression in the concrete with
a minimum diameter of 1 inch at the surface of the concrete and
1-1/2 inches deep.
b. Provide neoprene waterseal washer that is located near the center of the
concrete.
3. Taper ties:
a. Neoprene plugs for taper tie holes: Size so that after they are driven,
plugs are located in center third of wall thickeners.
b. Dry-pack mortar for filling taper tie holes:
1) Consist of mix of 1 part of portland cement to 1 part of plaster sand.
2) Amount of water to be added to cement-sand mix is to be such that
mortar can be driven into holes and be properly compacted.
3) Admixtures or additives: Are not to be used in dry-pack mortar_
B. Built-up plywood forms:
1. Built-up plywood forms may be substituted for prefabricated forming system
subject to following minimum requirements:
a. Size and material:
1} Full size 4-by 8-foot plywood sheets, except where smaller pieces
are able to cover entire area.
2) Sheet construction: 5-ply plywood sheets, 3/4-inch nominal, made
with 100 percent waterproof adhesive, and having finish surface that
is coated or overlaid with surface which is impervious to water and
alkaline calcium and sodium hydroxide of cement.
b. Wales: Minimum 2-by 4-inch lumber.
c. Studding and wales: Contain no loose knots and be free of warps, cups,
and bows.
C. Steel or steel framed forms:
1. Steel forms: Provide forms that are:
a_ Rigidly constructed and capable of being braced for minimum deflection of
finish surface.
b. Capable of providing finish surfaces that are flat without bows, cups, or
dents.
2. Steel framed plywood forms:
a. Provide forms that are rigidly constructed and capable of being braced.
b. Plywood paneling: 5-ply, 5/8-inch nominal or 3/4-inch nominal, made with
100 percent waterproof adhesive, and having finish surFace that is coated
or overlaid with surface which is impervious to water and alkaline calcium
and sodium hydroxide of cement.
D. Incidentals:
1. External angles:
a. Where not otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide with 3/4-inch
bevel, formed by utilizing true dimensioned wood or solid plastic chamfer
strip on walkways, slabs, wa(Is, beams, columns, and openings.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03102-3 8235A10
' pwl/CarollofDocuments�ClientlWAlRenton18235A10/5peci%cationst10.03102
�
b. Provide 1/4-inch bevel formed by utilizing tnae dimensioned wood or solid
plastic chamfer strip on walkways, walls, and slabs at expansion, and
construction joints.
2. Keyways: Steel, plastic, or lumber treated with form coating, applied according
to label directions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Site verification of conditions:
1. Do not place any concrete until all forms have been thoroughly checked for
alignment, level, strength, and to assure accurate location of all mechanical
and elec#rical inserts or other embedded items.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Forms and accessories:
1. Vertical forms: -
a. Remain in place minimum of 24 hours after concrete is placed.
b. If, after 24 hours, concrete has sufficient strength and hardness to resist
surface or other damage, forms may be removed. ,
2. Other forms supporting concrete and shonng: Remain in place as follows:
a_ Sides of footings: 24 hours minimum.
b_ Vertical sides of beams, girders, and simitar members: 48 hours minimum.
c. Slabs, beams, and girders: Until concrete strength reaches specified
strength �� or until shoring is installed_
d. Shoring for slabs, beams, and girders: Shore until concrete strength
reaches specified strength_
e. Wall bracing: Brace walls until concrete strength of beams and slabs
laterally supporting wall reaches specified strength.
3. Green concrete: .
a_ No heavy foading on green concrete will be permitted.
b. Green concrete is defined as concrete with less than 100 percent of
specified strength f �.
4. Immediately after forms are removed, carefully examine concrete surfaces,
and repair any irregularities in surFaces and finishes as specified in Sub-
Section 10.03300.
B. Form ties:
1. Cone-snap fies: Tie forms together at not more than 2-foot centers vertically
and horizontally_ After forms are removed from wall, fill tie holes as follows:
a. Remove form ties from surfaces.
b_ Roughen cone shaped tie holes by heavy sandblasting before repair.
c. Dry pack cone shaped tie holes with dry-pack mortar as specified in Sub-
Section 10.03600.
2. Taper ties:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_03102-4 8235A10
pwllCarollolDocumenislGienUWAlRentonB235A 10lSpedfications/t 0.03102
'
'
1
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
�
'
�
,
'
'
�
�
'
'
'
'
�-,
'
'
'
'
'
'
,
'
,
'
'
'
�l
a. After forms and taper ties are removed from wall, plug tie holes with
neoprene plug as follows:
1) Heavy sandblast and then ciean tie holes.
2) After cleaning, drive neoprene plug into each of taper tie holes with
steel rod. Final location of neoprene plug shall be in center third of
wall thickness. Bond neoprene plug to concrete with epoxy.
3) Locate steel rod in cylindrical recess, made in plug; during driving.
a) At no time are plugs to be driven on flat area outside cylindrical
recess.
b. Dry-pack of taper tie holes: After installing plugs in tie holes:
1) Coat tie hole surface with epoxy bonding agent and fill with dry-pack
mortar as specified in Sub-Section 10.03600_
a) Dry-pack mortar: Place in holes in layers with thickness not
exceeding tie hole diameter and heavily compact each layer.
b) Dry-pack the outside of the hole no sooner than 7 days after the
inside of the hole has been dry packed.
c) Wall surfaces in area of dry-packed tie holes: On the water side
of water containing structures and the outside of below grade
walls:
(1) Cover with minimum of 10 mils of epoxy gel.
(2) Provide epoxy gel coating on wall surfaces that extend
minimum of 2.inches past dry-pack mortar filled tie holes.
(3) Provide finish surfaces that are free from sand streaks or
other voids.
C. Built-up plywood forms:
1. Studding:
a. Spaced at 16 inches or 24 inches on center.
b. Closer spacing may be required depending upon strength requirements of
the forms, in order to prevent any bulging surfaces on faces of finished
concrete work.
c_ Install studs perpendicular to grain of exterior plys of plywood sheets.
2. Wales: Form wales of double lumber material with minimum size as specified
in this Sub-Section.
3. Number of form reuses: Depends upon durability of surface coating or overlay
used, and ability to maintain forms in condition such that they are capable of
producing flat, smooth, hard, dense finish on concrete when stripped.
D. Steel or steel framed forms:
1. Steel forms:
a_ Adequately brace forms for minimum deflection of finish surface.
2. Steel framed plywood forms:
a. Rigidly construct and brace with joints fitting closely and smoothly.
b_ Number of form reuses: Depends upon durability of surface coating or
overlay used.
3. Built-up plywood forms: As specified in this Sub-Section may be used in
conjunction with steel forms or steel framed plywood forms for special forming
conditions such as corbels and forming around items which will project through
forms_
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03102-5 8235A10
' pw:/lCarollo/DocumentslClienUWAlf2enton18235A10/Specifica6onsl10 03102
E. Bracing and alignment of forms:
1. Line and grade: Limit deviations.to tolerances which will permit proper
installation of structural embedded items or mechanical and e{ectrical
equipment and piping.
2. Formwork:
a. Securely brace, support, tie down, or otherwise hold in place to prevent
any movement.
b. Make adequate provisions for uplift pressure, lateral pressure on forms,
and deflection of forms.
3. When second lift is placed on hardened concrete: Take special precautions in
form work at top of old lift and bottom of new lift to prevent:
a. Spreading and vertical or horizontal displacement of forms_
b. Grout "bleeding" on finish concrete surfaces.
4. Pipe stubs, anchor bolts, and other embedded items: Set in forms where
required.
5. Cracks, openings, or offsets at joints in formwork: Close those that are
1/16-inch or larger by tightening forms or by filling with acceptable crack filler.
F. Incidentals: �
1. Keyways: Construct keyways as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Reentrant angles: May be left square.
3. Level strips: Install level strips at top of wall concrete placements to maintain
true line at horizontal construction joints.
4. Inserts:
a. Encase pipes, anchor bolts, steps, reglets, castings, and other inserts, as
indicated on the Drawings or as required, in concrete.
b. Use dovetail anchors in conjunction with slots as specified in this Sub-
Section and as may be necessary for required work_
3.03 CONSTRUCTION
A. Tolerances:
1. Finish concrete shall conform to shapes, lines, grades, and dimensions
indicated on the Drawings.
2. The maximum deviation from true line and grade shall not exceed tolerances
listed below at time of acceptance of project.
3. General: In accordance with ACI 117, paragraphs 2.1 through 2.2 and
paragraphs 4.0 through 4.6, except as modified in following:
a. Slabs:
1) Slope: Uniformly sloped to drain when slope is indicated on the
Drawings.
2) Slabs indicated to be level: Have maximum deviation of 1/8-inch in
10 feet without any apparent changes in grade.
b. On circular tank wafls: The CONTRACTOR may deviate from finish line
indicated on the Drawings by use of forms with chord lengths not to
exceed 2 feet.
c. Inserts: Set inserts to tolerances required for proper installation and
operation of equipment or systems to which insert pertains_
d. Maximum tolerances: As follows:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03102-6 . 8235A10
pw //CarollolDocuments/ClientlWAlFtenton(8235At OlSpecfica6ons/10.03102
ii
�
'
'
'
u
'
,
'
'
'
'
'
,:.
�J
'
'
,
�
item Tolerance
Sleeves and Inserts Plus 1/8 Minus 1/8 inches
Projected Ends of Anchor Bolts Plus 1/4 Minus 0.0 inches
Anchor Bolt Setting Plus 1/16 IVlinus 1/16 inches
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 27, 2010 - FINAL 10.03102-7 8235A10
� pw://CarolblDocuments�ClienWVAlRenton18235A10lSpecifica6onsf10.03102
'
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03102-8 8235A10
pwl/CarollolDocumentslClienilWA/Renton/8235A t 01Specficationsl10.03102
,
,
'
'
1
�
�
'
,
1
'
'
'
u
'
�
L�
II
�
�
,
��
'
�
PART1 GENERAL
SUB=SECTION 10.03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
I1.01 SUMMARY
'
(
J
'
'
'
�
'
�
'
�
�
�
�
A. Sub-Section includes: Cast-in-piace concrete.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all. �
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Vllork described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
1.02 REFERENCES
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.03071 - Epoxies.
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
1. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Cancrete and Commentary.
2_ 350 - Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures
and Commentary.
3. Manual of Concrete Practice.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. C 31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
the Field.
2. C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
3. C 39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens_
4. C 40 - Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for
Concrete.
5. C 42 - Standard Test Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and
Sawed Beams of Concrete.
6. C 88 - Standard Test Method of Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium
Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate_
7. C 94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
8. C 114 - Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement.
9. C 117 - Standard Test Method for Materials Finer that 75-m (No. 200) Sieve in
Mineral Aggregates by Washing.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-1 8235A10
� pw:/1Carollo/DocumentsiClienNNAlRentonl8235A10lSpecificationsl10.03300
'
10. C 123 - Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate.
11. C 131 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Sma1l-Size
Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
12. C 136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates.
13. C 142 = Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in
Aggregate.
14. C 143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete.
15. C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement_
16_ C 156 - Standard Test Method.for Water Loss [from a Mortar SpecimenJ
Through Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compounds for Concrete.
17. C 157 - Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic-
Cement Mortar and Concrete.
18. C 171 - Standard Specifications for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete_
19_ C 172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
20. C 173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by
the Volumetric Method.
21 _ C 260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
22. C 289 - Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of
Aggregates (Chemical Method).
23. C 295 - Standard Guide to Petrographic Examination of Aggregates for
Concrete.
24. C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for
Curing Concrete.
25. C 311 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Fly Ash ar Natural
Pozzolans for Use in Portland-Cement Concrete.
26. C 494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
27. C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use in Concrete.
28. D 75 - Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates.
29. D 2103 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Alkali: Is defined as the sum of sodium oxide and potassium oxide calculated as
sodium oxide.
B. Cementitious materials: Defined as portland cement and pozzolan admixture.
C. Hairline crack: Crack with a crack width of less than 4 thousandths of an inch.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance requirements:
1. General:
a. Except as otherwise specified, provide concrete composed of portland
cement, fly ash, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, and water so
proportioned and mixed as to produce plastic, workable mixture in
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-2
pw:NCarol lo/Documents/ClienUWAlRentonl8235A t OlSpecfications/t 6.03300
8235A10
,
'
J
,
'
�
'
,
�
�
'
,
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
�-.
I
�
�
,
,
2.
3.
accordance with requirements as specified in this Sub-Section and
suitable to specific conditions of placement.
b. Proportion materials in a manner such that will secure lowest water-
cement ratio which is consistent with good workability, plastic, cohesive
mixture, and 1 which is within specified slump range.
c. Proportion fine and coarse aggregates in manner such as not to produce
harshness in placing or honeycombing in structures.
It is the intent of this Sub-Section to secure for every part of the Work concrete
and grout of homogeneous structure, which when hardened will have required
strength, watertightness, and durability:
a. It is recognized that some surfiace hairline cracks and crazing will develop
in the concrete surfaces.
b_ Construction and expansion joints have been specified and positioned in
structures as indicated on the Drawings, and curing methods specified, for
purpose of reducing number and size of cracks, due to normal expansion
and contraction expected from specified concrete mixes.
c. Walls or slabs, as specified above, that leak or sweat because of porosity
or cracks too small for successful pressure grouting: Seal on water or
weather side by coatings of surtace sealant system, as specified in this
Sub-Section_
d. Grouting and sealing: Continue as specifed above until structure is
watertight and remains watertight for not less than 1 year after final
acceptance or date of final repair, whichever occurs later in time.
Workmanship and methods: Provide concrete work, including detailing of
reinforcing, conforming with best standard practices and as set forth in
ACI 318, ACI 35Q, Manuals, and recommended practices.
, 1.05 SUBMITTALS
1
'
A. Product data: Submit data completely describing products.
B. Information on heating equipment to be used for cold weather concreting: Submit
information on type of equipment to be used for heating materials and/or new
concrete in process of curing during excessively cold weather.
C. For conditions that promote rapid drying of freshly placed concrete such as low
, humidity, high temperature, and wind: Submit corrective measures proposed for use
prior to placing concrete.
�
�
'
�
D. Copies of tests of concrete aggregates: Submit certified copies in triplicate of
commercial taboratory tests not more than 90 days old of all samples of concrete
aggregates:
1. Fine aggregate:
a. Clay fumps.
b. Reactivity. .
c. Shate and chert.
d. Soundness.
e_ Color.
f. Decantation.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-3 8235A10
� pw:/lCarollolDocumentslClien WVAtRenton/8235A1 �lSpecifica6ons110.03300
2. Coarse aggregate:
a. Clay lumps and friable particies.
b. Reactivity.
c. Shale and chert.
d. Soundness.
e_ Abrasion loss_
f_ Coal and lignite_
g_ Materials finer than 200 sieve.
T
.
�
E. Sieve analysis: Submit sieve analyses of fine and coarse aggregates being used in
triplicate at least every 3 weeks and at any time there is significant change in
grading of materials. '
F. Concrete mixes: Submit full details, including mix design calculations for concrete
mixes proposed for use for each class of concrete:
1. Include information on correction of batching for varying moisture contents of
fine aggregate_
2. Submit source quality test records with mix design submittal:
a_ Include calculations for f� based on source quality test records.
G. Trial batch test data:
1. Submit data for each test cylinder.
2. Submit data that identifies mix and slump for each test cylinder.
Sequence of concrete placing: Submit proposed sequence of placing concrete
showing proposed beginning and ending of individual placements.
Curing compound other than specified compound: Submit complete data on
proposed compound.
J_ If either fine or coarse aggregate is batched from more than 1 bin: Submit analyses
for each bin, and composite analysis made up from these, using proportions of
materials to be used in mix_
i/
L�
Cement mill tests: Include alkali content, representative of each shipment of cement
for verification of compliance with specified requirements.
Pozzolan Certificate of Compliance: Identify source of pozzolan and certify
compiiance in accordance with ASTM C 618.
M. Information on mixing equipment.
N. Drying shrinkage test data.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing and shipping:
1. Deliver, store, and handle concrete materials in manner that prevents damage
and inclusion of foreign substances. '
2_ Deliver and stare packaged materials in original containers until ready for use.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-4 8235A10
pw:ll CarollolDocumenLslClienUWAtFtenton18235A10/Specifications�10.03300
�
�
� 3. Deliver aggregate to mixing site and handle in such manner that variations in
moisture content will not interfere with steady production of concrete of
specifed degree of uniformity and slump.
�
,
'
�
�
�
,
�
t
,
,
,
B. Acceptance at site: Reject material containers or materials showing evidence of
water or other damage.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental requirements:
1. Hot weather concreting:
a. When ambient air temperature is above 90 degrees Fahrenheit: Prior to
placing concrete, cool forms and reinforcing steel to by water cooling to
below 90 degrees Fahrenheit.
b. Temperature of concreie mix at time of placement: Keep temperature
below 90 degrees Fahrenheit by methods which do not impair quality of
concrete_
2. Cold weather concreting:
a. Concrete placed below ambient air temperature of 45 degrees Fahrenheit
and falling or below 40 degrees Fahrenheit: Make provision for heating
water.
b. If materials have been exposed to freezing temperatures to degree that
any material is below 35 degrees Fahrenheit: Heat such materials.
c. Heating water, cement, or aggregate materials:
1) Do not heat in excess of 160 degrees Fahrenheit.
d. Protection of concrete in forms:
1) Protect by means of covering with tarpaulins, or other acceptable
covering acceptable to ENGINEER.
2) Provide means for circulating warm moist air around forms in manner
to maintain temperature of 50 degrees Fahrenheit for at least 5 days.
3. For conditions that promote rapid drying of freshly placed concrete such as low
humidity, high temperature, and wind: Take corrective measures to minimize
rapid water loss from concrete:
a_ Furnish and use sufficient number of maximum and minimum self-
- recording thermometers to adequately measure temperature around
concrete.
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A_ Schedule placing of concrete in such manner as to complete any single placing
operation to construction or expansion joint.
, PART2 PRODUCTS
1
�
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Admixtures:
1. General:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-5 8235A10
� pw://CarollolDocumentss7ClienUWA/Renton/8235AtO15pecificaUonsl70.03300
�
,
2.
3
Q
5.
a. Do not use admixtures of any type, except as specified, unless written
authorization has been obtained from the ENGINEER.
b. Compatible with concrete and other admixtures.
c. Do not use admixtures containing chlorides calculated as chloride ion in
excess of 0.5 percent by weight.
d. Use in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and add each
admixture to concrete mix separately.
Air entraining admixture:
a. Provide all concrete with 5 percent, plus or minus 1�percent, entrained air
of evenly dispersed air bubbles at time of placement.
b. In accordance with ASTM C 260.
Pozzolan admixture:
a. Fly ash in accordance with requirements of ASTM C 618, Class F inay be
used as admixture in concrete made with Type II portland cement.
b. Maximum of 15 percent by weight of pozzolan admixture to total weight of
cementitious materials_
1) The total weight of cementitious materials shall not be less than
minimum cementitious materials listed in Table A.
c. Do not use pozzolan admixture as an admixture in concrete made with
portland-pozzolan cement.
d. Loss on ignition for po�olan admixture: Not exceed 4 percent.
Water reducing admixture:
a. May be used at the CONTRACTOR's option.
b. In accordance with ASTM C 494, Type A or Type D.
c. Not contain air-entraining agents. �
d_ Liquid form before adding to the concrete mix.
e_ No decrease in cement is permitted as result of use of water reducing
admixture.
Superplasticizers: Are not to be used without acceptance by ENGINEER.
B. Aggregate:
1. General:
a. Provide concrete aggregates that are sound, uniformly graded, and free of
deleterious material in excess of allowable amounts specified.
b. Grade aggregate in accordance with ASTM C 136 and D 75.
c. Provide unit weight of fine and coarse aggregate that produces in place
concrete with weight of not less than 140 pounds per cubic foot.
d. Do not use aggregate made from recycled materials such as crushed and
screened hydraulic-cement concrete, brick, and other construction
materials_
2. Fine aggregate:
a. Provide fine aggregate for concrete or mortar consisting of clean, natural
sand or of sand prepared from crushed stone or crushed gravel.
b. Do not provide aggregate having deleterious substances in excess of
following percentages by weight of contaminating substances.
1) In no case shall total exceed percent listed_
'
,
,
L�
�
,
�
'
�
�
�
'
'
�
�
l�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-6 8235A10
pw:llCarollolDocumentslClienUWA�f2enton/8235A701Specficationsl10.03300
�
�
�
.-..,
LJ
�
�
r
�
�
.--,
L
�
�
�
�
C�
�
'
,
�
Item Test Method Percent
Removed by decantation (dirt, silt, etc.) ASTM C 117 3
Shale or Chert ASTM C 123 1
ASTM C 295* 1
Clay Lumps ASTM C 142 1
* Test Method C 123 is used to identify particles in the sample lighter than 2.40 Specific
Gravity. Test Method C 295 is used to identify which of the lightweight particles are shale
or chert. If the results of Test Method C 123 are less than 1 percent, Test Method C 295 is
not required.
c. txcept as otherwise spec�tied, grade fine aggregate from coarse to fine in
accordance with requirements of ASTM C 33.
3. Coarse aggregate:
a. General: Provide caarse aggregate consisting of gravel or crushed stone
made up of clean, hard, durable particles free from calcareous coatings,
organic matter, or other foreign substances.
b. Weight: Not exceeding 15 percent, for thin or elongated pieces having
length greater than 5 times average thickness.
c. Deleterious substances: Not in excess of following percentages by weight,
and in no case having total of all deleterious substances exceeding
2 ercent.
Item Test Method Percent
Shale or chert ASTM C 123 1.25
ASTM C 295** 1
Coal and lignite ASTM C 123 1!4
Clay lumps and friable particles ASTM C 142 1/4
Materials finer than Number 200 sieve ASTM C 117 1/2*
* Except when material finer than Number 2Q0 sieve consists of crusher dust, maximum
amount shall be 1 percent_
** Test Method C 123 is used to identify particles in the sample lighter than 2.40 Specific
Gravity. Test Method C 295 is used to identify which of the lightweight particles are shale,
chert, coal, or lignite. If the results of Test Method C 123 are less than 1.25 percent (the
minimum combined percentage of shale, chert, coal and lignite), Test Method C 295 is not
required.
a. vraaing: �
1) Aggregate for Class A, B, C, and D concrete: In accordance with
ASTM C 33, Size Number 57, except as otherwise specified or
authorized in writing by the ENGINEER.
2) Aggregate for Class CE concrete for encasement of electrical
conduits:
a) Graded in accordance with ASTM C 33, Size Number 8.
C. Concrete sealer:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-7 8235A10
1 pw l/Caro11o1DocumentsJClientlWA/Renton/8235A1 O/Specificatiorts/10 03300
a. ChemMasters, Madison, OH, Spray-Cure & Seal 25.
b. Tamms Industries, Luster Seal WB-300.
D. Conduit encasement coloring agent:
1. Color: Red color concrete used for encasement of electrical ducts, conduits,
and similar type items.
2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Davis Company, #100 Utility Red.
b. I. Reiss Company, Inc., equivalent product.
3. Conduit encasement concrete: Mix into each cubic yard of concrete 10 pounds
of coloring agent.
E. Evaporation retardant:
1. Manufacturers_ One of the following or equal:
a. Master Builders Technologies, Cleveland, Ohio, Confilm.
b. Euclid Chemical Company, Cleveland, Ohio, Eucobar.
F. Keyway material: Steel, plastic, or lumber.
G. Nonslip abrasive_
1. Type: Aluminum oxide abrasive of size 8/16, having structure of hard
aggregate, homogenous, nonglazing, rustproof, and unaffected by freezing,
moisture, or cleaning compounds.
2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Exolon Company, Tonawanda, New York.
b. Abrasive Materials, Incorporated, Hillsdale, Michigar�.
H. Portland cement:
1. General: Conform to specifications and tests in accordance with ASTM C 150,
Types II or III, low alkali, except as specified otherwise.
2. Low alkali portland: Have total alkati containing not more than 0.60 percent.
3. Exposed concrete in any individual structure: Use only one brand of portland
cement.
4. Cement for finishes: Provide cement from same source and of same type as
concrete to be finished_
Plastic membrane curing: Use polyethylene film in accordance with ASTM C 171:
1. Color: White.
2. Thickness: Nominal thickness of polyethylene film shall not be less than
0.0040 inches when measured in accordance with ASTM D 2103. Thickness
of polyethylene film at any point shall not be less than 0.0030 inches.
3. Loss of moisture: Not exceed 0.055 grams per square centimeter of surFace
when tested in accordance with ASTM C 156.
J
�
Sprayed membrane curing compaund: Clear type with fugitive dye in accordance
with ASTM C 309, Type 1 D.
Surface sealant system: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Radcon Laboratories, Inc., Las Vegas, Nevada, Formula Number 7.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_03300-8 8235A10
pw:llCarollo/DocumentslClientlWAlRentonl8235A101S pecifirationsl10.03300
�
�
�
�J
�
�
J
�
L,
�
�
�
,
2. IPA Systems, Philadelphia, Pennsyivania, Duripal.
L. Water:
1. Water for concrete, Washing Aggregate, and Curing Concrete: Clean and free
from oil and deleterious amounts of alkali, acid, organic matter, or other
substances.
2. Chlorides and sulfate ions:
a. 1Nater for conventional reinforced concrete: Use water not containing
more than 1,000 milligrams per liter of chlorides calculated as chloride ion,
nor more than 1,000 milligrams per liter of sulfates calculated as sulfate
ion.
b. Water for prestressed or post-tensioned concrete: Use water not
containing more than 650 milligrams per liter of chlorides calculated as
chloride ion, nor more than 800 milligrams per liter of sulfates calculated
as sulfate ion.
2.02 E�UlPIVlENT
A. Mixing concrete:
1. Mixers may be of stationary plant, paver, or truck mixer type.
2. Provide adequate equipment and facilities for accurate measurement and
control of materials and for readily changing proportions of material.
3. Mixing equipment:
a. Capable of combining aggregates, cementitious materials, and water
within specified time into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass and
discharging mixture without segregation.
b. Maintain concrete mixing plant and equipment in good working order and
operated at loads, speeds, and timing recommended by manufacturer or
as specified.
c. Proportion cementitious materials and aggregate by weight.
B. Machine mixing:
1. Batch plant shall be capable of controlling delivery of all material to mixer
within 1 percent by weight of individual material_
2. If bulk cementitious materials are used, weigh them on separate visible scale
which will accurately register scale load at any stage of weighing operation
from zero to full capacity_
3. Prevent cementitious materials from coming into contact with aggregate or
with water until materials are in mixer ready for complete mixing with all mixing
�
5.
6.
7.
Q
water.
Procedure of mixing cementitious materials with sand or with sand and coarse
aggregate for delivery to project site, for final mixing and addition of mixing
water will not be permitted.
Retempering of concrete will not be permitted.
Discharge entire batch before recharging.
Volume of mixed material per batch: Not exceed manufacturer's rated capacity
of mixer.
Mixers:
a. Perform mixing in batch mixers of acceptable type.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-9
pw J/Ca rollolDocuments/ClienNNAlRentonl8235A10/SpecifiraUons110.03300
8235A10
�
�
c.
C. Transit-mixed concrete_
L
Equip each mixer with device fo� accurately measuring and indicating
quantity of water entering concrete, and operating mechanism such that
leakage will not occur when valves are closed.
Equip each mixer with device for automatically measuring, indicating, and
controlling time required for mixing:
1) Interlock device to prevent discharge of concrete from mixer before
expiration of mixing period.
�
�
��
1. Mix and deliver in accordance with ASTM C 94.
2. Total elapsed time befinreen addition of water at batch plant and discharging
comPleted mix: �
a. Not to exceed 90 minutes.
b. Elapsed time at project site shall not exceed 30 minutes.
3. Under conditions contributing to quick setting, total elapsed time permitted
may be reduced by the ENGINEER.
4. Equip each truck mixer with device interlocked to prevent discharge of
concrete from drum before required number of turns and furnish such device
that is capable of counting number of revolutions of drum.
5. Continuously revolve drum after it is once started until it has completely
discharged its batch:
a. Do not admit water until drum has started revolving.
b. Right is reserved to increase required minimum number of revolutions or
to decrease designated maximum number of revolutions allowed, if
necessary, to obtain satisfactory mixing. The CONTRACTOR will not be
entitled to additional compensation because of such increase or decrease.
D. Other types of mixers: In case of other types of mixers, mixing shall be as follows:
1. Mix concrete until there is uniform distribution of materials, and discharge
mixer completely before recharging_
2. Neither speed nor volume loading of mixer shall exceed manufacturer's
recommendations_
3. Continue mixing for minimum of 1-1/2 minutes after all materials are in drum,
and for batches larger than 1 cubic yard increase minimum mixing time
15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or fraction thereof_
2.03 MIXES
A. Measurements of materials:
2.
3.
4.
5.
Measure materials by weighing, except as otherwise specified or where other
methods are specifically authorized in writing by the ENGINEER.
Furnish apparatus for weighing aggregates and cementitious materials that is
suitably designed and constructed for this purpose.
Accuracy of weighing devices: Fumish devices that have capability of
providing successive quantities of individual material that can be measured to
within 1 percent of desired amount of that material.
Measuring or weighing devices: Subject to review by the ENGINEER. Shall
bear valid seal of the Sealer of Weights and Measures having jurisdiction.
Weighing cementitious materials:
�
��
u
�
��
LI
�
'
'
,
October 26, 2010 - F1NAL 10.03300-10 8235A10
pw:llCarollolDocumentslClientlWAlRenton18235At OlSpecificationsl10.03300
I -�,
u
1
1
� a. Weigh cementitious materials separately.
b. Cement in unbroken standard packages (sacks): Need not be weighed.
c. Bulk cementitious materials and fractional packages: Weigh such
cementitious materials.
� 6. Mixing water: Measured by volume or by weight.
�
�
i
i
,
�
�
�
L�
�
i
,
LJ
�
B. Concrete proportions and consistency:
1. Concrete consistency and composition:
a_ Provide concrete that can be worked readily into corners and angles of
forms and around reinforcement without excessive vibration and without
permitting materials to segregate or free water to collect on surface.
b. Prevent unnecessary or haphazard changes in consistency of concrete.
2. Ratio of coarse aggregate to fine aggregate: Not less than 1_0 or more than
2.0 for all concrete Classes, with exception of Class CE.
3. Aggregate:
a. Obtain aggregate from source that is capable of providing uniform quality,
moisture content, and grading during any single day's operation.
4. Concrete mix water to cementitious materials ratio, minimum cementitious
materials content, and slump range: Conform to values specified in Table A in
this Sub-Section.
5. Concrete batch weights: Control and adjust to secure maximum yield_ At all
times, maintain proportions of concrete mix within specified limits.
6. Mix modification: If required, by the ENGINEER, modify mixture within limits
set forth in this Sub-Section_
C. Concrete mixes:
1. Proportioning of concrete mix= Proportion mixes based on required average on
compressive strength f��-
2. Mixes:
a. Adjusting of water: After acceptance, do not change mixes without
acceptance by ENGINEER, except that at all times adjust batching of
water to compensate for free moisture content of fine aggregate.
b. Total water content of each concrete class: Not exceed those specified in
Table A in this Sub-Section.
c. Checking moisture content of fine aggregate: Furnish satisfactory means
at batching plant for checking moisture content of fine aggregate_
3. Change in mixes: Submit new mix design and undertake new trial batch and
test program as specified in this Sub-Section.
D. Hand mixed concrete:
1. Hand mix concrete only when acceptable to the ENGINEER.
2. Prepare hand mixed concrete on watertight, level platForm in batches not to
exceeci 1/3 cubic yard each.
3. Aggregate:
a. First, spread required amount of coarse aggregate on platform in an even
and uniform layer.
1) Then over coarse aggregate, spread proper proportion of fine
aggregate.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-11 8235A10
� pwJlCarollolDocuments�ClienflVMAlRentonB235At0ISpecificaUons/10.03300
b. Depth of combined coarse and fine aggregate layers: Not be greater than
1 foot. '
4. Cementitious materials:
a. First, evenly spread required quantity of cementitious materials over fine
aggregate.
b. Then turn entire batch with shovels at least 2 times before adding water.
5. Water:
a_ Then uniformly sprinkle or spray proper amount of water over batched
materials.
b. Then turn with shovels not less than 3 times before concrete is removed
from platForm.
E. Classes of concrete:
1. Provide concrete consisting of 5 classes: Classes A, B, C, D, and CE. Use
where specified or indicated on the Drawings.
2. Weight of concrete classes: Provide classes of concrete having minimum
weight of 140 pounds per cubic foot.
3. Class B concrete: Class B concrete may be substituted for Class A concrete,
tivhen high-early strength concrete is needed in areas specifically accepted by
the ENGINEER and that do not require sulfate resistant concrete.
4. Class C concrete: Class C concrete may be used for fill for unauthorized
excavation, for thrust blocks and ground anchors for piping, for bedding of
pipe, and where indicated on the Drawings.
5. Class D concrete: Use Class D for precast concrete items.
6. Glass CE concrete: Use Class CE for electrical conduit encasements.
7. All other concrete, unless specified or otherwise indicated on the Drawings:
Use Class A concrete=
TABLE A
CONCRETE
WITH AIR ENTRAINMENT
Specified Minimum
Compressive Maximum Cementitious
Strength f� at Water-to- Materials per Cubic Slump
28 Days (Pounds per Cementitious Yard of Concrete by Range
Class Square Inch) Materials Ratio Weight (Pounds) (Inches)
A 4,000 0.45 564 2 to 4
B(Type III 4,000 0.45 564 2 to 4
cement)
C 2,500 0_62 423 3 to 6
D 4,500 0.45 658 2 to 4
CE 2,500 0.62 564 3 to 6
8. Pumped concre#e: Provide pumped concrete that complies with all
requirements of this Sub-Section.
9. Do not place concrete with slump outside limits indicated in Table A.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-12 8235A10
pw:ll CarollolDocuments/ClienUWlVRentonB235A10ISpecficationsl10.03300
r
�
�
�
'
� 10. Classes:
a. Classes A, C, D, and CE concrete: Make with Type il low alkali portland
cement.
� b. Class B concrete: Make with Type III low alkali portland cement.
c. Admixtures: Provide admixtures as specified in this Sub-Section.
F. Air entraining admixture:
1 1. Add agent to batch in portion of mixing water.
2. Batch solution by means of inechanical batcher capable of accurate
measurement.
, 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
�
Il
�
�
�
�
�
�.
'
�
�
�
A. Tests:
1 _ Trial batches:
a. After concrete mix designs have been accepted by ENGINEER, have trial
batches of the accepted Class A, C{ass B, and Class D concrete mix
designs prepared by testing laboratory acceptable to the ENGINEER.
b. Prepare trial batches using specified cementitious materials and
aggregates proposed to be used for the Work.
c_ Prepare trial batches with sufficient quantity to determine stump,
workability, consistency, and finishing characteristics, and to provide
sufficient test cylinders.
d. Test cylinders: Provide cylinders having 6-inch diameter by 12-inch length
and that are prepared in accordance with ASTM C 31 for tests specified in
this Sub-Section.
e. Determine slump in accordance with ASTM C 143.
f_ Test cylinders from trial batch:
1) Test 8 cylinders for compressive strength in accordance with
ASTM C 39:
aj Test 4 cylinders at 7 days and 4 at 28 days.
b) Establish ratio between 7 day and 28 day strength for mix. 7-day
strength may be taken as satisfactory indication of 28-day
strength provided effects on concrete of temperature and
humidity between 7 day and 28 day are taken into account.
2) Average compressive strength of 4 test cylinders tested at 28 days:
Equal to or greater than required average compressive strength f��
on which concrete mix design is based.
g. If trial batch tests do not meet specified requirements for slump, strength,
workability, consistency, drying shrinkage, and finishing, change concrete
mix design proportions and, if necessary, source of aggregate.
1) Make additional trial batches and tests until an acceptable trial batch
is produced that meets requirements of this Sub-Section.
h. Perform test batches and tests required to establish trial batches and
acceptability of materials without change in Contract Price.
i. Do not place concrete until the concrete mix design and trial batch have
been accepted by ENGINEER.
2. Required average compressive strength:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-13 8235A10
, pwl/CarollolDocumentslClienUWAlRenton/8235At015pedficauons110.03300
�
'
a
�
c.
,�A
�
Determine required average compressive strength (f��) for selection of
concrete proportions for mix design, for each class of concrete, using
calculated standard deviation and its corresponding specified
compressive strength f�, in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 350.
When test records of at least 30 consecutive tests that span period of not
less than 45 calendar days are available, establish standard deviation as
in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 350 and as modified in this Sub-
Section.
Provide test records from which to calculate standard deviation that
represent materials, quality control procedures, and conditions similar to
materials, quality control procedures, and conditions expected to apply in
preparation of concrete for the Work.
Provide changes in materials and proportions within test records that are
more restricted than those for the Work.
Speafied compressive strength (f�) of concrete used in test records:
Within 1,000 pounds per square inch of that specified for the Work.
When lacking adequate test records for calculation of standard deviation
meeting requirements, determine required. average compressive strength
f�� from followinq Table B_
�
�
'J �
�
LJ
TABLE B
Specified Compressive Strength f� Required Average Compressive Strength
(pounds per square inch) f�� (pounds per square inch)
Less than 3,000 f� + 1,000
3,000 to 5,000 f� + 1,200
Over 5,000 1.10f� + 700
3. Pozzalan admixture:
a. Sampling and testing:
1) Sample and test pozzolan admixture in accordance with
ASTM C 311.
4_ Aggregate:
a. Testing of concrete aggregate is at CONTRACTOR's expense.
b. If there is change in aggregate source or if there is a significant change in
aggregate quality from same source, submit new set of design mixes
covering each class of concrete and prepare new trial batches.
c. Sieves: �
1) Use sieves with square openings for testing grading of aggregates.
2) Sieve analyses: If sieve analyses indicate significant change in
materials, the ENGINEER may require that new mix design and trial
batch be submitted and accepted before further placing of concrete.
d. Sample aggregate in accordance with ASTM C 136 and D 75.
e. Fine aggregate:
1) Provide fine aggregate that does not contain strong alkali nor organic
matter which gives color darker than standard color when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 40.
2) Provide aggregate having soundness in accordance with
requirements of ASTM C 33 when tested in accordance with
ASTM� C 88.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-14 8235A10
pwJlCarollolDocumentslClienUWAlftentonl8235AtOlSpeafications110 03300
'
�
�
��
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
'
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
,
,�
�
�!
�
�
i
�
3) Provide aggregate complying with reactivity requirements of
ASTM C 33 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 289.
f. Coarse aggregate:
1) Soundness when tested in accordance with ASTM C 88: Have loss
not greater than 10 percent when tested with sodium sulfate.
2) Abrasion Loss: Not exceed 45 percent after 500 revolutions when
tested in accordance with ASTM C 131.
3) Reactivity: Not exceed limits specified in Appendix of ASTM C 33
when tested in accordance with ASTM C 289.
g. Portland cement:
1) Determination alkali content: Determine by method set forth in
ASTM C 114_
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Liquid evaporation retardant:
1. Under conditions which result in rapid evaporation of moisture from the surface
of the concrete, immediately after the concrete has been screeded, coat the
surface of the concrete with a liquid evaporation retardant_
2. Apply the evaporatian retardant again after each work operation as necessary
to prevent drying shrinkage cracks.
3. Conditions which result in rapid evaporation of moisture may include one or
more of the following:
a. Low humidity_
b. Windy conditions.
c. High temperature.
B. Surface sealant system:
1. Apply as recommended by manufacturer published instructions.
2. Where concrete continues to sweat or leak, apply additional coats of surface
sealant until the sweating or leaks stop.
C. Joints and bonding:
1. As far as practicable construct concrete work as monolith.
2_ Locations of construction, expansion, and other joints are indicated on the
Drawings or as specified in this Sub-Section.
3. Repair of concrete: Where it is necessary to repair concrete by bonding mortar
or new concrete to concrete which has reached its initial set, first coat surface
of set concrete with epoxy bonding agent as specified in Sub-
Section 10.03071.
D. Conveying and placing concrete:
1. Canvey concrete from mixer to place of final deposit by methods that prevent
separation or loss of materials.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-15 8235A10
, pw:(/CarollolDocumentslCfienNNAlRentonB235At0/5pedficationslt0.D3300
2. Use equipment for chuting, pumping, and conveying concrete of such size and
design as to ensure practically continuous flow of concrete at delivery end
without separation of materials.
3_ Design and use chutes and devices for conveying and depositing.concrete that
direct concrete vertically downward when discharged from chute or conveying
device.
4. Keep equipment for conveying concrete thoroughly clean by washing and
scraping upon completion of any day's placement_
E. Placing concrete:
1_ Place no concrete without prior authorization of the ENGINEER.
2. Do not place concrete until:
a. Reinforcement is secure and properly fastened in its correct position and
loose form ties at construction joints have been retightened.
b. Dowels, bucks, sfeeves, hangers, pipes, conduits, anchor bolts, and any
other fixtures required to be embedded in concrete have been placed and
adequately anchored.
c. Forms have been cleaned and oiled as specified.
3_ Placement of concrete in which initial set has occGrred, or of retempered
concrete, will not be permitted.
4. Place no concrete during rainstorms or high velocity winds.
5. Protect concrete placed immediately before rain to prevent water from coming
in contact with such concrete or winds causing excessive drying.
6_ Keep sufFcient protective covering on hand at all times for protection of
concrete.
7_ After acceptance, adhere to proposed sequence of placing concrete, except
when specific changes are requested and accepted by the ENGINEER.
8_ Notify the ENGINEER in writing of readiness, not just intention, to place
concrete in any portion of the work:
a. Provide this notification in such time in advance of operations, as the
ENGINEER deems necessary to make final inspection of preparations at
location of proposed concrete placing.
b. Place forms, reinforcement, screeds, anchors; ties, and inserts in place
before notification of readiness is given to the ENGINEER.
c. Depositing concrete: �
1) Deposit concrete at or near its final position to avoid segregation
caused by rehandling or flowing.
2) Do not deposit concrete in large quantities in one place and work
along forms with vibrator or by other me#hods.
3) Do not drop concrete freely into place from height greater than 5 feet.
4) Use tremies for placing concrete where drop is over 5 feet.
5) Commence placement of concrete on slopes, at bottom of slope.
9. Place concrete in approximately horizontal layers. not to exceed 24 inches in
depth and bring up evenly in all parts of forms.
10. Continue concrete placement without avoidable interruption, in continuous
operation, until end of placement is reached.
11 _ After placement begins, it should continue without significant interruption.
Precautions should be planned and implemented to preVent any delay,
between layers being placed, from exceeding 20 minutes.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-16 8235A10
pw:llCarollo/DoaenemslClienU WNRenton18235A 10fSpecifications/10.03300
�.
�
�
'
L�
1
�
LJ
�
�
�
�
�
'
II
e.
12_ If concrete is to be placed over previously placed concrete and more than
20 minutes have elapsed, then spread layer of grout not less than 1/2 inch in
thickness nor more than 1 inch in thickness over surFace before placing
additional concrete.
13. Placement of concrete for slabs, beams, or walkways:
a. If cast monolithically with walls or columns, do not commence until
concrete in walls or columns has been allowed to set and shrink.
b. Allow set time of not less than one hour for shrinkage.
F. Consolidating concrete:
1. Place concrete with aid of acceptable mechanical vibrators.
2. Thoroughly consolidate concrete around reinforcement, pipes, or other shapes
built into the work.
3. Provide sufficiently intense vibration to cause concrete to flow and settle
readily into place and to visibly affect concrete over radius of at least .
18 inches.
4_ Vibrators:
a. Keep sufficient vibrators on hand at all times to vibrate concrete as
placed.
b. In addition to vibrators in actual use while concrete is being placed, have
on hand minimum 1 spare vibrator in serviceable condition.
c_ Place no concrete until it has been ascertained that all vibrating
equipment, including spares, are in serviceable condition.
5. Take special care to place concrete solidly against forms to leave no voids.
6. Take every precaution to make concrete solid, compact, and smooth, and if for
any reason surfaces or interiors have voids or are in any way defective, repair
such concrete in manner acceptable to the ENGINEER.
G. Loading concrete:
1. Green concrete:
a. No heavy loading of green concrete will be permitted.
b_ Green concrete is defined as concrete with less than 100 percent of the
specified strength.
2. No backfill shall be placed against concrete walls, connecting slabs, or beams
until the concrete has reached the specified strength.
3. Use construction methods, sequencing, and allow time for concrete to reach
adequate strength to prevent overstress of the concrete structure during
construction.
H. Curing concrete:
1. General:
a. Cure concrete by methods specified in this Sub=Section.
b. Cure.concrete minimum of 7 days.
c. Cure concrete to be painted with water or plastic membrane.
d. Do not use curing compound on concrete surfaces that are to receive
paint or upon which any material is to be bonded.
e. Water cure or plastic membrane cure concrete slabs that are specified to
be sealed by concrete sealer.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-17 8235A10
� p�vl/CarollolDocuments/ClientlWAlf2enton/8235A10/Spedficauonsl10.03300
E
3
f. Cure other concrete by water curing or sprayed curing membrane at the
CONTRACTOR's option.
g. Floor slabs may be cured using plastic membrane curing.
Water curing:
a. Keep surfaces of concrete being water cured constantly and visibly moist
day and night for period of not less than 7 days.
b. Each day forms remain in place may count as 1 day of water curing.
c. No further curing credit will be allowed for forms in place after contact has
once been broken between concrete surface and forms.
d. Do not loosen form ties during period when concrete is being cured by
leaving forms in place.
e. Flood top of walls with water at least 3 times per day, and keep concrete
surfaces moist at all times during 7 day curing period.
Sprayed membrane curing:
a. Apply curing compound to concrete surface after repairing and patching,
and within 1 hour after forms are removed.
b. If more than 1 hour elapses after removal of forms, do not use membrane-
curing compound, but use water curing for full curing period.
c. If surface requires repairing or painting, water cure such concrete
surfaces.
d. Curing compound:
1) Do not remove curing compound from concrete in less than 7 days.
2) Curing compound may be removed only upon written request by the
CONTRACTOR and acceptance by the ENGINEER, stating what
measures are to be performed to adequately cure structures.
3) Take care to apply cunng compound in area of construction joints_
a) See that curing compound is placed within construction joint
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
silhouette.
After curing period is complete, remove curing compound placed
within construction joint silhouette by heavy sandblasting prior to
placing any new concrete.
CONTRACTOR's Option: Instead of using curing compound for
curing of construction joints, such joints may be water cured.
Apply curing compound by mechanical, power operated sprayer and
mechanical agitator that will uniformly mix all pigment and
compound.
Apply compound in at least 2 coats.
Apply each coat in direction 90 degrees to preceding coat.
Apply curing compound in sufficient quantity so that concrete has
uniform appearance and that natural color is effectively and
completely concealed at time of spraying.
Continue to coat and recoat surfaces until specified coverage is
achieved and until coating film remains on concrete surfaces.
Thickness and coverage of curing compound: Provide compound
having film thickness that can be scraped from surfaces at any and
all points after drying for at least 24 hours.
The CONTRACTOR is caufioned that method of applying curing
compound specified in this Sub-Section may require more compound
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-18 8235A10
pw:NCarollolDocumentslClienUWAlRentonl8235At 0/Specificationsl16.03300
�.
�
�
�
�
�
m
0
than normally suggested by manufacturer of compound and also
more than is customary in the trade_
13) Apply amounts specified in this Sub-Section, regardless of
manufacturer's recommendations or customary practice, if curing
compound is used in place of water curing.
14) If the CONTRACTOR desires to use curing compound other than
specified curing compound, coat sample areas of concrete wall with
proposed curing compound and also similar adjacent area with
specified compound in specified manner for comparison:
a) If proposed sample is not equal or better, in opinion of the
ENGINEER, in all features, proposed substi#ution will not be
allowed.
15) Prior to final acceptance of the work, remove, by sandblasting or
other acceptable method, any cunng compound on surFaces exposed
to view, so that only natural color of finished concrete is visible
. uniformly over entire surface.
Plastic membrar.s curing:
a. Polyethylene film may be used to cure slabs.
1) Seal joints and edges with small sand berm.
b. Install plastic membrane as soon as concrete is finished and can be
walked on without damage.
c. Keep concrete moist under plastic membrane.
3.02 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Edges of joints:
� 1. Provide joints having edges as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Protect wall and slab surfaces at edges against concrete spatter and
thoroughly clean upon completion of each placement.
�
�
i
�
�
,
�
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of concrete:
1. During progress of construction, the OWNER will have tests made to
determine whether the concrete, as being produced, complies with
requirements specified.
2. Tests will be performed in accordance with ASTM C 31, ASTM C 39, and
ASTM C 172.
3. The ENGINEER will make and deliver test cylinders to the laboratory and
testing expense will be bome by the OWNER.
4. Required number cylinders:
a. Not less than 3 cylinder specimens, 6-inch diameter by 12 inch long, will
be tested for each 150 cubic yards of each class of concrete with
minimum of 3 specimens for each class of concrete placed and not less
than 3 specimens for each half day's placement.
b. One cylinder will be broken at 7 days and 2 at 28 days.
5. The CONTRACTOR shall:
a. Test slump of concrete using slump cone in accordance with requirements
of ASTM C 143.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-19 8235A10
� pw:l/CarollolDocumentstClientlWA/Renton/8235At01Specificalionsl1Q.03300
��
b. Furnish test equipment.
c. Do not use concrete that does not meet specification requirements in
regards to slump.
1) Remove such concrete from project site.
d. Test slump at the beginning of each placement, as often as necessary to
keep slump within the specified range, and when requested to do so by
the ENGINEER. .
e_ Make provisions for and fumish concrete for test specimens, and provide
manual assistance to the ENGINEER in preparing said specimens.
f. Assume responsibility for care of and providing of curing conditions for
test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 31.
B. Air entraining admixture:
1_ Test percent of entrained air in concrete at beginning of each placement, as
often as necessary to keep entrained air within specified range, and when
requested to do so by the ENGINEER_
2_ Provide test equipment.
3. Do not use concrete that does not meet Specification requirements for air
entrainment.
a. Remove such concrete from project site.
4. Test air entrainment in concrete in accordance with ASTM C 173_
5. The ENGINEER may at any time test percent of entrained air in concrete
received on project site.
C. Enforcement of strength requirement:
1. Concrete is expected to reach higher compressive strength than that which is
indicated in Table A as specified compressive strength f�.
2. Strength level of concrete: Will be considered acceptable if following
conditions are satisfied:
a_ Averages of all sets of 3 consecutive strength test results is greater or
equal to specified compressive strength P�_
b. No individual strength test (average of 2 cylinders) falls below specified
compressive strength Y� by more than 500 pounds per square inch.
c_ Whenever ane, or both, of 2 conditions stated above is not satisfied;
provide additional curing of affected portion followed by cores taken in
accordance with ASTM C 42, ACI 318, and ACI 350 and comply with
following requirements:
1) If additional curing does not bring average of 3 cores taken in
affected area to at least specified compressive strength f�, designate
such concrete in affected area as defective.
2) The ENGINEER may require the CONTRACTOR to strengthen
defective concrete by means of additional concrete, additional
reinforcement, or replacement of defective concrete, all of the
CONTRACTOR's expense_
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Repair of defective concrete:
1. Remove and replace or repair defective work.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.033Q0-20 8235A10
pw:llCarollolDocuments/ClienUWAlftenfnn18235A 101Specfications/10 03300
�
LJ
�
�
�
�
1
i
,
i
�
�
i
�
�
��
�'
� 2. Correct defective work as specified.
3. Do not, patch, repair, or cover defective work without inspection by the
ENGINEER.
4. Provide repairs having strength equal to or greater than specified concrete for
, areas involved.
5. Preparation of concrete for repair:
a_ Make no repair until ENGINEER has accepted method for preparing
� surface for repair.
b. Chip out and key imperfections in the work and make them ready for
repair.
� c. Surfaces of set concrete to be repaired: First coat with epoxy bonding
agent as specified in Sub-Section 10.03071. .
6. Methods of repair:
I a. Dry pack method:
1) Use for holes having depth nearly equal to or greater than least
surface dimension of hole, for cone-bolt holes, and for narrow slots
� cut for repair.
2) Smooth holes: Clean and roughen by heavy sandblasting before
repair.
� b_ Mortar method bf replacement:
1) Use for holes too wide to dry pack and too shallow for concrete
replacement.
2) Comparatively shallow depressions, large or small, which extend no
� deeper than nearest surface reinforcement.
c. Concrete replacement:
1) Use when holes e�end entirely through concrete section or when
� holes are more than 1 square foot in area and extend halfinray or
more through the section.
�
�
�
�
i
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 27, 2010 - FINAL 10_03300-21 8235A10
'' pw:llCarollo/DocumentsiClient/WAlf2entoN8235A101SpecificaGons/10.03300
;�
October26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-22 8235A10
pw:IlCarollolDocumenis/ClienUWAlf2entonl8235A t OlSpeafica6ons110.03300
�
�
�,
�
�
i.
1
1
1
1
'
�,
�
�
SUB-SECTION 10.03600
GROUTS
,
�
�
�
�
�
,
�,
�
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section Includes:
1. Concrete mortar.
2. Dry-pack mortar.
3. Epoxy grout.
4. Grout_
5. Non-shrink epoxy grout.
6. Non-shrink grout.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. Sub-Section 10.03071 - Epoxies.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. C 109 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars (using 2-inch or [50-millimeter] cube specimens).
2. C 230 - Standard Specification for Flow Table for Use In Tests of Hydraulic
Cement.
3. C 531 - Standard Test Method for Liner Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal
Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and
Polymer Concretes.
4_ C 579 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Chemical-
Resistant Mortars, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes.
5. C 939 - Standard Test Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced-Aggregate
Concrete (Flow Cone Method).
6. C 1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout
(Non-shrink).
7. C 1181 - Standard Test Methods for Compressive Greep of Chemical-
Resistant Polymer Machinery Grouts.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Non-Shrink Grout: Submit manufacturer's literature and certified test data prior to
instatlation.
�
'
B_ Non-Shrink EpoxyGrout: Submit manufacturer's literature and certified test data
prior to installation.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03600-1 8235A10
, pwllCarolla�DocumentslClientlWAlRentonl8235A1015pecificaUons110.03600
a
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. All materials shall be delivered to the jobsite in their original, unopened packages or
containers, clearly labeled with the manufacturer's product identification and printed
instructions.
B. All materials shall be stored in a cool dry place and in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
C. All materials shall be handled in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Refer to manufacturer's literature or contact the manufacturer for any special
physical or environmental limitations that may be required for use of products.
1.06 WARRANTIES
A. Non-Shrink Grout: The manufacturer shall warranty that the non-shrink grout will
never go below its initial placement volume when tested in accordance with
ASTM C 1107_
B. Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout_ The manufacturer shall warranty that non-shrink epoxy
grout will show negligible shrinkage or expansion when tested in accordance with
ASTM C 531 _
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete Mortar:
1. General: Consist of concrete mixture with coarse aggregate removed and
water quantity adjusted as required.
2. At Exposed Concrete Surfaces Not to Be Painted or Submerged in Water:
White cement.
B. Dry-Pack Mortar:
1. Consist of m"ixture of portland cement and sand.
C. Epoxy Grout:
1. Consist of mixture of epoxy and sand.
2. Sand: Clean, bagged, graded, and kiln dried silica sand.
D. Grout:
1. Consist of mixture of portland cement and sand.
E. Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal_
a. Five Star Products, Inc., Faifield, CT, Five Star Epoxy Grout.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03600-2
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA(Rentonl8235A 10/Specifica tionsl10.03600
8235A10
2.
3.
4.
5_
6.
7.
b. BASF Construction Chemicals, Shakopee, MN, Masterflow 648 CP Plus.
c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc., EPOGROUT.
Non-shrink epoxy grout shall be a 100 percent solid, premeasured,
prepackaged system containing a 2-component thermosetting epoxy resin and
inert aggregate.
Consistency: Non-shrink epoxy grout shall maintain a flowable consistency for
at least 45 minutes at 70 degrees Fahrenheit_
Dimensional Stability (height change):
a. Non-shrink epoxy grout shall have negligible shrinkage or expansion (less
than 0.0006 inches/inch) when tested in accordance with ASTM C 531.
Compressive Strength: Non-shrink epoxy grout shall show a minimum
compressive strength of 10,000 pounds per square inch at 24 hours and
14,000 pounds per square inch at 7 days when tested in accordance with
ASTM C 579, Method B.
Compressive Creep: The compressive creep for non-shrink epoxy grout shall
not exceed 0.0027 inches/inch when tested under a 400 pounds per square
inch constant load at 140 degrees Fahrenheit in accordance with
ASTM C 1181.
Thermal Capabiliiy: The coefficient of thermal expansion for. non-shrink epoxy
grout shall not exceed 0.000018 inches per inch per degree Fahrenheit when
tested under ASTM C 531, Method B.
F. Non-Shrink Grout:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Five Star Products, Inc., Faifield, CT, Five Star Grout.
b. BASF Construction Chemicals, Shakopee, MN, Masterflow 928.
c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc., Omaha, NE, CRYSTEX.
2. Preportioned and prepackaged cement-based mixture. It shall contain no
metallic particles such as aluminum powder and no metallic aggregate such as
iron filings. It shall require only the addition of potable water.
3. Potable Water for Pre-Soaking, Mixing, and Curing: Clean and free of oils,
acids, alkalies, organics, and any other deleterious matter.
4. Bleeding_ Free from the emergence of mixing water from within or the
presence of water on its surface.
5. In accordance with ASTM C 1107.
6. Consistency: Remain at a minimum flawable consistency for at least
45 minutes after mixing at 45 degrees Fahrenheit to 90 degrees Fahrenheit
when tested in accordance with ASTM C 230. If at a fluid consisteney, it shall
be verified in accordance with ASTM C 939.
7. Dimensional Stability (height change): In accordance with ASTM C 1107,
volume-adjusting Grade B or C at 45 degrees to 90 degrees. It shall show
90 percent or greater.bearing area under bases or baseplates.
8. Compressive Strength: Non-shrink grout shall show minimum compressive
strengths at 45 degrees Fahrenheit to 90 degrees Fahrenheit in accordance
with ASTM C 1107 for various periods from the time of placement, including
5,000 pounds per square inch at 28 days when tested in accordance with
ASTM C 109 as modified by ASTM C 1107.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.Q3600-3 8235A10
� pwllCarollolDowments/ClienUWA/Renton/8235At�lSpecificationsll0-03600
2.02 MIXES
A. Concrete Mortar Mix:
1. Use water-to-cementitious materials ratio that is no more than that specified
for concrete being repaired.
2. At Exposed Concrete Surfaces Not to Be Painted or Submerged in Water: Use
sufficient white cement to make color of finished patch match that of
surrounding concrete.
B. Dry-Pack Mortar Mix: Use only enough water so that resulting mortar will crumble to
touch after being formed into ball by hand.
C. Epoxy Grout:
1. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
2. Proportioning:
a. For Horizontal Work: Consist of mixture of 1 part epoxy as specified in
Sub-Section 10.03071 with not more than 2 parts sand.
b. For Vertical or Overhead Work: Consist of 1 part epoxy gel as specified in
Sub-Section 10.03071 with not more than 2 parts sand_
D. Grout Mix:
1. For Concrete Repair: Mix in same proportions used for concrete being
repaired, with only sufficient water to give required consistency for spreading_
2. For Spreading over the Surfaces of Construction or Cold Joints: Mix with no
more water used than allowed by water-to-Cementitious materials ratio
specified for concrete.
3. For Other Applications: Mix in proportions by weight of 1 part cement to 4 parts
�of concrete sand_
�
F
Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout: Mix in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Non-Shrink Grout: Mix in accordance with manufacturers installation instructions
such that resulting mix has flowable consistency and is suitable for placing by
pouring.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINAiION
A. Inspect concrete surfaces to receive grout or mortar and verify that they are free of
ice, frost, dirt, grease, oil, curing compounds, paints, impregnations, and all loose
material or foreign matter likely to affect the bond or performance of grout or mortar.
B. Inspect baseplate and anchor systems for rust, oil, and other deleterious
substances that may affect the bond or performance of grout_
C. Confirm that newly placed concrete has been cured sufficiently to attain its design
strength and limit further shrinkage.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03600-4 8235A10
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienUWAlRenton/8235A 10/Specificationsl10.03600
�
e
'
i
�
�
'
'
'
�
��
D. Verify that temperature of cementitious or epoxy grout does not exceed
manufacturer's recommendations.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation:
1. Roughen all concrete surfaces by heavy sandblasting, chipping, or other
mechanical means to assure bond_ Loose or broken concrete shall be
removed.
2. All grease, oil, dirt, curing compounds, laitance, and other deleterious
materials that may affect bond that were identified in the inspection process
shall be completely removed from concrete and bottoms of baseplates. All
metal surfaces should have a 2 to 3 mil peak-tavalley profile for epoxy grouts.
3. For cementitious mortars and grouts, concrete shall be saturated surface
damp. Any standing water shall be removed prior to placing grouts.
4. For epoxy grouts, do not wet concrete surfaces with water. Instead, where
required, wet surfaces with epoxy for horizontal work or epoxy gel for vertical
or overhead work prior to placing epoxy grouts.
B. Forms and Headboxes for Cementitious or Epoxy Grouts:
1. Forms for grouts shall be built of material with adequate strength to withstand
the placement of grouts.
2. Forms must be rigid and liquid tight. All cracks and joints shall be caulked with
an elastomeric sealant. All forms shall be lined with polyethylene for easy
grout release. Forms carefully waxed with two coats of heavy-duty paste wax
shall also be acceptable.
3. Forms shall be 4 to 6 inches higher than the baseplate on one side of the
baseplate configuration when using head pressure for placement.
4. A sufficient number of headboxes shall be built to facilitate placement of
� grouts.
5. Air relief holes a minimum 1/8 inch in diameter shall be provided when
required by a baseplate configuration to avoid entrapping air underneath.
C
�
�
�
�
i
3A3 APPUCATION
A. Cement Mortar and Grout:
1. For Defec#ive Concrete Repair: �
a. Filling: Filling of voids around items through the concrete.
b. Grout Spreading: Spread over construction joints, cold joints, and similar
type items.
2. Concrete Surfaces:
a. Apply epoxy-bonding agent to clean, roughened, and dry surfaces before
placing mortar or grout.
3. Placing:
a. Exercise particular care in placing Portland cement mortar or grout since
they are required to furnish structural strength, or impermeable water seal,
or both.
b. Do not use cement mortar or grout that has not been placed within
30 minutes after mixing.
October 26, 201Q - FINAL 10.03600-5 8235A10
' pw:llCarollo/DocumentslClienUWAlRenton/8235At0/Specificaoons110.03600
�
B. Epoxy Grout:
1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instaliation instructions.
2_ Use where specified herein or where indicated on the Drawings.
3.04 PLACEMENT
A. Grout shall only be installed after the final equipment alignment is correct and
accepted by the ENGINEER:
1. Grouts shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
2. Use mortar mixer with moving paddles for mixing grouts_ For cementitious
grouts, pre-wet the mixer and empty out excess water before beginning
mixing_
3. Cementitious Grouts:
a. Add non-shrink cementitious grout to a premeasured amount of water that
does not exceed the manufacturer's maximum recommended water
content.
b. Mix cementitious grouts per manufacturer's instructions for uniform
consistency. �
c. Grouts may be drypacked, flowed, or pumped into place_ All baseplate
grouting shall take place from one side of a baseplate to the other to avoid
trapping air. Do not overwork grouts.
d. Do not retemper grout by adding more water after stiffening.
e. Hydrostatic head pressure shall be maintained by keeping the level of the
grout in the headbox above the bottom of the baseplate. The headbox
should be filled to the maximum level and the grout worked down to top of
baseplate.
4. Epoxy Grauts:
a. Epoxy grouts shall be mixed in complete units. Do not vary the ratio of
components or add solvent to change the consistency of the mix.
b. Pour the hardener into the resin and mix for at least 1 minute and until
each mixture is uniform in color. Pour the chemical components into the
mortar mixer wheelbarrow and add the aggregate. Mix until aggregate is
uniformly wetted. Over mixing will cause air entrapment in the mix.
-c. All epoxy grout shall be flowed into place using a headbox. All grouting
shall take place from one side of a baseplate to the other in a continuous
flow to avoid trapping air.
d. Hydrostatic head pressure shall be maintained by keeping the level of
graut in headboxes above the bottom of baseplates. Headboxes shall be
filled to the maximum level and grout worked down to the bottom of
baseplates.
e. Epoxy grouts shall nat be cut back after setting. The final level of grout will
be as installed with all chamfer edges built into the formwork.
3.05 CURING
A. Cementitious Grouts:
1. Grouts must be cut back to the lower edge of baseplates after reaching initial
set. Provide a 45 degree angle cut back.
'
,
�
�
�
'
1
'
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
i
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03600-6 8235A10
pw:!lCarollolDocuments/GienWVA/Renton/8235A10/Specifica6onsl10.03600 '
I�
, _�
�
'
�
'
'
'
�
'
'
'
'
,
'
,
,
'
'
2_ Ciean equipment and tools as recommended by the grout manufacturer.
3. Cure grouts in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and
recommendations. Keep grout moist for a minimum of 3 days. The method
needed to protect grouts will depend on temperature, humidity, and wind. Wet
burlap, a soaker hose, sun shading, ponding, and, in extreme conditions, a
combination of inethods shall be employed.
4_ Grouts shall be maintained above 40 degrees Fahrenheit until they have
attained a compressive strength of 3,000 pounds per square inch, or above
70 degrees Fahrenheit for a minimum of 24 hours to avoid damage from
subsequent freezing.
B. Epoxy Grouts:
1. Cure grouts in accordance with manufacturers' specifications and
recommendations. Do not wet cure epoxy grouts_
2. Consult the manufacturer for appropriate cure schedule. In no case should any
surface in contact with epoxy grout be allowed to fall below 50 degrees
Fahrenheit for a minimum of 48 hours after placement.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
:
Non-shrink cementitious grouts shall be tested for 24 hour compressive strength in
accordance with ASTM C 109.
Non-shrink grouts shall be tested for 24 hour compressive strength in accordance
with ASTM C 579, Method B.
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03600-7 8235A10
� pw:/lCarollolDocumentslGientlWAlRenton/8235A10lSpecifications110.03600
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.03600-8 8235A10
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienUWA/Renton/8235A 10/Specifications110.03600
L
i
1
i
1
1
i
1
1
i
1
1
1
i
1
1
C�
�
I1
�
r-,
I�
L�
1
PART1 GENERAL
' 1.01 SUMMARY
�
'
�
LJ
�
'
,
'
�
'
'
,
�
SUB-SECTION 10.03925
CONCRETE REPAIR AND COATING
A. Sub-Section Includes: Field repair and coating of existing concrete.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all_
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10_09960A - Coatings.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
1. ACI 308R Guide to Curing Concrete.
B_ American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. C 496 - Standard Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens. •
2. C 580 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength and Modulus of Elasticity
of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer
Concretes.
3. D 16 - Standard Terminology for Paint and Related Coatings, Materials, and
Applications. �
4. D 1653 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Organic
Coating Films.
5. D 2794 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the
Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact).
6. D 4060 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings
by the Taber Abraser_
7. F 1869 — Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate
of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride.
C. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI):
1. Guideline No. 03732 — Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation
for Sealers, Coatings, and Polymer Overlays.
October 26, 2010 — FINAL 10_03925-1 8235A10
' pwllCarollo/Documents/GlienUWA/Renton/8235A10/Specifications/10.03925
D. NACE Intemational, The Corrosion Society (NACE):
1. RP0188-99 - Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Protective Coatings.
E. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):
1. SP-2 - Hand Tool Cleaning_
2. SP-3 - Power Tool Cleaning.
3. SP-5 — White Metal Blast Cleaning_
4. SP-10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning.
5. SP-13 — Surface Preparation of Concrete.
6. SSPC — Guide for Illumination of Industrial Painting Products_
7. SSPC-PA3 — A Guide to Safety in Paint Applications.
8. SSPC - Volume I and II, Good Painting Practice.
1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Fumish All Labor, Tools, Equipment, Materials, and Other Items Required to:
1. Repair damaged/deteriorated concrete as determined necessary and as
required by ENGINEER; if required, it will be added as change order. Do not
include in Total Bid Amount.
2. Repair cracks in concrete by epoxy injection as determined necessary and as
required by ENGINEER; if required, it will be added as change order_ Engineer
to provide specification for epoxy injection if required_ Do not include in Total
Bid Amount.
3. Apply 100 percent solids Polyamine Epoxy coating to all concrete surfaces as
specified herein.
B: As determined necessary by ENGINEER, remove piping, fittings, and associated '
items where work is to be accomplished_ Replace and coat such.items upon
completion of work.
1.04 AREAS OF WORK
A. Interior surfaces of existing 'Westview Lift Station as indicated on the Drawings
and described herein:
Prepare, repair, and coat all interior surfaces.
1.05 SEQUENCE OF WORK
A_ Prepare interior surFaces of Westview Lift Station in preparation for viewing by
ENGINEER, OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and Coating Manufacturer's Technical
Representative:
1. Steam clean and degrease all interior surfaces_
2. Remove any items as required by ENGINEER, such as piping, brackets, prior
to abrasive blast cleaning of concrete surfaces, or
a. Abrasive blast clean such items in place.
3. Abrasive blast clean all concrete surfaces to remove loose concrete and
provide a"broom" type finish similar to 60-gnt sandpaper.
October 26, 2010 — FINAL 10_03925-2
pw1/CarollolDocumentslClienf/WA/Rentonl8235A 10/Specifica6ons/10.03925
'
'
,
'
'
'
�
8235A10
,
�
'
'
�
'
�
�
'
,
'
'
�
u
'
'
'
,
'
B. Upon completion of review of interior surfaces of each structure by ENGINEER and
determination made by ENGINEER that concrete repair is required, CONTRACTOR
shall prepare and submit a cost proposal to ENGINEER for concrete repair work to
be completed prior to application of coating.
C. Complete all Modification Work in Westview Lift Station as specified in Contract
Documents:
1. Replace all items previously removed and prepare for coating app�ication.
D. Complete all concrete repair work, necessary epoxy injection work, additional
abrasive blast cleaning, and coating application as specified and required by
ENGINEER and in this Section.
E. Perform inspection and necessary repairs to coating as specified in this Sub-
Section.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
.
�
'�
E.
Shop Drawings: Submit prior to start of work.
Product Data (General}: Submit prior to start of work.
Product Data for 1Q0 Percent Solids Polyamine Epoxy Coating:
1_ Manufacturer's literature including installation procedure and warranty for
coating system.
2. Manufacturer's letter of declaration to maintain local permanent inventory and
field technical services during coating application and Warranty period.
3. Test results of product from approved material testing laboratory certifying that
product meets or exceeds required physical properties.
4. Certification of manufacturer's technical services representative.
Testing procedure in accordance with ASTM D 1653.
Coating repair pracedures.
F. Coating Applicator Licensing:
1_ Approval and licensing by manufacturer of 100 percent solids Polyamine
Epoxy coating for coating applicator to apply this system.
2. Certification from patent holder of Eco System expansion process for
100 percent solids Polyamine Epoxy coating that coating applicator is certified
to utilize this process.
G
W
Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit in accordance with requirements for Product
Data.
Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Observation Letters.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Concrete Repair CONTRACTOR:
October 26, 2010 — FINAL 10.03925-3 8235A10
, pwllCarollo/DocumentslClienUWlURenton/8235A10/Specifica�orul10.03925
'
,
2
Manufacturer of specified concrete repair products shall have in existence, for
a minimum of 10 years, a program of training, certifying, and technically
supporting an approved CONTRACTOR program with annual education of its
participants.
Provide list of at least 5 job references where CONTRACTOR has successfully
repaired spalled concrete surfaces.
B. Qualifications of 100 Percent Solids Polyamine Epoxy Coating Applicator:
1. At least 5 years experience applying type of coating under conditions similar to
the Work specified herein:
a. Submit list of 5 references for similar projects completed.
C. Qualifications of 100 percent solids Polyamine Epoxy Coating Manufacturer's
Technical Services Representative_
a. Minimum 3 years experience involving applications of 100 percent solids
Polyamine Epoxy.
b. Shall be available as required to support application of specified product.
D. Regulatory Requirements: Include requirements concerning the following:
1. SSPC — Volume I and II, Good Painting Practice.
E_ Pre-Instaflation Conference:
1. Conduct prior to start of work at mutually agreed time by OWNER and
CONTRACTOR_ One week notice will be provided.
2. Coating Manufacturer's Technical Services Representative shall attend
Pre-installation Conference.
F_ Certification: Certify that coatings to be applied are resistant to deterioration when
exposed to hydrogen sulfide and other sewage gases.
G. Field Samples: Prepare and coat a small area befinreen corners or limits such as
control or constructian joints of each system. Accepted field sample may be part of
Work. Field sample can be observed as a running start.
,
�
'
�
'
'
'
'
'
�
H. Compatibility of Coatings: Use products by same manufacturer for prime coats, '
intermediate coats, and finish coats on same surface.
Services of Coatings Manufacturer's Technicaf Representative: Arrange for Coating
Manufacturer's Technical Representative to attend pre-installation conferences and
to make periodic visits to the project site to provide observations and
recommendations during surface preparation and application of coatings.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Remove unspecified and unapproved materials from Project site immediately
'
,
,
B. Deliver containers with labels identifying the manufacturer's name, brand name, '
product type, batch number, date of manufacturer, expiration date or shelf life, color,
and mixing and reducing instructions.
C�
October 26, 2010 — FINAL 10.03925-4 8235A10
pw1/CarollolDocumentslClienUWA/Renton18235A10/Specifica 6ons/10.03925
,
11
�
, C_ Store materials in a well-ventilated facility that provides protection from the sun,
weather, and fire hazards. Maintain ambient storage temperature between 50 and
90 degrees Fahrenheit, unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.
i�
,
�
'
'
,
,
�
�
�
D. Take precautions to prevent fire and spontaneous combustion.
1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A_ Surface Moisture Contents: Do not coat surfaces that exceed testing requirements
of ASTM F 1869 and coating manufacturer specified moisture contents.
B. Do Not Coat:
1. Under dusty conditions.
2. When light on surfaces measures less than 15 foot-candles.
3. When ambient or surface temperature is less than 45 degrees Fahrenheit.
4. When relative humidity is higher than 85 percent.
5. When surface temperature is less than 5 degrees Fahrenheit above dewpoint.
6. When surface temperature exceeds coating manufacturer's recommendation.
7. When ambient temperature exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit, unless coating
manufacturer allows a higher temperature.
C. Provide fans, heating devices, dehumidification equipment, or other means
recommended by manufacturer to prevent formation of condensate or dew on
surface of substrate, coating between coats, and within curing time following
application of last coat.
D. Prepare and apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.10 WARRANTY:
A_ Provide 3 year warranty for all concrete repair and coating work accomplished
under this Contract stating that CONTRACTOR will provide all labor and materials
to repair any defects that occur within 3 years from completion and acceptance date
of work at no cost to OWNER.
' PART2 PRODUCTS
'
�
�
�
2.01 NIANUFACTURERS
A. Polymer-Modified Portland Cement Mortar Concrete Repair Materials: One of the
following or equaL-
1. Tnemec Company, Inc.
a. Mortarcrete, Series 217.
b. MortarClad, Series 218.
B. 100 Percent Solids Polyamine Epoxy Coating Materials: One of the following or
equal:
1. Tnemec Company, Inc.
a_ Perma-Shield FR, Series 436
October 26, 2010 — FINAL 10_03925-5 8235A10
� pwl/Caro1M/DocumentslClienflWAfRenton/8235A10/Specifica6ons/10.03925
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Polymer-Modifietl Portland Cement Mortar for Vertical and Horizontal Surfiaces: One
of the following or equal:
1. Tnemec Company, Inc.
a_ Mortarcrete, Series 217.
b. MortarClad, Series 218.
B. Reinforcing Steel Coating:
1. Coat all exposed reinforcing steel with high solids epoxy immersed service, as
specified in Sub-Section 10_09960A, before installation of final concrete repair
material.
C. Polyamine Epoxy Coating:
1. Two components, 100 percent solids.
2_ Certified by an approved material testing laboratory to be resistant to hydrogen
sulfide and sodium hypochlorite and meet the followin requirements:
Physical Properties Test Method Resutts
Durometer Hardness @ 75 ASTM D 2240 42-70 Shore D
Degrees Fahrenheit, Shore D
Tensile Strength ASTM D 2370 6000 pounds per square
inch, minimum
Abrasion Resistance ASTM D 4060 124 milligrams,
minimum
Impact Resistance ASTM D 2794 56 pounds per square
inch, minimum
Adhesion ASTM D 4541 Greater than 680
pounds per square inch
Water Vapor Transmission ASTM D 1653 At 75 degrees F, no
and Permeability Test Method B more than 3.16 g/m2 per
24 hr water vapor
transmission and 0.243
perms water vapor
permeability
3. 5ystems:
a. Mortarcrete, Series 217.
b. MortarC{ad, Series 218.
c. Perma-Shield FR, Series 436:
1) Apply cementitious mortar(s) as required to create pinhole free
surface, consisting of a minimum of 1/16-inch. Apply a minimum 80
mils topcoat Polyamide Epoxy.
2.03 PERFORMANCE
A. Polymer-Modified Portland Cement Mortar for Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces
1. Properties of Mixed Polymer-Modified Portland Cement Mortar:
a. Working Time: 10 to 15 minutes_
October 26, 2010 — FINAL 10.03925-6 8235A10
pwll CarollolDocumentslClientNVA/Renton18235A10/Specifica6ons/t 0.03925
i
i�
�
i
b. Finishing Time: 20 to 60 minutes.
c_ Color_ Concrete grey.
2. One of the following or equal:
a. Tnemec Company, Inc.
1 } Mortarcrete, Series 217.
2) MortarClad, Series 218.
IPART 3 EXECUTION
1 3.01 GENERAL PREPARATION
A. As required, and as required by ENGINEER: remove all existing piping, pipe
' hangers, concrete inserts, and other items as necessary from areas where repair
and coating of concrete is required to facilitate repair and coating work as specified
herein, and acceptable to ENGINEER.
'
f�
�
�
�
�
�
,
,
�
�
�
B. Prepare in accordance with ICRI CSP-5.
C_ Utilize ICRI standards to remove damaged and deteriorated concrete for repair and
coating:
1. For areas with less than 1/4 inch concrete deterioration, provide the polymer
modified portland cement mortar repair, Series 218, as specified in this Sub-
Section.
2. For areas of concrete deterioration between 1/4 inch and 2 inches, provide the
polymer modified portland cement mortar repair, Series 217, as specified in
this Sub-Section.
3. For area with concrete deterioration beyond 2 inches, with exposed reinforcing
bars, the concrete must be chipped back to 4-1/2 inches and reinforcing bars
repaired as required.
D. Remove Loose Concrete from Spalled Areas and Cracks:
1. In areas where concrete deterioration dovetails to original concrete surface,
make entire cavity to be repaired at least 1/2 inch deep from original concrete
surface by means of saw-cutting.
2. Provide straight edges, a minimum of 1/2 inch deep in sound concrete
2-inches away from deterioration.
3. Repair with polymer modified mortar, Series 217/218, so as to provide a
minimum of 1/4 inch not to exceed 2 inches, of concrete repair material at all
locations_
4. Prepare surface edges of cavity by'/4-inch by'/4-inch saw cut.
5. Remove dust, dirt, and loosely bonded material resulting from cleaning.
6. Ensure cavity surfaces are dry.
E. Use following procedures where reinforcing steel with active corrosion is
encountered:
1. Clean exposed reinforcing bars to SSPC SP10 standard.
2. Determine reinforcement bar section loss, splice new reinforcing bars where
there is more than 15 percent loss as determined by ENGINEER. If more than
October 26, 2010 — FINAL 10.03925-7 8235A10
pwJlCarollolDocuments/ClienUWAlRenton/8235A1 D/Specifications/10.03925
-,
�
�
3
half the diameter of reinforcing steel is exposed, chip out behind reinforcing
steel a minimum of 1/2 inch_ Cut reinforcing bars, butt weld new reinforcing
bars to undamaged existing reinforcing bars and place polymer modified
portland cement to original surface.
Coat all exposed reinforcing steel with high solids epoxy immersed service, as
specified in Sub-Section 10.09960A, before installation of final concrete repair
material. `
�
�
'
F. Restore damaged and deteriorated edges with approved concrete repair material '
and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
G. For All Concrete Repair Areas:
1_ Provide smooth steel towel finish free from trowel marks and depressions
greater than 1/4 inch.
2. Allow concrete repair areas to cure for minimum of 18 hours before application
of Polyamine Epoxy coating, or as recommended by manufacturer of
Polyamine Epoxy coating. „
3. Provide heaters, fans, or dehumidification equipment as required to allow
concrete surfaces to cure and be dry, as recommended by manufacturer of
Polyamine Epoxy coating, prior to application of coating.
,
�
,
H. Expansion Joints: t
1. Seal expansion joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
I. Inspection:
1. After completion of surface preparation OWNER, ENGINEER, and Coating
Manufacturer's Technical Representative, will inspect all surfaces to be coated
prior to coating.
2. Specified cleanliness shall be verified through the use of accepted practice in
accordance with SSPC or NACE standards.
3_ Utilize visual comparators to verify the specified level of cleanliness.
J. Abrasive-Blast and Concrete Debris: Remove debris generated from the preparation
operations from the structures. Haul and dispose of debris in accordance with all
Federal, State, and local regulations_
3.02 COATING APPLICATION
A_ Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B_ All surfaces receiving the coating shall be visually dry and at least 5 degrees
Fahrenheit (3 degrees Centigrade) above the dew point prior to starting the
installation to prevent moisture entrapment:
1. The Relative Humidity must be below 85 percent_
2_ Test surfaces to be coated in accordance with ASTM D 4264. Test method for
indicating moisture in concrete is by the plastic sheet method.
C_ Compressed air used for coating application shall be clean and free of oil and water.
October 26, 2010 — FINAL 10.03925-8 8235A10
pwJ/Ca roI lo/Docume ntslClient/WA/Renton/8235A 10/Specifica tions/10.03925
'
�
�
�
'
�
L
I
�
�
1
�I
i
�
�
��
„
�;
'
�
,
�
��
�
'
j
�
�
�
D_ Use pnmer only at direction of, and as recommended by Coating Manufacturer's
Technical Representative.
E. Materials Conditioning: Perform in accordance with manufacturer's latest published
data. Control temperature in order to produce a repeatable finished product on each
application.
F. Deposition of Materials: Apply coating to be monolithic and cohesive in nature and
to minimize hand work repair.
G. Leading Edges: Install a mechanical anchor for the leading edge of the applied
coating material:
1. Leading edge mechanical anchor shall consist of a saw cut to a minimum
depth of 1/4 inch and width of 1/8 inch.
2. Sharp edges of the saw cut shall be rounded, dried, and cleaned of debris.
3. After cleaning, solid base Polyamine Epoxy coating shall be applied into the
saw cut, taking care to penetrate to full depth. The use of a trowel or putty
knife might be required.
H. Curing:
1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations as to environmental conditions
under which lining system materials can be applied.
2. Prepare surfaces and apply cure coatings within air and surFace temperature
range in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Cleanup: Clean spillage and overspray from adjacent surfaces as recommended by
coating system manufacturer.
3.03 INSPECTION AiVD TESTING
A. The following inspection equipment (or engineer accepted equal) shall be provided
by the CONTRACTOR and utilized for performing quality control testing:
1. Sling psychrometer.
2. Surface temperature thermometer.
3. Ambient temperature thermometer_
4. Psychrometric charts for determining relative humidity and dew point.
5. High range wet and dry film thickness gauges.
6. Micrometer.
7. Durometer: A Scale.
8. Sample cans.
9. Inspection Glass: 30 power minimum.
10. High voltage holiday detector.
B. The following quality control tests shall be performed, with results recorded and
made avaifable to ENGINEER:
1. Compressed air quality in accordance with blotter test.
2. Environmental conditions prior to coating application, including substrate
temperature, ambient temperature, relative humidity, and dew point.
October 26, 2010 — FINAL 10_03925-9 . 8235A10
� pwl/Carollo/Documents/ClienUWAlRenton/8235A10/Specificafions/10.03925
3. Observation of surface preparation, inciuding anchor. pattern prior to coating
application_
4. Wet and dry film thickness measurements.
C. OWNER, ENGINEER, and Coating Manufacturer's Technical Representative shall
be given sufficient notice so as to be present when the following hold points are
reached=
1_ Completion of surface preparation.
2. Prior to coating application.
3. Dunng wet and dry film thickness measurements.
4. During holiday detection testing.
5. During coating repairs.
D_ Surface Cleanliness, pH Condition: Use either pH paper or a pH meter to determine
the pH of the concrete surface. A pH range of 5 to 9 is considered acceptable.
E. Enlist the aid of various tests and implement those tests to verify the integrity of the
appiied coating. Permit OWtvER, ENGINEER, and Coating �ianufaciurers
Technical Representative full access at all times to observe and be satisfied that the
specification is being followed.
F. Wet film thickness shall be monitored throughout the coating installation by means
of frequent measurements with a high-range wet film thickness gauge.
G. All layers of material shall be applied within the manufacturer's recommended time '
frame to ensure minimization of contamination of coating.
H. Coating shall be 100 percent electronically tested using high voltage in accordance
with NACE procedure RP0188-88 inspected for discontinuities to include pinholes,
voids, and mechanically damaged areas_
1. Any damaged areas, faulty areas, or discontinuities (pinholes) found during
holiday detection within a 24-hour (within recoat window) period of application
shall be corrected as follows:
a. Damaged or Faulty Areas (i.e., impact damage, off-ratio application):
Clean area thoroughly, extending at least 6 inches beyond damaged area
with MEK dampened cloth_ Abrade 100 percent of repaired area prior to
2
October 26, 2010 — FINAL 10.03925-10
pwllCarollolDocumentstClientNVA/Renton/8235A10/Specifications/10.03925
coating.
b. Discontinuity (Pinhole) Repair Clean the immediate area arflund the
detected discontinuity with MEK dampened c{oth (do not apply excessive
MEK to pinhole area, the intent is to clean only). Abrade 100 percent of
repaired area prior to coating.
Any damaged areas, faulty areas, or discontinuities (pinholes) found during
holiday detection inspection after 24 hours of coating installation (exceeding
recoat window) shall be corrected as follows=
a. Damaged or Faulty Areas (i.e., impact damage, off-ratio application, etc.):
Abrade the surface using a power grinder and/or power steel grinding
brush down to and including exposed bare concrete to roughen the
surFace and to prepare the substrate to the original standard. Abraded
areas shall extend at least 6 inches (15 centimeter.) beyond damaged or
�
�
�
'
�
�
��
L�
,
8235A10
�
i
1
i
,
�
I,
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
L_J
i
�
�
�
�
�
faulty area. After abrading the surface, vacuum or blow down with clean,
dry compressed air thoroughly to remove all loose particles. Clean the
area thoroughly, extending at least 6 inches (15 centimeter) beyond the
damaged area with MEK dampened eloth (do not apply excessive MEK to
pinhole area, the intent is to clean only), allow MEK to thoroughly dry.
When thoroughly dry to touch, spray area with coating to the specified
thickness, feathering the material into the existing prepared coating.
b. Discontinuity (Pinhole) Repair: Abrade (hand sand or power tool clean)
the immediate areas around the detected pinhole (1/2 inch radius from
edge of discontinuity) to establish a roughed surface, and to prepare the
substrate to the original standard, followed with vacuuming or blow down
with clean, dry compressed air to remove loose particles. After dust
removal, wipe abraded area with MEK dampened cloth. Do not apply
excessive MEK to pinhole area_ The intent is to clean only. Allow MEK to
thoroughly dry. Hand apply (putty Knife, etc.) a small amount of mixed
material directly to the pinhole. For pinhole repairs, hand mix and
±horoughly blend a sma!I am�unt (r.erma!!y to thres �unces at a time for
each appficator) or Part A and Part B in correct ratios.
3.04 REPLACEMENT OF REMOVED ITEMS
A. Clean and recoat items removed from work areas prior to commencing work such
as piping, pipe hangers, and associated equipment replace in like manner as
removed.
3.05 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTAMCE
A. Finallnspection:
1. Following replacement of previously removed items, a final inspection of the
repaired and coated structures shall be made by ENGINEER, OWNER,
CONTRACTOR, and the Coating Manufacturer's Technical Representative.
2. Any damage that has occurred to the coating shall be repaired in accordance
with the coating manufacturer's instructions.
B. Final Acceptance:
1. Written final acceptance of the concrete repair and coating work accomplished
to the interiors of the Westview Liff Station, as specified in the Contract
Documents, shall be prepared by the ENGINEER or OWNER and issued to
the CONTRACTOR, with a copy to the coating manufacturer.
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 — FINAL 10.03925-11 � 8235A10
� pwJ/Carollo/DocumentslGlientNVAlRenton18235A101Specificationsl10.03925
October 26, 2010 — FINAL 10.03925-12
pwJl Carollo/Documents/Ciient(WAlRenton18235A10/Specifications/10.03925
�
�
�
i
i
�
�
i
t
1
�
1
�
1
�
I
1
1
8235A10
�
SUB-SECTION 10.05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes:
1. Structural steel shapes and piate.
2. Fasteners:
a. All thread rods.
b. Anchor bolts.
c_ Assembly bolts.
d. Concrete anchors.
e. Deformed bar anchors.
f. Eyebolts.
g. High strength bolts.
h. Powder actuated fasteners.
i. Sleeve anchors.
j. Welded studs.
3. Isolation sleeves and washers_
4. Thread coating.
5_ Welding.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities perfiorming
or fumishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section_ This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents_
a. Sub-Section 10.03055 - Epoxy Bonding Reinforcing Bars and All Thread
Rods In Concrete.
b. Sub-Section 10.09960A - Coatings.
� 1.02 REFERENCES
1
�
A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):
1. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_05120-1 8235A10
� pw:f/CaroIIWDocuments�ClienWYNRentoN8235At015pecificationsl10A5120
1. B212-15 - Cutting Tools - Carbide-tipped Masonry Drilis and Blanks for
Carbide-tipped Masonry Drills.
C. American Welding Society (AWS):
1. A5.1 - Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc
Welding.
2. A5.17 - Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Fluxes forSubmerged
Arc Welding.
3. A5.ZD - Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding.
4_ D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
5. D10_4 - Recommended Practices for Welding Austenitic Chromium-Nickel
Stainless Steel Piping and Tubing.
D. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A 29 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought,
General Requirements for.
2. A 36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
3. A 53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,
Zinc-Coated, Welded, and Seamless.
4. A 108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Cold
Finished.
5. A 123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products.
6. A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
7. A 240 - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General
Applications.
8. A 276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
9. A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI
Tensile Strength.
10. A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
11. A 489 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes.
12. A 490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated,
150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
13. A 496 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete
Reinforcement.
14. A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
15. A 501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Focmed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing.
16. A 992 - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes.
17. F 593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and
Studs.
18. F 959 - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension
Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners.
E. International Code Council Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES):
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.05120-2 8235A10
pwllCa rollofDocuments/ClienWYA/Rentonl8235A 10/Specfica6ons110.05120
��
'
�
�
�
I
�
�
�
r
�i
�
�
�
�
i
�
�
1. AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements.
2. AC58 - Acceptance Criteria for Adhesive Anchors in Masonry Elements.
3. AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements.
4. AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete
Elements_
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality control submittals:
1. Submit shop drawings of inembers to be fabricated before starting their
fabrication. .
2. Welder's certificates.
B. Test reports:
1. Certified copies of mill tests and analyses made in accordance with applicable
ASTM standards, or reports from a recognized commercial laboratory,
including chemical and tensile properties of each shipment of structural steel
or part thereof having common properties.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Perform welding of structural metals with welders who have current AWS
certificate for the type of welding to be performed.
2. Steel fabricators shall be certified by the AISC ar other certification as
recognized and accepted by the local building official having jurisdiction.
3. Notify ENGINEER 24 hours minimum before starting shop or field welding.
4. ENGINEER may check materials, equipment, and qualifications of welders.
5. Remove welders performing unsatisfactory Work, or require to requalify.
6. ENGINEER may use gamma ray, magnetic particle, dye penetrant,
trepanning, or other aids to visual inspection to examine any part of welds or
all welds.
7. CONTRACTOR shall bear costs of retests on defective welds.
8. CONTRACTOR shall also bear costs in connection with qualifying welders.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
�
'�
Packing and shipping: Deliver structural steel free from mill scale, rust, and pitting_
Storage and protection: Until erection and painting, protect from weather items not
galvanized or protected by a shop coat of paint.
IPART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERlALS
'
�
i
A. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, materials shall conform to
the following:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.05120-3 8235A10
pw:!(CarollolDocumentslClienUWAtRenton18235At 0/5pecificaUons/10.05120
Class, Grade, Type, or
Item ASTM Standard Alloy Number
Stainiess steel
Piate, sheet, and strip A 240 Type 304* or 316**
Bars and shapes A 276 Type 304* or 316**
* Use Type 304L if material will be welded.
** Use Type 316L if material will be welded.
B. Where stainless steel is welded, use low-carbon stainless steel.
2.02 FASTENERS
A. General: Furnish threaded fasteners, except high strength bolts, with flat washers,
and sglf-locking nuts, or lock washers and nuts.
1_ Bolt heads and nuts: Hex-type_
2. Bolts, nuts, and washers: Of domestic manufacture.
B. All thread rods:
1. Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F 593 for use in wet and
moist locations, including:
a. Water-containing structures: �
1) Below and at water level.
2) Above water level:
a) Below top of walls af water-containing structures.
b) Under the roof, slab, beam, or walkway of enclosed water-
containing structures_
3) Dry side of walls of water-containing structures.
b_ Pump bases.
2. Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F 593 for
aluminum assemblies.
C. All thread rods bonded in holes drilled in concrete with epoxy_ As specified in Sub-
Section 10_03055 and as indicated on the Drawings.
D. Anchor bolts:
1. Anchor bolts, nuts, and washers: Type 316 staintess steel in accordance with
ASTM F 593 for use in wet and moist locations, including:
a. Water-containing structures:
1) Below and at water level.
2) Above water level:
a) Below top of walls of water-containing structures.
b) Under the roof, slab, beam, or walkway of enclosed water-
containing structures.
3) Dry side of walls of water-containing structures.
b. Pump bases.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.05120-4 8235A10
pw://Carollo/DocumentslClienUWA/Renton/8235A 10/Specifica6ons110.05120
j
�
�
�
1
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
L�
�
�
2. Anchor boits, nuts, and washers: Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel for
fastening aluminum to concrete or steel.
E. Assembly boits:
1. Bolts, nuts, and washers for wood baffles, collectors, and other field-
assembled construction: Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with
ASTM F 593 for use in wet and moist locations, including:
a. Water-containing structures:
1) Below and at water level.
2) Above water level:
a) Below top of walls of water-containing structures.
b) Under the roof, slab, beam, or walkway of enclosed water-
containing structures.
c) Dry side of walls of water-containing structures.
b. Pump bases.
2. Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F 593 for
aluminum assemblies.
F. Concrete anchors:
1. Concrete anchors for anchorage to concrete:
a. Concrete anchors shall have current ICC-ES Report that demonstrates
compliance with ICC-ES AC193 for cracked concrete.
b. Manufacturers: One of the following or approved equal:
1) Hilti Incorporated, Kwik Bolt TZ Expansion Anchor.
2) Simpson Strong Tie, Strong Bolt Wedge Anchor.
2_ Concrete anchor's integral threaded stud, wedge, washer, and nut: Type 304
or Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F 593. For use in wet
and moist locations, including:
a. Water-containing structures:
1) Below and at water level_
2) Above water level:
a) Below top of walls of water-containing structures.
b) Under the roof, slab, beam, or walkway of enclosed water-
containing structures.
3) Dry side of walls of water-containing structures.
b_ Pump bases.
3. Concrete anchor's integral threaded stud, wedge, washer, and nut: Type 304
or 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F 593 for fastening aluminum
to concrete or steel.
4_ Do not use slug-in, lead cinch, and similar systems relying on deformation of
lead alloy or similar materials in order to develop holding power.
G. Deformed bar anchors: In accardarice with ASTM A 496:
1_ Manufacturers: One of the following or approved equal:
a. Nelson Stud Welding Company, D2L Deformed Bar Anchors.
b. Stud Welding Products, DBA (Deformed Bar) Anchors.
H. Eyebolts:
1. Welded or forged, when manufactured of materials other than carbon steel.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.05120-5 8235A10
pwJ/CarollolDoartnent4ClienUWAlRentonl8235At 0/Specifica6ons110.05120
2. Having geometric and strength characteristics of eyebolts in accordance with
ASTM A 489, Type 1. The strength characteristics include proof load
requirements, breaking strength requirements, tensile strength requirements,
bend test, and impact strength.
High strength all thread rods: In accordance with ASTM A 193, Grade B7. Hot-dip
galvanize.
J_ High strength bolts: High strength bolts, nuts, and hardened flat washers shall be in
accordance with ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490, as indicated on the Drawings.
K. Powder actuated fasteners: �
1. For installation in concrete or steel: Zinc coated, heat-treated, alloy steel.
2. Fasteners not sufficiently protected against corrosion from exposure to
corrosive conditions: Coat as necessary to make suitable for such conditions.
3_ Pins: Fumish with head or threaded stud capable of transmitting loads to
shank.
4. Pins connected to steel: Furnish with longitudinal serrations around
circumference of shank_
L. Sleeve anchors:
1. Sleeve anchors for anchorage to concrete:
a. Sleeve anchors shall have current ICC-ES Report that demonstrates
compliance with ICC-ES AC193 for cracked concrete.
b. Manufacturers_ One of the following or approved equal:
1) Hilti Incorporated, HSL-3 Heavy Duty Sleeve Anchor.
2. Use stainless material for aluminum and stainless attachments.
3. For use in wet and moist locations, including locations listed below. Use
Type 304 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F 593 for sleeve anchor's
intemal bolt, expansion sleeve, extension sleeve, and washer. Use Type 303
stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F 593 for sleeve anchors expansion
�
5
C
cone.
a. Water-containing structures:
1) Below and at water level_
2) Above water level:
a) Below top of walls of water-containing structures_
b) Under the roof, slab, beam, or walkway of enclosed water-
containing structures.
3) Dry side of walls of water-containing structures.
b. Pump bases.
For fastening aluminum to concrete or steel, use Type 304 stainless steel in
accordance with ASTM F 593 for sleeve anchor's internal bott, expansion
sleeve, extension sleeve_ Use Type 303 stainless steel in accordance with
ASTM F 593 for sleeve anchor's expansion cone.
The sleeve anchor shall have a nylon compression ring which compresses to
ensure that the material being fastened is tightly secured against the concrete.
Do not use slug-in, lead cinch, and similar systems relying on deformation of
lead alloy or similar materials in order to develop holding power_
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.05120-6 8235A10
pwllCarollolDocuments/Client/WA/Rentonl8235A 101Specifications110.05120
t
�
�
M. Welded studs:
1. ASTM A 108 with 50,000-pounds per square inch minimum yield strength, and
60,000-pounds per square inch minimum tensile strength.
2. Headed studs: Manufacturers: One of the following or approved equal:
a_ Nelson Stud Welding Company, S3L Shear Connectors or H4L Concrete
Anchors_
b. Stud Welding Products, Headed Concrete Anchors or Shear Connectors.
2.03 ISOLATING SLEEVES AND WASHERS
I A. Manufacturers: One of the following or approved equal:
1. Central Plastics Company, Shawnee, Oklahoma.
2. Corrosion Control Products, PSI Inc., Gardena, CA.
�
�]
�
�
1
�
B. Sleeves_ Mylar, 1/32 inch thick, 4,000 volts per mil dielectric strength, of proper size
to fit bolts and extending half way into both steel washers.
1. 1 slee��e required f�r each bolt.
C. Washers: The inside diameter of all washer shall fit over the isolating sleeve and
both the steel and isolating washers shall have the same inside diameter and
outside diameter_
1. Proper size to fit bolts. Two insulating washers are required for each fiolt.
2. Two 1/8-inch thick steel washers for each bolt.
3. G3 Phenolic:
a_ Thickness: 1/8 inch.
b. Base material: Glass.
c. Resin: Phenolic.
d_ Water absorption: 2 percent.
e. Hardness (Rockwell): 100.
f. Dielectric strength: 450 volts per mil_
g_ Compression strength: 50,000 pounds per square inch.
h_ Tensile strength: 20,000 pounds per square inch.
i_ Maximum operating temperature: 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
2.04 THREAD COATING
� A. Manufacturers: One of the following or approved equal:
1. Never Seez Compound Corporation, Never-Seez.
2. Oil Research, Inc., WLR No. 111.
� 2.Q5 SUPPLEMENTARY PARTS
�
�
�
A. Furnish as required for complete structural steel erection, whether or not such parts
and Work are specified or indicated on the Drawings.
2.06 FABRlCATION
A. Shop assembly:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.05120-7 8235A10
� pwl/CamllolDocumentslClientlWAlRenton18235A10/Speafications/1Q.05120
2.
3
4.
5.
6.
Fabricate structural steel in accordance with AISC "Specification for the
Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design,"
unless otherwise specified or modified by applicable regulatory requirements.
Where anchors, connections, or other details of structural steel are not
specifically indicated on the Drawings or specified, their material, size and
form shall be equivalent in quality and workmanship to items specified.
For Structural members such as W shapes, S shapes, channels, angles, and
similar members not available in quantity, size, and type of stainless steel
specified or indicated on the Drawings:
a. Fabricate by welding together pieces of low carbon stainless steel plate,
such as Type 316L.
b. Make full penetration welds between pieces of plate to attain same or
higher section modulus and moment of inertia as members indicated on
the Drawings.
Round off sharp and hazardous projections and grind smooth.
Take measurements necessary to properly fit work in the field. Take
responsibility for and be Qoverned by the measurements and proper working
out of all the details.
Take responsibility for correct fitting of all metal work.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3,01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of conditions: Examine Work in place to verify that it is satisfactory to
receive the Work of this Sub-Section. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not begin
this Work until such conditions have been corrected.
3.02 ERECTION
A. General:
1_ Fabricate structural and foundry items to true dimensions without warp or twist.
2_ Form welded closures neatly, and grind off smooth where weld material
interFeres with fit or is unsightly.
3. Install structural items accurately and securely, true to level, plumb, in correct
alignment and grade, with all parts bearing or fitting structure or equipmerit for
which intended.
4. Do not cock ouf of alignment, redrill, reshape, or force fit fabricated items.
5. Place anchor bolts or other anchoring devices accurately and make surfaces
that bear against structural items smooth and level.
6. Rigidly support and brace structural items needing special alignment to
preserve straight, level, even, and smooth lines. Keep structural items braced
until concrete, grout, or dry pack mortar has hardened for 48 hours minimum.
7_ Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC "Specification for Structural
Steel Buildings - Aflowable Stress Design and Plastic Design," unless
otherwise specified or modified by applicable regulatory requirements.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.05120-8 8235A10
pw:/lCarollo/Documents/ClienUWAlRenton18235A 10ISpecificationsl10.05120
�
�
LJ
�
�
�
8. Where anchors, connections, and other details of structural steel erection are
not specifically indicated on the Drawings or specified, form, locate, and attach
with equivalent in quality and workmanship to items specified.
9. Round off sharp or hazardous projections ancl grind smooth.
B. Welding - General: �
1. Make welds full penetration type, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
2. Remove backing bars and weld tabs after completion of weld. Repair defective
welds observed after removal of backing bars and weld tabs.
� C. Welding stainless steel:
1. General: Comply in accordance with AWS D1.1.
a. Perform with electrodes and techniques in accordance with AWS D10.4.
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
,�
�
LJ
�
�
D. Intertace with other products_
1. Where.steel fasteners come in contact with aluminum or other dissimilar
metals, bolt with stainless steel bolts and separate or isolate from dissimilar
metals with isolating sleeves and washers.
a. Prior to installing nuts, coat threads of stainless steel fasteners with thread
coating to prevent galling of threads.
E. Fasteners:
1. General:
a. Install bolts, including anchor bolts and concrete anchors, to project
2 threads minimum, but 1/2 inch maximum beyond nut.
b. Unless otherwise specified, tighten bolts, including anchor bolts and
concrete anchors, to the "snug-tight" condition, defined as tightness
attained by a few impacts of an impact wrench or the full effort of a man
using an ordinary spud wrench.
2. All thread rods bonded in drilted holes in concrete with epoxy: As specified in
Sub-Section 10.03055 and as indicated on the Drawings.
3. Anchor bolts:
a. Cast-in-place when concrete is placed.
b. Accurately locate anchor bolts embedded in concrete with bolts
perpendicular to surface from which they project_
c. Do not allow anchor bolts to touch reinforcing steel.
d. Where anchor bolts are within 1/4 inch of reinforcing steel, isolate with a
minimum of 4 wraps of 10-mil polyvinyl chloride tape in area adjacent to
reinforcing steel.
e. In anchoring machinery bases subject to heavy vibration, use 2 nuts, with
1 serving as a locknut.
f_ Where bolts are indicated on the Drawings for future use, first coat
thoroughly with non-oxidizing wax, then turn nuts down full depth of thread
and neatly wrap exposed thread with waterproof polyvinyl tape.
g. Furnish anchor bolts with standard hex bolt head or an equivalent head
acceptable to ENGINEER unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. "L"
or "J" anchor bolts are not equivalent to an anchor bolt with a hex bolt
head_
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.05120-9 8235A10
� pwi/CarollolDocuments�ClienUWA/Renton18235A10/Specifirafions110.05120
�
�
n
.�.
h. Minimum anchor bolt embedment: 10-bolt diameters, unless longer
embedment is indicated on the Drawings.
i. Anchor bolts may be cast in concrete in lieu of using concrete anchors.
Concrete anchors:
a. Do not use concrete anchors in lieu of anchor bolts.
b. Install anchors in accordance with approved ICC-ES Report. Where
conflict exists between the approved ICC-ES Report and the requirements
in this Sub-Section, the requirements of the Evaluation Service Report
shall control.
c. Accurately locate concrete anchors and set perpendicular to surFaces
from which they project.
d. Minimum embedment lengths:
Diameter Embedment Length
Inches Inches
1/4 2
3/8 2-1/2
1/2 � 4-1/8
5/8 4-1/2
3/4 6-1/2
5
�
e. unlling holes:
1) Do not damage or cut existing reinforcing bars, electrical conduits, or
other items embedded in the existing concrete without acceptance by
ENGINEER.
2) Determine location of reinforcing bars, or other obstructions with a
non-destructive indicator device_
3) Remove dust and debris from hole using compressed air.
f. Hole drilling equipment:
1) Electric or pneumatic rotary type with light or medium impact.
2) Dnll bits: Carbide-tipped in accordance with ANSI B212-15.
3) Hollow drills with flushing air systems are preferred.
4) Where edge distances are less than 2 inches, use lighter impact
equipment to prevent microcracking and concrete spalling during
drilling process_
Deformed bar anchors:
a. Butt weld with automatic stud welding gun as recommended by
manufacturer_
b. Ensure butt weld develops full strength of the anchor.
High strength bolts:
a. Consider connections with high strength bolts to be slip critical structural
connections, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
b. Connections with high strength bolts shall conform in accordance with .
AISC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts.
c. Furnish hardened flat washer:
1) Under element, nut, or bolt head, turned in tightening.
2) On auter plies for short slotted holes.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.05120-10 8235A10
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienUWA/Renton/8235A 10/Specificationslt 0.05120
�
�
1
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
L�,i
�
�
��
�
�
�
�
�
1
�
�
,
�
d. Verify adequate tightening of bolts by means of tension indicator washers
placed as indicated in ASTM F 959, Figure 1.
7. Powder actuated fasteners: Use powder actuated fasteners only for
applications indicated on the Drawings or specified.
8. Sleeve anchors:
a. Do not use sleeve anchors in lieu of anchor bolts.
b. Install anchors in accordance with approved ICC-ES Report. Where
conflict exists between the approved ICC-ES Report and the requirements
in this Sub-Section, the requirements of the Evaluation Service Report
shall control.
c. The sleeve anchor bolt shall be removable and the expansion sleeve shall
be flush with the concrete surface when installed.
d. Accurately locate sleeve anchors and set perpendicular to surfaces from
which they project.
e. Minimum embedment lengths:
Diameter Embedment Length
Inches Inches
1/4 1-3/4
3/8 2-1/2
1!2 3-1/2
5/8 4
3/4 4-1/2
�
�
�
��
E
f. Drilling holes:
1) Do not damage or cut existing reinforcing bars, electrical conduits, or
other items embedded in the existing concrete without acceptance by
ENGINEER.
2) Determine location of reinforcing bars, or other obstructions with a
non-destructive indicator device.
3) Remove dust and debris from hole using compressed air.
g. Hole drilling equipment:
1) Electric or pneumatic rotary type with light or medium impact.
2) Drill bits: Carbide-tipped in accordance with ANSI B212-15.
3) Hollow drills with flushing air systems are preferred.
4) Where edge distances are less than 2 inches, use lighter impact
equipment to prevent microcracking and concrete spalling during
drilling process.
Welded studs:
a. Butt weld with automatic stud welding gun as recommended by the
manufacturer.
b. Ensure butt weld develops full strength of the stud_
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.05120-11 8235A10
� pwl/Carollo/DocumentslClienWUA/Renton18235A101Spedhcations(10.05120
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.05120-12 8235A10
pw:/lCarollolDocuments/CiienUWAlRenton/8235A10/Specificationsll D.05120
SUB-SECTION 10.08320
ACCESS HATCHES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section Includes: Access Hatches.
1.02 SUBMIITALS
A. Product Data.
B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1. Access hatch installation recommendations.
2. Locations of access hatches.
3. Hatch size and configuration.
4. Liveload capacity.
5. Materials of construction and finishes provided.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Identify type and size of each floor hatch in way not to damage finish prior to
delivery.
B. Deliver products only after proper facilities are available.
C. Deliver and store packaged products in original containers with seals unbroken and
labels intact until time of use.
D. Handle carefully to prevent damage and store on clean concrete surface or raised
platform in safe, dry area. Do not dump onto ground_
E. Protect floor access hatches during shipment and storage to prevent warping,
bending, and corrosion.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's warranty against defects in material and workmanship for a
� period of 5 years.
1.05 MAINTENANCE
,
.�
A. Deliver 2 keys for each cylinder lock to OWNER.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.08320-1 8235A10
� pw:dCarollolDocumentslGienUWAlRenton/8235At0/5pecifica6onsl10.08320
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 HEAVY DUTY FLOOR ACCESS HATCHES
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. LW Products Co., Inc., Model HD (double-leafl.
B. Style: double leaf, rolled aluminum, capable of withstanding minimum AASHTO H-
20 wheel load with a maximum deflection of 1/150 of the span, live load channel
frame, with drainage couplings.
C. Size: As indicated on the Drawings.
D. Hatch Leaf: Minimum 1l4 inch, diamond pattern plate reinforced with stiffeners as
required to meet specified live load_
E. Frame: 1/4-inch channel with anchor flange around perimeter.
F. Gasket= 3/8-inch neoprene gasket for weather tight seal.
G. Hardware:
1. Hinges: Each leaf equipped with a minimum of two heavy forged brass or
stainless steel hinges with s#ainless steel pins.
2. Lock: Snap lock with removable handle mounted on hatch leaf.
3. Gnp Handle: Provide vinyl grip handle designed to release cover for closing.
4. Operating Mechanism: Spring operators designed for ease of operation and
automatic hold open arm with release handle.
5. Drainage Assembly: Provide 1-1/2 inch aluminum drainage coupling in location
indicated on the Drawings.
H. Accessories:
1. Roll-out safety net: Match hatch sizing.
a. Manufacturer: Safe Approach Model 121.
2.02 FINISHES
A. Floor Access Hatch Finishes:
1. Aluminum: Manufacturer's standard mill finish.
2. Aluminum In Contact With Dissimilar Metals and Concrete: Manufacturer's
standard bituminous coating.
3. Steel: Manufacturer's standard red oxide primer.
B. Hardware Finishes:
1. Provide optional Type 316 stainless steel hardware throughout, including parts
of the latch and lifting mechanism assemblies, hold open arms and all
brackets, hinges, pins, and fasteners.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.08320-2 8235A10
pw:ll Carollo/DocumentslClienUWAlf2entonB235A10lSpecficationsl10.08320
�-
�
�
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine construction to receive floor access hatch and verify correctness of
dimensions and other supporting or adjoining condifions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Caordinate details with other work supporting, adjoining, or requiring access
hatches.
B. Verify dimensions and profiles for each opening.
C. Verify that location will serve portion of work to which access is required. Where
proposed functional location conflicts with other work, notify the ENGINEER before
installation_
D. Apply coating to aluminum surfaces that will be in contact with dissimilar metals or
concrete when there is none.
�,
3.03 INSTALLATIOP!
A. Install access hatches in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
�
�
�
B. Ensure correct types and adequate sizes at proper locations.
C. Securely attach frames to supporting work and ensure hatches, frames, and
hardware operate smoothly and are free from warp, twist and distortion.
D_ Attach drain pipe to coupling provided. Drainage shall be routed as indicated on the
Drawings.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust hatches, frames and hardware to operate smoothly, freely, and properly,
without binding.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Thoroughly clean surfaces of grease, oil, or other impurities, touch up abraded
prime coat where applicable.
END OF SUB-SECTION
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.08320-3 �8235A10
� pwJ/Cam11o1Documents/ClientlWAlRenton/8235At 01Specificalions110.08320
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.08320-4 8235A10
pwJ/CarollolDocumentslClienUWAlRentonl8235A 10lSpecrfica tions/10.08320
��
�
i
L�
SUB-SECTION 10.09960A
COATINGS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Field applied coatings. .
i
1
�
�
�
�
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or fumishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
b. Sub-Section 10.03925 - Concrete Repair and Coating.
c. Sub-Section 10.15075 - Mechanical Identification.
d. Sub-Section 10.16075 - Electrical Identification.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. D 16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and
Applications.
2. D 4541 - Standard Test Method for Pull-off Strength of Coatings Using
Portable Adhesion Testers.
B. NACE International (NACE):
1. SP0178 - Design, Fabrication, and Surface Finish Practices for Tanks and
Vessels to Be Lined for Immersion Service_
2. SP0188-06 - Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Protective Coatings.
C. National Association of Pipe Fabricators (NAPF):
1. 500-03 - Surface Preparation Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
Receiving Special External Coatings and/or Special Internal Linings.
�
�
D. NSF International (NSF):
1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-1 8235A10
� pvd/Carolb/Documents/ClienNNAlRentonl8235A10lSpecifica6onsI10.Q9960A
E. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):
1. SP COM - Surface Preparation Commentary for Steel and Concrete
Substrates.
2. SP-1 - Soivent Cleaning.
3. SP-2 - Hand Tooi Cleaning.
4_ SP-3 - Power Tool Cleaning.
5. SP-5 - White Metal Blast Cleaning.
6. SP-6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning.
7_ SP-7 - Brush-Off Blast Cleaning.
8. SP-10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning.
F. U.S. Environment Protection Agency (EPA):
1. Method 24 - Surface Coatings.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Submerged metal: Steel or iron surfaces below tops of channel or structure walls
which wifl contain wafer even when above expected water ievel_
B. Submerged concrete and masonry surfaces_ Surfaces which are or will be:
1 _ Underwater.
2. In structures which normally contain water.
3. Below tops of walls of water containing structures. ,
C. Exposed surface: Any metal or concrete surface, indoors or outdoors that is
exposed to view.
D. Dry film thickness (DFT): Thickness of fully cured coating, measured in mils.
E. Volatile organic compound (VOC): Content af air polluting hydrocarbons in uncured
coating product measured in units of grams per liter or pounds per gallon, as
determined by EPA Method 24.
F. Ferrous: Cast iron, ductile iron, wrought iron, and all steel atloys except stainless
steel.
G. Where.SSPC surface preparation standards are specified or implied for ductile iron
pipe or fittings, the equivalent NAPF surface preparation standard shall be
substituted for the SSPC standard.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coating materials shall be especially adapted for use in wastewater treatment
plants.
B. Coating materials used in contact with potable water supply systems shall be
certified to NSF 61 _
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-2 8235A10
pw:l/CarollolDocuments/ClienUWA/Renton/8235A 10/Specifications/10.09960A
�
�
�
�
�
l
�
�
�
G
�
�
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 1-05.
B. Shop drawings:
1. Schedule of proposed coating materiais.
2. Schedule of surfaces to be coated with each coating material.
C. Product Data: Include description of physical properties of coatings including solids
content and ingredient analysis, VOC content, temperature resistance, typical
exposures and limitations, and manufacturer's standard color chips:
1. Regulatory requirements: Submit data conceming the following:
a. Volatile organic compound limitations.
b. Coatings containing lead compounds and PCBs.
c. Abrasives and abrasive blast cleaning techniques, and disposal.
d. NSF certification of coatings for use in potable water supply systems.
D. Samples: Include 8-inch square drawdowns or brush-outs of topcoat finish when
requested. Identify each sample as to finish, formula, color name and number and
sheen name and gloss units_
E. Certificates: Submit in accordance with requirements for Product Data.
F. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include the following:
1. Special requirements for transportation and storage.
2. Mixing instructions.
3. Shelf life.
4. Pot life of material.
5. Precautions for applications free of defects.
6_ Surface preparation_
7. Method of application.
8. Recommended number of coats.
9. Recommended dry film thickness (DFT) of each coat.
10. Recommended total dry film thickness (DFT).
11. Drying time of each coat, including prime coat_
12. Required prime coat_
13. Compatible and non-compatib(e prime coats.
14. Recommended thinners, when recommended.
15_ Limits of ambient conditions during and after appfication_
16. Time allowed between coats (minimum and maximum).
17. Required protection from sun, wind, and other conditions.
18. Touch-up requirements and limitations.
19. Minimum adhesion of each system submitted in accordance with
ASTM D 4541 _
Manufacturer's Representative's Field Reports.
Operations and Maintenance Data:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-3 8235A10
� pw://CarollolDocuments�ClienWVA/Renton18235A1015pecificalions110.09960A
1. Reports on visits to project site to view and approve surface preparation of
structures to be coated.
2. Reports on visits to project site to observe and approve coating application
procedures_
3. Reports on visits to coating plants to observe and approve surface preparation
and coating application on items that are "shop coated."
Quality Assurance Submittals:
1. Quality Assurance plan_
2. Qual�cations of coating applicator including List of Similar Projects.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator qualifications:
1. Minimum of 5 years experience applying specified type or types of coatings
under conditions similar to those of the Work:
a. Provide qualifications of applicator and references listing 5 similar projects
completed in the past 2 years.
2_ Manufacturer approved applicator when manufacturer has approved applicator
program_
3. Approved and licensed by polymorphic polyester resin manufacturer to apply
polymorphic polyester resin coating system.
B. Regulatory requirements: Comply with governing agencies regulations by using
coatings that do not exceed permissible volatile organic compound limits and do not
contain lead_
C. Certification_ Certify that applicable pigments are resistant to discoloration or
deterioration when exposed to hydrogen sulfide and other sewage gases and
product data fails to designate coating as "fume resistant_"
D. Field samples: Prepare and coat a small area between comers or limits such as
control or construction joints of each system. Approved field sample may be part of
Work.
E. Compatibility of coatings: Use products by same manufacturer for prime coats,
intermediate coats, and finish coats on same surFace, unless specified otherwise.
F. Services of coating manufacturers representative: Arrange for coating
manufacturers representative to attend pre-installation conferences. Make periodic
visits to the project site to provide consultation and inspection services during
surface preparation and application of coatings, and to make visits to coating plants
to observe and approve surface preparation procedures and coating application of
items to be ashop primed and coated".
1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
and industry standards.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-4 8235A10
pw:!/Ca rollolDocumentslClienUWAJRenton18235A 10/Specifica6ons110.09960A
�
�
��
�
B. Remove unspecified and unapproved paints from Project site immediately.
C. Deliver new unopened containers with labels identifying the manufacturer's name,
brand name, product type, batch number, date of manufacturer, expiration date or
shelf life, color, and mixing and reducing instructions_
1. Do not deliver materials aged more than 12 months from manufacturing date.
� D. Store coatings in well-ventilated facility that provides protection form the sun
weather, and fire hazards_ Maintain ambient storage temperature between 45 and
90 degrees Fahrenheit, unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.
�
i
�
��
�-
E. Take precautions to prevent fire and spontaneous combustion.
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Surface moisture contents: Do not coat surfaces that exceed manufacturer specified
moisture contents, or when not specified by the manufacturer, the following
moisture contents:
1. Masonry, concrete, and concrete block: 12 percent.
2. Concrete floors: 7 percent.
B. Do not apply coatings:
1. Under dusty conditions or adverse environmental conditions, unless tenting,
covers, or other such protection is provided for structures to be coated_
2. When light on surfaces measures less than 15 foot-candles.
3. When ambient or surface temperature is less than 55 degrees Fahrenheit
unless manufacturer allows a lower temperature.
4. When relative humidity is higher than 85 percent.
5. When surface temperature is less than 5 degrees Fahrenheit above dew point.
6_ When surface temperature exceeds the manufacturer's recommendation.
7. When ambient temperature exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit, unless
manufacturer allows a higher temperature.
8_ Apply clear finishes at minimum 65 degrees Fahrenheit.
C. Provide fans, heating devices, dehumidifiers, or other means recommended by
coating manufacturer to prevent formation of condensate or dew on surface of
substrate, coating between coats and within curing time following application of last
coat.
D. Provide adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities to maintain
i minimum 55 degrees Fahrenheit for 24 hours before, during and 48 hours after
application of finishes.
�,
�
�
E_ Dehumidification and heating for coating of digester interiors, wet wells, and high-
humidity enclosed spaces:
1. Provide_ dehumidification and heating of digester interior spaces in which
surface preparaiion, coating application, or curing is in progress according to
the following schedule:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.0996QA-5 8235A10
� pw://CarollolDocumentslCtiendWAlRenton/8235A10/Specificalions(10.09960A
2
3.
G�
a. October 1 to April 30: Provide continuous dehumidification and heating as
required to maintain the tanks within environmental ranges as specified in
this Sub-Section and as recommended by the coating material
manufacturer. For the purposes of this Sub-Section, "continuous" is
defined as 24 hours per day and 7 days per week.
b. May 1 to September 30: Provide temporary dehumidification and heating
as may be required to maintain the tanks within the specified
environmental ranges in the event of adverse weather or other temporary
condition. At CONTRACTOR's option and at his sole expense,
CONTRACTOR may suspend work until such time as acceptable
environmental conditions are restored, in lieu of temporary
dehumidification and heating_ Repair or replace any coating or surFace
preparation damaged by suspension of work, at CONTRACTOR's sole
expense.
Equipment requirements: .
a. Capacity Provide dehumidification, heating, and air circulation equipment
with minimum capacity to perform the following:
1) Maintain the dew point of the air in the tanks at a temperature at least
5 degrees Fahrenheit less than the temperature of the coldest part of
the structure where work is underway.
2) Reduce dew point temperature of the air in the tanks by at least
10 degrees Fahrenheit in 20 minutes.
3) Maintain air temperature in the tanks at 60 degrees minimum.
b. Systems:
1) Site electrical power: Not available for CONTRACTOR's use.
2) Internal combustion engine generators: May be used;
CONTRACTOR shall obtain all required permits and provide air
pollution and noise control devices on equipment as required by
permitting agencies: _
3) Dehumidification: Provide desiccant or refrigeration drying. Desiccant
types shall have a rotary desiccant wheel capable of continuous
operation. No Liquid, granular, or loose lithium chloride drying
systems will be allowed_
4) Heating: Electric, indirect combustion, or steam coil methods may be
used. Direct fired combustion heaters will not be allowed during
abrasive blasting, coating application, or coating cure time.
Design and submittals:
a. CONTRACTOR shall prepare dehumidification and heating plan for this
project, including all equipment and operating procedures.
b. Suppliers of services and equipment shall have not less than 3 years
experience in similar applications; Cargocaire Corporation (Munters) or
equal.
c. Submit dehumidification and heating plan for ENGINEER's review.
Monitoring and performance:
a. Measure and record relative humidity and temperature of air, and
structure temperature twice daily (beginning and end of work shifts) to
verify that proper humidity and temperature levels are achieved inside the
reservoir after the dehumidification equipment is installed and operational.
Test results shalt be made available to the ENGINEER upon request.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-6 8235A10
pwl/CarollolDocuments/Client/WA/Renton/8235A 1 O/Specificationsl10.09960A
�
�
,
'
�
�i
b. Interior space of the tank(s) shall be sealed and a slight positive pressure
maintained as recommended by the supplier of the dehumidification
equipment.
c. The filtration system used to remove dust from the air shall be designed
so that it does not interfere with the dehumidification equipment's ability to
control the dew point and relative humidity inside the reservoir.
1) The air from the tank or dust filtration equipment shall not be
recirculated through the dehumidifier during coating application or
when solvent vapors are present.
1.09 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra materials: Include minimum 1 gallon of each type and color of coating applied:
1. When manufacturer packages material in gallon cans, deliver unopened
labeled cans as comes from factory.
2. When manufacturer does not package rriaterial in gallon cans, deliver material
in new gallon containers, properly sealed and identified with typed labels
indicating brand, type, and color.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
�
�
��
�
�
�
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Special coatings: One of the following or equal:
1. Carboline: Carboline, St. Louis, MO.
2. Ceilcote: Ceilcote Corrosion Control, Berea, OH.
3. Dampney: The Dampney Company, Everett, MA.
4. Devoe: fCl Devoe Coatings, Louisville, KY.
5. Dudick: Dudick, Inc., Streetsboro, OH.
6. GET: Global Eco Technologies, Pittsburg, CA.
7. Henkel: Henket North America, Madison Heights MI.
8. IET: Integrated Environmental Technologies, Santa Barbara, CA.
9. PPC: Polymorphic Polymers Corp., N. Miami, FL_
10. PPG Amercoat: PPG Protective 8� Marine Coatings, Brea, CA.
11. Sanchem: Sanctiem, Chicago, IL.
12. Superior: Superior Environmental Products, Inc., Addison, TX.
13. S-W: Sherwin-Williams Co., Cleveland, OH.
14. Tnemec: Tnemec Co., Kansas City, MO.
15. Wasser: Wasser High Tech Coatings, Kent, WA.
2.02 PREPARATION AND PRETREATMENT MATERIALS
A. Metal pretreatment_ As manufactured by one of the following or equal:
1 _ Henkel: Galvaprep 5.
2. Intemational: AWLGrip Alumiprep 33.
3. S-W: Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure.
4_ Tnemec: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline.
October 26; 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-7 8235A10
� pw:l/Carollo/DocumentslClienUWA/f2entnn/8235At0/SpecifiraGonsl10.09960A
B. Surface cleaner and degreaser: As manufactured by one of the following or equal:
1_ Carboline Surface Cleaner No.3_
2. Devoe: Devprep 88.
3. S-W: Clean and Etch.
2.03 COATING MATERIALS
A. High solids epoxy (self priming) not less than 72 percent solids by volume: As
manufactured by one of the following or equal:
1 _ Carboline: Carboguard 891.
2. Devoe: Bar Rust 233H.
3_ PPG Amercoat: Amerlock 2.
4. S-W: Macropoxy 646.
5. Tnemec: HS Epoxy Series 104.
B. Aliphatic or aliphatic-acrylic polyurethane: As manufactured by one of the following
or equal:
1. Carboline: Carbothane 134 VOC.
2. Devoe: Devthane 379.
3. PPG Amercoat: Amershield VOC.
4. S-W: High Solids Polyurethane CA.
5. Tnemec: Endura-Shield 11 Series 1075 (U).
C. Asphalt vamish: AWWA C 500.
2.04 MIXES
A. Mix epoxy parts in accordance with manufacturer's instructions_
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 - GENERAL PROTECTION
A_ Protect adjacent surfaces from coatings and damage. Repair damage resulting from
inadequate or unsuitable protection:
B. Protect adjacent surfaces not to be coated from spatter and droppings with drop
cloths and other covenngs:
1. Mask off surfaces of items not to be coated or remove items from area.
C. Furnish sufficient drop cloths, shields and protective equipment to prevent spray or
droppings from fouling surfaces not being coated and in particular, surfaces within
storage and preparation area.
D. Place cotton waste, cloths and material which may constitute fire hazard in closed
metal containers and remove daily from site.
E. Remove electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings, and fastenings, prior to
applicafion of coating operations. Carefully store, clean, and repface on completion
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-8 8235A10
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235A 101Specifica6onsl10.09960A
�
�
��
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
��
��
�
of coating in each area. Do not use solvent or degreasers to clean hardware that
may remove permanent lacquer finish.
3.02 GENERAL PREPARATION
A. Prepare surFaces in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions, unless
more stringent requirements are specified in this Sub-Section.
B. Protect following surfaces from abrasive blasting by masking, or other means:
1. Threaded portions of valve and gate stems, grease fittings, and identification
plates_
2. Machined surFaces for sliding contact.
3. Surfaces to be assembled against gaskets.
4. Surfaces of shafting on which sprockets are to fit.
5_ Surfaces of shafting on which bearings are to fit_
6. Machined surfaces of bronze trim, including those slide gates.
7. Cadmium-plated items except cadmium-plated, zinc-plated, or sherardized
fasteners used in assembly of equipment requiring abrasive blasting.
8. Galvanized items, unless scheduled to be coated.
C. Protect installed equipment, mechanical drives, and adjacent coated equipment
from abrasive blasting to prevent damage caused by entenng sand or dust.
D. Concrete:
1_ Allow new concrete to cure for minimum of 28 days before coating.
2_ Clean concrete surFaces of dust, mortar, fins, loose concrete particles, form
release materials, oil, and grease. Fill voids so that surface is smooth. Etch or
brush off-blast clean in accordance with SSPC SP-7 to provide surface profile
equal to 40 to 60 grit sandpaper, or as recommended by coating manufacturer.
All concrete surfaces shall be vacuumed clean prior to coating application.
E. Ferrous metal surfaces:
1.
2.
3.
4_
5.
6.
Remove grease and oil in accordance with SSPC SP-1.
Remove rust, scale, and welding slag and spatter, and prepare surFaces in
accordance with appropriate SSPC standard as specfied.
Abrasive blast surfaces prior to coating.
When abrasive blasted surfaces rust or discolor before coating, abrasive blast
surfaces again to remove rust and discoloration.
When metal surfaces are exposed because of coating damage, abrasive blast
surfaces and feather in to a smooth transition before touching-up.
All abrasive blast cleaned surfaces shall be blown down with clean dry air and
or vacuumed.
F. Ferrous metal surfaces not to be submerged: Abrasive blast in accordance with
SSPC SP-10, unless blasting may damage adjacent surFaces, prohibited or
specified otherwise. Where not possible to abrasive blast, power tool clean surfaces
in accordance with SSPC SP-3. ,
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-9 - 8235A10
' pw:1/CarollolDocumentslClieniMlAlRenton18235A10/Specifica6onslt0.09960A
G. Ferrous metal surfaces to be submerged: Unless specified otherwise,. abrasive blast
in accordance with SSPC SP-5 to clean and provide roughened surface profile of
not less than 2 mils and not more than 4 mils in depth when measured with
Elcometer 123, or as recommended by the coating manufacturer.
H. Ductile iron pipe and fittings to be lined or coated: Abrasive blast clean in
accordance with NAPF 500-03.
Sherardized, aluminum, copper, and bronze surfaces: Prepare in accordance with
coating manufacturer's instructions.
Galvanized surface:
1. Degrease or solvent clean (SSPC SP-1) to remove oily residue.
2. Power tool or hand tool clean or whip abrasive blast.
3. Test surface for contaminants using copper sulfate solution.
4. Apply metal pretreatment within 24 hours before coating galvanized surfaces
that cannot be thoroughly abraded physically; such as bolts, nuts, or
preformed channels.
K. Shop primed metal:
1. Certify that primers applied to metal surfaces in the shop are compatible with
coatings to be applied over such primers in the field.
2. Remove shop primer from metal to be submerged by abrasive blasting in
accordance with SSPC SP-10, unless greater degree of surFace preparation is
required by coating manufacturer's representative.
3. Correct abraded, scratched or otherwise damaged areas of prime coat by
sanding or abrasive blasting to bare metal in accordance with SSPC SP-2,
SP-3, or SP-6; as directed by the ENGINEER.
4. When entire shop priming fails or has weathered excessively (more than
25 percent of the item), or when recommended by coating manufacturer's
representative, abrasive blast shop prime coat to remove entire coat and
prepare surface in accordance with SSPC SP-10.
5. When incorrect prime coat is applied, remove incorrect prime coat by abrasive
blasting in accordance with SSPC SP-10. �
6. When prime coat not authorized by ENGINEER is applied, remove �
unauthorized pnme coat by abrasive blasting in accordance with SSPC SP-10.
7. Shop applied bituminous paint or asphalt varnish: Abrasive blast clean shop
applied bituminous paint or asphalt varnish from surfaces scheduled to receive
non-bituminous coatings.
L. Abrasive blast cadmium-plated, zinc-plated, or sherardized fasteners in same
manner as unprotected metal when used in assembly of equipment designated for
abrasive blasting _
M. Abrasive blast components to be attached to surfaces which cannot be abrasive
blasted before components are attached.
N. Grind sharp edges to approximately 1/16-inch radius before abrasive blast cleaning.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-10 8235A10
pw:!/CarollolDocuments/ClienUWA/Renton/8235A 101Specifications/10.09960A
�
�
�
O. Remove and grind smooth all excessive weid material and weld spatter before blast
cieaning in accordance with NACE SP0178:
� P. PVC and FRP Surfaces:
1. Prepare surFaces to be coated by light sanding (de-gloss) and wipe-down with
clean cloths, or by solvent cleaning in strict accordance with coating
manufacturer's instructions.
�
�
�
'
�'
��
�'
Q. Cleaning of previously coated surfaces:
1. Utilize cleaning agent to remove soluble salts such as chlorides and sulfates
from concrete and metal surfaces:
a. Cleaning agent: Biodegradable non-flammable and containing no volatile
organic compounds.
b. Manufacturer_ The following or equal:
1) Chlor-Rid International, Inc.
2. Steam clean and degrease surtaces to be coated to remove oils and grease.
3_ Cleaning of surfaces util�zing the decontamination cleaning agPnt may be
accomplished in conjunction with abrasive blast cleaning, steam cleaning, high
pressure washing, or hand washing as approved by the coating manufacturer's
representative and the ENGINEER.
4. Test cleaned surfaces in accordance with the cleaning agent manufacturer's
instructions to ensure all soluble salts have been removed. Additional cleaning
shall be carried out as necessary.
5. Final surface preparation prior to application of new coating system shall be
made in strict accordance with coating manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.03 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PREPARATION
�
:
C�
Identify equipment, ducting, piping, and conduit as specified in Sub-Section
10.15075 and Sub-Section 10.16075.
Remove grilles, covers, and access panels for mechanical and electrical system
from location and coat separately.
Prepare and finish coat-primed equipment with color selected by the ENGINEER.
� D. Prepare and prime and coat insulated and bare pipes, conduits, boxes, insulated
and bare ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, except where items are
covered with prefinished coating.
�
u
'
,
E. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when coated
over or spattered.
F. Prepare and coat interior surfaces of air ducts, convector and baseboard heating
cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with 1 coat of flat black paint, to
limit of sight line.
G. Pr.epare and coat dampers exposed immediately behind louvers, grilles, convector
and baseboard cabinets to match face panels.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.0996QA-11 8235A10
pw:l/CarollolDocumentslClien WVNRenton/8235A t OlSpedficalionsll Q_09960A
H. Prepare and coat exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished
areas with color and texture to match adjacent surfaces.
I. Prepare and coat both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical
equipment before installing backboards and mounting equipment on them.
J. Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed ductwork and apply color
banding and identification, such as flow arrows, naming and numbering, in
accordance with Contract Documents.
3.04 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
D
E.
F.
G
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M,
A. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Coat metal unless specified otherwise:
1. Aboveground piping to be coated shall be empty of contents during application
of coatings.
C_ Verify metal surface preparation immediately before applying coating in accordance
with SSPC SP COM.
Allow surfaces to dry, except where coating manufacturer requires surface wetting
before coating.
Wash coat and prime sherardized, aluminum, copper, and bronze surFaces, or
prime with manufacturer's recommended special primer.
Prime shop primed metal surfaces. Spot prime exposed metal of shop primed
surFaces before applying primer over entire surface.
Apply minimum number of specified coats.
Apply coats to thicknesses specified, especially at edges and corners.
Apply additional coats when necessary to achieve specified thicknesses.
Coat surfaces without drops, overspray, dry spray, nans, ridges, waves, holidays,
laps, or brush marks.
Remove spatter and droppings after completion of coating.
When multiple coats of same material are specified, tint prime coat and intermediate
coats with suitable pigment to distinguish each coat.
Dust coatings between coats. Lightly sand and dust surfaces to receive high gloss
finishes, unless instructed otherwise by coating manufacturer.
N. Apply coating by brush, roller, trowel, or spray, unless particular methad of
application is required by coating manufacturer's instructions or these
Specifications.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-12 8235A10
pw://CarollolDocuments/ClienUWAfRentonl8235A t O1Specifica6ons110.09960A
'
1
� O. Plural component appiication: Drums shall be premixed each day. All gauges shall
be working order prior to the start of application. Ratio checks shall be completed
prior to each application. A spray sample shall be sprayed on plastic sheeting to
' insure set time is complete prior to each application. Hardness testing shall be
preformed after each application.
�
r�
�'
'
'
�
t
�I
�
�
�
�
,
'
P. Spray application:
1. Stripe coat edges, welds, nuts, bolts, difficult to reach areas by brush before
beginning spray application, as necessary, to ensure specified coating
thickness along edges.
2. When using spray application, apply coating to thickness not greater than that
recommended in coating manufacturer's instructions for spray application.
3. Use airless spray method, unless air spray method is requir.ed by coating
manufacturer's instruction or these Specifications_
4. Conduct spray coating under controlled conditions. Protect adjacent
construction and property from coating mist, fumes, or overspray.
Q. Drying and recoating:
1. Provide fans, heating devices, or other means recommended by coating
manufacturer to prevent formation of condensate or dew on surface of
substrate, coating between coats and within curing time following application
of last coat.
2.
3_
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
11
For submerged service the CONTRACTOR shall provide a letter to the
ENGINEER that the lining system is fully cured and ready to be placed into
service.
Limit drying time to that required by these Specifications or coating
manufacturer's instructions.
Do not allow excessive drying time or exposure which may impair bond
between coats.
Recoat epoxies within time limits recommended by coating manufacturer.
When time limits are exceeded, abrasive blast clean and de-gloss clean prior
to applying another coat.
When limitation on time between abrasive blasting and coating cannot be met
before attachment of components to surfaces which cannot be abrasive
blasted, coat components before attachment_
Ensure primer and intermediate coats of coating are unscarred and completely
integral at time of application of each succeeding coat.
Touch up suction spots between coats and apply additional coats where
required to produce finished surface of solid, even color, free of defects.
Leave no holidays.
Sand and feather in to a smooth transition and recoat and recoat scratched,
contaminated, or otherwise damaged coating surfaces so damages are
invisible to naked eye.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_09960A-13 8235A10
� pw:!/Carollo/DocumentslClient/WA1Rentonl8235A10/Specificafions11Q.09960A
,
R. Concrete:
1. Apply first coat (primer) only when surface temperature of concrete is
decreasing in order to eliminate effects of off-gassing on coating.
3.05 HIGH SOLIDS EPDXY SYSTEM
A. Preparation:
1. Prepare surFaces in accordance with general preparation requirements and as
follows_
a. Abrasive blast ferrous metal surfaces to be submerged at jobsite in
accordance with SSPC SP-5 prior to coating. When cleaned surfaces rust
or discolor, abrasive blast surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-10.
b. Abrasive blast non-submerged ferrous metal surfaces at jobsite in
�accordance with SSPC SP-10, prior to coating. When cleaned surfaces
rust or discolor, abrasive blast surFaces in accordance with SSPC SP-6.
c. Abrasive blast clean ductile iron surfaces at jobsite in accordance with
SSPC SP-7_
B. Application:
1. Apply coatings in accordance with general application requirements and as
follows:
� a. Apply minimum 2-coat system with minimum total dry film thickness (DFT)
of 12 mils.
b. Recoat or apply succeeding epoxy coats within time limits recommended
by manufacturer. Prepare surfaces for recoating in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
c. Coat metal to be submerged before installation when necessary, to obtain
acceptable finish and to prevent damage to other surfaces.
d. Coat entire surface of support brackets, stem guides, pipe clips, fasteners,
and other metal devices bolted to concrete.
e. Coat surFace of items to be exposed and adjacent 1 inch to be concealed
when embedded in concrete or masonry.
3.06 HIGH SOLIDS EPDXY AND POLYURETHANE COATING SYSTEM
A. Preparation: �
1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements and as
follows=
a. Prepare concrete surfaces in accordance with general preparation
requirements.
b. Touch up shop primed steel and miscellaneous iron.
c. Abrasive btast ferrous metal surfaces at jobsite in accordance with
SSPC SP-6, prior to coating. When cleaned surfaces rust or discolor,
abrasive blast surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-6.
d. Degrease or solvent clean, whip abrasive blast, power tool, or hand tool
clean galvanized metal surfaces.
e. Lightiy sand (de-gloss) fiberglass and poty vinyl chloride (PVC) pipe to be
coated and wipe clean with dry cloths, or solvent clean in accordance with
coating manufacturer's instructrons_
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-14 8235A10
pw:l/Ca rollo/DocumentslClie nUWA/Renton/8235A 1 Q/Spec�cationsl10.09960A
1
�
�
'
,
'
�
,
�
�
�
�
'
,
�
i
�
'
'
'
�
�
'
,
'
Abrasive blast clean ductile iron surFaces.
B. Application:
1. Apply coatings in accordance with general application requirements and as
follows:
a. Apply 3 coat system consisting of:
1) Primer: 4 to 5 mils dry film thickness high solids epoxy.
2) Intermediate coat: 4 to 5 mils dry film thickness high solids epoxy.
3) Topcoat: 2.5 to 3.5 mils dry film thickness aliphatic or aliphatic-acrylic
polyurethane topcoat.
2. Recoat or apply succeeding epoxy coats within 30 days or within time limits
recommended by manufacturer, whichever is shorter. Prepare surfaces for
recoating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A_ Each coat will be inspected. Strip and remove defective coats, prepare surfaces and
recoat. When approved, apply next coat.
:
C.
Control and check dry film thicknesses and integrity of coatings.
Measure dry film thickness with calibrated thickness gauge_
D. Dry film thicknesses on ferrous-based substrates may be checked with Elcometer
Type 1 Magnetic Pull-Off Gage or Positector 6000.
' E. Verify coat integrity with low-voltage holiday detector for submerged surface, in
accordance with SP0188 06. Allow ENGINEER to use detector for additional
checking.
'
'
'
�
i
t
�
'
F_ Check wet film thickness before coal tar epoxy coating cures on concrete or
non-ferrous metal substrates.
G. Arrange for services of coating manufacturer's field representative to provide
periodic field consultation and inspection services to ensure proper surface
preparation of facilities and items to be coated, and to ensure proper application
and curing:
1. Notify ENG�NEER 24 hours in advance of each visit by coating manufacturer's
representative.
2. Provide ENGINEER with a written report by coating manufacturer's
representative within 48 hours following each visit.
3.08 SCHEDULE OF ITEMS NOT REQUIRING COATING
A_ General: Unless specified otherwise, the following items do not require coating:
1. Items that have received final coat at factory and not listed to receive coating
in field.
2. Aluminum, brass, bronze, copper, plastic (except PVC pipe), rubber, stainless
steel, chrome, Everdur, or lead.
3. Buried or encased piping or conduit_
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_09960A-15 8235A10
pw://CarollolDocumentsJClien VWAlRemonB235At �7Specifirations/10.09960A
i
4. Exterior concrete.
5. Galvanized electrical conduits, galvanized pipe trays, galvanized cable trays,
and other galvanized items:
a. Areas on galvanized items or parts where galvanizing has been damaged
during handling or construction shall be repaired as follows:
1) Clean damaged areas by SSPC SP-1, SP-2, SP-3, or SP-7 as
required. '
2) Apply 2 coats of a cold galvanizing zinc compound such as ZRC
World Wide Inovatie Zinc Technologies of Mansfield, MA or accepted
equal, in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
6_ Grease fittings_
7. Fiberglass ducting or tanks in concealed locations.
8. Steel to be encased in concrete or masonry.
3.09 SCHEDULE OF SURFACES TO BE COATED IN THE FIELD
A. In general, apply coatings to steel, iron, galvanized surfaces, and wood surfaces
unless specified or otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Coat concrete surfaces
and anodized aluminum only when specified or indicated on the Drawings. Color
coat all piping as specified in Sub-Section 10.15075.
B. Following schedule is incomplete. Coat unlisted surfaces with same coating system
as similar listed surfaces. Verify questionable surfaces.
C. Concrete:
1 _ High solids epoxy:
a. Safety markings.
D. Metals:
1. High solids epoxy and polyurethane system: Interior and exterior non-
immersed ferrous metal surFaces including:
a_ Pipe, valves, pipe hangers, supports and saddles, conduit, cable tray
hangers, and supports.
b. Motors and motor accessory equipment.
c_ Drive gear, drive housing, coupling housings, and miscellaneous gear
drive equipment_
d_ Valve and gate operators and stands.
e. Structural steel including galvanized structural steel.
f. Mechanical equipment supports, drive units, and accessories.
g. Pumps not submerged.
2. High solids epoxy system:
a. Field priming of ferrous metal surfaces with defective shop prime coat
where no other prime coat is specified; for non-submerged service.
b. Bell rings, underside of manhole covers and frames_
c. Sump pumps and grit pumps, including underside of base plates and
submerged suction and discharge piping.
d. Exterior of submerged piping and valves other than stainless steel or PVC
P�P��9-
e. Submerged pipe supports and hangers.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-16 8235A10
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienUWAlRenton18235A 10/Specificationsl10.09960A
!
1
'
,
�
�
1
'
�
'
,
'
�
�
i
��
�
,
f. Stem guides.
g. Other submerged iron and steel metal unless specified otherwise.
h. Submerged piping.
i. Exterior of influent pumps and influent pump submerged discharge piping.
END OF SUB-SECTION
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-17 8235A10
� pw:dCarollolDocumentslClienUWAlRenton18235A10/Specifica6onsltQ.09960A
'
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-18 8235A10
pw:/!Ca rollo/Documents/ClienUWA/Renton/8235A10ISpecificafionsl10.09960A
�
,
'
,
�
'
,
'
,
'
'
�I
,
,
,
I JI
,
�
SUB-SECTION 10.11312J
SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Submersible sump pumps.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's �esponsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individ�!als or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.09960A — Coatings_
b. Sub-Section 10.15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
c. Sub-Section 10.15958 - Mechanical Equipmenf Testing.
d. Sub-Section 10.16050 - General Requirements for Electrical Work.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A 48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.15050.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Barnes: Series SE411 VF.
B. Bodies: Cast iron, ASTM A-48 Class 30 minimum, with support legs on sump
bottom and clearance for suction entrance.
C. Impellers: 2-vane; non-clogging; open with pump-out vanes on back side;
dynamically batanced; close coupled to motors.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.11312J-1 8235A10
' pw://CarollolDocumentslCfienUWAlRenton18235A10/Specificalionsf10.11312J
1. 2-inch spherical solids handling capability.
D. Level Control: vertical float, PVC, snap action, 15-foot cord with piggy-back plug.
E. UL Listed.
F. Automatic operation_
G. Motors: Suitable for use in Class 1 Division 2 locations, Oil filled; enclosed; overload
protection; 115 volt, single phase, 60 hertz; submersible type; able to operate
continuously without exceeding pumps service capacity when immersed in water up
to 77 degrees Fahrenheit temperature with the following:
1. Ball bearings with adequate thrust capacity for pump.
2. Mechanical ahaft seal. -
3. Expansion diaphragm.
4. Cable: minimum length vault depth plus 20 feet long, armored, waterproof
cable securely attached to motors with watertight fittings.
H. Accessories: �
1. Chains or cables: Stainless steel; attached to balance point of pump; suitable
for lifting pump from sump; long enough to extend from pump to 2 feet above
sump grating_
2_ Hooks: Suitabfe to provide storage of chain or cable at top of sump.
I. Finishes: Air dried enamel base paint primer compatible with top coating for
submerged metals as specified in Sub-Section 10_09960A.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install submersible sump pumps as specified in Sub-Sections 10.15050 and
10.16050.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
� A. Performance test: Level 1 as specified in Sub-Section 10.15958.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.11312J-2 8235A10
pw:/1Carol lolDocuments/ClienUWAlf2enton16235A10/Speaficationslt 0.11312J
'
'
'
�
'
'
'
'
�
�
'
,
�
'
'
i
1
i
3.03 PUMP SCHEDULE
A. Pump Characteristics:
1. The pump shall have the approximate operational characteristics at a water
temperature of 68 degrees Fahrenheit.
Pump Tag Number
SP - 01
Service Vault Drainage
Condition 1
Capacity, gpm 0 gpm
Total Dynamic Head (TDH), Feet 20 feet
Ca� ��ition 2
Capacity, gpm 65 gpm
Total Dynamic Head (TDH), Feet 5 feet
Condition 3
Capacity, gpm 78 gpm
Total Dynamic Head (TDH), Feet 1 feet
Motor Horsepower 0.4 hp
Motor Speed, revolutions per minute 1,750 rpm
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_11312J-3 8235A10
� pw:l/Carollo/DocumentslClient/WA/Renton18235A101Specifications(10.11312J
,
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.11312J-4 8235A10
pwllCaroilolDocumentslCiienUWAlftentnN8235A t O/Specifications/10.11312J
'
,
,
'
'
,
CJ
�
,
'
�
'
,
'
�
'
�
�J
'
'
�
,
� PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
I+
�
�
�
'
,
SUB-SECTION 10.11313
GRINDER PUMPS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Sub-Section includes: Grinder pumps and accessories.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work ef s��a�ontractors, s��M�l;�rs, and othsr ir�+;viduals or entities psrforming
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The fol(owing Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
' a. Sub-Section 10.09960A - Coatings.
b. Sub-Section 10.15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
c. Sub-Section 10.15255 - Stainless Steel Piping.
, d. Sub-Section 10.15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.
e. Sub-Section 10.16050 - General Requirements for Electrical Work.
,
'
,
L1
�
II
�
�
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute/American Society of Mechanical Engineers
(ANSI/ASME):
1. B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250,
and 800_
2. B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A 48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
2. A 108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished,
Standard Quality.
3. A 167 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel and Heat-Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate Sheet and Strip.
4. A 176 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium
Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip_
5. A 276 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Steel Bars and
Shapes.
6. A 283 - Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel
Plates.
Octaber 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.11313-1 8235A10
� pw:llCarollo/Documents/ClienVWPJRentonB235A10lSpedfications110.t 1313
7.
8.
9.
10.
11_
12_
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
A 532 - Standard Specification for Abrasion-Resistant Cast Irons.
A 576 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot Wrought, Special
Quality_
A 582 - Standard Specification for Free-Machining Stainless and Heat-
Resisting Steel Bars, Hot-Rolled or Cold-Finished.
A 743 - Standard Specification for Castings, Irori-Chromium, Iron-Nickel,
Corrosion Resistant, for General Application.
B 148 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Bronze Sand Castings.
B 505 - Specification for Copper-Base Alloy Continuous Castings.
B 584 - Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications.
E 10 - Test Method for Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materials.
E 18 - Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell Supe�cial
Hardness of Metallic Materials.
F 593 - Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws and Studs.
F 594 - Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.15050.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GRINDER PUMPS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Barnes, Model XSGV.
B
C
D
E
F.
Description: Grinder pumps shall be designed to reduce domestic, commercial,
institutional and light industrial sewage to a finely ground slurry.
Body: Cast iron, ASTM A-48 Class 30 minimum, with support legs on sump bottom
and clearance for suction entrance.
Impeller: 85-5-5-5 Bronze, 10-vane; vortex; with pump-out vanes on back side;
dynamically balanced; close coupled to motors. �
Shredding Ring and Cutter: Hardened 440C stainless steel Rockwell C-55.
Discharge Size: 2-inch NPT, vertically ariented.
G. Motor. Explosion proof, oil fitled, enclossd; 230 volt, single phase, 60 hertz;
submersible type; able to operate continuously without exceeding pumps service
capacity when immersed in water up to 104 degrees Fahrenheit temperature with
the following:
1. Ball bearings with adequate thrust capacity for pump.
2. Mechanical shaft seal.
3_ Expansion diaphragm.
4. Class B insulation.
5. Suitable for use in Class I Division 1 locations.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.11313-2 8235A10
pw:!lCarollolDociunents/ClienUWAlRenton18235A 10lSpecifications/10.11313
��
i
'
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
�)
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
[�
�
�
�
6. Cable: minimum length sump depth plus 30 feet long, armored, waterproof
cable securely attached to motors with watertight fittings.
a. Suitable for use in Class I Division 1 locations.
H. Finishes: Air dried enamel base paint primer compatible with top coating for
submerged metals as specified in Sub-Section 10.09960A.
2.02 ACCESSORIES:
A_ Guide rails:
1. Provided by grinder pump manufacturer.
2. Construction: Type 316 Stainless steel.
3_ Shall facilitate pump removal without rotation of the pumps during removal.
4. Fabrication: continuous, one-piece construction. Where intermediate guide rail
extensions are required, the guide rail shall be welded at the connection to
prevent hang up during pump removal.
5. Shall be su�ported by stainless steel brackets and anchors to the walls of the
wet well at intervals recommended by the manufacturer.
6. Shall include a discharge fitting to facilitate a watertight seal during pump
operation and break away of the pump and Pump Discharge Assembly during
pump installation and removal.
B. Pump Discharge Assembly: -
1. Provided by grinder pump manufacturer.
2. Suitable.for use with manufacturer provided guide rails.
3. Discharge Size: As previously specified in this Sub-Section_
4. All supports, piping, and fittings shall be stainless steel.
5. Stainless steel, pipe and fittings shall be threaded, Type as specified in Sub-
Section 10.15255.
6. Check valves shall not be provided in Pump Discharge Assembly.
7. Pump Discharge Assembly shall be fastened to the pump.
C. Chains or cables: Type 316 stainless steel; attached to balance point of pump;
suitable for lifting pump from sump; long enough to extend from pump to 5 feet
above wet well hatch.
D. Hooks: Type 316 stainless steel; suitable to provide storage of chain or cable at top
of wet well. Hook shall facilitate easy removal of chain or cable from hook. Hook
shall be located such that chain or cable can be reached by maintenance personnel
from outside of hatch opening.
E. Ball Float Level Switch:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Siemens Water Technologies Corp 9G-EF.
b. ITT Flygt Model ENM-10.
c. Anchor Scientific Incorporated Ecofloat/Solofloat.
2. General:
a. Free hanging, encapsulated body with a switch to determine position of
float.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_11313-3 8235A10
� pw:1/Carollo/Documents�ClienUWAJRenton18235At0/Specifica6onsl10.t 1313
3
4
5.
b_ Provide four level switches as indicated on the drawings.
c. Each float shall be individually removable from the wefinrell without
disturbing any other floats_
Element:
a. Mechanical switch encapsulated in waterproof floating polypropylene ball
of nominal diameter, supported by flexible PVC cable and jacket or heavy
neoprene.
b. The length of the PVC cable shall be, at a minimum, equal to sump depth
plus 30 feet.
c. Float: Provide type 316SS, minimum 3 inches in diameter. The float shall
provide a minimum of 2 pounds of buoyancy in solutions with specific
gravity of 1 and shall have an operating temperature rating of -30 degrees
Fahrenheit to +150 degrees Fahrenheit_
d. Mercury switches are not acceptable.
e_ Lead Wires: Mounted in flexible waterproof PVC cable from switch to
junction box terminals without splices.
Switch _
a. Single pole double throw contacts rated 10 amps resistive at 120 VAC.
b_ Provide the number of floats per level system as shown on the Drawings.
c. Suspend ball float and adjust for level setpoint as required.
Components:
a. Each float shall include type 316 stainless steel clamp and brackets and
cable to allow testing of floats individually.
b. Provide strain relief at both ends of the float cable.
a. Stainless steel cable/weight suspension mounting kit:
1) Stainless steel 1/4 inch multi-stranded cable.
2) A coated, 20-pound cast-iron weight with stainless steel eyelet (for
connection to the stainless steel cable with two stainless steel
clamps) shall provide drift free mounting_
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
�
:
Install grinder pumps as specified in Sub-Sections 10.15050 and 10.16050 and in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations_
Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as shown on
#he Drawings.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Performance test: Level 1 as specified in Sub-Section 10.15958.
3.03 PUMP SCHEDULE
A. Pump Characteristics:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.11313-4 8235A10
pw:llCarollolDocumentslCl ienUWA/Renton18235A10lSpecifica tionsl10.11313
1
1
1
,
,
�
'
�
Pump Tag Number Pump Tag Number
Service GP-01 GP-02
Rated Capacity, gpm 30 30
Rated Total Dynamic Head (TDH), 34 34
feet
Condition 2
Capacity, gpm 45 45
TDH, feet 14 14
Maximum shutoff head, feet 56 56
Motor Horsepower 2.0 2.0
Motor Speed, revolutions per 3,450 3,450
!7:IIlLtB
END OF SUB-SECTION
i
1
1
1
i
1
t
r
i
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.11313-5 8235A10
� pw:/lCarollolDocumentslClienUWA/Rentonl8235AtO/Specificationsl10.11313
I�
,
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_11313-6 8235A10
pw://CarollolDocumentslClienNNAlf2entoN8235At01Spedficationsll0.t 1313
�J
�
�
�
(
��
�
�
'
C�
i
i
1
1
i
1
1
t
�
t
LJ
,
�
1
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
L__!
1
�
�
'
��
SUB-SECTION 10.15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Basic design and performance requirements for mechanical
equipment.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1_ Sub-Section 10.01612 - Seismic Design Criteria_
2. Sub-Section 10.01756 - Testing, Training, and Facility Start-Up.
3. Sub-Section 10.01782 - �r�rating and Mainte^�nce Data.
4. Sub-Section 10.03600 - Grouts.
5. Sub-Section 10.05120 - Structural Steel.
6. Sub-Section 10.09960 - Coatings.
7. Sub-Section 10.15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.
8. Sub-Section 10.16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.
9. Sub-Section 10.17950 - Testing Calibration and Cornmissioning.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Gear Manufacturer's Association (AGMA) Standards:
1. 2Q01-B88 - Fundamental Rating Factors and Calculation Methods for Involute
Spur and Helical Gear Teeth.
2. 6000-A88 - Specification for Measurement of Linear Vibration on Gear Units.
3. 6010-E88 - Standard for Spur, Helical, Herringbone, and Bevel Enclosed
Drives.
4. 6019-E89 - Standard for Gear motors using Spur, Helical, Herringbone,
Straight Bev.el or Spiral Bevel Gears.
5. 6025-C90 - Sound for Enclosed Helical, Herringbone, and Spiral Bevel Gear
Drives.
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)_
1. PTC 8.2 - PerFormance Test Code for Centrifugal Pumps.
2. PTC 10 - Performance Test Code - Compressors and Exhausters.
3. PTC 17 - Performance Test Code - Reciprocating Intemal-Combustion
Engines. �
� 4: PTC 11 - Performance Test Code - Measurement of Shaft Horsepower -
Instruments and Apparatus_
� C. American Bearing Manufactures Association (ABMA) Standards:
1. 9- Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
2. 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
,
October 26; 2010 - FINAL 10.15050-1 8235A10
� pwJ/CarollolDocumentslCtientlWAlf2entonl8235A10fSpecificationsl10.15050
D_ American Petroleum Institute (API):
1. 682 - Shaft Sealing Systems for Centrifugal and Rotary Pumps
E. ASTM international (ASTM):
1. A 36 - Standard Specification for Structural Steel.
2. A 48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
3. A 125 - Standard Specification for Steel Springs, Helical, Heat-Treated.
4. A 526 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the Hot Dip
Process, Commercial Quality.
5. A 536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
6_ B 61 - Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings.
7. B 62 - Standard specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal
Castings.
8. B 505 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Continuous Castings.
9. B 584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General
Applications.
F. Hydraulic Institute (HI):
1. 1.1-1.5 - Centrifugal Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application, and
Operation.
2. 1_6 - Centrifugal Pump Tests.
3. 2.1-2.5 - Vertical Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application, and
Operation_
4. 2.6 - Vertical Pump Tests.
5. 3_1-1.5 - Rotary Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application, and
Operation.
6. 3.6 - Rotary Pump Tests.
7. 4_1-4.6 - Sealless Rotary Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application,
Operation, and Test.
8_ 5.1-1.6 - Sealless Centrifugal Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application,
Operation, and Test.
9. 6.1-6.5 - Reciprocating Power Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application,
and Operation.
1Q. 7.1-7.5 - Controlled Volume Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application,
and Operation.
11. 9.1-9.5 - Pumps - General Guidelines for Types, Definitions, Application, and
Sound Measurement.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Special tools: Tools that have been specifically made for use on unit of equipment
for assembly, disassembly, repair, or maintenance.
',:3
C
Resonant frequency: That frequency at which a small driving force produces an
ever-larger vibration if no dampening exists.
Rotational frequency: The revolutions per unit of time usually expressed as
revolutions per minute.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL , 10_15050-2 8235A10
pw:/1Carollo/DoaanentsrClienUWAlf2enroN8235A 10/Specifica6ons/10.15050
�
'
'
�
�
i
D. Critical frequency: Same as resonant frequency for the rotating elements or the
installed machine and base.
E. Peak vibration velocity: The root mean square average of the peak velocity of the
vibrational movement times the square root of 2 in inches per second.
F. Rotational speed: Same as rotational frequency.
G_ Maximum excitation frequency: The excitation frequency with the highest vibration
velocity of several excitation frequencies that are a function of the design of a
particular machine.
�
�
�
,
�
�
��
�
�
i
L�
�
i
lJ
J.
Critical speed: Same as critical frequency.
Free field noise level: Noise measured without any reflective surfaces (an idealized
situation); sound pressure levels at 3 feet from the source unless specified
otherwise.
Operating weight: The weight of unit plus weight of fluids or solids normally
contained in unit during operation.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A_ General:
1. Provisions specified under each technical equipment specification prevail over
and supersede conflicting provisions as specified in this Sub-Section.
2. Provide equipment and parts that are suitable for stresses, which may occur
during fabrication, transportation, erection, and operation.
3. Provide equipment that has not been in service prior to delivery, except as
required by tests.
4. Like parts of duplicate units are to be interchangeable.
5. When 2 or more units of equipment for the same purpose are required, provide
products of same manufacturer.
6. Equipment manufacturer's responsibility extends to selection and mounting of
gear drive units, motors or other prime move�s, accessories, and auxiliaries
required for proper operation.
7. When necessary, modify manufacturer's standard product to conform to
specified requirements or requirements indicated on the Drawings and
contained in Laws and Regulations.
B. Material requirements:
1. Materials: Suitable for superior corrosion resistance and for services under
conditions normaHy encountered in similar installations.
2. Dissimilar metals: Separate contacting surfaces with dielectric material.
C. Power transmission systems:
1. Power transmission equipment: V-belts, sheaves, shaft couplings, chains,
sprockets, mechanical variable-speed drives, variable frequency drives, gear
reducers, open and enclosed gearing, clutches, brakes, intermediate shafting,
intermediate bearings, and U-joints are to be rated for 24 hour-a-day
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15050-3 8235A10
� pwJlCarollolDocumentslClienUWAtRenton18235A t 0/SpedficaUortst10.75050
1
continuous service or frequent stops-and-starts intermittent service, whichever
is most severe, and sized with a minimum service factor of 1.5:
a_ Apply 1.5 service factor to nameplate horsepower and torque of prime
source of power and not to actual equipment loading.
b_ Apply service facfors higher than 1_5 when recommended for continuaus
24 hour-per-day operation and shock loadings specified in
AGMA 6010-E88, other applicable AGMA standards, or other applicable
referenced standards.
c. When manufacturer recommends service factor greater than 1.5,
manufacturer's recommendation takes precedence_
D. Vibration_
1. Resonant frequency: Ensure there are no natural resonant torsional, radial, or
axial frequencies within 25 percent above or below the operating rotational
frequencies or multiples of the operating rotational frequencies that may be
excited by the equipment design.
2. Design, balance, and align equipment to meet the vibration criteria specified in
Sub-Section 10.15958.
E. Equipment mounting and anchoring:
1. Mount equipment on cast iron or welded steel bases with structural steel
support frames. Utilize continuous welds to seal seams and contact edges
between steel members_ Grind welds smooth.
2. Provide bases and supports with machined support pads, dowels for alignment
of mating of adjacent items, adequate openings to facilitate grouting, and
openings for electrical conduits_
3. Provide jacking screws in bases and supports for equipment weighing over
1,000 pounds.
4. Anchorage of equipment to concrete: Perform calculations and determine
number, size, type, strength, and location of anchor bolts or other connections.
5. Provide bolt sleeves for anchor bolts for heavy equipment. Adjust bolts to final
location and fill sleeve with non-shrink grout.
6. Anchorage of equipment to metal supports: Perform calculations and
determine number, size, type, strength, and Iocation of bolts used to connect
equipment to metal supports_
7. Design equipment anchorage, supports, and connections for dead load,
running loads, loads during start-up, seismic load, and other loads as required
for proper operation of equipment_
F. Seismic design:
1. Design equipment anchorage and related details for seismic design criteria as
specified in Sub-Section 10.01612.
2. For equipment with operating weight of 400 pounds or more, provide
calculations for:
a. Determine operating weight and centroid of equipment.
b_ Calculate forces and overturning moments.
c_ Calculate shear and tension forces in equipment ancharages, supports,
and connections.
October 26, 201Q - FINAL 10.15050-4 8235A10
pw://Carollo/DocumentslClienU4VA�Rentonl8235A10/Speaficationsl10.15050
C�
'
�
�
s
�
�
1
�
�
��
�
,
�
1
�
'
�
�
�
1
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
i
�
j
,
1.05
d. Design equipment anchorage, supports, and connections based on
calculated shear and tension forces.
G. Equipment units weighing 50 pounds or more: Provide with lifting lugs or eyes to
allow removal with hoist or other lifting device.
SUBMITTALS
A. Product data:
1. For each item of equipment:
a. Design features.
b. Load capacities.
c. Efficiency ratings.
d. Material designations by UNS alloy number or ASTM Specification and
Grade.
e. Data needed to verify compliance with the Specifications.
f. Catalog data.
g. . Name plate data.
h. Clearly mark submittal information to show specific items, materials, and
accessories or options being furnished.
2. Gear reduction units:
a. Engineering information per applicable AGMA standards.
b_ Gear mesh frequencies.
B. Shop drawings:
1. Drawings for equipment:
a. Drawings that include outline drawings, cut-away drawings, parts lists,
material specification lists, and other information required to substantiate
that proposed equipment complies with specified requirements.
2. Outline drawings showing equipment, driver, driven equipment, pumps, seal,
motor(s) or other specified drivers, variable frequency drive, shafting, U-joints,
couplings, drive arrangement, gears, baseplate or support dimensions, anchor
bolt sizes and Iocations, bearings, and other furnished components_
3. Installation and checkout instructions including leveling and alignment
tolerances, grouting, lubricaiion requirements, and initial start-up procedures.
4. Wiring, control schematics, control logic diagrams and ladder logic or similar
for computer based controls.
5. Recommended or normal operating parameters such as temperatures and
pressures.
6. Alarm and shutdown set points for all controls furnished.
C. Calculations:
1. Calculations and other information to substantiate equipment base plates,
supports, bolts, anchor bolts, and other connections meet minimum design
strength requirements and seismic design criteria specified in Sub-Section
10.01612.
2. Bearing L,o life calculations in accordance with ABMA 9 or ABMA 11
calculation methods for drivers, pumps, gears, shafts, motors, and other
driveline components with bearings.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15050-5 8235A10
� pw:/lCarollolDocumentslClienWVAtF2entonB235A10/SpecificaUons110.15050
3
�
�
Calculations and other information to substantiate that operating rotational
frequencies meet the requirements of this Sub-Section.
Torsional analysis of power transmission systems: When torsional analysis
specified in the equipment Sub-Sections, provide:
a. Sketch of system components identifying physical characteristics
including mass, diameter, thickness, and stiffness.
b_ Results of analysis including first and second critical frequencies of
system components and complete system.
Calculations shall be signed and stamped by a civil or structural engineer
registered to practice in the state where the Project is located_
D. Qualiry control submittals:
1. Source quality control reports and certified test data as specified in Sub-
Section 10.15958.
2. Submit factory test reports before shipment.
3. Certified static and dynamic balancing reports for rotating equipment.
4. Field quality control reports and test data as specified in Sub-
Section 10.15958_
5. Start-up plan: Proposed plan for field-testing equipment as specified in Sub-
Section 10.01756.
6. Certificate of Proper Installation: As specified in Sub-Section 10.01756.
7. Submit material test reports a specified in the equipment Sub-Sections.
E. Operation and maintenance manuals:
1. As specified in Sub-Section 10.01782.
2. Submit prior to training of OWNER's personnel_
3. Make available at project site complete copy of manuals for use by field
personnel and ENGINEER during start-up and testing of equipment.
4. Include manufacturer and model number of every bearing; include calculated
ball pass frequencies of the installed equipment for both the inner and outer
raceways.
5_ Include motor rotor bar pass frequencies.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's field service:
1. Furnish services of authorized representative specially trained in installation of
equipment:
a. Visit project site and perForm tasks necessary to certify installation.
b. Fumish Certificate of Proper Installation as specified in Sub-
Section 10_01756.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing and shipping:
1. Equipment: Pack in boxes, crates, or otherwise protect from damage and
moisture, dust, or dirt during shipment, handling, and storage.
2. Bearings: Separately pack or otherwise suitably protect during transport.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15050-6 8235A10
pwll Camllo/Documents/ClientlWA/Rentonl6235A10/Speafications110.15050
l
1
��
�
�
3. Spare parts: Deliver in boxes labeled with contents, equipment to which spare
parts belong, and name of CONTRACTOR.
B. Storage:
1. Equipment having bearings: Store in enclosed facilities. Rotate units at least
once per month or more often as recommended by the manufacturer to protect
rotating elements and bearings.
2. Gear boxes: Oil filled or sprayed with rust preventive protective coating.
C. Protection:
� 1. Equipment: Protect equipment from deleterious exposure.
2. Painted surfaces: Protect against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other
damage.
i1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
1 A. Ea,uipment anchoring: Obtain ancharing rr�aterial and templates or setting drawings
from equipment manufacturers in adequate time for anchors to be cast-in-place
when concrete is placed.
� B_ Coordinate details of equipment with other related parts of the Work, including
verification that structures, piping, wiring, and equipment components are
compatible. �
�
�J
i
C. General start-up and testing of equipment:
1. Perform general start-up and testing procedures after operation and
maintenance manuals for equipment have been received.
2. Conduct functional testing of inechanical or electrical systems when each
system is substantially complete and.after general start-up and testing
procedures have been successfully completed.
3. Functional testing requirements as specified in Sub-Sections 10.01756,
10_15958, 10.16950, and 10.17950 and the equipment Sub-Sections.
1.09 MAINTENANCE
A. Speciat tools:
� 1. When specified, provide special tools required for operation and maintenance.
2. Mark or tag and fist such tools in maintenance and operations instructions.
Describe use of each tool.
�
�
II
B. Spare belts:
1. When spare belts are specified, furnish 1 spare belt for every different type
and size of belt-driven unit:
a_ Where 2 or more belts are involved, furnish matched sets.
b. Identify as to equipment, design, horsepower, speed, length, sheave size,
and use.
c_ Package in boxes labeled with identification of contents.
C. Spare parts:
1. Assume responsibility until turned over to OWNER.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15050-7 8235A10
� pw:llCardlolDocumentyClienWdNRentont8235A10lSpecificauonsl10.15050
2. Store in enclosed facilities.
3. Furnish itemized list and match identification tag attached to every part.
4. List parts by generic title and identification number.
5. Furnish name, address, and telephone number of supplier and spare parts
warehouse.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Ferrous materials:
1. Steel for Members used in Fabrication of Assemblies: ASTM A 36.
2. Iron castings: ASTM A 48, tough, close-grained gray iron, free from blowholes,
flaws, and other imperfections.
3. Ductile iron castings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12, free from flaws and
imperfections.
4. Galvanized steel sheet: ASTM A 526, minimum 0.0635 inch (16 gauge).
5. Expanded metal: ASTM A 36, 13 gauge, 1/2-inch flat pattern expanded metal.
B. Nonferrous materials:
1. Stainless steel: Type 304 or 316 as specified_ Provide L grade where welding
required.
2. Bronze in contact with liquid: Composition of not more than 2 percent
aluminum nor more than 6 percent zinc; UNS Alloy C83600, C92200 or
C93700 in accordance with ASTM B 61, B 62, B 505, or B 584, when not
specified otherwise.
C. Dielectric materials for separation of dissimilar metals:
1. Neoprene, bituminous impregnated felt, heavy bituminous coatings,
nonmetallic separators or washers, or other materials.
❑�
E
Anchor bolts: As specified in Sub-Section 10.05120; minimum 0.5 inch diameter.
Non-shrink grout: As specified in Sub-Section 10.03600.
2.02 BEARINGS
A. Type: Oil or grease lubricated, ball or roller antifriction type, of standard
manufactur�_
B. Oil lubricated bearings: Provide either pressure lubricating system or separate oil
reservoir splash type system:
1. Size oif lubrication systems to safely absorb heat energy generated in bearings
when equipment is operating under normal conditions and with the ambient
temperature 15 degree Fahrenheit above the maximum ambient temperature
specified elsewhere in this Sub-Section.
2. Provide an external oil cooler when required to satisfy the specified operating
conditions. Provide air cooled system if a water-cooling source is not indicated
on the Drawings. Equip oil cooler with a filler pipe and external level gauge.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15050-8 8235A10
pw:/ICaroIto/DocumentslClienUWA�RentonB235At0/Speafirationslt 0.15050
�
�
1
�
�
1
�
�
�
�i
i
�
�
�
�
C. Grease lubricated bearings, except those specified to be factory sealed: Fit with
easily accessible grease supply, flush, drain, and relief fittings.
1_ Lubrication lines and fittings:
a. Lines: Minimum 1/4-inch diameter stainless steel tubing.
b_ Multiple fitting assemblies: Mount fittings together in easily accessible
location.
c_ Use standard hydraulic type grease supply fittings:
1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Alenite.
b) Zurk.
D. Ratings: Rated in accordance with ABMA 9 or ABMA 11 for L,o rating life of not less
than 50,000 hours:
1. Higher ratings, when specified in other Sub-Sections, supersede preceding
requirement.
2.03 FABRI�ATI�N
A. Structural steel members: As specified in Sub-Section 10.05120.
B. Nameplates:
1. Engraved or stamped on Type 304 stainless steel and fastened to equipment
at factory in an accessible and visible location. �
2. Indicate following information as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's name.
b. Equipment model number and serial number.
c. Maximum and Normal rotating speed.
d. Horsepower.
e. Rated capacity.
f. Service class per applicable standards.
3. Nameplates for pumps: Include:
a. Rated total dynamic head in feet of fluid.
b_ Rated flow in gallons per minute.
c_ Impeller, gear, screw, diaphragm, or piston size.
4_ Gear reduction units: Include:
a. AGMA Class of service.
b. Service factor.
c. Input and output speeds.
C. Bolt holes in equipment support frames: Do not exceed bott diameter by more than
25 percent, up to limiting maximum diameter oversize of 1/4 inch.
i
�
�
D. Shop finishing:
1. Provide factory and field coating as specified in Sub-Section 10.09960A. If not
specified in Sub-Section 10.09960A, provide coating as follows:
a. Bases and support frames in contact with concrete or other material: Coat
contacting surfaces with minimum of 2 coats of zinc chromate primer
before installation or grouting.
b. Shop primer for steel and iron surfaces, unless specified otherwise:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15050-9 8235A10
� pw:llCarollolDocumentslClientlWAlRenton/8235A1015peafications110.15050
c.
C�
e.
1) Manufacturers: One of the foilowing or equai:
a) Ameron, Amercoat 185 Universal Primer.
b) Cook, 391-N-167 Barrier Coat.
c) Kop-Coat, Pug Primer.
d) Tnemec, 37-77 Chem-Prime_
e) Valspar, 13-R-28 Chromox Primer.
Coat machined, polished, and nonferrous surFaces which are not to be
painted with rust-preventive compounds:
1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Houghton, Rust Veto 344.
b) Rust-Oleum, R-9.
Coating for ferrous metal surFaces, except stainless steel: High solids
polyamine epoxy_
Finish painting of motors: Shop finish paint with manufacturer's standard
coating, unless otherwise specified in Sub-Section 10.09960A.
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.15958 for testing requirements and the individual
equipment Sub-Sections of the Specifications_
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect all components for shipping damage, conformance to specifications, and
proper torques and tightness of fasteners.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Metal work embedded in concrete:
1. Accurately place and hold in correct position while concrete is being placed.
2. Clean surface of inetal in contact with concrete immediately before concrete is
placed.
B. Concrete surfaces designated to receive non-shrink grout:
1. Heavy sandblast concrete surface in contact with non-shrink grout.
2. Clean concrete surfaces of sandblasting sand, grease, oil, dirt, and other
fareign material that may reduce bond to non-shrink grout_
3. Saturate concrete with water. Concrete shall be saturated surface damp at
time non-shrink grout is placed_
C. Field measurements:
1. Prior to fabrication of equipment, take measurements for installation of
equipment and verify dimensions indicated on the Drawings. Ensure
equipment and ancillary appurtenances fit within available space.
October 26, 201Q - FINAL 10.15050-10 8235A10
pwJlCarollo(DocumentslClientlWAlRenton/8235At 0(Specfications/10.15050
�
i
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and
recommendations.
B. Lubrication lines and fittings:
1. Lines from fittings to point of use: Support and protect.
2. Fittings:
a. Bring fittings to outside of equipment in manner such that they are readily
accessible from outside without necessity of removing covers, plates,
housings, or guards.
b. Mount fittings together wherever possible using factory-mounted multiple
fitting assemblies securely mounted, parallel with equipment lines, and
protected from damage.
c. Fittings for underwater bearings: Bring fittings above water surface and
mount on edge of structure above.
3. Alignment and calc�lations sha!! includp measurement and allo�vance for
thermal growth, spacer coupling length, indicator separation, and axial spacing
tolerances of the coupling.
4. When alignment satisfies most stringent tolerance of system components,
grout between base and foundation. Allow minimum 48 hours for grout to
harden. After grout hardens, remove jacking screws, tighten anchor bolts and
other connections, and recheck alignment_ Correct alignment as required.
5. After operational testing is complete, dowel motor or drivers and driven
equipment_ Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Grouting equipment bases and baseplates with non-shrink grout:
1. Grout with non-shrink grout as specified in Sub-Section 10.03600.
2. Comply with equipment manufacturer's installation instructions for grouting
spaces, and tolerances for level and alignments, both vertical and horizontal.
3. Grout after piping connections are complete and in alignment with no strain
transmitted to equipment.
4. Grout base when equipment is leveled and in alignment_
5. Place grout, filling voids under equipment bases and other supports including
recesses between anchor bolts and sleeves:
a. Extend grout to edge of equipment bases or baseplates and bevel at
45 degrees around units.
b. Grouts must be cut back to the lower edge of baseplates after reaching
initial set_ Provide a 45-degree angle cut back.
c. Finish surfaces with slope that prevents ponding water within grouted
areas_
D. Forms and headboxes for non-shrink grouts or non-shrink epoxy grouts:
1. As spec�ed in Sub-Section 10.03600_
�
.�
E. Special techniques: Use applicable special tools and equipment, including precision
machinist levels, dial indicators, and gauges as required in equipment installations.
F. Tolerances:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15050-11 8235A10
� pwJlCarol�olDocumentslClienNNAlRenton18235AtO/Speaficaoons/10.15050
1. Completed equipment installations: Comply with requirements for intended use
and specified vibration and noise tolerances.
G. Waming signs: Mount securely with stainless fasteners at equipment that can be
started automatically or from remote locations_
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test equipment as specified in Sub-Section 10.15958 and the individual equipment
Sub-Section of the Specifications_
B. Perform operational testing as required by Sub-Section 10.01756.
3.05 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. Field checkout: Before field-testing and start-up, provide services of factory-trained
field service representative to certify the equipment has been installed, aligned, and
checked in accordance with the manufacturer`s instructions and the Specifications.
B. Testing: Provide services of factory trained representative to obsenre and advise the
CONTRACTOR during field quality control testing.
C. Training: When training is specified, provide services of factory-trained
representative to perform training as specified in Sub-Section 10.01756.
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15050-12 8235A10
pw:/1CarollolDocuments/ClienUWAlRentonl8235A 10lSpecficationsl10.15050
SUB-SECTION 10.15052
BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Basic piping materials and methods.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1_ The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and ather individ��als or ent►ties �erf�rming
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.09960A - Coatings_
b. Sub-Section 10.15061 - Pipe Supports_
c_ Sub-Section 10.15062 - Preformed Channel Pipe Support System.
d. Sub-Section 10.15251 - Ductile Iron AVW1/A C151 Pipe.
e. Sub-Section 10.15255 - Stainless Steel Piping and Tubing.
f. Sub-Section 10.15265 - Plastic Piping and Tubing.
g. Sub-Section 10.15956 - Piping Systems Testing.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 Through 24.
2. B16.47 - Large Diameter Steel Flanges: NPS 26 Through NPS 60 Metric/Inch
Standard.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A 193 - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting
Materials for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special
Purpose Applications.
2. A 194 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for
High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both.
3. A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI
Tensile Strength.
4. F 37 - Standard Test Methods for Sealability of Gasket Materials.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_15052-1 8235A10
� pw:IlCarollolDocuments�ClienUWAlRentonl8235AtO/Spedficationslt�.15052
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Buried pipe: Pipe that is buried in the soil, or cast in a concrete pipe encasement
that is buried in the soil.
B. Exposed pipe: Pipe that is located above ground, or pipe that is located inside a
structure, supported by a structure, or cast into a concrete structure.
C. Underground piping: Piping actually buried in soil or cast in concrete that is buried in
soil.
D. Underwater piping: Piping below tops of walls in basins or tanks containing water.
E. Wet wall: Wall with water on�at least 1 side.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
�1. Product ciaia:
1. Escutcheons.
2. Flange bolts.
3. Gaskets.
4. Link -type seals.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Material: Chrome-plated steel plate.
B. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Dearborn Brass Company, Model Number 5358.
2. Keeney Manufacturing Company, Model Number 102 or Number 105.
2.02 LINK TYPE SEALS
A. Characteristics:
1. Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking neoprene or synthetic
rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe
and wall opening.
2. Assemble links solely with stainless steel bolts and nuts to form a continuous
rubber belt around the pipe_
3. Provide a nylon polymer pressure plate with Type 316 stainless steel
hardware_ Isolate pressure plate from contact with wall sleeve.
B. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Calpico, Incorparated_
2. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc., Link-Seal.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15052-2 8235A10
pw:IlCarol lolDocumentslClienUWAlRentonB235A10lSpecificationsl10.15052
;1
i
� 2.03 FLANGE BOLTS
A. All Piping:
1. Bolts and nuts shall be Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A
� 193, Grade B8M for bolts and in accordance with ASTM A 194, Grade 8M for
nuts.
_ 2. Provide a washer for each nut. Washer shall be of the same material as the
nut.
3. Nuts shall be Heavy hex-head, Type 2H.
4_ Cut and finish flange bolts to project a maximum of 1l4 inch beyond outside
face of nut after assembly.
5. Tap holes for cap screws or stud bolts when used.
B. Lubricant for stainless steel bolts and nuts_
1. Chloride-free.
2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Huskey FG-1800.
2.04 GASKETS
A. Gaskets for non-steam cleaned ductile iron and steel piping:
1. Suitable for pressures equal to and less than 150 pounds per square inch
gauge, temperatures equal to o� less than 250 degrees Fahrenheit, and raw
sewage service.
2. Gasket material:
a. Neoprene elastomer with minimum Shore A hardness value of 70.
b. Thickness: Minimum 3/32-inch thick for less than 10-inch pipe.
3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Pipe less than 20 inches in diameter:
1) Garlock, Style 7797.
2) John Crane, similar product.
B_ Gaskets for flanged joints in polyvinyl chloride and polyethylene piping:
� 1. Suitable for pressures equal to or less than 150 pounds per square inch.
gauge, with low flange bolt loadings, temperatures equal and less than 120
degrees Fahrenheit, and polymer, chlorine, caustic solutions, and other
� chemicals, except chemicals which liberate free fluorine including
fluorochemicals and gaseous fluorine.
2. Material: 0.125-inch thick Viton rubber.
3. Manufacturers: One of the folloviring or equal:
� a. Garlock.
b. John Crane, similar product.
C. Provide gaskets suitable for the specific fluids and pressure and temperature
conditions.
CJ
�
Ocfober 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15052-3 8235A10
� pw:llCarollolDocumenM/ClienNNAlRenton18235At0/Specificationsl10.15052
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of existing conditions:
1. Locate and expose existing structures, piping, conduits, and other facilities and
obstructions that may affect construction of underground piping before starting
excavation for new underground piping and appurtenances.
2. Verify sizes, elevations, locations, and other relevant features of existing
facilities and obstructions_ Determine conflicts for the construction of the new
underground piping and appurtenances.
3. Make piping location and grade adjustments to resolve conflicts between new
piping and existing facilities and obstructions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Piping drawings:
a. Except in details, piping is indicated diagrammatically. Not every offset
and fitting, or structural difficulty that may be encountered has been
indicated on the Drawings. Sizes and locations are indicated on the
Drawings.
b. Perform minor modifications to piping alignment where necessary to avoid
structural, mechanical, or other type of obstructions that cannot be
removed or changed.
1) Modifications are intended to be of minor scope, not involving a
change to the design concept or a change to the Contract Price or
Contract Times.
2. Piping alternatives:
a. Provide piping as specified in this Sub-Section, unless indicated on the
Drawings or specified otherwise.
b. Alternative pipe ratings: Piping with greater pressure rating than specified
may be substituted in lieu of specified piping without changes to the �
Contract Price. Piping of different material may not be substituted in lieu of
specified piping.
c. Valves in piping sections: Capable of withstanding specified test
pressures for piping sections and fabricated with ends to fit piping.
d. For flanged joints, where 1 of the joining flanges is raised face type,
provide a matching raised face type flange for the other joining flange.
3. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, piping at pipe joints, fittings,
couplings, and equipment shall be installed without rotation, angular deflection,
vertical offset, or horizontal offset.
B. Wall and slab penetrations:
1. Provide sleeves for piping penetrations through aboveground masonry and
concrete walls, floors, ceilings, roofs, unless specified or otherwise indicated
on the Drawings.
2. For piping 1 inch in nominal diameter and larger, provide sleeves with
minimum inside diameters of 1 inch plus outside diameter of piping. For piping
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15052-4 8235A10
pw:/lCarollo/DocumentslClientlWAlftentonB235A101Speafications/10.15052
3
smaller than 1 inch in nominal diamete�, provide sleeve of minimum twice the
outside diameter of piping.
a. Arrange sleeves and adjacent joints so piping can be pulled out of sleeves
and replaced without disturbing the structure.
b. Cut ends of sleeves flush with surfaces of concrete, masonry, or plaster.
c. Conceal ends of sleeves with escutcheons where piping runs through
floors, walls, or ceilings of finished spaces within buildings.
d. Seal spaces between pipes and sleeves with link-type seals when not
otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.
Provide flexibility in piping connecting to structures to accommodate
movement due to soil settlement and earthquakes. Provide flexibility using
details indicated on the Drawings.
C. Exposed piping:
1_ Install exposed piping in straight runs parallel to the axes of structures, unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings:
a. lnstall piping runs plurnb and leve(, unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings. Slope plumbing drain piping with a minimum of 1/4 inch per foot
downward in the direction of flow.
2_ Install exposed piping after installing equipment and after piping and fitting
locations have been determined.
3. Support piping: As specified in Sub-Sections 10.15061, and 10.15062:
a. Do not transfer pipe loads and strain to equipment.
4. In �ddition to the joints �ndicated on the Drawings, provide unions, flexible
couplings, flanged joints, flanged coupling adapters, and other types of joints
or means which are compatible with and suitable for the piping system, and
necessary to allow ready assembly and disassembly of the piping.
5. Assemble piping without distortion or stresses caused by misalignment:
a. Match and properly orient flanges, unions, flexible couplings, and other
connections.
b. Do not subject piping to bending or other undue stresses when fitting
piping. Do not correct defective orientation or alignment by distorting
flanged joints or subjecting flange bolts to bending or other undue
stresses.
c_ Flange botts, union halves, flexible connectors, and other connection
elements shall slip freely into place.
d_ Alter piping assembly to fit, when proper fit is not obtained.
e. Install eccentric reducers or increasers with the top horizontal for pump
suction piping.
D_ Buried piping:
1. Bury piping with minimum 3-foot cover without air traps, unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings.
2. Where 2 similar services run parallel to each other, piping for such services
may be laid in the same trench. Lay piping with sufficient room for assembly
and disassembly of joints, for thrust blocks, for other structures, and to meet
separation requirements of public health authorities having jurisdiction.
3_ Laying piping:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15052-5 8235A10
� pw:!/CarollolDocwnentsrGienWVAR2enton/8235A10/Specifications/t0.15052
a. Lay piping in finished trenches free from water or debris. Begin at the
lowest point with bell ends up slope_
b. Place piping with top or bottom markings with markings in proper position.
c. Lay piping on an unyielding foundation with uniform bearing under the full
length of barrels.
d. Where joints require external. grouting, banding, or pointing, provide space
under and immediately in front of the bell end of each section laid with
sufficient shape and size for grouting, banding, or pointing of joints.
e. At the end of each day's construction, plug open ends of piping
temporarily to prevent entrance of debris or animals_
E. Venting piping under pressure:
1. Lay piping under pressure flat or at a continuous slope without air traps, unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings_
2. Install plug valves as air bleeder cocks at high points in piping_ Provide 1-inch
plug valves for water lines, and 2-inch plug valves for sewage and sludge
lines, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
3. Provide additional pipe taps with plug cocks and riser pipes along piping as
required for venting during initiaf filling, disinfecting, and sampling.
4. Before piping is placed into service, close plug valves and install plugs. Protect
plugs and plug valves from corrosion in as specified in Sub-Section
10.09960A.
F. Restraining piping:
1. Restrain piping at valves and at fittings where piping changes direction,
changes sizes, and at ends:
a. When piping is underground, use concrete thrust block or mechanical
restraints_
2
3
�
b. When piping is aboveground or underwater, use mechanical or structural
restraints.
c. Determine thrust forces by multiplying the nominal cross sectional area of
the piping by design test pressure of the piping_
Provide restraints with ample size to withstand thrust forces resulting from test
pressures:
a. During testing, provide suitable temporary restraints where piping does
not require permanent restraints.
Place concrete thrust blocks against undisturbed soil. Place concrete so piping
joints, fittings, and other appurtenances are accessible for assembly and
disassembly_
Provide underground mechanical restraints where specified in the Piping
Schedule_
G. Connections to existing piping:
1. Expose existing piping to which connections are to be made with sufficient
time to permit, where necessary, field adjustments in line, grade, or fittings:
a. Protect domestic water/potable water supplies from contamination:
1) Make connections between domestic water supply and other water
systems in accordance with requirements of public health authorities.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15052-6 8235A10
pw:l1 Carof Io/DocumentslCl ienUWA/f2entonJ6235A10lSpecficationsl10.15052
�.
�
� 2) Provide devices approved by OWNER of domestic water supply
system to prevent flow from other sources into the domestic supply
� system.
2. Make connections to existing piping and valves after sections of new piping to
� be connected have been tested and found satisfactory.
3. Provide sleeves, flanges, nipples, couplings, adapters, and other fittings
needed to install or attach new fittings to existing piping and to make
'� connections to existing piping.
_ 4. For flanged connections, provide stainless steel bolts with isolation bushings
and washers, and full-face flange gaskets.
t H. Connections between ferrous and nonferrous metals:
1. Connect ferrous and nonferrous metal piping, tubing, and fittings with dielectric
couplings especially designed for the prevention of chemical reactions
�' between dissimilar metals.
2. Nonferrous metals include aluminum, copper, and copper alloys.
! I. Flangetl connections between dissimilar metals such as ductile iron pipe and steel
. pipe:
1. Provide stainless steel bolts with isolation bushings and washers, and full-face
� flange gaskets.
3.03 CLEANING
A_ Piping cleaning:
1. Upon completion of installation, clean piping interior of foreign matter and
debris. Perform special cleaning when required by the Contract Documents.
3.04 PIPING SCHEDULE
��
�
L�
i
.i
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15Q52-7 8235A10
� pwJlCarollolDocumentslClientlWA/RentoN8235A10/SpecificaUonsl10.15052
O
�
0
v
m
�
N
�
N
0
�
0
�
Z
D
r
�
N
�
0
�
�
0
�
N
�
�
N
w
�
D
�
0
PIPING SCHEDULE
Pressure Class
Nominal Special Thickness Pipe Spec.
Process Diameter Class Schedule Wall Sub- Test Pressur.e/
Abbrev. Service/Location inches Material Thickness Section Joints/ Fittin s Method Linln Coatin
D Drain 2 and less PVC SCH 80 10.15265 SW or FL 15 feet/GR None None
PD Pumped Drainage
All 3 and less PVC SCH 80 10.15265 SW or FL 40 psig/HH None None
SSFM Sanitary Sewer
Force Main
Exposed (unless
otherwise indicated 3 and less SST SCH 40S 10.15255 SCRD, FL, or GE 40 psig/HH None None
on the Drawin s
Buried (unless
othen+vise indicated 3 and less PVC SCH 80 10.15265 SW or FL 40 psig/HH None None
on the Drawin s
Abbreviations:
1. The following abbreviations used in the column of test method refer to the respective methods as specified in Sub-Section 10.15956.
AM Air method
GR Gravity method
HH High head method
LH �ow head method
SC Special case
2. Abbreviations to designate piping include the foilowing:
CL Class, followed by the designatiori
EPP Epoxy polyurethane coating
FL Flange
GA Gauge, preceded by the designation
GE Grooved end joint
NPS Nominai pipe size, followed by the number in inches
psi pounds per square inch
psig pounds per square inch gauge
PVC Polyvinyl Chloride
SCH Schedule, followed by the designation
SCRD Screwed-On
SST Stainiess steel
SW Solvent welded
END OF SUB-SECTION
r� t� ��r � �t� � �r� � r� �+rr ,r_�. �w �: �� �� � � �r C�
�
�
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
SUB-SECTION 10.15061
PIPE SUPPORTS
A. Sub-Section includes: Supports for pipe, fittings, valves, and appurtenances.
�
�
�
!�
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for. by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheciuling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.01410 - Regulatory Requirements.
b. Sub-Section 10.05120 - Structural Steel.
c. Sub-Section 10.09960A - Coatings.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A 380 - Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of
Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems.
2. A 967 - Standard Specification for Chemical Passivation Treatments for
Stainless Steel Parts.
� B. Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS):
1. SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, and Manufacture.
2. SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application_
� 1.03 SUBMITTALS
�.
A. Shop drawings: Include schedule, indicating where supports will be installed, and
drawings of pipe support system components.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE SUPPORTS
A. General: All supports shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel materials.
�
B. Eye bolts:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15061-1 8235A10
� pwllCarollolDxumentsJClienUWAlRentonl8235A10lSpeafications110.15061
Type 316 stainiess steel, welded and rated equal to fult load capaciry of rod.
C. Weided eyebolt rod:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equai:
a. Nibco-Tolco, Figure 101.
b. . FM Stainless Fasteners.
D. Standard U-bolt: MSS SP-69, Type 24:
1_ Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a_ Nibco-Tolco, Figure 110.
b_ Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3188..
c. FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 37.
E. Riser clamps_ MSS SP-69, Type 8:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a_ Cooper B-Line Systems, lnc., Figure B3373.
b. FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 61.
F. Pipe clamps: MSS SP-69, Type 4:
1. i�Tianufiacturers: One of the fioiiowing or equal:
a. Nibco-Tolco, Figure 4.
b_ Cooper 6-Line Systems, Inc_, Figure 3140.
G. Adjustable offset pipe clamp:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
� a. Nibco-Tolco, Figure 4.
b. Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3149.
c_ FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 63.
H. Offset pipe clamp:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Nibco-Tolco, Figure 8.
b_ Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc_, Figure 3148.
Floor stand or stanchion saddles: MSS SP-69, Type 37. Provided with U-bolt hold
down yokes:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Nibco-Tolco, Figure 318.
b. FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 59.
Welded beam attachment: MSS SP-69, Type 22:
1_ Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Nibco-Tolco, Figure 304_
b. Cooper 6-Line Systems, Inc., Figure 3083.
K. Heavy pipe clamp: MSS SP-69, Type 4:
1_ Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a_ Nibco-Tolco, Figure 4H.
L. Anchor bolts, concrete anchors, concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, and
sleeve anchors: As specified in Sub-Section 10.05120.
October 26, 2010 - FlNAL 10.15061-2 8235A10
pw:l/Carollo/DocumentslClienUWNRemm�/8235A10ISpecificaGons/10.15061
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Pipe supports:
1. Stainless steei (Type 316):
a. Use in all locations.
b. Field welding and fabrication of supports is prohibited.
c. Shop-fabricated supports:
1) Finish requirements: Remove free iron, heat tint oxides, weld scale,
and other impurities, and obtain a passive finished surface.
2) At the shop, perform pickling and passivation on all surfaces inside
and out in accordance with ASTM A 380 or A 967.
a) Passivafion treatments using citric acid are not allowed.
2, Plastic, aluminum, FRP, and other miscellaneous materials: Use where
specifically indicated on the Drawings.
B. Fasteners:
1. As specified in Sub-Section 10.05120.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Properly support, suspend, or anchor exposed pipe, fittings, valves, and
appurtenances to prevent sagging, overstressing, or movement of piping; and to
prevent thrusts or loads on or against connected pumps, and other equipment.
B. Field verify support location, orientation, and configuration to eliminate interferences
prior to fabrication of supports.
C. Carefully determine locations of inserts. Anchor to formwork prior to placing
concrete.
D. Use flush shelts onlywhere indicated on the Drawings.
E. Do not use anchors relying on deformation of lead alloy.
F. Do not use powder-actuated fasteners for securing metallic conduit or steel pipe
larger than 1 inch to concrete, masonry, or wood.
G. Suspend pipe hangers from hanger rods and secure with double nuts.
H. Install continuously threaded hanger rods only where indicated on the Drawings.
I. Use adjustable ring hangers or adjustable clevis hangers, for 4 inch and smaller
diameter pipe_ �
J. Use adjustable clevis hangers for pipe larger than 4 inches in diameter.
K. Secure pipes with double nutted U-bolts or suspend pipes from hanger rods and
hangers.
1. For all piping use stainless steel U-bolts_
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_15061-3 8235A10
pw:/!Ca rollotDocumentslClienUWAlRenton18235A10/5 pecificaUonsl10.15061
L. Support spacing:
1. Support 2-inch and smaller piping on horizontal and vertical runs at maximum
5 feet on center, unless otherwise specified_
2. Support larger than 2-inch piping on horizontal and vertical.runs at maximum
10 feet on center, unless otherwise specified.
3. Support exposed polyvinyl chloride and other plastic pipes at maximum 5 feet
on center, regardless of size.
4. Support tubing, copper pipe and tubing, fiber-reinforced plastic pipe or duct,
and rubber hose and tubing at intervals close enough to prevent sagging
greaterthan 1/4 inch between supports.
M. Install supports at:
1. Any change in direction.
2. Both sides of flexible pipe connections.
3. Base of risers.
4. Floor penetrations.
5_ Connections to pumps, blowers, and other equipment.
6. Valves and appurtenances.
N. Securely anchor plastic pipe, valves, and headers to prevent movement during
operation of valves.
��
�.
I�
CC
Anchor plastic pipe between expansion loops and direction changes to prevent axial
movement through anchors.
Provide elbows or tees supported from floors with base fittings where indicated on
the Drawings.
Support base fittings with metal supports or when indicated on the Drawings support
on concrete piers.
R. Do not use chains, plumbers' straps, wire, or similar devices for permanently
suspending, supporting, or restraining pipes.
S. Support plumbing drainage and vents in accordance with ptumbing code as
specified in Sub-Section 10.0141Q.
T. Supports, clamps, brackets, and portions of support system bearing against copper
pipe: Copper plated, copper throughout, or isolated with neoprene or polyvinyl
chloride tape.
U
V
W
Where pipe is insulated, install over-sized supports and hangers.
Install riser clamps at floor penetrations and where indicated an the Drawings.
Coat support system components as specified in Sub-Section 10_09960A.
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - F1NAL 10.15061-4 8235A10
pw:/ICarollolDocumenlslClienUWtVRentonl8235A t OlSpecifications/10.15061
�
�
SUB-SECTION 10.15062
�
,
�
�
�
�'
�
��
,�
�
,�
�
PREFORMED CHANNEL PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEM
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Preformed channel pipe support system consisting of
preformed channels, fittings, straps, and fasteners engineer.ed to support piping.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1_ The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. �t is the CONTRACTQR's responsibility for sched�!ling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities perForming
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 — Control of Work.
b. Sub-Section 10.01612 - Seismic Design Criteria.
1.02 REFERENCES
A.
�
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC).
American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).
C. Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS):
1. SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, and Manufacture.
2. SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design responsibility:
1. The manufacturer of the preformed channel pipe support system is
responsible for the design of the support system.
2. Prepare design calculations utilizing the design criteria included in these
Specifications.
3. Prepare detailed shop drawings illustrating the layout of the support system
and identifying the components of the support system.
B. Design c�iteria:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 1Q.15062-1 8235A10
, pwJ/Caro11o1DocumentslGienNNAfRentoN8235At O/Spedficationsll Q. t 5062
2
3
4_
5.
0
7
E:?
Include live, dead, and seismic loads associated with piping, valves, and
appurtenances. Consider the content of the pipes in load calculations.
Minimum gauge thickness: 12-gauge.
Allowable stress of channels:
a. Steel channels: The lesser of 25,000 pounds per square inch, or
0_66 times yield stress of steel.
b. Stainless steel channels: 0.66 times the yield stress of the stainless steel
alloy.
Maximum deflection: 1/240 of span.
Allowable column loads: As recommended by manufacturer in published
instruction for column's unsupported height and "K" vafue for ealculating
effective column length of not less than 1.0.
Future loads
a. Support systems indicated on the Drawings may include spaces intended
to accommodate future pipes.
b. Assume such spaces are occupied by 6-inch diameter ductile iron pipes.
Only the number of pipes that would physically fit into the space need be
considered.
c. Inctude the weight of the pipe contents in determining future loads.
Assume pipe contents are water.
Seismic design criteria: As specified in Sub-Section 10.01612 as specified for
mechanical equipment.
Spacing of supports: As required to comply with design requirements but not
more than 5 feet.
C. Supports below the top of walls of water bearing structures: Use Type 316 stainless
steel for support system components.
1. Supports in other locations: Use hot-dipped galvanized components unless
other materials are specifically indicated on the Drawings.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
Submit as specified in Section 1-05, Control of Work.
Shop drawings: Include layout of support system including pipe loads, selected
channel size, fittings, and appurtenances.
Structural design calculations.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design preformed channel pipe support system for loads in accordance with
applicable provisions of_
1. AISC Manual of Steel Construction.
2. AISI Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual.
B. Product standards:
1. Pipe support components: In accordance with MSS SP-69.
2. Pipe support materials: In accordance with MSS SP-58.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15062-2 8235A10
pw:/1CarollolDocumentslClientllNNRentonl8235A10f Specifica6ons110.15062
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
:�
�
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Fabricate preformed channel pipe support system using, as a minimum, parts
specified below and meeting the requirements specified under Design Criteria_
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Unistrut, Series P1000 or P1001; P5500 or P5501.
b. Allied Support Systems, Power Strut, Figure PS-200 or PS-200 2TS;
PS-150 or PS-150 2TS.
c. B-Line Systems, Inc., Channel Type B22 or B22A; B12 or B12A.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Preformed channel concrete inserts: Minimum 12 inches long.
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Unistrut, Series P-3200_
b_ Allied Support Systems; Figure 282.
c_ B-Line Systems, Series B321.
B. 90-degree angle fittings:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Unistrut, P1026.
b. Allied Support Systems, Power Strut, P603.
C. Pipe straps:
1. For pipes 8 inches in diameter and smaller: Use 2-piece unive�sal strap with
slotted hex head screw and nut.
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Unistrut, Series P1109 through P1126.
2) Allied Support Systems, PS1100.
3) B-Line Systems, Inc., Series B2000.
2. For stainless steel pipes, or where indicated on the Drawings: Use type of
strap required for the pipe sizes specified above, but use Type 316 stainless
steel materials.
�� D. Touch-up paint galvanized surfaces:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Galvinox, Galvo-Weld_
�
�
�
'
�
E. Touch-up paint for painted surfaces: Same formulation as factory paint.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Hot-dip galvanize support system components after fabrication to required length
and shape.
B. Do not galvanize or paint stainless steel components.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15062-3 8235A10
pw://CarollolDocumentslClientlWNRenton18235A10/SpecificaUonslt 0.15062
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Instali preformed channel concrete inserts for vertical support, quantity based on
manufacturer's structural design calculations.
B_ Fasten preformed channel pipe supports to existing walls using Z-fittings and
concrete anchors as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Fasten preformed channel pipe supports to preformed channel concrete inserts
embedded in ceiling using. U-shaped fittings.
D. Suspend threaded rods from concrete inserts embedded in ceiling. Support
preformed channel pipe supports with threaded rods.
E. Touchup cut or damaged galvanized surfaces_
F_ Prevent contact between pipes and support components of dissimilar metals. Utilize
rubber coated, plastic coated, or vinyl coated components, stainless steel
components, or wrap pipe with PVC or polyethylene tape.
G. Install support as near as possible to concentrated loads.
H_ Install support within 2 feet of horizontal and vertical chariges in pipe alignment.
I. Adjust supports or install shims to obtain specified slope or elevation.
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15062-4 8235A10
pwJlCarollolDocumentslClienllWAlRenton18235A 10lSpecrficationsl10.15062
�
'
'
�'
�
�
'
��,
'
�'
�
��
�
�
,
��
��
SUB-SECTION 10.15075
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Mechanical Identification including the following:
1. Equipment nameplates.
2. Pipe identification by color and legend_
3. Special items.
4. Underground waming tape.
5. Identification of equipment and components of systems with paint, brands,
tags, and si�nbc��rds.
B. Related SectionslSub-Sections:
1. The Contract Dociaments are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The fo�lowing Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
b. Sub-Section 10.09960A - Coatings.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 1-05.
B. Submit following:
' 1. Product data.
2. Samples.
3. Manufacturer's installation instructions_
4. Operation and Maintenance Data.
5_ Warranty.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15075-1 8235A10
' pwJ/CamllolDocumentslCtientlWAlRenton18235At0ISpedfications110.15075
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES
A. Materiai and fabrication:
1_ Stainless steel sheet engraved or stamped with text, holes drilled, or punch for
fasteners.
B. Fasteners:
1. Number 4 or larger oval head stainless steel screws or drive pins.
C. Text:
1. Manufacturer's name, equipment model number and serial number,
identification tag number; and when appropriate, drive speed, motor
horsepower with rated capacity, pump rated total dynamic head, and impeller
size.
2.02 PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A. Manufacturers:
1. One of the following or equal:
a. Seton, Opti Code Pipe Markers.
b. Lab Safety Supply.
c. Marking Services, Inc_
B. Materials:
1_ Pipe markers: Self-adhesive vinyl, suitable for outdoor application from
-40 degrees to 180 degrees Fahrenheit; meet ASME A13.1 requirements.
a. Letterin :
Nominal Pipe Diameter Lettering Size
Less than 1.5 1/2 inch
1.5 inches to 2 inches 3/4 inch
2.5 inches to 6 inches 1-1/4 inches
8 inches to 10 iriches 2-1/2 inches
Over 10 inches 3-1/2 inches
b. Marker colors:
Service Lettering Background
Flammables, chemicals, toxics Black Yellow
Water, nontoxic solutions or low White Green
hazard liquids
Nonflammable or nontoxic gases White Blue
Fire quenching fluids (foam, fire White Red
water, COZ Halon)
2. Coating: As specified in Sub-Section 10.09960A.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15075-2 8235A10
pw:llCarollo/Documents/ClienU WAlf2enton18235A101Specfica tions110.15075
�
�'�
,�
,
�
�
�
�
�
3_ Pipe identification tags: Aluminum or stainless steel with stamped-in 1/4 inch
high identifying lettering.
4. Pipe identification tag chains: Aluminum or stainless steet.
5_ Snap-on markers: Markers with 3/4 inch high letters for 3/4 to 4 inch pipe or
covering, or 5 inch high letters for 5 inch or larger pipe or cover, as
manufactured by one of following:
a. Brady Bradysnap-On B-915.
b. Seton Setmark.
2.03 SPECIAL ITEMS
A. In addition, special coating of following items will be required:
� Item Color
Valve handwheels and levers Red
�
�
B. Paint minimum 2 inches high numbers on or adjacent to accessible valves, pumps,
flowmete�s, and other items of equipment which are indicated on the Drawings or in
Specifications by number.
2.04 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
� A. Manufacturer:
1. One of the following or equal:
a. Seton Name Plate Company, Branford, CT.
�
�
�'
��
�
�
�
B. MateriaL
1. Metallic detection tape; minimum 4 mil thick by 6 inches wide polyethylene film
with wording, "Caution" with name of service followed by words, "Line Buried
Below" repeated continuously along tape length, with alternate metallic and
color strips. Colors as follows:
a. Water: Blue. .
b. Telephone:Orange.
c. Sewer: Green.
d. Gas and other services: Yellow.
2.05 VALVE lDENTIFICATION
R. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install tags for all valves required for the
Work.
1. Tags shall be 2-in diameter round, stainless steel.
2_ Tags shall be furnished with a non-corrosive metal wire suitable for attaching
the tag to the operator_
a. Tags shall not be attached in such a way as to inhibit the operation of the
valve.
3. Tags shall be stamped in 1/4-inch high letters with the specified valve number.
4. Submit 2 samples of the type of tag proposed and the manufacturer's standard
color chart and letter styles to the ENGINEER for review.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15075-3 8235A10
� pw://CaroIIWDocumentslClienNWAlRenton18235A10/Specifications110.15075
5. Manufacturer: The following or equal:
a. Seton Name Plate Company, Branford, CT.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify satisfactory conditions of substrate for appfying identification.
B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation.
3.02 PREPARATION
A_ Prepare and coat surfaces as specified in Sub-Section 10.09960A.
B. Prepare surface in accordance wiih product manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify exposed piping, valves, and accessories, and piping in accessible chases
with lettering or tags designating seniice of each piping system with flow directional
arrows and color code.
B. Color code:
1. Paint all piping with colors as selected by OWNER.
C. Lettering and flow direction arrows:
1. Stencil lettering on painted bands or use snap-on markers on pipe to identify
pipe. When stenciling, stencil 3/4 inch high letters on 3/4 through 4-inch pipe
or coverings, or 5-inch high letters on 5-inch and larger pipe or coverings.
2_ Provide lettering and flow direction arrows near equipment senred, adjacent to
valves, both sides of walls and floors where pipe passes through, at each
branch or tee, and at interwals of not more than 50 feet in straight runs of pipe.
D. Where scheduled, space 6-inch wide bands along stainless steel pipe at 10-foot
intervals and other pipe at 5-foot intervals.
E. Label chemical tank fifl pipelines at locations which are visible from chemical fill
stations.
F_ Metal tags:
1. Where outside diameter of pipe or pipe covering is 5/8 inch or smaller, provide
metal pipe identification tags instead of lettering.
� 2. Fasten pipe identification tags to pipe with chain.
3. Where tags are used, color code pipe as scheduled_
G. Underground warning tape:
1. Place warning tape in pipe trench, 12 inches above the pipe.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15075-4 8235A10
pw:/lCaroflo/DocmnentslClienWVAlRenronB235A 10/Specifica6ons/10.15075
�
1
' 3.04 APPLICATION
A. Identify piping with legend markers, directional arrow markers, and number markers;
, use self-adhesive arrow roll tape to secure ends of piping markers and indicate flow
direction.
B. Provide legend markers, directional arrow markers, and number markers where
, piping passes through walls or floors, at piping intersections and at maximum
15 foot spacing on piping runs_
' C. Provide piping marker letters and colors as scheduled.
D. Place markers on piping so they are visible from operator's position in walkway or
, working platform near piping_ Locate markers along horizontal centerline of pipe,
unless better visibility is achieved elsewhere.
,
�I
�
,
,
'
,
'
'
t
'
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15075-5 8235A10
� pw /ICarollolDocumentslGienUWA/Renton/8235A10/5peafications110.15075
C�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15075-6 8235A10
pwJl CarollolDocumentslClienU WAlRenton18235A10lSpecficaGonsI10.15075
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
i
1
1
1
1
i
i
1
1
�
'
,
'
,
'
'
�
'
�
,
,
,
�
'
'
SUB-SECTION 10.15110
VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: basic requirements for valves.
B. Related Section/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 — Control of Work.
b. Sub-Section 10_09960A - Coatings.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1. C111/A21.11 - Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure
Pipe Fittings.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A 126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Casting for Valves, Flanges, and
Pipe Fittings.
2. A 167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-
Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
3. A 536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
C. NSF International (NSF): �
1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
� D_ Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):
1. SP 7- Brush-Off Blast Cleaning.
2. SP 10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning.
,
'
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15110-1 8235A10
� pwl/Carollo/DocumentslClienUWAlRentonl8235A101Specificationsl10.15110
,
1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Pressure rating:
1. Suitable for service under minimum working pressures of 150 pounds per
square inch gauge.
2_ When a piping system is specified in the Piping Schedule to be tested at a
pressure greater than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, provide valves for
that piping system with design working pressure which is sufficient to
withstand the test pressure.
B. Valve to piping connections, unless otherwise indicated in the equipment Sub-
Sections or on the Drawings:
1_ Valves 3 inch nominal size and larger: Flanged ends_
2_ Valves less than 3 inch nominal size: Screwed ends.
3_ Plastic valves in plastic piping:
a_ Up to 2.5 inches: Provide solvent or heat welded unions.
b. 3 inches and above: Provide solvent or heat welded flanges.
1.04 SUBMITfALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 1-05.
B. Product data:
1. Submit the following information for each valve:
a. Valve type, size, pressure rating, Cv factor.
b. Coatings_
c. Manual valve actuators:
1) Information on vatve actuator including size, manufacturer, model
number.
d. Certified drawings with description of component parts, dimensions,
weights, and materials of construction.
e. Certifications of reference standard compliance:
1) Submit certification that the valves and coatings are suitable in
potable water applications in accordance with NSF 61.
f. Clearly mark submittal information to show specific items, materials, and
accessories or options being fumished.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer qualifications:
1. Valves manufactured by manufacturers whose valves have had successful
operational experience in comparable service.
1.06 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect valves and protective coatings from damage during handling and
installation; repair coating where damaged_
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15110-2 8235A10
pw:llCarollo/Documents/GienU WAlRenron/8235A10lSpecifications/10.15110
'
,
'
'
'
�
�
�
'
'
'
�
'
'
�
'
�
�
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Stainiess steel: In accordance with ASTM A 167, Type 316, or Type 304, UNS
Alioy S31600 or S30400.
B. Valve and operator bolts and nuts:
1. Fabricated of stainless steel for the following installation conditions:
a_ Submerged in sewage or water.
b. In an enclosed space above sewage or water.
c. In structures containing sewage or water, below top of walls.
d. At openings in concrete or metal decks.
2_ Where dissimilar metals are being bolted, use stainless steel bolts with
isolation bushings and washers.
3. Underground bolts: Low-alloy steel in accordance with AW1NA C111/A21.11.
C. Bronze and brass alloys: Use bronze and brass alloys with not more than 6 percent
zinc and not more than 2 percent aluminum in the manufacture of valve parts; UNS
Alloy C83600 or C92200 unless specified otherwise.
D. Valve bodies: Cast iron in accordance with ASTM A 126, Class 30 minimum or
ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 minimum unless
specified otherwise.
2.02 INTERIOR PROTECTIVE LINIiVG
A_ When specified in the particular valve specification, provide valves with type of
protective lining specified in the particular valve Specification.
B_ Apply protective lining to interior, non-working surfaces, except stainless steel
surfaces.
C_ Lining rypes:
1: Fusion bonded epoxy:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) 3-M Company, ScotchKote 134; certified to NSF 61 for drinking water
use.
b_ Clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 7 or SP 10, as
recommended by epoxy manufacturer_ •
c. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.
d. Lining thickness: 0_010 to 0.012 inches except that:
� 1) Lining thickness in grooves for gaskets: 0.005 inches.
2) Do not coat seat grooves in valves with bonded seat.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15110-3 8235A10
� pw:l/Carollo/DocumentsJClientNVAlRenton18235A t O/Specifica6ons110.15110
2.
e. Quality controi:
1) Lining thickness: Measured with a non-destructive magnetic type
thickness gauge.
2) Verify lining integrity with a wet sponge-testing unit operating at
approximately 60 volts, or as recommended by the lining
manufacturer.
3) Consider tests successful when lining thickness meets specified
requirements and when no pinholes are found.
4) Correct defective lining disclosed by unsuccessful tests, and repeat
test_
5) Repair pinholes with liguid epoxy recommended by manufacturer of
the epoxy used for lining.
High solids epoxy:
a. Product as specified in Sub-Sectian 10.09960A.
1) Certified in accordance with NSF 61 for drinking water use.
b. Clean surfaces to meet SP-7 or SP-10, or as recommended by coating
manufacturer_
c. Apply coating as specified in Sub-Section 10.09960A and coating
manufacturer's recommendations.
d. Quality control: After coating is cured, check coated surface for porosity
with a holiday detector set at 1,800 volts, or as recommended by coating
manufacturer.
1) Repair holidays and other irregulanties and retest coating.
2) Repeat procedure until holidays and other irregularities are
corrected.
2.03 VALVE OPERATORS
A. Valve operator "Open" direction: Open counterclockwise.
B. Provide valves located below operating level or deck with extensions for key
operation or floor stands and handwheels.
C. Provide manually operated valves located not more than 6 feet above the operating
level with tee handles, wrenches, or handwheels.
1. Make the valve operator more conveniently accessible by rolling valves,
located more than 5 feet but less than 6 feet above the operating level, toward
the operating side.
2. Secure tee handles and wrenches to the valve head or stem, except where a
handle or wrench so secured constitutes a hazard to personnel; in which case,
stow handle or wrench immediately adjacent to the valve on or in a suitable
hanger, bracket, or receptacle.
D. Fit valves located more than 6 feet above operating level with chain operated
handles or valve wheels.
1. Chains: Sufficient length to reach approximately 4 feet above the operating
level.
2. Where chains constitute a nuisance or hazard to operating personnel, provide
holdbacks or other means for keeping the chains out of the way.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15110-4 8235A10
pw:llCardlolDocuments/ClienUWAlRentaJ8235A101SpecficationsJ10.15t 10
�
r-,
�J
� E. Provide an operator shaft extension from valve or valve operator to finished grade
or deck level when buried valves, and other valves located below the operating deck
or level, are specified or indicated on the Drawings to be key operated; provide.
2 inch square AWWA operating nut, and box and cover as specified, or a cover
'- where a box is not required.
� PART 3 EXECUTION
J
C
�
�
,
�
�
L�
,
�
�
'
'
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Preparation prior to installation:
1_ Install valves after the required submittal on installation has been accepted.
2. Determine after flanged valves and flanged check valves are selected, the
face-ta-face dimensions of flanged valves and flanged check valves.
B. Fabricate piping to lengths taking into account the dimensions of flanped valves and
flanged check valves.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Provide incidental work and materials necessary for installation of valves including
flange gaskets, flange bolts and nuts, valve boxes and covers, concrete bases,
blocking, and protective coating.
B. Where needed, furnish and install additional valves for proper operation and
maintenance of equipment and plant facilities under the following circumstances:
1. Where such additional valves are required for operation and maintenance of
the particular equipment furnished by CONTRACTOR.
2. Where such additional valves are required as a result of a substitution or
change initiated by CONTRACTOR.
C. Install valves with their stems in vertical position above the pipe, except as follows:
1. Butterfly valves, gate valves aboveground, globe valves, ball valves, and angle
valves may be installed with their stems in the horizontal position.
2. Install buried plug valves with geared operators with their stems in a horizontal
position.
D_ Install valves so that handles clear obstructions when the valves are operated from
fully open to fully closed.
E. Place top of valve boxes flush with finished grade or as otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
F. Valves with threaded connections:
1. Install valves by applying wrench on end of valve nearest the joint to prevent
distortion of the valve body.
2. Apply pipe joint compound or Teflon tape on external (male} threads to prevent
forcing compound into valve seat area.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15110-5 8235A10
� pw:l/Caro11o1Documents�Clien WYNRenton/8235At Q/Specificationsll0_ 15110
G. Valves with flanged connections:
1_ Align flanges and gasket carefully before tightening flange bolts.
2. When flanges are aligned, install bolts and hand tighten.
3_ Tighten nuts opposite each other with equal tension before moving to next pair
of nuts.
H. Valves with soldered connections: �
1. Do not overheat connection to prevent damage to resilient seats and metal
seat rings.
2. Position valves in full open position before starting soldering procedure.
3. Apply heat fo piping rather than to valve body.
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15110-6 8235A10
pw:NCarollolDocumentslClienUWAlF2enton18235A101Speafications�10.15110
L�
,
�
,
PART 1 GENERAL
� 1.01 SUMMARY
�
�
,
�
,
�
�
�
i
'
�
A_ Sub-Section includes:
1. Swing.
2. Plastic ball check.
SUB-SECTION 10.15114
CHECK VALVES
B_ Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Section/Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
b. Sub-Section 1 Q.15110 - Valves.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1. C508 - Standard for Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service 2 Inch
Through 24 Inch (50-mm Through 600-mm) NPS.
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and
250.
C. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A 126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Casfings for Valves, Flanges, and
Pipe Fittings. �
2. A 276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
3. B 582 - Standard Specification for Nickel-Chromium-Iron-Molybdenum-Copper
Alloy Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
4. B 584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General
Applications.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15114-1
pwJlCarollolDocumentslClienUWAlf2enton18235A 10/Speaficauons110.15114
8235A10
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design requirements:
1. Check valves: When not otherwise specified as indicated on the Drawings,
provide check valves suitable for service as follaws:
a. In either horizontal or vertical position.
b. Under pressures equal and less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the fotlowing information as specified in Section 1-05 and Sub-Section
10.15110:
1. Product data.
2_ Certificates:
a. General purpose AWINA check valves:
Affidavit of compliance attesting valves provided comply with all provisions
in accordance with AWWA C508.
3. Operation and maintenance data.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. M&H, Model 159.
B. Valve design:
1_ In accordance with AWWA C508.
2. Canstructed to permit top entry and removal of intemal components without
removing the valve.
3_ End connections: Flanged, conforming to ANSI B16.1, Class 125.
4. Equipped with outside lever and weight.
5. Resilient seated.
6. Equipped with Honeywell Micro-Switch heavy-duty limit switch_
a. Rated for use in Class 1 Div. 2 location.
b. NEMA 4X_
c. Normally open, normally closed, SPDT.
C. Materials:
1. Body: Cast irQn, ASTM A 126 Class B.
2_ Disc: Synthetic rubber.
3_ Hinge pins: Stainless steel.
2.02 PLASTIC BALL CHECK VALVES
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Chemtrol Division of Nibco.
2. R. G. Sloane Company, Inc.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15114-2 8235A10
pwJl CarollolDocumentslC(enUWAlRentonB235A10lSpedficafions/t 0.15114
�
'
l
,
�
1
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
B. Valves: Ball type:
1. Polyvinyi chloride.
2. Double union-type end connections.
3. Seals: Viton.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves as specified in Sub-Section 10.15110 and the manufacturer's
instructions.
END OF SUB-SECTION
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15114-3
pw:!/CarollotDocuments�ClienUWNRentonl8235A10/5pecifica6onsf 10.15f 14 .
8235A10
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15114-4 8235A10
pw:/ICarollo/DocumenLs/ClienUWA�Renton/8235A101Speafications/10.15114
SUB-SECTION 10.15116
PLUG VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A_ Sub-Section includes:
1. Non- lubricated plug vaives.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2_ It is the GQNTRACTOR's rPsponsibility f�� schedt�ling an� coordir?atirlg thP
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or fumishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Section/Sub-Section_ This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents_
4. Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
5. Sub-Section 10.15110 - Valves.
1.02 REFERENCES
� . A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A 126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and
Pipe Fittings.
�
�
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and
250.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
� A. Shop drawings: Submitthe following information as specified in Section 1-05 and
Sub-Section 10.15110:
1. Product data.
� " 2. Operation and maintenance data.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
'
'
A. Valve manufacturer shall demonstrate a minimum of five (5) years experience in the
manufacture of plug valves. When requested, the manufacturer shall provide test
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15116-1 8235A10
� pw:!/CarollolDocumentslClienWVAlRerton18235A1Q/Specificabonsl10.t5116
certificates, dimensional drawings, parts list drawings, and operation and
maintenance manuals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 NON-LUBRICATED PLUG VALVES
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. DeZurik, "PEC"_
B. Design:
1. Type: Non-lubricated eccentric type.
2. Plug face: Resilient material which operates satisfactorily at a temperature of
180 degrees Fahrenheit continuous.
3. Clearly mark valves to indicate their open and closed positions.
4_ End connections: Flanged, conforming to ANSI B16.1, Class 125, unless
otherwise indicated.
5. Size: Match pipe size shown on the Drawings.
C_ Materials:
1. Body and plug: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast-iron, with plug face of Buna N
material suitable for the intended service as specified under paragraph
"Design" above_
2. Stem bearing and bottom bearing: Type 316 stainless steel_
3. Internal parts, except the body and plug: Type 316 stainless steel.
4_ Exposed nuts, bolts, and washers: Zinc plated.
5. Exception: F�cposed nuts, bolts, and washers for buned service: Stainless
steel.
2.02 VALVE OPERATORS
A. Equip valves 4 inch nominal size and smaller with a lever operator_
2.03 COATING
A. Coat exterior and interior metal surFaces as specified in Sub-Section 10.15110.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves as specified in Sub-Section 10.15110 and the manufacturer's
instructions.
B_ Install valves so that axis or rotation is horizontal.
C. Install valves so that in the closed position the pressure in the pipeline applies a
seating head on the valves_
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_15116-2 8235A10
pw:llCarollolDocumentslClienUWAlftentonl8235A10ISpecficationsl10.15116
t
1
D_ Install valves so that in the open position the plug is located in the top haif of the
jvaive body.
i
�
�
!
�
1
S
1
r
t
1
1
t
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15116-3
pw:llCarollo/DocumentyClienVWAlftentoo18235A7 O/Specificabonslt 0.15116
8235A10
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15116-4 8235A10
pw:/lCarollo/DocumentslClienvW AlRentonl8235A 101Specficationsl10.15116
,
�
i
�
�
1
1
�
�
f
�
1
�
1
�
�
�i
�
1
�
�
�
i
�
�
�
�
L!�
!I
�
�
�
�J
r
�
1
'
SUB-SECTION 10.15255
STAINLESS STEEL PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes_ Stainless steel piping.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1_ The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all_
2_ It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors; suppliers; and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3_ The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
4. Sub-Section 10.15052 - Basic Piping Matenals and Methods.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and
250_
2. B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through 24.
3. B16.11 - Forged Fittings, Socket Welded and Threaded.
4. B38.19 - Stainless Steel Pipe.
5. Boiler and Pressure Vessel, Section IX.
B. ASTM International (ASTM): "
1. A 182 - Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy.and Stainless Steel
Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature
Service_
2. A 193 - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting
Materials for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special
Purpose Applications.
3_ A 194 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts and Bolts for
High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both.
4. A 240 - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General
Applications_
5_ A 276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15255-1
pw:/ICarollolDocumentsiClienUWAlRentnN8235At OlSpecificationsl10.15255
8235A10
�
1
1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
11
12
A 312 - Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold
Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes.
A 380 - Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of
Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems.
A 403 - Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping
Fittings.
A 774 - Standard Specification for As-Welded Wrought Austenitic Stainless
Steel Fittings for General Corrosive Services at Low and Moderate
Temperatures.
A 778 - Standard Specification for Welded, Unannealed Austenitic Stainless
Steel Tubular Products.
A 790 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded FerriticlAustenitic
Stainless Steel Pipe.
A 967 - Standard Specification for Chemical Passivation Treatments for
Stainless Steel Parts.
L�
,
�
�
,
A. Piping layout: Lay out and fabricate piping systems with piping sections as long as
possible, while still allowing shipment, so that joints are minimized.
1. Piping design indicated on the Drawings illustrates piping layout and
configuration and does not indicate the location of every joint and flexible
coupling that may be needed to connect piping sections fabricated in the shop.
2. Add joints and flexible couplings in a manner that achieves intent of
maximizing size of individual piping sections.
:
�
�
Shop fabrication: Fabricate piping sections in the shop and pickle and passivate at
point of manufacture.
Field assembly: Field welding is prohibited
Field assembly: Assemble shop-fabricated piping in the field using the joints
designed into the piping layout or by using flexible couplings.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Layout drawings: Detailed layout drawings showing dimensions and alignment of
pipes; location of valves, fittings, and appurtenances; location of field.joints; location
of pipe hangars and supports; connections to equipment or structures; location and
details of shop welds; and thickness and dimensions of fittings and gaskets.
1 _ Prepare layout drawings.
B. Product data:
1_ Photographs, drawings, and descriptions of pipe, fittings, welding procedures,
and pickling and passivating procedures.
2. Material specifications for pipe, gaskets, fittings, and couplings.
3. Data on joint types and components used in the system including flanged
joints, grooved joint couplings, and screwed joints.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15255-2 8235A10
pwJlCarolloJDocuments/CfienUWAlf2enton18235At 0lSpeafications/10.15255
�
'
�
�
��
�
�J
i
,
!
1
�
C. Manufacturing certifications:
� PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE
A_ Generai:
� 1. Pipe sizes specified in the Specifications and indicated on the Drawings are
nominal_
l
�
B_ Wall thickness:
1. All piping:
a. Minimum wall thickness corresponding the Schedule 40S.
C. Piping material and manufacturing:
�. v'Jf�"a��/ YJ�ii1 ih� req�irEments ^vl.iiiP(i@� ii� iii2 i�i�0'vviiig ta�i7i@:
� � ��.�r� �� t.� .ui ^z � a � � �, �T »� 1 ��ys 's �++° � � '� ��"'y�'� h �.�,��. v�`"n .r :F.°� r��,�e,��..��� ��r
� Seruice ��� �:. -� � � � ; Stainless�Steel Gratle � � �P�pe �Manufacturmg�Process
� ,�;--�_ �„�.,, �; a. ��.._. :� ��� � ��e ��fr . � � -- � ; ��--�� � F,����„�� ,� ���
,�,.�..r � . e� � __
Type 316L in accordance
Type 316L or LDX 2101 with ASTM A 778
Piping 3 inches in nominal stainless steel in accordance
diameter and larger Type LDX 2101 in
with ASTM A 240 accordance with
ASTM A 790
Type 316L in accordance
Type 316L or LDX 2101 with ASTM A 312
Piping less than 3 inches in stainless steel in accordance
nominal diameter Type LDX 2101 in
with ASTM A 240 accordance with
ASTM A 790
D. Fittings for piping 3 inches in nominal diameter and greater:
1. Material= In accordance with ASTM A 240 stainless steel, grade to match the
P�Pe-
2. Manufacturing standard: In accordance with ASTM A 774.
3. Wall thickness of fitting: In accordance with ASME B36.19 for the schedule of
pipe specified_
4. End configuration: As needed to comply with specified type of joint_ -
5. Dimensional standards:
a. Fittings with weld ends: In accordance with ASME 616.11.
b_ Fittings with flanged ends: In accordance with ASME 816.5, Class 150.
E_ Fittings for piping less than 3 inches in diameter:
1. Material: In accordance with ASTM A 240 stainless steel, grade to match the
P�Pe-
2. Manufacturing standard: In accordance with ASTM A 403, Class WP_
3. Wall thickness and dimensions of fitting: In accordance with ASME B16.11 and
as required for the schedule of pipe specified.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15255-3
pw:llCarollolDocuments/ClienUWAlRentonl8235At 0/Specificalions/10.15255
8235A10
�
L_J
4. End configuration: As needed to comply with specified type of joint.
5. Forgings in accordance with ASTM A 182, or barstock in accordance with
ASTM A 276. Match forging or barstock material to the piping materials.
F. Piping joints_
1. Joint types, piping greater than 2 inches in diameter, general:
a. Where type of joint is specifically indicated on the Drawings or specified,
design and shop-fabricate piping sections utilizing type of joint illustrated
or scheduled.
2.
3_
4.
5.
b. Joints at valves and pipe appurtenances: Provide flanged valves and
flanged pipe appurtenances in stainless steel piping systems with flanged
ends. Design and fabricate piping sections to make connections with
flanged valves and pipe appurtenances using flanged coupling adapters
or flanged joints_
1) Flexible couplings and flanged coupling adapters: Provide stainless
steel construction with materials matching the piping system.
Joints in piping 2 inches in diameter and smaller: Flanged or screwed with
Teflon tape thread lubricant.
Flanged joints: Conforming to the requirements in accordance with
ASME B16.5, Class 150.
Flanges for schedule 40S and schedule 80S pipe:
a. Provide forged stainless steel (type matching piping system) welding neck
flanges or slip-on flanges in accordance with ASME B16.5 Class 150.
b. Material: In accordance with ASTM A 182.
Grooved joints:
a. Pressure less than 500 pounds per square inch:
1) Cut grooves from Schedule 40 or higher.
b_ Heavier schedule pipe sections used for cut groove ends:
1) Tapered inside diameter to transition from the inside diameter of the
lighter schedule pipe.
c. Butt welds connecting pipes of different schedules that leave an abrupt
change in inside diameter are not allowed.
G. Gaskets:
1. EPDM, nitrile, or other materials compatible with the process fluid.
H. Bolts for flanges:
1. Bolts and nuts: Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A 193
heavy hex head.
a. Bolt length such that after installation, end of bolt projects 1/8-inch to
3/8-inch beyond outer face of nut.
I. Nuts: In accordance with ASTM A 194 heavy hex pattem. Cleaning (pickling) and
passivation_
1. Following shop fabrication of pipe sections, straight spools, fittings, and other
piping components, clean (pickle) and passivate fabricated pieces.
2. Clean (pickle) and passivate in accordance with ASTM A 380 or A 967.
a. If degreasing is required before cleaning to remove scale or iron oxide,
cleaning (pickling) treatments with citric acid are permissible. However,
�
�
�
�
�
!J
�
,
�
�
�
i
�
�
�J
II
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_15255-4 8235A10
pw:/lCarollo/�ocumentslCfienUVJAIFtentonl8235A10/Specfications/10.15255
�
�
i
1
�
�
�
L�
�
�
�
,
�
these treatments must be followed by inorganic cleaners such as nitric
acid/hydrofluoric acid.
b. Passivation treatments with citric acid are not allowed.
3_ Finish requirements: Remove free iron, heat tint oxides, weld scale, and other
impurities, and obtain a passive finished surface.
2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Visually inspect pipe for welding defects such as crevices, pits, cracks, protrusions,
and oxidation deposits.
B. Provide written certification that the pipe as supplied are in accordance with
ASTM A 778_ Supplemental testing is not required.
C. Provide written certification that the fittings as supplied are in accordance with
ASTM A 774. Supplementary testing is not required.
D. Thoroughly clean any equipment before use in cleaning or fabrication of stainless
steel.
E. Storage: Segregate location of stainless steel piping from fabrication of any other
piping materials.
F. Before shipment to site: Protect all pa�ts and flanges with foam. Palletize all
stainless steel items. Cap ends of tube, piping, and pipe spools.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FIELD ASSEMBLY OF SHOP-FABRICATED PIPING SECTIONS
A. Join shop-fabricated piping sections together using backing flanges, flexible
couplings, flanged coupling adapters, grooved couplings, or flanges.
B. Slope harizontal lines so that they can be drained completely.
� C. Provide valve drains at low points in piping systems.
D. Install eccentric reducers where necessary to facilitate draining of piping system.
�
'
E_ Provide access for inspection and flushing ofi piping systems to remove sediment,
deposits, and debris.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test piping to pressure and by method as specified in Sub-Section 10.15052.
� 1. If pressure testing is accomplished with water:
a. Use only potable quality water.
b. Piping: Thoroughly drained and dried or place immediately into service.
1
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15255-5 8235A10
� pw:!lCarollolDocumentslClienUWAlRentan18235A10lSpecificalionsl10.15255
t
I
B. Visually inspect pipe for welding defects such as crevices, pits, cracks, protrusions,
and oxidation deposits_ ��
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Preserve appearance and finish of stainless steel piping by providing suitable ,
protection during handling and installation and until final acceptance of the Work.
1. Use handling methods and equipment to prevent damage to the coating, �
include the use of wide canvas slings and wide padded skids.
2. Do not use bare cables, chains, hooks, metal bars, or narrow skids.
3_ Store stainless steel piping and fittings away from any other piping or metals.
Storage in contact with ground or outside without projection from bad weather j
is prohibited.
4. Protect stainless steel piping and fittings from carbon steel projections (when -
� grinding carbon steel assemblies in proximity) and carbon steel contamination �
{do not contact stainless steel with carbon steel wire brush or other carbon
steel tool).
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15255-6 8235A10
pw:/ICaro11o1DowmentslClienUWA/Renton/8235AtO1Speaficationsl10.15255
��
�
�
�
�
�
LJ
i�I
�
��
�;
I�
�.
�
�
�
�
f
�
�
l
�
�
�
�
�
�J
�
�
SUB-SECTION 10.15265
PLASTIC PIPING AND TUBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section inciudes: Piastic pipe, tubing, and fittings_
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by ail.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coardinating the
Work of subcontractnrs, s��ppliers, �nd other inciividi�als c�r entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Secti�n. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10,15052 - Basic Piping Materials and Methods.
b. Sub-Section 10_15956 - Piping Systems Testing_
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. D 1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
2. D 1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe,
Schedules 40, 80 and 120.
3. D 2466 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 40.
4. D 2467 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 80.
5. D 2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Plastic Piping Systems.
6. D 2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly
(Vinyl Chloride}(PVC) Pipe and Fittings.
7. F 645 - Standard Guide for Selection, Design and Installation of Thermoplastic
Water-Pressure Piping Systems.
1.03 ABBREVIATIONS
A. ID: Inside diameter of piping or tubing.
B. NPS: Nominal pipe size followed by the size designation.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15265-1
� pw:dCarollofDocumentslCtienVWAlRenton/8235At O/Specificationsl10.15265
8235A10
C. NS: Nominal SIZE of piping or tubing.
D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: Describe materials, pipe, fittings, gaskets, and solvent cement.
B. Manufacturer's Published Installation Instructions_
C. Certificates:
1. Manufacturer's certification of date of manufacture of plastic pipe and tubing
for each lot delivered.
2. Copies of solvent cement manufacturer's report and certification in accordance
with ASTM D 2564 for PVC piping.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mark plastic pipe with nominal size, type, class, schedule, or pressure rating,
manufacturer and all markings required in accordance with ASTM and AWWA
standards.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect piping materials from sunlight, scoring, and distortion.
B. Do not allow surface temperatures on pipe and fittings to exceed 120 degrees
Fahrenheit.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Extruding and moiding material: Virgin material containing no scrap, regrind, or
rework material except where permitted in the referenced standards.
B. Fittings: Same material as the pipe and of equal or greater pressure rating, except
that fittings used in drain, waste, and vent piping systems need not be pressure
rated.
C. Unions 2-1/2 inches and smaller: Socket end screwed unions. Make unions
3 inches and larger of socket flanges with 1/8-inch full-face soft EPDM gasket.
2.02 PVC PIPING, SCHEDULE TYPE
A. Materials:
1. PVC Pipe: Designation PVC 1120 in accordance with ASTM D 1785 and
appendices:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15265-2 8235A10
pw:llCarollolDocuments/ClienUWA(Renton/8235At 0lSpecfications/t 0.15265
�
�
��
1
E
a. Pipe and fittings: Extruded from Type I, Grade 1, Class 12454-B material
in accordance with ASTM D 1784.
b. PVC Pipe: Schedule 80 unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
Fittings:
a. Supplied by pipe manufacturer.
b. Pressure fittings: In accordance with ASTM D 2466 or ASTM D 2467.
Solvent cement: In accordance with ASTM D 2564.
3
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
��
�
�
�
�
2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. PVC piping, Schedule Type: ,
1. Mark pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D 1785.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Where not otherwise specified, install piping in accordance with ASTM F 645,
or manufacturer's published instructions for installation of piping, as applicable
to the particular type of piping.
2. Provide molded transition fittings for transitions from plastic to metal or
IPS pipe. Do not thread plastic pipe.
3. Locate unions where indicated on the Drawings, and elsewhere where
required for adequate access and assembly of the piping system.
4. Provide serrated nipples for transition from plastic pipe to rubber hose.
B. Installation of PVC piping, Schedufe Type:
1. Solvent weld joints in accordance with ASTM D 2855:
2. Install piping in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15265-3 8235A10
� pwJlCarollo/DocumeritslGienWVA/Renton18235A10/Speaficationsl10.15265
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_15265-4 8235A10
pw:/ICarollolDocuments/ClienUWAlRenton18235A101Specfirations/10.15265
i
�
i
r
�
�
.�
j
�
�
,
1
�
�
1
t
�
�
�
��
�
�
�
�
�]
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
1
SUB-SECTION 10.15956
PIPING SYSTEMS TESTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Test requirements for piping systems.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Wprk of suf�Gon#ra�torS, suppliers; and ather individual� or entities p�rforminc�
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sections/Sub-Section_ This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided
for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the
duty of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies
accurately with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
b. Sub Section 10.01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.
c. Sub Section 10.15052 - Basic Piping Materials and Methods.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Fuel Gas Code (NFGC).
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B31.3 - Process Piping.
C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL).
1.03 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. General requirements:
1. Testing requirements are stipulated in Laws and Regulations; are included in
the Piping Schedule in Sub-Section 10.15052; are specified in the
specifications covering the various types of piping; and are specified in this
Sub-Section.
2. Requirements in Laws and Regulations supersede other requirements of
Contract Documents, except where requirements of Contract Documents are
more stringent, including higher test pressures, longer test times, and lower
leakage allowances.
3. Test plumbing piping in accordance with Laws and Regulations, the plumbing
code, and UL requirements.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15956-1 8235A10
� pw:llCarollolDocumentslClienUWWRenton18235A10lSpecifica6onsl10.15956
4. When testing with water, the specified test pressure is considered to be the
pressure at the lowest point of the piping section under test.
a. Lower test pressure as necessary (based on elevation) if testing is
performed at higher point of the pipe section.
B. Fumish necessary personnel, materials, and equipment, including bulkheads,
restraints, anchors, temporary connections, pumps, water, pressure gauges, and
other means and facilities required to perform tests.
C. Water for testing, cleaning, and disinfecting:
1. Water for testing, cleaning, and disinfecting will be provided as specified in
Sub-Section 10.01500.
D. Pipes to be tested: Test only those portions of pipes that have been installed as part
of this Contract. Test new pipe sections prior to making final connections to existing
piping. Furnish and install test plugs, bulkheads, and restraints required to isolate
new pipe sections. Do not use existing valves as test plug or bulkhead.
E. Unsuccessful tests:
1_ Where tests are not successful, correct defects or remove defective piping and
appurtenances and instafl piping and appurtenances that comply with the
specified requirements. '
2. Repeat testing until tests are successful.
F. Test completion: Drain and leave piping clean after successful testing.
G. Test water disposal: Test water may be disposed of by discharging into the lift
station wet well or at the upstream manhole adjacent to the wet well.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 1-05_
B. Schedule and notification of tests:
1. Submit a list of scheduled piping tests by noon of the working day preceding
the date of the scheduled tests.
2. Notification of readiness to test: Immediately before testing, notify ENGINEER
in writing of readiness, not just intention, to test piping.
3. Have personnel, materials, and equipment specified in place before submitting
notification of readiness.
1.05 SEQUENCE
/�
L''
Clean piping before pressure or leak tests.
Test gravity piping underground, including sanitary sewers, for visible leaks before
backfilling and compacting.
C. Underground pressure piping may be tested before or after backfilling when not
indicated or specified otherwise.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15956-2 8235A10
pwJlCarollo/Documents/ClienNNA/ftenton/8235A 10lSpecrfication sl10_ t 5956
�
�
D. Backfill and compact trench, or provide blocking that prevents pipe movement
before testing underground piping with a maximum leakage allowance.
�
�
�
E_ Test underground piping before encasing piping in concrete or covering piping with
slab, structure, or permanent improvement.
PART2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 TESTING ALIGNMENT, GRADE, AND DEFLECTION
A. Alignment and grade:
� 1. Consider inspection complete when no broken or collapsed piping, no open or
poorly made joints, no grade changes that affect the piping capacity, or no
other defects are observed.
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
3.02 TESTING GRAVITY FLOW PIPING
A. Test gravity flow piping indicated with "GR" in the Piping Schedule, as follows: .
1. Unless specified otherwise, subject gravity flow piping to the following tests:
a. Alignment and grade.
b. For plastic piping test for deflection.
c. Visible leaks and pressure with maximum leakage allowance, except far
storm drains and culverts.
2. Inspect piping for visible leaks before backfilling.
3. Provide temporary restraints when needed to prevent movement of piping.
4. Pressure test piping with maximum leakage allowance after backfilling.
5. With the lower end plugged, fill piping slowly with water while allowing air to
escape from high points. Keep piping full under a slight head for the water at
least 24 hours:
a. Examine piping for visible leaks. Consider examination complete when no
visible leaks are observed.
b. Maintain piping with water, or allow a new water absorption period of
24 hours for the performance of the pressure test with maximum leakage
allowance.
c. After successful completion of the test for visible leaks and after the piping
has been restrained and backfilled, subject piping to the test pressure for
minimum of 4 hours while accurately measuring the volume of water
added to maintain the test pressure:
1) Consider the test complete when leakage is equal to or less than the
following maximum leakage allowances_
a) For concrete piping with rubber gasket joints: 80 gallons per day
per inch of diameter per mile of piping under test:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_15956-3 8235A10
�� pw://Caro�lo/Documents/ClienNNAlRenton18235A10/Specifica6ons11�.t5956
(1) Advise manufacturer of concrete piping with rubber gasket
joints of more stringent than normal maximum leakage
allowance.
b) For vitrified clay and other piping: 500 gallons per day per inch
of diameter per mile of piping under test.
3.03
TESTING HIGH-HEAD PRESSURE PIPING
A. Test piping for which the specified test pressure in the Piping Schedule is
20 pounds per square inch gauge or greater, by the high head pressure test
method, indicated "HH" in the Piping Schedule.
B. General:
1. Test connections, hydrants, valves, blowofFs, and closure pieces with the
p�P��9•
2. Do not use installed valves for shutoff when the specified test pressure
exceeds the valve's maximum allowable seat differential pressure_ Provide
blinds or other means to isolate test sections.
3. Do not include valves, equipment, or piping specialties in test sections if test
pressure exceeds the valve, equipment, or piping specialty safe test pressure
allowed by the item's manufacturer.
4. During the performance of the tests, test pressure shall not vary more than
plus or minus 5 pounds per square inch gauge with respect to the specified
test pressure.
5. Select the limits of testing to sections of piping. Select sections that have the
same piping material and test pressure.
6. When test results indicate failure of selected sections, limit tests to piping:
a. Between valves.
b. Between a valve and the end of the piping.
c. Less than 500 feet long.
7. Test piping for minimum 2 hours for visible leaks test and minimum 2 hours for
the pressure test with maximum leakage allowance.
C_ Testing procedures:
1_ Fill piping section under test slowly with water while venting air:
a. Use potable water for all potable waterlines and where noted on the
Piping Schedule.
2_ Before pressurizing for the tests, retain water in piping under slight pressure
for a water absorption period of minimum 24 hours.
3. Raise pressure to the specified test pressure and inspect piping visually for
leaks:
a_ Consider visible leakage testing complete when no visible leaks are
observed.
D. Pressure test with maximum leakage allowance:
1. Leakage atlowance is zero for piping systems using flanged, National Pipe
Thread threaded and welded joints.
2. Pressure test piping after completion af visible leaks test.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15956-4 8235A10
pwJlCarollolDocumentslCfienUWAlRenton18235A10fSpecifica6onsf10.t 5956
�
�
3. For piping systems using joint designs other than flanged, threaded, or welded
joints, accurately measure the makeup water necessary to maintain the
pressure in the piping section under test during the pressure test period:
a. Consider the pressure test to be complete when makeup water added is
less than the allowable leakage and no damage to piping and
appurtenances has occurred.
b. Successful completion of the pressure test with maximum leakage
allowance shall have been achieved when the observed leakage during
the test period is equal or less than the allowable leakage and no damage
to piping and appurtenances has occurred.
c. When leakage is allowed, calculate the allowable leakage by the following
formula:
t
�
�
wherein the terms shall mean:
L=SxDxP'�2x 133,200-'
L= Allowable leakage in gallons per hour.
S= Length of the test section in feet.
D= Nominal diameter of the piping in inches.
� P= Average observed test pressure in pounds per square inches gauge,
at the lowest point of the test section, corrected for elevation of the
pressure gauge.
�
J
�
�
�
�
x = The multiplication symbol.
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15956-5 8235A10
� pwl/CarollolDocuments�ClienUWAlRentonl8235A10/Specificauons110.15956
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15956-6 8235A10
pwJlCarollotDocumentslClienUWAlf2enton18235A101Speafications(10.15956
O
SUB-SECTION 10.15958
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Testing of inechanical equipment and systems.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
� 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all_
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
� Wark of subcon#ractors, suppliers, and 4#her intiividuals or eCttities nP�-{�r�in�
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sectio�s are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
� is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
� to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents_
�a. Sub-Section 10_01756 - Testing, Training, and Facility Start-Up_
,, b. Sub-Section 10.15956 - Piping Systems Testing.
c. Sub-Section 10.16950 - Fietd Electrical Acceptance Tests.
d. Sub-Section 10.17950 - Testing, Calibration, and Commissioning_
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. S1.4 Specification for Sound Level Meters.
� B. Hydraulic Institute (HI).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of factory tests and field tests as specified in Sub-Section 10.01756 and
this Sub-Section.
� B. Test instrumentation calibration data.
C_ Start-up plan as specified in Sub-Section 10.01756.
� D. Test lan s ecified in this Sub-Sec#ion.
P P
� E. Test result reports.
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15958-1 8235A10
� pw:l/Carollo/DocumentslGient/WAIRentoN8235At0/Specifications110.15958
�
PART2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING AND REPORTING
A. Scheduling and notification:
1_ Witnessed source quality control tests: Schedule test date and notify
ENGINEER at least 30 days prior to start of test.
2. Field quality control tests: Schedule test date and notify ENGINEER at least
7 days prior to start of test_
�
B. Testing levels: - �
1. � Test equipment based on test levels specified in the equipment Sub-Section of
this Project. �
2. Requirements for Test Levels 1 to 4 are defined below.
3. Test levels apply for both Source (Factory) Quality Control Tests and Field
Quality Control Tests as specified in the equipment Sub-Sections of this �
Project.
4. If testing is not specified in the equipment Sub-Section, provide Level 1 "
testing. ,
5. Requirements of Sub-Section 10.01756 apply to Test Levels.
C. Witnessing: Source Quality Control Tests not witnessed unless specified otherwise
in the equipment Sub-Section or Sub-Section 10.01756; Field Quality Control Tests
shall be witnessed_
D. Instrumentation: Provide necessary test instrumentation which has been calibrated
within 1 year from date of test to recognized test standards traceable to the National
Institute of Standards and Technology, Washington, D.C. or approved source.
Properly calibrated field instrumentation permanently installed as a part of the Work
may be utilized for Field Quality Control Tests.
E. Temporary facilities and labor: Provide necessary fluids, utilities, temporary piping,
temporary supports, temporary access platforms ar access means and other �
temporary facilities and labor necessary to safely operate the equipment and
accomplish the specified testing. With OWNER's permission, some utilities may be �
provided by fully tested permanently instalted utilities that are part of the Work.
F. Test fluids:
1_ Factory tests: Use water or air as appropriate at ambient conditions unless �
specified otherwise in the equipment Sub-Section. __
2. Field tests: Use specified process fluid at available conditions_
G. Pressure testing: Hydrostatically pressure test pressure containing parts in the
factory at the appropriate standard or code required level above the equipment
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15958-2 8235A10
pw:llCarol lolDocumenLslClienNNAlftenton(8235A t 0lSpecficati�onnsl10.15958
�
L_J
�
�
.�
�
�
�-
component specified design pressure or operating pressure, whichever is higher.
Submit pressure test reports before shipping.
H. Test measurement and result accuracy:
1_ Use test instruments with accuracies as recommended in the appropriate
_ referenced standards. When no accuracy is recommended in the referenced
standard, use 1 percent or better accuracy test instruments. Improved (lower
error tolerance) accuracies specified elsewhere prevail over this general
requirement.
2. Do not adjust results of tests for instrumentation accuracy. Measured values
and values directly calculated from measured values shall be the basis for
comparing actual equipment perFormance to specified requirements.
I_ Field testing:
1. Submit test plan as specified in Sub-Section 10.01756 and this Sub-Section.
Indicate test start time and duration, equipment to be tested, other equipment
involved or reauired; temr�orary facilities r�a,�airecJ, n��mber anc� skill nr tra�P nf
personnel involved; safety issues and planned safety contingencies;
anticipated effect on OWNER's existing equipment and other information
relevant to the test. Provide locations of all instruments to be used for testing.
Provide calibration records for all instrumentation.
2. Perform general start-up and testing procedures as specified in Sub-Section
10.01756.
3. Prior to testing, verify equipment protective devices and safety devices have
been installed, calibrated, and tested.
�
�
�
�
�
Reports: Submit reports for source and field-testing. Submit Source Quality Control
Test result reports before shipping equipment to the field. Report features:
1. Report results in a bound document in generally accepted engineering format
with title page, written summary of results compared to specified requirements,
and appropriate curves or plots of significant variables in English units.
2. Include appendix with a copy of raw, unmodified test data sheets indicating
test value, date and time of reading, and initials of person taking the data.
3. Include appendix with sample calculations for adjustments to raw test data and
for calculated results.
4. Include appendix with the make, model, and last calibration date of
instrumentation used for test measurements.
5. Include in body of report a drawing or sketch of the test system layout showing
location and orientation of the test instruments relative to the tested equipment
features.
3.02 EQUIPMENT TESTING, GENERAL
A_ Tests for pumps, all levels of testing:
1. Test in accordance with applicable HI Standards in addition to the
requirements in this and other Sub-Sections.
2. Test tolerances: In accordance with appropriate HI Standards, except the
following modified tolerances apply:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15958-3 8235A10
� pwllCarollolDaximentslClienWVNRenton/8235A10/Specifications/10-15958
a. From 0 to plus 5 percent of head at the specified flows rated design point
flow_
b. From 0 to plus 5 percent of flow at the rated design point head.
c. No negative tolerance for the efficiency at the specified flows rated design
point.
d. No positive tolerance for vibration limits_ Vibration limits and test methods
in HI Standards do not apply, use limits and methods specified in this or
other Sub-Sections of the Specifications.
B. Tests for drivers: Test drivers as specified in the driver equipment Sub-Section.
3.03 TESTfNG LE!lELS
A. Level 1 Quality Control Tests:
1. Level 1 General Equipment Performance Test:
a_ For equipment, operate, rotate, or otherwise functionally test for
15 minutes minimum after components reach normal operating
temperatures_
b. Operate at rated design load conditions.
c_ Confirm that equipment is properly assembled, equipment moves or
rotates in the proper direction, shafting, drive elements and bearings are
installed and lubricated in accordance with proper tolerances, and that no
unusual power consumption, lubrication temperatures, bearing
temperatures, or other conditions are observed.
2. Level 1 Pump Performance Test:
a. Measure flow and head while operating at or near the rated condition; for
factory testing, testing may be at reduced speeds with flow and head
corresponding to the rated condition when adjusted for speed using the
appropriate affinity laws.
b. Use actual driver for field tests.
c. Record measured flow, suction pressure, discharge pressure, and make
obsenrations on bearing temperatures and noise levels_
3.04 FfELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test equipment as specified for each type of test at the test levels specified in
equipment Sub-Sections. Prepare and submit test reports as specified. Comply with
latest version of applicable standards.
3.05 FUPJCTIONAL AND OPERATIONAL TESTING OF EQUIPMENT
A. Functional testing as specified in Sub-Section 10_01756 and this Sub-Section.
B. General checkout: Prior to operating equipment, inspect, test, and check supporting
systems, including but not�limited to power systems, control systems, piping
systems, lubrication systems, and safety systems_
1. Test and calibrate instrumentation and electrical devices as specified in Sub-
Sections 10.1695Q and 10.17950.
2. Test piping as specified in Sub-Section 10.159�6.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15958-4 8235A10
pw:l/Carol lo/DocumentslClienU WA(fZentorJ8235A1 WSpecificaGons/10.15958
�
•�
� 3. As a minimum for controi systems associated with the equipment, perForm the
following:
� a. Individual Loop Tests: Test from field device to intermediate terminations
� to controller and back to controlled element.
b. End-to-end test: Simulate input at field device and observe control system
� response at the final field control element.
4. Prior to testing, provide signed and dated certificates of calibration for test
� instrumentation and equipment.
C. Operation of related existing equipment: OWNER will operate related existing
equipment or facilities necessary to accomplish the testing_
D. Acceptable tests: Demonstrate the equipment performance meets the requirements
of this. Sub-Section and the equipment Sub-Section; when the equipment fails to
f I meet the specified requirements, perform additional more detailed testing to
- determine the cause, correct, repair, or replace the causative components and
� repeat the testing that revealed the deficiency.
E. Operational testing: As specified in Sub-Section 10.01756.
�-
�
�
�
�
END OF SUB-SECTION
,;__ October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15958-5 8235A10
� pw:llCarollolDocumentslClienUWAlRenton/8235At0/5p�calionsl10.15958
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.15958-6 8235A10
pwllCarollolDocumentslClientNJA/Renton18235A10/Specrfications/10.15958 ,
�
�
�
�
�
��
�,
�`
��
.�
�
SUB-SECTION 10.16050
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes:
1. General requirements applicable to all electrical work.
2. General requirements for electrical submittals.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is calted for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishinq any of CONTRACTOR's Work_
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.01410 - Regulatory Requirements_
b. Sub-Section 10.01782 - Operation and Maintenance Data.
c. Sub-Section 10.16052 - Hazardous Classified Area Construction.
d. Sub-Section 10.16075 - Electrical Identification.
e. Sub-Section 10.16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.
C. Interfaces to equipment, instruments, and other components:
1. The Drawings, Specifications, and overall design are based on preliminary
information fumished by various equipment manufacturers which identify a
minimum scope of supply from the manufacturers. This information pertains to,
but is not limited to, instruments, control devices, electrical equipment,
packaged mechanical systems, and control equipment provided with
mechanical systems.
2. Provide all material and labor needed to install the actual equipment furnished,
and include all costs to add any additional conduit, wiring, terminals, or other
electrical hardware to the work, which may be necessary to make a complete,
functional installation based on the actual equipment furnished:
a. Make all changes necessary to meet the manufacturer's wiring
requirements.
3. Submit all such changes and additions to the ENGINEER for acceptance in
accordance with the General Conditions_
4. Review the complete set of Drawings and Specifications in order to ensure
that all items related to the electrical power and control systems are
completely accounted for. Include any such items that appear on Drawings or
in Specifications from another discipline in the scope of Work:
a. If a canflict befinreen Drawings and Specifications is discovered, refer
conflict to the ENGINEER as soon as possible for resolution.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-1 8235A10
pw:llCarollolDocuments/ClienVWNRenton18235At UlSpedGcaUonsll0. t 6050
� -
a. If a conflict between Drawings and Specifications is discovered, refer
conflict to the ENGINEER as soon as possible for resolution.
D. All electrical equipment and systems for the entire project must comply with the
requirements of Division 16, whether referenced in the individual equipment
specifications or not:
1. The requirements of Division 16 apply to all electrical work specified in other
Divisions and Sub-Sections, including HVAC controls, packaged mechanical
systems, LCPs, VCPs, etc.
2. Inform all vendors supplying electrical equipment or systems of the
requirements of Division 16.
3. The OWNER is not responsible for any additional costs due to the failure of
the CONTRACTOR to notify all subcontractors and suppliers of the Division 16
requirements.
E_ Contract Documents:
1. General:
a_ The Drawings and Specifications are complementary and are to be used
together in order to fully describe the Work.
2. Specifications:
a. The General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract Documents
govern the Work.
b. These requirements are in addition to all General Requirements.
3. Contract Drawings:
a_ The electrical drawings show desired locations, arrangements, and
components of the electrical work in a diagrammatic manner.
b_ Locations of equipment, control devices, instruments, boxes, panels, etc.
are approximate only; exercise professional judgment in executing the
Work to ensure the best possible installation:
1) The equipment locations and dimensions shown on plans and
elevations are approximate. Use the shop drawings to determine the
proper layout, foundation, and pad requirements, etc. for final
installation. Coordinate with all subcontractors to ensure that all
electrical equipment is compatible with other equipment and space
requirements. Make changes required to accommodate differences
in equipment dimensions_
2) The CONTRACTOR has the freedom to select any of the named
manufacturers as identified in the individual specification Sub-
Sections; however, the ENGINEER has designed the spatial
equipment layout based upon a single manufacturer and has not _
confirmed that every named manufacturer's equipment fits in the
allotted space. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to ensure that
the equipment being fumished fits within the defined space.
c. Installation Details:
1) The Contract Drawings include typical installation details, which show
the means and methods the CONTRACTOR is to use to install
electrical equipment. For cases where a typical detail does not apply;
develop installation details that may be necessary for completing the
Work, and submit these details for review by the ENGINEER.
d. Schematic Diagrams:
1) All controls are shown de-energized.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-2 8235A10
pwllCarollolDw�ments/Client/WA1RentoN6235At 01Specfications/10.16050
��
�
�
.�
�I.
�
�
�
��
,�,
�
,�
2) Schematic diagrams show control function only. incorporate other
necessary functions for proper operation and protection of the
system.
3) Add slave relays, where required, to provide all necessary contacts
for the control system or where needed to function as interposing
relays for control voltage coordination, equipment coordination, or
control system voltage drop considerations.
4) Mount all devices shown on motor controller schematic diagrams in
the controller compartment enclosure, unless otherwise noted or
indicated.
5) Control schematics are to be used as a guide in conjunction with the
descriptive operating sequences found in the Drawings or
Specifications. Combine all information and furnish a coordinated
and fully functional control system.
F. Altemates/Alternatives:
1. Refer to the General Conditions for substitute item provisions.
G. Changes and Change Orders:
1. Refer to the General Conditions.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Code Compliance:
1_ As specified in Sub-Section 10.01410.
2. The publicatioris are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. The
latest edition accepted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction of referenced
publications in effect at the time of the bid governs.
3. The standards listed are hereby incorporated into these specifications:
a. National Electrical Code (NFPA No 70).
b. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
c. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
d. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
e. Undervvriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). �
f. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA).
g. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
h. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM).
i_ National Bureau of Standards.
j. Institute of Power Cable Engineers Association National Board of Fire
Underwriters (NBFU).
k. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) of North America.
I. Safety Orders of Industrial Accident Commission.
m_ Rules of the National Board of Fire Underwriters.
n. Requirements of the serving Utilities.
B. Compliance with laws and regulations:
1. Refer to the General Conditions.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms and other electrical and instrumentation considerations as set
forth in the:
1. National Electrical Code.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-3 8235A10
pw://CarollolDocumentslqienNNAlReriton/8235A10/Specifications/t 0.16050
��
2_ Institute of Electricai and Electronic Engineers.
3. International Society of Automation (ISA}.
4. National Fire Protection Association.
5. Intemational Electrical Testing Association.
B. Specific Definitions:
1_ FAT: Factory Acceptance Test.
2_ ICSC — Instrumentation and Controls Subcontractor.
3. PCIS — Process Control and Instrumentation System.
4. Space: That portion of the switchgear, motor control center, panelboard,
switchboard or control panel that does not physically contain a device but is
capable of accepting a device with no modifications to the equipment, i.e.
provide all standoffs, bus, and hardware, as part of the space.
5_ Spare: That portion of the switchgear, motor control center, panelboard,
switchboard or control panel that physically contains a dsvice with no load
connections to be made.
6. Unequipped Space: That portion of the switchgear, motor control center,
panelboard, switchboard or control panel that does not physically contain a
device, standoff, bus, hardware, or other equipment.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General Requirements:
1. The Work includes everything necessary for and incidental to executing and
completing the electrical work described in the Drawings and Specifications
and reasonably inferable there from:
a. The electrical drawings are schematic in nature; use the structural,
architectural, mechanical, and civil drawings for all dimensions and
scaling purposes.
2_ It is the intent of these Specifications that the entire electrical power,
instrumentation, and control system be complete and operable. Provide all
necessary material and labor for the complete system from source of power to
final utilization equipment, including all: connections, tesfing, calibration of
equipment fumished by others as well as equipment furnished by the
CONTRACTOR, whether or not specifically mentioned but which are
necessary for successful operation.
3. Provide all electrical work, including conduit, field wiring, and connectioi�s by
the electrical subcontractor under the provisions of Division 16 for all aspects
of the Work, including heating, ventilation, and air conditioning.
4. Coordinate all aspects of the Work with the electrical subcontractor and other
subcontractors before bidding in order to ensure that all costs associated with
a complete installation are included. The OWNER is not responsible for any
change orders due to lack of coordination of the Work between the
CONTRACTOR, the electrical subcontractor, the other subcontractors or
suppliers.
5. Demolition:
a. Where demotition is specified or shown on any Drawing, disconnect all
associated electrical equipment and render the equipment safe.
b. Remove and dispose of all conduit, wire, electrical equipment, controls,
etc. associated with the items and/or areas to be demolished as indicated
on the Drawings unless otherwise indicated.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_16050-4 8235A10
pw:llCarolblDocumentslCGenUWM2enton16235A 10ISpecrfica6ons110.16050
0
r�
c. For each piece of equipment to be removed, remove all ancillary
components (e.g. instruments, solenoid valves, disconnect switches etc).
d. Conduit:
1) Where conduit removal, other than associated with equipment to be
removed, is indicated on the Drawings:
a) Remove exposed conduit to the point of encasement or burial.
b) Cut conduit flush and plug or cap encased or buried conduit.
2) Where conduits are to remain in place and removal is not indicated
on the Drawings:
a) Cap conduit open ends_
b) Reliable empty conduits as spare_
e. Remove all wire back to the source for all conduits to be removed or
abandoned in place.
f. Provide new nameplates for modified electrical distribution equipment,
motor control centers etc. to identify equipment and circuits that are no
longer used as spares.
g_ Provide new typewritten schedules for all modified panelboards.
This project involves installation in existing facilities and interfaces to existing
circuits, power systems, controls, and equipment:
a. Perform and document comprehensive and detailed field investigations of
existing conditions (circuits, power systems, controls, equipment, etc)
before starting any work. Determine all information necessary to
document, interface with, modify, upgrade, or replace existing circuits,
power systems, controls, and equipment.
b. Provide and document: interface with, modifications to, upgrades, or
replacement of existing circuits, power systems, controls, and equipment.
Provide all trenching, forming, rebar, concrete, back filling, hard surface
removal and replacement, for all items associated with the electrical work and
installation:
a. Refer to Divisions 2 and 3.
8. Defective work:
a. Refer to the General Conditions.
B. Existing System:
1. The existing Lift Station includes two submersible pumps controlled by level
switches. A control/RTU panel with a RUG6 PLC provides remote monitoring
and control. -
C. New System:
1. The new system will add a submersible level transmitter, which will become
the primary level controller. The levels switches will be replaced and will take
over control if the level transmitter fails.
2. A new valve vault with intrusion switch is being added. The check valves in the
valve vault are equipped with limit switches as well.
3. Reprogramming of the PLC to accommodate the new signals will be done by
others.
4. Contractor is responsible for panel modifications and terminations.
D. Operating Facility:
1. Refer to Sub-Section 10.01140.
2. The existing lift station is an operating facility. Comply with the following
guidelines:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-5 8235A10
��' pwJlCarollolDocuments�ClienUWAlRenton18235AtO15peaficationsl10.16050
a
�
All outages must be of minimal duration and fully coordinated and agreed
to by the OWNER. Adjust the construction schedule to meet the
requirements of the OWNER. All changes in schedule and any needs to
reschedule are included in the Work.
As weather and water demand conditions dictate, re-adjust the
construction schedule to meet the demands placed upon OWNER by its
users.
c. Coordinate the construction and power renovation, bear all costs, so that
all existing facilities can continue operation throughout construction.
3. According to individual circumstances and in compliance with the Drawings,
extend or replace conduit and cable connections from existing locations.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
1. Furnish submittals that are fully indexed with a tabbed divider for every
2.
3. .
4
E
C�
component.
Sequentially number pages within the tabbed sections. Submittals and
Operation and Maintenance manuals that are not fully indexed and tabbed
with sequentially numbered pages, or are otherwise unacceptable, will be
returned without review.
Edit all Submittals and Operation and Maintenance Manuals so that the
submittal specifically applies to only the equipment furnished. Neatly cross out
a�l extraneous text, options, models, etc. that do not apply to the equipment
being furnished, so that the information remaining is only applicable to the
equipment being furnished_
Instruct all equipment suppliers of Submittal and Operation and Maintenance
Manuals of the requirements in Sub-Section 10_16050.
Submittal requirements:
a. Submit copies of shop drawings; and product data, in accordance with the
requirements of this Sub-Section:
1) Show dimensions, construction details, wiring diagrams, controls,
manufacturers, catalog numbers, and all other pertinent details.
b. Where submittals are required, provide a separate submittal for each
specification Sub-Section. In order to expedite construction, the
CONTRACTOR may make more than one submittal per specification Sub-
Section, but a single submittal may not cover more than 1 specification
Sub-Section: �
1) The only exception to this requirement is when 1 specification Sub-
Section covers the requirements for a component of equipment
specified in another Sub-Section. (For example, circuit breakers are
a component of switchgear. The switchgear submittal must also
contain data for the associated circuit breakers, even though they are
covered in a different specification Sub-Section.)
Exceptions to Specifications and Drawings:
a. Include a list of proposed exceptions to the Specifications and Drawings
along with a detailed explanation of each.
b. Any exceptions to the Specification and Drawings must be noted and the
reason for the exception explained.
c. If there is insufficient explanation for the deviation, the submittal will be
returned requiring Revision and Re-submittal.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-6 8235A10
pw:llCarollo/DocumentslClienUWA/f2enton/8235At 0/Spedficationsl10.16050
7_
.:�
d. Acceptance of any exception is at the sole discretion of the ENGINEER.
Furnish all items (materials, features, functions, performance, etc.) that
are not listed as exceptions strictly in accordance witfi the Specifications
and Drawings.
e. Replace all items that do not strictly meet the requirements of the
Specifications, which were not previously accepted as exceptions, even if
the submittals contained information indicating the failure to meet the
requirements.
Submittal organization: .
a. First page:
1) Specification Sub-Section reference.
2) Name and telephone number of individual who reviewed submittal
before delivery to ENGINEER.
3) Name and telephone number of individual who is primarily
responsible for the development of the submittal.
4) Place for CONTRACTOR's review stamp and comments.
b. Next pages:
1) Provide confirmation of specification compliance in a tabular form
that individually lists each specification section, paragraph, and sub-
paraaraphs and uneauivocally states compliance with said
requirement or takes exception to the requirement and lists the
reason for said exception and offers alternative means for
compliance.
2) Include a response in writing to each of the ENGINEER's comments
or questions for submittal packages which are re-submitted:
a) In the order that the comments or questions were presented
throughout the submittal.
b) Referenced by index section and page number on which the
comment appeared.
c) Acceptable responses to ENGINEER's comments are either:
(1) ENGINEER's comment ar change is accepted and
appropriate changes are made.
(2) Explain why comment is not accepted or requested change
is not made.
(3) Explain how requirement will be satisfied in lieu of comment
or change requested by ENGINEER.
d) Any re-submittal, which does not contain responses to the
ENGINEER's previous comments shall be returned for Revision
and Re-submittal.
e) No further review by the ENGINEER will be performed until a
response for previous comments has been received.
c. Remaining pages:
1) Actual submittal data:
a) Organize submittals in exactly the same order as the items are
referenced, listed, and/or organized in the specification section.
b) For submittals that cover multiple devices used in different areas
under the same specification section, the submittal for the
individual devices must list the area where the device is
intended to be used.
Specific submittal requirements:
a. Furnish the submittals required by each Section in Division 16 in
accordance with the following requirements_
October 26, 2Q10 - FINAL 10_16050-7 8235A10
pw:1/ Ca rollo/DocumentslClien UW AlRenton/8235A1015pedficafions170.16050
:�
1) Required for materiais and equipment listed in this and other
seations.
2) Furnish sufficient information to evaluate the suitability of the
proposed material or equipment for the intended use, and for
compliance with these Specifications.
3) Shop drawings requirements: ,
a) Front, side, and, rear elevations, and top and bottom views,
showing all dimensions.
b) Locations of.conduit entrances and access plates.
c) Component layout and identification.
d) Schematic and wiring diagrams with wire numbers and terminal
identification.
e) Connection diagrams, terminal diagrams, internal wiring
diagrams, conductor size, etc.
fl Anchoring method and leveling criteria, including manufacturer's
recommendations for the project site seismic criteria.
g) Weight_
h) Finish.
i) Nameplates:
(1) Refer to Sub-Section 10.16075.
j) Temperature limitations, as applicable.
c_ Product Data:
1) Submitted for non-custom manufactured material listed in this and
other sections and shown on shop drawings.
2) Include_
a) Catalog cuts.
b) Bulletins.
c) Brochures.
d) Quality photocopies of applicable pages from these documents.
e) Identify on the data sheefs the project name, applicable
specification Sub-Section, and paragraph.
f� Identify model number and options for the actual equipment
being fumished.
g) Neatly cross out options that do not apply or equipment not
intended to be supplied_
d. Detailed sequence of operation for all equipment or systems.
e. Adhere to the wiring numbering scheme outlined in Sub-Section 10.16075
throughout the project:
1) Uniquely number each wire.
2} Wire numbers must appear on all equipment drawings.
f. Only use equipment and instrument tags, as depicted on the drawings, for
all submittals.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. Furnish the ENGINEER with a complete set of written Operation and
Maintenance Manuals 2 weeks before energization start-up and/or
commiss�oning_ .
2. Furnish in accordance with Sub-Section 10.01782, and the following additional
requirements:
a. Completely index manuals with a tab for each section:
1) Each Sub-Section containing applicable data for each piece of
equipment, system, or topic covered.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-8 8235A10
pwJlCarollo/DocumenLs/ClienUWAlF2entonl8235A10lSpecfications/10.16Q50
2) Assemble manuals using the approved shop drawings, and inciude,
the foliowing types of data:
a) Complete set of 11-inch by 17-inch drawings of equipment.
b) Complete set of 11-inch by 17-inch drawings of the control
system.
c) Complete set of contcol schematics.
d) Complete parts list for all equipment being provided.
e) Catalog data for all products or equipment furnished_
C. Material and Equipment Schedules:
1. Furnish a complete schedule and/or matrix of all materials, equipment,
apparatus, and luminaries that are proposed for use:
a. Include sizes, names of manufacturers, catalog numbers, and such other
information required to identify the items.
D. Installation Recommendations:
1. Submit the manufacturer's printed recommendations for installation of
electrical equipment.
E. Record Documents:
1. Provide record documents of all electrical drawings.
2. Record drawing requirements:
a. Update record drawings weekly.
. b. Record drawings must be fully updated as a condition of the monthly
progress payments.
c. Submit record drawings upon completion of the Work for final review.
d. Clearly and neatly show all changes including the following:
1) All existing pipe, conduit, wire, instruments or other structures
encauntered or uncovered during construction.
3. Shop drawings:
a. Upon comp{etion of the Work, update all shop drawings to indicate the
final as-built configuration of the systems:
1) Provide as-built shop drawings for all electrical equipment on 11-inch
by 17-inch paper.
2) Provide electronic copies of these documents on CD-ROM disks in
AutoCad Version 2000 by Autodesk and pdf. Size all drawings to be
readable and legible on 11-inch by 17-inch media.
b. Furnish written information prepared specifically for this project using pdf
and printed on 8.5-inch by 11-inch plain bond paper:
1) Provide electronic copies of these documents on CD-ROM disks.
4. Review and corrections:
a. Correct any record documents or other documents faund to be
incomplete, not accurate, of poor quality, or containing errors.
b. Promptly correct and re-submit record documents returned for correction.
F_ Test Reports: '
1. Include the following:
a. A description of the test.
b. List of equipment used.
c. Name of the person conducting the test.
d. Date and time the test was conducted.
e. All raw data collected.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-9 8235A10
�i pwl/CarollolDocumentslClien WVA1Renton18235At 0/Spedficalionsl10.16050
f. Calculated results.
2. Each report signed by the person responsible for the test.
3. Additional requirements for acceptance test reports are listed in Sub-Section
10.16950.
G. Calculations:
1. Where required by specific Division 16 Specifications:
a_ Because these calculations are being provided by a Registered
Professional Engineer, they will be reviewed for form, format, and content
but will not be reviewed for accuracy and calculation means.
H. Factory Acceptance Test:
1_ Include complete test procedure and all forms to be used during test.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Furnish a!I equipment listed by and bearing the label of Underwriters' Laboratories,
Incorporated (UL) or of an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the
ENGINEER and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
�i.u7 17ELIVttCT, S i ui�t;t, HI�U 1'hCU 1 EC I �VIV
A. Shipping Precautions:
1. After completion of shop assembly and successful factory test, pack all
equipment in protective crates, and enclose in heavy duty polyethylene �
envelopes or secured sheeting to provide complete protection from damage,
dust, and moisture.
2_ Place dehumidifiers, when required, inside the polyethylene coverings.
3. Skid-mount the equipment for final transport.
4. Provide lifting rings for moving without removing protective covering.
5. Display boxed weight on shipping tags together with instructions for unloading,
transporting, storing, and handling at the job site.
B. Delivery and Inspection:
1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original container
or padcaging with identifying labels intact and legible. Include date of
manufacture on label.
C. Speciallnstructions:
1. Securely attach special instructions for proper field handling, storage, and
installation to each piece of equipment before packaging and shipment.
1.08 PROJECT OR SITE COMDITIONS
A. Site Conditions:
1_ Provide an electrical, instrumentation and control system, including all
equipment, raceways and any other components required for a complete
installation that meets the enviranmental conditions for the site as specified in
the General Requirements and below.
2. Seismic classification:
a_ Provide all electrical equipment and construction techniques suitable for
the seismic requirements for the site, as specified in Sub-Section
1 Q.01612.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL.. 10.16050-10 8235A10
pw:/1Carol lo/Documenis/ClienUWAlftenton(8235A t 0lSpecifications/10.16Q50
.�
�
,�.
��
�
;�
�
,�.
�,
t
��
.�
���
3. Altitude, temperature and humidity:
a. Provide additional temperature conditioning equipment to maintain all
equipment in non-conditioned spaces subject to these ambient
temperatures, with a band of 10 degrees Fahrenheit above the minimum
operating temperature and 10 degrees Fahrenheit below maximum
operating temperature, as determined by the equipment manufacturer's
guidelines:
1) Provide all power conduits winng for these devices (e.g. heaters,
fans, etc.) whether shown on the drawings or not.
4. Outdoor installations:
a_ Provide electrical, instrumentation and control equipment suitable for
operation in the ambient conditions where the equipment is located.
B. Provide enclosures for electrical, instrumentation and control equipment, regardless
of supp{izr or subcontractor furnishing the equipment, that meet the requirements
outlined in NEMA Standard 250 for the following types of enclosures:
1. NEMA 1 Enclosures: Intended for indoor use, primarily to provide a degree of
protection from accidental contact with energized parts or equipment.
2. NEMA 4 Enclasures: Intended for indoor or outdoor use; primarily to protect
equipment from exposure to windblown dust and rain, splashing or hose
directed water, ice formation and freezing_
3. NEMA 4X Enclosures: Made from corrosion resistant materials (Fiberglass
reinforced plastic, 316 Stainless Steel or equal) and are intended for indoor or
outdoor use, primarily to protect equipment from exposure to windblown dust
and rain, splashing or hose directed water, ice formation and freezing, and
corrosion.
4. NEMA 12 Enclosures: Intended for indoor use, primarily to provide a degree of
protection from dust, falling dirt and dripping non-corrosive liquids.
5. NEMA 6 Enclosures_ Rated for submergence.
6. NEMA 6P Enclosures: Rated for prolonged submergence.
7. NEMA 7 Enclosures: Intended for installation in locations where explosive or
combustible gas or vapors may be present (Class I Division 1 or Class I
Division 2) meeting the requirements outlined in Sub-Section 10.16052.
1.09 (NOT USEDj
1.10 SCHEDULING
A. General:
1. Testing requirements are specified in Sub-Section 16950 and other Sub-
Sections.
2. General scheduling requirements are specified in the General Conditions.
3. Work restrictions and other scheduling requirements are specified in Sub-
Section 10.01140.
1.11 WARRANTY
A_ Warrant the electrical Work in accordance with the General Conditions:
1. Provide additional warranty as specified in the individual Division 16
Specifications_
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-11 8235A10
� pw:1/CarollolDocumentslClienVWAlRenton/8235A10/Specifications110.16050
�
1.12 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Replace or modify equipment, software, and materials that do not achieve design
requirements after installation in order to attain compliance with the design
requirements:
1. Following replacement or modification, retest the system and perform
additional testing to place the comptete system in satisfactory operation and
� obtain compliance acceptance from the ENGINEER.
1.13 ' (NOT USED)
1.14 �:�3AA�AA{�AAI�NL�-(NOT USED)
1.15 MAINTENANCE
A_ Before Substantial Completion, perform all maintenance activities required by any
sections of the Specifications including any calibrations, final adjustments,
component replacements or other routine service required before placing equiprrient
or systems in service.
�s. Fumisn aii spare paris as required by oiner Sub-5eciions of ine 5pecirications.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide similar items of same manufacturer throughout the electrical and
instrumentation portion of the project.
B. Allowable manufacturers are specified in individual electrical and equipment
specifications in other Sub-Sections of Division 16.
2.02 NOT USED)
2.03 MATERIALS
A_ Fumish all materials under this Contract that are new, free from defects, and
standard products produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production
of these products and that bear all approvals and labels as required by the
Specifications.
B. Provide materials complying with the applicable industrial standard in accordance
with the General Conditions.
C. Stainless Steel:
1. Where stainless steel is indicated or used for any portion of the electrical work,
provide a non-magnetic, corrosion-resistant alloy, ANSI Type 316, satin finish.
2. Provide exposed screws of the same alloys.
3. Provide finished mate�ial free of any burrs or sharp edges.
4. Use only stainless steel hardware, when chemically compatible, in all areas
that are or could be in contact with corrosive chemicals.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-12 8235A10
pw /1CarollolDocumentslC(enVWAlftenton/8235A10/Speafica6ons/10.16050 .
�
� 5. Use stainless steel hardware, when chemically compatible, in all chemical
areas or areas requiring NEMA 4X construction.
� 6. Do not use stainless steel in any area containing chlorine, gas or solution,
chlorine products or ferric chloride.
� 2.04 NOT USED
) .
�
�
�
��
�
2.05 �n� nonn���r �NOT USED)
2.06 NOT USED)
2.07 ' NOT USED)
2.08 AAI�E�(NOT USED)
2.09 NOT USED)
2.10 �'"'���(NOT USED)
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide all equipment that is new, free from defects, and standard products
produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of these products.
B. Arrange with all manufacturers of the electrical equipment, to allow the OWNER and
ENGINEER to inspect and witness the testing of the equipment at the site of
fabrication:
1. Testing includes the cabinets, special control systems, power equipment, and
other pertinent systems and devices.
C. Factory testing is specified in the individual Sub-Sections of Divisions 16.
��
.�
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Review the existing site conditions and examine all shop drawings for the various
items of equipment in order to determine exact routing and final terminations for all
wiring and cables.
B. Provide a complete electrical system:
1. Install all extra conduits, cables, and interfaces as may be necessary to
provide a complete and operating electrical system.
3.02 DL�FDA[�ATI/lAI �NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
� A. Equipment locations shown on electrical drawings may change due to variations in
�� equipment size or minor changes made by others during construction:
1. Verify all dimensions as indicated on the Drawings:
� .
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-13 8235A10
pwl/CarollolDocumen ts�Clien WVAlRentaJ8235A10/S pecifications110.16050
a. Actual field conditions govern ali finai installed locations, distances, and
levels.
2. Review a{I Contract Dacuments and approved equipment shop drawings and
coordinate Work as necessary to adjust to all conditions that arise due to such
changes. ,
3. Make minor�changes in location of equipment before rough in, as directed by
the OWN�R or ENGINEER.
B. Install all material and equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's installation
instructions, including anchoring methods and leveling criteria:
1. Where CONTRACTOR asks to deviate from the manufacturer's
recommendations, such changes must be reviewed and accepted by the
ENGINEER and manufacturer before instaflation.
C. Gutting and Patching:
1_ Perform all cutting, patching, channeling, core drilling, and fitting required for
the electrical Work, except as otherwise directed:
a. Secure the permission of the ENGINEER before performing any operation
likely to affect the strength of a structural member such as drilling, cutting
or piercing:
1) Before cutting, channeling, or core drilling any surface, ensure that
no penetration of any other systems will be made:
a) Verify that area is clear and free of conduits, cabtes, piping,
ductwork, post-tensioning cables, etc.
b) Use tone-locate system or X-ray to ensure that area is clear of
obstructions_
b. Review the complete drawing set to ensure that there are no conflicts or
coordination problems before cutting, channeling, or core drilling any
surface.
2. Perform all patching to the same quality and appearance as the original Work.
Employ the proper tradesmen to secure the desired results. Seal around all
conduits, wires, and cables penetrating walls, ceilings, and floors in all
locations with a fire stop material, typically_
a_ 3M CP25 Caulk.
b_ 3M 303 Putty.
c. T8�B S-100 Caulk.
d_ T�B FS-500 Putty.
e. T&B FST-601 Putty.
3. Seal around conduit penetrations of below grade walls with a waterproof, non
shrink, non-metallic grout, unless otherwise indicated on the typical installation
details: �
a_ Use the insta�lation details provided in the drawings as a guide for
acceptable sealing methods.
D. Install all conduit and equipment in such a manner as to avoid all obstructions and
to preserve headroom and keep openings and passageways clear.
1. Install all conduits and equipment in accordance with working space
reguirements as outlined in Article 110, Requirements for Electrical
Installations of the National Electrical Code.
2_ Where the Drawings do not show dimensions for locating equipment, install
equipment in approximate locations as indicated on the Drawings. Adjust
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-14 8235A10
pw:llCarollo/Documents/ClienUWAlRentonB235A10/Specfications/10.16050
�
�
��
�1
��,
��
�
;
�
�
�J
,�.
:�
locations shown on the Drawings as necessary to avoid any obstruction or
interterences.
3. Where an obstruction interferes with equipment operation or safe access,
relocate the equipment.
4. Where the Drawings do not indicate the exact mounting and/or supporting
method to be used, use materials and methods similar to the mounting details
shown in the Drawings.
E. Earthwork and Concrete:
1. Install all trenching, shoring, concrete, backfilling, grading and resurfacing
associated with the electrical Work:
a. In accordance with Division 2 and 3 requirements.
F. Roof penetrations:
1. Make all roof penetrations, and seal around all conduits. Use pitch pockets
and flashings.
2. � Roofing subcontractor to make actual seals around roof penetrations.
G. Terminations:
1. Provide and terminate all conductors required to interconnect power, controls,
instruments, panels, and all other equipment.
H. Miscellaneous installation requirements:
1. In case of interference between electrical equipment shown on the Drawings
and the other equipment, refer to the General Conditions for direction.
2. Location of manholes and pullboxes indicated on the Drawings are
approximate. Coordinate exact location of manholes and pullboxes with
mechanical and civil work.
3. Provide additional manholes or pullboxes to those shown where they are
required to make a workable installation.
4. Circuits of different service voltage:
a. Voltage and service levels:
1} Medium voltage: greater than 1.OkV.
2) Low voltage: 120V to 480V.
3) Instrumentation: less than 50VDC.
b. Install in separate raceways, junction boxes, manholes, hand holes, and
pullboxes.
c. In manholes, install all cables operating at less than 50 VDC in PVC
coated flexible metallic conduit, with corrosion resistant fittings.
Labeling:
1. Provide all nameplates and labels as required in Sub-Sections 10.16075 and
10.16305.
J. Equipment Tie-Downs:
1. Anchor all instruments, control panels, and equipment by methods that comply
with seismic and wind bracing criteria, which apply to the site.
2. All control panels, VCPs, LCPs, RTUs, PCMs, etc., must be permanently
mounted and tied down to structures in accordance with the project seismic
criteria.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-15 8235A10
pw:!/Carollo/DocumentslClien WVAlRenton/8235A 10/Specificabons110.16050
�
3.04 , , , NOT USED)
3.05 ��on�on��crnonr�nni �NOT USED)
3.06 ��-���crn� i nT�nAi �NOT USED)
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. inspection:
1_ Allow for inspection of electrical system installation in accordance with the
specia! provisions.
2. Provide any assistance necessary to support inspection activities.
3. ENGINEER inspec#ions may include, but are not fimifed to, the following:
a. Inspect equipment and materials for physical damage.
b. Inspect installation for compliance with drawings and Specifications.
c. Inspect installation for obstructions and adequate clearances around
equipment.
d. Inspect equipment installation for proper leveling, alignment, anchorage,
and assembly.
e. Inspect equipment nameplate data to verify compfiance with design
requiremen�s. '
f. Inspect raceway installation for quality workmanship and adequate
support_
g. Inspect cable terminations.
4. Inspection activities conducted during construction do not satisfy inspection or
testing requirements outlined in Sub-Section 10.16950.
B_ Field Testing:
1. Notify the ENGINEER when the electrical vvork is ready for field acceptance
testing.
2. Perform the acceptance tests in accordance with Sub-Section 10.16950.
3. Record results of the required tests along with the date of test:
a. Use conduit identification numbers to indicate portion of circuit tested.
C. Workmanship:
1. Leave wiring in panels, manholes, boxes, and other locations neat, clean, and
organized:
a. Neatly coil and label spare wiring lengths.
b. Shorten, re-terminate, and re-label excessive used as well as spare wire
and cable lengths, as determined by the ENGINEER.
3.08 NOT USED)
3.09 CLEANING
A. General Requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material and restore all damaged finishes to the
satisfaction of the ENGINEER arid OWNER_
B. Clean and vacuum all enclosures to remove all metal filings, surplus insulation and
any visible dirt, dust or other matter before energization of the equipment or system
start up:
1. Use of compressors or air blowers for cleaning is not acceptable.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-16 8235A10
pwllCarollo/DocamentslClienuWA/FtentonB235A101Specfications/t 0.1 fi050
,�
�
�
�
�
��
C. Clean and re-lamp all new and existing luminaries that were used in the areas
affected by the construction, and return all used lamps to the OWNER.
D. As specified in other Sub-Sections of the Contract Documents.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Furnish all personnel and equipment necessary to conduct the demonstration and
training requirements as specified in the individual specification Sub-Sections.
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Protect all work from damage or degradation until substantial completion.
B. Maintain all surfaces to be painted in a clean and smooth condition.
3.12 NOT USEDj
END OF SUB-SECTION
�
�'
���
,�
�
�
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-17 8235A1Q
pwJ/CarollolDocumentsJClien WVNRenton18235A 10l5pecificationsl10.16050
�
,�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-18 8235A10
pw://Carollo/DocamentslClienUWAlRenton/8235A 10ISpecifica tionsl10.16050
�
�
r
,�
,�
�
;j.
�
s�
.�
��
�'
�1�
��
��
i
/�
�
�
L1
�
,�
�
�
:�
��
�
��
�
�
�•
�
SUB-SECTION 10.16052
HAZARDOUS CLASSIFIED AREA CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes requirements for:
1. Executing and completing work in hazardous and/or classified areas as
defined by the NEC Articles 500 through 516, NFPA 820, and as indicated on
the Drawings and in the Specifications.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
b. _ Sub-Section 10.16050 - General Requirements for Electrical Work.
c. Sub-Section 10.16130 - Conduits.
d. Sub-Section 10.16134 - Boxes.
e. Sub-Section 10.16140 - Wiring Devices.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Specific Definitions_
1_ For the purposes of these Specifications, the terms "Hazardous" and
"Cla�sified" will be considered synonymous.
1.04 cvcT�nn n�c�r��orin�i �NOT USED)
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 1-05 and Sub-Section 10.16050
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16052-1 8235A10
�pw:!/Caro11o1DocumentslClienUWAlRenton/8235At01Speaficauons(10.16052
�
B. Regulatory Requirements: �
1. All wiring in Hazardous and/or Classified Locations shall comply with all
applicable Articles of the National Electrical Code, in particular Articles 500
through 516 of the National Electrical Code_
2. EXcept as modified in Articles 500 through 516, all other applicable rules
contained in the National Electrical Code shall apply to electric equipment and
wiring installed in Hazardous and/or Classified Locations_
3. All devices used in a Class I Division 1 or Division 2 Areas must have visible
manufacturer installed nameplates specifically stating the Class, Division, and
Group for which the device is approved.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. The following areas are classified Class I, Division 1:
1. Pump wetwell.
2. Valve Vault.
B. The following areas are classified Class 1, Division 2:
1. Entire project site area up to 18" above grade.
1.09 S (NOT USED)
1.10 NOT USED)
1.11 4A�^�a^"'T`� (NOT USEDj
1.12 CVCTCM CTAt7T11D �NOT USED)
1.13 ' (NOT USED)
1.14 NOT USED)
1.15 nAAlA1TGN1AA1(`G �NOT USED)
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ^�^�����nr-n�r��oc �NOT USED}
2.02 (NOT USED)
2.03 nenr�t��e� c �NOT USED)
2.04 NOT USED)
2.05 �^� ��o""�"�T �NOT USED)
2.06 COMPONENTS
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16052-2 8235A10
pw://Carol lolDocumentsJClienWVA+Rentonl8235At O/Specfications/10.16052
�,
�
�
�
�
,
�+
�
�
�
A. Conduit and Sealing Fittings:
1. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16130_
B. Conduit Boxes and Bodies:
1. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16134.
C. Wiring Devices:
1. Refer to Sub-Section 10_16140_
2.07 NOT USED)
2.08 �!1{�€�-(NOT USED)
2.09 �^Ro��n-r�n�i �NOT USED)
2.10 ��"��,��-(NOT USED)
2.11 �^i ��r�� ^� i^� iTv �^"�To^� 'NOT USED)
rNRI J CACI�iV I IVIV
3.01 FYnnni�inTin�� rNOT USED)
3.02 oo�ononrin�i (NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
�B. Corrosion Protection:
� 1. Isolate dissimilar metals, except conduit and conduit fittings, which may come
into contact with one another:
� a. Use neoprene washers, 9 mil polyethylene tape, or gaskets, for isolation.
2. Restore factory finishes that are damaged or rusted to their original new
condition in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
�,
IIJ
��
�
C_ Conduit Installation:
1. Wrench tighten all conduit joints to minimize sparking when fault currents flows
through the conduit system.
2. Make all conduit connections so that there is a minimum of 5 threads fully
, engaged in the connection.
3. Use explosion proof flexible conduit in Class 1 Division 1 hazardous areas:
a. Must be approved and marked suitable for Class I, Division 1.
b. Listed for compatibility with the Group type atmosphere where used:
4. In Class I, Division 2 areas, use liquid-tight metal conduit with approved
fittings:
a. Maximum allowable length of liquid-tight metal conduit is 36 inches,
without express permission from the ENGINEER.
D. Sealing fittings:
1. Provide seal types that match the installed conduit system.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16052-3 8235A10
' pw:!lCarollolDocuments�ClienUWAlRenton18235A10/Specifications110.16052
2. Provide an approved seal, no more than 12 inches from the enclosure, for ali
conduits entering an enclosure containing switches, circuit breakers, fuses,
relays, resistors, or any other apparatus which may produce ares, sparks, or
high temperatures:
a. Only explosion proof unions, couplings, elbows, capped elbows, and
conduit bodies similar to "L", "T", and �X" may be installed between the
sealing fitting and the enclosure.
3. Provide entire assemblies approved for Class I locations for self sealing or
factory sealed assemblies where the equipment that may produce ares,
sparks, or high.temperatures is located in a compartment separate from the
compartment containing splices or taps, and an integral seal is provided where
conductors pass from one compartment to the other:
a. Seals are required in all conduit connections to the compartment
containing splices and must be within 12 inches of the enclosure.
4. !nstall a conduit seal within 12 inches of the boundary in each cond!ait run
entering or leaving a classified location. No union, coupling, box, or fitting is
allowed in the conduit between the sealing fitting and the point at which the
conduit leaves the classified location.
5. For underground conduits entering or leaving a classified location or between
Class I Division 1 and Division 2 locations:
a. Provide a conduit seal at both points where the conduit emerges from the
ground:
1) Place the conduit seal within 18 inches of finished grade.
2) No union, coupling, box, or fitting is allowed in the conduit system
between the seal fitting and the point at which the conduit enters the
ground.
6. Separate all conductors within the conduit system and seal using an approved
packing dam installed to both hold the sealing compound and to maintain the
separation between the wires:
a. Remove the outer jacket of multi-conductor non-shielded cables in the
area of the sealing fitting and separate each conductor from the cable and
seal individually.
b. Provide the sealing compound approved for the conditions and use, and
that is not affected.by the surrounding atmosphere or liquids.
c. Provide sealing compound with the melting point less than 93 degrees
Celsius (200 degrees Fahrenheit).
7. Install seals with drains in all electrical control stations, low points of conduit or
any place where moisture may condense and accumulate_
E. Install the sealing compound with a minimum thickness of 5/8 inch or the trade size
of the conduit whichever is greater.
F. Boxes and Fittings:
1. Class I Division 1 areas:
a. Utilize threaded connections for all metallic boxes, fittings, and joints to
the conduit system. �
b. Wrench tighten, with at least 5 threads fully engaged.
2. Class I, Division 2 areas:
a. Conduits entering and exiting metallic boxes in Class I Division 2 shall
utilize approved grounding bushings to bond the conduits together.
G. Outlet Boxes and Bodies:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16052-4 8235A10
pw:llCarollolDocumentsfClienUWAlRenton18235A10/Speafica6ons/10.16052
�
'
'
�
��
�
'
�
,
�'
�
c
�
,
'
�
LJ
�
1. Class I, Division 1 Areas:
a. Provide the following types of conduit bodies and boxes:
1) Malleable iron bodies and boxes with GRC or IMC conduit systems.
2) PVC coated conduit bodies and boxes with PCS or PCA conduit
systems_
3) Aluminum conduit bodies and boxes with ARC conduit systems.
2. Class I, Division 2 areas_
a. Boxes not containing arcing parts shall be:
1) Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
2) No pressed metal boxes are allowed.
b. Provide heavy duty cast construction type conduit fittings and joints:
1) Explosion proof rated fittings and joints are not necessary.
c. Any enclosure containing arcing parts, etc_ shall have all constructian
associated with the enclosure, conduit system, etc. conforming to Class I
Division 1 construction.
H. Motor Connections:
1. Conduit installation in Class I Division 1 and Class I Division 2 locations for
motors that contain arcing parts, shall proceed as follows from the conduit:
a. First - Conduit.
b. Second - Explosion proof flexible coupling.
c. Third - Sealing fitting.
d. Fourth - Explosion proof union.
e. Fifth - Connection to the motor terminal box_
2. Conduit installations in Class 1 Division 1 and Class I Division 2 locations for
motors that contain no arcing parts, shall proceed as follows from the conduit:
a. First - Conduit.
b. 5econd - Liquid tight flexible metal conduit (18 Inches maximum length.)
c. Third - Connection to the motor terminal box.
i�e electrical continuity of non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment, raceways
ancl other enclosures shall be bonded as required by NEC 250.100.
,. _ .. . . .. .•• _. ., _.. _ _ _ .. . .
3.05
3.06
3.07
3.08
3.09
3.10
3.11
3.12
c�oniQro�cTnr�nT�n�� �NOT USED)
�C IAICTAI i nT�n�� �NOT USED}
FIELD QUALIN CONTROL
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
NOT USED)
r' ��^"�:":�(NOT USED)
flC11A(lA1CTl7AT1/lAI AAIII TL7AtAl1A1l� �NOT USED�
(NOT USED)
NOT USED)
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16052-5 8235A10
' pw:llCarollolDocuments7ClienUWAlRentonl8235A1Q/Specifications11Q.16052
�
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16052-6 8235A10
pw JI Carol lolDocumentslClienUWAlRentonl8235A101Specfica Gons�10.16052
,
'
�
�
�
,
�
'
��
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
,�
,
�
�
C�
�
'
�
�
'
'
,
'
�
'
�
'
'
'
�
SUB-SECTION 10.16070
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes requirements for:
1. Mounting and supporting electrical equipment and components.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all_
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities pertorming
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
b. Sub-Section 10.01410 - Regulatory Requirements.
c. Sub-Section 10.01612 - Seismic Design Criteria.
d. Sub-Section 10.05120 - Structural Steel.
e. Sub-Section 10.16050 - General Requirements for Electrical Work.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:
1. Conform to the requirements of the Building Code as specified in Sub-
Section 10.01410.
2. Demonstrate the following using generally accepted engineering methods:
a_ That the anchors to the structure are adequate to resist the loads
generated in accordance with the Building Code and equipment
requirements_
b. That the required load capacity of the anchors can be fully developed in
the structural materials to which they are attached.
3: Seismic Withstand Requirements:
a. Freestanding or wa(I-hung equipment shall be anchored in place by
methods that will meet the requirements for the seismic design indicated
in Sub-Section 10.01612_
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16070-1 8235A10
, pwJ/Carollo/DocumentslClienUWA/Rentonl8235At�/Specifications110.16070
�
b. Minimum safety factor against overturning: 1.5.
c. The foundation shall be capable of withstanding all anchor loads.
B_ Performance requirements:
1. Hangers and supports individually and as a system shall resist all weights and
code required forces without excessive deflections and deformationS.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section1-05and Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Product data:
1. Supports:
a_ Materials_
b_ Geometry.
c_ Manufacturer.
2. Hardware:
a. Materials.
b_ Manufacturer.
3. Anchoring and leveling criteria and recommendations from equipment
manufacturers:
a_ Include these requirements in the installation recommendation submittal
required by Sub-Section 10.16050.
C. Shop drawings:
1. Complete dimensioned and scalable shop drawings of all supporting
structures, trapezes, wall supports, etc.
2. Complete anchoring details for pole lights, transformers, control panels,
supporting structures, trapezes, wall supports all equipment in excess of 200-
pounds and all freestanding supports:
a_ Stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the State where the
project is being constructed.
b_ Said submittals, by virtue of the fact that they bear the stamp of a
registered engineer, will be reviewed for general consistency with the
requirements shown in the Contract Documents, but not for context,
accuracy, or method of calculation.
3. Include data on attachment hardware and construction methods that will
satisfy the design loading criteria.
D. Installation Instructions:
1. Provide anchorage instructions and requirements for the equipment based on
the seismic conditions of the site as specified in Sub-Section 10.01612 and
wind conditions:
a. Stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the State where the
project is being constructed.
E. Calculations:
1. All calculations shall be perFormed, signed and stamped by a Professional
Engineer, Registered in the State where the project is being constructed and
shall show that all specifications requirements are met. Said submittals, by
virtue of the fact that they bear the stamp of a registered engineer, will be
reviewed for general consistency with the requirements shown in the Contract
Documents, but not for context, accuracy, or method of calculation.
�
'
�
,
�
�
'
'
'
'
�
'
�
,
'
'
��
�J
October 26, 2010 - FiNAL 10.16070-2 8235A10
pw:llCarollolDocumentsiClientlWAfftenton/8235A10/Spedfica6ons(10.16070 �
'
'
'
,
��
'
�
'
�
'
,
i
'
'
,
'
'
'
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.09 (NOT USED)
1.10 S NOT USED)
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
I.IG Jt�71�1111 JI%1RIUf�"
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.13 ' (NOT USED)
1.14 (NOT USED)
1.15 Mn��rr���nr.�r� (NOT USED)
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MAIdUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:
1. Kindorf.
2. Superstrut.
3. Power-Strut.
4_ Unistrut.
5. Cooper B-Line.
6. Robroy.
7. Aickinstrut.
2.02 NOT USED)
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Use materials appropriate for the area as specified in Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Hot dip galvanized steel:
1. Supports:
a. Conform to ASTM specification No. A123 or A153.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16070-3 8235A10
, pwl/Carollo/DocumentsJClienUWNRenton/8235A1 �/Specifica6onsf 10.16070
b. Minimum zinc coating thickness of 2.6 miis.
2. Hardware_
a. Stainless Steel.
b. Electro-galvanized.
C. Stainless Steel:
1. Supports:
a. Conform to ASTM specification No. A240.
b. ANSI Type 316 material.
2. Hardware:
a. Stainless Steel_
D. PVC Coated Galvanized Steel:
1. Supports:
a. Hot dip galvanized steel.
b. PVC coating thickness of 10 to 20 mils_
2_ Hardware:
a. Stainless Steel_
E. Fiberglass:
1. Supports:
a. Vinyl Ester.
2. Hardware:
a. Polypropylene.
b. Thermal plastic elastimer.
c. Fiberglass reinforced pfastic.
2.04 NOT USED)
2.05 �n� n��n���r �NOT USED)
2.06 (NOT USED)
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Anchors:
1. Refer to Sub-Section 10.05120.
2.08 AA�€S{NOT USED)
2.09 -(NOT USED)
2.10 FINISHES
A. Paint and finish a(I supporting structures in conformance with the painting and
finishing sections of the Contract Documents.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16070-4 8235A10
pw://CarollolDocumentslClienVWAlRentan/8235At O/SpecificaUonsl10.16070
�
�,
' 2.11 cn� �orG n� �n� �Tv rnn�Tpni (NOT USED)
� PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 NOT USED)
�
'
'
�
J
�
'
r
�
,
,
�
3.02 Dt]GD/1�AT1(lAt �NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. General:
1. Equipment anchoring:
a. install equipment in accordance with the printed recommendations of the
equipment manufacturer's literature, including anchoring methods and
{eveling criteria.
b. Brace and anchor freestanding equipment supports using methods that
provide structural support based on the seismic loads as indicated in Sub-
�eciion �t�.0i6�2:
1) Lateral deflection at top of supports not to exceed support height
divided by 210 unless approved by the ENGINEER.
c. Provide fabricated steel support pedestals for wall mounted panels that
weigh more than 500 pounds:
1) Fabricate pedestals out of welded angfe, tube sections, or preformed
channel.
2) If the supported equipment is a panel or cabinet, the pedestal shall
match supported equipment in physical appearance and dimensions.
d. Provide transformers hung from stud walls and weighing more than
300 pounds with auxiliary floor supports.
2. Furnish all conduit racks and trapeze structures needed to support the
conduits from the building walls or ceiling. Group conduits and position on
racks to minimize crossovers, etc'
a. Provide the necessary sway bracing to keep trapeze type structures from
3
swaying.
Mount all pull boxes, switches, panelboards, control panels, instruments, etc.
in any damp or wet location on minimum of 7/8 inch stainless steel or
fiberglass preformed mounting channel. Mount channel vertically along the
vertical length of the device so that any water or moisture may run freely
behind the device.
Concrete housekeeping pads are required for all floor-standing electrical
equipment and conduit penetrations through floor:
a. Pads shall be a minimum of 3.5 inches above the surrounding floor or
grade unless otherwise noted.
b. Pads shall extend a minimum of 2 inches beyond the extent of the
equipment in all directions.
c. Pads shall be sized for the actual equipment furnished and all future
equipment identified on the Contract Drawings.
d. All edges of the housekeeping pad shall be chamfered.
Q
'
�
,
�i
�
C. Raceway:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16070-5 8235A10
, pw:l/Carollo/DocumentslClienUWNRentorJ8235At0ISpecifica6ons110.16070
1. Instail ali raceway cabinets, boxes, fixtures, and other appurtenances parallel
or perpendicular to building lines and level and plumb_
2. Mount all raceways, cabinets, boxes, fixtures, instruments, devices, etc. on
CONTRACTOR-fabricated racks unless othenrvise shown on the Contract
Drawings.
3. All raceways shall be supported directly from building structure. Do not
suspend raceways or equipment from piping or duct work.
D. Anchor Methods:
1. Solid Concrete= Metal or plastic wedge type expansion bolts (or preset
concrete inserts).
2_ Metal Surfaces: Machine screws or bolts.
3. Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts or expansion anchors.
E_ Support luminaries from structural elements capable of carrying the total weight:
1. Provide ceiling or pendent mounted high intensity discharge luminaires with a
separate safety chain connecting the lens, reflector, ballast etc. to the building
structure.
F_ Obtain permission from ENGINEER before drilling or piercing a structural concrete
member.
G_ Plumbers perforated strap or tape is not acceptable.
H_ When supporting devices on metal or wood stud construction bridge studs with
mounting channel and mount the devices to the mounting channel.
I_ Re-coat all scratches, cuts, and drilled holes in galvanized surfaces with CRC "Zinc-
it" or simila� product.
J_ Re-coat all drilled holes and cut surfaces on PVC coated and FRP materials.
K_ Seal all drilled holes and cut surFaces on FRP materials.
3.04 , , , NOT USED)
3.05 ��on�orn�crnonT�n�� �NOT USED)
3.06 Q�-���cTn� � n�r�n�� �NOT USED)
3.U7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A_ Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
3.08 (NOT USED)
3.09 �:�€�N�-(NOT USED)
3.10 (NOT USED)
3.11 PROTECTION
A_ Refer to Sub-Sec#ion 10.16050.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16070-6 8235A10
pw:!lCarollolDoamrentslClienNNAlRenton/8235A 10/Spedfications110.16070
'
� 3.12 NOT USED)
, END OF SUB-SECTION
,
�
�
'
�
'
�
,
'
'
� ,
'
,
,
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16070-7 8235A10
� pw:/lCarollolDocumentslGienNWAlRentonl8235A10/Specificationsl1�.16070
,
I
i
1
i
i
1
1
1
1
C�
1
1
1
1
t
I
1
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16070-8 8235A10
pw:llCardlolDocuments�Client/WA1Renton18235A10/Specifications/t0.16070 '
,
,
�
LJ
,
�
LJ
t
'
'
'
,
�
,
,
�
�
i
SUB-SECTION 10.16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section inciudes requirements for:
1. Identifying electrical, instrumentation, and process equipment and
components.
2_ Material, manufacturing and installation requirements for identification devices.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections: �
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities perForminq
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section_ This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience onfy and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
b. Sub-Section 10.1605a - General Requirements for Electrical Work.
c. Sub-Section 10.16130 - Conduits.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTfON
A. Nameplates: �
1. Provide a nameplate for each piece of inechanical equipment, process
equipment, valve, pump, mixer, feeder, fan, air-handling unit, motor, switch,
receptacle, controller, instrument transducer, instrument power supply,
solenoid, motor control center, starter, panelboard, switchboard, individually
mounted or plug-in type circuit protector or motor controller, disconnect switch,
bus duct tap switch, time switch, relay and for any ather control device or
major item of electrical equipment, either located in the field or within panels.
2. Provide all nameplates of identical style, color, and material throughout the
facility_
3. Device nameplates information:
a. Designations as indicated on the Drawings and identified on the Process
and Instrumentation Drawings.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16075-1 8235A10
, pwJ/CarollolDocumentyGienUWAlRenton/8235At O/5pedficatiortsf 10.16075
C�
b. Device tag and loop number ID (e.g. EDV-60.0101.01).
c. Circuit ID (e_g. LPA-11).
d_ Area served (e.g. Lighting Chemical Building).
B. Wire Numbers:
1. Coordinate the wire numbering system with all vendors of equipment so that
every field wire has a unique number associated with it for the entire system:
a. Wire numbers shall correspond to the wire numbers on the control
drawings or the panel and circuit numbers for receptacles and lighting.
b. Wire numbers shall correspond to the terminal block number to which they
are attached in the control panel.
c. Internal panel wires on a common terminal shall have the same wire
number.
d. Multiconductor cables shall be assigned a cable number that shalt be
attached to the cable at intermediate pull boxes and stub-up locations
beneath freestanding equipment. All multi-conductor and instrumentation
cables shall be identified at pull points as described above:
1) Label armored multiconductor cable using the conduit number as
indicated on the Drawings, following the requirements for conduit
markers in Sub-Section 10.16130.
2. Provide the following wiring numbering schemes throughout the project for
field wires befir✓een Process Control Module, (PCM), Vendor Control Panels,
(VCP), Motor Control Centers, (MCC), field starters, field instruments, etc_
{ORIGIN LOC.}-(ORIGIN TERM.)j{OEST. LdC.}-(DEST. 7ERM.) �
m
Where:
(ORIGIN LQC.)-(ORIGIN TERM.) �
�
{DEST. LOC.)-(DEST. TERM.)
ORIGIN LOC. = Designation for originating panel or device
ORIGIN TERM. = Terminal designation at originating panel or device
DEST_ LOC. = Designation for destination panel or device
DEST_ TERM_ = Terminal designation at destination panel or device or PLC
I/O address at destination panel
a.
b.
c.
�
Identify equipment and field instruments as the origin.
PCM's are always identified as the destination.
Location is the panel designation for VCP, LCP, or PCM. For connections
to MCCs, location is the specific starter tag and loop number. Location is
the tag and loop number for motor starters, field instruments and
equipment_ Any hyphen in the panel designation or tag and loop number
shall be omitted.
Terminal designation is the actual number on the terminal block where the
conductor terminates at field devices and vendor control panels. For
multiconductor cables, all terminal numbers shall be shown, separated by
commas.
�
�
,
'
'
�
,
,
'
,
'
'
�
'
�
'
'
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16075-2 8235A10
pwll CarollolDocumentslClienUWAlf2enmN8235A 10/Specrficatansl10.16075
�
C�
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
'
�
,
�
,
'
C�
'
,
�
3
e. Terminal designations at motor leads shail be the motor manufacturer's
standard terminal designation (e.g.T1, T2, T3, etc.)..
f. Terminal designations at PCM's where the field conductor connects to
field terminal blocks for a PLC input or output shall be the PLC address
(Note: the following PLC IIO numbering scheme is typical for Allen-
Bradley, the numbering scheme should be modified to match that of the
actual PLC manufacturer used for the project):
1) Discrete Point: W:X:Y/Z
Analog Point: W:X:Y.Z
Where:
W= I for input, O for output
X= PLC number (1, 2, 3...)
Y= Slot number (01, 02, 03...)
Z= Terminal number (00,01,02...) for a discrete point or a word
number for an analog point (1,2,3...)
g. Terminal designations at PCM's where the conductor does not connect to
a PLC I/O point shall be the terminal number with a"C" prefix (e.g.
C0010). For common power after a fuse or neutrals after a switch, the
subsequent points shall have and capital letter suffix starting with "A"
(e.g.. C0010A).
Case 1: Vendor Control Panel (VCP) to Process Control Module (PCM):
Field Wire Number/Label: A-B/C-D
A= Vendor Control Panel number without hyphen (VCP60.0101.01)
B= Terminal number within VCP (manufacturer's or vendor's standard
terminal number)
C= Process Cantrol Module number without hyphen (PCM60.0101)
D= Either the PLC address if the field terminal is connected directly to a PLC
input or output point ar the terminal number with a"C" prefix if not
connected directly to a PLC I%O point (C0010)
Examples: VCP60.0101.01-10/PCM60.0101-1:1:01/01
VCP60.0101.01-10/PCM60.0101-0:1:10/07
VCP60.0101.01-10/PCM60.0101-00100
4. Case 2: Field Instrument to Process Control Module (PCM):
Field Wire Number/Label: E-F/C-D
C= Process Control Module number without hyphen (PCM60.0101)
D= Either the PLC address if the field terminal is connected directly to a PLC
input or output point or the terminal number with a"C" prefix if not
connected directly to a PLC 1/O point (C0010)
E= Field mounted instrument tag and loop numbers without hyphen
(EDV60.0101.01)
F= Manufacturer's standard terminal number within instrument. Use both
terminal numbers for analog points separated by a comma
Examples: TIT60.0101.01-2,3/PCM60.0101-1:1:01.1
TSH60.0101-1 /PCM60.0101-1:2:01/00
5. Case 3: Motor Control Center (MCC) to Process Control Module (PCM):
Field Wire Number/Label: G-B/C-D
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16075-3 8235A10
pw:dCarollolDocumentslCtient/WNRenton/8235A 1 �/Specificationsl10.16075
,
B= Terminai number within Motor Control Center (manufacturer's or vendor's
standard terminal number)
C= Process Control Module without hyphen (PCM60.0101)
D= Either the PLC address if the field terminal� is connected directty to a PLC
input or output poirit or the terminal number with a�C" prefix if not
connected directly to a PLC I/O point (C0010)
G= Actual starter designation in the Motor Control Center without hyphen
(MMS60.0101)
Examples: MMS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101-1:1:01/01
M MS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101-0:1:10/07
MMS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101-00100
6. Case 4: Motor Control Center (MCC) to Vendor Control Panel (VCP):
Fisld Vl�ire NumbeNLabel: G-B/A-B
A= Vendor Control Panel number without hyphen (VCP60.0101.01)
B= Terminal number within motor control center or vendor control panel
(manufacturer's or vendors standard terminal number)
G= Actual starter designation in the Motor Control Center without hyphen
(MMS60_0101)
Example: MMS60.0101-X2NCP60.0101.01-10
7. Case 5: Motor leads to a Motor Control Center (MCC):
Field Wire Number/Label: H-I/G-B
B= Terminat number within motor control center (manufacturer's standard
terminal number)
G= Actual starter designation in the Motor Control Center without hyphen
(MMS60.0101)
H= Equipment tag and loop number without hyphen (PMP60.0101.01)
I= Motor manufacturer's standard motor lead identification (e.g.T1, T2, T3,
etc.)
Example: PMP-60.0101.01-T3/MMS60.0101.01-T3
8. Case 6: Remote or separately mounted starter or Variable Frequency Drive
(VFD) to Process Control Module (PCM)_
Field Wire Number/Label: J-BIC-D
B= Terminal number within starter or Variable Frequency Drive
(manufacturer's standard terminal number)
C= Process Control Module number without hyphen (VCP60.0101.01)
D= Either the PLC address if the field terminal is connected directly to a PLC
input o� output point or the terminal number with a"C" prefix if not
connected directly to a PLC I/O point (C0010)
J= Starter or Variable Frequency Drive tag an d loop num ber wit hout hyp hen
(MMS60.0101)
Examples: MMS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101.01-1:1:01/01
M MS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101.01-0:2:10/07
MMS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101.01-00010
9. Case 7: Field Bus Trunk Segment:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16075-4 8235A10
pw:tl CarolldDocuments/ClienUWA/f2enton/8235A10ISpedficationsl10.16075
�
�
,
�
�
,
e
�
'
I
�
'
,
'
i
,
'
�
'
�
,�
�
�
Field Cable Number/Label: C/K-UM; C/K-L/H; CiK-UJ
C= Process Control Module without hyphen (PCM60.0101).
K= Field Bus Cabie Type.
L= Field Bus Segment Number
M= Field Bus Field Network Component without hyphen (PTB1) or
H= Equipment tag and loop number without hyphen (EMV61.1100.01) or
J= Starter or Variable Frequency Drive tag and loop number without hyphen
(VFD60.0112)
Examples: PCM60.0101/PA-1A/PTB1
, PTB1/PA-1 B/PTB2
PCM60.0101 /DN-1 ANFD60.0112
PCM60.0101/DP-2A/ EMV61.1100.01.
�
�
,
,
,
10. Case 8: Field Bus Spur (Drop):
Field Cable Number/Label: E/K-UM
E= Field mounted instrument tag and loop numbers without hyphen
(FIT62.0110.02)
K= Field Bus Cable Type.
L= Field Bus Segment Number
M= Field Bus Field Network Component without hyphen (PTB1), identify ports
on the device.
Examples: FIT62.0110_02/PA-1C/PTB1-1
FIT63.0110.01/PA-1 D/PTB1-2
11. Identify all spare conductors as required for other field wires with an "S" prefix:
Example: S MMS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101.01-0011
�
�
'
,
�
t
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 1-05 and Sub-Section10.16050.
B. Product Data:
1. Nameplates:
a. Color.
b. Size:
1) Outside dimensions.
2) Lettering. _
c. Material.
d. Mounting means.
2. Nameplate Schedule:
a. Show exact wording for each nameplate.
b. Include nameplate and letter sizes.
3. Wire Numbers:
a. Manufacturer's catalog data for wire labels and label printer.
C. Record Documents:
� 1. Update the conduit schedule to reflect the exact quantity of wire numbers
including spares and destination points for all wires.
'
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16075-5 8235A10
� pw:llCardblDocumentstClienUWA/Renton/8235A101Speaficaeons110.16075
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Schedule a pre-installation conference in accordance with Sub-Section 10.16050 in
order to clearly define the requirements specified for equipment identification:
1. Representatives of the CONTRACTOR, OWNER, and ENGINEER shall
convene before any major purchases of cable�or conductors and before the
installation or termination of any cables or conductors.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050_ �
1.08 (NOT USED)
1.09 S (NOT USED)
1.10 NOT USED)
1.11 WARRANTY
n o.,f,..- � c� �t,_c�..+•.,n � n � c�n�n
�. i�c�c� �'�i vuv vc�.uv� � � v. i v.�v.
1.12 SYSTEM START UP
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.13 ' (NOT USED)
1.14 NOT USED) .
1.15 nnn�nrrc��e��r� �NOT USED}
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Nameplates and Signs:
1. One of the following or equal:
a. Brady.
b. Seton.
B. Conductor and Cable Markers:
1. Heat-shrinkable tubing:
a. One of the following or equal:
1) Raychem.
2) Brady.
3j Thomas & Betts.
4) Kroy.
C. Conduit and Raceway Markers:
1. One of the following or equal:
a. Almetek: Almetek type mini-tag.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16075-6 8235A10
pwJ/Carollo/Documents/Cl ienUWA/Renton/8235A101Specifica f ionsl10.16075
�
Ib. Lapp Group: Maxi System.
2.02 NOT USED)
� 2.03 MATERIALS
A. Nameplates:
, 1. Fabricated from white-center and red face or black-center, white face
laminated plastic engraving stock:
a. 3/32-inch thick material.
� b. Two-ply.
c. With chamfered edges_
d. Block style engraved characters of adequate size to be read easily from a
� distance of 6 feet:
1) No characters smaller than 1/8-inch in height.
�
��
,
�
�J
�
�
,
�
j
�
�
r
B. Signs:
1. Automatic equipment and high voltage signs:
a. Suitable for exterior use.
b. In accordance with OSHA regulations.
C. Conductor and Cable Markers:
1. Machine printed black characters on white tubing.
2. Ten point type or larger.
D. Conduit and Raceway Markers:
1. UV resistant holder and letters.
2. Black letters on yellow background.
3. Minimum 1/2-inch high letters.
E. Medium Voltage Circuit Raceway Labels:
1. Vinyl plastic.
2. Minimum 1-inch high letters.
2.04 NOT USED)
2.05 �ni uona�Rrr iN�T USED)
2.06 (NOT USED)
2.07 NOT USED) .
2.08 �€�(NOT USED)
2.09 NOT USEDj
2.10 ���€�(NOT USED)
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Nameplates:
1_ Provide all nameplates for control panel operator devices (e.g. pushbuttons,
selector switches, pilot lights, etc.):
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16075-7
pw:l/CarollolDocumentslClienUWNRenton/8235At 0/Spedficationsl10.16075
8235A10
�
a. Same material and same color and appearance as the device
nameplates, in order to achieve an aestheticaliy consistent and
coordinated system.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 €� NOT USED)
3.02 �p�DARATIfIAI �NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050_
B. Nameplates:
1. Attach nameplates to equipment with rivets, bolts oc sheet metal screws,
approved waterproof epoxy-based cement or install in metal holders welded to
the equipment.
2_ On NEMA 4, NEMA 4X, or NEMA 7 enclosures, use epoxy-based cement to
a�idCi� ►►d111@�7i8��5.
3. Nameplates shall be aligned and level or plumb to within 1/64 inch over the
entire length:
a. Misaligned or crooked nameplates shall be remounted, or provide new
enclosures at the discretion of the ENGINEER.
C. Conductor and Cable Markers_
1. Apply all conductor and cable markers before termination.
2. Heat-shrinkable tubing:
a. Tubing shall be shrunk using a heat gun that produces low temperature
heated air_
b. Tubing shall be tight on the wire after it has been heated.
c. Characters shall face the open panel and shall read from left to right or
top to bottom.
d. Marker shall start within 1/32 inch of the end of the stripped insulation
point_
D. Conduit Markers:
1. Furnish and install conduit markers for every conduit in the electrical system.
2. Mark conduits at the following locations:
a. Each end of conduits, that are greater that 10 feet in length.
b. Where the conduit penetrates a wall or structure.
c. Where the conduit emerges from the ground, slab, etc.
d. The middle of conduits that are 10 feet or less in length.
3. Mark conduits after the conduits have been fully painted_
4. Position conduit markers so that they are easily read from the floor.
5. Secure all conduit markers with nylon cable ties:
a. Provide with ultraviolet resistant cable ties for conduit markers exposed to
direct sunlight_
b. Adhesive labels are not acceptable.
6. Conduit shall be identified with 0.036 minimum thickness solid brass tags with
stamped 3/16-inch minimum height characters. Tags shall be attached to the
raceway with Type 316 stain{ess steel wires.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_16075-8 8235A10
pw:lf CarollolDocumentslClienvWA/Rentonl8235A10lSpecifications110.16075
i
L
`I
�
`l
�
�
�
L_l
'
'
CJ
�
�
�
_i
�J
i
'
'
r
,
I 7. Mark conduits before construction review by ENGINEER for punch list
purposes.
8. Label intrinsically safe conduits in accordance with the requirements of the
� National Electrical Code (NEC).
3.04 � , nT nN� n��� �r�nTin��� rn��cT�� irT�n�i �NOT USED)
� 3.05 o�oni�roGcrn�nT�nr.� �NOT USED)
3.06 g�-���cTn� � ATI(lAI �NOT USED)
` 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
� A. Replace any nameplates, signs, conductor markers, cable markers or raceway
labels that in the sole opinion of the ENGINEER do not meet the ENGINFER's
aesthetic requirements.
� 3.08 (NOT USED)
3.09 �:�€-�4N1l�-(NOT USED)
, 3.10 (NOT USED)
� 3.11 ��nT�r�-�nn� �NOT USED)
3.12 NOT USED)
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16075-9 8235A10
' pw:UCarollolDocumentslClientM/NRentoN8235A10/Specificationsl1�.16075
II
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16075-10 8235A10
pwllCarollolDocuments/ClienuWAlRenton18235A10lSpecifica tionsl10.16075
�
i
1
1
1
�
t
�;
�
1
1
t
l
1
1
C�
�
�
I
,
�
��
SUB-SECTION 10.16123
600 VOLT OR LESS WIRES AND CABLES
�
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes requirements for:
1. 600 Volt Class wire and cable.
2_ Instrumentation Class wire and cable.
�
�
�
i
�
�
B. Rs!�ted Sect��ns/Sub-Sections:
1_ The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections /Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 — Control of Work.
b. Sub-Section 10.16Q50 - General Requirements for Electrical Work.
c. Sub-Section 10.16075 - Electrical Identification.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. B 3- Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire.
2. B 8- Specificatian for Concentric-Lay—Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard,
Medium-Hard, or Sofi.
C. Federal Specification J-C 30A.
�
�
D. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA):
1. IPCEA S-61-402 for thermoplastic insulated wire and cable for the
transmission and distribution of electrical energy.
2. IPCEA S-61-402 for rubber insulated wire and cable for the transmission and
distribution of electrical energy.
� E_ National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. Article 72 - National Fire Alarm Code.
2. Article 101 - Life Safety Code.
� 3. Article 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires
and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces.
,
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16123-1
pw://Carollo/DocumentslCfienUWAlRenton18235A10/S pecificaroonsll �.16123
8235A10
F. Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronics Industry Association
(TIA/EIA):
1. TS695 - Additional Transmission Performance Guidelines for 4-pair 1 QO W
Category 5 Cabling.
2. 568-A - Additional Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-pair 100 W
Enhanced Category 5 Cabling.
3_ 568-B.2-1 — Specifications for Category 6 cabling_
G. Underwriter's Laboratories Inc., (UL):
1. 1063 - Standard for Machine-Tool Wires and Cables.
2. 1277 - Standard for Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional
Optical-fiber Members.
3. 1424 - Standard for Cables for Power-Limited Fire-Alarm Circuits.
4. 1581 - Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords.
5. 1569 - Standard for Metal-Clad Cables_
6. 2196 - Standard for Tests for Fire Resistive Cables.
7. 2225 - Meta{-Clad Cables and Cable-Sealing Fittings For Use in Hazardous
(Classified) Locations.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the:
1. Insulated Cable Engineering Association (ICEA).
2. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM).
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install the complete wire and cable system.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Fumish submittals in accordance with Section 1-05 and Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer of wire and cable.
2. Insulation:
a__ Type.
b. Voltage class.
3. American Wire Gauge size.
4. Conductor material.
5. Pulling compounds.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Show splice locations.
D. Test Reports:
1. Submit test reports for meg-ohm tests.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16123-2 8235A10
pw:l/Carollo/DocumentslCl ienUWAlRentonl8235A10lSpecifira6ons/10.16123
�
�
�
�
,
�
B. All wires and cables shall be UL listed and labeled.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.08 (NOT USED)
1.09 (NOT USED)
1.10 (NOT USED)
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.12 SYSTEM START-UP
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10_16050.
�_�� /1\A)wIC�•c � ICT�11!'`TI(lA1C �;OT i;�EC2j
1.14 NOT USED)
1.15 MAIAITCAlAAI!'G (NOT USED)
� PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MAIVUFACTURERS
� A. One of the following or equal:
1. 600 Volt class wire and cable:
� a. General Cable.
b. Okonite Company.
c. Southwire Company.
� 2. Instrumentation class wire and cable:
a_ Alpha Wire Company.
b. Belden CDT.
c. General Cable BICC Brand.
� d. Okonite Company.
e. Rockbestos Surprenant Cable Corporation.
2.02 (NOT USEDj
2.03 IVIATERIALS
�'.
�
i
A. Conductors:
1. Copper per ASTM B 3.
2. Minimum 97 percent conductivity.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16123-3 8235A10
� pw:llCarollolDocumentslClienUWAlRenton/8235A101SpeaficaUonsl10.16723 �
�
2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS ��
A. Generai:
1. Provide new wires and cables manufactured within 1 year of the date of
delivery to the site.
2. Permanently mark each wire and.cable with the following at 24 inch intervals_
a. American Wire Gauge (AWG) size.
b. Voltage rating.
c. lnsulation type.
d. UL symbol.
e. Month and year of manufacture.
f. Manufacturer's name.
3. Identify and mark wire and cable as specified in Section 16075:
a. Use integral color insulation for Number 2 AWG and smaller wire.
b. Wrap colored tape around cable larger than Number 2 AWG.
B. 600 Volt class wire and cable:
1. Provide American Wire Gauge (AWG) or kcmil sizes as indicated on the
Drawings:
a. When not indicated on the Drawings, size wire as follows:
1) In accordance with the National Electricai �ode:
a) Use 75 degres Celsius ampacity ratings.
b) Ampacity rating after al� derating factors, equal to or greater than
rating of the overcurrent device.
2) Provide Number 12 AWG minimum for power conductors.
3) Provide Number 14 AWG minimum for control conductors.
2. Provide Class B Stranding Per ASTM B 8:
a. Provide Class C stranding where extra flexibility is required.
3
4.
Insulation:
a. XHHW-2.
b. 90 degrees Celsius rating in wet or dry locations.
Multiconductor cables:
a. Number and size of conductors as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Individual conductors with XHHW-2 insulation.
c: Overall PVC jacket.
d_ Tray Cable rated.
e. Color-coding for control wire per ICEA Method 1, E-2.
f. Ground Conductor: Insulated, green:
1) Sized per NEC.
C. Instrumentation class cable:
1. Type TC.
2. Suitable for use in wet focations.
3. Voltage rating: 600 volts.
4. Temperature rating: 90 degrees Celsius wet or dry location_
5. Conductors:
a. Insulation:
1) Flame-retardant PVC, 15 mils nominal thickness, with nylon jacket
4 mils nominal thickness_
b_ Number 16 AWG stranded and tinned. ,
c. Color code:
. 1) Pair: Black and white.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16123-4 8235A10
pw:/1Carol lo/Documents/ClienUVJNRenton18235A t O/Specficationsl10.16123
�
�
�
�I
�
�
�
�
11
�
�
�
�
�
�
,�
�
�
i
l
i
�
,
�
�
�
�
E�]
2) Triad: Black, white and red.
3) Multiple Pairs or Triads:
a) Color-coded and numbered_
Drain wire:
a. 18 AWG.
b. Stranded, tinned.
Jacket:
a. Flame retardant, moisture and sunlight resistant PVC.
b. Ripcord laid longitudinally under jacket to facilitate removal.
Shielding:
a. Individual pair/triad:
1) Minimum 1.35-mil double-faced aluminum foil/polyester tape
overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.
b. Multiple pair or triad shielding:
1) Group Shield: Minimum 1.35-mil double-faced aluminum
foil/polyester tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.
2) Completely isolate group shields from each other.
3) Cable Shield: 2.35 mils double-faced aluminum and synthetic
polymer backed tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.
c. All shielding to be in contact with the drain wire.
2.05 �^� "��^^���T �NOT USED)
2.06 (NOT USED�
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Wire Ties:
1. One of the following or equal:
a. T&B "Ty-Rap" cable ties.
b. Panduit cable ties.
��
B. Wire Markers:
1. Reference Sub-Section 10.16075.
2.08 AI�€S-(NOT USED}
� - 2.09 NOT USED)
� 2.10 F�"��,�,-.��-(NOT USED)
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
�
A. Assembly and testing of cable shall comply with the applicable requirement of ICEA
Publication No. S-68-516.
B_ Test type XHHW-2 in accordance with the requirements of UL 44.
�
.�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16123-5 8235A10
' pwJ/CarollolDocumentslClienUWAlRentonl8235A10lSpecificaqons110.16123
L9
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FYAl1AlAl/lTl(1w1 �NOT USED}
3.02 D�CDA!?ATI/lAI �NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050
B. Color-Coding:
1. Co{or-coding shall be consistent throughout the facility.
2. The following color code shall be followed for all 240/120 Volt and
208/120 Volt systems:
a. Phase A - Black_
b. Phase B - Red_
c. Phase C - Blue.
d. Single Phase System - Black for one hot leg, red for the other.
e_ Neutral - White_
f. High Phase or Wild Leg - Orange.
g. Cquipmeni Ground - Green.
3. The following color code shall be followed for all 480/277 volt systems:
a_ Phase A - Brown.
b. Phase B - Orange.
c. Phase C - Yellow.
4
5.
6.
7.
8.
d. Neutral - Gray. .
e. Equipment Ground - Green.
The following color code shall be followed for all 120 VAC control wiring:
a. Power - Red.
b. Neutral - White.
The following color code shall be followed for all general purpose DC control
circuits:
a. Grounded conductors — Blue with White stripe.
b. Ungrounded conductors - Blue.
Switch legs shall be violet. Three-way switch runners shall be pink.
Wires in intnnsically safe circuits shall be light blue.
Wire colors shall be implemented in the following methods:
a. Wires manufactured of the desired color.
b. Continuously spiral wrap the first 6 inches of the wire from the termination
point with colored tape:
1) Colored tape shall be wrapped to overlap 1/2 of the width of the tape.
C. Install conductors only after the conduit installation is complete, and all enclosures
have been vacuumed c{ean, and the affected conduits have been swabbed clean
and dry:
1. Install wires only in approved raceways.
2. Do not install wire:
a. In incomplete conduit runs. �
b_ Until after the concrete work and plastering is completed.
D. Properly coat wires and cables with pulling compound before pulling into conduits:
1_ For all Number 4 AWG and larger, use an approved wire-pulling lubricant while
cable is being installed in conduit:
October 26, 2010 - FiNAL 10.16123-6 8235A10
pwllCarollolDocameMslClienUWAlftenton18235A t OlSpecificatioru/10.16123
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
L
�
�.
'
1
�
�'
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
a. Ideal Products.
b. Polywater Products.
c. 3M Products.
d. Greenlee Products.
e. Or equal as recommended by cable manufacturer.
f. Do not use oil, grease or similar substances.
E. Cable Pulling:
1. Prevent mechanical damage to conductors during installation.
2. For cables Number 1 AWG and smaller, install cables by hand.
3. For cables larger than Number 1 AWG, power pulling winches may be �sed if
they have cable tension monitoring equipment.
4. Provide documentation that maximum cable pulling tension was no more than
75 percent of the maximum recommended level as published by the cable
m�nufa�turpr. If exceeded, ths ENGINEER may, a± his discretion, require
replacement of the cable.
5. Ensure cable pulling crews have all calculations and cable pulling limitations
while pulling cable.
6. Make splices or add a junction box or pullbox where required to prevent cable
pulling tension or sidewall pressure from exceeding 75 percent of
manufacturer's recommendation for the specified cable size:
a. Make splices in manholes or pull boxes only.
b. Leave sufficient slack to make proper connections.
F. Use smooth-rolling sheaves and rollers when pulling cable into cable tray to keep
pulling tension and bending radius within manufacturer's recommendations.
G. Install and terminate all wire in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
H. Neatly arrange and lace conductors in all switchboards, panelboards, pull boxes,
and terminal cabinets by means of wire ties:
1. Do not lace wires in gutter or panel channel.
2. Install all wire ties with a flush cutting wire tie installation tool:
a. Use a tool with an adjustable tension setting.
3. Do not leave sharp edges on wire ties.
I. Terminate solid conductors at equipment terminal screws with the conductor tightly
wound around the screw so that it does not protrude beyond the screw head:
1. Wrap the conductor clockwise so that the wire loop is closed as the loop is
tightened:
2. Do not use crimp lugs on solid wire.
� J. Terminate stranded conductors on equipment box lugs such that all conductor
strands are confined within the lug:
1. Use ring type lugs if box lugs are not available on the equipment.
LJ
.�
'
K_ Splices:
1. Provide continuous circuits from origin to termination whenever possible:
a. Obtain ENGINEER's approval prior to making any splices.
2. Lighting and receptacle circuit conductors may be spliced without prior
approval from the ENGINEER.
3. Where splices are necessary because of extremely long wire or cable lengths
that exceed standard manufactured lengths:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16123-7 8235A10
pw://CarollolDocumentsJClien WVNRenton/8235At 0/Speaficationslt 0.16123
l
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
a. Refer to Section 16050 for box NEMA rating requirements.
b. Make splices in labeled junction boxes for power conductors.
c. Make splices for control and instrument conductors in terminal boxes:
1) Provide terminal boards with setscrew pressure connectors, with
spade or ring lug connectors.
Power and control conductors routed in common raceways may be spliced in
common junction boxes.
Clearly label junction and terminal boxes containing splices with the word
"SPLICE." �
Leave sufficient slack at junction boxes and termination boxes to make proper
splices and connections. Do not pull splices into conduits.
Install splices with compression type butt spfices and insulate using a
heat-shrink sleeve_
a_ In NEMA 4 or NEMA 4X areas, provide heat-shrink sleeves that are listed
for submersiblP applications.
Splices in below grade pull boxes, in any box subject to flooding, and in wet
areas shall be made waterproof using:
a) A heat shrink insulating system listed for submersible applications.
b) Or an epoxy resin splicing kit.
L. Apply wire markers to all wires at each end after being installed in the conduit and
before meg-ohm testing and termination.
M. Instrumentation class cable:
1. Install instrumentation class cables in separate raceway systems from power
cables:
2
a_ Install instrument cable in metallic conduit within non-dedicated manholes
or pull boxes_
b. Install cable without splices between instruments or between field devices
and instrument enclosures or panels.
Do not make intermediate terminations, except in designated terminal boxes
as indicated on the Drawings.
N. Multi-conductor cable:
1. Where cable is not routed in conduit with� a separate ground conductor, use
one conductor in the cable as a ground conductor:
a) Use an internal ground conductor, if it is no smaller than as indicated on
the Drawings, and meets NEC requirements for equipment ground
conductor size.
b) Where 2 parallel cables are used, and the internal ground conductor in
each cable does not meet NEC requirements for the combined circuit, use
4-conductor cable, with one of the full-sized conductors serving as
ground_
O. Armored cable:
2
3
Where 2 parallel cables are used, and the intemal ground conductor in each
cable does not meet NEC requirements for the combined circuit, use
4-conductor cable, with 1 of the full-sized conductors serving as ground.
The cable armor is not acceptable as a ground conductor_
Where armored cable terminates at a device, switchboard, panel, etc., use
armored cable connector.
C�
�
i
�
�
L
�
LJ
�
LJ
�-
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16123-8 8235A10
pw:/ICarollolDocumentslClienU WAIf2enronB235A 10lSpeaficationsl10.16123
,'
� ,
� 4. Where armored cable run continues in conduit, strip jacket and armor for
portions in conduit, and terminate cable and jacket with an armored cable
connector threaded into a coupling or conduit box.
�
�
�
�
P. Signal cable:
1. Separate and isolate electrical signal cables from sources of electrical noise
and power cables by minimum 12 inches.
Q_ Submersible cable in wet wells:
1. Provide Kellem's grip or stainless steel wire mesh to support cable weight and
avoid stress on insulation.
R. Wiring allowances:
1. Equipment locations may vary slightly from the drawings. Include an allowance
for necessary conductors and terminations for motorized equipment, electrical
outlets, fixtures, communication outlets, instruments, and devices within
10 linear feet of locations indicated on the Drawings.
3.04 , , (NOT USED)
' ., ...- .,�� ,. , ^ � : : :: .:.:
�.�� (niv i ti�Euj
3.06 !? ��crn� i nT�n�� iNOT USED)
, 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
3.08 NOT USEDj
� 3.09 �'� ��^":��n:o-(NOT USED)
� 3.10 n�nnn��c-r�nT�n�� n��n -ron��n�ir� �NOT USED)
�
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
�
�
�
1
1 �
3.12 {NOT USED)
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16123-9 8235A10
� pwJlCarollo/DocumentslClienUWAlRenion/8235At0/Specifica�onsll�.t6123
�
�
�
�
�
�
��
II
.J
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16123-10
pw:llCarolloJDocuments/ClienUWAlRentonl8235At 0/Specrficationsl10.16123
�
8235A10
�
�
�
� PART1 GENERAL
�
LJ
�
1.01 SUMMARY
SUB-SECTION 10.16130
CONDUITS
A. Sub-Section includes requirements for:
1. Metallic Conduits:
a. Polyvinyl Chloride Coated Steel (PCS).
2. Conduit bodies.
3. Conduit fittings and accessories.
4. Conduit installation.
B. Related Sections%Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all_
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
YJark �� �uuc�ri�racic�rs, suppiiers, ana oiner inciiviauais or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related SectionslSub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 — Control of Work.
b. Sub-Section 10.16050 - General Requirements for Electrical Work.
c. Sub-Section 10.16052 - Hazardous Classified Area Construction.
d. Sub-Section 10.16075 - Electrical Identification.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit - Zinc Coated.
2. C80.3 - Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing.
3. C80.5 - Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit.
4. C80.6 - Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit.
�
LJ
�
C. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA):
1. RN-1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Extemally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel
Conduit and Intermediate Steel Conduit.
2. TC2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit.
3. TC3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
4. TC13 - Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing.
5. TC14 - Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and Fittings.
D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
1. 1- Standard for Safety for Flexibte Metal Conduit.
2. 6- Standard for Safetjr for Rigid Metal Conduit.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16130-1 8235A10
' pwllCarollolDocument�CtienUWAlF2enton/8235A101Specificalions110.16130
�
3. 6A - Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Aluminum, Bronze and
Stainless Steel.
4. 360 - Standard for Safety for Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit.
5. 651 - Standard for Safety for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit.
6. 797 - Standard for Safety for Electrical Metatlic Tubing.
7_ 1242 - Standard for Safety for Intermediate Metal Conduit.
8. 1660 - Standard for Safety for Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit.
9_ 1653 - Standard for Safety for Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing.
10. 1684 - Standard for Safety for Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit
(RTRC) and Fittings.
11. 94V0 - Standard for Vertical Flame Test.
7.03 DEFINITIONS
A_ Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B_ Specific definitions and abbreviations:
1_ Conduit Bodies: A separate portion of a conduit system that provides access
through a removable cover to the interior of the system at a junction of 2 or
more conduit sections. Includes, but not limited to: shapes C, E, LB, T, X, etc.
2. Conduit Fitting: An accessory that serves primarily a mechanical purpose_
Includes, but not limited to: bushings, locknuts, hubs, couplings, reducers, etc.
3. GRC: Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit.
4. PCS: PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit.
5. PCA: PVC Coated Rigid Atuminum Conduit.
6. IMC: Intermediate Metallic Conduit.
7. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.
8. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit.
9.� SLT: Sealtight — Liquid-Tight Flexible Conduit.
10. FLX: Flexiuie iv�eta���� ��� �d���.
11. NFC: Nonmetallic Flexible Conduit.
12. ENT: Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing.
13. RAC: Rigid Aluminum Conduit.
14. FRD: Fiberglass Reinforced Duct.
15. NPT: National Pipe Thread.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide conduits, conduit bodies, fittings, junction boxes and all necessary
components, whether or not indicated on the Drawings, as required, to install a
complete electncal raceway system.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Fumish submittals in accordance with Section1-05 and Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Product Data:
1. Fumish complete manufacturer's catalog sheets for every type and size of
canduit, fitting, conduit body, and accessories to be used on the project.
2: Fumish complete manufacturer's recommended special tools to be used for
installation if required.
C_ Certifications:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16130-2 8235A10
pwJ/CarolldDouunentslClienUWAlf2entnrJ8235At OlSpecficafionsf 10.16130
�
i
�
�
��
LJ
i
�
�
�
i:
!
�.
�
�
�
�
1. Furnish PVC coated conduit manufacturer's certification for each installer.
D. Record Documents:
1. Incorporate all changes in conduit routing on electricat plan Drawings.
2. Dimension underground and concealed conduits from building lines.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B_ All conduits, conduit bodies, and fittings shall be UL listed and labeled.
C. Every installer of PVC coated Aluminum (PCA) or Rigid Steel (PCS) conduits shall
be certified by the manufacturer for installation of the conduit.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050_
B. Do not store conduit in direct contact with the ground.
1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Referto Sub-Section 10_16050.
1.09 SEQUENCING
A. Before installing any conduit or locating any device box:
1. Examine the complete set of Drawings and Specifications, and all applicable
shop drawings. �
2. Verify all dimensions and space requirements and make any minor
. adjustments to the conduit system as required to avoid conflicts with the
building structure, other equipment, or the work of other trades.
1.10 NOT USED)
1.11 VIIARRANTY
A. Refer ta Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.12 SYSTEM START-UP
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.13 ' (NOT USED)
1.14 NOT USED)
1.15 nnn���T���n�ir� �NOT USED)
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16130-3
pwllCarollolDocumentslClienUWA/Renton18235A t O/SpecificaUons110.16130
8235A10
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.Q1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Polyvinyl chloride-coated rigid steel conduit (PCS):
1. One of the following or equal:
a_ Robroy Industries.
b_ OCAL, Inc.
c. Perma Kote.
B. Conduit bodies:
1. One of the following or equal:
a. Crouse-Hinds.
b. Appleton.
c. O-Z/Gedney.
d. Ocal.
e. Robroy.
f. Carlon.
C. Conduit seals_
1_ une of ine ioiiowing or equai:
a. Appleton.
b. Crouse-Hinds_
c. O-Z/Gedney.
D. Conduit mounting strut:
1. As specified in Section 16070.
E. Conduit through wall and floor seals:
1. The following or equal:
a. O-Z/Gedney, Type "WSK."
2.02 NOT USED)
2.03 nnn-r�o�ni c �NOT USEDj
2.04 NOT USED)
2.05 �n� nonn�r,ir �NOT USED)
2.06 COMPONENTS
A. PVC coated steel conduit and conduit bodies (PCS):
1. The steel conduit, before PVC coating, shall be new, unused, hot-dip
galvanized material, conforming to the requirements for type GRC.
2. Coated conduit conforms to NEMA Standard RN-1:
a. The galvanized coating may not be disturbed or reduced in thickness
during the cleaning and preparatory process.
3. Factory Bonded PVC Jacket:
a. The exterior galvanized surfaces shall be coated with primer before PVC
coating to ensure a bond between the zinc substrate and the PVC
coating.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16130-4
pw:/1CarollolOocumentyClienUWA(f2entonl8235A10f Speafirations(10.16130
8235A10
��
�
�
�
b. Nominal thickness of the exterior PVC coating shall be 0.040 inch except
where part configuration or application of the piece dictate otherwise.
c. PVC coating on conduit and associated fittings shall have no sags,
blisters, lumps, or other surface defects and free of holes and holidays.
d. The PVC adhesive bond on conduit and fittings shall be greater than the
tensile strength of the PVC plastic coating:
1) Confirm bond with certified test results.
A urethane coating shall be uniformly and consistently applied to the interior of
all conduit and fittings:
a. Nominal thickness of 0.002 inch.
b. Conduit having areas with thin or no coating are not acceptable.
c. All threads shall be coated with urethane_
The PVC exterior and urethane interior coatings applied to the conduit shall
afford sufficient flexibility to permit field bending without cracking or flaking at
temperature above 30 degrees Fahrenheit (-1 degree Celsius).
PCS conduit bodies and fittings:
a. Malleable iron_
b. The conduit body, before PVC coating, shall be new, unused material and
shall conform to appropriate UL standards.
c. The PVC Coating on the outside of conduit bodies shall be 0.040 inches
thick and have a series of longitudinal ribs to protect the coating from tool
damage during installation.
d. 0.002 inch interior urethane coating.
e_ Utilize the PVC coating as an integral part of the gasket design.
f. Stainless steel cover screws heads shall be encapsulated with plastic to
assure corrosion protection.
g. A PVC sleeve extending 1 conduit diameter or 2 inches, whichever is less,
shall be formed at each female conduit opening_
1} The inside diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside
diameter of the conduit to be used.
2) The sleeve shall provide a vapor and moisture tight seal at every
connection.
5
�
�
j.
�
�
��
1,
�
�
,
B. Conduit bodies:
1. Material consistent with conduit type:
a. Malleable iron bodies and covers when used with type GRC conduit.
b. Cast aluminum bodies and covers when used with type RAC.
c_ PVC bodies and covers when used with type PVC.
d_ PVC coated malleable iron bodies and.covers when used with type PCS.
e. PVC coated copper-free cast aluminum bodies and covers when used
with type PCA.
f. Malleable iron or aluminum bodies with pressed steel or aluminum covers
when used with EMT conduit.
2. Conduit.bodies to conform to Form 8, Mark 9, or Mogul Design:
a. �Mogul design conforming to NEC requirements for bending space for
large conductors for conduit trade sizes of 1 inch and larger with
conductors #4 AWG and larger, or where required for wire bending space.
3. Gasketed covers attached to bodies with stainless steel screws secured to
threaded holes in conduit body.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16130-5 8235A10
� pw:llCaro11o1DocumentslCfientlWfVRentonl8235A10/Speafications110.16130
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Connectors and fittings:
1. Manufactured with compatible materials to the corresponding conduit.
B. Insulated throat metailic bushings:
1. Construction:
a. Malleable i�on or zinc plated steel when used with steel conduit.
b. Aluminum when used with aluminum conduit.
c. Positive metallic conduit end stop.
d. Integrally molded non-combustible phenolic insulated surfaces rated
150 degrees Celsius.
e. Use fully insulated bushings on nonmetallic conduit system made of high
impact 150 degrees Celsius rated non-combustible thermosetting
�henolic.
C. Insutated grounding bushings:
1. Construction:
a. Malleable iron or steel, zinc plated, with a positive metallic end stop.
b_ Integrally molded non-combustible phenolic insulated surFaces rated
15c� degrees Celsius.
c. Tin plated copper grounding saddle for use with copper or aluminum
conductors.
D. Electrical unions (Erickson Couplings):
1. Construction:
a. Malleable iron for use with steel conduit.
b. Concrete tight, 3-piece construction.
c. Rated for Class I Division 1 Group D in hazardous areas_
E. Sealtight - liquid-tight flexible conduit (SLT) fittings:
1. Construction:
�
a. Malleable iron.
b. Furnished with locknut and sealing ring.
c. Liquid-tight, rain-tight, oil-tight.
d. Insulated throat_
e. Furnish as straight, 45 degree elbows and 90 degree elbows.
f. Designed to prevent sleeving:
1) Verify complete bonding of the raceway jacket to the plastic gasket
seal.
g. Equipped with grounding device to provide ground continuity irrespective
of r.aceway core construction. Grounding device if inserted into raceway
and directly in contact with conductors shall have rolled over edges for
sizes under 5 inches_
h. Where terminated into a threadless opening using a threaded hub fitting, a
suitable moisture resistant/oil resistant synthetic rubber gasket shall be
provided between the outside of the box or enclosure and the fitting
shoulder_ Gasket shall be adequately protected by and permanently
bonded to a metallic retainer.
Corrosion resistant and outdoor sealtight - liquid-tight flexibte conduit (SLT)
fittings:
a. Construction:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16130-6 8235A10
pwllCarollo/Documents/ClienUWAlRenton18235A101Specifica6onslt 0.16730
�.
�
�'
�
�
,�
�
�
,�
�
�
,�
�
,
1) PVC coated liquid-tight fittings with a bonded 0.040 inch thick PVC
coating on the metal connector to form a seal around the SLT
conduit.
2) Connectors shall have an insulated throat and an integral sealing
ring.
F. Hubs for threaded attachment of steel conduit to sheet metal enclosures:
1. Construction:
a. Shall have an insulated throat.
b. When used in corrosive areas shall be PVC coated.
c. Bonding locknut.
d. Recessed neoprene O-ring to assure watertight and dust tight connector.
e. One half-inch through 1-1/4-inch steel zinc electroplated.
f. One and one half-inch through 6-inch malleable iron zinc plated.
g. Aluminum with aluminum conduit.
2. Usage:
a. All conduits in damp, wet, outdaor, and corrosive areas shall use threaded
hubs for connections to sheet metal enclosures.
G_ Sealing Fittings:
1. �onsiruction:
a. 40 percent wire fill capacity. '
b. PVC coated when used in corrosive areas.
c. Malleable ductile iron with steel conduit_
d. Aluminum with aluminum conduit.
e. Crouse-Hinds Type EYD where drains are required.
f. Crouse-Hinds Type EYS where drains are not required.
g. UL listed for use in Class 1, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D; Class 1,
Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class 2, Divisions 1 and 2; Groups E, F,
and G.
H. Through Wall and Floor Seals:
1. Matenals:
a. Body - casting of malleable or ductile iron with a hot dip galvanized finish.
b. Grommet - neoprene.
c. Pressure rings - PVC coated steel. .
d. Disc material - PVC coated steel.
Expansion/deflection couplings:
1. Use to compensate for movement in any directions between 2 conduit ends
that they connect.
2. Shall allow movement of 3/4-inch from the normal in all directions.
3: Shall allow angular movement for a deflection of 30 degrees from normal in
any direction.
4. Constructed to maintain electrical continuity of the conduit system.
5. Materials:
a. End couplings — Bronze or galvanized ductile iron.
b: Sleeve - Neoprene.
c. Bands - Stainless Steel_
d. Bonding Jumper - Tinned copper braid.
6. These fittings shall be constructed in such a manner that will provide the
continuity of the ground path in each conduit or raceway.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_16130-7
pw:!/CarollolDoc�mentslClienUWAlRenton/8235A1 �/Specificalionsl10.16130
8235A10
J. Expansion couplings:
1. Shali allow for expansion and contraction of conduit:
a. Permitting 8-inch movement, 4 inches in either direction.
2. Constructed to maintain electrical continuity of the conduit system.
3. Materials:
a. Head - Malleable or ductile iron.
b. Sleeve - Steel.
c_ Insulating Bushing - Phenolic.
d. Finish - Hot dip galvanized.
e. Aluminum when used with conduit type RAC.
4. These fittings shall be constructed in such a manner that will provide the
continuity of the ground path in each conduit or raceway.
K. Conduit markers:
1_ In accordance with Sub-Section 10.16075.
2.08 A�€�-(NOT USED)
2.09 NOT USED)
2.'I d ���iii�rrry R—�(IVU 1 11StU�
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 €� NOT USED)
3.02 D�CDA�ATI(lAI �NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. General:
1. Conduit routing:
a. The Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic in nature:
1) Install conduit runs in accordance with schematic representation
indicated on the Drawings and as specified.
2) Modify conduit runs to suit field conditions, as accepted by the
ENGINEER:
a) Make changes in conduit locations that are consistent with the
design intent but are dimensionally different, or routing to
bypass obstructions.
b) Make changes in conduit rauting due to the relocation of
equipment.
3) The Electrical Drawings do not indicate all required junction boxes
and pull boxes:
a) Provide junction boxes and pull boxes to facilitate wire pulling as
required:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16130-8 8235A10
pw:!/Carollol�ocumentslClienUWA/Rentonl8235A10lSpeaficationslt 0.16730
�
�
�J
�
�
�
�
!
��
�
;�
�,
�
.1
�
�J
2.
3
�
5
�
7
�7
a
�
(1) To meet cable manufacturer's pulling tension requirements.
(2) To limit total conduit bends between pull locations.
b) Install junction boxes and pull boxes at locations acceptable to
the ENGINEER.
b. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for any deviations in general location,
conduit size, routing, or changes to the conduit schedule without the
express written approval or direction by the ENGINEER:
1) The ENGINEER is the sole source in determining whether the
change is constituted as a deviation:
2) Perform any changes resulting in additional conduits, or extra work
from such deviations.
3) Incorporate any deviations on the Record Documents.
Use only tools recommended by the conduit manufacturer for assembling
conduit system_
Provide adequate clearances from high-temperature surfaces for all conduit
runs. Provide minimum clearances as follows:
a. Clearances of 6 inches from surfaces 113 degrees Fahrenheit to
149 degrees Fahrenheit.
b. Clearances of 12 inches from surfaces greater than
149 degrees Fahrenheit.
c. Keep conduit at least 6 inches from the coverings on hot water and steam
pipes, 18 inches from the coverings on flues and breechings and
12 inches from fuel lines and gas lines.
d. Where it is necessary to route conduit c(ose to high-temperature surfaces,
provide a high-reflectance thermal barrier between the conduit and the
surface.
Support conduit runs directly from the structure or other system supports:
a. Do not suspend conduits from piping or ducts.
Support conduit runs on water-bearing walls a minimum of 7/8-inch away from
wall on an accepted preformed channel:
a. Do not run conduit within water-bearing walls unless otherwise indicated
on the Drawings.
Do not install 1 inch or larger conduits in or through structural members unless
approved by the ENGINEER.
Run conduit exposed to view parallel with or at right angles to structural
members, walls, or lines of the building:
a. Install straight and true conduit runs with uniform and symmetrical elbows,
offsets, and bends.
b. Make changes in direction with long radius bends or with conduit bodies.
Install conduit with total conduit bends between pull locations less than or
equal to 270 degrees.
Route all exposed conduit to preserve headroom, access space and work
space and to prevent tripping hazards and clearance problems:
a. Install conduit runs so that runs do not interfere with proper and safe
aperation of equipment and do not block or interFere with ingress or
egress, including equipment removal hatches.
b. Route conduit to avoid drains or other gravity lines. Where conflicts occur,
relocate conduit as required.
When installing conduit through existing slabs or walls make provisions for
locating any possible conflicting items where conduit is to penetrate. Use tone
signal or X-ray methods to make certain that no penetrations will be made into
existing conduit, piping, cables, post-tensioning cables etc.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16130-9 8235A10
� pw:pCarollol0ocumentslClienUWNRenton18235A101Specifications110.16130
11. Plug conduits brought into pull boxes, manholes, handholes, and other
openings until used to prevent entrance of moisture.
12. Install conduit through wall and floor seals where iniiicated on the Drawings.
13. For existing and new 2 inch and larger conduit runs, snake conduits with
conduit cleaner equipped-with a cylindrical mandrel of a diameter not less than
85 percent of nominal diameter of conduit:
a. Remove and replace conduits through which mandrel will not pass.
14. Provide all sleeves and openings required for the passage of electrical
raceways or cables even when these openings or sleeves are not specifically
shown on the Drawings_
15. Install complete conduit systems before conductors are installed.
16. Provide metallic conduits terminating in transformer, switchgear, motor control
center or other equipment conduit windows with grounding bushings and
ground with, a minimum No. 6 AWG ground wire.
17. Undergro�:nd and smbpdded conduits:
a. Install underground conduits, including conduit runs below slabs-on-grade
in concrete reinforced duct bank constnaction:
1) RefertoSub-Section 10_16133.
b. Make underground conduit size transitions at pullboxes and manholes.
c. Install spare conduits in underground duct banks towards top center of
runs to allow for ease of installation of future cables as conduits enter
underground manholes and pullboxes.
C. Lighting and Receptacle Conduits:
1_ Install conduit runs for lighting and receptacle circuits, whether or not indicated
on the Drawings:
a. Minimum conduit size:
1) 3/4 inch for exposed conduits.
2) 1 inch for underground or in slab conduits.
2. Provide conduit materials for the installed location as specified in Sub-
Section 10.16050.
D. Hazardous Areas:
1. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050 for Hazardous Areas and specific Class and
Division.
2. Refer to Sub-Section 10_16052 for Hazardous Area Conduit installation
requirements.
E. Conduit usage:
1. Exposed conduits:
a. Rigid conduit:
1) Install the rigid conduit type for each location as specified in Sub-
Section 10.16050_
2) Minimum Size: 3/4-inch.
b. Flexible conduit:
1) Use flexible conduit for final connections between rigid conduit and
motors, vibrating equipment, instruments, control equipment or
where required for equipment servicing:
a) Use type SLT with rigid metallic conduit.
b) Use type NFC with PVC conduit.
2) Minimum size: 3/4-inch:
a) 1/2 when required for connection to instruments_
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16130-10 8235A10
pw:llCarollolDocuments/ClientlWAlf2entonl8235At OlSpecficationsl10.16130
i
u
�
�
�
�
u
�
u
�
,
�
�
�
� f)
�
3)
Maximum length:
Conduit Trade size
1/2
3/4
1-1/4
1-1l2
2
2-1/2
3
3-1/2
4
2
3.
Flexible Conduit Le
�
�
�
�
�
m
m
m
�
.�
Direct buried conduits:
a. Type PCS. �
b. Minimum size: 1-inch.
PVC coated rigid metallic conduit (PCS):
a. Use specifically manufactured or machined threading dies to
manufacturer's specifications to accommodate the PVC jacket.
m
F. Conduit joints and bends:
1. General:
a. Where conduit is underground, under slabs on grade, exposed to the
weather or in NEMA 4 or NEMA 4X locations, make joints tiquid-tight.
b. Keep bends and offsets in conduit runs to an absolute minimum.
c. All bends shall be symmetrical.
d. The following conduit systems shall use large radius sweep elbows:
1) Underground conduits.
2) Conduits containing medium voltage cables.
3) Conduits containing shielded cables.
4) Conduits containing fiber optic cables.
e. Provide large radius factory-made bends for 1-1/4-inch trade size or
larger_
f. Make field bends with a radius of not less than the requirements found in
the NEC:
1) The minimum bending radius of the cable must be less than the
radius of the conduit bend.
2) Make all field bends with power bending equipment or manual
benders specifically intended for the purpose:
a) Make bends so that the conduit is not damaged and the internal
diameter is not effectively reduced.
b) For the serving utilities, make bends to meet their requirements.
g. Replace all deformed, flattened, or kinked conduit.
2. Threaded conduit:
a. Cut threads on rigid metallic conduit with a standard conduit cutting die
that prov�des a 3/4-inch per foot taper and to a lengtti such that all bare
metal exposed by the threading operation is completely covered by the
couplings or fittings used_ In addition, cut the lengths of the thread such
that all joints become secure and wrench tight just preceding the point
where the conduit ends would butt together in couplirigs or where conduit
ends would butt into the ends or shoulders of other fittings.
b. Thoroughly ream conduit after threads have been cut to remove burrs.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16130-11 8235A10
� pwllCarollo/Documents/ClienWVA/Renton/8235A10ISpecificabons110.16130
�
G
c. Use bushings or conduit fittings at conduit terminations.
d. On exposed conduits, repair scratches and other defects with galvanizing
repair stick, Enterprise Galvanizing "Galvabar" or CRC "Zinc It."
e_ Coat conduit threads with an approved electrically conductive sealant and
corrosion inhibitor that is not harmful to the conductor insulation:
1) Apply to the male threads and tighten joints securely.
2) Clean excess sealant from exposed threads after assembly.
f_ Securely tighten all threaded connections.
g. Any exposed threaded surface must be cleaned and coated with a
galvanizing solufion so that all exposed surfaces have a galvanized
protective coating.
3., Nonmetallic (PVC):
a. Use approved solvent-weld cement specifically manufactured for the
purpase. Spray type cement is not allowed_
b. Apply he�t for bends so that conduit does not distort or discolor. Use a
spring mandrel as required to assure full inside diameter at all bends:
1) Utilize a heater specifically for PVC conduit as recommended by the
conduit manufacturer.
Conduit sealing and drainage:
1. Conduit drainage and sealing other than required for hazardous and classified
,
�
��
�
�
'
areas:
a. Provide sealing and drainage in vertical drops of long (in excess of
20 feet), exterior, above grade conduit runs at the points at which the
conduit enter buildings, switchgear, control panels, lighting panelboards,
and other similar enclosures_
b. Provide seal fittings with drains in vertical drops directly above grade for
exterior, above grade conduit runs that are extended below grade.
c. Provide conduit seals with drains in areas of high humidity and rapidly
changing temperatures:
1) Where portions of an interior raceway pass through walls, ceilings or
flaors that separate adjacent areas having widely different
temperatures.
d. Provide conduit seals similar to O/Z Gedney (Type CSB series) on all
conduits between corrosive and non-corrosive areas.
e. Seal one end only of all underground conduits at highest point with O/Z
Gedney sealing (non-hazardous) filling, or equal.
2. Install seals with drains at all control panels, junction boxes, pullboxes, low
points of conduit, or any place where moisture may condense and accumulate:
a. Provide Crouse-Hinds Type EYD or approved equal, where drains are
required.
b. Provide Crouse-Hinds Type EYS or approved equal, where drains are not
required.
H. Conduit supports:
1. General:
a. Provide appropnate hangers, supports, fasteners, and seismic restraints
to suit applications:
1) Provide support materials consistent with the type of conduit being
installed as specified in Sub-Section 10.16050.
b. Support conduit at the intervals required by the National Electrical Code.
�
LJ
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16130-12 8235A10
pw:ll Carollo/Documents/ClientlVYAlf2enton18235A101Specifica tions/10.16130
,
c. Perforated strap and plumbers tape are not acceptable for conduit
supports.
2_ Above suspended ceilings:
a. Support conduit on or from the structure, do not support conduit from
hanging wires or suspended ceiling grid.
3. Concealed conduit on wood:
a. Use 2-hole galvanized steel straps screwed or nailed to the wood or
hammer-driven stamped galvanized type supports having serrated or
sawtooth edges on the driven portion and designed specifically for the
size and type of conduit being supported. Drive these latter supports so
that the conduit is tightly and rigidly supported. Replace any dented or
damaged conduit.
4. In steel stud construction:
a. Tie conduit at maximum 4-foot intervals with No_ 16 gauge double
annealed galvanized wire or conduit clips so that conduit cannot move
from vibration or other causes.
5. Conduit on concrete or masonry:
a. Use 1-hole malleable iron straps with metallic or plastic expansion
anchors and screws or support from preset inserts.
b. Use preset inserts in concrete when possible.
c. iise pipe spacers (ciamp backs j in wei iocaiions_
d. On plaster or stucco, use 1-hole malleable iron straps with toggle bolts.
6. Conduit on metal decking:
a. Use 1-hole malleable iron straps with 1-inch long cadmium-plated Type A
panhead sheet metal screws. Fully or partially hammer-driven screws are
not acceptable.
7_ Suspended conduit:
a. Use malleable iron factory-made split-hinged pipe rings with threaded
suspension rods sized for the weight to be carried (minimum 3/8-inch
diameter), KindorF, or equal.
b. For grouped conduits, construct racks with threaded rods and tiered angle
iron or preformed channel cross members. Clamp each conduit
individually to a cross member. Where rods are more than 2 feet long,
provide rigid sway bracing.
8. Supports at structural steel members:
a. Use beam clamps.
b. Drilling or welding may be used only as indicated or with approval of the
ENGINEER.
9. PVC coated rigid conduit (PCS) systems:
a_ Provide right angle beam clamps and U bolts specially formed and sized
to snugly fit the outside diameter of the coated conduit. Provide "U" bolts
with PVC encapsulated nuts that cover the exposed portions of the
threads.
b. Securely fasten exposed conduits with Type 316 stainless steel clamps or
straps.
Expansion or expansion/deflection fittings:
1. General=
a. Align expansion coupling with the conduit run to prevent binding.
b. Follow manufacturer's instructions to set the piston opening.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16130-13 8235A10
� pwl/Carollo/Documents�ClienUWAlf2enton18235At0/Speaficationsl10.16130
E
3.
c. Install expansion fittings across concrete expansion joints and at other
locations where necessary to compensate for thermal or mechanicai
expansion and contraction.
d. Furnish fittings of the same material as the conduit system.
For metallic conduit (PCS, PCA, GRC and RAC) provide expansion or
expansion/deflection couplings, as appropriate, where:
a. Install expansion fittings a minimum of every 200 feet in straight conduit
runs.
For PVC provide expansion or expansion/deflection couplings, as appropriate,
where length change due to temperature variation exceeds 2 inches:
a. Rigidly fix the outer barrel of the expansion coupling so it cannot move_
b. Mount the conduit connected to the piston loosely enough to allow the
conduit to move as the temperature changes.
J. Empty conduits:
1. Provide a polyethylene rope rated 250 pounds tensile strength in each empty
conduit more than 10 feet in length.
2. Seal ends of all conduit with approved, manufactured conduit seals, caps or
plugs immediately after installation:
a. Keep ends sealed until immediately before pulling conductors.
K. Miscellaneous:
1. Provide flashings and counter flashings or pitch pockets for waterproofing of
raceways, outlets, fittings, and other items that penetrate the roof.
2. Provide electrical unions at all points of union between ends of rigid conduit
systems that cannot otherwise be coupled:
a. Running threads and threadless couplings are not allowed.
3. Replace any conduit installed that the ENGINEER determines does not meet
the requirements of this Specification.
� • . . • . • • . • • s � �
3.05 p��n�or�GCTnvnT�n�i �NOT USED)
3.06 �� ���eTn� � nT�n�� �NOT USED)
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.08
3.09
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
�Bd�S�1�6-(NOT USED)
�:���NIA�-(NOT USED)
3.10 (NOT USED)
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
3.12 (NOT USED)
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16130-14 8235A10
pwl/CarollolDoc�nnents/ClienUWAlRenton/8235A 10(Specfications/10.16130
�
�
'
'
SUB�ECTION 10.16134
BOXES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
' A. Sub-Section includes requirements for:
1. Device boxes.
2. Raceway system boxes_
U
'
'
�
,
�
�
���
'
'
�
'
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if cal�ed for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. I IIC IVIIVVVIIIt3. SGVUVIIJlJIIU-JG�I.�lIV11J QIC ICIQICU ll� IIIC VV�UIR �CJI.I IUC� 111 LIIIJ
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 — Control of Work.
b. Sub-Section 10.16050 - General Requirements for Electrical Work.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA}:
1. FB1 — Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable
Assemblies_
2. OS1 — Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
3. OS2 — Nonmetallic Out(et Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
4. 250 — Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).
C.
�
Underwriters Laboratory:
1. UL Standard 498 and 514.
Federal Specification No. W-C-586B.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Specific Definitions:
1. Arcing Parts: Circuit breakers, motor controllers, switches, fuses, or any device
intended to interrupt current during its operation.
2. Raceway System Boxes: Boxes that are used for wire and cable pullboxes,
conduit junction boxes, or terminal boxes.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16134-1 8235A10
epw:llCarollolDocument�IClienUWArRenton18235At0/Speafications110.16134 .
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide outlet boxes for devices such as switches, receptacles, telephone and .
computer jacks, security systems, junction and puliboxes for use in the raceway
systems, etc.
B. Provide boxes and conduit bodies as indicated on the Drawings or as needed to
complete the raceway installation.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 1-05 and Sub-Section 10_16050.
B. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer.
2. Materials.
3_ Dimensions:
a. Height.
b. Width.
c. Depth.
�i. `�ir'ciyii.
e. NEMA Rating_
4_ Conduit entry locations.
5_ Catatog cut sheets.
6_ Installation instructions.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Include identification and sizes of pull boxes.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B: Regulatory Requirements:
1. Outlet boxes shall comply with all applicable standards of:
a. National Electrical Code.
b. National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
c. Underwriters Laboratories.
d. Joint Industry Conference.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A_ Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.09 SEQUENCING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16134-2 8235A10
pwJlCarollo/DocumenlsllGientlWAlftenton/8235A 101Speafications/ 10.16134
1.10 NOT USEDj
1:11 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.12 SYSTEM START UP
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10_16050_
1.13 ' (NOT USED)
1.14 NOT USED)
1.15 ��AIAITGA1/1A1(`C (NOT USED)
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:
1. Pressed steel boxes:
a. Steel City.
b. Appleton.
c. Crouse - Hinds.
d. Thomas & Betts.
2. Plastic and/or fiberglass boxes:
a. Hoffman.
b. Carlon.
c. Stahlin.
3. Plastic coated steel boxes:
a. Rob Roy.
b_ OCAL.
4. Cast device boxes:
a. Appfeton.
b. Crouse - Hinds.
c. OZ/Gedney.
5. Floor outlet boxes with 1 inch conduit knockouts:
a. Steel City, 640 Series.
b. Hubbell Type 625 with S2530 coverplate.
6. Floor outlet boxes in open areas:
a. Hubbell SC-3098 with plate SS-309-D for power_
b. Hubbell SC-3098 with plate SS-309-T for telephone.
7. In-use w�eatherproof non-metallic GFI outlet box and cover:
a. Carlon.
b. Tay-Mac.
8. Formed steel enclosures:
a. Hoffman.
b. Thomas and Betts.
c. Stahlin.
d. Rittal.
9. Stainless steel enclosures:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16134-3 8235A10
pwl/CarollolDocumentsl/ClienUWA(Renton/8235At Of Specificationsl10.16134
,
a. Hoffman.
b. Stahlin.
c. Rittai.
10. Pressed steel boxes and concrete boxes:
a. Appleton.
b_ Steel City_
c. CoopeNCrouse Hinds.
d. OZ Gedney.
2.02 NOT USED)
2.03 �QT�p��� � �NOT USED)
2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Pressed Steel Boxes:
1. One-piece gaivanized pressed steel_
2. Knockout type boxes.
3. Minimum size 4-inch square by 2-1/8-inch deep_
B. i�u� ��rete 6GXES: '
1. For outlets and pull boxes in concrete construction.
2. Pressed steel or cast construction, concrete tight.
3. Knockout size range 1/2-inch to 1-inch.
4. Depth as needed.
5_ Types:
a. Four-inch octagon.
b_ Four-inch octagon ceiling boxes with hanging bars.
c. Gangable Masonry Boxes:
1) 3-1/2 inch deep, 3-314 inch high, length as required:
a) 2-1/2 inch deep boxes may be used where wall thickness
precludes the use of the deeper boxes.
2} With partitions as needed.
C. Threaded-Hub Boxes:
1. Construction:
a. With internal green ground screw. ,
b. Fumished with a suitable gasketed cover.
c. With integral cast mounting lugs when surface mounted.
d. Conduit size range from 3/4 inch to 1 inch.
e. Tapered threaded hubs with integral bushing.
2. Aluminum (copper free) boxes:
a_ High strength copper free 4/10 of 1 percent maximum alloy for use with
aluminum rigid conduit.
3. Malleable iron boxes:
a. Conforming to ASTM A47-77 Grade 32510.
D. Plastic Coated Threaded-Hub Boxes:
1. Construction:
a. With internal green ground screw.
b. Fumished with a suitable gasketed cover.
c. With integral cast mounting lugs when surface mounted.
d_ Conduit size range from 3/4-inch to 1-inch.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16134-4 8235A10
pw:/lCarol�olDocuments//Client/ WNRentonl8235A10lSpedfications! 10.16134
'
1
LJ
�
'
t
'
'
�
'
'
,
'
'
'
'
�
�
'
i
,
'
'
'
�
�
�I
L_
'
'
'
,
�
,
,
,
�
�
�
�
Double coated with a nominal 0.002-inch (2 mil) urethane on both the
interior and exterior before applicatian of PVC coating.
With a minimum 0.040-inch (40 mil) PVC coating bonded to exterior.
With pressure sealing sleeve to protect the connection with conduit.
E. Class I Division 1 Areas:
1_ Provide boxes designed and listed for Class I Division 1 locations and Group
type atmosphere in which they will be used:
a. The approval ratings must be permanently marked on each item.
F. Class I, Division 2 Areas
1. For boxes not containing arcing parts:
a. Refer to Sub-Section 16050.
b. Pressed metal boxes are not allowed.
2_ For boxes containing arching parts provide:
a. Provide boxes designed and listed for Class I Division 1 locations and
Group type atmosphere in which they will be used:
1) The approval ratings must be permanently marked on each item.
3. Cast iron box and cover. �
4. Precision machined flame path between box and cover with neoprene o-ring.
�. Boii-on siainiess sieef sio�ied mounting feet for horizonial or ver'ticai mouniing.
6. For apptications requiring hinged cover, provide flexible hinge mounting either
left or right side.
7. External flange.
8. Provisions for mounting pan.
9. Ground lug.
G. Fiberglass Boxes:
1. NEMA 4X.
2. Constructed of molded fiberglass reinforced polyester.
3. Integral neoprene gasket on cover attached with an oil-resistant adhesive.
4. Enclosures to have internal pads for mounting optional panels and terminal
kits.
5. Covers:
a. Screw cover enclosures:
1) Covers held in place with captive, stainless steel, or monel screws.
2) Covers attached to body with internal zinc-plated steel hinges.
b. Quick release latches covers:
1) Corrosion resistant fiberglass hinges.
2) Spring loaded fiberglass latches with a monel or stainless steel bail
attached with monel or stainless steel screws.
3) With a 316 stainless steel padlock hasp.
6. With external mounting feet.
7. Meeting the following minimum standards and tests:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16134-5 8235A10
' pwJ/CarollotDocumentsllClienBWAlRenton/8235At0/Spedfica6ons110.16134
,
Physical Property Value ASTM Method
Flexural Strength 12,000 PSI D-790
Heat Distortion 400° Fahrenheit D-648
Water.Absorption (24hrs) 0.5 percent D-570
Tensile Strength 5000 PSI D-651
Specific Gravity 1.8 D-792
Flammability 94V-0 UL-94
�ielectric Streng:h 4000 V_P.M D-149
Arc Resistance 180 Secand D-495
H_ Formed Steel Enclosures:
i . �iCBi:
a. NEMA 12.
b. Fabricated from 14 gauge steel, minimum.
c. All seams continuously welded ground smooth.
d_ Door:
1) Rolled lip around 3 sides.
2) Attached to enclosure by means of a continuous stainless steel hinge
and pin_
e. Neoprene door gasket to provide a watertight, dusttight, oiltight seal:
1} Attached with an adhesive.
2) Retained by a retaining strip.
f. Fabricate all external removable hardware for clamping the door to the
enclosure body from zinc plated heavy gauge steel:
1) With a hasp and staple for padlocking.
g. Provide large enclosures with door and body stiffeners for extra rigidity.
h_ No holes or knockouts.
E
i. Finish:
1) ANSI-61 gray electrostatically applied polyester powder inside and
out over cleaned and primed surfaces.
2) White electrostatically applied polyester powder mounting plate.
j. Heavy gauge steel external mounting brackets when surface mounted.
Stainless Steel:
a. NEMA 4X:
1) Boxes in locations subject to flooding or temporary submersion:
a) NEMA 6_
b. Fabricated from 14-gauge type 316 stainless steel.
c_ All seams continuously welded.
d. Door:
1) Rolled lip around three sides.
2) Attached to enclosure by means of a continuous stainless steel hinge
and pin.
e. Neoprene door gasket to provide a watertight seal:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16134-6 8235A10
pw:llCarollolDocumentsllClient/WAlRenron18235A t OtSpeafications110.16134
i
'
i
�J
�
,
'
'
'
,
'
'
'
,
'
'
l�
,
'
,
,
'
; f.
1) Attached with an adhesive.
2) Retained by a retaining strip.
Fabricate all externai removable hardware for clamping the door to the
enciosure body from heavy gauge stainless steel:
1) With a hasp and staple for padlocking.
Provide large enclosures with door and body stiffeners for extra rigidity.
No holes or knockouts.
Finish:
1) Brushed.
Stainless steel external mounting brackets when surface mounted.
1
r
'
�
�
'
,
'
'
�
�
'
I. Cast Iron Junction Boxes:
1. NEMA 4_
2. Recessed cover boxes.
3. Suitable for use outdoors where subject to rain, dripping, or splashing water.
4. Designed for flush mounting in walls or floors:
a_ Can be surface mounted using mounting lugs.
5. Construction:
a. Cast iron box.
b. Covers:
1 j �heckered plate covers suitable for foot traffic.
2) When used in areas subject to vehicular traffic H-20 loading.
c_ Hot dip galvanized.
d. Neoprene gasket.
e. Stainless steel screw covers.
J. Floor Type Outlet Boxes:
1. Watertight cast iron, semi adjustable.
2. Telephone outlets shall be fitted with 6 inch bushed nipples.
3. Provide a pedestal housing for floor autlets in open areas.
4. Suitable for receptacles, communications, and data outlets as specified and
indicated on the Drawings, complete with gaskets and cover plates:
2.05 �n� nonn�r.ir �NOT USED)
2.06 (NOT USED)
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners:
1. Electroplated or stainless steel in boxes with wiring devices.
2. Screws, nuts, bolts, and other threaded fasteners:
a. Stainless steel.
B. Provide breather and drain fittings where appropriate.
� C. Internal Panels:
1. Provide internal panels where required for mounting of terminal strips or other
equipment_
, 2. With plated steel sfioulder studs.
3. Steel with white polyester powder finish.
'
C J
2.08 �€�-(NOT USED)
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16134-7
pw://Carollo/Documentsl/CI ienUWA/Renton18235A10/Speafications/10.16134
8235A10
C]
2.09
2.10
NOT USED)
€�N�S#€�(NOT USED}
,
2.11
�.�n-r.r�. _ . . .t.i�rr_r.�rrar.tii��yy.��
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 NOT USED)
3.02 D1]GD/1f�AT1/lt�l �NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. General:
1. Provide materials and construction suitable for environmental conditions at the
location of the box as indicated in Sub-Section 10.16050.
2_ P�ovide outlet uox mat�^a!s t� r;�#c" t"e ccr�u;: s;;�#erz:
a_ EMT - Pressed Metal Boxes.
b. GRC - Cast Ferrous Boxes.
c. RAC - Rigid Aluminum Conduit.
d. PCS - PVC Coated Cast Ferrous Boxes.
e. PVC - PVC Boxes.
f_ PCA - PUC Coated Aluminum Boxes.
3. Solid Type Gang Boxes:
a. For more than 2 devices.
b_ For barriered outlets.
4_ Support all wall mounted NEMA 4 or NEMA 4X boxes to maintain a minimum
of 7/8-inch free air space between the back of the enclosure and the wall:
a. Use machined spacers to maintain air space; built-up washers are not
acceptable.
b. Use stainless steel or nylon materials for spacers.
5. Use cast malleable iron boxes when box must support other devices.
6. Boxes serving luminaires or devices:
a. Use as pull boxes wherever possible.
7. Fit all cast boxes and pressed steel boxes for flush mounting in concrete with
cast, malleable box covers and gaskets.
8_ In terminal boxes, furnish terminals as indicated on the Drawings, with a
minimum of 50 percent spare terminals:
a. Furnish wireways for discrete and analog/DC wiring.
b_ Separate analog wiring from 120V discrete or power wiring.
9_ Size boxes to meet NEC requirements and to provide sufficient room for the
future components and cables indicated on the Drawings.
10. For fire-rated construction, provide materials and installation for use in
accordance with the listing requirements of the classified construction.
C. Outlet Boxes:
1. Locate outlet boxes as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Adjust locations so as not to conflict with structural requirements or other
trades.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16134-8 8235A10
pw:IlCarollolDocuments!lClienUWNRentonl8235A 10(Spea�calionsf t 0. t 6134
'
,
r
'
,
,
,
'
�
'
�
t
,
�
'
�
�
'
J
'
,
�
,
li
�
��
,__.
'
'
,
�
i
,
,
�
�
�l
2. Use deep threaded-hub malleable iron or aluminum boxes:
a. In hazardous areas.
b. Where exposed to the weather.
c. In unheated areas.
d. Where subject to mechanical damage:
1) Defined as exposed boxes less than 10 feet above the floor.
e. To act as a pull box for conductors in a conduit system.
f. Accommodate wiring devices.
3_ Use deep threaded-hub plastic coated malleable iron boxes in corrosive and
NEMA 4X area and when the conduit system is PVC coated steel.
4. Outlet boxes may be used as junction boxes wherever possible.
D. Pull boxes and junction boxes:
1. Size pull boxes to meet NEC requirements and to provide sufficient room for
any future conduits and cables as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Install pull boxes such that access to them is not restricted.
E. For boxes not indicated:
1. Provide types and mountings as required to suit the equipment and that will be
consistent with the conduit system and environmental conditions as indicated
i� Sui�-S�cti�n iu. iou��.
2. Outlet, switch, and junction boxes for flush-mounting in general purpose
locations:
a_ One-piece, galvanized, pressed steel. �
3. Ceiling boxes for flush mounting in concrete:
a. Deep, galvanized, pressed steel.
4. Outlet, switch, and junction boxes where surface mounted in exposed
locations:
a. Cast ferrous boxes with mounting lugs, zinc or cadmium plating finish.
5. Outlet, control station, and junction boxes for installation in corrosive locations:
a. Fiberglass reinforced polyester, stainless steel, or plastic coated steel to
match the conduit system.
b. Fumished with mounting lugs.
6. Boxes for concealed conduit system:
a. Non-fire rated construction:
1) Depth: To suit job conditions and comply with the NEC.
2) For Luminaries: Use outlet boxes designed for the purpose:
a) 50 pounds or less: Box marked �FOR FIXTURE SUPPORT."
b) More than 50 pounds: Box listed and marked with the weight of
the fixture to be supported (or support luminaire independent of
- the box).
3) . For ceiling suspended fans:
a) 35 pounds or ►ess: Marked "Acceptable for Fan Support."
b) More than 35 pounds, up to 70 pounds: Marked "Acceptable for
Fan Support up to 70 pounds (or support fan independent of the
box)."
4) For junction and pull boxes: Use galvanized steel boxes with flush
covers.
5) For switches, receptacles, etc:
a) Plaster or cast-in-place concrete walls: Use 4 inch or
4-11/16 inch galvanized steel boxes with device covers_
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16134-9 8235A10
, pw:J/CarollolDocumentU/ClientlWAlRenton18235A10lSpecifications110.t6134
'
7
�
b) Walls other than plaster or cast-in-place concrete: Use type of
galvanized steel box which wili ailow wall plate to cover the
opening made for the installation of the box.
Recessed boxes in fire rated (2 hour maximum) bearing and nonbearing wood
or steel stud walls (gypsum wallboard facings):
a. Use listed single and double gang metallic outlet and switch boxes. The
surFace area of individual outlet or switch boxes shall not exceed
16 square inches.
b. The aggregate surface area of the boxes shall not exceed 100 square
inched per 100 square feet of wall surface.
c. Securely fasten boxes to the studs. Verify that the opening in the
wallboard facing is cut so that the clearance between the box and the
wallboard does not exceed 1/8 inch.
d. Separate boxes located on opposite sides of walls or partitions by a
minim�m horiz�ntal distance of 24 inches. This minimum separation
distance may be reduced when wall opening protective materials are
installed according to the requirements of their classification.
e. Use wall opening protective material in conjunction with boxes installed on
opposite sides of walls or partitions of staggered stud construction in
accordance with the classification requirements for the protective material.
Other fire rated construction: Use materials and methods to comply with the �
listing requirements for the classified construction.
F. Recessed Boxes:
1. Support recessed boxes in suspended ceilings or stud partitions with
galvanized steel box hangers of types made specifically for the purpose or
attach directly to wood members or blocking_
2. Secure hangers or boxes to wood with 1 inch long cadmium-plated Type A
pan head screws:
a. Fully or partially hammer-driven screws are not acceptable.
G. Hazardous Locations:
1. All metallic boxes, fittings, and joints shall utilize threaded connections to the
conduit system.
2. All threaded connections shall be wrench tightened so that at least 5 threads
are fully engaged.
3. Conduits entering and exiting metallic boxes in Class I Division 2 areas shall
utilize approved grounding bushings to bond the conduits together.
4. Provide the following types of conduit bodies and boxes:
a_ Malleable iron bodies and boxes with GRC or IMC conduit systems.
b. PVC coated conduit bodies and boxes with PCS conduit systems.
�. .. . . .. , .• . .. .. .. . ■
- — -- - -- - - - - -- - - - --- - - ---- - - -- - - - ,
3.05
3.06
�. • . • • �
!_�yi�tv�i.���;��r.limL���y�'
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
'
LJ
'
,
�
�
,
,
,
�
��
�
I
�
�
i
I I
�
�
�i
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_16134-10 8235A10
pw:!/Carollo/Documents!lClientlWAlf2enron18235A10ISpeafications110.16134
�
[�
� 3.08 NOT USED)
3.09 CLEANING
� A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16054.
3.10 (iVOT USED)
� 3.11 PROTECTION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
� 3.12 NOT USED)
�
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
END OF SUB-SECTION
,
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16134-11
� pvi //CarollofDocumentsAClienUWA/Rentonl8235A10/Specficationsll0. t6134
8235A10
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16134-12 8235A10
pw:ll Carollo/Documents/(Client! WA/Renton18235A t 01SpeaficalionsJlO_ 16134
,
I
�
�
u
�
i�
�
�
�
�
��
1
i
1
1
1
1
t
!
1
i
�
1
�
�
��
SUB-SECTION 10.16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes requirements for:
� 1. Switches.
2. Receptacles.
3. Plates.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all_
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work_
3. i he roiiowing 5ections/Sub-5ections are related to the Work ciescribed in this
Sub-Section_. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 - Gontrol of Work_
b. Sub-Section 10.16050 - General Requirements for Electrical Work.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
1. 20 - General use Snap Switches.
2. 498 - Standard for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles_
3. 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices.
4. 943 - Standard for Safety for Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters.
5. 1474 - Solid State Dimming Control_
I C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. WD1 - General color requirement for wiring devices.
2. ICS 5- Control circuits and pilot devices.
� 3. OS1 - Device box, covers, and box supports.
4. WD6 - Wiring devices dimensional requirements.
�
,
D. Federal Specification:
1. W-C 596.
2. W-S 896.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16140-1 8235A10
� pwJlCarollolDocumentslClient/WNRenton/8235At0/Specificationslt0.16140
�
B_ Specific Definitions:
1_ GFCI: Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter.
2. P-S: Pass and Seymour.
3_ CWD= Cooper Wiring Devices.
4. T8�B: Thomas and Betts.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Switches, receptacles, and plates as indicated on the Drawings wired and operable
to form a complete system.
1.05 SUBMIITALS
A. Fumish submittals in accordance with Section 1-05 and Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Product Data:
1 _ Catalog cut sheets.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Engraving Schedule:
a. FUi�iSii l.l�I 1���CtC CI I131 GVI11tJ�. JI,��UU1G� i0i CI fl��. I Q VC� i �ailicNiaicS.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Wiring devices shall be UL listed and labeled.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A_ Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.09 S (NOT USED)
1.10 NOT USED)
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.12 SYSTEM START-UP
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.13 ' (NOT USED)
1.14 NOT USED}
1.15 ""^�"'T��'n"'r� (NOT USED)
�
�
�
�
�
�
i
,
,
�
�
�
�
�
,
1
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_16140-2 8235A10
pw:l/Carollo/Documents/aenuWAlf2entoN8235At OfSpeaficationsl10.16140
_ �
�
�
�
�
i
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Switches: �
1. Generai purpose toggle switches, one of the following or equal:
a. Part numbers are for brown switches:
1-pole 2-pole 3-way 4-wav
Hubbell HBL 1221 HBL 1222 HBL 1223 HBL 1224
Leviton 1221-2 1222-2 1223-2 1224-2
CWD 4901 4902 4903 4904
2. Switches for NEMA 4 and NEMA 4X location.s, one of the following or equal:
� 1-pole 2-pole 3-wav 4-way
, Hubbell HBL 1281 HBL 1282 HBL 1283 HBL 1284
Cooper Wiring Devices 2291 2292 2293 2294
�
�
3. Switches for o�ce areas, one of the following or equal:
1-pale 2-pole 3-way 4-wav
Hubbell HBL 21211 HBL 21221 HBL 2�231 HBL 21241
CWD 5621-2 5622-2 5623-2 5624-2
4. Switches for photocells, one of the following or equal:
, SinQle-pole, double-throw
Hubbell HBL 1385
CWD 2226
�
�
5. Switches for hazardous areas, one of the following or equal:
� 1-pole 2-pole 3-wav 4-wav
Appleton EDS2129 EDS218 EDS2130 EDS2140
Crouse-Hinds EDS2129 EDS218 EDS2130 EDS2140
� 6. Dimmer switches:
a_ Rectangular design with LED light level indicators:
1) Lutron MAESTROT"" MA-1000 controller for incandescent light.
� 2) Lutron MAESTROT"" MALV-1000 controller for magnetic low-voltage
lights.
3) Lutron MAESTROT"" MA-R remote for additional control stations.
tB. Receptacles:
1. General purpose receptacles, one of the following or equal:
� a. Part numbers are for brown receptacles_
Sinqle Du lex GFCI Weather Resistant
GFCI
� Hubbell HBL5361 HBL5362 GF5362A GFR5362SG
Leviton 5361 5362 6899 W7899-W
CWD 5361B 5362B HGF20B WRVGF20W
� 2. Receptacles for hazardous areas, the following or equal:
a. Crouse-Hinds: CPS152_
3. 250 VAC receptacles, one of the following or equal:
r �
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16140-3 8235A10
� pw://CarollolDocumentslClienWVAlf2entonl8235A10lSpecifications11�.16140
1
a. Hubbell: HBL5462.
b. Cooper wiring devices: 54628.
4. 480-Volt, 3-Phase receptacles:
a_ 30 Ampere=
1) Crouse-Hinds ARE3423.
2) Hubbell Hubbellock0 21420.
3) RussellstolT"" DF3404FRAB_
b. 60 Ampere:
1) Crouse-Hinds AREA6425.
2) Hubbell Hubbellock� 26410 or 26420 with 26401 box and 26404
adapter.
3) RussellstolT"" DF6404FRAB.
C. Plates:
1. General location, onP of the following or equal:
a. Provide plates with number of gangs as required:
Standard
Office Duplex GFCI
Switches Switches Receptacles Receptacles
P-S SS1-N SS26 SS8 WPH26
2_ Wet or corrosive areas, one of the following or equal:
Indoor
Outdoor Duplex Corrosive
Switches Receptacles Receptacles Locations
Hubbell 1750
T&B CCT CKMD
P-S CAI-GL
CA8-GH 3780-SC
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Switches:
1. General:
a. 120-277 VAC.
b. 20 Ampere_
c_ Specification grade.
d. Back and side wired unless otherwise indicated.
e. fntegral grounding terminal_
f. Totally enclosed:
1) Color-coded body with color corresponding to ampere rating.
g. Provide switches with the operator style and contact arrangement as
indicated on the Drawings and as required for proper operation.
h. Color:
1) Ivory in finished areas_
2) Brown in all other areas.
2. General purpose switches:
a. Toggle type.
3. Corrosive and wet areas requiring NEMA 4 or NEMA 4X enclosures:
a_ Toggle switch.
b. Back and side wired.
4. Switches for office areas:
a. Rocker type.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_16140-4 8235A10
pwllCarollolDocuments/ClientlWAlftenton/8235A10fSpeaficationslt 0-16140
�
1
�
�
(�
�
��
'
I
�
�
'
,
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
i
ii
��
�
�
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
1
i
�
�
,
b. Rectangular.
5. Switches for use with photoceli:
a. Maintained contact.
b. Two circuit. .
c_ Three position:
1) Center off.
6. Switches for hazardous areas:
a. Suitable for use in Class I Division 1 and Class I Division 2 locations.
b. Factory sealed.
c_ Through-feed or dead-end as required.
7_ Dimmer switches shall be rectangular design with LED light level indicators:
a. Lutron MAESTROT"' MA-1000 controller for incandescent light.
b_ Lutron MAESTROT"' MALV-1000 controller for magnetic low-voltage
lights_
c_ Lutron �,AAESTROT"" MA-R remote for addi±�onal control sta#ions.
B. Receptacles:
1. General purpose receptacles:
a. Single or duplex as indicated on the Drawings.
b. 125 VAC.
c. 20 Ampere or as indicated on the Drawings.
d. NEMA 5-20R configuration for 20 Ampere receptacles.
e. Other NEMA configurations as indicated on the Drawings.
f. Specification grade.
g. Back wired.
h. One-piece mounting strap.
i. Color:
1) Ivory in finished areas.
2) Brown in all other areas.
3) Orange when powered by a UPS.
2_ Ground Fault Interrupter Receptacles (GFCI):
a. 125 VAC.
b_ 20 Ampere.
c. Trip level 4-6 milliampere.
d. Individual and feed through protection.
e. UL 943 and UL 498 listed.
f. NEMA 5-20R configuration.
g_ For damp or wet locations:
1) Weather Resistant, in accordance with UL 498.
3. Receptacles for hazardous areas:
a. 125 VAC.
b. 20 Ampere.
c. Factory sealed.
d. Single receptacle.
e. 2-wire, 3-pole.
f. Grounded through extra pole and shell.
g. Dead-front construction.
h. Interlocked to prevent plug from being withdrawn until circuit has been
broken.
4. 250 VAC receptacles:
a. 2-pole, 3-wire grounding for 240VAC circuits.
b. 3-pole, 4-wire grounding for 208 VAC 3-phase circuits.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16140-5 8235A10
� pw:l/CarolblDocumentslGienUWAlRenton18235A10/Specifications/10.16140
u
c. Ampere rating as indicated on the Drawings. .
d. Provide NEMA configuration as required by the equipment connected to
the outlet.
C. Plates=
1. Generallocation:
a. Type 302 or 304 stainless steel.
b. Brushed satin finish.
c. Minimum thickness: 0.032 inches.
d. Rectangular or square shape_
e. Engraving:
1) Engrave each plate with the following information:
a) Area served. .
b) Circuit number.
2) Treat engraving to improve visibility and, except for stainless steel
plates, to prevent corrosion.
3) Characters shall be block letter pantograph engraved with a
minimum character height of 1/8-inch.
f. Coordinate the number of gangs, number and type of openings with the
specific location.
1_ Ouidoor and wet areas requiring iVtNi� 4 or ivciViA 4X enciosures:
a. General:
1) UL listed for wet locations.
2) Gasketed.
3) Die cast metal:
a) Match material to box material.
b_ Switches:
1) Lever-operated.
3. Corrosive Areas:
a. Neoprene.
b_ Gasketed.
c. Weatherproof.
D. Data and communications jacks:
1. Process network jacks - panel/enclosure mounted:
a. Network jacks located in process areas shall have a NEMA 4 rating (with
closure cap).
b. Mounting of network jacks in control panels shall be accomplished using
bulkhead connectors and environmental enclosure caps, which are
permanently attached to the bulkhead fitting.
c_ Network jacks shall have RJ-45 connections on both sides of connector
{bulkhead pass through) allowing for direct connection to the network
switch and computer with standard patch cords. No punch down PC board
connections shall be al{owed.
d. Manufactured by Woodhead Connectivity RJLNXX:
2_ Process network jacks - conduit body mounted:
a. Network jacks located in process areas shall have a NEMA 4 rating (with
closure cap).
b. Mounting of network jacks in conduit bodies adapter (with Minifast
connector) shall be accomplished using conduit body insert and
environmental enclosure caps.
c. PC board connections are not to be allowed.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16140-6 8235A10
pw:/lCarollolDocuments(ClienUWAlRenton18235A t OlSpecifica6onsl10.16140
�
�
t
�
,
r
�
I �
L�
�,
L
�
�
!J
i
�
�
�
�
u
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
,
1
�
��
�
'
d. Furnish 10 RJ-45 to minifast connector patch cable 3 feet in length.
e_ Manufactured by InterlinkBT RSS series.
3. Nefi+vork/phone jacks:
a. Network jacks located in computer rooms shali be installed per the
installation details in the drawings.
b. Standard Decora wall plates shall be used with QuickPort modules and
inserts.
c. Plugs shall be color coded as indicated in the installation details in the
Drawings.
d. Manufactured by Leviton Quickport series.
2.03 MATC�IA1 C �NOT USED)
2.04 NOT USEDj
2.05 €Q� ���"��"��NOT USED�
2.06 (NOT USED)
2.07 NOT USED)
2.08 �A1�4€�-(NOT USED)
2.09 N-(NOT USED)
2.10 €IN1S#€�(NOT USEDj
2.11 (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FYAl1AlAlAT1(1a1 �NOT USED�
3.02 p��onan-rinn� �NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATtON
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Mounting heights:
1. Process and production areas:
a. Switches and receptacles 48 inches from finished floor to top of plate.
2. Offices and finished areas:
a_ Switches: 48 inches from finished floor to top of plate.
b. Receptacles: 18 inches from finished floor to center of plate.
C. Switches:
1. Over 300 Volts:
a. Where switches used in systems of more than 300 volts between
conductors, are to be ganged in outlet boxes, provide switches having no
exposed live parts or use barriers between the individual switches.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16140-7 8235A10
� pw://Carollo/Documents�GientIWAJF2entonl8235A10/Specificalionsl10.16140
D. Receptacles:
1. Provide GFCI receptacles as indicated on the Drawings.
a. Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacles in all wet or damp areas.
1) Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
2. Mount non-weatherproof receptacles vertically:
a_ Ground slot down.
3. Mount weatherproof receptacles horizontally:
a. Neutral slot up.
4. 3-phase receptacles shall be consistent with respect to phase connection at
the receptacle terminals. Correct errors in phasing at the source and not the
receptacle. �
E. Ensure all plates make a frm seal with wall for recessed mounted devices:
1_ Outside edges of plates parallel with building lines.
3.04 �p�r-r�n��� IAICTAI 1 ATtllAl� ADDI 1(`ATIlI�I� �n�cTp� �r-nn�� �NOT USED)
3.05 ���n�Qi�GCTnvnrin�� �NOT USED)
3.06 p�-���cTn� � nTinr.i �NOT USED)
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10_16050.
3.08 NOT USED)
3.09 r'� ��^"��"d�(NOT USED)
3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Demonstrate the following to the ENGINEER and OWNER:
1. Switching is per the Drawings.
2. All circuits conform to the panel schedules_
3_. All ground fault receptacles operate at levels below or equal to OSHA
maximum allowable fault levels.
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
3.12 NOT USED)
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16140-8 8235A10
pw:ll Carollo/DocumentslClienUVJAlRentoN8235A10lSpedfications! 10.16140
i
[�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
SUB�ECTION 10.16950
FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
A. Sub-Section includes requirements for:
1. Responsibilities for testing'the electrical installation.
2. Routine tests during installation.
3. Adjusting and calibration.
4. Acceptance tests.
5. Demonstration of electrical equipment.
6_ Commissioning and plant startup.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Cantract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3_ The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 - Control of Work:
b. Sub-Section 10.16050 - General Requirements fo� Electrical Work.
C_ Copyright information:
� 1_ Some portions of this Sub-Section are copyrighted by the International
Electrical Testing Association, Inc (NETA). See NETA publication ATS for
details.
� 1.02 REFEF2ENCES
� A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. International Electrical Testing Association Incorporated:
� 1. NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications, latest published edition.
C. Manufacturer's testing recommendations and instruction manuals.
�J
i
�
D. Specification Sub-Sections for the electrical equipment being tested.
E. Shop drawings.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16950-1 8235A10 ,
� pwJ/CarollolDocumentslGienUWAlRenton18235A10ISpeafications/10.16950
I
B. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the:
1. National Electrical Testing Association.
C_ Specific definitions:
1. Testing Laboratory: The organization performing acceptance tests.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Tes6ng of all electrical equipment installed under this contract in accordance with
the manufacturer's requirements and as specified herein.
B. Conduct all tests in the presence of the ENGINEER or the Engineer's
representative:
1. The ENGINEER will witness all visual, mechanical and electrical tests and
inspections.
C. The testing and inspections shall verify that the equipment is operational within the
tolerances required and expected by the manufacturer, and these specifications_
The results of the tests shall determine the suitability for continued reliable
operation.
D. Responsibilities:
1. CONTRACTOR responsibilities:
a. Ensure that all resources are made available for testing, and that all
testing requirements are met.
2_ Electrical Subcontractor responsibilities:
a. Perfarm routine tests during installation.
b. Demonstrate operation of electrical equipment.
c. Commission the electrical installation.
d. Provide the necessary services during testing, and provide these services
to the testing laboratory, CONTRACTOR, and other Subcontractors,
including but not limited to:
1) Providing electrical power as required.
2) Operating of electrical equipment in conjunction with testing of other
equipment.
3) Activating and shutting down electrical circuits_
4) Making and recording electrical measurements.
5) Replacing blown fuses_
6) Installing temporary jumpers.
3. Testing laboratory responsibilities:
a. Perform all acceptance tests as defined herein.
b. Provide all required equipment, materials, labor, and technical support
during acceptance tests.
E. Upon completion of testing or calibration, attach a label to all serviced devices:
1. The label shall indicate the date serviced and the company that perFormed the
service.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A_ Furnish submittals in accordance with Section1-05 and Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Test Report:
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16950-2 8235A10
pwJlCarollo/Documents/ClienUWA/RentorJ8235A 1 �lSpecifica6onsH 0.16950
C�
�
�
�
�
�
u
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
,
�
l J
1. Inctude the following:
a. Summary of project.
b. Description of equipment tested.
c. Description of tests performed.
d. Test results.
e. Conclusions and recommendations.
f. Completed test forms.
g. List of test equipment used and calibration dates_
C. Testing Laboratory qualifications:
1. Submit a complete resume and statement of qualifications from the proposed
testing laboratory detailing their experiences in performing the tests specified:
a. This statement will be used to determine whether the laboratory is
acceptable, and shall include:
1) Corporate history and refergnces.
2) Resume of individual pertorming test.
3) Equipment list and test calibration data.
D. Division of responsibilities:
1_ Submit a list identifying who is responsible for performing each portion of the
testing.
E. Manufacturers testing procedures:
� 1. Submit manufacturers recommended testing procedures and acceptable test
results for review by the ENGINEER.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
�
�
�
�
�
�
i
��
B. Testing Laboratory qualifications:
1. The Testing Laboratory may be qualified testing personnel from the electrical
subcontractor's staff or an independent testing company.
2. Selection of the Testing Laboratory and testing personnel is subject to
approval by the ENGINEER based on testing experience and certifications of
the individuals and testing capabilities of the organization.
�r�ti�.»�►�r�=rz�r. . _ . .__ . . _ .__ _ .
1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.09 SEQUENCING
A. Perform testing in the following sequence:
1. Perform routine tests as the equipment is installed including:
a. Insulation resistance tests.
b. Continuity tests.
c. Rotational tests.
2. Adjusting and preliminary calibration.
3. Acceptance tests.
4. Demonstration.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_16950-3 8235A10
� puuJ/CarollolDocuments�ClienHWNRentonB235At0/Specificalionst10.16950
5. Commissioning and startup.
1.10 S NOT USED)
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.12 CVCT�M CTApT11D {NOT USED)
1.13 ' (NOT USED)
1.14 COMMISSIONING
A. Commissioning and startup, as described in the Specifications, shall not begin until
acceptance testing is complete, and operation has been demonstrated to the
satisfaction of the ENGINEER.
B. Commissioning shall only be attempted as a function of normal operation in which
process flows and levels are routine and equipment operates automatically in
resp�^�� t� fl��r a;,d ;�ve1 para�eter� �r e�riipu�er command, as appiicabie:
1_ Simulation of process parameters will be considered only upon receipt of a
written request by the CONTRACTOR.
C. Record all motor currents during normal operation.
D. Record the indications of all power meters every half-hour duririg commissioning.
1.15 �.^��:-��,-��^ ��� (NOT USED)
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16950-4 8235A10
pw://Carollo/Documents/CdentIWAlRenton/8235A t O/Specificabonsl10.16950
��
�
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 �AAAl11CA!'TII�Ct7C �NOT USED�
2.02 NOT USED)
2.03 �"^T��'^' � (NOT USED)
� 2.04 ""^��� ��nrr� �Q�n � ���rc �NOT USED)
� 2.05 �n� ���n"�"�T �NOT USED)
2.06 (NOT USED)
' 2.07 (NOT USED)
2.08 ��X€�(NOT USED)
� 2.09 NOT USED)
� ?_�n ��P�E��;Nn�-i�cFn�
?� � cn� iRr� n� ie� rry �n�iron�
. ..�.....-.�. . . ..�... . ....�
�
�
i
�
�
�J
�
�
A. General:
1. Test instrument calibration:
a. Utilize a testing laboratory with a calibration program which maintains all
applicable test instrumentation within rated accuracy.
b. The accuracy shall be traceable to the National Bureau of Standards in an
unbroken chain.
c. Calibrate instruments in accordance with the following frequency
schedule_
1) Field instruments - 6 months maximum.
2) Laboratory instruments - 12 months maximum.
3) Leased specialty equipment where the accuracy is guaranteed by the
lessor (such as Doble) - 12 months maximum.
d. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment.
e. Maintain an up-tadate instrument calibration record for each test
instrument:
1) The records shall show the date and results of each calibration or
test.
f. Maintain an up-to-date instrument calibration instruction and procedure for
each test instrument.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 �Y�������T���� (NOT USED)
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Do not begin testing until the following conditions have been met:
1. All instruments required are available and in proper operating condition.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16950-5
pwl/Carollo/DocumentslClienUWAlFtentonl8235At OlSpecifirations110.16950
8235A10
2_
3.
4.
5.
All required dispensable materials such as solvents, rags, and brushes are
available.
All equipment handling devices such as cranes, vehicles, chain falls and other
lifting equipment are available or scheduled.
All instruction books, calibration curves, or other printed material to cover the
electrical devices are available.
Data sheets to record all test results are available.
3.03 ���cTn� i n�r�n� �NOT USED)
3.04 �Q�rTin�i� IAICTAI 1 nTinn�� ADDI 1�`ATIlIAI� !`(11UCTG11!`TI�IAI �NOT USED�
3.05 ��on�QiQ�cTnQnT�n�i �NOT USED)
3.06 ��-tA1CTAI 1 n-r�nn� �NOT USED)
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Cables, 600 volts and less:
1_ Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Cv�i�paic cauie uaia wiih the Cravvii��s anci SNe�iii,�,tiors.
b. Inspect exposed sections of cables for physical damage and correct
connection in accordance with the Drawings_
c. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the
following methods:
1) Use of low resistance ohmmeter.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by the
calibrated torque wrench method:
a) Refer to manufacture�s instructions for proper foot-pound levels
or NETA ATS tables.
�
3
3) Thermographic survey_
d. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and
indentation.
e. Inspect for correct identification and arrangements.
f. Inspect jacket insulation and condition.
Electrical Tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with low-
resistance ohmmeter.
b. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each conductor with respect to
ground and adjacent conductors:
1) Applied voltage shall be:
a) 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable.
b) 1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable.
2) Test duration shall be one minute.
c. Perform continuity tests to ensure correct cable connection.
d. Verify uniform resistance of parallel conductors.
Test Values:
a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar
connections:
1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted
connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16950-6 8235A10
pwJlCarollolDocuments�ClienU4VAIRentonl8235A 1015peafications110.16950
��
�
L_J
�
�
�
�
�
�
L�
�
�
�
b. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's pubiished
data_
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer's
published data.
c. Results of the thermographic survey shall be in accordance with NETA
ATS requirements.
d. Insulation resistance values shall be in accordance with manufactu�er's
published data:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer's
published data.
2) Investigate values of insulation resistance less than the allowable
minimum.
e. Cables shall exhibit continuity.
f. Investigate deviations in resistance between parallel conductors.
B. Grounding Systems:
1. Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Inspect ground system for compliance with the Drawings, Specifications,
and the National Electrical Code.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the
following methods:
1) Use of low resistance ohmmeter. �
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by
calibrated torque wrench method:
a) Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper foot-pound levels
or NETA ATS tables.
d. Inspect anchorage.
2. Electncal tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through botted connections with a low-
resistance ohmmeter.
b. Perform fall of potential test or altemative test in accordance with
ANSI/IEEE Standard 81 on the main grounding electrode or system.
c. Perform point-to-point tests to determine the resistance between the main
grounding system and all major electrical equipment frames, the system
neutral and any derived neutral points.
3. Test values:
a. Grounding system electrical and mechanical connections shall be free of
corros�on.
b. Corrzpare bolted connection resistance vafues to values of similar
connections:
1} Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted
connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value_
c. Bolt torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published
data=
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer's
published data.
d. The resistance between the main grounding electrode and ground shall
be no greater than 5 ohms for commercial or industrial systems and 1
ohm or less for generating or transmission station grounds unless
otherwise specified by the ENGINEER.
e. Investigate poinf-ta-point resistance values that exceed 0.5 ohm.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16950-7
pwl/Carollo/Documents�Clien WVAIRentonl8235At 015peaficationsll0. 7 6950
8235A10
C. Rotating Machinery:
1_ Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate information with the Drawings and
Specifications.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition_
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding_
d_ Inspect air baffles, filter media, cooling fans, slip rings, brushes, and brush
rigging.
e. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the
following methods:
1) Use of low resistance ohmmeter.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by
calibrated torque wrench method:
a) Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper foot-pound levels
or NETA ATS tables.
b) Thermographic survey.
f. Perform special tests such as gap spacing and machine alignment if
applicable.
g_ Verify correct application of appropriate lubrication and lubrication
systems.
h. Verify that resistance temperature detector (RTD) circuits conform to the
Drawings.
2. Electrical tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a �ow
resistance ohmmeter.
b_ Perform insulation resistance test in accordance with ANSI/IEEE 43:
1) On motors 200 HP and smaller, test duration shall be 1 minute.
Calculate dielectric absorption ratio.
2) On motors larger than 200 HP, test duration shall be 10 minutes.
Calculate polarization index_
c. Perform dc dielectric withstand voltage tests on machines rated at 2300
volts and greater in accordance with ANSI/IEEE Standard 95.
d_ Perform phase-to-phase stator resistance test on machines rated at 2300
volts and greater.
e. Perform insulation resistance test on insulated bearings in accordance
with manufacturer's published data.
f. Test surge protection devices as specified herein.
g. Test motor starter as specified herein_
h. Perform resistance tests on resistance temperature detector (RTD)
circuits.
i. Verify operation of motor space heater_
j. PerForm a rotation test to ensure correct shaft rotation.
k_ Measure running current and evaluate relative to load conditions and
nameplate full-load amperes.
3. Test Values:
a. Inspection_
1) Air baffles shall be clean and installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's published data.
2) Filter media shall be clean and installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's published data_
3) Cooling fans shall operate_
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16950-8 8235A10
pw://Carollo/Documents�Clien WVAlF2enton/8235At OlSpeaficabortstt 0.16950
��
J
i
�
�
�
�
�
�
L�
�
�
�
�
c.
�
P.
�
h
1•
k.
m.
n.
o.
�
4) Slip ring alignment shall be within manufacturer's pubiished
tolerances.
5) Brush alignment shall be within manufacturer's published tolerances.
6) Brush rigging shall be within manufacturer's published tolerances.
Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar
connections:
1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted
connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
Bolt-torque levefs shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published
data:
1) , Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer's
published data.
Results of the thermographic survey shall be in accordance with NETA
ATS requirements.
Air-gap spacir.� and machins a!ignment shall bs 6n ?ccordance �Nith
manufacturer's published data.
The dielectric absorption ratio or polarization index shall not be less that
1.0. The recommended minimum insulation (IR, m;�) test results in
megohms shall be corrected to 40 degrees Celsius and read as follows:
1) IR, m;� = 100 megohms for dc armature and ac windings with form-
wound coils above 1 KV
21 IR; m;� = 5 megohms for machines and random-wound stator coils
and form-wound coils rated below 1 kV.
Note: Dielectric withstand voltage and surge comparison tests shall not be
pertormed on machines having lower values than those indicated above.
If no evidence of distress or insulation failure is observed by the end of the
total time of voltage application during the dielectric withstand test, the
test specimen is considered to have passed the test.
Investigate phase-to-phase stator resistance values that deviate by more
than 10 percent.
Power factor or dissipation factor values shall be compared to
manufacturer's published data:
1) In the absence of manufacturer's published data compare values of
similar machines.
Tip-up values shall indicate no significant increase in power factor_
If no evidence of distress, insulation failure or waveform nesting is
observed by the end of the total time of voltage application during the
surge companson test, the test specimen is considered to have passed
the test.
Bearing insulation resistance measurements shall be within
manufacturer's published tolerances:
1) In the absence of manufacturer's published data compare values of
similar machines.
Test results of surge protection devices shall be as specified herein.
Test results of motor starter equipment shall be as specified herein.
RTD circuits shall conform to the design intent and machine protection
device manufacturer's published data.
Heaters shall be operational.
Vibration amplitudes shall not exceed values in NETA ATS tables:
1) If values exceed those in the NETA ATS tables, perform a complete
vibration analysis.
Machine rotation should match required rotation of connected load.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16950-9
pw:/ICa rol lolDocumenisfClientlWA/Renton/8235A 10/Specifications110.16950
8235A10
s. Running phase-to-phase voitages shouid be within 1.0 percent. Running
currents shall be balanced and proportional to load�condition and
nameplate data.
3.08 CLEANING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. After the acceptance tests have been completed, dispose of all testing
expendables, vacuum all cabinets, and sweep clean all surrounding areas.
3.09 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
3.10 PROTECTION
A_ Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
3.11 SCHEDULES
A. At least 30 days before commencement of the acceptance tests, submit the
manufacturer's complete fietd testing procedures to the ENGINEER and to the
testing laboratory, complete with expected test results and tolerances for alt
equipment to be tested.
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.16950-10 8235A10
pwl/Carollo/DocumentslClien WVA/Renton/8235A10/Specifica6ons110.16950
:�
�
�
�
�
L�
�
�
�
�
SUB-SECTION 10.17050
PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
SYSTEMS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: -
1. General requirements appiicabie to all Process Control and instrumentation
Work. .
2. General requirements for process control and instrumentation submittals.
3. As specified in this Sub-Section, PLC programming and SCADA HMI software
configuration will be provided by the OWNER.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
bindir�g as i� caiiea idr �y aii.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
'viiork ofi suqconiraciors, suppiiers, and other individuals or entities performing
or fumistiing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
a. Items involving electrical, controt, and instrumentation construction may
be indicated on the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that do not
apply specifically to electrical, control and instrumentation systems_
C. fnterfaces to equipment, instruments, and other components:
1. The Drawings, Specifications, and overatl design are based on preliminary
information furnished by various equipment manufacturers, which identify a
minimum scope of supply from the manufacturers. This information pertains to,
but is not limited to, instruments, control devices, electrical equipment,
packaged mechanical systems, and control equipment provided with
mechanical systems.
2. Pro�ide all material and labor needed to install the actual equipment furnished,
include all costs to add any additional instruments, wiring, control system
inputs/outputs, controts, interlocks, electrical hardware etc., which may be
necessary to make a complete, functional installation based on the actual
equipment furnished:
a. Make all changes necessary to meet the manufacturer's wiring
requirements.
3. Submit all such changes and additions to the ENGINEER for acceptance.
4. Review the complete set of Drawings and Specifications in order to ensure
that all items related to the instrumentation and control systems are completely
accounted for. Include any items that appear on Drawings or in Specifications
from another discipline in the scope of Work:
a. If a conflict between Drawings and Specifications is discovered, refer
conflict to the ENGINEER as soon as possible for resolution.
5. Loop drawings:
a. Provide complete loop drawings for all systems, including packaged
equipment furnished as part of a vendor furnished package.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.1705Q-1
pw:l/Carolto/DocumentslClien UWAlf2enton/8235810/Specificationsl10.17050
: : �
D. All instrumentation, and control equipment and systems for the entire project to
comply with the requirements specified in the Instrumentation and Control
Specifications, whether referenced in the individual Equipment Specifications or not:
1. The requirements of the Instrumentation and Control Specifications apply to all
Instrumentation and Control Work specified in other Specifications, including
HVAC controls, packaged mechanical systems, LCPs, VCPs, etc.
2_ Inform all vendors supplying instrumentation, control systems, panels, and/or
equipment of the requirements of the Instrumentation and Control
Specifications.
3. The OWNER is not responsible for any additional costs due to the failure of
the CONTRACTOR to notify all subcontractors and suppliers of the
Instrumentation and Control Specifications' requirements.
E. Contract Documents:
1. General:
a. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary and are to be used
together in order to fully describe the Work.
2. Contract Drawings:
a. The Instrumentation and Control Drawings show in a diagrammatic
manner, the desired locations, and arrangements of the components of
the Instrumentation Work. Follow the Drawings as closely as possible, use
professiona! judgment and coordinate with the other trades to secure the
best possible installation, use the entire Drawing set for canstruction
purposes.
b. Locations of equipment, control devices, instruments, boxes, panels, etc.
are approximate only, ezercise professional judgment in executing the
Work to ensure the best possible installation:
1) The equipment locations and dimensions indicated on the Drawings
and elevations are approximate. Use the shop drawings to determine
the proper layout, foundation, and pad requirements, etc. for final
installation. Caordinate with all subcontractors to ensure that all
instrumentation and control equipment is compatible with other
equipment and space requirements. Make changes required to
accommodate differences in equipment dimensions.
2) The CONTRACTOR has the freedom to select any of the named
manufacturers as identified in the individual Specifications; however,
the ENGINEER has designed the spatial equipment layout based
upon a single manufacturer and has not confirmed that every named
manufacturer's equipment fits in the allotted space. It is the
CONTRACTOR's responsibility to ensure that the equipment being
furnished fits within the defined space.
c. Installation details:
1) The Contract Drawings include installation details showing means
and methods for installing instrumentation and control equipment.
For cases where typical details are not provided or compatible with
an installed location, develop installation details that are necessary
for completing the Work, and submit these details for review by the
ENGINEER.
d_ Schematic diagrams:
1) All controls are shown de-energized.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.1705Q-2 8235B10
pw:llCarollo/DocumentslqienU WAR2entonB2356101Specfica 6ons/10.17050
j
J
;__l
�
2) Schematic diagrams show control function only. incorporate other
necessary functions for proper operation and protection of the
system. �
3) Add slave relays, where required, to provide all necessary contacts
for the control system or where needed to function as interposing
relays for control voltage coordination, equipment coordination, or
control system voltage dr.op considerations.
4) Mount all devices shown on motor controller schematic diagrams in
the controller compartment enclosure, unless otherwise noted or
indicated.
5) Control schematics are to be used as a guide in conjunction with the
descriptive operating sequences indicated on the Drawings or in the
Specifications. Combine all information and furnish a coordinated
and fully functional control system.
F_ Altemates/Alternatives:
1_ Substitute item provisions as specified in Special Provisions.
G. Changes and change orders:
1. As specified in Special Provisions.
1.02 REFERENCES
� A. Code compliance:
1. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. The
� latest edition accepted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction of referenced
� publications in effect at the time of Bid governs.
2. The following codes and standards are hereby incorporated into this Sub-
Section:
a. American National Standards Insiitute (ANSI):
� 1) B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
b. American Petroleum Institute (API):
1) RP551 - Process Measurement Instrumentation.
2) RP552 - Transmission Systems.
_ 3) RP553 - Refinery Control Valves.
4) RP554 - Process Instrumentation and Control.
5) RP555 - Process Analyzers.
6) RP556 - Fired Heaters & Steam Generators.
7) RP557 - Guide to Advanced Control Systems.
� c_ ASTM International (ASTM):
1) A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service.
� d. FM Global (FM).
e. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
f. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
g. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA).
� h_ International Organization for Standardization (IS�):
1) 9001 - Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in
Design/Development, Production, Installation and Servicing.
� i_ International Society of Automation (ISA):
1) 5.1 - Instrumentation Symbols and Identification.
2) 5.2 - Binary Logic Diagrams for Process Operations.
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-3 8235B10
pw://CarollolDocumentslClienUWAlf2entonl8235B 10/SpecificaUonsl10.17050
3) 5.3 - Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control/Shared Display
Instrumentation, Logic, and Computer Systems.
4) 5.4 - instrument Loop Diagrams.
5) 5.5 - Graphic Symbols for Process Displays.
6) 7.00.01 - Quality Standard for Instrument Air.
7) RP - 12.4 - Pressurized Enclosures.
8) 18_1 - Annunciator Sequences and Specifications.
9) 20 - Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control
Instruments, Primary Elements, and Control Valves.
10) TR20.00.01 - Specification Forms for Process Measurement and
Control Instruments Part 1: General Considerations Updated with 27
New Specfication Forms in 2004-2005.
11) 50.00.01 - Compatibility of Analog Signals for Electric Industrial
Process Instruments.
12) 51.1 - proce�s Instrumentation Terminology.
13) RP60.3 - Human Engineering for Control Centers.
14) 71.01 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and
Control Systems: Temperature and Humidity.
15) 71.02 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and
Control Systems: Power.
16) 71.03 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and
Control Systems: Mechanical fnfluences.
17) 71.04 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and
Control Systems: Airborne Contaminants_
j. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA}: ,
1) 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum).
k. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1) 70 - National Electric Code (NEC).
2) 496 - Purged and Pressurized Enclosures for Electrical Equipment,
where applicable.
3) 820 - Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and
Collection Facilities.
I. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1) 508 - Industrial Control Equipment.
6. Compliance with Laws and Regulations:
1_ As specified in Special Provisions.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms and other electrical and instrumentation considerations as set
forth by:
1 _ FM.
2. I EC.
3. IEEE.
4_ ISA.
5. ISO.
6_ NEC.
7. N ETA.
8_ NFPA.
9_ NIST.
10. UL.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_17050-4 8235B10
pw:l/Carollo/DocumentslCfienUWA/Renton/82358101Specifications/10.17050
�
�
u
�
B. Specific definitions: �
1. Control circuit: Any circuit operating at 120 volts alternating current (VAC) or
direct current (VDC) or less, whose principal purpose is the conveyance of
information (including performing logic) and not the conveyance of energy for
the operation of an electrically powered device.
2. Panel: An instrument support system that may be either a flat surface, a partial
enclosure, or a complete enclosure for instruments and other devices used in
process control systems. Unless otherwise specified or clearly indicated by the
context, the term "panel" in these Contract Documents is interpreted as a
general term, which includes flat surfaces, enclosures, cabinets and consoles.
3. Power circuit: Any circuit operating at 90 volts (AC or DC) or more, whose
principal purpose is the conveyance of energy for the operation of an
electrically powered device.
4. Signal circuit: Any circuit operating at less than 50 VAC or VDC, which
conveys analog information or digital communications information_
5. Digital bus: A communication network, such as Profibus, Foundation Fieldbus,
or DeviceNet, allowing instruments and devices to transmit data, control
functions and diagnostic information.
6. 2-Wire transmitter (loop powered): A transmitter that derives its operating
power supply from the signal transmission circuit and requires no separate
power supply connections. As used in this Sub-Section, two-wire transmitter
refers to a transmitter that provides 4 to 20 milliamqeres current regulation of a
signal in a series circuit with an external 24 VDC driving potential:
a. Fieldbus communications signal or both.
7. Powered transmitters: A transmitter that requires a separate power source
(120 VAC, 240 VAC, etc.) in order for the transmitter to develop its signal. As
used in this Sub-Section, the produced signal may be either a 4 to
20 milliampere current signal, a digital bus communications signal or both.
8. Modifications: Changing, extending, interfacing to, removing or altering an
existing circuit.
C. Acronym definitions:
1. CCS: The SCADA central computer system (CCS) consisting of personal
computers and software. The personal computer-based hardware
and software system that includes the operator interface, data
storage, data retrieval, archiving, alarming, historian, reports,
trending, and other higher level control system software and
functions.
2. DPDT: Double-pole, double-throw.
3. ES: Enterprise system: Computer based communications or data
� sharing system utilized for non-process control functions such as
E-mail, sharing files, creating documents, etc.
4. FAT: Factory acceptance test.
� 5. HART: Highway addressable remote transducer.
6. HOA: Hand-Off-Auto control function that is totally PLC based_ In the
Hand mode, equipment is started or stopped, valves are opened or
� closed through operator direction under the control of the PLC
� soflware. In the Auto mode, equipment is started or stopped and
� valves are opened or closed through a control algorithm within the
PLC software. In the Off mode, the equipment is prohibited from
responding from the PLC control.
j�
Octaber 26, 2010 - FINAL . 10.17050-5 8235B10
� pw:llCamllo/DocumentslClienUWAlRenton/8235B10/Speaficationsl10.17D50
7. HMi:
8. ICSC:
9_ IJB:
10_ I/O:
11. IP:
12. LCP:
13. LAN:
14. LOR:
15: NJB
16_ OIT
17. P&ID:
18. PC=
19. PCIS_
20_ PCM:
21. PJB:
22_ PLC:
23. RIO:
24. RTU:
25_ SCADA
Human machine interface: PLC based operator interface device
consisting of an alphanumeric or graphic display with operator
input functionality. The HMI is typically a flat panel type of display
mounted on the front of a PLC enclosure with either a touch screen
or tactile button interface.
Instrumentation and control system contractor: Subcontractor who
specializes in the design, construction, fabrication, software
development, installation, testing, and commissioning of industrial
instrumentation and control systems.
Instrument junctian boxes: A panel designed with cord sets to
easily remove, replace or relocate instrument signals.
Input/Output.
Internet protocol or ingress protection.
Local control panel: Operator interFace panel that may contain an
HMi, pilot type control devices, operator interFace devices, control
relays, etc. and does not contain a PLC or RIO_
Local area nefinrork: A control or communications network that is
limited to the physical boundaries of the facility.
Local-Off-Remote control function. In the Remote mode, equipment
is started or stopped, and valves are opened or closed through the
PLC based upon the selection of the HOA. In the Local mode,
equipment is started or stopped, valves are opened or closed
based upon hardwired control circuits completely independent of
the PLC with minimum interlocks and permissive conditions. In the
Off mode, the equipment is prohibited from responding to any
control commands.
Network junction box. An enclosure that contains multiple access
points to various networks within the facility_ Networks could be
Ethernet, Ethemet/IP, Fieldbus, RIO etc.
Operator interface terminal: PC-based interface device used for
operator interface with the SCADA system_
Process and instrumentation diagram.
Personal computer_
Process control and instrumentation system: Includes the entire
instrumentation system, the entire control system, and all of the
Work specified in the Instrumentation and Control Specifications
and depicted on the Instrumentation Drawings.
Process control module: An enclosure containing any of the
following devices: PLC, RTU, or RIO.
Power junction box: An enclosure with terminal blocks that
distribute power to multiple instruments.
Programmable logic controller.
Remote I/O device for the PLC consisting of remote i/O racks, or
remote I/O blocks_
Remote telemetry unit: A controller typically consisting of a PLC,
and a means for remote communications. The remote
communications devices typicatly are radios, modems, etc.
Supervisory control and data acquisition system: A general name
for the computerized system that gathers and processes. data from
sensors and applies operational controls to the process equipment_
It includes the PLCs and/or RTUs, HMI PLC-based operator
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-6 8235B10
pw:llCarollolDocumentslClienUWA�RentoN8235610lSpecifica6ons! 10.17050
�
interface units, related interconnecting communications systems,
� and the CCS operator interface and data management system.
26. SPDT: Single-pole, double-throw.
� 27. SPST: Single-pole, single-throw.
28. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.
- 29. VCP: Vendor control panel: Control panels that are furnished with
_ particular equipment by a vendor other than the ICSC. These
� panels may contain PLCs, RIO, OIT, HMI, etc_
30. WAN: Wide area network: A control or communications network that
e�ends beyond the physical boundaries of the facility.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
� A. General requirements:
1. The Work includes everything necessary for and incidental #o executing and
completing the Instrumentation and Control System Work indicated on the
� Drawings and specified in the Speci�cations and reasonably inferable there
from including but not limited to:
a. Preparing hardware submittals for fietd instrumentation.
b. Design, develop, and draft loop drawings, control panel designs, and all
� other drawing submittals specified in the Instrumentation and Control
Specifications.
c. Prepare the test plan, the training plan, and the spare parts submittals.
'� d. Procure all hardware.
e. Provide afl PCIS system hardware.
f. Fabricate panels.
;� g. Modify e�sting panels.
h. Perform factory tests on panels.
i. Perform,bench calibration and verify calibration after installation.
j. Oversee and certify installation of the PCIS system.
� k. Oversee, document, and certify loop testing.
I. Oversee, document, and certify system pre-commissioning.
m. Conduct the performance tests.
� n. Prepare operation and maintenance manuals.
- o. Conduct training dasses_
p. Prepare Record Drawings.
� q. Develop all requisite loop drawings and Record Drawings associated with
equipment provided under the Contract Documents and OWNER
furnished and existing equipment.
r. Resolve signal, power, or functional incompatibilities between the PCIS
,�. and interfacing devices_
s. Perform all required corrective and preventative maintenance.
� 2. It is the intent of these Specifications that the entire electrical power,
instrumentation, and control system be complete and operable. Provide all
necessary material and labor for the complete system from source of power to
� final utilization equipment, including all connections, testing, calibration of all
equipment fumished by others, as well as equipment fumished by the
CONTRACTOR, whether or nat specifically mentioned but which are
� necessary for successful operation.
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_17050-7
pwJ/CarollolDocumentslClienUWAlRentonl8235B t O/Spedficauons170.17050
�
8235B10
3. The OWNER shall provide the configuration and programming for the PLC and
PC based SCADA control system.
4. Coordinate all aspects of the Work between CONTRACTOR and all
subcontractors before bidding to ensure thaf all costs associated with a
complete installation are included. The OWNER is not responsible for any
change orders due to lack of coordination of the Work between the
CONTRACTOR, the ICSC, the other subcontractors or suppliers.
5. Furnish detailed, complete, and thorough operations and maintenance
documentation, including but not limited to operations manuals, maintenance
manuals, as-built wiring drawings, training manuals, as-built software
documentation, and all other documentation required to operate, modify, and
maintain all parts of the PCIS.
6. Revise in a manner as directed by the ENGINEER all I/O and addressing that
the ENGINEER determines to be unacceptable as a result of a lack of
CONTRACTOR coordination between Contract Documents and all suppliers.
7. Defective Work:
a_ As specified in Special Provisions.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. �urnish submittals as specified in and tihis 5ub-Section.
B. General:
1. Instruct all equipment suppliers of submittals and operation and maintenance
manuals of the requirements in this Sub-Section.
2. Fumish the submittals required by each section in the Elecirical Specifications.
3. Adhere to the wiring numbering scheme specified in Sub-Section 10.16075
throughout the Project:
a. Uniquely number each wire.
b. Wire numbers must appear on all Equipment Drawings_
4. Use equipment and instrument tags, as indicated on the Drawings, for all
submittals.
C. Submittal organizatian:
1. First page:
a. Specification Sub-Section reference_
b. Name and telephone number of individual who reviewed submittal before
delivery to ENGINEER.
c. Name and telephone number of individual who is primarily responsible for
the development of the submittal.
d. Place for CONTRACTOR's review stamp and comments.
2. Next pages:
a. Provide confirmation of specification compliance in a tabular form that
individually lists each specification section, paragraph, and sub-
paragraphs and unequivocally states compliance with said requirement or
takes exception to the requirement and lists the reason for said exception
and offers alternative means for compliance.
b. Include a response in writing to each of the ENGINEER's comments or
questions far submittal packages which are re-submitted:
1) In the order that the comments or questions were presented
throughout the submittal.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-8 8235B10
pw:IlCarollo/DocumentslClie nUWAlftentonl8235610lSpecifira 6ons110.17050
��
;�
�
�
2) Referenced by index section and page number on which the
comment appeared.
3) Acceptable responses to ENGINEER's comments are either_
a) ENGINEER's comment or change is accepted and appropriate
changes are made.
b) Explain why comment is not accepted or requested change is
not made.
c) Explain how requirement will be satisfied in lieu of comment or
change requested by ENGINEER.
4) Any re-submittal, which does not contain responses to the
ENGINEER's previous comments shall be returned for Revision and
Re-submittal.
5) No further review by the ENGINEER will be performed until a
response for previous comments has been received.
3. R�maining pagss:
a. Actual submittal data: .
1) Organize submittals in exactly the same order as the items are
referenced, listed, and/or organized in the specification section_
For submittals that cover multiple devices used in difFerent areas
under the same specification section, the submittal for the individual
devices must list the area where the device is intended to be used.
D. Operation and maintenance manuals:
� 1. Furnish the ENGINEER with a complete set of written operation and
maintenance manuals weeks before energization start-up and/or
commissioning_
� 2. Additional operation and maintenance manual requirements:
a. Completely index manuals with a tab for each section:
1) Each section containing applicable data for each piece of equipment,
� system, or topic covered.
2) Assemble manuals using the approved shop drawings, and include,
the following types of data:
a) Complete set of 11-inch by 17-inch drawings of equipment.
� b) Complete set of 11-inch by 17-inch drawings of the control
- system_
c) Complete set of control schematics.
d) Complete parts list for all equipment being provided.
e) Catalog data for all products or equipment furnished.
E. Material and equipment schedules:
�.� 1. Furnish a complete schedule andlor matrix of all materials, equipment,
apparatus, and luminaries that are proposed for use:
� a_ Include sizes, names of manufacturers, catalog numbers, and such other
information required to identify the items.
' F. Schedule of values:
� 1. In addition to completing all items referred to in the schedule of values, Sub-
� Section 10.01292, submit per unit material and labor costs used in developing
� the final bid for the electrical system, for the express purpose of pricing and
cost justification for any proposed change orders. In addition to the items
shown on the schedule of values, provide per unit material and labor costs for
conduit and wire installation for specific types, sizes, and locations as
� .
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-9 8235B10
pw:!/Carollo/Documents�Clien UWAlRenton/8235810lSpecificationsl10.17050
�
indicated on the Drawings and Gonduit Schedule. It is the responsibility of the
electrical subcontractor to prove to the ENGINEER's satisfaction that said per
unit costs were used in the development of the final Bid amount.
G. Roof penetrations:
1. Submit details of all portions of the electrical installation that penetrate the
roof. Include details showing support of the penetrating component, and the
sealing means to be utilized.
H. Installation recommendations:
1. Submit the manufacturer's printed recommendations for installation of
electrical equipment.
Record documents:
1. Provide record documents of all Electrical Drawings.
2. Record Drawing requirements:
a. . Update Record Drawings weekly_
b. Record Drawings must be fully updated as a condition of the monthly
progress payments.
c. Submit Record Drawings upon completion of the Work for final review.
d_ Cleariy and neaiiy show ail changes inciuding ine foliowing:
1) All existing pipe, canduit, wire, instruments or othzr structures
encountered or uncovered during construction.
3. Shop drawings:
a_ Upon completion of the Work, update all shop drawings to indicate the
final as-built configuration of the systems:
1} Provide as-built shop drawings for all electrical equipment on 11-inch
by 17-inch using Bond paper.
2) Provide electronic copies of these documents on CD-ROM disks in
AutoCad Version 2000 by Autodesk and pdf. Size all drawings to be
readable and legible an 11-inch by 17-inch media_
b_ Fumish written information prepared specifically for this Project using .pdf
and printed on 8.5-inch by 11-inch plain bond paper:
1) Provide electronic copies of these documents on CD-ROM disks.
4. Review and corrections:
a. Correct any record documents or other documents found to be
incomplete, not accurate, of poor quality, or containing errors.
b. Promptly correct and re-submit record documents retumed for correction.
5. Additional requiremerits for acceptance test reports are specified in Sub-
Section 10.16950.
J. Calculations:
1. Where required by specific Electricat Specifications:
a_ Because these calculations are being provided by a registered
professional engineer, they will be reviewed for form, format, and content
but will not be reviewed for accuracy and calculation means.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacture instruments at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO 9001.
1. Determination of the proposed ICSC qualifications is at the sole discretion of
the ENGINEER.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_17050-10 8235B10
pw:llCarollo/DocumentslClienUWAtRentonB23561 O1Speafications/16.17050
��
�
�
1.07
B. Fumish all equipment listed by and bearing the label of UL or of an independent
testing laboratory acceptable to the ENGINEER and the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store all equipment and materials delivered to the job site in a location that will not
interFere with the construction or the OWNER's operations.
B. Shipping precautions:
1. After completion of shop assembly and successful FAT, pack all equipment,
cabinets, panels, and consoles in protective crates and enclose in heavy-duty
polyethylene envelopes or secured sheeting to provide complete protection
from damage, dust, and moisture.
2. Place dehumidifiers when required, inside the polyethylene coverings.
3. Skid-mount the equipment for final transport.
4. Provide lifting rings for moving without removing protective covering.
5. Display boxed weight on shipping tags together with instructions for unloading,
transporting, storing, and handling at the job site.
�' �. Speciai insiruciions:
1. Securely attach special instructions for proper field handling, storage, and
instailation to each piece of equipment before packaging and shipment.
�,
��
��
�
A_ Site conditions:
1. Provide a PCIS, including all equipment, raceways and any other components
required #or a complete installation that meets the environmental conditions for
the Site as specified in the General Requirements and below.
2. Seismic classification:
a. Provide al! equipment and construction techniques suitable for the seismic
requirements for the site.
3. Wind:
a. Provide all equipment and construction techniques suitable for the site
wind loading criteria_
4. Altitude, temperature and humidity:
�
D_ Tagging:
1. Tag each component andlor instrument to identify its location, instrument tag
number, and function in the system.
2. Firmly attach a permanent tag indelibly machine marked with the instrument
tag number, as given in the tabulation, on each piece of equipment constituting
the PCIS.
3. Tag instruments immediately upon receipt in the field.
4. Prominentty display identification on the outside of the package.
5_ Utilize the Tag and Loop Number identifications shown on the P8�IDs.
E. Delivery and inspection:
1_ Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original container
or packaging with identifying labels intact and legible. Include date of
manufacture on label.
1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-11 8235B10
pwllCarollWDocumentslClient/WAlRenton782358 t 0/Specificationsl10.7 7050
�,
a. Provide all equipment and instrumentation fully rated for continuous
operation at this altitude, temperature and humidity conditions with no
additional derating factors applied.
b_ Provide additional temperature conditioning equipment to maintain all
equipment and instrumentation in non-conditioned spaces or outdoors
subject to these ambient temperatures 10 degrees Fahrenheit above the
minimum operating temperature and 10 degrees Fahrenheit below
maximum operating temperature as determined by the equipment
manufacturer's guidelines:
1) Provide all _power wiring for these devices (e.g., heaters, fans, etc.),
whether or not indicated on the Drawings.
5. Area cfassifications:
a. Furnish enclosures that match the area classifications as specified in Sub-
Section 10.16050 and as indicated on the drawings.
1.09 SEQUENCING
A. Training:
1_ Complete all training before the pre-commissioning phase of the project may
start.
2. Scheaufe "the training sessions a minimum oi 15 aays before the siari aaie ofi
the courses.
3_ Submit training manuals to the ENGINEER a minimum of 10 days before
starting the training session_
4. Within 10 days after the completion of each session, submit the following:
a. A list of all OWNER personnel that attended the session.
b. A copy of the training materials utilized during the lesson with all notes,
diagrams, and comments.
B. Pre-commissioning test:
1_ Commence after acceptance of all training, wire test, calibration tests, and
loop validation tests, and all inspections have demonstrated ttiat the PCIS
complies with all Contract requirements.
2. Acceptance of the PCIS pre-commissioning testing must be provided in writing
by the ENGINEER before the performance testing may begin.
3_ The OWNER shall assist with pre-commissioning testing for PLCs
programmed by the OWNER_
4_ The OWNER shall not be required to be on site until the loop validation tests
are complete for a PLC/RTU and all prerequisites fo� the pre-commissioning
test are completed_
C. Provide all special tools and spare parts, as specified in the Maintenance paragraph
of this Section, before performance testing commences, suitably wrapped and
identified.
D. PerFormance testing:
1. Complete pre-commissioning test a minimum of 5 days before the
performance test.
E. Substantial completion: The following conditions be fulfilled before the PCIS is
considered complete:
1. All submittals have been completed and approved.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-12 8235B10
pwllCarollo/DocumentslClienUWA/f2entonB2358101Speaficafionsl10.17050
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�,
�
2. The PCIS has been calibrated, loop tested and pre-commissioned.
3. The OWNER training has been performed.
4. All required spare parts, expendable supplies, and test equipment have been
delivered to the OWNER.
5. The performance test has been successfully completed.
6. All debris associated with installation of instrumentation has been removed.
7.. All probes, elements, sample lines, transmitters, tubing, and enclosures have
been cleaned and are in like-new condition.
1.10 NOT USED)
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Provide additional warranty as specified in the individual Instrumentation and
Control Specifications.
1.12 SYSTEM START-UP
A. Replace or modify equipment, software, and materials that do not achieve design
requirements after installation in order to attain compliance with the design
re�uiremen'i5:
1_ Following replacement or modification, retest the system and perform
adclitionai testing to place the complete system in satisfactory operation and
obtain compliance acceptance from the ENGINEER.
1.13 ' (NOT USED)
1.14 NOT USED)
1.15 MAIPITENANCE
A_ Before Substantial Completion, perform all maintenance activities required by the
Contract Documents including any calibrations, final adjustments, component
replacements or other routine service required before placing equipment or systems
in service.
1. Furnish all spare parts as required by the Contract Documents.
B. Provide additional spare parts specified in other sections of the Instrumentation and
Control Specifications.
C. Submit all special tools and spare parts, suitably wrapped and identified, before
performance testing commences.
i
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide.similar items from a single manufacturer throughout the PCIS portion of the
Project.
�
B. Allowable manufacturers are specified in individual instrument and equipment
specifications in other sections of the Instrumentation and Control Specifications.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-13 8235B10
� pw:llCarollolDocuments/ClienNNAlRentonl8235B10/SpecificaUons/10.17050
2.02 NOT USED)
2.03 MATERIALS
�
'�
Fumish all materials under this Contract that are new, free from defects, and
standard products produced by manufacturers regulariy engaged in the production
of these devices and that bear all approvals and labels as required by the
Specifications.
Provide materials complying with the applicable industrial standard as specified in
the Contract Documents.
2.04 �AAAl11CA!`TI I�CII I IAIITC �NOT USED�
2.05 �^� ���n"�"�T �NOT USED)
2.06 COMPONENTS
A. Fumish all meters, instruments, and other components that are the most recent freld
proven models marketed by their manufacturers at the time of submittal of the shop
uia�vifiy^S uiiic^SS i,iii2R�JiSc S'32�ii1@u iv �i�aiCii @XiSiii�i� ��^�'�.ii'aiT18^i.
B. Unless otherwise specified, furnish individual instruments that have a minimum
accuracy of ±0.5 percent of full scale and a minimum repeatability of ±025 percent
of full scale.
C. Signal transmission:
1. Analog signals:
a. Furnish analog measurements and control signals that vary in direct linear
proportion to the measured variable, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Fumish electrical analog signals outside control panels that are 4 to
20 milliamperes 24 VDC, except as indicated_
c. Analog signals within enclosures may be 1 to 5 VDC. � �
d. Electrically or optically isolate all analog signals from other signals.
e. All pneumatic signals: 3 to 15 pounds per square inch gauge.
f. Discrete input signal as indicated in the controller hardware specification_
g. Discrete output signals: .
1) Dry contacts or TRIAC outputs (with express written approval by the
ENGINEER) as needed to coordinate with the field device.
2) Provide external terminal block mounted fuse with blown fuse
indication for all discrete outputs.
3) Interposing relays:
a) Provide interposing relays for all discrete outputs.
h. Fumish regulated analog signals that are not affected by changes in
supply voltage or Ioad resistance within the unit's rating.
i. Maintain the total 4 to 20 mi{liamperes loop impedance to 10 percent
below the published value at the loop operating voltage.
j. Where necessary, reduce loop impedance by providing current-to-current
(I/I) isolation amplifiers for signal re-transmission_
D. Discrete circuit configuration:
1. Configure discrete control circuits to fail safe, on loss of continuity or loss of
power.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-14 8235B10
pwllCarollolDocuments/ClienUWAlRenton/823581 O/Specificationslt 0.17050
�
�
2. Alarm contacts: Fail to the alarm condition.
3. Control contacts fail to the inoperative condition unless otherwise indicated on
the Drawings.
E. Grounding:
1. Provide control panels with a signal ground bus, isotated from the power
ground bus:
a. Provide multiple panels in one location with a common point for signal
ground bus connection to ground.
2. Ground single point ground shields and measurement loops at the source
panel external terminals, unless otherwise noted, by bonding to the control
panel signal ground bus.
3. Provide isolating amplifiers within control panels for field equipment
possessing a grounded input or output, except when the panel circuit is
galvanically isolated.
NOT USED)
�AI�€�(NOT USED)
IVU 1 UStL�)
�IAJ�S#€�(NOT USED)
2.07
2.08
L.Uy
2.10
� 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide all equipment that is new, free from defects, and standard products
� produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of these products
that bear all approvals and labels as required by the Specifications.
B. Arrange with all manufacturers of the equipment and fabricators of panels and
� cabinets, to allow the OWNER and ENGINEER to inspect and witness the testing of
the equipment at the site of fabrication:
1. Equipment includes the cabinets, special control systems, flow measuring
devices, and other pertinent systems and devices.
PART 3 EXECUTION
�
�
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Review the existing Site conditions and examine all shop drawings for the various
items of equipment in order to determine exact routing and final terminations for all
wiring and cables.
B. Provide a complete instrumentation and control system:
1_ Install all extra conduits, cables, and interfaces as may be necessary to
provide a complete and operating electrical, and process control and
instrumentation system.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-15
pwJ/CarollolDocuments�Clien NNAlRenton/8235B 101Specifications/t 0.17050
8235B10
3.02 pQ�on�nr�nu �NOT USED)
3.03 _ INSTALLATION
A. Equipment locations indicated on the Drawings may change due to variations in
equipment size or minor changes made by others during construction:
1. Verify all dimensions as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Actual field conditions govern all final installed locations, distances, and
levels.
2. Review all information indicated on the Drawings, including architectural,
structural, mechanical, instrumentation, and the accepted electrical,
instrumentation, and mechanical shop drawings, and coordinate Work as
necessary to adjust to all conditions that arise due to such changes.
3. Make minor changes in location of equipment before rough in, as directed by
the OWNER or ENGINEER.
B. Perform all related Electrical Work in accordance with the applicable sections of the
Electrical Specifications.
C. The PCIS configurations are diagrammatic_
1_ The Iocaiions of equipmeni are approximate uniess dimensioneci.
2_ Where Project conditions require, make reasonable changes in locations and
arrangements.
D. Field instruments installation:
1. Install field instruments as specified in the Contract Documents, ANSI/API 550
and 551, and the manufacturer's instructions.
2_ Mount field instruments so that they can be easily read, readily approached,
and easily serviced, and so they do not restrict access to mechanical
equipment:
a_ Mount field instruments on a pipe stand or local panel, if they are not
directly mounted, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
b. Provide sun shields for all field electronic instruments exposed to direct
sunlight.
3. Make connections from rigid conduit systems to field instruments with PVC
coated flexible conduit:
a. Type of flexible conduit required for the area classification:
1) Area classification as specified in Sub,.-Section 10.16050.
b. Maximum length of 18 inches.
4. Connect field instruments with cable as specified in the Electrical
Specifications, except when the manufacturer requires the use of special
cable, or otherwise specified herein:
a. Special cable applications shall be in accordance with the NEC.
5. Verify the correctness ofi each installation:
a. Polarity of electric power and signal connections.
b. Ensure all process connections are free of leaks.
E. Process sensing lines and air tubing:
1_ Install individual tubes parallel and/or perpendicular to and near the surfaces
from which they are supported.
2. Provide supports for ngid tubing at intervals of not more than 3 feet.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-16 8235B10
pwl/Carollo/DocumenLslGienUVJA/ften ton18235B 101Specfications/10.17050
,�
�
�
��.
�
��
�
�
�
�\
��
L�
�.J
�
�
�
�
3. Slope horizontal runs of instrument tubing at a minimum of 1/16th inch per foot
to allow for draining of any condensate.
4. Bends:
a. Use proper tool_
b. Make bends for parallel lines symmetrical.
c. Make bends without deforming or thinning the walls of the tubing.
5. Square-cut and clean all ends of tubing before being inserted in the fittings.
6. Provide bulkhead fittings at all panels requiring pipe and/or tubing entries.
7. Use stainless steel tubing for all piping hard piped from the air header, unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings or not compatible with the fluids or
atmosphere in the area:
a. Use flexible connections only on moving equipment and under the
constraint that the length shall be less than 1.5 times maximum travel of
the equipment.
F. Conduit, cables, and field wiring:
1. Provide all PCIS equipment cables, and process LAN communication
nefinrorks under the Instrumentation and Control Specifications.
2. Provide terminations and wire identification as specified in the Electrical
Specifications.
3. Protect all wiring from sharp edges and comers.
4. Provide all conduits, fittings, boxes, etc. in accordance with all the
requirements of ihe Electrical Specifications.
G. Equipment tie-downs:
1. Anchor all instruments, control panels, and equipment by methods that comply
with seismic and wind bracing requirements, which apply to the Site.
2. All control panels, VCPs, LCPs, RTUs, PCMs, etc., shall be permanently
mounted and tied down to structures.
H. Instrument tagging:
1. As specified in Sub-Section 10.16075.
2. Provide all field-mounted instruments with nameplates:
a. Nameplates engraved with the instrument's full tag number as indicated
on the Drawings:
1) Affix tags with stainless steel wire fasteners.
3. Provide all back of panel instruments with nameplates:
a. Engraved with the instrumenYs full tag number as indicated on the
Drawings:
4. Provide all front of panel instruments with a nameplate:
a. Engraving to include the instrument's full tag number and service
description.
b. Secure nameplates to the panel with staintess steel screws.
c_ Use an approved adhesive if screws would violate the NEMA or other
ratings of the enclosure.
Cable and conductor termination:
1. Terminate all cables and conductors on terminal blocks.
2. Terminal block enclosures:
a. Suitable for the area classification as specified in Sub-Section 10.16050.
J. Surge protection_
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-17 8235B10
pw:dCarolblDocumentslClientlWAlRenton18235810lSpedGcaUwis110.17050
��
��
E
3.
Provide outdoor field instrument loops with voltage surge protection units
instailed on the instruments_
Individually fuse each 4-20 milliamperes direct current loop with a 1/16 ampere
fuse between power supplies and receiver surge protectors.
Provide voltage surge protection for 4 wire transmitters and analyzers:
a. Protect both power source and signal loop.
3.04 , , , NOT USED)
3.05
3.06
3.07
GCDAIp/DCCTlIOATIlIAI �NOT USED)
o�_���crn� � n-r�n�� �NOT USED)
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection:
1_ Provide any assistance necessary to support inspection activities.
2_ ENGINEER inspections may include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Inspect equipment and materials for physical damage.
b. Inspect installation for compliance with Drawings and Specifications.
c. iri�pect ir�siaiiation far a�siructior�� and aaequaie ciear�nc�s around
equipment.
d. Inspect equipment installation for proper leveling, alignment, anchorage,
and assembly.
e. Inspect equipment nameplate data to verify compliance with design
requirements.
f. Inspect cable terminations.
g. Inspect/witness instrument calibrations/verifications_
B. installation supervision:
1_ Ensure that the entire PCIS is installed in a prope� and satisfactory manner. At
a minimum, the ICSC shall provide the following services:
a. Installation resources:
1) Coordinate with the CONTRACTOR regarding installation
requirements of the Contract Documents_
b. Provide technical assistance to installation personnel by telephone:
1) Furnish installation personnel with at least one copy of the approved
submittals, including all installation details.
c. Periodic inspections during the construction period.
d. A complete check of the completed installation to ensure that it is in
conformance with the requirements of the equipment manufacturer and
the Contract Documents.
e. Field verify accuracy and calibration of all instruments_
3.08 CLEANING
A. Vacuum clean all control panels and enclosures before start-up and again after final
completion of the project.
�
C.
Clean all panel surfaces.
Return to new condition any scratches and/or defects.
��
�
;�
��
�
�
�
�
�,
�
�
��
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-18 8235B10
pw:llCarollo/DocumentslCfienuWAlf2enton182356 t O1Specifica6ons/10.17050
;�
�
��
�
� 3.09
�'
�
'�,
�
�
��
�
�
D. Wipe all instrument faces and enclosures clean.
E. Leave wiring in panels, manholes, boxes, and other locations in a neat, clean, and
organized manner:
1. Neatly coil and label all spare wiring lengths.
2. Shorten, re-terminate, and re-label excessive spare wire and cable lengths, as
determined by the ENGINEER.
F. As s�ecified in other sections of the Contract Documents.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Training:
1. General:
a. Conduct all training at the Project Site unless another location is approved
by the ENGINEER and OWNER:
1) Include instruction on the use of all maintenance equipment and
special tools provided under the Contract.
b. Tailor training classes fo the specific needs of the class participants:
1) Furnish additional sessions if required to accommodate the total
number or personnei iaentified for each course.
2. Training manuals and materials:
a. Fumish training manuals and other materials for training courses.
b. Manuals are to be professionally written to present the course material in
a format that is easy to comprehend.
c. The manuals are to serve as teaching aids during presentation of the
training classes.
d. Manuals are to serve as reference material after the training has been
completed. '
3. Training course requirements:
a. System overview training:
b. Instrumentation training:
1) Furnish training covering all instruments and control panels.
2) Furnish the specified quantity of training, allocated to cover new
instruments and hardwired controls as described herein and
specifically determined in the approved training plan.
3) Train maintenance staff in the use, cleaning, calibration,
maintenance, and troubleshooting of all the instruments furnished
within this Project.
4) Furnish training on the operation of new hardwired controls_
3.10 PROTECTION
�'
A. Protect all Work from damage or degradation until date of Substantial Completion.
�3.11 NOT USED)
,
�f
�
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-19 8235B10
, pwllCarollolDocuments/ClienUWWRentonl823561 OlSpecifica6ons110.17050
October 16, 2010 - FINAL 10_17050-20 8235B10
pw:NCarollolDocumentslGienUWAlHentoN8235B 10/S pecfications/10.17050
SUB-SECTION 10.17201
LEVEL MEASUREMENT - SWITCHES
PART.1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section inciudes requirements for:
1. Displacement Float Level Switch.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities pertorming
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work_
3. The fallowing Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents_
a_ Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
b. Sub-Section 10.17050 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems
General Requirements.
C. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section1-05 and Sub-Section 10.17050.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
B. Examine the complete set of Contract Documents and verify that the instruments
are compatible with the installed conditions including:
1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc.
2. Physical conditions:
a. Installation and mounting requirements.
b. Location within the process.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_17201-1 8235A10
, pwJ/CarollolDocumentslClienUWAlRenton18235AtO/Speafications110.17201
c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are
compatible with the process conditions and physical installation.
C. Notify the ENGINEER if any installation condition does not meet the instrument
manufacturer's recommendations or specifications.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
1.09 MAINTENANCE
A. Rofor t^ SL:�-CS�t:L�!l � Q.'� 7n��-
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Displacement Float Level Switch:
1. Gems Sensors and Controls Series LS-3.
2_ B/W Unifloat.
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Displacement Float Level Switch:
1. General: Float with a permanent magnet encircles a stationary stem. A
hermetically sealed magnetically operated latching reed switch(es) mounted in
the stem:
a. Mercury switches are not acceptable.
2_ Lead Wires: Mounted in flexible waterproof PVC cable from switch to junction
box terminals without splices.
3. Switch:
a_ Single pole single throw (SPST).
4. The number of floats�per level system shall be as shown on the Drawings.
2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 �YAMIAI/�TIfIAI �NOT USED)
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.17201-2 8235A10
pwllCarollo/DocumentslClienUWAlRenronl8235A 101Specficationsl10.17201
�
'
,
,�
�
��
'
'
�
��
�
�
1
,
�
�'
�
i
3.02 DGGDA�ATI(lAI �NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
B. Mount 6 inch above finished floor or as indicated on the drawings.
C. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has
all necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc. for proper
installation of instruments.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions:
i. r`��iiii i'i ia�ivi y �aiiui 8i2d ucVi�BS ii� i,iG iai,ivi y ii II�Cy UU I IUL �ICCt ll IC I`18it�
verification requirements for calibration.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
3.07 DEMONSTRATIOPI AND TRAINING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
3.09 SCHEDULES
A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments.
Provide ail instruments identified in the Contract Documents:
1. Instruments may be shown on the Drawings, in the Specifications or both.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_17201-3 8235A10
� pw:l/CamllolDocuments�ClienUWAlf2enton/8235AtO/Specificalionslt0.17201
�
END OF SUB-SECTION
�
,
��
�
��
'
,
�
,�
�
LJ
1
�
�
�
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.17201-4 8235A10
pw:llCarollo/DocumentslClienWVAlRenton/8235At0ISpecifications(10.17201 �
�
�
�
�
1
�I
,
1
1
i .
'
�
,
i
1
'
'
�
SUB-SECTION 10.17404
PRESSURENACUUM MEASUREMENT - GAUGES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes requirements for:
1. PressureNacuum gauges.
B. Related Sub-Sections: .
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Sectian. i his iisi �ii reiafea Suo-S�ciians is provided for car�venience oniy and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10_01330 - Submittal Procedures.
b. Sub-Section 10.17050 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems
General Requirements.
C. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.17050.
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B40.100 — Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.17050.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sub-Sections 10.01330 and 10.17050.
B. Additional requirements:
1. Product data:
a. Accessories such as diaphragm seals, valve manifold, snubbers, and
pulsation dampeners_
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.17050.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 17404-1 8235A10
� pw:llCarollo/DocumentslClienWYAJRentonl8235A1QlSpecifications110.174(14
�. �
B. Examine the complete set of Contact Documents and verify that the instruments are
compatible with the installed conditions incfuding:
1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc.
2. Physical conditions:
a. Installation and mounting requirements.
b. Location within the process_
c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are
compatible with the process conditions and physical installation.
C. Nofify the ENGINEER if any installation condition does not meet the instrument
manufacturer's recommendations or specifications.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.17050.
1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.17050_
1 .QO YYH�C/� �HIV 1 i
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10_17050.
1.09 MAINTENANCE
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.17050.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Ashcroft:
a_ Maximum pressure less than 10 psi: Model 1188.
b. Maximum pressure greater than or equal to 10 psi: Model 1279.
2. Wka.
3. Ametek U.S. Gauge.
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. General:
1. Pressure gauge assembly shall include pressure sensing element, gauge
case, and dial mechanism.
B. Performance requirements:
1 _ Pressure range:
a_ As specified in the Contract Documents.
2. Accuracy:
a. Grade 2A, as defined by ASME B40.100.
b. ±1.0 percent of span after friction errors are eliminated by tapping or
vibration.
�
,
�
1
'
'
'
1
, ,
1
�
1
'
'
'
'
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 17404-2 8235A10
pw:llCarollo/DocumentslClienUWAlf2entonB235At 01Specficationsl10.17404
�
�
'
'
�
3
c. Maximum aliowable friction inaccuracy: ±1.0 percent of span.
Element:
a. Where the maximum pressure is less than 10 psi, provide socket and
bellows; for all other pressure ranges, employ a Bourdon tube_
b. Socket tips for bellows and Bourdon tube:
1) Materials: Type 316 stainless steel.
c. Overpressure: Minimum 130 percent of maximum range pressure v,rithout
damage to gauge or sensing element_
d. Wetted Materials: 316 stainless steel.
Dial gauge:
a. Dial size: 4-1/2 inches.
b_ Dial case material: Phenolic.
c. Provide safety gauge with rupture disk and blow out back.
d. Dial face: Gasketed shatterproof qlass or polycarbonate.
e. Provide gauge Iocks where possible.
f. Hermetically sealed.
g_ Connection and mounting:
1) Direct mounted and suitable for outdoor installation.
2) 1/2 inch NPT.
3) Connection material: Stainless steel.
h. Pointer: Externally adjustable.
4.
'
'
l� J
'
,
'
'
�
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide a diaphragm seal for each pressure gauge
1. Diaphragm seal and pressure gauge shall be assembled by manufacturer and
shipped as an assembly.
2. All stainless steel construction.
3. 1 inch process connection.
B. Provide means for gauge isolation:
1. Mount valve manifold integrally to the gauge or diaphragm seal.
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.17050.
�
'
,
'
�
�
B. Factory calibrate each pressure gauge at a facility that is traceable to the National
Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).
C. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration
instruments.
PART 3 EKECUTION
3.01 (NOT USED)
3.02 DC?GDAQATIlIAI �NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.17050.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 17404-3 8235A10
, pw:llCardlo/Documents�ClientNVM2enton18235AtO15peaficationsl10.17404
B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanicai system has
all necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc. for proper
installation of instruments.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.17050.
B. Provide manufacturer's services to perform start-up and calibration or verification.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions:
1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field
verification requirements for calibration_
3.06 CLEANING
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.17050.
3.07 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.17050.
B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before
commissioning:
1: Furnish 0.5 hours of OWNER training.
3.08 PROTECTlON
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.17050.
3.09 SCHEDULES
A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments.
Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents:
1. Instruments may be indicated on the Drawings, specified in the Specifications
or both.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 17404-4 8235A10
pw:t/CarollolDocumentslCf ienUVJAlf2enton18235A 10/Specfirationsl10.17d04
,
�
'
'
'
'
�
1
'
'
,
,
'
'
,
,
'
END OF SUB-SECTION
'
October 26, 2Q10 - FINAL 17404-5
' pw:!lCarollolDocuments�CGenUWAlRentonl8235A10lSpedficationsl10.17404
�
8235A10
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
i
�
�
�
�
�
^
�
�
�
�
October 26, 201.0 - FINAL 17404-6 8235A10
pw:/ICarollolDoaunents/ClienUWAlRenton(8235At 0/Specfications110.17404
,
[�
1
�
1
�
'
'
,
�
�
,
�
,
SUB-SECTION 10.17407
PRESSURE MEASUREMENT-SUBMERSIBLE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes requirements for:
1. Submersible pressure transmitters.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contr?ct Documents are comrlPmentary; what is calle� for by o�p �� as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
b. Sub-Section 10.17050 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems
General F2equirements_
C. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents. •
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
' A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 1-05 and Sub-Section 10.17050.
� 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17Q50.
� B. Examine the complete set of Contact Documents and verify that the instruments are
compatible with the installed conditions including:
, 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc.
� 2. Physical conditions:
a_ Installation and mounting requirements.
b. Location within the process.
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.17407-1 8235A10
, pw:UCarollolDocuments/ClienUWA/Renton18235At0/Speaficationsl10.17407
c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are
compatible with the process conditions and physical installation.
C. Notify the ENGINEER if any installation condition does not meet the instrument
manufacturer's recommendations or specifications.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050_
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
1.09 MAINTENANCE
q t�ofo� .o �:;�-S��fi�; ; � n.1705�.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Submersible level measurement with 2-wire integral transmitter:
1. One of the following or equal:
a_ KPS1720.
2.02 MAiVUFACTURED UNITS
A. Submersible level measurement with 2-wire integral transmitter:
1. General:
a. Pressure is measured through a ceramic measuring cell and converted to
linear pressure measurement_
b. Each submersible pressure transmitter system shall inalude:
1) Signal cab►e.
2) Transducer with integral transmitter.
3) Transmitter cable termination box.
2_ Performance requirements:
a. Accuracy:
1) 0.3 percent of range.
b. Repeatability:
1) 0.25 percent of full scale_
c. Rangeability:
1) 3:1.
d. Range:
1) 0-16 feet.
3. Element:
a. Sensor housing shall be 316L stainless steel with ceramic diaphragm.
b. Protective cap shall be polyethylene material.
October 26, 2010 - FtNAL 10_17407-2 8235A10
pw:llCarollolDocumentsl�entlWNRenton/8235A 10ISpeaficationslt 0.17407
,
,
�
,
'
J
�
,
�
�
,
,
,
�
,
�
�
�
c. Slip resistant extension cable with pressure compensation tube with
Teflon filter.
d. Enclosure for transmitter assembly shall be NEMA 4X.
4. Transmitter:
a. Power supply:
1) 24 VDC - 2 wire loop powered.
2) Power consurrmption: 18 VA maximum.
b. Outputs:
1) Isolated 4-20mA DC.
c. Without display.
d. Ambient operating temperature limits of -10 to 70 degrees Celsius
(-14 to 158 degrees Fahrenheit).
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide 316L SS mounting clamps with 304 SS mounting screws_
B. Provide cable clamp and strain relief.
C. Provide computer cable adapter with Windows0 software.
D. Stilling well and mounting bracket.
E. Long life vent filter.
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
B. Factory calibrate each instrument at a facility that is traceable to the National
Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).
C. Provide a real-time computer generated printout of the actual calibration data
indicating apparent and actual levels at 20 percent, 40 percent, 60 percent, 80
percent and 100 percent of the calibrated ranges. Submit to the ENGINEER and
included in the 08�M.
D. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration
instruments.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10_17407-3 8235A10
� pw:/lCarollo/DocumentsJClienWYA/F2entonl8235At01Specifica6onsl10.17407
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 NOT USED)
3.02 ooconon-r�nr.i �NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has
all necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc. for proper
installation of instruments_
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
B. Provide manufacturer's services to perform start-up and calibration or verification_
3.OS AQJ��Tl�:G
A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions:
1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field
verification requirements for calibration_
3.06 CLEANING
A_ Refer to Sub-Section 10.17Q50.
3.07 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
3.09 SCHEDULES
A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments.
Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents:
1. Instruments may be shown on the Drawings, in the Specifications or both.
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.17407-4 8235A10
pw:Il Carollo/Documents/GienUWAlRenton18235A 101S pecificationsl10.17407
�
�
'
,
�
�
�,
I
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
i
�
�
LJ
�
A/E: Carollo Engineers SUBMERSIBLE PRESSURE
INSTRUMEN.TS
Spec. No. Rev.
Contractor: No B Date Re��sion
� �� �-th � .. ���Ri'',���*4,�. A'�'
Pro ect: �~� �� �� ����� � e b��'���� Contract Date
� �;� ��� � � ���,��� � . �+����
Customer: � � ���� ���x��,E �� �
Plant: '� � � ����� �`� � ����.�� � �� � � Req. P.O.
� ��^� �"�� =��` P � ,� .��'���
Locarion: ��. _.� �� .� , � �"
BOM No.: By Chk A
File: .
1 Instrument Ta Number ,,��� �;�LT O1 ���z'�`�, �
� :.,`� � �.. �
G 2 Service �S wa e�?Lift�Siahon`� �; ��
E 3 P&ID � .N:�: �� ��'� ���; ���,
N 4 Fluid T e �;��Raw�NSewa e, `
�.�
5 Fluid S ecific Gra��itv 1 0
�� � � �� � � �-�
G T e � �;� �Subinersible ���
� �-� �� �-:� _�:���
P 7 Measurin Cell Material �.��.Ceratnic,�Dia hra �
R 8 Probe Bodv Material ���.�;�'���3.16 L�SS'�� �"��'� x
O 9 O. Tem . Ranae ";`��`�40�8� det �F�s�� �
B 10 O. Pressure Ran e �' ��, 0`�18 ft���'` ��
� ii vtifer
12 Other
C 13 Style ���� �,���,Ivlf �Sid,N `��"�'
-����
A 14 Si nal Cable Len th �� ��;�As�Re uu-ed:���
B 15 Other
L 16 Other
E 17 Other
18 T e ��� ��������4- ��
� � � � �; ��- �
T 19 O eratina 1Vlode w� :" ConUnuous'����,_, ;
R 20 Enclosure ��;���'�� '�� �
� � �_ .��.��., . �- :��
A 21 Mountin
N 22 Tem erature Ran e
S 23 Mcasurement Ran e ,,;"°���-,� n����=q� ��;:
lb'I 24 Power Su 1 � 24�:UDC��3 �'�'
�S.^^��w^.y��} 43 k��i�i����'
I 25 Accuracy �� s� r 0 3% ofian Ae �_ �:.
T 2G Dis �lav 3 '
�� aa S ��������'� �" d �
��"- .f�� a,� � �. -
T 27 Out ut 4-20 mA
E 28 Calibration..
R 29 Status Relay
30 Manufacturer
31 Model No.
32 Elect. Ent �
33 Other
O 33
P 34
T 35
S 36
Notes:
END OF SUB-SECTION
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 90.17407-5 8235A10
� pw:l/Carollo/DocumentyClienWVAfRerrton18235A10/Specificationslt0.17407
�
October 26, 2010 - FINAL 10.17407-6 8235A10
pw:l/Carollo/Documents/ClienUWAtRenton/8235At OlSpecificationsl10.17407
�
�
�
�
�
.�
►1
r
�
i
�
i
�
t
�
1
i
�
�
0
�
��
STAN DARD P LAN S
•o
�
o•
0
� �
d
r•
a
� o
O
CITY OF RENTON
WESNIEW LIFT STATION UPGRADES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
STANDARD PLANS
The Standard Plans for this project comprise City of Renton and Carollo Standard Plans. The Standard
Plans included are listed below:
City of Renton Standard Ptans
101— CEMENT CONCRETE CURBS
102 — CEMENT CONCRETE SIDEWALK
104 — CEMENT CONCRETE DRIVEWAY ENTRANCE — TYPES C1, C2, C3, AND C-MAX
104.2 — CEMENT CONCRETE ENTPANCES — NOTES AND DETAILS
405 — PIPE BEDDlNG FOR SANITARY SEWERS
HR-05—TYPICAL LONGITUDINAL PATCH AND OVERLAY FOR FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT
HR-23—TYPICALTRANSVERSE PATCH FOR FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT
Carollo Standard Plans
A401— FRP GRATING REBATE AND SEAT
P302 — SLEEVE INSTALLATION THROUGH DRY WALLS AND FLOOR SLABS
P624 — ADJUSTABLE PIPE SUPPORT
P626 — PIPE SUPPORT
P662 — PIPE SUPPORT FOR ONE VERTICAL RISER
P668 — VERTICAL PIPE SWAY BRACE
EM015 — DIRECT BURIED CONDUIT OR CABLE
EM108 — CONDUIT SEAL DAMMING AND POURING DETAIL
EM801— INTRUSION SWITCH MOUNTING DEfAIL
NL103 — LEVEL DETECTOR MOUNTING DETAIL
NP806 — PRESSURE GUAGE DETAIL
pw:\1DocumentslClienflWAU2enton18235A10\Spedfirations\Standard Plans TOC.docx
�
FACE OF CURB 6" CEMENT CONCRETE
1!2" R. � �. R SIDEWALK RAMP
� 6 ��2" OR LANDING
VARIES
5 1/2" 1' FROM p.
6'TOO . . p .
112"R. � 1^R ,' p• .. • p D.
J 12A MAX. 6' �• � �.
/ 'D
- p . TOP OF
, . � 1/2' R ROADWAY •� 1/4" PREMOLDED
• JOINT FI�LER
N p •
� , ° � ° ; CEMENT CONCRETE
• D • D PEDESTRIAN CURB
• � . . • • a � � io
AT SIDEWALK RAMPS AND LANDINGS
1'-6'
� FACE OF ADJACENT CURB
CEMENT CONCRETE 6 ��„
TRAFFIC CURB AND GUTTER
SEE DEPRESSED CURB DETAIL THIS SHEET
, � FACE OF ADJACENT CURB 124 MAX.
6 1/2" TOP OF
FLUSH WffH GUTTER �_ 1" 1/2^ R. ROADWAY
— PAN AT SIDEWAIK 2,
RAMP ENTRANCE � ° ' '
. •' D
1 t1Z MAX. � � 1:Z4 MAX. p.. Dp . D �. �. _
TOP OF p, p p •� �.. . p (O
� I / 1/2" R. � h(UAUWAI' � • ��
�_ �_L� � _ 6.
. . p D
° ' °� � ° DEPRESSED CURB SECTION
I D • D • �
° ' AT RESIDENTIAL �RIVEWAYS ONLY.
FOR COMMERCIAL DRIVEWAYS SEE STD PLAN 104.2
- 1'-6'
DEPRESSED CURB SECTION � FACE OF CURB
� AT SIDEWALK RAMPS 6 �t2�
5 1/2" 1"
� 1/2' R' 1" R.
TOP OF
° � `O ROADWAY
n
� � • D• •
FACE OF ADJACENT CURB
D . .
� D .
� GUTTER SURFACE �
1" R / 8 1!4"
p.. .. D
1 � � ,� � � �
�"R. ,- � o CEMENT CONCRETE
. D ' D . .
� •. � � , • TRAFFIC CURB
D � ' • p .
� •'� D D • D v .
DEPRESSED CURB DETAIL
AT RESIDENTIAL OR COMMERCIAL DRIVEWAYS, AND ALLEYS
1 GENERAL NOTES:
1. See standard plans 102 and 101.1 for curb expansfon aruf conVaction joint spacing.
� 2. Curbs not consVucted to these secUons as dimensioned will not be accepted by the owner.
3. For Depressed Monolithfc Driveway Curb & Gutter Section, see Standard Pian 104.2
1'tY O
� ��� PUBLIC WORKS � S�• PLAN — 101
`` DEPARTMENT CEMENT COIdCRETE CURBS
��NT�$ JUNE 2009
� ,
s-
12'
t/2' R �EVEL t' R
D 4•
a' • o
n
p . • . D
•� .
NOTE: E7(TENDSIDEWAUCTWVNSVERSE
JOINTS TO INCLUDE RAISED EDGE
RAISED EDGE DETAIL
SLOPE ROUNOING
(WHEN SPECIFIED)
SLOPE ROUNDING
(WHEN SPECIFIED) 7
�
VARIES
SIDEWALKMAY BE ADJACENT
TO A WALL (SEE DETPJL)
SIDEWALK
VARIES: 5'-0' MIN.
12' R (fYP.) �
`rl 2% MAX.
ER STRIP
5' - 0'
CURB NOT
INCLUDED
2% MNL _ � IN BID ITEM
CEMENT CONCRETE SIDEWALK
A0.IACENT TO BUFFER STRIP
VARIES
SIDEWALK MAY BE ADJACENT
TO A WALL (SEE DETAIL)
SIDEWALK
VARIES: 5' - 6' MIN.
12' R (1YP.)
2% 2°b MAX.
�" 'a
1!4" PREMOLDED �
JOINT FIl i FR
CEMENT CONCRETE SIDEWALK
ADJACENT TO WRB
CURB NOT
INCLUDED
IN BID ITEM
SIDEWALK
12' R
�/4' PREMOLDED
JOINT FILLER
SIDEWALK ADJACENT TO WALL
DETAIL
0
i/
5i
N SIDEWACK ONLY
�
JT IN BO'TN CURB AND
STD PLAN 101.1)
�•-o•
IN. 6" SIDEWALI(
VARIES 5'- 6" MIN.
a 72" R(TYP.) CURB NOT
���`� P � � INCLUDED
IN BID ITEM
��8 �.'...... ; ..,�..�.
tld'PREMOLDED � � ���:��i���
SEE RNSED �p�M FILLER
EDGE DETAIL
CEMENT CONCRETE SIDEWALK
WITH RAISED EDGE
z _� �i
� f�—
� I
' ;T p �� B. O .
, r p • �T .• a
C� CONTRACTION JOINT
�ni� �o gnoo��o
BROOMED FINISH
4' WIDE, SMOOTH
/% TROWELED PERIMETER
ENT CONCRETE CURB
9 AND GUTTER SHOWt�
INCIUDED IN BID REM � �
�
� ' ' � `!B. � .
v
o . ��TO ,'
• p ' J
FULL-0EPTH � �
PREMOLAED
JOINT FILLER
E� EXPANSION JOINT
'r ��� / n�,� ���;JQINT AND FINISH
�� ���,,�'"'�� DETAIL
NOTE: Access lids or covers will not be permitted in the sidewalk surface. See Std Pian 102.1.
'sY
� � � PUBLIC WORKS CEMENT CONCRETE
„��$ DEPARTMENT SIDEWALK
FN.rO
SBPD. PLAN — 102
MAY 2009
�
RAMP (VARIES)
6' MIN. -15' MAX.
10 LF OF PAVED '
� DRIVEWAY REQUIRED
3!8" EXPANSION JOINT (TYP.)
(SEE STD. PLAN 102)
� !
I
o � �
� � � 1 �
J J
� � �
� � � �
� i I
�
�
�
�
�
i
�
,
�
�
�
RAMP WITH 12H:1V J
SLOPE (TYP.)
3!8" CONTRACTION JOIfYT (TYP.)
I_
RAMP (VARIES)
6' MIN. - 1S MAX
CEMENT
CONCRETE
SIDEWALK
2
�
❑
�
�
SEE NOTE 7� � CEMENT CONCRETE
{ B � CURB & GUTTER
�� (SEE NOTE 3)
(SEE STD. PLAN 102) J P�AN VIEW
(TYPE C3 SHOWN, C1 8� C2 8 GMAX SIMILAR)
(SEE NnTF o!
RAMP (VARIES) VARIES: 20' MIN. RAMP (VARIES)
6' MIN. - 15 MAX. (SEE NOTE � 6' MIN. - 15' MAX.
a J�
SEE NOTE 8 (TYP).
"v
.r
� 10" MIN. 10" MIN.
10" MIN.
� CEMENT CONCRETE 3/8" EXPANSION JOINT (TYP.)
SIDEWALK (SEE STD. PLAN 102)
SECTION AO
.��„ R �-n,P � SIDEWALK WIDTH
VARI_E �S
� 2% MAX.
? � �.�Y.
10" MIN. ��
DRIVEWAY
SEE DETAIL ON STD PLAN 1042
��0�
�e ���
SECTION OB �\0�2����� ,��;
. ��\��o Q-��� '
��G ���� '�4j
�
� t --. �
10 LF OF PAVED
DRIVEWAY REQUIRED
CEMENT
CONCREfE —
SIDEWALK � /
1'tY O
� � { PUBLIC ti'VORKS
��NT�$ DEPARTMENT
SHEET 104.2)
TYPE C2 - ISOMETRIC VIEW
(30' WIDE COMMERCIAL)
CEMENT CONCRETE DRIVEWAY
EIdTRANCE - TYPES C1, C2,
C3, and C-Md►X
BID ITEM (INCLUDES SIDEWALK F
VARIES: 20' MIN. (SEE NOTE
CEMENT CONCRETE
CURB & GUTTER
(SEE NOTE 3)
For NOTES see sheet 104.2
STD. PLAN — 104
MAY 2009
o�
5�
�O�o���
2����-�P ��`�� •\y
�o
��4 Q��� '��'
�
�=� �
10 LF OF PAVED
DRIVEWAY REQUIRED
CEMENT
CONCRETE
SIDEWALK � /
/ � w' ,,�u ,
�.. .,. .,�/
\�,��� �
THIS SHEEn
TYPE C26 — ISOMETRIC VIEW
(30' WIDE COMMERCIAL, WITH BUFFER)
CEMENT CONCRETE
CURB & GUTTER
(SEE NOTE 3)
0
NOTES
1. When a Type R1 or R1 B(residential) driveway width exceeds 15
feet, construct a full depth expansion joint with 3/8" joirrt filler
along the driveway centerline (see std. plan 102). Construct
expansion joinis parailef wiin iFie cenferiine as required at 15
maximum spacing when driveway widths exceed 30'.
2. See std. plan 102 .for sidewalk details.
3. Curb and gutter shown, other curb designs may be specfied.
See std: plan 101 for curb details.
4. Avoid placing drainage structures, junction boxes or other
obstructions in front of driveway entrances.
5. The engineer will design all driveways to include efevations at all
points marked with symbol "X". All elevations are at the driveway
finished surface.
6. Driveways not constructed as dimensioned will not be accepted
by the owner.
7 a. Width of Type Ci/C1B and alley entrances shall be 20'-0".
Width of Type C2/C26 (2-lane commercial) entrances shall be
30'-0". Width of Type C3/C38 (3-lane commercial) entrances
shall be 38'-0". The expansion joints (see std. plan 102) shall
be spaced as shown in the corresponding isometric view.
b. Maximum width of Type C-MAX or GMAX with Buffer
(Industrial, Warehouse, and Shopping Center uses only) shall
0
FACE OF ADJACENT CURB
GUTTER SURFACE
be 50-0 but shall not exceed 40 /o of the street frontage. The �• R.
expansion joints (see std. ptan 102) shall be spaced as shown °, '.
in the corresponding isometric view. �•, ��'o
��Fi. ;. D � D
8. Slopes shall comply with sections R303.2.1 or R303.22 or •° '° .
' D . . � ' .
R303.2.3 of the Public Rights ofWayAccess Guide (PROWAG). ' D'. '. • p •
• �� � D o
9. Curb returns for any Type C-MAX Driveway may be approved on �
a case-by-case basis. DEPRESSED CURB DETAIL
AT RESIDENTIAL OR COMMERCIAL DRIVEWAYS, AND ALLEYS
Driveway Example: TYPE C1B
i+
R=Resldentfal, C�ommercFal � I
Numf�er of Lanes, �
(MAX=4 Lane Commeraa�
8=8uffer (PlanGng Strip), Blank=No Butfier
'LY
��+ PUBLIC WORKS CEMENT CONCRETE EMTRANCES -
��$ DEPARTMENT NOTES AND DET�.►ILS
t��0
FACE OF CURB
S� O � SEE DEPRESSED CURB DETAIL
CUNTRACTiUN JUirvT ��� ON TH!s guFE7
sTo avw �oz � 5 �n• �" -
o r 12" R TOP OF
/ ROADWAY
fV
�. �� �' s^�r�. `��
7.�e. ��a � � . . . ���� 3,a'��
a. .
, . . ,o-
, : . .. �
• ��_6. �._6.
NOTE DRIVEWAYLONGITUDINALEXPANSION
JOINTS SHALL BE FULL DEPTH
DEPRESSED MONOLITHIC CURB & GUTTER DETAIL
STD. PLAN — 104.2
MAY 2009
�
� _ ........,.. . _._._.._
�
� BEDDING MATERIAL FOR
SANITARY SEWER PIPE
� (SEE NOTE 6) -�
FOUNDATION LEVEL �
i.
� �
�
� N
` 1.
� z-
3.
, 4
1 5.
I :
o.
�
7.
�
.... __.... _......_._.
�
i
� SY
� � + PUBLIC WORKS
O DEPARTMENT
��v1°l
�
� W (SEE NOTE 4)
� LIMITS OF PIPE ZONE �
-�
1'-0"
O.D. OF PIPE
6"
�
BEDDING FOR SANITARY SEWER PIPE
OTES:
PROVIDE UNIFORM SUPPORT UNDER BARREL.
HAND TAMP UNDER HAUNCHES.
COMPACT BEDDING MATERIAL TO 95� MAX. DENSITY EXCEPT DIRECTLY
OVER PIPE. HAND TAMP ONLY.
SEE "EXCAVATION AND PREPARATION OF TRENCH" IN THE SANITARY
SEWER SECTION OF THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRENCH
WIDTH "W" AND TRENCHING OPTIONS. THE PIPE ZONE WILL BE THE
ACTUAL TRENCH WIDTH.
TRENCH BACKFILL SHALL CONFORM TO "BACKFILLING" IN THE SANITARY
SEWER SECTION OF THE STANDARD SPECIFIGATIONS, EXCEPT THAT
ROCKS OR LUMPS LARGER THAN 1" PER FOOT OF PIPE DIAMETER
SHALL NOT BE USED IN THE BACKFILL MATERIAL.
PIPE ZONE MATERIAL SHALL BE "GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR DRAINS" AS
SPECIFIED IN THE AGGREGATES SECTION OF THE STANDARD
SPECIFICATIONS.
PIPE MUST BE ANCHORED IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO ENSURE FLOW
LINE IS MAINTAINED.
STD. PLAN - 405
P1PE BEDDING
FOR SANITAI2Y SEWERS MARCH 2O08
LANE LINE
MARKING
7'-8„
STANDARD VEHICLE WHEEL PATH �
=3��.
MIN.
4.5'
MIN.
-� 3' �-
MIN.
�: .
1' -
MIN.
2" CLASS 'B'
2" SAWCUT AND REMOVE
OR GRIND, SEAL WITH
AR4000W
�.
I
2_5'
MIN.
" � � � � ACP CLASS*
MIN.
� 6" CRUSHED SURFACING
TOP COURSE
EDGE OF PAVEMENT, —
EDGE OF CURB & GUTTER,
OR CENTER OF LANE LINE
CRUSHED ROCK, FLOWABLE FILL
OR AS REQUIRED BY ENGINEER
*MINIMUM ACP CLASS 'E' or 'B' SHALL BE:
PRINCIPAL/MINOR/COLLECTOR ARTERIAL STREETS & INDUSTRIAL
ACCESS STf2EETS — 6" ACP CLASS 'E' or '8'.
RESIDENTIAL ACCESS STREETS — 2" ACP CLASS `E' or 'B'.
NOTE:
UPON REQUEST OF ENGINEER, NEW ROADWAY PAVEMENT
SECTION MAY BE DESIGNED USING AN APPROVED METHOD FOR
DETERMINING PAVEMENT THICKNESS.
TYPICAL LONGTTUDINAL PATCH AND OVERLAY
FOR FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT
ti`S Y p ADOPTED
�-' A "� CiTY OF RENTON
* _ _ � STANDARD PLANS
��1�;To`y IST DATE:02/2005
DWG. NAME: HR-05 SP PAGE: H032
�MIN MIN � MIN � MIN MIN �
2" CLAS
*2" TO 6" C
UR CI
2" CLASS `B'
CRUSHED ROCK, FLOWAE�LL I ILL
OR AS REQUIRED BY ENGINEER
* FOR MINIMUM STANDARDS, SEE DWG# HR-05,
SP PAGE H032
02/2005 MODIFIED NOTES
07/2004 MODIFIED NOTES
EVISION
S*
OF CURB OR
OF PAVEMENT
:ENTER LINE OR
ANE LINE
D SURFACING TOP COURSE
TYPICAL TRANSVERSE PATCH
FOR FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT
1`C Y p ADOPTED
�-'�f CITY OF RENTON
♦ � ♦
STANDARD PLANS
��'1�; •� O� 1ST DATE: 02/2005
DWG. NAME: HR-23 SP PAGE: H032A
� 6.5' MIN. ----1
2" dEPTH OF
GRIND OR SAWCUT AND REMOVE
6.5' MIN.
1' 1' 2.5' 1' 1'
MIN IMW � MIN � MIN MIN
� � /2 n
WOOD BL
AS REQUI
*
�
=z
a~. a
w�
o�
�
0
1 1\I /"11YV1 IVI\J
- • i � , � �
NOTES:
1. FOR FRP GRATING, SEE SPECIFICA710NS.
2. REBATE ANGLE SHALL BE CONTINUOUS AROUND ENTIRE OPENING.
3. REBATE ANGLE SHALL BE 1/4" MINIMUM THICKNESS.
4. REBATE MAY BE EXTRUDED.
5. * DIMENSION AS REQUIRED BY GRATING MANUFACTURER.
A401 FRP GRATING REBATE AND SEAT
,� s
SHEET 1 OF 2 0�-3� —oa
FRP GRATING
�
.--i/sn MAx
', Va
. p _ `
� .
� _a '
n /
_ _ v
a
v _
�
�� ,
1 3/4" —�
SSTL3x2x 1/4
OR AS INDICATED
ON THE DRAWINGS
..�
ii�i�
5/8"� SST CA � 2'-0"
GRATING SEAT
FRP GRATING REBATE AND SEAT
SHEET 2 OF 2 0�-3�—os
s
CONCRETE WALL
OR SLAB
MIN 1 /2" SPACE �
MAX 3/4" SPACE
PACK WITH MORTAR
LINK SE4L
CAULK ALL AROUND � �2„
�
W/ SYNTHETIC RUBBER
SEALJNG COMPOUND �
a
n
��
NOTES:
1. IMMEDIATELY COAT ENDS OF ANY CUT REINFORCEMENT WITH SIKA
ARMATEC 110 EPOCHEM. �
P302
.�.
SLEEVE INSTALLATION THROUGH
NS
WALLS AN D FLOOR SLABS 08-01-05
ADJUSTABLE PIPE SADDLE SUPPORT SCHEDULE
DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
SIZE OF PIPE SIZE PIPE SIZE �, .. "D"
SUPPORTED PIPE "q" "B" � MINIMUM MAXIMUM
2 1 2�K 2 1 2 1 1 2 9 8 13
3 2 1 2 1 1 2 9 8 1 2 13 1 2
3 1 2 2 1 2 1 1/2 9 8 1/2 13 1 2
4 3 2 1 2 9 9 1 2 14
6 3 2 1 2 9 10 1 2 15 1 2
8 3 2 1 2 9 11 1 2 16 1 2
10 3 2 1/2 9 13 1/2 18 1/2
12 3 2 1/2 9 15` 19 1/2
� 14 4 3 11 16 1/2 20 1/2
16 4 3 11 17 1 2 22 1 2
18 6 3 1/2 13 1 2 19 1 2 24
20 6 3 1 2 � 3 � 2 21 25 1 2
24 6 4 i 3 1/2 23 1�2 28 i/2
30 6 4 13 1 2 27 31 1 2
32 6 4 13 1 2 28 1 2 32 1 2
36 6 4 13 1 2 30 1/2 34 1/2
� � .
�
�E CLAMP WITH SUPPORT
ND ALL SHARP CORNERS TO 1/2" RADIUS
SCHEDULE 40 PIPE
GTH AND THREADS TO ALLOW MIN AND �
; DIMENSION SHOWN. USE STRAIGHT THREADS.
SCHEDULE 40 PIPE
4- 3/4"t� SST CONC ANCHORS
THREADED 150 LB REDU�ING FLANGE
1 " NON-SHRINK GROUT
NOTES:
1. ALL MATERIAL SHALL BE STAINLESS
STEEL
2. �k USE 2 1/2" SUPPORTS FOR PIPES
LESS THAN 2 1 /2"�
ADJUSTABLE PIPE SUPPORT
05-16-09
NS
0
1 �� MIN (TYP)
\
��
ROUND ALL SHARP —
EDGES (TYP)
SUPPORT PIPE
�+��`
L 6 x 6 x 1/2. TRIM AS REQD.
BOLT HOLES TO MATCH
RESPECTIVE FLANGE
, 120' MIN FOR 3" PIPE AND SMALLER.
90' MIN FOR 4" PIPE AND LARGER.
A SECTION
PIPE SIZE
»Dn n•»
/1
4 2
6 2 1/2
8 4
A �"D" PIPE � —
I r,Fl I I=� � PIPE FIANGE
1/4
1 1 /2"
�NP� -
�
�
i �
� �
� �
� �
� �
� �
L6x6x 1/2
"A" SCH 40 PIPE
4— 3/4"� SST CONC ANCHORS
PL 3/4" x 10" x 10"
1" NON—SHRINK GROUT
a � _ ,
. ` � � � , �
/ ` a . /I\ ' �
_ � a
� ° h 1� i T a
ELEVATION
NOTE:
1. ALL MATERIAL SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL.
P626 PIPE SUPPORT
.� 0�-3�—os
NS
1/2»� SST CONC
ANCHOR
�
I I I/- PIPE STRAP
� ,
i � �
+ + + +
A ,
i i i
- i �
i
i �
i �
i i i
� � i
PREFORMED CHANNEL
PIPE SUPPORT
ELEVATION
NOTE:
1. ALL MATERIAL SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL.
PIPE SIZE AND MATERIAL
AS INDICATED ON THE
DRAWINGS
P662 PIPE SUPP�RT FOR ONE
. TYP VERTICAL RISER o�-3,-os
A SECTION PLAN
a
a
a
SST PL 1/4" x"D"+ 2" SQ FOR 8" AND
SMALLER PIPE AND 1/2" x"D" + 2" SQ
a FOR 10" AND LARGER PIPE
n" n
��
4
d
PIPE
Mp��3 FB 1 /4 x "D"/2
_ a � MIN f MIN PIPE CLAMP
a-
5/8"� BOLTS
a 1 /4 �I�
Aiinvi i Tv i�i�nLL i�tiTi I T- 1� G�1� JJI l^iV Vl^i %11V1^ifIVRJ
�� �.�. i n�i _ �n4� !'V� �C3e���� �unn� � �':
NASHER
FB 1 /4 x "D"/2
MIN PIPE CLAMP
SST SLEEVE
ANCHORS
,�
NOTE:
1. ALL MATERIAL SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL.
� L"
i MATCH CLAMP
. ., »
P668 VERTICAL PIPE SWAY BRACE
07-31-08
\nP N
i
i
�
�
�
�.
,�
�
;i
�
�.
�
�
��
�.
�
�
� !�
�
3"
FINISHED GRADE
- BACKFILL
DETECTABLE MARKING TAPE
SAND BACKFILL
DIRECT BURIED
�nNn�ii-r
3" (TYP)
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENS�ONS ARE MINIMUM UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED ON THE
DRAWINGS.
2. BACKFILL IN ACCORDANCE WITH WSDOT SPECIFICATIONS.
EM015 DIRECT BURIED CONDUIT OR CABLE
TYP
s
�
HORIZONTAL CONDUIT
SEALING COMPOUND
�
r1�GR rILLCR
SEALING COMPOUND
FIBER FILLER
E:M:1^08 CONDUIT SEAL
nP DAMMING AND POURING DETAIL
s
VERTICAL CONDUIT
� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �
SIDE VIEW
BRACKET
AND 1/4" SSTL
ANCHOR BOLTS
NOTES:
1. MOUNT LIMIT SWITCH ON INTERIOR SIDE OF HATCH, QPPOSITE OF THE
HINGES. WHEN USING WITH DOUBLE HATCHES MOUNT IN THE CENTER OF THE
HATCH FRAME WITH ACTUATION ON LAST HATCH TO CLOSE. CONTRACTOR
TO FIELD VERIFY.
EM801 INTRUSION SWITCH
nP MOUNTING DETAIL
s
FRONT VIEW
NOTES:
1. FIELD VERIFY MOUNTING HEIGHT OF LEVEL
DETECTORS WITH FIELD ENGINEER.
NL103 LEVEL DETECTOR MOUNTING DETAIL
TYP
s
. - p ' v
d . . • ' O � d O• . � 0' ... ' a
' Q .. . d O : p � :
Q , p . . - . d < .d .. .d v.
< •
• A ' d • • • ' • d . � .O � Q •
� p Q• Q. ' Q. � .
� a. A � Q .
�
�,
I j .
� . ..
� .
�' �
1/2" STAINLESS STEEL BALL VALVE
� (NORMALLY CLOSED)
�
FORCE MAIN
� � '.
� �
�
�
�
GLYCERiN FILLED
PRESSURE GAUGE
(0 - 30 psig RANGE)
STAINLESS STEEL
D(APFtRAGNI SEAL
1 /2" TEE
DRiP LEG
�. SEE NOTE i 1/2" STAINLESS STEE� BALL
VALV� (NORMALC.Y OPE�!).
� � 3" LONG X i/2" STAINLESS STEEL
PiPE NIPPLE, TYPICAL.
�
N OTES:
i. 1NSTALL_GAUGE AS SHOWN ON 1/2" QUCTILE fRON PIPE
SADDLE V1t1TH STAINLESS STEEL STRAP.
2. ALL PIPE AND FITTiNGS SHALL BE SCHEDULE 8Q SiA[NLESS
�, STEEL WITF-E 1-F-IREADED ENDS.
3. lNSTALL PRESSURE GAUGE AND DIAPHRAGM SEAL PER
� MA�lUFACTURERS' ftEQUfREMEAETS.
�� �
� . _ --
�: , , . __. � . . .
NP8Q� PRESSURE �AUGE DETA�L
:.-.: .. TYP � . .
�' ' : ..
s
i